PPM Wiki - City of Overland Park Projects and Procedures Manual Pages - User contributions [en]

Pavement Marking Design Manual

2026-08-06T18:30:56Z

Brian Geiger: /* Bicycle Sharrows */ Updated Sharrow guidelines at higher speeds.

== General Purpose of the Design Manual ==
'''Last Revised July 2024''' Pavement Marking Design Manual has been written to serve as a general guideline when designing pavement markings for the City of Overland Park, Kansas. Although there are specific design requirements, the guidelines contained herein should not be a substitute for proper engineering design and judgment based on specific situations. All pavement markings shall comply with the latest adopted edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). The purpose of this Pavement Marking Design Manual is to aid consultants as well as City of Overland Park staff to be consistent in the practice of designing pavement marking plans. It provides an overview of what tasks are expected to be included in the scope of the design; what information should be included on the plan sheets; what kind of backup design information is required; and what is expected for the final deliverable product. Any questions regarding this manual may be directed to Brian Geiger, Supervisory Traffic Engineer Engineer at the City of Overland Park, Kansas at (913) 895-6020 or by email at Brian.Geiger@opkansas.org.

=== Purpose of Pavement Marking: ===
Pavement marking provides guidance and information to the roadway user as well as supplement other traffic control devices such as signs, traffic signals and other markings. Pavement markings can convey regulations, guidance, or warnings.

Wherever applicable, this design manual should be used in conjunction with the latest adopted edition of the [https://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno_11th_Edition.htmManual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)] by the Federal Highway Administration. The current editions of the [https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/building-construction/civil-engineering/construction-standards/ Design and Construction Standards, Volume 2 Construction Specifications (latest edition)], the latest edition of the [https://drive.google.com/file/d/1bIGwfekpRZm8O7R4sHaKTiqxFKb9Wlev/view Pavement Marking Standard Details] and the [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Approved_Materials Approved Materials List], hereafter referred to as “City Standards” should be followed during the design of all pavement marking plans.

== Public or Private Ownership and Maintenance ==
Different policies apply to pavement marking based on the final ownership and maintenance. The two types of pavement markings are 1) those that are installed in the public right-of-way that will be owned and maintained by the City of Overland Park and 2) privately owned pavement markings that are installed on private property that will not be maintained by the City of Overland Park. Although each of the categories will be discussed, the design guidelines contained herein only apply to pavement markings that are within the public right-of-way or other City easements that are owned and maintained by the City of Overland Park.

=== City-Owned and Maintained Pavement Markings ===
All City-owned and maintained pavement markings shall be designed in accordance with the design criteria listed herein and use all pre-approved materials from the City’s [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Approved_Materials Approved Materials List], which is available at City Hall or from the City’s web page. All pavement markings that are being designed in conjunction with the development of any public street or any developments that require modification of any pavement marking within the public right-of-way or other City easements by private consultants working for a developer are required to meet City Standards.

=== Privately Owned and Maintained Pavement Markings ===
A private street as defined, in [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks-gbp/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-199 City Resolution 4065], means a right-of-way which affords principal access to property abutting thereon, which right-of-way is owned, controlled and maintained by persons other than the public, which is named in accordance with the street name designated system on the City map and signed in accordance with Chapter 13.10 of the Overland Park Municipal Code. It is generally owned and maintained by a homes or business association or private citizens. The private streets are designated by a “Private Street” sign at the point of entry and typically have street name signs.

All pavement markings on private property are not required to be constructed using City approved materials. However, pavement markings on the approaches of a private street or drive that tie into City streets shall be designed to conform to these guidelines and the MUTCD. The City may make requests to the owners to maintain private pavement markings from time to time in order to improve visibility, reduce driver confusion, or to coordinate with lane use changes that would affect the traveling public in conjunction with the lane use on adjacent public roadways.

== Functional Roadway Classifications ==
The following pavement marking design criteria will be used for all thoroughfare roadways, super collector roadways, collector roadways and residential roadways as identified on the latest edition of the City of Overland Park [https://drive.google.com/file/d/1VcyyryorZldaO5RUxDfgfW1GhqFVs2Rg/view “Official Street Map”] available from the Planning and Development Services Department.

=== Thoroughfare Roadway ===
The thoroughfare roadway classification includes all thoroughfare roadways whether divided or undivided; whether improved or unimproved; and whether two-lane, four-lane or six-lane excluding auxiliary left and right turn lanes; regardless of the volume of traffic.

=== Collector Roadway ===
The collector roadway classification includes all super-collector and collector roadways regardless of the number of lanes; whether improved or unimproved; regardless of the volume of traffic.

=== Residential Roadway ===
The residential roadway classification includes all local residential and cul-de-sac roadways; whether improved or unimproved; regardless of the volume of traffic.

== Colors of Markings ==
Markings shall be either white or yellow and conform to the standard highway colors.

=== White Pavement Markings ===
White markings, when used for longitudinal lines shall delineate the separation of traffic flows in the same direction or the right-hand edge of the roadway. White markings shall also be used for crosswalk lines, stop lines and pavement marking symbols, with the exception of the symbol of accessibility and interstate route shields, etc.

=== Yellow Pavement Markings ===
Yellow markings, when used for longitudinal lines shall delineate the separation of traffic traveling in opposite directions; the left-hand edge of the roadway or divided street or one-way streets; and the separation of two-way left turn lanes.

== Function, Widths and Classifications of Pavement Markings ==
There are several different types of pavement markings applicable to specific situations. The City of Overland Park has specific design considerations that should be reviewed for each type of pavement marking.

=== Function ===
*A double line indicates maximum or special restrictions and does not allow any crossing of the line.
*A single solid line discourages crossing.
*A broken line indicates a permissive condition
*A dotted line provides guidance or warning of a downstream change in lane function.

=== Widths and Patterns ===
*A normal width line is 4”.
*A wide line is twice the width of a normal line, or 8”.
*A double line consists of two parallel lines separated by a 4” space (measured from edge of line to edge of line).
*A broken line consists of a normal line segment separated by gaps.
*A dotted line is a noticeably shorter line segment separated by shorter gaps than used for a broken line. The width of a dotted line extension shall be the same width of the line it extends.

=== Classification of Markings ===
Markings are either classified as longitudinal, transverse, or symbols.

==== Longitudinal Markings ====
These are lines that generally run parallel to the direction of traffic and include:
#Solid double centerlines
#Broken centerlines
#Solid and broken centerlines
#Broken lane lines
#Solid lane lines
#Broken lane extension lines
#Edge lines
#Solid lane lines
#Lane drop lines
#Bicycle lane lines, etc.

==== Transverse Markings ====
These are lines that generally run perpendicular to or at an angle to the direction of traffic and include:
#Diagonal crosshatch lines
#Chevrons
#Stop lines
#Crosswalk lines
#Roundabout extension edge lines
#Perpendicular or angled parking space lines, etc.

==== Symbol Markings ====
Symbol markings are all other markings that are not considered “lines” but consist of geometric shapes or words. They include:
#Yield lines
#Turn arrows, thru arrows, or combination arrows
#Merge arrows
#Railroad crossing markings
#ONLY markings
#Bicycle lane symbols
#Bicycle lane arrows
#Sharrow markings
#International symbol of accessibility, etc.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#General Purpose of the Design Manual|'''General Purpose''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=General Purpose of the Design Manual]]
|}
----

== Yellow Centerline Markings ==
Yellow centerline markings are used to delineate the separation of traffic lanes that have opposite directions of travel. They are used on thoroughfare roadways, collector roadways, and super collector roadways regardless of the posted speed. Centerline markings are not installed on residential roadways except in specific situations in advance of intersections as addressed below.

The yellow centerline markings, whether broken or solid double lines, should be continuous through residential drive entrances and alleys but should break at intersections with public streets and private streets as defined above. Breaks in the centerline should not be made at single family or multi-family drive entrances. They should also not be broken at intersections with commercial drive entrances unless the main roadway has left or right turn lanes accessing the site or the intersection with the commercial drive is controlled by a traffic signal. Where a horseshoe cds intersects and creates a T-intersection, break the yellow centerline markings at the tangent points and place a dash at the median. If the horseshoe cds is a 4-way intersection, break the yellow centerline markings at the tangent points and do not place a dash at the median.

At breaks in the centerline, the beginning and end of the centerline should be evaluated based on the left turn movement of the design vehicle from the side street. The beginning or end of the line should be at the point where the design vehicle does not drive over the line while making a left turn. This should be determined using turning movement templates for the specific design vehicle.

=== Centerlines on Residential Streets ===
Centerlines are not typically installed on residential streets. However, the following condition would warrant centerline markings near intersections with other streets:
# When a residential street has more than one approach lane to an intersection that is marked with solid white lane markings, a double yellow centerline should be installed in advance of the stop line for a minimum of 50’ or for the length of the solid white lane markings.

=== Centerlines on Collector Streets ===
All two-lane collector streets, regardless of width, shall be striped with a centerline consisting of a 4” wide broken yellow line with a 6’ stripe and an 18’ gap (3:1 ratio). Collector streets that consist of more than two lanes shall be striped with a 4" solid double yellow centerline.

See the section on [[#Transitions from Normal Centerlines|Transitions from Normal Centerlines]] below for treatment of centerlines at intersections.

=== Centerlines on Apartment Streets ===
Apartment streets that are 36’ wide (measured from back of curb to back of curb), that have a posted speed limit of 30 mph, shall have a marked centerline consisting of a 4” wide broken yellow line with a 6’ stripe and an 18’ gap (3:1 ratio).

See the section on [[#Transitions from Normal Centerlines|Transitions from Normal Centerlines]] below for treatment of centerlines at intersections.

=== Centerlines on Commercial and Industrial Streets ===
Commercial streets or industrial streets may range in width from 36’ to 52’ (measured from back of curb to back of curb) to accommodate left or right turn lanes or additional through lanes for added vehicle capacity. Centerlines should consist of 4” wide broken yellow lines with a 6’ stripe and an 18’ gap (3:1 ratio) or 4” solid double yellow lines depending on the number of lanes. Broken yellow centerlines would be used where there are no auxiliary lanes such as right or left turn lanes. Double yellow centerlines should be used at multi-lane cross-sections and may terminate at an intersection with a painted median. Depending on the number of access points, a two-way left turn lane may be provided as approved by the City Engineer. [[#Painted Medians|Painted medians]] and [[#Two-way Left Turn Lanes (TWLTL)|Two-way left turn lanes]] are discussed below.

See the section on [[#Transitions from Normal Centerlines|Transitions from Normal Centerlines]] below for treatment of centerlines at intersections.

=== Centerlines on Super-Collector Roadways ===
Super-collector roadways range from two undivided through lanes that are 36’ wide (back of curb to back of curb), to divided roadways with four through lanes. Centerline pavement markings should either be 4” wide broken yellow line with a 6’ stripe and an 18’ gap (3:1 ratio) or 4” solid double yellow lines depending on the number of lanes. Broken yellow centerlines would be used on two-lane super-collector streets where there are no auxiliary lanes such as right or left turn lanes, while double yellow centerlines should be used at multi-lane cross-sections. Proper transitions between broken centerlines and painted or raised medians should be provided as discussed in [[#Transitions from Normal Centerlines|Transitions from Normal Centerlines]] below. Depending on the number of access points, a two-way left turn lane may be provided as approved by the City Engineer. [[#Two-way Left Turn Lanes (TWLTL)|Two-way left turn lanes]] are discussed below.

=== Centerlines on Thoroughfare Roadways ===
The following guidelines are established for centerline pavement markings on thoroughfare roadways, consisting of divided or undivided roadways and improved or unimproved roadways.
Undivided thoroughfare roadways fall into two categories: 1) unimproved and 2) improved.

Unimproved thoroughfares have two through lanes of traffic that have not been widened. These primarily exist in the southern portions of the City that have been taken over from the County through annexation and where development has not fully occurred to require the roadway to be widened due to increased traffic volumes.

Improved thoroughfares have been widened to provide for at least two lanes of through traffic with shoulders or four to six lanes of through traffic with curb and gutter sections. The two-lane, four-lane or six-lane thoroughfares may be divided or undivided.

==== Centerlines on Divided Thoroughfare Roadways ====
Divided thoroughfare roadways that have a continuous median, except for breaks at approved intersections, do not require centerline pavement markings if the center median consists of raised curbs. When the center median is depressed, the centerline pavement marking should consist of a single 4” solid yellow edge line on each side of the depressed median. The yellow edge line should be installed 4” from the edge of the driving surface to the closest edge of the line.

Thoroughfares with intermittent raised medians shall have a 4” solid double yellow centerline in those sections that do not have a center median. Any time a raised median section is provided, centerline markings are not required. Proper transitions between broken centerlines and painted or raised medians should be provided as discussed in [[#Transitions from Normal Centerlines|Transitions from Normal Centerlines]] below.

==== Centerlines on Undivided, Improved Thoroughfare Roadways ====
Undivided, improved thoroughfare roadways should consist of 4” solid double yellow centerlines. Depending on the number of access points, a two-way left turn lane may be provided as approved by the City Engineer. [[#Two-way Left Turn Lanes (TWLTL)|Two-way left turn lanes]] are discussed below.

==== Centerlines on Undivided, Unimproved Thoroughfare Roadways ====
Undivided, unimproved thoroughfare roadways should always consist of 4” solid double yellow centerlines. Passing is prohibited on these types of roadways.

=== Transitions from Normal Centerlines ===
Transitions often occur from the normally used centerline approaching intersections or raised medians. This can occur with either broken yellow centerlines or double yellow centerlines. The following discussion provides guidance in the design in various applications.

==== Prior to Raised Medians ====
When transitioning from a broken yellow centerline to a raised median, the raised median should be preceded by a double yellow centerline a minimum of 100’ in length unless there is some engineering reason that limits it to less than 100’, e.g. another intersection. This length should be increased if it places the beginning of the double yellow centerline near the blind side of a crest vertical curve.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Centerline Transition at Raised Median.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Centerline Transition at Raised Median
|}

When transitioning from a double yellow centerline to a raised median, the double yellow line should end near the raised nose of the median in order to provide a smooth transition directing traffic away from the median. When the median width, at the widest part, is greater than 6' (measured from the back of curbs), the double yellow centerline should be marked for approaching as well as for departing vehicles.

When the median width, at the widest part, is less than 6' (measured from the back of curbs), the double yellow centerline should be marked for approaching traffic only.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Centerline Transition for Various Median Widths.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Centerline Transition at Raised Median Based on Width
|}

==== Prior to Painted Medians ====
When transitioning from a broken yellow centerline to a painted median, the painted median should be preceded by a double yellow centerline a minimum of 100’ in length unless there is some engineering reason that limits it to less than 100’, e.g. another intersection. This length should be increased if it places the beginning of the double yellow centerline near the blind side of a crest vertical curve.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Painted Medians with Centerline Transition.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Centerline Transition at Painted Median
|}

==== Prior to Stop Controlled Intersections ====
A broken yellow centerline should transition to a double yellow centerline a minimum of 100’ prior to the stop line (or designated stopping point in the absence of a stop line) at an intersection controlled by a stop sign.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Centerline Transition at Intersections.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken Centerline Transition at Stop Controlled Intersection
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Collector-Collector Intersection.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Four-Way Stop at Collector-Collector Intersection
|}

==== Special Situations at Intersections ====
Occasionally, a collector street will turn into a residential street at a two-way stop controlled intersection with another through street segment. The minor collector street leg, which is controlled by a stop sign, will be striped with a broken yellow centerline that transitions to a double yellow centerline 100’ in advance of the stop line. The residential street leg, which is controlled by a stop sign, will not require either a stop line or a centerline.
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Special Situations at Intersectioins.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Special Situations at Intersections
|}

==== Special Situations at Midblock Crosswalks ====
At midblock crosswalks, across roadways with a marked centerline, the broken yellow centerline should transition to a double yellow centerline in advance of the midblock crosswalk for a distance of approximately 50'. A 3' minimum gap should be provided between the double yellow centerline and the marked crosswalk.
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Centerline Transition at midblock crosswalk.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Special Situations at Midblock Crosswalks
|}

=== Painted Medians ===
Painted medians should be used on undivided roadways where it is desirable to provide left turn lanes or separate traffic traveling in opposite directions. For left turn lanes, it is preferable to provide a complete approach taper and a fully shadowed bay taper whenever possible and pavement width permits.

Painted medians also occur in advance of a raised median that has been installed for access control near an intersection approach or in advance of a splitter island of a roundabout.
Painted medians should consist of 4” solid double yellow lines with 12” yellow diagonal crosshatch lines. See [[#Yellow Diagonal Crosshatch Markings|Yellow Diagonal Crosshatch Lines]] for more information.

=== Yellow Solid and Broken Lane Lines ===
==== No-Passing Zone Lines ====
Yellow solid and broken lane lines can be used where crossing the center line markings for passing is permitted for the traffic traveling adjacent to the broken line, but is prohibited for traffic traveling adjacent to the solid line. This centerline marking is typically not used in the City of Overland Park. It requires a passing sight distance study in order to determine where passing is permitted.

==== Two-way Left Turn Lanes (TWLTL) ====
Two-way left turn lanes (TWLTL) should consist of 4” solid yellow lines on each side of the travel lane with six foot long 4” broken yellow lines inset inside of the solid yellow lines with 18’ long gaps. The beginning and end of the broken yellow lines should line up with any adjacent broken white lane lines.

The TWLTL should terminate into a left turn lane. The TWLTL lane markings should not extend to intersections. There should be a 42’ long gap between the end of the broken and solid yellow line and the beginning of the 4” solid white lane line for the left turn storage.
Two sets of white left turn arrows should be placed 25’ apart measured from the tails of both arrows. The spacing of the arrow sets is dependent on the overall length of the TWLTL. Generally, one set is installed 30’ from the beginning, one set 30’ from the end and one set at approximately the midpoint, but the distance between sets of arrows should not exceed 160’.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Two-way Left Turn Lanes.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Two-way Left Turn Lanes
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Yellow Centerline Markings|'''Yellow Centerline Markings''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Yellow Centerline Markings]]
|}
----

== Broken White Lane Lines ==
Broken white lane line markings should be used on all roadways with two or more adjacent traffic lanes that have the same direction of travel. They shall consist of a 4” wide broken white line with a 6’ stripe and an 18’ gap (3:1 ratio).

The beginning point of broken white lane lines between adjacent lanes of travel on a multi-lane street should line up with each other.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Line Up Adjacent Broken White Lane Lines.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Alignment of Adjacent Broken White Lane Lines
|}

Ideally, the beginning of a broken white lane line should also line up with the beginning of any adjacent solid white lane line delineating the storage length for a right or left turn lane. However, broken white lane lines should not extend past the stop line.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Line Up Broken White with Solid White.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Alignment of Broken White Lane Line with Solid White Turn Lane Line
|}

Broken white lane lines should break on each side of a four-legged intersection, comprised of public or private streets, allowing side street traffic to cross without running over the lines. Broken white lane lines should extend through intersections with private and commercial driveways. However, if the main street has a left turn lane into the commercial drive of the development, lane lines should not be marked through the intersection. It would be treated like a standard intersection with public streets.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Gaps in Broken Lane Lines at Intersections.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Gaps in Broken White Lane Lines at Intersections
|}

At tee intersections, the broken white lane lines will continue through the intersection at the top of the tee, but will not extend through the intersection with the lanes closest to the intersecting side street.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Broken White Lane Lines|'''Broken White Lane Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Broken White Lane Lines]]
|}
----

== Broken White Lane Extension Lines ==
Broken white lane extension lines are used for guiding the traveling public through more complex roadway lane configurations such as:
# Offset through lanes
# Skewed intersections
# Curved roadways
# Where multiple turn lanes are present
# At interchanges where there are extended left turn lanes on the thoroughfare street
# Roundabout circulating lanes
# Where accident history indicates a presence of sideswipe type crashes

The broken white extension line shall be 4” wide and 2’ long with a 4’ gap.

=== Offset Through Lanes ===
Depending on the roadway classification and the posted speed, offset through lanes can create situations where white lane extension lines would be beneficial to delineate the travel path of vehicles. Offsets through intersections on a thoroughfare are generally more of a concern than offset through lanes on a collector roadway or a local street. The following gives some guidance on when to install lane extension lines for offset through lanes, but the designer in conjunction with City staff, should use engineering judgment to make the final determination whether to use them or not. Having multiple lines crossing through an intersection can be just as confusing as not having any. Discretion should be used keeping in mind the long term aspects of maintenance, since pavement markings in an intersection are worn down frequently by traveling vehicles.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Lines at Intersections.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Lines at Intersections
|}

When the through traffic lanes on a thoroughfare across an intersection are offset at least one fourth of the width of the lane, white lane extension lines should be considered, especially if the presence of a crest vertical curve near the center of the intersection obstructs the view of the receiving lanes on the opposite side of the intersection. When the offset is one half or more of the width of the lane, the extension lines shall be installed.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Line through Intersections.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Lines Through Intersections
|}

=== Skewed Intersections ===
At skewed intersections, where there is a possibility for the opposing turning traffic to overlap paths, white lane extension lines should be considered to delineate the paths regardless of the number of turn lanes or the number of receiving through lanes.

=== Curved Roadways ===
Where a vehicle, following a curving curb line, could drift into a left turn or right turn lane, a white extension line should be considered to delineate the path of the vehicle.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Line on Curved Roadway.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Lines on Curved Roadway
|}

=== Multiple Left or Right Turn Lanes ===
Broken white lane extension lines are not typically used where the number of turn lanes on the side street is equivalent to the number of receiving through lanes on the major street. For example if two left turn lanes are turning into two through lanes.

They shall be used within an intersection where there are two left turn or two right turn lanes but three or more receiving through lanes. They shall also be used anywhere the number of left turning lanes or right turning lanes is greater than two, regardless of the number of through lanes available for receiving lanes. For example, if a side street has two exclusive left turn lanes and one shared through/left turn lane, the white extension lines shall be installed directing traffic into their respective lanes, even if there are only three through lanes on the main street.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Line at Multiple Turn Lanes.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Line at Multiple Turn Lanes
|}

=== At Interchanges with Extended Left Turn Lanes on the Thoroughfare ===
There are occasions, primarily at interchanges with thoroughfare streets, where there are only two through lanes but the left turn lanes extend upstream of the intersection to increase the storage length. Even though there are only single or dual left turn lanes coming off the ramp and only two receiving through lanes, the broken white lane extension lines should be installed for the ramp traffic so vehicles do not get trapped into the left turn lanes on the thoroughfare.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Line at Interchanges with Extended Left Turn Lanes.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Line at Interchanges with Extended Left Turn Lanes
|}

=== Roundabout Circulating Lanes ===
Lane extension lines should be installed in the circulating lanes at multi-lane roundabouts opposite the points where lanes from the intersecting roadways enter the roundabout. They should extend toward the exit lanes to direct circulating traffic that is exiting the roundabout to the correct receiving lanes.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Line at Roundabouts.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Line at Roundabouts
|}

=== Where Accident Crash History Shows a Need ===
Lane extension lines should be installed where there is a history of side swipe crashes that could be alleviated by providing more guidance to the driver.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Broken White Lane Extension Lines|'''Broken White Lane Extension Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Broken White Lane Extension Lines]]
|}
----

== Wide Dotted Line ==
A wide dotted white line marking shall be used as the lane line to separate a through lane that continues beyond the intersection from an adjacent lane that becomes a mandatory turn lane or across the lane(s) entering a roundabout as follows:

=== Wide Dotted Lane Drop Line ===
Wide dotted lane drop lines are used for lane drops (trap lanes) where an otherwise through traffic lane turns into a mandatory left turn or right turn lane. Where used, the wide dotted lane drop line shall be 8” wide with a 3’ line segment and a 9’ gap. The wide dotted lane drop line will be accompanied by a 8” wide white solid lane line beginning at the downstream end of the white dotted lane drop line to the stop bar (See [[#White Solid Wide Lane Lines|White Solid Wide Lane Lines]]). The length of the dotted lane drop shall be as follows:
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Trap Lane Markings.JPG|1000px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Typical Wide Dotted Lane Drop Lines
|}

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Trap Lane Markings - No restrictions.JPG|1000px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|White Dotted Lane Drop Lines with No Restrictions
|}

==== Length Based on Posted Speed Limit ====
For posted speed limits > 45 mph, the length of the wide dotted lane line shall be based on the merge length equation: L = W x S, where W is the width of the lane and S is the posted speed limit, (mph). For posted speed limits < 45 mph, the length of the wide dotted lane line shall be based on the merge length equation L = (W x ''S''2)/60. Exceptions to this rule are as follows:

==== Spacing Considerations for Closely Spaced Intersections ====
If the calculated length of the wide dotted lane drop line would extend it into or through an upstream four-legged intersection (whether controlled or uncontrolled), it should begin immediately past the upstream intersection instead of using the full calculated length. The lane drop line should begin no closer to the intersection than the most upstream regulatory or warning sign associated with the lane drop. An R3-7 (R or L) sign should be installed approximately 30’ from the curb return at the intersection. An additional R3-7 (R or L) should be installed at the beginning of the 8" solid wide lane line.

The calculated length of the wide dotted lane drop line can extend through a three-legged T-intersection as long as the major street that has the trap lane is divided with a median. In that case, an R3-7R sign will be installed at the beginning of the wide dotted lane drop line with a street name sign plaque mounted underneath to designate where the lane drops.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Trap Lane thru Tee Intersection.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Wide Dotted Lane Drop Lines Thru T-Intersection
|}

In areas where there is not enough room to achieve the full length without extending through an intersection, a balance should be maintained between the lane drop line and the required storage bay length, based on the observed traffic volumes.

=== Wide Dotted Lines at Roundabouts ===
White wide dotted lines should be used across the lane(s) entering a roundabout to mark an extension of the circulatory roadway edge line. They should extend from the splitter island to the exit of the roundabout and be a three foot long, 12” wide line with a three foot gap.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Wide Dotted Roundabout Lines.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Wide Dotted Roundabout Line
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Wide Dotted Line|'''Wide Dotted Line''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Wide Dotted Line]]
|}
----

== Solid White Lane Lines ==
Solid white lane lines are used where drivers are discouraged from changing lanes. The lane line markings shall consist of a 4” wide solid white line. Solid white lane lines are typically used at intersections to separate a through lane from a mandatory left or right turn lane.
=== Single Left or Right Turn Lanes ===
The solid white lane line should extend from the stop line upstream to where the full width of the turn lane begins.
=== Dual Left or Right Turn Lanes ===
In the case of dual left or right turn lanes, the inside line should begin at the point of tangency with the median curb, where the full width of the inside lane is available. The outside line should be extended farther upstream to where the lane opening, measured perpendicular from the median curb to the start of the line is 18’, as shown below.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Solid White Lane Lines.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Solid White Lane Lines for Dual Left Turn Lanes
|}

=== Continuous Right Turn Lane Exceptions ===
Where a right turn lane at an intersection would have one or more driveway entrances within the storage bay, the preferred approach is to break the solid white lane line for the driveway and treat them as separate turn lanes. An R3-7(R) sign should be installed at the driveway.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Solid Lane Line for Continuous Right Turn Lanes.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Solid White Lane Lines for Continuous Right Turn Lanes
|}

If a driveway is located near a signalized intersection such that the distance between the driveway and the intersection does not provide enough storage length, then the solid lane line should be continued through the driveway.

If a driveway occurs at a median break, the lane line should not be carried through the intersection. In the example below, the lane line was continued through the first driveway because the right turn lane was just beginning and not enough storage length was available for the driveway. The R3-7(R) sign was removed for the driveway.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Solid Lane Line Exception for Continuous Right Turn Lanes.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Solid White Lane Line Exception for Continuous Right Turn Lanes
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Solid White Lane Lines|'''Solid White Lane Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Solid White Lane Lines]]
|}
----

== Solid Double White Lane Lines ==
Solid double white lane lines are used to mark where crossing is prohibited or whenever two lanes of traffic, traveling in the same direction, are separated by a painted median. The most common instance of this occurs between a turn lane and a through lane which is separated by a painted island. This normally occurs when an intersection has offset left turn lanes that are separated from the through lanes to give drivers on opposing approaches a less obstructed view of opposing through traffic. They are also used when an intersection is designed for ultimate double left turn lanes, but one lane has been marked out until sometime in the future when it is required based on traffic volumes. The lane line markings shall consist of a 4” wide solid double white lines separated by a 4” space. White 12” chevron should be installed between the two sets of solid double white lane lines. (See [[#White Chevron Markings|White Chevron Markings]]) for more information in regard to spacing.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Double White Lane Lines.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Solid Double White Lane Lines
|}

== White Solid Wide Lane Lines ==
Solid wide channelization lines are used to form islands where traffic traveling in the same direction is permitted on both sides of the island. They should be 8” wide and used to outline around painted or raised medians as follows:

=== At Interchange Ramps ===
Channelizing lines at entrance ramps define the neutral area, directing exiting traffic at the proper angle for smooth divergence onto the ramp. They should be used to outline raised islands or used for painted islands that separate interstate ramp movements from through movements on thoroughfare streets.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Solid Wide Lane Lines Around Island at Ramps.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|White Solid Wide Lane Lines at Interstate Ramp Islands
|}

=== At Free Flow Right Turn Lanes ===
They should also be used to outline the raised medians for free flow right turn lanes on City streets.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Solid Wide Lane Lines Around Islands at Intersections.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|White Solid Wide Lane Lines Around Islands at Intersections
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White Solid Wide Lane Lines|'''White Solid Wide Lane Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White Solid Wide Lane Lines]]
|}
----

== White Edge Lines ==
Edge lines are 4” wide lines that are used to delineate the right or left edges of roadways that have paved or turf shoulders. If they are on the left hand side of the roadway, they shall be yellow. They shall be white if they are on the right hand side of the roadway. Edge lines shall not be continued through intersections or major driveways that consist of turn lanes entering from the major street. But they would extend through minor driveways. They should be placed on rural thoroughfares and collectors with a traveled way of 20’ or more and an average daily traffic (ADT) of 3,000 vehicles per day or greater. If a bicycle lanes is marked on the outside portion of the traveled way, the edge line that would mark the outside edge of the bicycle lane should be omitted.

In the case of turf shoulders, the edge line shall be inset to allow a minimum of 4” from the edge of the asphalt roadway to the edge of the line.

=== Edge Lines on Diverging Diamond Interchanges (DDI’s) ===
Edge lines on diverging diamond interchanges (DDI’s) require clarification. The two directions of travel are separated by either a raised median or bridge rails. This would normally require the edge line separating the two directions of travel to be yellow. However, this violates the rule that yellow lines shall always be on the left hand side of the driver. Therefore, the pavement for the two directions of travel are treated as separate, one-way roadways. Therefore, the edge lines will be yellow on the left side and white on the right side for drivers traveling in each direction.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Edge Lines for DDIs.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Edge Lines for Diverging Diamond Interchanges (DDI's)
|}

=== Edge Lines on Bridges ===
Edge lines should be installed across all bridges, regardless of whether the roadway approaches to the bridge consist of curb and gutter or shoulders. The edge line should be offset from the bridge rail to provide a horizontal buffer space for vehicles and to maintain a constant lane width across the bridge. The solid white edge line across a bridge should be eliminated if a bicycle lane exists. The solid white line on the left side of the bicycle lane will act as the vehicle edge line.

== White Stop Lines ==

Stop lines indicate the point behind which vehicles are required to stop in compliance with a STOP sign. Stop lines may be either 12” wide or 24” wide, and shall be based on the stop sign size as required by the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). If the STOP sign size should be 30”, the stop line should be 12” wide . If the STOP sign size should be 36” or larger, the stop line should be 24” wide. At all-way stop controlled intersections, the stop bars and stop signs shall be the same size on all approach legs and based on the largest sign size required at the intersection according to the MUTCD and Overland Park Stop Sign Guidelines [[Media:Stop sign size flow chart.pdf|flowchart]]. At signalized intersections, the stop line on all approaches should be 24” wide. The following are general guidelines for white stop lines. (Refer to [[#Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage|Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage]]) for specific guidance regarding when to install them.

=== Stop Lines in Conjunction with Crosswalks ===
In general, a stop line should always be installed in advance of a crosswalk on an approach that is controlled by stop sign.

=== Stop Lines for Standard Intersections Without Skew ===
In general, the stop lines should typically be perpendicular to the lane of travel and extend across all lanes as a continuous straight line. Stop lines shall be installed such that they are not located in the vehicle path of left turn movements from the side street approach. This is particularly critical where there is no median separating opposing through lanes. Where raised medians exist, the stop line for the left turn lane should generally be located at the median nose.

The minimum separation from the trailing edge of the stop line to the leading edge of the crosswalk line shall be 4’. If the distance from the crosswalk line or theoretical crosswalk line is greater than 15', consider staggering the stop lines for the through lanes closer to the intersection, to minimize this distance. This occurs when the median nose is pulled back to accommodate left turning vehicles from the side street. Do not stagger the stop line if the distance between the staggered stop line for the left turn lanes and the through lanes would be less than 5’, even if the distance exceeds 15'.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Stop Lines at Intersections without Skew.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Stop Lines at Intersections without Skew
|}

=== Stop Lines for Skewed Intersections ===
In the case of severely skewed intersections, several things should be taken into consideration. The stop line should generally be installed parallel to the crosswalk lines as long as the vehicle position for the farthest right hand lane is closer to the intersection than the left turn vehicle to avoid obscuring the intersection sight distance for right turn vehicles making right turns on red signal indications. Where raised medians exist, the stop line for the left turn lane should generally be located at the median nose. The minimum separation from the trailing edge of the stop line to the leading edge of the crosswalk line shall be 4’. If the distance from the crosswalk line or theoretical crosswalk line is greater than 15', consider staggering the stop lines for the through lanes closer to the intersection, to minimize this distance. This occurs when the median nose is pulled back to accommodate left turning vehicles from the side street. Do not stagger the stop line if the distance between the staggered stop line for the left turn lanes and the through lanes would be less than 5’, even if the distance exceeds 15'. On the other legs, install the stop lines perpendicular to the vehicle path. The distance from the stop line to the crosswalk line for the farthest right vehicle should be 4' minimum. The distance for the remaining lanes is not controlled by a maximum distance.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Stop lines at skewed intersections for sight distance.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Stop Lines at Intersections with Skew
|}

=== Stop Line Location Coordination with Signal Detection Systems ===
When placing stop lines at signalized intersections, care should be taken to determine what method of vehicle detection is being used. If induction loops are currently being used, the stop line should be located such that the first diamond in the loop extends at least half-way past the stop line into the intersection. If video detection or radar detection is currently being used, it is possible to change the detection zones. The engineer should be contacted to determine if a change in the detection zone is required or if a change in the stop line location can be accommodated.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White Stop Lines|'''White Stop Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White Stop Lines]]
|}
----

== White Crosswalk Lines ==
Crosswalk markings provide guidance for pedestrians who are crossing the roadway by defining and delineating paths on approaches to and within signalized intersections, and on approaches to other intersections where traffic stops or yields. Crosswalks help to alert road users of a designated pedestrian crossing point across roadways at locations that are not controlled by traffic control signals or stop or yield signs. At non-intersection locations, crosswalk markings legally establish the crosswalk.

Crosswalk markings are classified as either basic (transverse) or high-visibility. Basic crosswalk markings consist of two transverse lines. High visibility markings, sometimes called a longitudinal bar or a continental crosswalk, consist of longitudinal lines parallel to traffic flow with or without transverse lines. The following are general guidelines for white crosswalk lines. Refer to [[#Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage|Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage]] for specific guidance regarding when to install them.

=== Basic Crosswalk Markings ===
All crosswalk markings in the City of Overland Park will be considered basic crosswalk markings, unless the criteria listed in the table for [[#High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings|high-visibility crosswalk markings]] is met.

Basic crosswalk markings shall consist of two 6" wide white transverse lines extending from curb to curb across the full width of the roadway to be crossed. The gap between the lines should not be less than 6 feet, measured between the inside edges of each of the lines. When the crosswalk extends a 4’ sidewalk through the intersection, the width of the crosswalk should be 6’. When the crosswalk extends a 10’ bike path through the intersection, the width of the crosswalk should be 10’. Where an Overland Park-maintained shared-use path crossses a roadway, crosswalk markings shall be installed.

If crosswalk lines from adjacent legs of the intersection intersect prior to the curb line, a 45 degree angled crosswalk line should be used near the ramp location to maintain a 4’ minimum distance from the back of curb to the angled portion of the crosswalk.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Basic Crosswalk Lines Intersecting at Corner.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Intersection of Adjacent Basic Crosswalk Lines
|}

=== High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings ===
For added visibility at locations that have a significant amount of pedestrian activity, especially within the downtown district of Overland Park; at any midblock or uncontrolled through movement locations; including Pedestrian Hybrid Beacon (aka HAWK signal); at all roundabout crosswalks; or where crashes with pedestrians have occurred, high visibility crosswalk markings should be used instead of the standard crosswalk lines.

At intersections, if one approach warrants a high-visibility crosswalk, any other approach that warrants a crosswalk should also be a high-visibility crosswalk, even if it does not necessarily meet the criteria in the High-Visibility Crosswalk Criteria table shown below.

When the crosswalk extends a 10' shared-use path or trail through an intersection, the width of the crosswalk should be 10'.

When used, the lines should be 24 inches wide and separated by gaps not less than 3’ and not more than 5’ based on the lane width. The design of the lines and gaps should be spaced as evenly as possible across the lanes of vehicle travel and avoid the wheel paths as much as possible. On undivided roadways, the spacing for 12’ and 11’ lanes is shown below.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:High Visibility Crosswalk Detail.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|High-Visibility Crosswalk Detail
|}

On divided roadways, some variation in the gaps between markings is acceptable to accommodate for the width of the median. See the examples below.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:High Visibility Crosswalk on Divided Roadways.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|High Visibility Crosswalk on Divided Roadways
|}

The high-visibility crosswalk markings should generally be placed parallel to the direction of vehicle travel and perpendicular to the travel of the pedestrian. However, at skewed intersections or intersections with irregular entry streets, the configuration of the markings may have to be arranged more aesthetically up to 45 degrees.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:High Visibility Crosswalk At Irregular Intersections.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|High Visibility Crosswalk At Irregular Intersections
|}

The following criteria will be used for marking pedestrian, bicycle, trail, and golf cart crossings which have been approved:
:{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#222 1px solid black; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+'''High-Visibility Crosswalk Criteria'''
| colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;" valign="center"|'''Pedestrian Hybrid Traffic (HAWK) Signal'''
|-
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|Condition
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|Stop Line
|-
| align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|Any 
| align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|Yes
|-
| colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;" valign="center"|'''Traffic Signal, Stop or Yield Sign Adjacent to Elementary or Middle School'''
|-
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|Condition
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|Stop Line or Yield Line
|-
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|No Crossing Guard 
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|No1
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|See Specific Criteria
|-
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|Crossing Guard Assigned 
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|See Specific Criteria
|-
| colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;" valign="center"|'''Downtown Overland Park'''
|-
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Condition
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Stop or Yield Line
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Any
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|See Specific Criteria
|-
| colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#90ee90;" valign="center"|'''Mid-Block Crossings or Uncontrolled Through Movements'''
|-
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Condition
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yield Line
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Pedestrian or School Crossings2 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|If Multi-Lane Approach
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Trail Crossings3 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|If Multi-Lane Approach
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Golf Cart Crossing 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Roundabouts 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yes
|}
1Unless an adjacent crosswalk at the same intersection warrants a high-visibility crosswalk. 
2If the posted speed limit is 40 mph or greater at a non-intersection locatoion, the minimum width of the crosswalk shall be 8 feet. 
3Applies to any street classification and does not need to meet volume criteria to be marked or signed. If the posted speed limit is 40 mph or greater at a non-intersection location, the minimum width of the crosswalk shall be 8 feet. 

=== Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage ===
The following table explains when stop lines and crosswalk lines should be installed at intersections. If a street has centerline markings, it should have a stop line.

:{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+'''Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage Guide'''
! colspan="4" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Intersection Description
! colspan="4" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Installation Guidelines
|-
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Approach Street'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Cross Street'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Intersection Control5'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''No. of Lanes on Approach'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Stop Lines'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Crosswalks'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''White Lane Lines'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Turn Arrows'''
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|> 1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|AWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Any
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Maybe3
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Maybe3
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|> 1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|> 1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|> 1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|> 1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
|-
|}
1Do not install stop line unless there is a warranted and marked crosswalk. (See Note 2 below) 
2Do not install crosswalk pavement markings unless there is a warranted crossing determined by a pedestrian study or a shared-use path is present (2023 MUTCD Section 9E.13.05). 
3TWSC = Install lane lines and arrows when there is more than one approach lane 
4The "Collector" designation also includes commercial streets and apartments streets that are 36' wide (Bk-Bk) w/ speed limit 30 mph 
5TWSC = Two-Way Stop Control; AWSC = All-Way Stop Control

=== Signalized Intersections ===
White crosswalk lines are generally installed on every approach at a signalized intersection unless there are no sidewalks or curb ramps on the corners.

=== Roundabout Crosswalk Markings ===
On an approach to a circular intersection controlled by a Yield sign and at uncontrolled exits, crosswalks shall be a minimum of 20 feet from the edge of the circulatory roadway.

=== Mid-block Crosswalks ===
Do not install crosswalk lines unless there is a warranted crossing determined by a pedestrian count or engineering study. The engineering study should consider the number of lanes, the presence of a median, the distance from adjacent signalized intersections, the pedestrian volumes and delays, the average daily traffic (ADT), the posted or statutory speed limit or 85th-percentile speed, the available gaps, the geometry of the location, the possible consolidation of multiple crossing points, the availability of street lighting, and other appropriate factors. If there is a warranted mid-block crossing, install high-visibility crosswalks. If the mid-block crossing is a multi-lane approach, also install yield lines. At non-intersection crosswalks where the posted speed limit is 40 mph or greater, the minimum width of the crosswalk shall be 8'.

=== Crosswalks at City Limits ===
Where crosswalks on city limits are shared with adjacent cities, the city standard with the most visible crosswalks should apply.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White Crosswalk Lines|'''White Crosswalk Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White Crosswalk Lines]]
|}
----

== White Yield Lines ==
Yield lines are used to indicate the point behind which vehicles are required to yield in compliance with a Yield sign, Yield Here To Pedestrians sign or other appropriate sign. Yield lines consist of a row of solid white isosceles triangles pointing toward approaching vehicles extending across approach lanes to indicate the point at which the yield is intended or required to be made. They should be used in advance of mid-block crosswalks, in advance of a crosswalk on approaches controlled by a yield sign, and on approaches to a roundabout.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Yield Line Detail.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Yield Line Detail
|}
=== Yield Lines in Conjunction with Crosswalks ===
In general, a yield line should always be installed in advance of a crosswalk on an approach that is controlled by a yield sign.

=== At Mid-block Crosswalks ===
At a mid-block crosswalk, they should be placed between 20’ and 50’ in advance of the nearest crosswalk line and parking should be prohibited in the area between the yield line and the crosswalk line. The size of the yield line depends on the posted speed limit on the street. For speeds greater or equal to 30 mph, the size should be 24” x 36”. For speeds less than 30 mph, the size should be 12” x 18”. The yield lines should be spaced evenly across all lanes of pavement. Maintain a minimum distance of 12” between adjacent markings and 6” away from lane lines, centerlines and edge of pavement.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Yield Lines on Thoroughfares.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Mid-block Yield Lines on Divided Thoroughfare Streets
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Yield Lines on Collectors.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Mid-block Yield Lines on Collector Streets
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Yield Lines on Residentials.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Mid-block Yield Lines on Residential Streets
|}

=== At Approaches to Roundabouts or Mini Roundabouts ===
At approaches to a roundabout or mini roundabouts, the yield lines should be placed near the 12” wide x 3’ long white dotted extension line of the circulatory roadway edge. There should be a minimum of 20’ beyond the crosswalk line to allow a full vehicle storage length. The yield lines should be 24” x 36” separated by 12” at the base of the triangle.

=== At Approaches to Traffic Calming Circles ===
At approaches to neighborhood traffic circles designed to calm traffic, the yield lines should be placed near the 6” wide x 2’ long white dotted extension line of the circulatory roadway edge. The yield lines should be 12” x 18” separated by 12” at the base of the triangle.

=== In Conjunction with Bicycle Lanes ===
At mid-block crosswalks that pass through bicycle lanes, a yield line should be placed within the bicycle lane, since bicycles are required to obey the same rules of the road as vehicles. For streets with posted speed limits of 30 mph and greater, one yield line shall be placed in the center of the bicycle lane. For streets with posted speed limit less than 30 mph, two yield lines shall be placed in the bicycle lane.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White Yield Lines|'''White Yield Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White Yield Lines]]
|}
----

== White Arrow Symbols ==
Turn arrow markings on the pavement are used for the purpose of guiding, warning, or regulating traffic. They consist of either lane-use assignment arrows, e.g. left turn, right turn, or combination thru/turn arrows, and merge arrows. Lane-use assignment arrows and merge arrows are sized and installed as shown on the standard details.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="left"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Turn Arrow Detail.JPG|250px|]]
|- style="text-align: left"
|Turn Arrow Detail
|}

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Merge Arrow Detail.JPG|250px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Merge Arrow Detail
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="left"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Combination Turn-Straight Arrow Detail.JPG|250px|]]
|- style="text-align: left"
|Combination Turn-Straight Arrow Detail
|}

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Straight Arrow Detail.JPG|250px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Straight Arrow Detail
|}

=== Turn Arrows for Lane Assignments ===
Lane-use assignment arrows should be used in lanes designated for the exclusive use of a turning movement and consist of right or left turn arrows. Straight arrows or combination straight/turn arrows may be used in unique situations such as an exclusive turn lane with an adjacent shared thru-turn lane. Turn arrows should be installed in all right or left turn lanes. The first arrow on the up-stream end of the turn bay should be installed such that the tail of the arrow is aligned with the beginning of the solid white lane line. If there are dual turn lanes, the arrows in each adjacent lane should be aligned. In this case, the turn arrows should be positioned based on the shortest turn lane and placed with the tail of the arrow at the beginning of the shortest solid white lane line. The spacing of the remaining arrows should be based on the overall length of the turn bay, according to the table in the standard details. In the case of multiple turn lanes, the spacing should be based on the shortest storage bay length.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Turn Arrow Positioning in Dual Turn Lanes.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Turn Arrow Positioning in Dual Turn Lanes
|}

Combination straight/turn arrows may used when it is allowable to either turn or travel straight through the intersection and would provide clarity to drivers on more complex approaches.

=== Straight Arrows for Lane Assignment ===
Straight arrows should be used in advance of an interchange where the left lane to enter onto the interstate ramp occurs in advance of the previous intersection in an attempt to maximize vehicle storage. The straight arrow is an indication that the lane extends past the previous intersection but will end up in a left turn lane at the interchange.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Straight Arrows for Extended Turn Lanes at Interchanges.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Straight Arrows for Extended Turn Lanes at Interchanges
|}

Straight arrows are also appropriate for through lanes at diverging diamond interchanges (DDI’s) to assist vehicles in negotiating the interchange. In this scenario, the through arrows are not necessarily located at the beginning of the solid white lane line. Instead, they are located near the stop lines and at locations to provide positive guidance to vehicles at the point of divergence from the usual lane positions.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Straight Arrows at DDI Interchanges.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Straight Arrows at DDI Interchanges
|}

Straight arrows on through approach lanes are typically not used at standard intersections unless it is apparent that driver confusion exists and the installation of a through arrow would help alleviate the problem. For example, if there is only one through lane on the approach but then widens out to include left turn lanes and right turn lanes. In this situation, all lanes have solid white lane lines on each side of them.

=== Lane-Reduction Transition Merge Arrows ===
Lane-reduction transition merge arrows are used where the number of through lanes is reduced because of narrowing of the roadway. This generally occurs where a four-lane divided thoroughfare transitions to a two-lane undivided roadway at the project construction limits. Lane-reduction transition markings are not used for lane drops.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Lane-Reduction Transition Merge Arrows.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Lane-Reduction Transition Merge Arrows
|}

Where the posted speed is 45 mph or greater, the transition length should be L = W x S. For posted speeds less than 45 mph, L = WS2/60. Where S = the posted speed in mph and W = the lane offset in feet. The broken white lane line markings should be discontinued ¼ the distance downstream of the Lane Reduction warning sign based on the requirements of the MUTCD. The first lane-reduction transition merge arrow should be placed at the same location. An additional arrow should be placed 6’ upstream of the beginning of the pavement width transition, measured from the tip of the arrow. Coordination should occur with the roadway engineers to insure the taper lengths are long enough to accommodate the required distances.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White Arrow Symbols|'''White Arrow Symbols''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White Arrow Symbols]]
|}
----

== White ONLY Markings ==
The “ONLY” pavement marking symbol should be used exclusively for trap lanes, where the lane was a through lane at the previous intersection and drivers must now turn left or right because the lane does not continue through. The “ONLY” markings will be spaced alternately with either right or left turn arrows at a distance based on the length of the solid white lane line. See the table in the standard details for arrow and “ONLY” symbol spacing.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:ONLY Marking Detail.JPG|250px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|ONLY Marking Detail
|}

== White Railroad Crossing Markings ==
Pavement markings in advance of a railroad grade crossing shall consist of an “X”, the letters “RR”, no-passing zone markings, transverse lines and dynamic envelope markings as outlined below and according to the standard details. Identical markings shall be placed in each approach lane to grade crossings.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Railroad Crossing Markings.JPG|1000px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Railroad Crossing Markings
|}

=== Railroad Crossing Symbol ===
The railroad crossing symbol shall consist of a white “X” with a white “R” on either side of it. The lines making up the “X” shall be 16” wide. The height of the “X” shall be 20’ tall and 8’ wide, which should encompass both “R” markings. The height of each “R” shall be 6’. The railroad crossing symbol shall be located between the transverse lines as described below.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:RR Xing Detail.JPG|200px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|RR Xing Symbol
|}

=== Railroad Stop Line ===
A 24” wide, white stop line shall be installed across the approach lanes to a railroad grade crossing to indicate the point behind which vehicles might be required to stop. It should be placed at a right angle to the traveled way and should be placed no closer than 15 feet in advance of the nearest rail. For skewed crossings, the nearest rail could be that which is closest to the opposing lane of traffic.

=== Railroad Transverse Lines ===
Two additional 24” wide, white transverse lines shall be placed across each lane on the approach of a railroad grade crossing at both the upstream and downstream side of the railroad crossing symbol. They shall be located 15’ from the leading edge of the transverse line to the bottom of the X, and from the top of the X to the far edge of the transverse line, respectively. The distance from the far edge of one transvers line to the far edge of the other should be 50’.

=== Dynamic Envelope Markings ===
Dynamic envelope markings are 4” white lines placed across all lanes of traffic and parallel to the railroad tracks to define the clearance required for the train and its cargo overhang due to any combination of loading, lateral motion, or suspension failure. They should be placed 6’ from the nearest rail.

== White Chevron Markings ==
White chevron markings are used between two lanes of traffic traveling in the same direction to discourage travel in certain paved areas such as flush medians between double solid white lane lines. The chevrons should be installed with the point of each facing toward approaching traffic and slanting to the left and right away from of approaching vehicles. They should be spaced equal to the posted speed limit, in feet, e.g. 35’ for 35 mph. This spacing should be modified as necessary to have at least two chevrons. If the overall width between the painted lines is less than 6’ or the overall length is less than 20’, the diagonal crosshatch lines should be omitted. (See [[#Solid Double White Lane Lines|Solid Double White Lane Lines]]).

== Diagonal Crosshatch Markings ==
Diagonal crosshatch markings are used to discourage travel on certain paved areas such as flush medians, shoulders, gore areas, between solid double yellow centerline markings or between white channelizing lines. They should be 12” wide and spaced equal to the posted speed limit, in feet, e.g. 35’ for 35 mph. If the overall width of the painted median or hatched out area is less than 4’ or the overall length is less than 20’, the diagonal crosshatch lines should be omitted.

=== Yellow Diagonal Crosshatch Markings ===
Diagonal crosshatch markings shall be yellow when used on the left-hand side of divided roadways and on the left-hand shoulders of one-way streets or ramps. They shall be installed between double solid yellow lines separating traffic traveling in opposing directions or along the center median that separates traffic traveling in opposing direction. The yellow diagonal crosshatch lines should be slanted away from traffic in the adjacent travel lanes from the bottom left to the top right to approaching vehicles.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Yellow Crosshatch Lines.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Yellow Diagonal Crosshatch Lines
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:White Crosshatch Line.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Yellow and White Diagonal Crosshatch Lines
|}

=== White Diagonal Crosshatch Markings ===
White diagonal crosshatch markings shall be installed when traffic lanes are striped out on the right hand side of the roadway. They shall be slanted away from traffic in the adjacent travel lane from the bottom right to the top left to approaching vehicles.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White ONLY Markings|'''White ONLY Markings''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White ONLY Markings]]
|}
----

== Bicycle Markings ==
Bicycle markings indicate the separation of the lanes for road users, assist the bicyclist by indicating assigned travel paths, indicate correct lateral positioning in a shared lane and provide advance information for turning and crossing maneuvers. The various markings for bicycle lanes or shared lanes will consist of bicycle lane symbols and bicycle lane arrows or sharrow markings, respectively.

=== Bicycle Lane Lines ===
Bicycle lanes shall be installed where a separate portion of the roadway is designated for preferential use by bicycles. Bicycle lanes shall be defined with a 4” longitudinal solid white line desirably placed 5’ (4’ minimum) from the edge of the pavement exclusive of a curb and gutter. At intersections, the bicycle lane should always be located between the through lane and right turn lanes or the through lane and left turn lanes. Broken white extension lines shall be used on both sides of the bicycle lane through the transition area of a right turn lane. Once the full width of the right turn lane is developed, there shall be a 4” solid white lane line on each side of the bicycle lane that extends to the stop line.

If a bicycle lane extends across a bridge, omit the standard white edge line which would end up on the right side of the bicycle lane.

Bicycle lanes that are installed in conjunction with trap turn lanes require special treatment combined with the proper lane drop lines. The bicycle lane markings should stop 150’ before the beginning of the trap lane. Through bicycle lane markings should resume to the left of the right turn only lane or to the right of a left turn only lane. See the standard details for more information.

The length of the right or left trap lane storage on one side of the bicycle lane, identified by the 8” solid white lane line, shall extend back from the stop bar exactly 100'. One cycle of “Arrow - ONLY – Arrow” pavement markings shall be placed in the trap turn lane based on the spacing requirements listed in the standard details for a 100' storage length. The 8” solid white lane line will be extended upstream with 48’ of 4” broken white lane extension line; followed by a 54’ area that is unstriped; followed by another 48’ of 4” broken white lane extension line, as indicated in the standard details. The other side of the bicycle lane shall be a solid 4” white lane line extending 250’ upstream from the stop bar. This line will be extended farther upstream by a 3'x9' broken white trap lane line marking. (See [[#Wide Dotted Lane Drop Line|Wide Dotted Lane Drop Line]]) for more information regarding the length of the trap lane line markings.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[file:Bicycle Lane and Trap Lane Markings.jpg|1000px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Bicycle Lane and Trap Lane Markings
|}

Bike lane lines remain solid at commercial driveways and school driveways. Bike lane line shall be cut at public and private streets.

=== Bicycle Lane Symbols ===
A bicycle lane symbol depicts a side view of a bicycle. The symbol adopted by the City of Overland Park is just the symbol of the bicycle and not the bicycle/rider combination and shall be the standard bicycle for both the sharrow and the bicycle lane markings. Do not install bicycle lane markings (bicycle symbol or arrow) if there is an adjacent bike path next to the roadway. Only install the solid 4” white line.
The bicycle symbol will be placed:
* At the beginning of a bicycle lane and at periodic intervals along the bicycle lane based on engineering judgement.
* They are not required after every intersection, but should be placed after each intersection with a thoroughfare or collector roadway.
* They will also be placed on the approach prior to stop controlled or signal controlled intersections.

Where right turn lanes exist, the bicycle lane symbol will be placed across from any turn arrows spaced according to the table in the standard details. If there are no turn lanes, the bottom of the bicycle symbol shall be placed 30’ in advance of the leading edge of the stop line. When it is placed after an intersection, it should be located such that the distance from the beginning of the solid bicycle lane line to the bottom of the symbol is 25’. The bicycle lane symbol shall be 6’ tall and 3’-4” wide.

=== Bicycle Lane Arrows ===
Bicycle lane arrows shall accompany the bicycle lane symbol when it is located in a designated bicycle lane. The straight arrow shall be 2’ wide and 6’ long and placed 6’ after the bicycle lane symbol. Turn arrows shall be 3’-6” wide and 4’-7” long.

=== Bicycle Sharrows ===
Shared lane markings (Sharrows) may be used to assist bicyclists with lateral positioning in a shared lane with on-street parking in order to reduce the chance of a bicyclist’s impacting the open door of a parked vehicle or when lanes are too narrow for side by side travel by a vehicle and bicycle in the same traffic lane. They consist of the bicycle symbol and two white chevron markings placed above. The chevrons should begin 2” below the top of the handle bars and be 3’-6” high, based on the standard details.

Sharrows shall not be used as the primary bicycle designation for roadway corridors with posted speeds above 30 mph. Sharrows may be used for short sections of pavement on roadways at 35 mph if connecting a section of bike lane to another bike lane or similar infrastructure where there is insufficent pavement width for a marked bike lane.

If used in a shared lane with on-street parallel parking, sharrows should be placed so that the centers of the marking are centered in the driving lane. When parking does not regularly occur, the sharrow marking should be placed such that the centers of the marking are 2’-6” from the gutter lip. If the driving lane is less than 14' wide on a street without parallel parking, the sharrow marking should be at least 2'-6" from the gutter lip or 4' from the edge of pavement where there is no curb. See the [[Media:Sharrow Placement on Collector Streets.pdf|Flowchart for Placing Sharrow Markings on Collector Streets]] for more guidance on where to place sharrow markings. They should be placed after an intersection, 25’ beyond the radius point on the curb return and thereafter between 250’ and 500’ based on engineering judgement.

If the collector street transitions to one through lane in each direction and one left turn lane, use sharrow markings in the three lane section, even if the rest of the street meets the criteria for bicycle lanes.

== Parking Space Markings ==
Parking space markings are used to encourage more orderly and efficient use of parking spaces and identify locations where parking is permitted as well as where parking is prohibited. All parking space lines shall be 4” solid white lines.

=== Perpendicular Parking Space Markings ===
Perpendicular parking space markings shall be oriented 90 degrees to the driving aisle or the curb. Standard parking space lines shall be placed such that the center to center distance is 9’ wide. Any usable gutter area can count toward the width requirements. The depth of the parking space varies.
Accessible perpendicular parking spaces for vehicles shall be 8’ wide with a 5’ access aisle consisting of a 4” wide, white outline with 4” wide, white diagonal crosshatch lines oriented at 30 degrees counter-clockwise to the curb. Van accessible spaces shall be 8’ wide with an 8’ access aisle .

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Perpendicular Parking Space.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Perpendicular Parking Space Markings
|}

=== Angled Parking Space Markings ===
Standard angled parking space markings either make an angle with the curb of 45 or 60 degrees. The perpendicular distance between standard parking space lines shall be 9’, measured from the center of the lines. Any usable gutter area can count toward the width requirements. The depth of the parking space varies.
Accessible angled parking spaces for vehicles shall be 8’ wide with a 5’ access aisle consisting of a 4” wide, white outline with 4” wide, white diagonal crosshatch lines oriented at 60 degrees counter-clockwise to the curb. Van accessible spaces shall be 8’ wide with an 8’ access aisle.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Angled Parking Space Markings.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Angled Parking Space Markings
|}

=== Parallel Parking Space Markings ===
Parallel parking spaces shall be designated with tic marks when parallel parking spaces are provided along a street. They shall be a white “plus” (+) symbol with 4” wide strokes. Each spoke shall be 12”, making the total width and height equal to 28”. At the first designated parking space, the tic mark should only be an inverted “tee” (T) indicating that there is no parking prior to the marking. The last designated parking space should include a “tee” (T) indicating that there is no parking after the marking. The center to center spacing of the parallel parking space tics should desirably be 23’ (21’ minimum). The width of the parallel parking space varies and is dependent on the available street width and the type of curb and gutter that is used.

Accessible parallel parking spaces shall have a 5’ side access aisle extending in toward the sidewalk. The access aisle shall have a 4” wide edge extending along the edge of the access aisle and 4” wide diagonal crosshatch markings at 45 degrees to the curb, placed 3’ apart from center of line to center of line.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Parallel Parking Space Markings.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Parallel Parking Space Markings
|}

=== International Symbol of Accessibility ===
The international symbol of accessibility shall be used in parking spaces that are for accessible parking spaces. It shall be 4’ square with a blue background and a white symbol. In perpendicular or angled parking spaces, the symbol shall be centered and located at the very beginning of of perpendicular or angle parking spaces as indicated in the standard details. In parallel parking spaces, the symbol shall be placed in the center (longitudinally and laterally) of a designated parallel parking space.

=== Electric Vehicle Pump Plug ===
The Electric Vehicle Pump Plug symbol for stalls associated with Electric Vehicle Charging Stations shall be used in parking spaces that are for EVs only. It shall be 4’ square with a black background and a white symbol. In perpendicular or angled parking spaces, the symbol shall be centered and located at the very beginning of of perpendicular or angle parking spaces as indicated in the standard details. In parallel parking spaces, the symbol shall be placed in the center (longitudinally and laterally) of a designated parallel parking space.

== Speed Hump Markings ==
Speed hump markings are a series of white markings placed on a speed hump to identify its location. They will be “V” shaped markings inside a second “V” shape. They shall be 12” in width separated by 12” space. The “V” shaped markings are shown centered in each travel lane on the approach side of the speed hump with the “V” pointing in the direction of traffic flow in the lane. They tip of the largest “V” will be placed at the center of the speed hump. The width of the speed hump markings are 6’ as measured at the base of the triangle.

Advance speed hump markings should be used in advance of speed humps to identify vertical roadway deflections where the deflection is not expected. They shall be a series of eight 12” transverse lines that become longer and are spaced closer together as the vehicle approaches the speed hump. They shall begin 100’ in advance of the leading edge of the speed hump and arranged as indicated in the standard details.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Speed Hump Markings.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Speed Hump Markings
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Bicycle Markings|'''Bicycle Markings''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Bicycle Markings]]
|}
----

== Design Considerations ==
Before initiating the design of a pavement marking plan, the designer should contact the City staff to discuss the specific design criteria for the project and determine the scope. Decisions should be made in regard to the type of pavement and pavement markings that will be used in the design. The following is a brief summary of general design considerations.

=== Coordination with Pavement Joints ===
Offset lane lines a minimum of 6” from asphalt joints when possible. Maintain a minimum of 4” offset from all concrete pavement joints. This should be anticipated at the very beginning when determining the typical sections. Pavement marking lines should be shown and dimensioned on the typical sections.

== Pavement Types and Approved Marking Materials ==

=== Pavement Marking Material and Surface Type Compatibility ===
The type of pavement surface will dictate the type of pavement marking material that should be specified. See the Pavement Marking Material Matrix below and the current standard details.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Pavement Marking Material Matrix.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Pavement Marking Material Matrix
|}

== Preparation of Plans ==
The Plans shall be prepared in accordance with the following guidelines unless otherwise pre-approved by the Engineer

=== Scale ===
The preferred plan scale for pavement marking plans is 1” = 40’. Two lines of pavement marking plans may be on the same sheet above and below each other. A scale and north arrow shall be indicated on each sheet.

=== Topography ===
The only topography required for pavement marking plans are finished curb lines, including storm sewer inlets, median curb lines, drive entrances, sidewalks, bike trails, pavement limits and bridge limits. Also, include existing roadway limits at each end where the proposed pavement will tie in. If the mill and overlay of existing pavements is included, the existing curb and median lines should also be shown in those areas beyond the widening. If existing markings are being tied into at a match line, they should be surveyed and shown on the plans.
If streetlighting is provided with the project, it is beneficial to show the symbol of the pole location so traffic control signs can be shown to be mounted on them, if applicable.
A centerline shall be shown with stationing for the main roadway as well as the side streets to be able to positively locate the beginning and end of pavement marking lines. Street names shall be shown for major and minor streets.

New construction items should be subdued so the proposed pavement markings, lane width callouts, signing station and offsets, etc. stand out.

=== Plan Submittals ===
There should be a minimum of three plan submittals for every pavement marking project. Plans should be submitted at the Preliminary, Field Check and Final plan stage. An additional plan submittal may be required after the first final plan stage depending on how accurate the first submittal is.

==== Preliminary Plans ====
Enough work on the pavement marking plans should be completed such that the general lane layout is evident. The lines can be continuous instead of the final format just to help identify any glaring geometric issues that could be evident early on in the project design. Typical lane widths should be shown when it differs from the typical sections or at transition points.

==== Field Check Plans ====
Field check plans should show the location of all pavement markings, as they will be installed. The plans shall show callouts for the various types of lines and lane widths, etc. It is not required to show stationing for the beginning and end of pavement marking lines at this plan stage, nor is it required to have quantities calculated. However, standard details shall be included.
Signing plans should also be incorporated into the pavement marking plans at this stage of design. All sign faces shall be shown with the MUTCD callout and size shall be shown oriented in the direction of travel.

==== Final Plans ====
All final pavement markings with stationing for the beginning and end of lines shall be included in the final plans, along with final signing plans with station and offsets for all sign locations. All sign faces shall be shown with the MUTCD callout and size shall be shown oriented in the direction of travel.
All construction notes to clarify any construction details shall be shown. All Standard Details, including the completed Bill of Materials and the Pavement Marking Bid Item table shall be included at this stage.
Depending on the number of comments made on the first submittal of final plans, a second set of final plans may be requested to verify that all comments have been addressed. The project manager will make that determination and convey his decision to the appropriate design staff.

== Computation of Quantities ==
The computation of quantities is critical to providing accurate information to the contractors bidding the project. Errors in the computation of quantities results in project cost change orders and delays in the project. Care should be taken to check quantities against the plan sheet design to verify that all items are included and accurate. What follows are some general guidelines that should be used such that the computation of quantities is consistent for all designs.

=== Longitudinal and transverse lines ===
All longitudinal and transvers lines will be measured by the linear foot for the various materials used. The lines will be measured continuous from the beginning station to the end station. The pavement marking bill of materials includes multipliers for various line types that will be applied from the “start” to “end” length.

=== Symbols ===
All symbols, including turn arrows, thru arrows, “ONLY” markings, yield lines, merge arrows, bike lane symbol, sharrows, RR crossing symbols, etc. shall be measured per each, for the various materials used.

== Temporary Raised Pavement Markers ==
Temporary Raised Pavement Markers (TRPMs) are used during chip seal pavement restoration operations. The existing thermoplastic, pre-formed thermoplastic, and patterned cold plastic pavement markings are ground off the roadway so the emulsion and layer of chips will bond to the roadway. TRPMs will be installed that meet the full requirements for substitution of the markings according to the MUTCD.
The color of the TRPMs shall be the same color of the markings for which they substitute. The number and spacing of TRPMs is different for various line types. The discussion below discusses the value of N, which is equivalent to the length of one line segment plus one gap. Overland Park uses a 6’ line segment with an 18’ gap. Therefore, N = 6 + 18 = 24.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:TRPM Value of N.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|TRPM Value of N
|}

=== Substitute for Broken Lane Lines ===
A group of at least three TRPMs shall be equally spaced at no greater than N/8 = (24/8) or 3’ spacing. Therefore, TRPMs will be located at each end of the broken lane line segment and one in the middle.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:TRPM Spacing Broken Line.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|TRPM Spacing for Broken Line
|}

=== Substitute for Solid Lane Lines ===
In the case of solid lines, the TRPMs shall be equally spaced at no greater than N/4 (24/4) or 6’ spacing. The value of N is the same as that referenced for the broken lines that might be adjacent to or might extend the solid lines.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:TRPM Spacing Solid Line.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|TRPM Spacing for Solid Line
|}

=== Substitute for other Broken Lines ===
TRPMs may be used to substitute for other broken line segments that are shorter than 6’ by using at least one placed at the center of line segments of 2 to 3 feet in length.

=== Substitute for Double Solid Lane Lines ===
For solid double lines, TRPMs can be used as a substitute as long as two markers are placed side by side, with a horizontal separation that is equivalent to the spacing between the double lines. This would be equivalent to a 4” separation in Overland Park. The TRPMs shall be equally spaced at no greater than N/4 (24/4) or 6’ spacing.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:TRPM Spacing Wide Line.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|TRPM Spacing for Wide or Double Line
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Design Considerations|'''Design Considerations''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Design Considerations]]
|}
----

Phase II - Preliminary Design

2026-08-03T14:51:45Z

Brian Geiger: /* Task No. 9 - Design Criteria */ Updated AASHTO's Bike Guide to Current 2024 Version

{{Navbar}}
== Introduction ==
{{Introduction
|Phase II begins the engineering design and plan preparation process for a project. The date for beginning this process will depend upon the approved project schedule, budget and time anticipated to complete the various phases/tasks.

The project team will play an important decision-making role in managing a project. This team will consist of City staff and private consultants (if applicable).

Intra-department, public involvement, and utility company meetings are commenced during this phase.

Field check plans are prepared, distributed and reviewed along with preliminary construction cost estimates. Also, R/W and easement documents are completed and, if required, appraisers are hired.
}}

== [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II Checklist|Phase II Checklist]] ==


== Task No. 1 - Identify Project Team ==
{{Top}}

When a project is scheduled to begin the design phase, the Project Team is to be identified by the City Engineer and/or the City Traffic Engineer, depending on the scope of the project. The purpose of this team is to provide input, information, support, and execution throughout the project planning, design, and construction. The Project Team will generally include the following members: Project Manager, Traffic Engineer, Construction Inspector, Traffic Maintenance Technician, Maintenance Representative, Engineering Technician, Contract Specialist, Law Department Representative, and Finance Representative.

== Task No. 2 - Decide if City Staff to Design ==
{{Top}}

The City Engineer and/or the City Traffic Engineer in consultation with the Project Team will decide whether the project will be designed by the City Staff or by a Consulting Engineer.

== Task No. 3 - Consultant Selection/Certification ==
{{top}}

The City shall select and negotiate with a consultant for project design in accordance with the '''[https://codes.opkansas.org/governing-body-policies/doc-viewer.aspx?secid=464&keywords=4550%2Cnn4550#secid-464 City Resolution No. 5007]''' if the design is funded solely with local funds. If federal or state funds are used for the design, the City will use an approved list of consultants furnished by the BLP and will follow the current BLP Consultant Selection Procedures. If the City intends to use federal funds in the construction engineering, and use the same consultant for both preliminary engineering (PE) and construction engineering (CE), following the current BLP Consultant Selection Procedure for the PE will satisfy the requirements for the CE selection.

Prior to the beginning of the selection process, Project Manager shall notify via email DPW and CE of upcoming RFQ for consulting services. The project name, list of firms to receive the RFQ and any other pertinent information will be provided.

For more information see Chapter [[Media:3.0 PE Consultant Selection and Agreement 2024.pdf|'''3.0 Preliminary Engineering (PE) Consultant Selection and Agreement''']] and Chapter [[Media:11.0 CE Consultant Selection and Agreement 2024.pdf|'''11.0 Construction Engineering (CE) Consultant Selection and Agreement''']] of KDOT's LPA Project Development Manual.

When federal funds are used in the preliminary engineering, the City will provide KDOT a certification that appropriate steps have been completed and the process complied with all applicable regulations. Any work done prior to obligation of federal funds will be non-participating.

{{Note|''This Manual will be provided to the Consultant during the negotiating process. When negotiating an agreement with a consulting firm a narrative of services and a fee schedule is required (examples below'').}}

{{Exhibit|II-3a Engineering Architectural Services Agreement rev 5-29-24.docx|No. II-3a|City’s standard Engineering / Architectural services agreement for design projects.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3b(1) Supplemental to Engineering Architectural Services - 1-14-20.docx|No. II-3b(1)|City’s standard Supplemental Agreement for Professional Engineering Services. (First)}}

{{Exhibit|II-3b(2) Supplemental to Eng Arch Services-second and beyond 1-14-20.docx|No. II-3b(2)|City’s standard Supplemental Agreement for Professional Engineering Services. (Second and beyond)}}

{{Exhibit|II-3c Consultant Agreement-non design rev 5-16-24.docx|No. II-3c|City’s standard Consultant Agreement for non-design projects.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3d Supplemental to Consulting Services 1-14-20.docx|No. II-3d|City’s standard Supplemental Agreement to the Consultant Agreement for non-design projects.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3e.dot|No. II-3e| is a sample of City’s standard Scope of Services.}}
:(When writing contracts for projects involving bridge construction, refer to Chapter [[media:6.0_Bridge_Design_2024.pdf|'''6.0 Bridge Design''']] of KDOT's LPA Project Development Manual).

{{Exhibit|II-3e(1) Proposed Scope Streetlight 11.24.25.docx|No. II-3e(1)|City’s standard Scope of Services for a Street Lighting project.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3e(2) Proposed Scope Signal 11.14.25.docx|No. II-3e(2)|City’s standard Scope of Services for a Traffic Signal project.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3f.xlt|No. II-3f|City’s standard fee schedule for engineering services agreement.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3g_RFQ_Packet_for_Consulting_Serices_12.2024.pdf|No. II-3g|is a sample RFQ packet for consulting services.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3h_Sample_Ranking_Memo_to_Consultant_Selection_Committee.pdf|No. II-3h|is a sample Ranking Memo to Consultant Selection Committee.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3i.xlt|No. II-3i|is a sample Ranking Sheet to be completed by the Consultant Selection Committee.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3j.dot|No. II-3j|is a sample Interview Memo to Consultant Selection Committee.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3k.xlt|No. II-3k|is a sample of a compiled Ranking Sheet.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3l_Sample_letter_requesting_Interview_5.20.2024.pdf|No. II-3l|is a sample letter requesting interview of short list Consulting Firms.}}

The selection committee shall meet after ranking sheets are completed and any interviews (if applicable) have been held. This meeting is to ensure consensus of the selection committee. Approval to proceed with scope & fee negotiations must be obtained from the DPW prior to letters being sent to consultants.

{{Exhibit|II-3m_Sample_Selected_Consultant_Letter.pdf|No. II-3m|is a sample letter to selected Consulting Firm.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3n_Sample_Not_Selected_Consultant_Letter.pdf|No. II-3n|is a sample letter to Consulting Firms not selected.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3o CONSULTING FIRMS 6.15.2026.docx|No. II-3o|is a list of Consulting Firms.}}

== Task No. 4 - Submit Project Description to Law Department. Execute Ordinances-Resolution. ==
{{Top}}

The physical location of the project and a description of what is to be constructed is to be submitted to the Law Department. A feasibility report shall include the physical location of the project, a description of what is to be constructed, a cost estimate, and other necessary information required by the Law Department. The description project centerline shall include the permanent improvements (not tapers for street projects).

An example of a project description is as follows:

:'''''The construction of Switzer Road from north of the centerline of 159th Street to south of the centerline of 151st Street. Construction will include a dual roadway with a median. Left turn lanes will be located at side streets as required. Concrete sidewalks will be located on the west side of Switzer Road. An asphalt bike and pedestrian trail will be located on the east side of Switzer Road. The project also includes construction of storm sewers, street lights, restoration, and other items incidental to the street construction.'''''
''
The Project Manager, in conjunction with the Law Department, will determine if all necessary City ordinances or resolutions have been executed in order to authorize the project. Examples of possible documents are:

{{Exhibit|II-4a.dot|No. II-4a| Resolution on advisability of the creation of an Improvement District,}}
{{Exhibit|II-4b.dot|No. II-4b| Resolution authorizing and providing for the creation of an Improvement District,}}
:[[Media:CO 2-20-2017 Ordinance MTI-3159 (TH-1665) Publication.pdf|'''Exhibit No. II-4c''']] ''Ordinance providing for the public improvement of a Main Trafficway''.

== Task No. 5 - Prepare Project Schedule ==
{{Top}}

If a Consultant is to be hired, the anticipated construction time period shall be provided. The Consultant shall submit a schedule, indicating the design phases, R/W / easement submittal, meetings, bid opening date and construction time period. If the City Staff is designing the project, a similar schedule shall be prepared by the City Project Manager.

== Task No. 6 - Submit Cash Flow Projections (Engineering Cost) ==
{{Top}}

When requested, a cash flow projection for engineering services shall be submitted to the City Finance Department.

:[[Media:Cash Flow TH-1027 6-2019 Rome.xlsx|'''Exhibit II-6''']] ''is the standard cash flow form.''

== Task No. 7 - Initiate Utility Coordination. Schedule Utility Meeting (optional) ==
{{Top}}

Early in the preliminary design phase, the Project Manager will contact all public and private utility officials, informing them of the upcoming project (project limits and schedule) and requesting the information on their facilities (location maps, existing utility easements and any other pertinent information) in the vicinity.

{{Exhibit|II-7 email to utility companies links.docx|No. II-7|is a sample email (initial contact) to the utilities.}}
:([[media:Project location map for utilities.pdf|'''Project Location Map''']] and [[media:Utility Response Form.pdf|'''Utility Response Forms''']] should be attached to the email).

If the Project Manager chooses to hold a meeting, an agenda should be prepared and distributed in advance of the meeting to all scheduled attendees.

The typical agenda items are as follows:

*utility location maps/information;
*existing utility easements;
*project schedule;
*possible critical out-of-service time periods;
*utility representatives contact information.

Meeting minutes shall also be prepared following the meeting and distributed to all scheduled attendees, including those who were invited but did not attend.
{{Note|''When scheduling utility meeting in Google calendar, in order to avoid conflicts with other utility meetings, CH-PW Utilities (found under Rooms tab) shall be "invited" as an attendee to all meetings, pre-bid conferences and pre-construction conferences or any meetings that require utility company attendance''.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7.docx|No. II-7a|is a list of utility companies.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7b utility info request.pdf|No. II-7b|is a sample request for utility plans and easement documents.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7c Utility Meeting Request.pdf|No. II-7c|is a sample invitation letter for Utility Coordination Meeting.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7d utility meeting agenda.pdf|No. II-7d|sample agenda for Utility Coordination Meeting.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7e Sign in sheet.docx|No. II-7e|meeting sign in sheet.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7f Utility Meeting Minutes.pdf|No. II-7f|sample of utility coordination meeting minutes.}}

'''Johnson County Wastewater'''

{{Exhibit|II-7g.pdf|No. II-7g|Right-Of-Way Agreement}}

{{Exhibit|II-7h.pdf|No. II-7h|Right-Of-Way Agreement, Reference Sheet}}

{{Exhibit|II-7i.pdf|No. II-7i|Right-Of-Way Agreement, Project Checklist}}

:[[Media:MS1273 Invoice Packet.pdf|'''Exhibit No. II-7j''']] ''Payment invoice to JCW for reimbursement of relocation costs.''

'''Water District No.1 of Johnson County'''

{{Exhibit|II-7k.pdf|No. II-7k|Right-Of -Way Agreement}}

'''Transmission Pipe Line'''

{{Exhibit|II-7l.pdf|No. II-7l| is a sample of Encroachment Guidelines.}}

'''Evergy'''

{{Exhibit|II-7m KCP&L Contacts.xlsx|No. II-7m|Governmental Relocation Contact List}}

{{Exhibit|II-7n.pdf|No. II-7n|Service Territory Map}}

For Verizon inquiries see Memorandum [[Media:Verizon Inquiries.pdf|'''Request for OSP facility records''']].

Refer to the City's [[Media:Utility Relocation Guidelines.pdf|'''Utility Relocation Guidelines''']] for all relocation planning.

Refer to '''[https://drive.google.com/file/d/18FRkK-M55tHmO86mZW5fljqVTgmynk4Y/view Manual of Infrastructure Standards]''' for excavation and safety requirements.

For federally funded projects refer to Chapter [[Media:8.0 Status of Utilities 2020.pdf|'''8.0 Status of Utilities''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual''' for additional information.

== Task No. 8 - Pre-Design Meeting ==
{{Top}}

A pre-design meeting shall be scheduled prior to commencing any significant design work. A meeting agenda shall be prepared and distributed in advance of the meeting to the scheduled attendees. Meeting minutes shall be prepared and distributed to all attendees. The purpose of this meeting is to discuss varies anticipated design issues:

*specific limits of improvements;
*median openings and left/right turn storage lengths;
*utility conflicts; [[1304 - Status of Utilities.pdf]]
{{Note|''All utilities within construction limits will be shown on the 1304 Form.|1304 - Status of Utilities.pdf}}
*detailed schedule;
*design criteria as described in [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 9 - Design Criteria| '''Phase II, Task No. 9''']];
*necessary permits, such as
::[https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/permits-licenses-inspections-directory/'''Land Disturbance Permit'''];
::'''[https://www.kdhe.ks.gov/DocumentCenter/View/6311/Notice-of-Intent---Construction-Activities-PDF KDHE Stormwater NOI]''';
::[https://www.epa.gov/cwa-404/permit-program-under-cwa-section-404 Corps of Engineers '''404 Permit'''];
::'''[https://www.agriculture.ks.gov/divisions-programs/division-of-water-resources/water-structures/stream-and-floodplain-permits Kansas DWR]''';
::[https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/permits-licenses-inspections-directory/'''Floodplain Development Permit'''];
*detours/street closings;
*project phasing/traffic control;
*identify equipment or material on critical path (see note below);
*distribute City's Standard Bid Items to be used during design;
*coordinate with Engineering Services for development projects permitted in the area.

{{Note|''It may be necessary to purchase equipment or material in advance of actual project letting date. Generally this will involve separate purchasing contracts for signal poles, LED's, signal cabinets, controllers and load switches. Items on the critical path that could delay the project completion date should be identified and the need for separate purchasing contracts discussed. The BLP project manager should also be included in discussions to make sure federal/state requirements are met for the pre-purchased items''.}}

== Task No. 9 - Design Criteria ==
{{Top}}

:Project design shall be in accordance with accepted engineering practices and all applicable state, AASHTO and federal Criteria. These criteria include, but not limited to the following references:

*'''Public and Private Streets'''

::Current edition of AASHTO's [https://store.transportation.org'''A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets''' 2018, 7th Edition] (Green Book). (See ''K:\Library\References\AASHTO'')
::Current edition of KDOT's [https://www.ksdot.gov/doing-business/highway-contractors/contractor-resources/specifications-for-state-road-and-bridge-construction '''Standard Specifications for State Road and Bridge Construction'''.]
::Current edition of KDOT's [[Media:2020 LPA Manual.pdf|'''LPA Project Development Manual''']].
::Current City of Overland Park [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-1 '''Municipal Code'''.]
:::[http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-3613 '''Chapter 13.10''' Public Street, Streetlighting and Sidewalk Requirements]
:::[http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-3641 '''Chapter 13.12''' Construction on Rights-of-Way.]
:::[http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-4036 '''Chapter 15.10''' Stormwater Management Program - Standards and Permitting]
::Current City of Overland Park Design and Construction Standards [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 1 - as Posted to website 06.11.2021.pdf|'''Volume 1 Design Criteria''']] and [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 2 - Specifications as posted to website 06.15.2021.pdf|'''Volume 2 Construction Specifications''']]
*'''Stormwater Conveyance and Treatment Facilities'''
:Current City of Overland Park Design and Construction Standards [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 1 - as Posted to website 06.11.2021.pdf|'''Volume 1 Design Criteria''']] and [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 2 - Specifications as posted to website 06.15.2021.pdf|'''Volume 2 Construction Specifications''']] as a supplement to '''[https://kcmetro.apwa.org/resources/specifications/ APWA Section 5600]'''.
*'''Erosion and Sediment Control'''
:Current City of Overland Park Design and Construction Standards [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 1 - as Posted to website 06.11.2021.pdf|'''Volume 1 Design Criteria''']] and [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 2 - Specifications as posted to website 06.15.2021.pdf|'''Volume 2 Construction Specifications''']] as a supplement to '''[https://kcmetro.apwa.org/resources/specifications/ APWA Section 5100]'''.
*'''Traffic Signals'''
:Traffic signals shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of the '''[https://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno_11th_Edition.htm Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices]'''. Traffic signal mast arm poles shall be designed in accordance with the [http://www.tsp2.org/2013/05/29/aashto-releases-new-specifications-for-structural-supports-for-highway-signs-luminaries-and-traffic-signals/ '''2013 AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals, Sixth Edition, LTS-6'''].
*'''Permanent Traffic Control Signs'''
:Permanent traffic control signs shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of the '''[https://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno_11th_Edition.htm Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices]''' and the City's [http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Traffic_Sign_Design_Guidelines '''Traffic Sign Design Manual'''].
*'''Pavement Markings'''
:Pavement markings shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of the '''[https://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno_11th_Edition.htm Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices]''' and the City's [http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Pavement_Marking_Design_Manual#top '''Pavement Marking Design Manual'''].
*'''Streetlights'''
:Streetlights shall be designed in accordance with [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks-gbp/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-198 '''Resolution No. 4036'''] and the City's [http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Streetlight_Design_Manual '''Streetlighting Design Manual'''].

:Current City of Overland Park Design and Construction Standards [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 1 - as Posted to website 06.11.2021.pdf|'''Volume 1 Design Criteria''']]. Refer to Part F for the design criteria for all streetlighting projects.
*'''Traffic Control'''
:Work Zone Traffic Control shall be designed in accordance with the City’s [[Media:Traffic-Control-Handbook-July-2016.pdf| '''Traffic Control Handbook''']].
*'''Bridges'''
:City of Overland Park Bridge Design Information
{{Exhibit2|II-9a.docx|No. II-9a|is a list of bridge design information.}}
{{Exhibit2|2018 Bridge Inventory SOP.pdf|No. II-9b|is Public Works Department Bridge Asset Inventory Procedure (February 2018) (Reviewed: July 2026)}}
:Also see
::Chapter [[Media:6.0 Bridge Design 2020.pdf|'''6.0 Bridge Design''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual'''
::[https://kart.ksdot.org '''LRFD Bridge Design Manual, Volume III'''], KDOT, current edition. (See ''K:\Library\References\KDOT Design Manual\KDOT Bridge Design Manual December 2021.pdf'')
::[https://store.transportation.org '''LRFD Bridge Design Specifications'''], AASHTO, current edition

*'''Johnson County Wastewater'''
{{Exhibit2|II-9c.pdf|No. II-9c|Designers Checklist for City Streets and Stormwater Improvements.}}
{{Exhibit2|II-9d.pdf|No. II-9d|Memo from JCW on existing brick manholes with new cone sections.}}
:For city street or stormwater improvement projects that require sanitary sewer relocation or extension, full sanitary sewer design plans per JCW plan requirements and specifications must be approved by JCW. See below for requirements.

::'''[https://www.jocogov.org/department/wastewater/developers-engineers-contractors/privately-financed-sewer-main-development Procedures for Privately Financed Gravity Sewer Main Projects]'''
::'''[https://www.jocogov.org/department/wastewater/developers-engineers-contractors/regulations Minimum Plan Requirements for Gravity Sewer Main Projects]'''

::'''[https://www.jocogov.org/department/wastewater/developers-engineers-contractors/regulations Construction and Material Specifications for Sanitary Sewers]'''

::'''[https://www.jocogov.org/department/wastewater/developers-engineers-contractors/standard-details Sanitary Sewer Standard Details]'''.
:For the status of sanitary sewer plan submittals and projects see Johnson County Wastewater [https://www.jocogov.org/dept/wastewater/development-and-permitting/permitting/commercial '''Commercial Permitting'''] page.
:Also see [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 7 - Initiate Utility Coordination. Schedule Utility Meeting (optional)| '''Phase II, Task No. 7''']] for Right-Of-Way agreement between JCW and City of Overland Park.
*'''Current Johnson County Stormwater Management Program Policy and Procedures'''
::See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase I - Vision#Task 3 - Prepare SMAC Project Addition Study .28Form.29|'''Phase I, Task No. 3''']]
*'''Additional Design Guidance for Reference:
::[https://store.transportation.org '''"Roadside Design Guide"'''], AASHTO, current edition;
::[http://www.trb.org/Main/Blurbs/175169.aspx '''"Highway Capacity Manual"'''](HCM), current edition;
::[https://store.transportation.org/Item/CollectionDetail?ID=267"'''Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities'''"], AASHTO, current edition.
::'''[https://www.access-board.gov/ada/ American with Disabilities Act (ADA) Guidelines and Standards]''', United States Access Board;
::'''[https://www.access-board.gov/prowag/ Proposed Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities in the Public Right-of-Way (PROWAG)]''', United States Access Board;
::[https://nacto.org/publication/urban-street-design-guide '''"Urban Street Design Guide"'''] NACTO, current edition;
::[https://nacto.org/wp-content/uploads/2013/10/Vega-BarachowitzDavid_DesigningCitiesPHX.pdf '''"Urban Bikeway Design Guide"'''] NACTO, current edition;
::'''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/5325/638736482029600000 "Kansas Roundabout Guide"]''' KDOT, current edition;
::'''[https://drive.google.com/file/d/1Kz3wEyc0K2AxxH3Bng4ZsNdkGrYnpxm2/view Greenway Linkages Plan for Overland Park]''';
::'''[https://www2.opkansas.org/City-Government/Agendas-and-Minutes/Community-Development/Agendas/2015/2015-03-04/DIS-4-2.pdf South Overland Park Transportation Plan]''';
::[https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/traffic-roads-transportation/bicycling/'''Overland Park Bicycle Master Plan'''];
::'''[https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/publications/research/safety/00067/00067.pdf FHA Roundabouts Informational Guide]'''.
*'''Design Exceptions:
:If, during the development of plans for proposed project, it is determined that there are circumstances that may make it impractical to meet the applicable guidelines, the Consultant/Project Manager shall fill out the following forms:

:Use [[Media:Design exceptions.docx|'''Design Exceptions''']] form to document all design exceptions and save it to the project preliminary design folder.

:Use [[Media:Design deviations.docx|'''Design Deviations''']] form to document design deviations, revisions to the standard design that do not adversely impact the design intent, and save to the project preliminary design folder.

: See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 18 - Submit Request for Design Exception to KDOT| '''Phase II, Task No. 18''']] for design exceptions on federally funded projects.

== Task No. 10 - Standard Details ==
{{Top}}

The City's Public Works Department maintains and updates [https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/building-construction/civil-engineering/construction-standards/ '''Standard Details'''] for publicly funded projects under the direction of the City Engineer.
If Johnson County Wastewater facilities are involved in the project, '''[https://www.jocogov.org/department/wastewater/developers-engineers-contractors/standard-details Sanitary Sewer Standard Details]''' shall be incorporated into the plans.

Also, the following are typical thoroughfare sections to be used for the infrastructure improvements as recommended by '''[https://www2.opkansas.org/City-Government/Agendas-and-Minutes/Community-Development/Agendas/2015/2015-03-04/DIS-4-2.pdf South Overland Park Transportation Plan]''':

[[Media:Thoroughfare Ultimate 4- and 3-Lane Sections March-2022.pdf|'''Ultimate 4- and 3-Lane Thoroughfare Sections''']];

[[Media:Thoroughfare Ultimate 2-Lane Sections March-2022.pdf|'''Ultimate 2-Lane Thoroughfare Sections''']];

[[Media:Thoroughfare Interim Sections March-2022.pdf|'''Interim Thoroughfare Sections''']].

== Task No. 11 - SMAC Preliminary Study ==
{{Top}}

For SMAC funded projects a preliminary study should be prepared and delivered to Johnson County SMAC officials prior to beginning any design work.

See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase I - Vision#Task 3 - Prepare SMAC Project Addition Study .28Form.29|'''Phase I, Task No. 3''']] for details and checklist for preparing this study.

== Task No. 12 - Other Agency Agreements (if Applicable) ==
{{Top}}

Local government agency agreements should be executed under [[index.php/Index.php/Phase I - Vision#Task 11 - Execute Other Agency Agreements|'''Phase I, Task No. 11''']]. If these agreements were not executed prior to beginning of design, execution shall be completed at this time in the preliminary design phase.

== Task No. 13 - Conduct Field Surveys ==
{{Top}}

Sufficient and required data necessary for design purposes shall be collected. The field survey shall be in accordance with state statutes, and current accepted and required surveying practices. Prior to the beginning of land survey or utility relocation work the letter to the residences adjacent to the project will be mailed out informing property owners of upcoming activities. Included with the letter is flood questionnaire to be used for storm drainage improvements consideration.
:'''[[Media:II-15f Survey Notice Template.docx|Exhibit No. II-13a]]''' ''is a sample pre-survey letter to residents''.
:[[Media:Flooding Questionnaire Template.doc|'''Exhibit No. II-13b''']] ''is a flood questionnaire''.

See City standard Scope of Services in '''[https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Phase_II_-_Preliminary_Design#Task_No._3_-_Consultant_Selection/Certification Phase II, Task 3]'''

for survey control requirements.

{{Note| Any Johnson County Vertical Control Network Bench Marks that will be disturbed as part of the project must be reset. The standard specification and a bid item for this work must be included in the contract documents. These benchmark locations can be found on Johnson County [https://maps.jocogov.org/ims/'''AIMS Mapping'''] web page under the Utilities layer.}}

== '''Task No. 14 - Continue Environmental Process''' ==
{{Top}}

Once authorization for the project is completed, KDOT will complete an initial review of the project location and scope to determine the degree of analyses that is required in order to comply with State and Federal environmental laws and regulations.

The BLP will receive from the City the Form '''[https://www.ksdot.gov/Home/Components/StaffDirectory/StaffDirectory/424/358?widgetId=2831 1307]''', along with all applicable permits attached, prior to obligation of funds, to comply with the NEPA process. (See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase III - Final Design#Task No. 14 - Submit PS&E Package|'''Phase III, Task No. 14''']]).
If detailed environmental analyses are required, the investigation will be initiated at this time. Final and complete analyses and application for permits by the City may be completed after Field Check and detailed design information is available. All investigation and permit acquisitions will be conducted in accordance with the referenced manual and BLP Policy Memos.

KDOT will control the environmental process task for projects with categorical exclusion. The complexity and effort will depend on each project. The exception would be if an Environmental Assessment or an Environmental Impact Statement is required. In this case, the City or Consultant would perform this task with KDOT and FHWA approval.

{{Note|''For KDOT Projects this task is tracked by KDOT. ''The Project Engineer shall ensure this task is complete''.}}

For more information see Chapter [[Media:4.0 Environmental 2020.pdf|'''4.0 Environmental''']] of KDOT's LPA Project Development Manual.

== Task No. 15 - Schedule First Public Information Meeting ==
{{Top}}

The first public information meeting is scheduled by the Consultant/Project Manager. This meeting shall occur during preliminary design and after field surveys. The purpose of this meeting is to present the concept plan, project schedule, hear citizen's concerns, answer questions, discuss design issues and introduce the involved City Officials and Consultant employees. For KDOT projects the Notice of Public Information Meeting must be published in the '''[https://sos.ks.gov/publications/kansas-register.html Kansas Register]''' and [http://www.thelegalrecord.net '''The Legal Record'''].

Public information invites shall be sent to the following interested parties:
*Subdivisions adjacent to the project
*Home Owners Associations adjacent to the project. Contact the City Manager's office for a current list of HOA contacts.
*Group Chairperson for [https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/neighborhoods/neighborhood-conservation-program/ '''Neighborhood Conservation Groups'''] adjacent to the project.
::''For the phone number of the group chairperson, contact the Neighborhood Planner at 913/895-6270.''

*Council Members of [https://www.opkansas.gov/city-council#docaccess-6697d0d83a5e515289d6982a5e4d5845414e7ae624a7c3d4185ff7f2818e9ee6 '''Ward'''(s)] adjacent to the project
*City Manager
*City Communications Manager and Communications Assistant
*Funding Sources (KDOT, CARS, SMAC, etc.)
*Other City (Olathe, Leawood, etc.)
*Public Works Management (PWMG)
*Supervisory Engineer
*Construction Inspector
*Consulting Firm
*Facilities Management (if meeting is being held at a City facility)
* If deemed necessary, Project Manager can invite police personnel.

The Property Owner Conversation Log should be used throughout the project to document all conversations with property owners.

{{Note|''This and all subsequent Public Information Meeting notices should ask if participants need a language interpreter or a hearing assistance device and a phone number. All meeting rooms shall be ADA accessible.'' The KDOT '''Equal Opportunity and Civil Rights Information''' brochure in [[Media:Title VI Brochure English.pdf|'''English''']] and [[Media:Title VI Brochure Spanish.pdf|'''Spanish''']] is to be made available at all public meetings.}}

{{Exhibit|II-15a_First Public Information Meeting - In Person.docx|No. II-15a|is an example Invitation Letter to property owners.}}
{{Exhibit|II-15b_First Public Information Meeting - Virtual.docx|No. II-15b|is an example Invitation Letter to property owners for a virtual meeting.}}
{{Exhibit|II-15c_Public Meeting Sign-In Sheet_.docx|No. II-15c|is a public meeting sign in sheet.}}
{{Exhibit|II-15d_Citizen Comment Form Example.doc|No. II-15d|is an example Public Meeting Citizen Comment Form.}}
{{Exhibit|II-15e_sample public meeting flyer.pdf|No. II-15e|is an example Public Meeting Handout.}}{{Exhibit|II-15f_Survey Notice Template.docx|No. II-15f|is an example of a notice of survey.}}

For those who wish to use a Blue Valley School District facility for the public meeting, an on-line [https://www.bluevalleyk12.org/Page/34388 '''Facility Rental Reservation Request'''] is available. Once the request is submitted, the BVSD Facility Scheduling Office will send a confirmation if the requested space is available.

== Task No. 16 - Begin Title Report Process ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant and/or the Project Manager shall prepare an RFP and forward to a minimum of three land title firms. The RFP should include a map or plan indicating the location of the project and the number of tracts of land involved. Proposals will be forwarded to the Project Manager whereby a firm will be selected and an agreement executed. The RFP should request the following information:
*legal description of the property and copy of recorded deed(s),
*mailing address of the property owner,
*all lien holders of record and recorded mortgage(s),
*all easements of record and copy of recorded document(s),
*dedicated R/W and copy of recorded document(s), and
*records of previous condemnations (available in the office of the District Court of Johnson County Kansas, Olathe, Kansas).

In addition, the RFP should provide instructions on methods of delivery of the title report acceptable to the City. Finally the RFP will establish a date for completing the title certification and report.

{{Exhibit|II-16a.xlt|No. II-16a|is a list of land title companies to be considered in RFP requests.}}
{{Exhibit|II-16b.dot|No. II-16b|is a sample land title RFP letter.}}
{{Exhibit|II-16c.pdf|No. II-16c|is a sample location map with parcel numbers.}}
{{Exhibit|II-16d.dot|No. II-16d|is a sample letter to selected land title company.}}
{{Exhibit|II-16e.dot|No. II-16e|is a sample letter to land title companies not selected.}}

== Task No. 17 - Begin Geotechnical Report Process ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Engineer shall determine what appropriate geotechnical information and data is necessary to adequately design the project. Drilled shaft foundations for bridges require specialized inspection. If drilled shaft foundations are anticipated and the Consultant cannot perform this work, the service of a subconsultant may be utilized after receiving written approval from the City. For projects designed by City Staff an RFP shall be prepared and forwarded to qualified firms.

Refer to [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 3 - Consultant Selection/Certification| '''Phase II, Task No. 3''']] for information on consultant selection process.

{{Exhibit|IV-2a.docx|No. IV-2a|is a list of materials testing / geotechnical service companies.}}

For projects involving bridge construction, refer to Geotechnical Bridge Foundation Investigation Practice, found in Chapter [[Media:6.0 Bridge Design 2020.pdf|'''6.0 Bridge Design''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual'''.

== '''Task No. 18 - Submit Request for Design Exception to KDOT''' ==
{{Top}}

If, during the development of plans for proposed federally funded projects, it is determined that there are circumstances that may make it impractical to meet the applicable guidelines, the Consultant/Project Manager shall submit in writing to the Bureau of Local Projects (KDOT) any request for project design exceptions, using a summary format like the form in [[Media:Design Exception Request Summary Form 2020.pdf|'''Figure 5.1''']] of the LPA Project Development Manual. A request for a design exception may be made at any time in the design process when sufficient information is available to adequately evaluate the situation.

All design exceptions are subject to approval by the Bureau Chief of BLP. The request may involve one or more of the following controlling criteria: design speed, lane and shoulder width, bridge width, structural capacity, horizontal and vertical alignment, grades, stopping sight distance, cross slopes, superelevation, horizontal and vertical clearances. Justification for the request shall be included along with cost estimates for reasonable alternates. Supporting documents should be consistent with Section 2.3.4 of the KDOT Design Manual, Volume I, Bureau of Road Design.

(See '''KDOT Road Design Manual 2014.pdf''' in ''K:\Library\References\KDOT Design Manual'').

For design exceptions documentation, use Overland Park [[Media:Design exceptions.docx|'''Design Exceptions''']] form to be submitted in addition to the KDOT form.

For projects with other funding sources all requests for design exceptions shall be directed to the City Engineer.

Document all design exceptions regardless of funding on [[Media:Design exceptions.docx|'''Design Exceptions''']] form and save to the project preliminary design folder.

For more information see section 5.2.2.2 (Design Exception/Allowance) in Chapter [[Media:5.0 Plan Development 2020.pdf|'''5.0 Plan Development''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual'''.

For additional information regarding design exceptions on non-KDOT projects refer to [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 9 - Design Criteria| '''Phase II, Task No. 9''']] .

== Task No. 19 - Prepare Field Check Plans ==
{{Top}}

Plans should be approximately 50 percent complete for field check review including any proposed easement and R/W takings along with a preliminary construction cost estimate and updated project schedule/checklist. The plans shall be stamped "Preliminary—Field Check".

{{Exhibit|I-13b.xlt|No. I-13b|is RUPIS project schedule.}}

See [[Media:Blp-memo-03-12.pdf|'''BLP Memo 03-12 Engineer's Professional Seal and Signature on Plans.''']]

For Field Check Plans preparation and submittal requirements on federally funded projects refer to Chapter [[Media:5.0 Plan Development 2020.pdf|'''5.0 Plan Development''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual'''.

== Task No. 20 - Distribute Plans to Utility Companies. Schedule Utility Meeting. ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager will distribute field check plans to all utility company representatives and schedule the utility meeting. An agenda should accompany the meeting invite. Meeting minutes will be prepared following the meeting and distributed to all scheduled attendees.

{{Note|''When scheduling utility meeting in Google calendar, in order to avoid conflicts with other utility meetings, CH-PW Utilities (found under Rooms tab) shall be "invited" as an attendee to all meetings, pre-bid conferences and pre-construction conferences or any meetings that require utility company attendance''.}}

The purpose of the utility meeting is as follows:
*check accuracy of utility locations on plans,
*establish what utilities need to be relocated,
*See [[Media:KCP&L DWG 130.1-12.pdf|'''Evergy DWG 130.1-12''']] for clearance requirements from signal or streetlight poles to utility lines. Verify all poles have proper clearance.
*establish timetable for accomplishing the relocations, and
*re-confirm utility representative contacts.

See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 7 - Initiate Utility Coordination. Schedule Utility Meeting (optional)|'''Phase II, Task No. 7''']] for exhibits.

== Task No. 21 - Update Preliminary Cost Estimate ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager shall prepare and submit an updated preliminary construction cost estimate. The form for this estimate shall resemble the Bid form with the item description, unit, approximate quantity, unit price and total. KDOT-BLP should receive a copy of this estimate.

All cost estimates shall utilize the City's [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Bid_item_list '''Standard Bid Items'''] and correspond to the measurement and payment as shown in the [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=City_of_Overland_Park_Standard_Specifications_-_2020 '''City of Overland Park Standard Specifications'''].

== Task No. 22 - Update Preliminary Cash Flow Projection ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager shall prepare a preliminary cash flow projection, including construction costs, and submit it to the City Finance Department on the standard form.

See [[Media:Cash Flow TH-1027 6-2019 Rome.xlsx|'''Exhibit II-6''']].

== Task No. 23 - Distribute Plans for Field Check ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Engineer shall distribute field check plans along with a copy of the project cost estimate and updated RUPIS project schedule electronically via '''Bluebeam''' session to the following:
*all members of the Project Team (see '''[[Media:Maintenance Plan Review Process 2026.docx|Maintenance Plan Review Process]]''' for Maintenance Division routing),
*City Engineer,
*City Traffic Engineer,

For KDOT projects the electronic field check plans shall be provided to the BLP for transmittal to the Environmental Services Section(KDOT), who will transmit plans to appropriate regulatory and resource agencies. Invitations to the regulatory and resource agencies to participate in the field check should be rendered if environmental mitigation is required. The Consultant/Project Engineer shall provide a project cost estimate to the BLP with the plans.

For the instructions on submitting E-Plans to BLP see the following:''

'''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/5601/638733200544670000 User Guide for Electronic Plans Review]''';
'''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/5595/638733200673170000 Specifications for Electronic Plans Submittal]''';
'''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/5211/638733041153400000 FTP Instructions]'''.

{{Note|''For KDOT Projects this task is tracked by KDOT. ''The Project Engineer shall ensure this task is complete''.}}

== Task No. 24 - Submit Required Permit Applications ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager shall determine what permits will be required in order to construct the project. The following is a list of possible permits required:

*City of Overland Park [https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/building-construction/buildings-construction-licenses-permits-inspections/ '''Floodplain Development Permit'''] - necessary for any work in a FEMA floodplain, including areas that will be FEMA floodplain once Johnson County Watershed studies are adopted.

{{Exhibit|II-24a.pdf|No. II-24a|is a memo of the steps to be taken on Public Works projects.}}

{{Exhibit|II-24c.pdf|No. II-24c|is FEMA's Procedures for "No Rise" Certifications.}}

*[[Media:Temp Erosion & Pollution Control for PW Projects .pdf|'''Temporary Erosion and Pollution Control for Public Works Projects''']] is a memo summarizing permit requirements and project team procedures for Public Works projects.

*When a project disturbs more than 1 (one) acre, a Notice of Intent (NOI) permit from Kansas Department of Health and Environment (KDHE) and a Land Disturbance Permit (LDP) from the City of Overland Park are required.
:The NOI permit is submitted during final design phase of the project. The permit submittal requires clearance letters for the project site from the following agencies:
::Kansas Department of Wildlife, Parks and Tourism for threatened or endangered species habitat. Contact KDWPT by emailing the environmental review request (see [[Media:II-24 KDWPT Notification Letter.pdf|'''example''')]] to ess@ksoutdoors.com.
::Kansas Historical Society for historical and archaeological sites. The information for the project should be submitted to the KSHS via the Kansas Review & Compliance (KSR&C) system. Go to [https://review.kshs.org/Account/Login '''http://review.kshs.org'''] to create an account or log in to an existing account.
:Refer to [[index.php/Index.php/Phase III - Final Design#Task No. 9 - Submit Final Check Plans for Review|'''Phase III, Task No.9''']] for the NOI application.
:The LDP is obtained prior to commencing construction activities. Refer to [[index.php/Index.php/Phase V - Construction#Task No. 8 - Complete Contractor Permits|'''Phase V, Task No.8''']] for the LDP application.

*Permit to Construct-Obstruction in streams from Kansas Department of Agriculture''' [https://www.agriculture.ks.gov/divisions-programs/division-of-water-resources/water-structures/stream-and-floodplain-permits Division of Water Resources]''' is necessary for any work on a stream with more than 240 acres tributary drainage (some exceptions).

:'''[https://www.agriculture.ks.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/2616/638461107218370000 Exhibit No. II-24d]''' ''is DWR application for permit for Obstruction in Streams.''

*State of Kansas - Environmental Coordination Act (ECA) - approval letters from various state agencies are typically required for Stream Obstructions permits and sometimes others. Contacting these agencies directly for their approval letter can accelerate permitting.

* Listing of contact information and addresses for the [https://www.agriculture.ks.gov/divisions-programs/division-of-water-resources/water-structures/environmental-coordination-act '''ECA agencies'''].

*'''[https://www.kdhe.ks.gov/DocumentCenter/View/41615/Plugging-Abandoned-Wells-Article-PDF?bidId= Plugging Packet]''' ''is a handout detailing KDHE's requirements for plugging abandoned water wells.''

*Corps of Engineers 404 Permit - necessary for any work located within a "water of the United States", including wetlands. '''http://www.usace.army.mil/Missions/CivilWorks/RegulatoryProgramandPermits.'''

:{{Exhibit|II-24f.pdf|No. II-24f|is a sample letter requesting a project be reviewed for nationwide permit coverage. (Visit [http://www.usace.army.mil/Missions/CivilWorks/RegulatoryProgramandPermits.aspx '''COE website'''] for latest forms and instructions if an individual permit is needed).}}

*FEMA Conditional and Final Letters of Map Revision - required for certain type of major work in the floodplain, as coordinated with the floodplain administrator (see City of OP Floodplain Development Permit, above). The latest permit forms and guidance can be obtained from [https://www.fema.gov/national-flood-insurance-program/national-flood-insurance-program-forms '''FEMA's website'''].

*KDOT Highway Permits - necessary for construction or utility relocation within KDOT Right of Way are done using the online [https://www.ksdot.gov/doing-business/permits/kdot-utility-permit-system-kups '''KUPS system''']:

::::'''''Highway Permit Use of Right of Way'''''

::::'''''Cased Utility Line Waiver'''''

::::'''''Highway Permit for Highway Access'''''

::::'''''Highway Permit Attachments to Bridges and Other Structures'''''

::::'''''Access Application Information Sheet'''''

:See [[Media:KDOT Forms Instructions.pdf|'''Preparation of Application for Highway Permit Agreements''']] for instructions on preparation of KDOT Forms 304, 308, 309 and 334.

See '''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/1305/638711379952670000 2007 KDOT Utility Accommodation Policy]''' for additional information.

All project related state and/or federal permits must be submitted and Form '''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/1579/638733210123230000 1307]''' completed prior to submittal of final check plans. (See [[Media:Blp-memo-10-08.pdf|'''BLP Memo 10-08''']]). This shall be completed at least four months prior to project letting.

== Task No. 25 - Begin Field Check Plan Review ==
The persons who receive field check plans (see [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 23 - Distribute Plans for Field Check|'''Task No. 23''']]) shall commence plan review. The review shall be completed prior to the scheduled Field Check meeting.

{{Note| Any Johnson County Vertical Control Network Bench Marks that will be disturbed as part of the project must be reset. The standard specification and a bid item for this work must be included in the contract documents. These benchmark locations can be found on Johnson County [https://maps.jocogov.org/ims/'''AIMS Mapping'''] web page under the Utilities layer.}}

== Task No. 26 - Coordinate Electrical Service for Traffic Signals, Street Lighting and other City Facilities==
If applicable, begin [[Media:II-26 Electrical Services Address Procedures.pdf|'''Electrical Service Address Procedures''']] for streetlighting controllers, traffic signal controllers, electrical control centers for park irrigation controllers, flood warning or road weather information systems.

As of mid-2025, Evergy only accepts Account Setup Forms via their [https://apps.evergy.com/ServiceWork ''' online form'''].

The online form requests the following information

* '''PROJECT INFORMATION'''
** Request Type select [New/Additional Service]
** Premise Type select [Commercial]
* '''BILLING INFORMATION'''
** Name - City of Overland Park
** ID Type select [Tax ID]
** Tax ID - Enter the City's Tax ID
** Address, City, State, Zip
** Phone
** Cell Phone
** Email
* '''SERVICE LOCATION'''
** Select PERM
** Street Number - NUMBER only. You can not add LC or SC to this field
** Street Name - Add LC or SC to the END of Street Name
** Street Type
** City, State, Zip
** Subdivision - enter N/A
** Lot - enter N/A
** Block - enter N/A
* '''SERVICE INFORMATION'''
** Service Requested By - Enter name of person requesting service
** Requester Phone
** Requester Email
* '''ELECTRICAL INFORMATION'''
** Service Size (amperage) select [Other] - enter 100 amps
** Voltage & Phase select [120/240 (Single Phase/ 3 wire)]
** Service Line Location - [Overhead]
** Alternate Energy Source - [No]
** Standby Generation - [No]
** Job Description enter the project location, description, desired service rate and general time frame of when power will be needed.
** Attachments - Attach plan sheet showing desired cabinet location
* '''CONTACT INFORMATION'''
** Requester - Fill in this information again
** Electrician enter contact information for traffic signal inspector
** Primary Job Contact - Select the requester so Evergy design engineer will contact you

Fill out the online form to get an Evergy account number and to have Evergy provide you with the contact information for an Evergy design engineer that will facilitate a new service feed.

When the project is being designed by a consultant provide the contact information you received for Evergy design engineer to the consultant so they can coordinate electrical service for the project.

If Evergy does not contact you within 30 days please email the Evergy Business Center to ensure receipt of your request.

It is important that you specify the electrical service rate in the "Comments" section to insure the City of Overland Park will be billed the correct rate. The correct rate is listed in each of the applicable Service Applications.

*See [https://drive.google.com/file/d/1pnyJiaJjbc-fi6Havd9ib0yjcXmgIITr/view ''' City of Overland Park Tax Exempt Certificate''']
*See [[Media:Form ST-28b Statement for Sales Tax Exemption.pdf|'''Sales Tax Exemption Form ST-28B''']]

The Account Form, Overland Park Tax Exempt Certificate and the Sales Tax Exemption Form ST-28B is required to be submitted for each control center.

== Task No. 26a - Coordinate Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) Service for Traffic Signals ==
{{Top}}

If applicable, begin [[Media:Natural gas service address procedures.pdf|'''Natural Gas Service Address Procedures''']] for CNG generators.

*[[Media:Kansas city metro gas service area boundary map.pdf|Exhibit 1: '''Kansas City Metro Gas Service Area Boundary Map''']]

*[[Media:Atmos energy pre-approved contractors list.pdf|Exhibit 2: '''Atmos Energy Pre-Approved Contractors List''']]

*[[Media:Kansas Gas Service Line Application.docx|Exhibit 3: '''Kansas Gas Service Line Application (rev 01-01-14)''']]

*[[Media:Kansas Gas Cover Letter Sample.docx|Exhibit 4: '''Kansas Gas Cover Letter Sample''']]

*[[Media:Atmos Energy new meter set application.xlsx|Exhibit 5: '''Atmos Energy New Meter Set Application''']]

*[[Media:Atmos Energy Elevated Pressure Request Form.pdf|Exhibit 6: '''Atmos Energy Request for Elevated Pressure''']]

*[[Media:Atmos Energy Cover Letter Sample.docx|Exhibit 7: '''Atmos Energy Cover Letter Sample''']]

*[https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/building-construction/buildings-construction-licenses-permits-inspections/ Exhibit 8: '''Commercial Building Permit Application''']

== Task No. 26b - Coordinate Removal of Streetlights Purchased from Evergy ==
{{Top}}

If applicable, begin the [[Media:Removal of Existing Streetlight Procedure.pdf|'''Removal of Existing Streetlight Procedure''']] for streetlights that were purchased from Evergy (KCP&L).

*See [[Media:Letter to Black & McDonald requesting the removal of streetlights.pdf|'''sample letter to Black & McDonald''']] requesting proposals for removing streetlights.

*See [[Media:Proposal to remove streetlights from Black & McDonald.pdf|'''sample streetlight removal proposal''']] from Black & McDonald.

== Task No. 27 - Schedule Field Check Meeting ==
{{Top}}

The Project Manager shall schedule the Field Check meeting. Representatives of all funding sources are to be invited. The City Engineer/City Traffic Engineer or their designated representatives will attend all meetings. Prior to Field Check Meeting, coordinate with Engineering Services for development projects permitted in the area.

:[[Media:II-7e Sign in sheet.docx|'''Exhibit No. II-7e''']] ''is a meeting sign in sheet''.

Field check will be conducted at a pre-determined location. The Consultant or the City will provide a set of plans for field check. BLP will review comments and will discuss any necessary actions with the City and the Consultant.
After the field check meeting the consultant or the City will distribute minutes and provide BLP with a response to the issues identified/discussed in the meeting.

After field check plans have been received by BLP, a Field Check Report will be developed and provided to the City, Consultant and other necessary parties.

During the site review/field check meeting it should be determined if the proposed project will have a potential impact on rail facilities. If it appears that work will be near or within railroad right-of way, the LPA will coordinate with the railroad to determine the need for flagging, liability insurance, agreements, and a possible diagnostic review.

== '''Task No. 28 - Execute Official Agreement with KDOT''' ==
When the official KDOT agreement is received by the Project Manager, it is reviewed/approved by the Law Department and placed on the City Council agenda for consideration.

:'''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/1535/638736480783200000 Exhibit No. II-28]''' is Official KDOT Utility Accommodation Policy/Agreement''.

Compliance with KDOT's Non-Discriminations policies is required on all contracts. See '''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/2397/638731509780470000 Title VI Handbook]''' for more information.

== '''Task No. 29 - Continue Environmental Process''' ==

For more information see Chapter [[Media:4.0 Environmental 2020.pdf|'''4.0 Environmental''']] of KDOT's LPA Project Development Manual.

== '''Task No. 30 - Obtain Decision for Design Exception from KDOT''' ==
The Project Manager shall keep in close contact with BLP-KDOT, if a design exception was requested. Once the decision has been made, the results shall be disseminated to all interested and required parties.
== '''Task No. 31 - Complete Public Interest Finding''' ==
{{Top}}

If the deviation from a standard practice is requested, the Project Manager shall submit a '''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/1957/638744283760630000 Proprietary Product Certification Form]''' or a Public Interest Finding (PIF) to BLP explaining the need for the deviation and why it is in the public's best interest to allow it.

For detailed information regarding the use of proprietary products see FHWA's [https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/construction/cqit/fr_qa.cfm '''Construction Program Guide'''].

== '''Task No. 32 - NHS Approval Procedure''' ==
{{Top}}

For projects on principal arterials, the Project Manager shall request special approval to administer a federally funded project on the National Highway System route, documenting the reason for the request and demonstrating that the City has successfully administered a non-NHS project. This request shall be submitted to the BLP for approval.

== Task No. 33 - Submit Right-of-Way Plans/Legal Descriptions ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager shall submit this information on the date as established with the project schedule. The legal descriptions shall be provided in electronic format along with a written original sealed by a registered land surveyor in the State of Kansas. A tract map for each property shall accompany the legal descriptions. The tract map shall clearly identify each type of proposed taking. Also included with the submittal shall be a copy of all the title company information. At this time tract files should be created in project folder under '''\2-Preliminary Design\ROW and Easement Documents\Tract Files.'''

{{Exhibit|Legal_Descriptions_and_Tract_Map.pdf|No. II-33|is an example of legal descriptions and tract map.}}
{{Exhibit|II-33a.pdf|No. II-33a|ia a Memorandum from the Register of Deeds, Johnson County, regarding legal description requirements for document indexing.}}
{{Exhibit|II-33b.pdf|No. II-33b|is a Sample Template from the Register of Deeds, Johnson County, showing required format (margin & paper size) for recording documents.}}

All prepared documents must conform to the Register of Deeds requirements and filed electronically with Johnson County RTA. If rejected, the City is notified by RTA via email.

{{Exhibit|JoCo_RTA_Rejection_Email.pdf|No. II-33c|is an example of rejection email from JoCo RTA.}}

(The rejection email is generated automatically and it applies to the whole package of documents submitted. Therefore the entire package is rejected even if only one tract has an error. It is up to the Project Engineer or Engineering Technician to figure out which one.)

{{Note|In some instances Long Term Temporary Construction Easements (TCE) have been granted to the City during the development process. These existing TCEs are usually adjacent to thoroughfares. During the R/W Plan review the project technician is to check for any previously granted Long Term TCEs adjacent to the project. The TCEs can be viewed in ArcMap by adding ''"Easement and ROW"'' Data Layer from ''"Property"'' Data Group. Each easement in this layer is linked to a ''pdf'' image of the document by which that easement was acquired.}}

== Task No. 34 - Hire Appraiser ==
{{Top}}

Project Manager shall form a Selection Committee and a qualification based selection process shall be used.
Appraiser and Acquisition Agent may be acquired by a stand-alone RFQ process or inclusion as a component of the qualifications based selection process for the Design Professional/Consultant, or as may be required by applicable federal or state laws/regulations.

{{Exhibit|II-34a APPRAISERS 3-23-26.docx|No. II-34a|is a list of City qualified appraisers.}}
{{Exhibit|II-34b_RFQ_Appraisal_Acquisition_2025.docx|No. II-34b|is a copy of City's Request for Qualifications (RFQ).}}
{{Exhibit|Summary_of_Takings_2025.pdf|No. II-34c|is a sample summary of the project right-of-way and easement takings.}}
{{Exhibit|II-34d Appraiser Agreement under 10K rev 5-16-24.docx|No. II-34d|is an Appraiser Agreement for fee under $10,000.}}
{{Exhibit|II-34e Appraiser Agreement over 10K rev 5-16-24.docx|No. II-34e|is an Appraiser Agreement for fee over $10,000.}}
{{Exhibit|II-34f Sample Intra-City Email Memo to Selection Committee 2025.pdf|No. II-34f|is a sample Intra City memorandum to the Selection Committee.}}
{{Exhibit|Proposal_City_of_OP_2025.pdf|No. II-34g|is a sample Proposal for Appraisal.}}
{{Exhibit|II-34h Ranking sheet rw proposals.pdf|No. II-34h| is a sample of ranking sheet.}}

See '''[https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/real_estate/local_public_agencies/lpa_guide/ch11.cfm FHWA's Real Estate Acquisition Guide For Local Public Agencies]''' for information that will be necessary when a project is started that requires the acquisition of real estate and receives any Federal funding.

{{Exhibit|II-34i appraisal review.dot|No. II-34i|is a copy of Appraisal Review form.}}

LPA representatives, appraisers and acquisition contractors involved with the R/W acquisition process must be certified in accordance with the ROWCP requirements. Refer to Chapter [[Media:7.0 Right of Way 2024.pdf|'''7.0 Right of Way''']] of KDOT's LPA Project Development Manual for additional information.

== Task No. 35 - Prepare R/W and Easement Documents ==
{{Top}}

The Project Manager will coordinate with the Contract Specialist assigned to the project the preparation of the various documents necessary for the takings required to construct the project.

The following is the list of the most commonly used documents:

:*[[Media:Access-easement-option-1.docx|'''Access Easement Option 1''']]
:*[[Media:Access-easement-option-2.docx|'''Access Easement Option 2''']]
:*[[Media:Deed-of-dedication.doc|'''Deed of Dedication''']]
:*[[Media:Kansas-warranty-deed.docx|'''Kansas Warranty Deed''']]
:*[[Media:Notice-of-termination-of-temporary-construction-easement.docx|'''Notice of Termination of Temporary Construction Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Permanent-drainage-easement-city-grantee.docx|'''Permanent Drainage Easement - City Grantee''']]
:*[[Media:Permanent-drainage-easement-city-grantor.docx|'''Permanent Drainage Easement - City Grantor''']]
:*[[Media:Permanent-drainage-easement-city-grantor-and-grantee.docx|'''Permanent Drainage Easement - City Grantor and Grantee''']]
:*[[Media:Permanent-maint-access-easement.docx|'''Permanent Maintenance Access Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Permanent-right-of-way-easement.docx|'''Permanent Right of Way Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Quit-claim-deed.docx|'''Quit Claim Deed''']]
:*[[Media:Real Estate Mortgage Release - Corporation.docx|'''Real Estate Mortgage Release - Corporation''']] (to be obtained when value of takings exceeds $50K)
:*[[Media:Real Estate Mortgage Release - Individual.docx|'''Real Estate Mortgage Release - Individual''']] (to be obtained when value of takings exceeds $50K)
:*[[Media:Retaining Wall Easement.docx|'''Retaining Wall Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Sidewalk-and-traffic-signal-system-easement-2.docx|'''Sidewalk and Traffic Signal System Easement''']]
:*[[Media:PSE & UE.docx|'''Sidewalk and Utility Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Sidewalk-easement.docx|'''Sidewalk Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Sidewalk-variance-ce-std.docx|'''Sidewalk Variance - City Engineer Standard''']]
:*[[Media:Sidewalk-variance-pwc.docx|'''Sidewalk Variance - Public Works Committee''']]
:*[[Media:Sight Triangle Easement .docx|'''Sight Triangle Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Street-light-easement-2.docx|'''Street Light Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Temporary-construction-easement-city-grantee rev 6-9-22.docx|'''Temporary Construction Easement - City Grantee''']]
:*[[Media:Temporary-construction-easement-city-grantor.docx|'''Temporary Construction Easement - City Grantor''']]
:*[[Media:Temporary-Construction-Easement-Grading-Version-1.docx|'''Temporary Construction Easement for Grading - Version 1''']]
:*[[Media:Temporary-Construction-Easement-Grading-Version-2.docx|'''Temporary Construction Easement for Grading - Version 2''']]
:*[[Media:Temporary-Construction-Easement-Long-Term.docx|'''Temporary Construction Easement - Long Term''']]
:*[[Media:Traffic-signal-system-easement-2.docx|'''Traffic Signal System Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Utility-easement-city-grantee.docx|'''Utility Easement - City Grantee''']]
:*[[Media:Utility-easement-city-grantor.docx|'''Utility Easement - City Grantor''']]
:*[[Media:Utility-easement-city-grantor-and-grantee.docx|'''Utility Easement - City Grantor and Grantee''']]

The following documents are shown for information only and will be generated by the City of Overland Park:

:*[[Media:EASEMENT ACQUISITION AGREEMENT-final 3-20-25.docx|'''Easement Acquisition Agreement''']]
:*[[Media:EASEMENT ACQUISITION AGREEMENT-partial mortgage final 3-20-2025.docx|'''Acquisition Agreement with Partial Mortgage Release''']]
:*[[Media:Amendment to EASEMENT ACQUISITION AGREEMENT 3-20-25.docx|'''Amendment to Easement Acquisition Agreement''']]
:*[[Media:Administrative Settlement Form 3-20-25.docx|'''Administrative Settlement Form''']]
:*[[Media:Restoration Agreement template 3-20-2025.docx|'''Restoration Agreement''']] and [[Media:Restoration Agreement-Exhibit A template.docx|'''Exhibit A''']]
:*[[Media:RIGHT OF ENTRY AGREEMENT 12.09.25.docx|'''Right of Entry Agreement''']]
All prepared right-of-way and easement documents must conform to the Register of Deeds requirements. See [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Phase_II_-_Preliminary_Design#Task_No._33_-_Submit_Right-of-Way_Plans/Legal_Descriptions'''Phase II, Task No. 33'''] for exhibits.

== Task No. 36 - Schedule Second Public Information Meeting ==
{{Top}}

The purpose of this meeting is to present the Right of Way plans to the citizens. For KDOT projects the Notice of Public Information Meeting must be published in the '''[https://sos.ks.gov/publications/kansas-register.html Kansas Register]''' and [http://www.thelegalrecord.net '''The Legal Record'''].

See '''Phase II, Task No. 15''' for list of invites.

{{Exhibit|II-36a-1_Second Public Information Meeting - With Federal Funds.docx|No. II-36a-1|is an example Invitation Letter to property owners. Project w/ Federal Funds}}
{{Exhibit|II-36a-2_Second Public Information Meeting - Without Federal Funds.docx|No. II-36a-2|is an example Invitation Letter to property owners. - w/out Federal Funds}}
{{Exhibit|II-36b_Public Meeting Sign-In Sheet.docx|No. II-36b|is a public meeting sign in sheet.}}
{{Exhibit|II-36c_Sample Public Meeting Handout.pdf|No. II-36c|is a public meeting handout.}}{{Exhibit|II-36d-1_Third Public Information Meeting - In Person, No Presentation.docx|No. II-36d-1|Third Public Information Meeting - In Person.}}{{Exhibit|II-36d-2_Third Public Information Meeting - In Person, With Presentation.docx|No. II-36d-2|Third Public Information Meeting - In Person, With Presentation.}}

{{Note|This and all subsequent Public Information Meeting notices should ask if participants need a language interpreter or a hearing assistance device and a phone number. All meeting rooms shall be ADA accessible. The KDOT '''Equal Opportunity and Civil Rights Information''' brochure in [[Media:Title VI Brochure English.pdf|'''English''']] and [[Media:Title VI Brochure Spanish.pdf|'''Spanish''']] regarding equal opportunity contracting are to be made available at all public meetings.}}

For those who wish to use a Blue Valley School District facility for the public meeting, an on-line '''[https://facilities.bluevalleyk12.org/ Facility Rental Reservation Request]''' is available. Once the request is submitted, the BVSD Facility Scheduling Office will send a confirmation if the requested space is available.

Pavement Marking Design Manual

2026-07-16T19:53:28Z

Brian Geiger: /* Turn Arrows for Lane Assignments */ Clarified the less frequent use of straight arrows and combination straight/turn arrows which are more reserved for complex approaches.

== General Purpose of the Design Manual ==
'''Last Revised July 2024''' Pavement Marking Design Manual has been written to serve as a general guideline when designing pavement markings for the City of Overland Park, Kansas. Although there are specific design requirements, the guidelines contained herein should not be a substitute for proper engineering design and judgment based on specific situations. All pavement markings shall comply with the latest adopted edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). The purpose of this Pavement Marking Design Manual is to aid consultants as well as City of Overland Park staff to be consistent in the practice of designing pavement marking plans. It provides an overview of what tasks are expected to be included in the scope of the design; what information should be included on the plan sheets; what kind of backup design information is required; and what is expected for the final deliverable product. Any questions regarding this manual may be directed to Brian Geiger, Supervisory Traffic Engineer Engineer at the City of Overland Park, Kansas at (913) 895-6020 or by email at Brian.Geiger@opkansas.org.

=== Purpose of Pavement Marking: ===
Pavement marking provides guidance and information to the roadway user as well as supplement other traffic control devices such as signs, traffic signals and other markings. Pavement markings can convey regulations, guidance, or warnings.

Wherever applicable, this design manual should be used in conjunction with the latest adopted edition of the [https://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno_11th_Edition.htmManual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)] by the Federal Highway Administration. The current editions of the [https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/building-construction/civil-engineering/construction-standards/ Design and Construction Standards, Volume 2 Construction Specifications (latest edition)], the latest edition of the [https://drive.google.com/file/d/1bIGwfekpRZm8O7R4sHaKTiqxFKb9Wlev/view Pavement Marking Standard Details] and the [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Approved_Materials Approved Materials List], hereafter referred to as “City Standards” should be followed during the design of all pavement marking plans.

== Public or Private Ownership and Maintenance ==
Different policies apply to pavement marking based on the final ownership and maintenance. The two types of pavement markings are 1) those that are installed in the public right-of-way that will be owned and maintained by the City of Overland Park and 2) privately owned pavement markings that are installed on private property that will not be maintained by the City of Overland Park. Although each of the categories will be discussed, the design guidelines contained herein only apply to pavement markings that are within the public right-of-way or other City easements that are owned and maintained by the City of Overland Park.

=== City-Owned and Maintained Pavement Markings ===
All City-owned and maintained pavement markings shall be designed in accordance with the design criteria listed herein and use all pre-approved materials from the City’s [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Approved_Materials Approved Materials List], which is available at City Hall or from the City’s web page. All pavement markings that are being designed in conjunction with the development of any public street or any developments that require modification of any pavement marking within the public right-of-way or other City easements by private consultants working for a developer are required to meet City Standards.

=== Privately Owned and Maintained Pavement Markings ===
A private street as defined, in [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks-gbp/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-199 City Resolution 4065], means a right-of-way which affords principal access to property abutting thereon, which right-of-way is owned, controlled and maintained by persons other than the public, which is named in accordance with the street name designated system on the City map and signed in accordance with Chapter 13.10 of the Overland Park Municipal Code. It is generally owned and maintained by a homes or business association or private citizens. The private streets are designated by a “Private Street” sign at the point of entry and typically have street name signs.

All pavement markings on private property are not required to be constructed using City approved materials. However, pavement markings on the approaches of a private street or drive that tie into City streets shall be designed to conform to these guidelines and the MUTCD. The City may make requests to the owners to maintain private pavement markings from time to time in order to improve visibility, reduce driver confusion, or to coordinate with lane use changes that would affect the traveling public in conjunction with the lane use on adjacent public roadways.

== Functional Roadway Classifications ==
The following pavement marking design criteria will be used for all thoroughfare roadways, super collector roadways, collector roadways and residential roadways as identified on the latest edition of the City of Overland Park [https://drive.google.com/file/d/1VcyyryorZldaO5RUxDfgfW1GhqFVs2Rg/view “Official Street Map”] available from the Planning and Development Services Department.

=== Thoroughfare Roadway ===
The thoroughfare roadway classification includes all thoroughfare roadways whether divided or undivided; whether improved or unimproved; and whether two-lane, four-lane or six-lane excluding auxiliary left and right turn lanes; regardless of the volume of traffic.

=== Collector Roadway ===
The collector roadway classification includes all super-collector and collector roadways regardless of the number of lanes; whether improved or unimproved; regardless of the volume of traffic.

=== Residential Roadway ===
The residential roadway classification includes all local residential and cul-de-sac roadways; whether improved or unimproved; regardless of the volume of traffic.

== Colors of Markings ==
Markings shall be either white or yellow and conform to the standard highway colors.

=== White Pavement Markings ===
White markings, when used for longitudinal lines shall delineate the separation of traffic flows in the same direction or the right-hand edge of the roadway. White markings shall also be used for crosswalk lines, stop lines and pavement marking symbols, with the exception of the symbol of accessibility and interstate route shields, etc.

=== Yellow Pavement Markings ===
Yellow markings, when used for longitudinal lines shall delineate the separation of traffic traveling in opposite directions; the left-hand edge of the roadway or divided street or one-way streets; and the separation of two-way left turn lanes.

== Function, Widths and Classifications of Pavement Markings ==
There are several different types of pavement markings applicable to specific situations. The City of Overland Park has specific design considerations that should be reviewed for each type of pavement marking.

=== Function ===
*A double line indicates maximum or special restrictions and does not allow any crossing of the line.
*A single solid line discourages crossing.
*A broken line indicates a permissive condition
*A dotted line provides guidance or warning of a downstream change in lane function.

=== Widths and Patterns ===
*A normal width line is 4”.
*A wide line is twice the width of a normal line, or 8”.
*A double line consists of two parallel lines separated by a 4” space (measured from edge of line to edge of line).
*A broken line consists of a normal line segment separated by gaps.
*A dotted line is a noticeably shorter line segment separated by shorter gaps than used for a broken line. The width of a dotted line extension shall be the same width of the line it extends.

=== Classification of Markings ===
Markings are either classified as longitudinal, transverse, or symbols.

==== Longitudinal Markings ====
These are lines that generally run parallel to the direction of traffic and include:
#Solid double centerlines
#Broken centerlines
#Solid and broken centerlines
#Broken lane lines
#Solid lane lines
#Broken lane extension lines
#Edge lines
#Solid lane lines
#Lane drop lines
#Bicycle lane lines, etc.

==== Transverse Markings ====
These are lines that generally run perpendicular to or at an angle to the direction of traffic and include:
#Diagonal crosshatch lines
#Chevrons
#Stop lines
#Crosswalk lines
#Roundabout extension edge lines
#Perpendicular or angled parking space lines, etc.

==== Symbol Markings ====
Symbol markings are all other markings that are not considered “lines” but consist of geometric shapes or words. They include:
#Yield lines
#Turn arrows, thru arrows, or combination arrows
#Merge arrows
#Railroad crossing markings
#ONLY markings
#Bicycle lane symbols
#Bicycle lane arrows
#Sharrow markings
#International symbol of accessibility, etc.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#General Purpose of the Design Manual|'''General Purpose''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=General Purpose of the Design Manual]]
|}
----

== Yellow Centerline Markings ==
Yellow centerline markings are used to delineate the separation of traffic lanes that have opposite directions of travel. They are used on thoroughfare roadways, collector roadways, and super collector roadways regardless of the posted speed. Centerline markings are not installed on residential roadways except in specific situations in advance of intersections as addressed below.

The yellow centerline markings, whether broken or solid double lines, should be continuous through residential drive entrances and alleys but should break at intersections with public streets and private streets as defined above. Breaks in the centerline should not be made at single family or multi-family drive entrances. They should also not be broken at intersections with commercial drive entrances unless the main roadway has left or right turn lanes accessing the site or the intersection with the commercial drive is controlled by a traffic signal. Where a horseshoe cds intersects and creates a T-intersection, break the yellow centerline markings at the tangent points and place a dash at the median. If the horseshoe cds is a 4-way intersection, break the yellow centerline markings at the tangent points and do not place a dash at the median.

At breaks in the centerline, the beginning and end of the centerline should be evaluated based on the left turn movement of the design vehicle from the side street. The beginning or end of the line should be at the point where the design vehicle does not drive over the line while making a left turn. This should be determined using turning movement templates for the specific design vehicle.

=== Centerlines on Residential Streets ===
Centerlines are not typically installed on residential streets. However, the following condition would warrant centerline markings near intersections with other streets:
# When a residential street has more than one approach lane to an intersection that is marked with solid white lane markings, a double yellow centerline should be installed in advance of the stop line for a minimum of 50’ or for the length of the solid white lane markings.

=== Centerlines on Collector Streets ===
All two-lane collector streets, regardless of width, shall be striped with a centerline consisting of a 4” wide broken yellow line with a 6’ stripe and an 18’ gap (3:1 ratio). Collector streets that consist of more than two lanes shall be striped with a 4" solid double yellow centerline.

See the section on [[#Transitions from Normal Centerlines|Transitions from Normal Centerlines]] below for treatment of centerlines at intersections.

=== Centerlines on Apartment Streets ===
Apartment streets that are 36’ wide (measured from back of curb to back of curb), that have a posted speed limit of 30 mph, shall have a marked centerline consisting of a 4” wide broken yellow line with a 6’ stripe and an 18’ gap (3:1 ratio).

See the section on [[#Transitions from Normal Centerlines|Transitions from Normal Centerlines]] below for treatment of centerlines at intersections.

=== Centerlines on Commercial and Industrial Streets ===
Commercial streets or industrial streets may range in width from 36’ to 52’ (measured from back of curb to back of curb) to accommodate left or right turn lanes or additional through lanes for added vehicle capacity. Centerlines should consist of 4” wide broken yellow lines with a 6’ stripe and an 18’ gap (3:1 ratio) or 4” solid double yellow lines depending on the number of lanes. Broken yellow centerlines would be used where there are no auxiliary lanes such as right or left turn lanes. Double yellow centerlines should be used at multi-lane cross-sections and may terminate at an intersection with a painted median. Depending on the number of access points, a two-way left turn lane may be provided as approved by the City Engineer. [[#Painted Medians|Painted medians]] and [[#Two-way Left Turn Lanes (TWLTL)|Two-way left turn lanes]] are discussed below.

See the section on [[#Transitions from Normal Centerlines|Transitions from Normal Centerlines]] below for treatment of centerlines at intersections.

=== Centerlines on Super-Collector Roadways ===
Super-collector roadways range from two undivided through lanes that are 36’ wide (back of curb to back of curb), to divided roadways with four through lanes. Centerline pavement markings should either be 4” wide broken yellow line with a 6’ stripe and an 18’ gap (3:1 ratio) or 4” solid double yellow lines depending on the number of lanes. Broken yellow centerlines would be used on two-lane super-collector streets where there are no auxiliary lanes such as right or left turn lanes, while double yellow centerlines should be used at multi-lane cross-sections. Proper transitions between broken centerlines and painted or raised medians should be provided as discussed in [[#Transitions from Normal Centerlines|Transitions from Normal Centerlines]] below. Depending on the number of access points, a two-way left turn lane may be provided as approved by the City Engineer. [[#Two-way Left Turn Lanes (TWLTL)|Two-way left turn lanes]] are discussed below.

=== Centerlines on Thoroughfare Roadways ===
The following guidelines are established for centerline pavement markings on thoroughfare roadways, consisting of divided or undivided roadways and improved or unimproved roadways.
Undivided thoroughfare roadways fall into two categories: 1) unimproved and 2) improved.

Unimproved thoroughfares have two through lanes of traffic that have not been widened. These primarily exist in the southern portions of the City that have been taken over from the County through annexation and where development has not fully occurred to require the roadway to be widened due to increased traffic volumes.

Improved thoroughfares have been widened to provide for at least two lanes of through traffic with shoulders or four to six lanes of through traffic with curb and gutter sections. The two-lane, four-lane or six-lane thoroughfares may be divided or undivided.

==== Centerlines on Divided Thoroughfare Roadways ====
Divided thoroughfare roadways that have a continuous median, except for breaks at approved intersections, do not require centerline pavement markings if the center median consists of raised curbs. When the center median is depressed, the centerline pavement marking should consist of a single 4” solid yellow edge line on each side of the depressed median. The yellow edge line should be installed 4” from the edge of the driving surface to the closest edge of the line.

Thoroughfares with intermittent raised medians shall have a 4” solid double yellow centerline in those sections that do not have a center median. Any time a raised median section is provided, centerline markings are not required. Proper transitions between broken centerlines and painted or raised medians should be provided as discussed in [[#Transitions from Normal Centerlines|Transitions from Normal Centerlines]] below.

==== Centerlines on Undivided, Improved Thoroughfare Roadways ====
Undivided, improved thoroughfare roadways should consist of 4” solid double yellow centerlines. Depending on the number of access points, a two-way left turn lane may be provided as approved by the City Engineer. [[#Two-way Left Turn Lanes (TWLTL)|Two-way left turn lanes]] are discussed below.

==== Centerlines on Undivided, Unimproved Thoroughfare Roadways ====
Undivided, unimproved thoroughfare roadways should always consist of 4” solid double yellow centerlines. Passing is prohibited on these types of roadways.

=== Transitions from Normal Centerlines ===
Transitions often occur from the normally used centerline approaching intersections or raised medians. This can occur with either broken yellow centerlines or double yellow centerlines. The following discussion provides guidance in the design in various applications.

==== Prior to Raised Medians ====
When transitioning from a broken yellow centerline to a raised median, the raised median should be preceded by a double yellow centerline a minimum of 100’ in length unless there is some engineering reason that limits it to less than 100’, e.g. another intersection. This length should be increased if it places the beginning of the double yellow centerline near the blind side of a crest vertical curve.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Centerline Transition at Raised Median.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Centerline Transition at Raised Median
|}

When transitioning from a double yellow centerline to a raised median, the double yellow line should end near the raised nose of the median in order to provide a smooth transition directing traffic away from the median. When the median width, at the widest part, is greater than 6' (measured from the back of curbs), the double yellow centerline should be marked for approaching as well as for departing vehicles.

When the median width, at the widest part, is less than 6' (measured from the back of curbs), the double yellow centerline should be marked for approaching traffic only.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Centerline Transition for Various Median Widths.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Centerline Transition at Raised Median Based on Width
|}

==== Prior to Painted Medians ====
When transitioning from a broken yellow centerline to a painted median, the painted median should be preceded by a double yellow centerline a minimum of 100’ in length unless there is some engineering reason that limits it to less than 100’, e.g. another intersection. This length should be increased if it places the beginning of the double yellow centerline near the blind side of a crest vertical curve.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Painted Medians with Centerline Transition.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Centerline Transition at Painted Median
|}

==== Prior to Stop Controlled Intersections ====
A broken yellow centerline should transition to a double yellow centerline a minimum of 100’ prior to the stop line (or designated stopping point in the absence of a stop line) at an intersection controlled by a stop sign.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Centerline Transition at Intersections.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken Centerline Transition at Stop Controlled Intersection
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Collector-Collector Intersection.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Four-Way Stop at Collector-Collector Intersection
|}

==== Special Situations at Intersections ====
Occasionally, a collector street will turn into a residential street at a two-way stop controlled intersection with another through street segment. The minor collector street leg, which is controlled by a stop sign, will be striped with a broken yellow centerline that transitions to a double yellow centerline 100’ in advance of the stop line. The residential street leg, which is controlled by a stop sign, will not require either a stop line or a centerline.
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Special Situations at Intersectioins.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Special Situations at Intersections
|}

==== Special Situations at Midblock Crosswalks ====
At midblock crosswalks, across roadways with a marked centerline, the broken yellow centerline should transition to a double yellow centerline in advance of the midblock crosswalk for a distance of approximately 50'. A 3' minimum gap should be provided between the double yellow centerline and the marked crosswalk.
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Centerline Transition at midblock crosswalk.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Special Situations at Midblock Crosswalks
|}

=== Painted Medians ===
Painted medians should be used on undivided roadways where it is desirable to provide left turn lanes or separate traffic traveling in opposite directions. For left turn lanes, it is preferable to provide a complete approach taper and a fully shadowed bay taper whenever possible and pavement width permits.

Painted medians also occur in advance of a raised median that has been installed for access control near an intersection approach or in advance of a splitter island of a roundabout.
Painted medians should consist of 4” solid double yellow lines with 12” yellow diagonal crosshatch lines. See [[#Yellow Diagonal Crosshatch Markings|Yellow Diagonal Crosshatch Lines]] for more information.

=== Yellow Solid and Broken Lane Lines ===
==== No-Passing Zone Lines ====
Yellow solid and broken lane lines can be used where crossing the center line markings for passing is permitted for the traffic traveling adjacent to the broken line, but is prohibited for traffic traveling adjacent to the solid line. This centerline marking is typically not used in the City of Overland Park. It requires a passing sight distance study in order to determine where passing is permitted.

==== Two-way Left Turn Lanes (TWLTL) ====
Two-way left turn lanes (TWLTL) should consist of 4” solid yellow lines on each side of the travel lane with six foot long 4” broken yellow lines inset inside of the solid yellow lines with 18’ long gaps. The beginning and end of the broken yellow lines should line up with any adjacent broken white lane lines.

The TWLTL should terminate into a left turn lane. The TWLTL lane markings should not extend to intersections. There should be a 42’ long gap between the end of the broken and solid yellow line and the beginning of the 4” solid white lane line for the left turn storage.
Two sets of white left turn arrows should be placed 25’ apart measured from the tails of both arrows. The spacing of the arrow sets is dependent on the overall length of the TWLTL. Generally, one set is installed 30’ from the beginning, one set 30’ from the end and one set at approximately the midpoint, but the distance between sets of arrows should not exceed 160’.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Two-way Left Turn Lanes.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Two-way Left Turn Lanes
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Yellow Centerline Markings|'''Yellow Centerline Markings''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Yellow Centerline Markings]]
|}
----

== Broken White Lane Lines ==
Broken white lane line markings should be used on all roadways with two or more adjacent traffic lanes that have the same direction of travel. They shall consist of a 4” wide broken white line with a 6’ stripe and an 18’ gap (3:1 ratio).

The beginning point of broken white lane lines between adjacent lanes of travel on a multi-lane street should line up with each other.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Line Up Adjacent Broken White Lane Lines.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Alignment of Adjacent Broken White Lane Lines
|}

Ideally, the beginning of a broken white lane line should also line up with the beginning of any adjacent solid white lane line delineating the storage length for a right or left turn lane. However, broken white lane lines should not extend past the stop line.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Line Up Broken White with Solid White.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Alignment of Broken White Lane Line with Solid White Turn Lane Line
|}

Broken white lane lines should break on each side of a four-legged intersection, comprised of public or private streets, allowing side street traffic to cross without running over the lines. Broken white lane lines should extend through intersections with private and commercial driveways. However, if the main street has a left turn lane into the commercial drive of the development, lane lines should not be marked through the intersection. It would be treated like a standard intersection with public streets.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Gaps in Broken Lane Lines at Intersections.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Gaps in Broken White Lane Lines at Intersections
|}

At tee intersections, the broken white lane lines will continue through the intersection at the top of the tee, but will not extend through the intersection with the lanes closest to the intersecting side street.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Broken White Lane Lines|'''Broken White Lane Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Broken White Lane Lines]]
|}
----

== Broken White Lane Extension Lines ==
Broken white lane extension lines are used for guiding the traveling public through more complex roadway lane configurations such as:
# Offset through lanes
# Skewed intersections
# Curved roadways
# Where multiple turn lanes are present
# At interchanges where there are extended left turn lanes on the thoroughfare street
# Roundabout circulating lanes
# Where accident history indicates a presence of sideswipe type crashes

The broken white extension line shall be 4” wide and 2’ long with a 4’ gap.

=== Offset Through Lanes ===
Depending on the roadway classification and the posted speed, offset through lanes can create situations where white lane extension lines would be beneficial to delineate the travel path of vehicles. Offsets through intersections on a thoroughfare are generally more of a concern than offset through lanes on a collector roadway or a local street. The following gives some guidance on when to install lane extension lines for offset through lanes, but the designer in conjunction with City staff, should use engineering judgment to make the final determination whether to use them or not. Having multiple lines crossing through an intersection can be just as confusing as not having any. Discretion should be used keeping in mind the long term aspects of maintenance, since pavement markings in an intersection are worn down frequently by traveling vehicles.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Lines at Intersections.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Lines at Intersections
|}

When the through traffic lanes on a thoroughfare across an intersection are offset at least one fourth of the width of the lane, white lane extension lines should be considered, especially if the presence of a crest vertical curve near the center of the intersection obstructs the view of the receiving lanes on the opposite side of the intersection. When the offset is one half or more of the width of the lane, the extension lines shall be installed.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Line through Intersections.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Lines Through Intersections
|}

=== Skewed Intersections ===
At skewed intersections, where there is a possibility for the opposing turning traffic to overlap paths, white lane extension lines should be considered to delineate the paths regardless of the number of turn lanes or the number of receiving through lanes.

=== Curved Roadways ===
Where a vehicle, following a curving curb line, could drift into a left turn or right turn lane, a white extension line should be considered to delineate the path of the vehicle.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Line on Curved Roadway.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Lines on Curved Roadway
|}

=== Multiple Left or Right Turn Lanes ===
Broken white lane extension lines are not typically used where the number of turn lanes on the side street is equivalent to the number of receiving through lanes on the major street. For example if two left turn lanes are turning into two through lanes.

They shall be used within an intersection where there are two left turn or two right turn lanes but three or more receiving through lanes. They shall also be used anywhere the number of left turning lanes or right turning lanes is greater than two, regardless of the number of through lanes available for receiving lanes. For example, if a side street has two exclusive left turn lanes and one shared through/left turn lane, the white extension lines shall be installed directing traffic into their respective lanes, even if there are only three through lanes on the main street.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Line at Multiple Turn Lanes.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Line at Multiple Turn Lanes
|}

=== At Interchanges with Extended Left Turn Lanes on the Thoroughfare ===
There are occasions, primarily at interchanges with thoroughfare streets, where there are only two through lanes but the left turn lanes extend upstream of the intersection to increase the storage length. Even though there are only single or dual left turn lanes coming off the ramp and only two receiving through lanes, the broken white lane extension lines should be installed for the ramp traffic so vehicles do not get trapped into the left turn lanes on the thoroughfare.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Line at Interchanges with Extended Left Turn Lanes.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Line at Interchanges with Extended Left Turn Lanes
|}

=== Roundabout Circulating Lanes ===
Lane extension lines should be installed in the circulating lanes at multi-lane roundabouts opposite the points where lanes from the intersecting roadways enter the roundabout. They should extend toward the exit lanes to direct circulating traffic that is exiting the roundabout to the correct receiving lanes.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Line at Roundabouts.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Line at Roundabouts
|}

=== Where Accident Crash History Shows a Need ===
Lane extension lines should be installed where there is a history of side swipe crashes that could be alleviated by providing more guidance to the driver.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Broken White Lane Extension Lines|'''Broken White Lane Extension Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Broken White Lane Extension Lines]]
|}
----

== Wide Dotted Line ==
A wide dotted white line marking shall be used as the lane line to separate a through lane that continues beyond the intersection from an adjacent lane that becomes a mandatory turn lane or across the lane(s) entering a roundabout as follows:

=== Wide Dotted Lane Drop Line ===
Wide dotted lane drop lines are used for lane drops (trap lanes) where an otherwise through traffic lane turns into a mandatory left turn or right turn lane. Where used, the wide dotted lane drop line shall be 8” wide with a 3’ line segment and a 9’ gap. The wide dotted lane drop line will be accompanied by a 8” wide white solid lane line beginning at the downstream end of the white dotted lane drop line to the stop bar (See [[#White Solid Wide Lane Lines|White Solid Wide Lane Lines]]). The length of the dotted lane drop shall be as follows:
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Trap Lane Markings.JPG|1000px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Typical Wide Dotted Lane Drop Lines
|}

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Trap Lane Markings - No restrictions.JPG|1000px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|White Dotted Lane Drop Lines with No Restrictions
|}

==== Length Based on Posted Speed Limit ====
For posted speed limits > 45 mph, the length of the wide dotted lane line shall be based on the merge length equation: L = W x S, where W is the width of the lane and S is the posted speed limit, (mph). For posted speed limits < 45 mph, the length of the wide dotted lane line shall be based on the merge length equation L = (W x ''S''2)/60. Exceptions to this rule are as follows:

==== Spacing Considerations for Closely Spaced Intersections ====
If the calculated length of the wide dotted lane drop line would extend it into or through an upstream four-legged intersection (whether controlled or uncontrolled), it should begin immediately past the upstream intersection instead of using the full calculated length. The lane drop line should begin no closer to the intersection than the most upstream regulatory or warning sign associated with the lane drop. An R3-7 (R or L) sign should be installed approximately 30’ from the curb return at the intersection. An additional R3-7 (R or L) should be installed at the beginning of the 8" solid wide lane line.

The calculated length of the wide dotted lane drop line can extend through a three-legged T-intersection as long as the major street that has the trap lane is divided with a median. In that case, an R3-7R sign will be installed at the beginning of the wide dotted lane drop line with a street name sign plaque mounted underneath to designate where the lane drops.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Trap Lane thru Tee Intersection.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Wide Dotted Lane Drop Lines Thru T-Intersection
|}

In areas where there is not enough room to achieve the full length without extending through an intersection, a balance should be maintained between the lane drop line and the required storage bay length, based on the observed traffic volumes.

=== Wide Dotted Lines at Roundabouts ===
White wide dotted lines should be used across the lane(s) entering a roundabout to mark an extension of the circulatory roadway edge line. They should extend from the splitter island to the exit of the roundabout and be a three foot long, 12” wide line with a three foot gap.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Wide Dotted Roundabout Lines.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Wide Dotted Roundabout Line
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Wide Dotted Line|'''Wide Dotted Line''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Wide Dotted Line]]
|}
----

== Solid White Lane Lines ==
Solid white lane lines are used where drivers are discouraged from changing lanes. The lane line markings shall consist of a 4” wide solid white line. Solid white lane lines are typically used at intersections to separate a through lane from a mandatory left or right turn lane.
=== Single Left or Right Turn Lanes ===
The solid white lane line should extend from the stop line upstream to where the full width of the turn lane begins.
=== Dual Left or Right Turn Lanes ===
In the case of dual left or right turn lanes, the inside line should begin at the point of tangency with the median curb, where the full width of the inside lane is available. The outside line should be extended farther upstream to where the lane opening, measured perpendicular from the median curb to the start of the line is 18’, as shown below.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Solid White Lane Lines.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Solid White Lane Lines for Dual Left Turn Lanes
|}

=== Continuous Right Turn Lane Exceptions ===
Where a right turn lane at an intersection would have one or more driveway entrances within the storage bay, the preferred approach is to break the solid white lane line for the driveway and treat them as separate turn lanes. An R3-7(R) sign should be installed at the driveway.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Solid Lane Line for Continuous Right Turn Lanes.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Solid White Lane Lines for Continuous Right Turn Lanes
|}

If a driveway is located near a signalized intersection such that the distance between the driveway and the intersection does not provide enough storage length, then the solid lane line should be continued through the driveway.

If a driveway occurs at a median break, the lane line should not be carried through the intersection. In the example below, the lane line was continued through the first driveway because the right turn lane was just beginning and not enough storage length was available for the driveway. The R3-7(R) sign was removed for the driveway.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Solid Lane Line Exception for Continuous Right Turn Lanes.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Solid White Lane Line Exception for Continuous Right Turn Lanes
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Solid White Lane Lines|'''Solid White Lane Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Solid White Lane Lines]]
|}
----

== Solid Double White Lane Lines ==
Solid double white lane lines are used to mark where crossing is prohibited or whenever two lanes of traffic, traveling in the same direction, are separated by a painted median. The most common instance of this occurs between a turn lane and a through lane which is separated by a painted island. This normally occurs when an intersection has offset left turn lanes that are separated from the through lanes to give drivers on opposing approaches a less obstructed view of opposing through traffic. They are also used when an intersection is designed for ultimate double left turn lanes, but one lane has been marked out until sometime in the future when it is required based on traffic volumes. The lane line markings shall consist of a 4” wide solid double white lines separated by a 4” space. White 12” chevron should be installed between the two sets of solid double white lane lines. (See [[#White Chevron Markings|White Chevron Markings]]) for more information in regard to spacing.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Double White Lane Lines.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Solid Double White Lane Lines
|}

== White Solid Wide Lane Lines ==
Solid wide channelization lines are used to form islands where traffic traveling in the same direction is permitted on both sides of the island. They should be 8” wide and used to outline around painted or raised medians as follows:

=== At Interchange Ramps ===
Channelizing lines at entrance ramps define the neutral area, directing exiting traffic at the proper angle for smooth divergence onto the ramp. They should be used to outline raised islands or used for painted islands that separate interstate ramp movements from through movements on thoroughfare streets.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Solid Wide Lane Lines Around Island at Ramps.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|White Solid Wide Lane Lines at Interstate Ramp Islands
|}

=== At Free Flow Right Turn Lanes ===
They should also be used to outline the raised medians for free flow right turn lanes on City streets.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Solid Wide Lane Lines Around Islands at Intersections.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|White Solid Wide Lane Lines Around Islands at Intersections
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White Solid Wide Lane Lines|'''White Solid Wide Lane Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White Solid Wide Lane Lines]]
|}
----

== White Edge Lines ==
Edge lines are 4” wide lines that are used to delineate the right or left edges of roadways that have paved or turf shoulders. If they are on the left hand side of the roadway, they shall be yellow. They shall be white if they are on the right hand side of the roadway. Edge lines shall not be continued through intersections or major driveways that consist of turn lanes entering from the major street. But they would extend through minor driveways. They should be placed on rural thoroughfares and collectors with a traveled way of 20’ or more and an average daily traffic (ADT) of 3,000 vehicles per day or greater. If a bicycle lanes is marked on the outside portion of the traveled way, the edge line that would mark the outside edge of the bicycle lane should be omitted.

In the case of turf shoulders, the edge line shall be inset to allow a minimum of 4” from the edge of the asphalt roadway to the edge of the line.

=== Edge Lines on Diverging Diamond Interchanges (DDI’s) ===
Edge lines on diverging diamond interchanges (DDI’s) require clarification. The two directions of travel are separated by either a raised median or bridge rails. This would normally require the edge line separating the two directions of travel to be yellow. However, this violates the rule that yellow lines shall always be on the left hand side of the driver. Therefore, the pavement for the two directions of travel are treated as separate, one-way roadways. Therefore, the edge lines will be yellow on the left side and white on the right side for drivers traveling in each direction.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Edge Lines for DDIs.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Edge Lines for Diverging Diamond Interchanges (DDI's)
|}

=== Edge Lines on Bridges ===
Edge lines should be installed across all bridges, regardless of whether the roadway approaches to the bridge consist of curb and gutter or shoulders. The edge line should be offset from the bridge rail to provide a horizontal buffer space for vehicles and to maintain a constant lane width across the bridge. The solid white edge line across a bridge should be eliminated if a bicycle lane exists. The solid white line on the left side of the bicycle lane will act as the vehicle edge line.

== White Stop Lines ==

Stop lines indicate the point behind which vehicles are required to stop in compliance with a STOP sign. Stop lines may be either 12” wide or 24” wide, and shall be based on the stop sign size as required by the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). If the STOP sign size should be 30”, the stop line should be 12” wide . If the STOP sign size should be 36” or larger, the stop line should be 24” wide. At all-way stop controlled intersections, the stop bars and stop signs shall be the same size on all approach legs and based on the largest sign size required at the intersection according to the MUTCD and Overland Park Stop Sign Guidelines [[Media:Stop sign size flow chart.pdf|flowchart]]. At signalized intersections, the stop line on all approaches should be 24” wide. The following are general guidelines for white stop lines. (Refer to [[#Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage|Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage]]) for specific guidance regarding when to install them.

=== Stop Lines in Conjunction with Crosswalks ===
In general, a stop line should always be installed in advance of a crosswalk on an approach that is controlled by stop sign.

=== Stop Lines for Standard Intersections Without Skew ===
In general, the stop lines should typically be perpendicular to the lane of travel and extend across all lanes as a continuous straight line. Stop lines shall be installed such that they are not located in the vehicle path of left turn movements from the side street approach. This is particularly critical where there is no median separating opposing through lanes. Where raised medians exist, the stop line for the left turn lane should generally be located at the median nose.

The minimum separation from the trailing edge of the stop line to the leading edge of the crosswalk line shall be 4’. If the distance from the crosswalk line or theoretical crosswalk line is greater than 15', consider staggering the stop lines for the through lanes closer to the intersection, to minimize this distance. This occurs when the median nose is pulled back to accommodate left turning vehicles from the side street. Do not stagger the stop line if the distance between the staggered stop line for the left turn lanes and the through lanes would be less than 5’, even if the distance exceeds 15'.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Stop Lines at Intersections without Skew.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Stop Lines at Intersections without Skew
|}

=== Stop Lines for Skewed Intersections ===
In the case of severely skewed intersections, several things should be taken into consideration. The stop line should generally be installed parallel to the crosswalk lines as long as the vehicle position for the farthest right hand lane is closer to the intersection than the left turn vehicle to avoid obscuring the intersection sight distance for right turn vehicles making right turns on red signal indications. Where raised medians exist, the stop line for the left turn lane should generally be located at the median nose. The minimum separation from the trailing edge of the stop line to the leading edge of the crosswalk line shall be 4’. If the distance from the crosswalk line or theoretical crosswalk line is greater than 15', consider staggering the stop lines for the through lanes closer to the intersection, to minimize this distance. This occurs when the median nose is pulled back to accommodate left turning vehicles from the side street. Do not stagger the stop line if the distance between the staggered stop line for the left turn lanes and the through lanes would be less than 5’, even if the distance exceeds 15'. On the other legs, install the stop lines perpendicular to the vehicle path. The distance from the stop line to the crosswalk line for the farthest right vehicle should be 4' minimum. The distance for the remaining lanes is not controlled by a maximum distance.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Stop lines at skewed intersections for sight distance.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Stop Lines at Intersections with Skew
|}

=== Stop Line Location Coordination with Signal Detection Systems ===
When placing stop lines at signalized intersections, care should be taken to determine what method of vehicle detection is being used. If induction loops are currently being used, the stop line should be located such that the first diamond in the loop extends at least half-way past the stop line into the intersection. If video detection or radar detection is currently being used, it is possible to change the detection zones. The engineer should be contacted to determine if a change in the detection zone is required or if a change in the stop line location can be accommodated.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White Stop Lines|'''White Stop Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White Stop Lines]]
|}
----

== White Crosswalk Lines ==
Crosswalk markings provide guidance for pedestrians who are crossing the roadway by defining and delineating paths on approaches to and within signalized intersections, and on approaches to other intersections where traffic stops or yields. Crosswalks help to alert road users of a designated pedestrian crossing point across roadways at locations that are not controlled by traffic control signals or stop or yield signs. At non-intersection locations, crosswalk markings legally establish the crosswalk.

Crosswalk markings are classified as either basic (transverse) or high-visibility. Basic crosswalk markings consist of two transverse lines. High visibility markings, sometimes called a longitudinal bar or a continental crosswalk, consist of longitudinal lines parallel to traffic flow with or without transverse lines. The following are general guidelines for white crosswalk lines. Refer to [[#Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage|Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage]] for specific guidance regarding when to install them.

=== Basic Crosswalk Markings ===
All crosswalk markings in the City of Overland Park will be considered basic crosswalk markings, unless the criteria listed in the table for [[#High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings|high-visibility crosswalk markings]] is met.

Basic crosswalk markings shall consist of two 6" wide white transverse lines extending from curb to curb across the full width of the roadway to be crossed. The gap between the lines should not be less than 6 feet, measured between the inside edges of each of the lines. When the crosswalk extends a 4’ sidewalk through the intersection, the width of the crosswalk should be 6’. When the crosswalk extends a 10’ bike path through the intersection, the width of the crosswalk should be 10’. Where an Overland Park-maintained shared-use path crossses a roadway, crosswalk markings shall be installed.

If crosswalk lines from adjacent legs of the intersection intersect prior to the curb line, a 45 degree angled crosswalk line should be used near the ramp location to maintain a 4’ minimum distance from the back of curb to the angled portion of the crosswalk.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Basic Crosswalk Lines Intersecting at Corner.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Intersection of Adjacent Basic Crosswalk Lines
|}

=== High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings ===
For added visibility at locations that have a significant amount of pedestrian activity, especially within the downtown district of Overland Park; at any midblock or uncontrolled through movement locations; including Pedestrian Hybrid Beacon (aka HAWK signal); at all roundabout crosswalks; or where crashes with pedestrians have occurred, high visibility crosswalk markings should be used instead of the standard crosswalk lines.

At intersections, if one approach warrants a high-visibility crosswalk, any other approach that warrants a crosswalk should also be a high-visibility crosswalk, even if it does not necessarily meet the criteria in the High-Visibility Crosswalk Criteria table shown below.

When the crosswalk extends a 10' shared-use path or trail through an intersection, the width of the crosswalk should be 10'.

When used, the lines should be 24 inches wide and separated by gaps not less than 3’ and not more than 5’ based on the lane width. The design of the lines and gaps should be spaced as evenly as possible across the lanes of vehicle travel and avoid the wheel paths as much as possible. On undivided roadways, the spacing for 12’ and 11’ lanes is shown below.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:High Visibility Crosswalk Detail.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|High-Visibility Crosswalk Detail
|}

On divided roadways, some variation in the gaps between markings is acceptable to accommodate for the width of the median. See the examples below.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:High Visibility Crosswalk on Divided Roadways.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|High Visibility Crosswalk on Divided Roadways
|}

The high-visibility crosswalk markings should generally be placed parallel to the direction of vehicle travel and perpendicular to the travel of the pedestrian. However, at skewed intersections or intersections with irregular entry streets, the configuration of the markings may have to be arranged more aesthetically up to 45 degrees.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:High Visibility Crosswalk At Irregular Intersections.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|High Visibility Crosswalk At Irregular Intersections
|}

The following criteria will be used for marking pedestrian, bicycle, trail, and golf cart crossings which have been approved:
:{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#222 1px solid black; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+'''High-Visibility Crosswalk Criteria'''
| colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;" valign="center"|'''Pedestrian Hybrid Traffic (HAWK) Signal'''
|-
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|Condition
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|Stop Line
|-
| align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|Any 
| align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|Yes
|-
| colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;" valign="center"|'''Traffic Signal, Stop or Yield Sign Adjacent to Elementary or Middle School'''
|-
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|Condition
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|Stop Line or Yield Line
|-
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|No Crossing Guard 
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|No1
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|See Specific Criteria
|-
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|Crossing Guard Assigned 
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|See Specific Criteria
|-
| colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;" valign="center"|'''Downtown Overland Park'''
|-
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Condition
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Stop or Yield Line
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Any
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|See Specific Criteria
|-
| colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#90ee90;" valign="center"|'''Mid-Block Crossings or Uncontrolled Through Movements'''
|-
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Condition
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yield Line
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Pedestrian or School Crossings2 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|If Multi-Lane Approach
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Trail Crossings3 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|If Multi-Lane Approach
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Golf Cart Crossing 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Roundabouts 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yes
|}
1Unless an adjacent crosswalk at the same intersection warrants a high-visibility crosswalk. 
2If the posted speed limit is 40 mph or greater at a non-intersection locatoion, the minimum width of the crosswalk shall be 8 feet. 
3Applies to any street classification and does not need to meet volume criteria to be marked or signed. If the posted speed limit is 40 mph or greater at a non-intersection location, the minimum width of the crosswalk shall be 8 feet. 

=== Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage ===
The following table explains when stop lines and crosswalk lines should be installed at intersections. If a street has centerline markings, it should have a stop line.

:{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+'''Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage Guide'''
! colspan="4" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Intersection Description
! colspan="4" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Installation Guidelines
|-
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Approach Street'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Cross Street'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Intersection Control5'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''No. of Lanes on Approach'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Stop Lines'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Crosswalks'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''White Lane Lines'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Turn Arrows'''
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|> 1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|AWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Any
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Maybe3
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Maybe3
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|> 1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|> 1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|> 1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|> 1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
|-
|}
1Do not install stop line unless there is a warranted and marked crosswalk. (See Note 2 below) 
2Do not install crosswalk pavement markings unless there is a warranted crossing determined by a pedestrian study or a shared-use path is present (2023 MUTCD Section 9E.13.05). 
3TWSC = Install lane lines and arrows when there is more than one approach lane 
4The "Collector" designation also includes commercial streets and apartments streets that are 36' wide (Bk-Bk) w/ speed limit 30 mph 
5TWSC = Two-Way Stop Control; AWSC = All-Way Stop Control

=== Signalized Intersections ===
White crosswalk lines are generally installed on every approach at a signalized intersection unless there are no sidewalks or curb ramps on the corners.

=== Roundabout Crosswalk Markings ===
On an approach to a circular intersection controlled by a Yield sign and at uncontrolled exits, crosswalks shall be a minimum of 20 feet from the edge of the circulatory roadway.

=== Mid-block Crosswalks ===
Do not install crosswalk lines unless there is a warranted crossing determined by a pedestrian count or engineering study. The engineering study should consider the number of lanes, the presence of a median, the distance from adjacent signalized intersections, the pedestrian volumes and delays, the average daily traffic (ADT), the posted or statutory speed limit or 85th-percentile speed, the available gaps, the geometry of the location, the possible consolidation of multiple crossing points, the availability of street lighting, and other appropriate factors. If there is a warranted mid-block crossing, install high-visibility crosswalks. If the mid-block crossing is a multi-lane approach, also install yield lines. At non-intersection crosswalks where the posted speed limit is 40 mph or greater, the minimum width of the crosswalk shall be 8'.

=== Crosswalks at City Limits ===
Where crosswalks on city limits are shared with adjacent cities, the city standard with the most visible crosswalks should apply.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White Crosswalk Lines|'''White Crosswalk Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White Crosswalk Lines]]
|}
----

== White Yield Lines ==
Yield lines are used to indicate the point behind which vehicles are required to yield in compliance with a Yield sign, Yield Here To Pedestrians sign or other appropriate sign. Yield lines consist of a row of solid white isosceles triangles pointing toward approaching vehicles extending across approach lanes to indicate the point at which the yield is intended or required to be made. They should be used in advance of mid-block crosswalks, in advance of a crosswalk on approaches controlled by a yield sign, and on approaches to a roundabout.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Yield Line Detail.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Yield Line Detail
|}
=== Yield Lines in Conjunction with Crosswalks ===
In general, a yield line should always be installed in advance of a crosswalk on an approach that is controlled by a yield sign.

=== At Mid-block Crosswalks ===
At a mid-block crosswalk, they should be placed between 20’ and 50’ in advance of the nearest crosswalk line and parking should be prohibited in the area between the yield line and the crosswalk line. The size of the yield line depends on the posted speed limit on the street. For speeds greater or equal to 30 mph, the size should be 24” x 36”. For speeds less than 30 mph, the size should be 12” x 18”. The yield lines should be spaced evenly across all lanes of pavement. Maintain a minimum distance of 12” between adjacent markings and 6” away from lane lines, centerlines and edge of pavement.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Yield Lines on Thoroughfares.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Mid-block Yield Lines on Divided Thoroughfare Streets
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Yield Lines on Collectors.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Mid-block Yield Lines on Collector Streets
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Yield Lines on Residentials.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Mid-block Yield Lines on Residential Streets
|}

=== At Approaches to Roundabouts or Mini Roundabouts ===
At approaches to a roundabout or mini roundabouts, the yield lines should be placed near the 12” wide x 3’ long white dotted extension line of the circulatory roadway edge. There should be a minimum of 20’ beyond the crosswalk line to allow a full vehicle storage length. The yield lines should be 24” x 36” separated by 12” at the base of the triangle.

=== At Approaches to Traffic Calming Circles ===
At approaches to neighborhood traffic circles designed to calm traffic, the yield lines should be placed near the 6” wide x 2’ long white dotted extension line of the circulatory roadway edge. The yield lines should be 12” x 18” separated by 12” at the base of the triangle.

=== In Conjunction with Bicycle Lanes ===
At mid-block crosswalks that pass through bicycle lanes, a yield line should be placed within the bicycle lane, since bicycles are required to obey the same rules of the road as vehicles. For streets with posted speed limits of 30 mph and greater, one yield line shall be placed in the center of the bicycle lane. For streets with posted speed limit less than 30 mph, two yield lines shall be placed in the bicycle lane.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White Yield Lines|'''White Yield Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White Yield Lines]]
|}
----

== White Arrow Symbols ==
Turn arrow markings on the pavement are used for the purpose of guiding, warning, or regulating traffic. They consist of either lane-use assignment arrows, e.g. left turn, right turn, or combination thru/turn arrows, and merge arrows. Lane-use assignment arrows and merge arrows are sized and installed as shown on the standard details.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="left"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Turn Arrow Detail.JPG|250px|]]
|- style="text-align: left"
|Turn Arrow Detail
|}

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Merge Arrow Detail.JPG|250px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Merge Arrow Detail
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="left"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Combination Turn-Straight Arrow Detail.JPG|250px|]]
|- style="text-align: left"
|Combination Turn-Straight Arrow Detail
|}

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Straight Arrow Detail.JPG|250px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Straight Arrow Detail
|}

=== Turn Arrows for Lane Assignments ===
Lane-use assignment arrows should be used in lanes designated for the exclusive use of a turning movement and consist of right or left turn arrows. Straight arrows or combination straight/turn arrows may be used in unique situations such as an exclusive turn lane with an adjacent shared thru-turn lane. Turn arrows should be installed in all right or left turn lanes. The first arrow on the up-stream end of the turn bay should be installed such that the tail of the arrow is aligned with the beginning of the solid white lane line. If there are dual turn lanes, the arrows in each adjacent lane should be aligned. In this case, the turn arrows should be positioned based on the shortest turn lane and placed with the tail of the arrow at the beginning of the shortest solid white lane line. The spacing of the remaining arrows should be based on the overall length of the turn bay, according to the table in the standard details. In the case of multiple turn lanes, the spacing should be based on the shortest storage bay length.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Turn Arrow Positioning in Dual Turn Lanes.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Turn Arrow Positioning in Dual Turn Lanes
|}

Combination straight/turn arrows may used when it is allowable to either turn or travel straight through the intersection and would provide clarity to drivers on more complex approaches.

=== Straight Arrows for Lane Assignment ===
Straight arrows should be used in advance of an interchange where the left lane to enter onto the interstate ramp occurs in advance of the previous intersection in an attempt to maximize vehicle storage. The straight arrow is an indication that the lane extends past the previous intersection but will end up in a left turn lane at the interchange.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Straight Arrows for Extended Turn Lanes at Interchanges.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Straight Arrows for Extended Turn Lanes at Interchanges
|}

Straight arrows are also appropriate for through lanes at diverging diamond interchanges (DDI’s) to assist vehicles in negotiating the interchange. In this scenario, the through arrows are not necessarily located at the beginning of the solid white lane line. Instead, they are located near the stop lines and at locations to provide positive guidance to vehicles at the point of divergence from the usual lane positions.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Straight Arrows at DDI Interchanges.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Straight Arrows at DDI Interchanges
|}

Straight arrows on through approach lanes are typically not used at standard intersections unless it is apparent that driver confusion exists and the installation of a through arrow would help alleviate the problem. For example, if there is only one through lane on the approach but then widens out to include left turn lanes and right turn lanes. In this situation, all lanes have solid white lane lines on each side of them.

=== Lane-Reduction Transition Merge Arrows ===
Lane-reduction transition merge arrows are used where the number of through lanes is reduced because of narrowing of the roadway. This generally occurs where a four-lane divided thoroughfare transitions to a two-lane undivided roadway at the project construction limits. Lane-reduction transition markings are not used for lane drops.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Lane-Reduction Transition Merge Arrows.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Lane-Reduction Transition Merge Arrows
|}

Where the posted speed is 45 mph or greater, the transition length should be L = W x S. For posted speeds less than 45 mph, L = WS2/60. Where S = the posted speed in mph and W = the lane offset in feet. The broken white lane line markings should be discontinued ¼ the distance downstream of the Lane Reduction warning sign based on the requirements of the MUTCD. The first lane-reduction transition merge arrow should be placed at the same location. An additional arrow should be placed 6’ upstream of the beginning of the pavement width transition, measured from the tip of the arrow. Coordination should occur with the roadway engineers to insure the taper lengths are long enough to accommodate the required distances.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White Arrow Symbols|'''White Arrow Symbols''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White Arrow Symbols]]
|}
----

== White ONLY Markings ==
The “ONLY” pavement marking symbol should be used exclusively for trap lanes, where the lane was a through lane at the previous intersection and drivers must now turn left or right because the lane does not continue through. The “ONLY” markings will be spaced alternately with either right or left turn arrows at a distance based on the length of the solid white lane line. See the table in the standard details for arrow and “ONLY” symbol spacing.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:ONLY Marking Detail.JPG|250px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|ONLY Marking Detail
|}

== White Railroad Crossing Markings ==
Pavement markings in advance of a railroad grade crossing shall consist of an “X”, the letters “RR”, no-passing zone markings, transverse lines and dynamic envelope markings as outlined below and according to the standard details. Identical markings shall be placed in each approach lane to grade crossings.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Railroad Crossing Markings.JPG|1000px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Railroad Crossing Markings
|}

=== Railroad Crossing Symbol ===
The railroad crossing symbol shall consist of a white “X” with a white “R” on either side of it. The lines making up the “X” shall be 16” wide. The height of the “X” shall be 20’ tall and 8’ wide, which should encompass both “R” markings. The height of each “R” shall be 6’. The railroad crossing symbol shall be located between the transverse lines as described below.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:RR Xing Detail.JPG|200px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|RR Xing Symbol
|}

=== Railroad Stop Line ===
A 24” wide, white stop line shall be installed across the approach lanes to a railroad grade crossing to indicate the point behind which vehicles might be required to stop. It should be placed at a right angle to the traveled way and should be placed no closer than 15 feet in advance of the nearest rail. For skewed crossings, the nearest rail could be that which is closest to the opposing lane of traffic.

=== Railroad Transverse Lines ===
Two additional 24” wide, white transverse lines shall be placed across each lane on the approach of a railroad grade crossing at both the upstream and downstream side of the railroad crossing symbol. They shall be located 15’ from the leading edge of the transverse line to the bottom of the X, and from the top of the X to the far edge of the transverse line, respectively. The distance from the far edge of one transvers line to the far edge of the other should be 50’.

=== Dynamic Envelope Markings ===
Dynamic envelope markings are 4” white lines placed across all lanes of traffic and parallel to the railroad tracks to define the clearance required for the train and its cargo overhang due to any combination of loading, lateral motion, or suspension failure. They should be placed 6’ from the nearest rail.

== White Chevron Markings ==
White chevron markings are used between two lanes of traffic traveling in the same direction to discourage travel in certain paved areas such as flush medians between double solid white lane lines. The chevrons should be installed with the point of each facing toward approaching traffic and slanting to the left and right away from of approaching vehicles. They should be spaced equal to the posted speed limit, in feet, e.g. 35’ for 35 mph. This spacing should be modified as necessary to have at least two chevrons. If the overall width between the painted lines is less than 6’ or the overall length is less than 20’, the diagonal crosshatch lines should be omitted. (See [[#Solid Double White Lane Lines|Solid Double White Lane Lines]]).

== Diagonal Crosshatch Markings ==
Diagonal crosshatch markings are used to discourage travel on certain paved areas such as flush medians, shoulders, gore areas, between solid double yellow centerline markings or between white channelizing lines. They should be 12” wide and spaced equal to the posted speed limit, in feet, e.g. 35’ for 35 mph. If the overall width of the painted median or hatched out area is less than 4’ or the overall length is less than 20’, the diagonal crosshatch lines should be omitted.

=== Yellow Diagonal Crosshatch Markings ===
Diagonal crosshatch markings shall be yellow when used on the left-hand side of divided roadways and on the left-hand shoulders of one-way streets or ramps. They shall be installed between double solid yellow lines separating traffic traveling in opposing directions or along the center median that separates traffic traveling in opposing direction. The yellow diagonal crosshatch lines should be slanted away from traffic in the adjacent travel lanes from the bottom left to the top right to approaching vehicles.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Yellow Crosshatch Lines.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Yellow Diagonal Crosshatch Lines
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:White Crosshatch Line.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Yellow and White Diagonal Crosshatch Lines
|}

=== White Diagonal Crosshatch Markings ===
White diagonal crosshatch markings shall be installed when traffic lanes are striped out on the right hand side of the roadway. They shall be slanted away from traffic in the adjacent travel lane from the bottom right to the top left to approaching vehicles.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White ONLY Markings|'''White ONLY Markings''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White ONLY Markings]]
|}
----

== Bicycle Markings ==
Bicycle markings indicate the separation of the lanes for road users, assist the bicyclist by indicating assigned travel paths, indicate correct lateral positioning in a shared lane and provide advance information for turning and crossing maneuvers. The various markings for bicycle lanes or shared lanes will consist of bicycle lane symbols and bicycle lane arrows or sharrow markings, respectively.

=== Bicycle Lane Lines ===
Bicycle lanes shall be installed where a separate portion of the roadway is designated for preferential use by bicycles. Bicycle lanes shall be defined with a 4” longitudinal solid white line desirably placed 5’ (4’ minimum) from the edge of the pavement exclusive of a curb and gutter. At intersections, the bicycle lane should always be located between the through lane and right turn lanes or the through lane and left turn lanes. Broken white extension lines shall be used on both sides of the bicycle lane through the transition area of a right turn lane. Once the full width of the right turn lane is developed, there shall be a 4” solid white lane line on each side of the bicycle lane that extends to the stop line.

If a bicycle lane extends across a bridge, omit the standard white edge line which would end up on the right side of the bicycle lane.

Bicycle lanes that are installed in conjunction with trap turn lanes require special treatment combined with the proper lane drop lines. The bicycle lane markings should stop 150’ before the beginning of the trap lane. Through bicycle lane markings should resume to the left of the right turn only lane or to the right of a left turn only lane. See the standard details for more information.

The length of the right or left trap lane storage on one side of the bicycle lane, identified by the 8” solid white lane line, shall extend back from the stop bar exactly 100'. One cycle of “Arrow - ONLY – Arrow” pavement markings shall be placed in the trap turn lane based on the spacing requirements listed in the standard details for a 100' storage length. The 8” solid white lane line will be extended upstream with 48’ of 4” broken white lane extension line; followed by a 54’ area that is unstriped; followed by another 48’ of 4” broken white lane extension line, as indicated in the standard details. The other side of the bicycle lane shall be a solid 4” white lane line extending 250’ upstream from the stop bar. This line will be extended farther upstream by a 3'x9' broken white trap lane line marking. (See [[#Wide Dotted Lane Drop Line|Wide Dotted Lane Drop Line]]) for more information regarding the length of the trap lane line markings.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[file:Bicycle Lane and Trap Lane Markings.jpg|1000px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Bicycle Lane and Trap Lane Markings
|}

Bike lane lines remain solid at commercial driveways and school driveways. Bike lane line shall be cut at public and private streets.

=== Bicycle Lane Symbols ===
A bicycle lane symbol depicts a side view of a bicycle. The symbol adopted by the City of Overland Park is just the symbol of the bicycle and not the bicycle/rider combination and shall be the standard bicycle for both the sharrow and the bicycle lane markings. Do not install bicycle lane markings (bicycle symbol or arrow) if there is an adjacent bike path next to the roadway. Only install the solid 4” white line.
The bicycle symbol will be placed:
* At the beginning of a bicycle lane and at periodic intervals along the bicycle lane based on engineering judgement.
* They are not required after every intersection, but should be placed after each intersection with a thoroughfare or collector roadway.
* They will also be placed on the approach prior to stop controlled or signal controlled intersections.

Where right turn lanes exist, the bicycle lane symbol will be placed across from any turn arrows spaced according to the table in the standard details. If there are no turn lanes, the bottom of the bicycle symbol shall be placed 30’ in advance of the leading edge of the stop line. When it is placed after an intersection, it should be located such that the distance from the beginning of the solid bicycle lane line to the bottom of the symbol is 25’. The bicycle lane symbol shall be 6’ tall and 3’-4” wide.

=== Bicycle Lane Arrows ===
Bicycle lane arrows shall accompany the bicycle lane symbol when it is located in a designated bicycle lane. The straight arrow shall be 2’ wide and 6’ long and placed 6’ after the bicycle lane symbol. Turn arrows shall be 3’-6” wide and 4’-7” long.

=== Bicycle Sharrows ===
Shared lane markings (Sharrows) may be used to assist bicyclists with lateral positioning in a shared lane with on-street parking in order to reduce the chance of a bicyclist’s impacting the open door of a parked vehicle or when lanes are too narrow for side by side travel by a vehicle and bicycle in the same traffic lane. They consist of the bicycle symbol and two white chevron markings placed above. The chevrons should begin 2” below the top of the handle bars and be 3’-6” high, based on the standard details. They should not be placed on roadways that have a posted speed limit above 35 mph.

If used in a shared lane with on-street parallel parking, sharrows should be placed so that the centers of the marking are centered in the driving lane. When parking does not regularly occur, the sharrow marking should be placed such that the centers of the marking are 2’-6” from the gutter lip. If the driving lane is less than 14' wide on a street without parallel parking, the sharrow marking should be at least 2'-6" from the gutter lip or 4' from the edge of pavement where there is no curb. See the [[Media:Sharrow Placement on Collector Streets.pdf|Flowchart for Placing Sharrow Markings on Collector Streets]] for more guidance on where to place sharrow markings. They should be placed after an intersection, 25’ beyond the radius point on the curb return and thereafter between 250’ and 500’ based on engineering judgement.

If the collector street transitions to one through lane in each direction and one left turn lane, use sharrow markings in the three lane section, even if the rest of the street meets the criteria for bicycle lanes.

== Parking Space Markings ==
Parking space markings are used to encourage more orderly and efficient use of parking spaces and identify locations where parking is permitted as well as where parking is prohibited. All parking space lines shall be 4” solid white lines.

=== Perpendicular Parking Space Markings ===
Perpendicular parking space markings shall be oriented 90 degrees to the driving aisle or the curb. Standard parking space lines shall be placed such that the center to center distance is 9’ wide. Any usable gutter area can count toward the width requirements. The depth of the parking space varies.
Accessible perpendicular parking spaces for vehicles shall be 8’ wide with a 5’ access aisle consisting of a 4” wide, white outline with 4” wide, white diagonal crosshatch lines oriented at 30 degrees counter-clockwise to the curb. Van accessible spaces shall be 8’ wide with an 8’ access aisle .

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Perpendicular Parking Space.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Perpendicular Parking Space Markings
|}

=== Angled Parking Space Markings ===
Standard angled parking space markings either make an angle with the curb of 45 or 60 degrees. The perpendicular distance between standard parking space lines shall be 9’, measured from the center of the lines. Any usable gutter area can count toward the width requirements. The depth of the parking space varies.
Accessible angled parking spaces for vehicles shall be 8’ wide with a 5’ access aisle consisting of a 4” wide, white outline with 4” wide, white diagonal crosshatch lines oriented at 60 degrees counter-clockwise to the curb. Van accessible spaces shall be 8’ wide with an 8’ access aisle.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Angled Parking Space Markings.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Angled Parking Space Markings
|}

=== Parallel Parking Space Markings ===
Parallel parking spaces shall be designated with tic marks when parallel parking spaces are provided along a street. They shall be a white “plus” (+) symbol with 4” wide strokes. Each spoke shall be 12”, making the total width and height equal to 28”. At the first designated parking space, the tic mark should only be an inverted “tee” (T) indicating that there is no parking prior to the marking. The last designated parking space should include a “tee” (T) indicating that there is no parking after the marking. The center to center spacing of the parallel parking space tics should desirably be 23’ (21’ minimum). The width of the parallel parking space varies and is dependent on the available street width and the type of curb and gutter that is used.

Accessible parallel parking spaces shall have a 5’ side access aisle extending in toward the sidewalk. The access aisle shall have a 4” wide edge extending along the edge of the access aisle and 4” wide diagonal crosshatch markings at 45 degrees to the curb, placed 3’ apart from center of line to center of line.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Parallel Parking Space Markings.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Parallel Parking Space Markings
|}

=== International Symbol of Accessibility ===
The international symbol of accessibility shall be used in parking spaces that are for accessible parking spaces. It shall be 4’ square with a blue background and a white symbol. In perpendicular or angled parking spaces, the symbol shall be centered and located at the very beginning of of perpendicular or angle parking spaces as indicated in the standard details. In parallel parking spaces, the symbol shall be placed in the center (longitudinally and laterally) of a designated parallel parking space.

=== Electric Vehicle Pump Plug ===
The Electric Vehicle Pump Plug symbol for stalls associated with Electric Vehicle Charging Stations shall be used in parking spaces that are for EVs only. It shall be 4’ square with a black background and a white symbol. In perpendicular or angled parking spaces, the symbol shall be centered and located at the very beginning of of perpendicular or angle parking spaces as indicated in the standard details. In parallel parking spaces, the symbol shall be placed in the center (longitudinally and laterally) of a designated parallel parking space.

== Speed Hump Markings ==
Speed hump markings are a series of white markings placed on a speed hump to identify its location. They will be “V” shaped markings inside a second “V” shape. They shall be 12” in width separated by 12” space. The “V” shaped markings are shown centered in each travel lane on the approach side of the speed hump with the “V” pointing in the direction of traffic flow in the lane. They tip of the largest “V” will be placed at the center of the speed hump. The width of the speed hump markings are 6’ as measured at the base of the triangle.

Advance speed hump markings should be used in advance of speed humps to identify vertical roadway deflections where the deflection is not expected. They shall be a series of eight 12” transverse lines that become longer and are spaced closer together as the vehicle approaches the speed hump. They shall begin 100’ in advance of the leading edge of the speed hump and arranged as indicated in the standard details.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Speed Hump Markings.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Speed Hump Markings
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Bicycle Markings|'''Bicycle Markings''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Bicycle Markings]]
|}
----

== Design Considerations ==
Before initiating the design of a pavement marking plan, the designer should contact the City staff to discuss the specific design criteria for the project and determine the scope. Decisions should be made in regard to the type of pavement and pavement markings that will be used in the design. The following is a brief summary of general design considerations.

=== Coordination with Pavement Joints ===
Offset lane lines a minimum of 6” from asphalt joints when possible. Maintain a minimum of 4” offset from all concrete pavement joints. This should be anticipated at the very beginning when determining the typical sections. Pavement marking lines should be shown and dimensioned on the typical sections.

== Pavement Types and Approved Marking Materials ==

=== Pavement Marking Material and Surface Type Compatibility ===
The type of pavement surface will dictate the type of pavement marking material that should be specified. See the Pavement Marking Material Matrix below and the current standard details.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Pavement Marking Material Matrix.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Pavement Marking Material Matrix
|}

== Preparation of Plans ==
The Plans shall be prepared in accordance with the following guidelines unless otherwise pre-approved by the Engineer

=== Scale ===
The preferred plan scale for pavement marking plans is 1” = 40’. Two lines of pavement marking plans may be on the same sheet above and below each other. A scale and north arrow shall be indicated on each sheet.

=== Topography ===
The only topography required for pavement marking plans are finished curb lines, including storm sewer inlets, median curb lines, drive entrances, sidewalks, bike trails, pavement limits and bridge limits. Also, include existing roadway limits at each end where the proposed pavement will tie in. If the mill and overlay of existing pavements is included, the existing curb and median lines should also be shown in those areas beyond the widening. If existing markings are being tied into at a match line, they should be surveyed and shown on the plans.
If streetlighting is provided with the project, it is beneficial to show the symbol of the pole location so traffic control signs can be shown to be mounted on them, if applicable.
A centerline shall be shown with stationing for the main roadway as well as the side streets to be able to positively locate the beginning and end of pavement marking lines. Street names shall be shown for major and minor streets.

New construction items should be subdued so the proposed pavement markings, lane width callouts, signing station and offsets, etc. stand out.

=== Plan Submittals ===
There should be a minimum of three plan submittals for every pavement marking project. Plans should be submitted at the Preliminary, Field Check and Final plan stage. An additional plan submittal may be required after the first final plan stage depending on how accurate the first submittal is.

==== Preliminary Plans ====
Enough work on the pavement marking plans should be completed such that the general lane layout is evident. The lines can be continuous instead of the final format just to help identify any glaring geometric issues that could be evident early on in the project design. Typical lane widths should be shown when it differs from the typical sections or at transition points.

==== Field Check Plans ====
Field check plans should show the location of all pavement markings, as they will be installed. The plans shall show callouts for the various types of lines and lane widths, etc. It is not required to show stationing for the beginning and end of pavement marking lines at this plan stage, nor is it required to have quantities calculated. However, standard details shall be included.
Signing plans should also be incorporated into the pavement marking plans at this stage of design. All sign faces shall be shown with the MUTCD callout and size shall be shown oriented in the direction of travel.

==== Final Plans ====
All final pavement markings with stationing for the beginning and end of lines shall be included in the final plans, along with final signing plans with station and offsets for all sign locations. All sign faces shall be shown with the MUTCD callout and size shall be shown oriented in the direction of travel.
All construction notes to clarify any construction details shall be shown. All Standard Details, including the completed Bill of Materials and the Pavement Marking Bid Item table shall be included at this stage.
Depending on the number of comments made on the first submittal of final plans, a second set of final plans may be requested to verify that all comments have been addressed. The project manager will make that determination and convey his decision to the appropriate design staff.

== Computation of Quantities ==
The computation of quantities is critical to providing accurate information to the contractors bidding the project. Errors in the computation of quantities results in project cost change orders and delays in the project. Care should be taken to check quantities against the plan sheet design to verify that all items are included and accurate. What follows are some general guidelines that should be used such that the computation of quantities is consistent for all designs.

=== Longitudinal and transverse lines ===
All longitudinal and transvers lines will be measured by the linear foot for the various materials used. The lines will be measured continuous from the beginning station to the end station. The pavement marking bill of materials includes multipliers for various line types that will be applied from the “start” to “end” length.

=== Symbols ===
All symbols, including turn arrows, thru arrows, “ONLY” markings, yield lines, merge arrows, bike lane symbol, sharrows, RR crossing symbols, etc. shall be measured per each, for the various materials used.

== Temporary Raised Pavement Markers ==
Temporary Raised Pavement Markers (TRPMs) are used during chip seal pavement restoration operations. The existing thermoplastic, pre-formed thermoplastic, and patterned cold plastic pavement markings are ground off the roadway so the emulsion and layer of chips will bond to the roadway. TRPMs will be installed that meet the full requirements for substitution of the markings according to the MUTCD.
The color of the TRPMs shall be the same color of the markings for which they substitute. The number and spacing of TRPMs is different for various line types. The discussion below discusses the value of N, which is equivalent to the length of one line segment plus one gap. Overland Park uses a 6’ line segment with an 18’ gap. Therefore, N = 6 + 18 = 24.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:TRPM Value of N.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|TRPM Value of N
|}

=== Substitute for Broken Lane Lines ===
A group of at least three TRPMs shall be equally spaced at no greater than N/8 = (24/8) or 3’ spacing. Therefore, TRPMs will be located at each end of the broken lane line segment and one in the middle.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:TRPM Spacing Broken Line.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|TRPM Spacing for Broken Line
|}

=== Substitute for Solid Lane Lines ===
In the case of solid lines, the TRPMs shall be equally spaced at no greater than N/4 (24/4) or 6’ spacing. The value of N is the same as that referenced for the broken lines that might be adjacent to or might extend the solid lines.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:TRPM Spacing Solid Line.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|TRPM Spacing for Solid Line
|}

=== Substitute for other Broken Lines ===
TRPMs may be used to substitute for other broken line segments that are shorter than 6’ by using at least one placed at the center of line segments of 2 to 3 feet in length.

=== Substitute for Double Solid Lane Lines ===
For solid double lines, TRPMs can be used as a substitute as long as two markers are placed side by side, with a horizontal separation that is equivalent to the spacing between the double lines. This would be equivalent to a 4” separation in Overland Park. The TRPMs shall be equally spaced at no greater than N/4 (24/4) or 6’ spacing.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:TRPM Spacing Wide Line.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|TRPM Spacing for Wide or Double Line
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Design Considerations|'''Design Considerations''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Design Considerations]]
|}
----

Parking Prohibition / Permissive Parking Sign Design Guidelines

2026-07-07T20:52:48Z

Brian Geiger: /* Sign Sizes */ 9" to 6" and "shall" to "should"

'''City Guideline Regarding the Installation of "Parking Prohibition" or “Permissive Parking” (R7 and R8 Series) Signs''' 
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

== Governing Document Reference: ==
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD]), 2023 or latest adopted edition, [https://codes.opkansas.org/governing-body-policies/doc-viewer.aspx?secid=204&keywords=4037%2Cnn4037%27s%2Cnn4037s%2Cnn4037s%27%2Cnn4037#secid-204 City Resolution 4796 Section E] and [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx?secid=3158&keywords=12.04.085#secid-3155 Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04, Article XIII, Section 12.04.083 through Section 12.04.102].

== MUTCD Requirements: ==
"No Parking" (R7 and R8 Series) signs, by the MUTCD, are intended for use to establish parking restrictions according to State law and the City of Overland Park Municipal Code.

Parking signs should display the following information from top to bottom of the sign, in the order listed: 
:A. The restriction or prohibition; 
:B. The times of the day that it is applicable, if not at all hours; and 
:C. The days of the week that it is applicable, if not every day. 
[[Image:R7 Series Parking Restriction Signs.JPG|left]][[Image:R7-108.JPG|next]] 

If the parking restriction applies to a limited area or zone, the limits of the restriction should be shown by arrows or supplemental plaques. If arrows are used and if the sign is at the end of a parking zone, there should be a single-headed arrow pointing in the direction that the regulation is in effect. If the sign is at an intermediate point in a zone, there should be a double-headed arrow pointing both ways. When a single sign is used at the transition point between two parking zones, it should display a right and left arrow pointing in the direction that the respective restrictions apply.

As an alternate to the use of arrows to show designated restriction zones, word messages such as BEGIN, END, HERE TO CORNER, HERE TO ALLEY, THIS SIDE OF SIGN, or BETWEEN SIGNS may be used.

== Background: ==
These guidelines are meant to create consistency within the city limits of the City of Overland Park in the installation and enforcement of parking control signs on City streets (Residential, Collector, Super Collector and Thoroughfare) and City parking lots. Its purpose is to provide a safe passageway for motorists by providing clear and consistent information.

The goal of these guidelines is to create a standard for which parking control will be consistent for same street classifications throughout the City. However, due to varying types of unforeseen safety issues, the City Traffic Engineer shall have authority to install parking control, which varies from the standard.

It was determined that the previously used 12”x12” No Parking signs were difficult to enforce as they did not define the area that drivers could not be parked in (i.e. It may be clear the parking is not allowed next to the sign, but it is not clear if you can park 100' or 200' away from the sign). The 12”x18” signs resolved this issue by defining (with the use of arrows) the area of no-parking.

===Design Criteria:===
These guidelines were established using the following criteria as reference:
# Assume 1'-6" of a 2'-0" curb and gutter is usable for parking. 
# Assume a typical passenger car width of 7'-0". 
# Assume a snow plow Truck width of 10'-0". 
# Assume a fire truck requires a 10’-0” travel width and a minimum of 19'-0" with the outriggers extended. 

===Definitions:===
# Roadway Width - Measured from back of curb to back of curb, or edge of pavement to edge of pavement where no curb exists. Approximately eighteen inches of a two foot curb and gutter cross-section can be utilized when parking a vehicle on the road. Therefore, as an example, a 28' back to back street has 27' of usable roadway. 
# Road Segment Length - A typical block, from cross street to cross street, except in the cases of group mailboxes, fire hydrants, traffic calming measures, etc. 
# Sign Spacing - Based on the height of the No Parking Symbol of 9 inches, the maximum spacing between consecutive signs is 270 feet. This is in keeping with the MUTCD to provide 1” of letter height for every 30 feet of visibility distance. [[Media:Appendix A Parking Prohibition Policy.pdf|(Appendix A)]] 
# Enforceable Limitations - Any location signed using the R8-3(B) signs should be considered as No Parking up to an installed R8-3 (L) or R8-3 (R) sign. If no termination signs exist, the parking restriction should be considered terminated at the intersection of the next cross street.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
===Residential Streets:===
====New Residential Street Construction:====
# If the back of curb to back of curb width is 26’ or greater, parking is allowed on both sides of the roadway. Safety issues shall dictate any variances to this policy.
# If the back of curb to back of curb width is 22’ or 24’, parking is only allowed on one side of the roadway. The side of the street upon which parking shall be restricted will be based on sidewalk location, mail box locations, or other safety considerations such as adjacent parks, schools, etc.

====Existing Residential Streets:====
# Where existing residential streets are unimproved ditched streets, or curbed and guttered streets with a width less than 26’ back of curb to back of curb, parking restrictions will be posted on one side of the street. If a clear and present safety or operational issue is evident the City may restrict parking on both sides of the street.
# Where existing residential streets are unimproved ditched streets or curbed and guttered streets that meet or exceed the standard width of 26' back of curb to back of curb, the posting of parking restrictions will be on a case by case basis. If a clear and present safety or operational issue is evident, the City will install signs that best address the situation. Otherwise a petition must be signed by the residents. Where a Homes Association (or another such group which represents the residents) exists, a letter from this group can serve in place of a petition.
# Once an unimproved street is improved in conjunction with the City’s Neighborhood Streets Reconstruction Program, or any similar program, all “No Parking” signs that were existing prior to the improvement, will be removed where the improved street meets the requirements for New Construction, item 1 above. Residents wishing to have the signs reinstalled will be required to go through the petitioning process. Exception to this rule applies if a traffic study conducted during the design phase indicates that there is a need to keep the signs in place.

====Parking Prohibition Request Petition Process:====
# Upon a request being submitted, a field investigation shall be initiated to determine whether the installation of "No Parking" sign(s) conform to this policy and will be enforceable under section 12.04 of the Overland Park Traffic Ordinance.
# When a petition is used it must be submitted by the requester with approval of over half of the homeowners who live along the affected street segment.
# The City of Overland Park will initiate sending an approved [[Media:Parking Prohibition Request Petition Form.pdf|Parking Prohibition Request Petition Form]] to the requester listing the addresses along the street segment to be affected.
::a. The petition will state, based on a City staff field investigation, the side of the street that the parking restriction will affect.
::b. The requester shall circulate the petition to the addresses on the petition for the homeowner (one signature per household is all that will be accepted) to vote in either favor or against the parking restrictions. The petition must be approved by over half of the homeowners along any affected street.
::c. City staff will notify citizens at addresses on the returned petition that do not have a homeowner’s signature informing them that there has been a request for parking restrictions. They will be given the opportunity to vote in favor or against the restrictions, unless the petition receives a majority vote without their signature.

====Petition for the Removal of Parking Restriction Process:====
The removal of "No Parking" signs on existing residential streets will go through the same petitioning process as the addition of parking restrictions. Any street which had parking restriction signs installed as part of the petitioning process must wait twelve (12) months from the initial date of installation before it can be reviewed for removal of some or all of the parking restriction signs.
The City of Overland Park will initiate sending an approved [[Media:PARKING PROHIBITION REMOVAL PETITION FORM.pdf|Parking Prohibition Removal Request Petition Form]] to the requester listing the addresses along the street segment to be affected.

===Collector Streets:===
Parking may be restricted upon an engineering study for specific circumstances as determined by the City Traffic Engineer. This includes areas near schools, parks, bicycle routes, or other similar traffic generators with sufficient on-site parking.

===Thoroughfare and Super Collector Streets:===
Parking is prohibited on all thoroughfare streets, except within the downtown Overland Park District as outlined below. Parking is also prohibited on super collector streets.

===Downtown District:===
# On-street parking in the downtown Overland Park district shall be limited to 2 or 3-hour parking unless otherwise posted as short-term (5 or 15 minute) parking as directed by the City Traffic Engineer.
# The following streets have been identified as falling within the Downtown District: Santa Fe Drive between 79th Street and Conser Street; 80th Street between Metcalf Avenue and Conser Street: Conser from Santa Fe to 79th: 79th St from Conser to Metcalf.

===Other Typical Applications:===
The following applications are typical and do not reflect all possible situations where parking control may be needed. See [[Media:Appendix A Parking Prohibition Policy.pdf|Appendix A]] for typical sign location applications and [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx?secid=3158&keywords=12.04.085#secid-3158 Section 12.04.085 of the Overland Park Municipal Code] for a complete listing of enforceable parking control situations (regardless of whether or not signs are posted):
# Fire hydrants – On-street parking shall be restricted fifteen (15) feet on either side of the Fire hydrant.
# Crosswalks – Parking shall be restricted within twenty (20) feet of a crosswalk at an intersection twenty (20) feet on either side of a mid-block crosswalk.
# Intersections – Parking shall be restricted within thirty (30) feet upon the approach to any flashing signal, stop sign, or traffic control signal located at the side of a roadway.
# Group mailboxes – Parking shall be restricted ten (10) feet on either side of the mailboxes.
# Streets with curb side mailboxes – Residential streets, which qualify for parking restrictions, and have residential mailboxes installed along the curb on one side of the street, should have the signs installed on the same side as the mailboxes to ensure un-interrupted delivery of mail.
# Streets with sidewalk on one side – Where there are residential streets that qualify for parking restrictions, and there is sidewalk on one side of the street, the side opposite of the sidewalk should have the parking restrictions installed. The mailbox rule above should take precedence when there is a conflict between these two applications.
# Residential Areas – In addition to the policy on residential street widths discussed above, parking control may be required in residential areas affected by, but not limited to bordering schools, parks and businesses. In all instances, a traffic study will be conducted and if deemed necessary, a parking petition must be circulated and approved by over half of the owners along any affected street.
# Schools – Schools will be signed on a case by case basis as indicated by a traffic study. Generally, signs and plaques may be installed indicating “No Stopping or Standing”, or “No Parking”, and may further specify times of the day and days of the week when effective. Refer to signing standards for typical signs that will be installed in this situation.

===Requests to Temporarily Cover Parking Restriction Signs:===
Exceptions to the above requirements may exist, or be granted, for the temporary covering of parking restriction signs for a short-term duration. In any such case where a request has been made and approved by the City Traffic Engineer to temporarily cover the signs, the City Traffic Maintenance Division will install sign coverings based on the time frame requested. In certain situations, such as over weekends or holidays, the requesting entity may be required to install and remove the coverings. City staff will notify the Administrative Assistant of the Traffic Services Division who will in turn notify the Overland Park Police Department, and the Traffic Services Maintenance Department of the approved request.

The signs shall not be covered prior to two (2) hours before the start of the event. All covers will be removed within two (2) hours of the conclusion of the event.

The table below is a list of exceptions that have been granted a blanket approval to cover No Parking signs.
{| width="600px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|-
|colspan="2" align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Exceptions Allowed by the City to Cover "No Parking" Signs (Blanket Approval''')
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Name'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Location'''
|-
|Milburn Country Club
|Santa Fe Drive (71st Street to 67th Street)
|-
|Family Tree Nursery
|Farley (86th Street to 83rd Terrace) 85th Street (Mastin to Carter)
|-
|Villa Saint Joseph Nursing Home
|Rosewood (119th Street to Tomahawk Creek Parkway

|}
# Where approval has been granted to the entities listed in the chart above for the temporary covering of parking restriction signs, it is up to the requester to cover the sign prior to the event as well as to uncover the signs immediately following the event.
# The exceptions listed in the chart above have been given sign coverings to install and remove on their own, providing the appropriate granting of permission has been followed.
# The signs shall not be allowed to be covered prior to two (2) hours before the start of the event. All covers must be removed within two (2) hours of the conclusion of the event. In the event that these time frames are not adhered to, future requests from the requester may not be granted.

== Signing Standards: ==
===Sign Colors===

===="Parking Prohibition" signs====
Where parking is prohibited at all times or at specific times, the basic design for parking signs shall have a red legend and border on a white retro-reflective background, except that the R8-3 sign shall have a black legend and border and a red circle and slash on a white retro-reflective background.

===="Permissive Parking" signs====
Where only limited-time parking or parking in a particular manner are permitted, the signs shall have a green legend and border on a white retro-reflective background.

===="Informational" plaques====
Additional information plaques may be mounted below or incorporated into the “Parking Prohibition” or “Permissive Parking” sign face. The text and border color shall match the color of the sign it supplements and shall be on a white retro-reflective background.

===Sign Sizes===
“No Parking” signs shall be 12” x 18” vertical rectangles. Additional "Informational" plaques mounted below the sign should be 12” x 6” horizontal rectangles.

The signs shown and listed below are an example of the most common signs used by the City of Overland Park. Other signs may be used on a case by case basis:

===Sign Legend===
No Parking signs shall have left, right, or bidirectional arrows on the 12”x18” sign unless a single parking stall is being restricted.

===Sign Spacing===
If there is to be no parking along a lengthy distance of road, No Parking signs shall be repeated a maximum of every 270’ along the road based on the visibility distance and text size, which is 1 inch of letter height for ever 30 feet of visibility. Based on a 9" No Parking symbol, the maximum spacing of signs should be 270 feet or less.

===Sign Orientation===
Where No Parking signs are installed along streets to restrict parallel parking adjacent to curb, install the signs at 45 degrees toward the street, not the typical nearly 90 degrees to the alignment of the street. This better aligns the left and right arrows on parking restriction signs to which direction parking is restricted.

===Typical Signs===
The signs shown and listed below are an example of the most common signs used by the City of Overland Park. Other signs may be used on a case by case basis:
[[Image:Typical No Parking Signs.JPG|center]]

Phase II - Preliminary Design

2026-07-07T18:24:48Z

Brian Geiger: /* Task No. 26 - Coordinate Electrical Service for Traffic Signals, Street Lighting and other City Facilities */

{{Navbar}}
== Introduction ==
{{Introduction
|Phase II begins the engineering design and plan preparation process for a project. The date for beginning this process will depend upon the approved project schedule, budget and time anticipated to complete the various phases/tasks.

The project team will play an important decision-making role in managing a project. This team will consist of City staff and private consultants (if applicable).

Intra-department, public involvement, and utility company meetings are commenced during this phase.

Field check plans are prepared, distributed and reviewed along with preliminary construction cost estimates. Also, R/W and easement documents are completed and, if required, appraisers are hired.
}}

== [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II Checklist|Phase II Checklist]] ==


== Task No. 1 - Identify Project Team ==
{{Top}}

When a project is scheduled to begin the design phase, the Project Team is to be identified by the City Engineer and/or the City Traffic Engineer, depending on the scope of the project. The purpose of this team is to provide input, information, support, and execution throughout the project planning, design, and construction. The Project Team will generally include the following members: Project Manager, Traffic Engineer, Construction Inspector, Traffic Maintenance Technician, Maintenance Representative, Engineering Technician, Contract Specialist, Law Department Representative, and Finance Representative.

== Task No. 2 - Decide if City Staff to Design ==
{{Top}}

The City Engineer and/or the City Traffic Engineer in consultation with the Project Team will decide whether the project will be designed by the City Staff or by a Consulting Engineer.

== Task No. 3 - Consultant Selection/Certification ==
{{top}}

The City shall select and negotiate with a consultant for project design in accordance with the '''[https://codes.opkansas.org/governing-body-policies/doc-viewer.aspx?secid=464&keywords=4550%2Cnn4550#secid-464 City Resolution No. 5007]''' if the design is funded solely with local funds. If federal or state funds are used for the design, the City will use an approved list of consultants furnished by the BLP and will follow the current BLP Consultant Selection Procedures. If the City intends to use federal funds in the construction engineering, and use the same consultant for both preliminary engineering (PE) and construction engineering (CE), following the current BLP Consultant Selection Procedure for the PE will satisfy the requirements for the CE selection.

Prior to the beginning of the selection process, Project Manager shall notify via email DPW and CE of upcoming RFQ for consulting services. The project name, list of firms to receive the RFQ and any other pertinent information will be provided.

For more information see Chapter [[Media:3.0 PE Consultant Selection and Agreement 2024.pdf|'''3.0 Preliminary Engineering (PE) Consultant Selection and Agreement''']] and Chapter [[Media:11.0 CE Consultant Selection and Agreement 2024.pdf|'''11.0 Construction Engineering (CE) Consultant Selection and Agreement''']] of KDOT's LPA Project Development Manual.

When federal funds are used in the preliminary engineering, the City will provide KDOT a certification that appropriate steps have been completed and the process complied with all applicable regulations. Any work done prior to obligation of federal funds will be non-participating.

{{Note|''This Manual will be provided to the Consultant during the negotiating process. When negotiating an agreement with a consulting firm a narrative of services and a fee schedule is required (examples below'').}}

{{Exhibit|II-3a Engineering Architectural Services Agreement rev 5-29-24.docx|No. II-3a|City’s standard Engineering / Architectural services agreement for design projects.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3b(1) Supplemental to Engineering Architectural Services - 1-14-20.docx|No. II-3b(1)|City’s standard Supplemental Agreement for Professional Engineering Services. (First)}}

{{Exhibit|II-3b(2) Supplemental to Eng Arch Services-second and beyond 1-14-20.docx|No. II-3b(2)|City’s standard Supplemental Agreement for Professional Engineering Services. (Second and beyond)}}

{{Exhibit|II-3c Consultant Agreement-non design rev 5-16-24.docx|No. II-3c|City’s standard Consultant Agreement for non-design projects.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3d Supplemental to Consulting Services 1-14-20.docx|No. II-3d|City’s standard Supplemental Agreement to the Consultant Agreement for non-design projects.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3e.dot|No. II-3e| is a sample of City’s standard Scope of Services.}}
:(When writing contracts for projects involving bridge construction, refer to Chapter [[media:6.0_Bridge_Design_2024.pdf|'''6.0 Bridge Design''']] of KDOT's LPA Project Development Manual).

{{Exhibit|II-3e(1) Proposed Scope Streetlight 11.24.25.docx|No. II-3e(1)|City’s standard Scope of Services for a Street Lighting project.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3e(2) Proposed Scope Signal 11.14.25.docx|No. II-3e(2)|City’s standard Scope of Services for a Traffic Signal project.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3f.xlt|No. II-3f|City’s standard fee schedule for engineering services agreement.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3g_RFQ_Packet_for_Consulting_Serices_12.2024.pdf|No. II-3g|is a sample RFQ packet for consulting services.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3h_Sample_Ranking_Memo_to_Consultant_Selection_Committee.pdf|No. II-3h|is a sample Ranking Memo to Consultant Selection Committee.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3i.xlt|No. II-3i|is a sample Ranking Sheet to be completed by the Consultant Selection Committee.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3j.dot|No. II-3j|is a sample Interview Memo to Consultant Selection Committee.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3k.xlt|No. II-3k|is a sample of a compiled Ranking Sheet.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3l_Sample_letter_requesting_Interview_5.20.2024.pdf|No. II-3l|is a sample letter requesting interview of short list Consulting Firms.}}

The selection committee shall meet after ranking sheets are completed and any interviews (if applicable) have been held. This meeting is to ensure consensus of the selection committee. Approval to proceed with scope & fee negotiations must be obtained from the DPW prior to letters being sent to consultants.

{{Exhibit|II-3m_Sample_Selected_Consultant_Letter.pdf|No. II-3m|is a sample letter to selected Consulting Firm.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3n_Sample_Not_Selected_Consultant_Letter.pdf|No. II-3n|is a sample letter to Consulting Firms not selected.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3o CONSULTING FIRMS 6.15.2026.docx|No. II-3o|is a list of Consulting Firms.}}

== Task No. 4 - Submit Project Description to Law Department. Execute Ordinances-Resolution. ==
{{Top}}

The physical location of the project and a description of what is to be constructed is to be submitted to the Law Department. A feasibility report shall include the physical location of the project, a description of what is to be constructed, a cost estimate, and other necessary information required by the Law Department. The description project centerline shall include the permanent improvements (not tapers for street projects).

An example of a project description is as follows:

:'''''The construction of Switzer Road from north of the centerline of 159th Street to south of the centerline of 151st Street. Construction will include a dual roadway with a median. Left turn lanes will be located at side streets as required. Concrete sidewalks will be located on the west side of Switzer Road. An asphalt bike and pedestrian trail will be located on the east side of Switzer Road. The project also includes construction of storm sewers, street lights, restoration, and other items incidental to the street construction.'''''
''
The Project Manager, in conjunction with the Law Department, will determine if all necessary City ordinances or resolutions have been executed in order to authorize the project. Examples of possible documents are:

{{Exhibit|II-4a.dot|No. II-4a| Resolution on advisability of the creation of an Improvement District,}}
{{Exhibit|II-4b.dot|No. II-4b| Resolution authorizing and providing for the creation of an Improvement District,}}
:[[Media:CO 2-20-2017 Ordinance MTI-3159 (TH-1665) Publication.pdf|'''Exhibit No. II-4c''']] ''Ordinance providing for the public improvement of a Main Trafficway''.

== Task No. 5 - Prepare Project Schedule ==
{{Top}}

If a Consultant is to be hired, the anticipated construction time period shall be provided. The Consultant shall submit a schedule, indicating the design phases, R/W / easement submittal, meetings, bid opening date and construction time period. If the City Staff is designing the project, a similar schedule shall be prepared by the City Project Manager.

== Task No. 6 - Submit Cash Flow Projections (Engineering Cost) ==
{{Top}}

When requested, a cash flow projection for engineering services shall be submitted to the City Finance Department.

:[[Media:Cash Flow TH-1027 6-2019 Rome.xlsx|'''Exhibit II-6''']] ''is the standard cash flow form.''

== Task No. 7 - Initiate Utility Coordination. Schedule Utility Meeting (optional) ==
{{Top}}

Early in the preliminary design phase, the Project Manager will contact all public and private utility officials, informing them of the upcoming project (project limits and schedule) and requesting the information on their facilities (location maps, existing utility easements and any other pertinent information) in the vicinity.

{{Exhibit|II-7 email to utility companies links.docx|No. II-7|is a sample email (initial contact) to the utilities.}}
:([[media:Project location map for utilities.pdf|'''Project Location Map''']] and [[media:Utility Response Form.pdf|'''Utility Response Forms''']] should be attached to the email).

If the Project Manager chooses to hold a meeting, an agenda should be prepared and distributed in advance of the meeting to all scheduled attendees.

The typical agenda items are as follows:

*utility location maps/information;
*existing utility easements;
*project schedule;
*possible critical out-of-service time periods;
*utility representatives contact information.

Meeting minutes shall also be prepared following the meeting and distributed to all scheduled attendees, including those who were invited but did not attend.
{{Note|''When scheduling utility meeting in Google calendar, in order to avoid conflicts with other utility meetings, CH-PW Utilities (found under Rooms tab) shall be "invited" as an attendee to all meetings, pre-bid conferences and pre-construction conferences or any meetings that require utility company attendance''.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7.docx|No. II-7a|is a list of utility companies.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7b utility info request.pdf|No. II-7b|is a sample request for utility plans and easement documents.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7c Utility Meeting Request.pdf|No. II-7c|is a sample invitation letter for Utility Coordination Meeting.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7d utility meeting agenda.pdf|No. II-7d|sample agenda for Utility Coordination Meeting.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7e Sign in sheet.docx|No. II-7e|meeting sign in sheet.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7f Utility Meeting Minutes.pdf|No. II-7f|sample of utility coordination meeting minutes.}}

'''Johnson County Wastewater'''

{{Exhibit|II-7g.pdf|No. II-7g|Right-Of-Way Agreement}}

{{Exhibit|II-7h.pdf|No. II-7h|Right-Of-Way Agreement, Reference Sheet}}

{{Exhibit|II-7i.pdf|No. II-7i|Right-Of-Way Agreement, Project Checklist}}

:[[Media:MS1273 Invoice Packet.pdf|'''Exhibit No. II-7j''']] ''Payment invoice to JCW for reimbursement of relocation costs.''

'''Water District No.1 of Johnson County'''

{{Exhibit|II-7k.pdf|No. II-7k|Right-Of -Way Agreement}}

'''Transmission Pipe Line'''

{{Exhibit|II-7l.pdf|No. II-7l| is a sample of Encroachment Guidelines.}}

'''Evergy'''

{{Exhibit|II-7m KCP&L Contacts.xlsx|No. II-7m|Governmental Relocation Contact List}}

{{Exhibit|II-7n.pdf|No. II-7n|Service Territory Map}}

For Verizon inquiries see Memorandum [[Media:Verizon Inquiries.pdf|'''Request for OSP facility records''']].

Refer to the City's [[Media:Utility Relocation Guidelines.pdf|'''Utility Relocation Guidelines''']] for all relocation planning.

Refer to '''[https://drive.google.com/file/d/18FRkK-M55tHmO86mZW5fljqVTgmynk4Y/view Manual of Infrastructure Standards]''' for excavation and safety requirements.

For federally funded projects refer to Chapter [[Media:8.0 Status of Utilities 2020.pdf|'''8.0 Status of Utilities''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual''' for additional information.

== Task No. 8 - Pre-Design Meeting ==
{{Top}}

A pre-design meeting shall be scheduled prior to commencing any significant design work. A meeting agenda shall be prepared and distributed in advance of the meeting to the scheduled attendees. Meeting minutes shall be prepared and distributed to all attendees. The purpose of this meeting is to discuss varies anticipated design issues:

*specific limits of improvements;
*median openings and left/right turn storage lengths;
*utility conflicts; [[1304 - Status of Utilities.pdf]]
{{Note|''All utilities within construction limits will be shown on the 1304 Form.|1304 - Status of Utilities.pdf}}
*detailed schedule;
*design criteria as described in [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 9 - Design Criteria| '''Phase II, Task No. 9''']];
*necessary permits, such as
::[https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/permits-licenses-inspections-directory/'''Land Disturbance Permit'''];
::'''[https://www.kdhe.ks.gov/DocumentCenter/View/6311/Notice-of-Intent---Construction-Activities-PDF KDHE Stormwater NOI]''';
::[https://www.epa.gov/cwa-404/permit-program-under-cwa-section-404 Corps of Engineers '''404 Permit'''];
::'''[https://www.agriculture.ks.gov/divisions-programs/division-of-water-resources/water-structures/stream-and-floodplain-permits Kansas DWR]''';
::[https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/permits-licenses-inspections-directory/'''Floodplain Development Permit'''];
*detours/street closings;
*project phasing/traffic control;
*identify equipment or material on critical path (see note below);
*distribute City's Standard Bid Items to be used during design;
*coordinate with Engineering Services for development projects permitted in the area.

{{Note|''It may be necessary to purchase equipment or material in advance of actual project letting date. Generally this will involve separate purchasing contracts for signal poles, LED's, signal cabinets, controllers and load switches. Items on the critical path that could delay the project completion date should be identified and the need for separate purchasing contracts discussed. The BLP project manager should also be included in discussions to make sure federal/state requirements are met for the pre-purchased items''.}}

== Task No. 9 - Design Criteria ==
{{Top}}

:Project design shall be in accordance with accepted engineering practices and all applicable state, AASHTO and federal Criteria. These criteria include, but not limited to the following references:

*'''Public and Private Streets'''

::Current edition of AASHTO's [https://store.transportation.org'''A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets''' 2018, 7th Edition] (Green Book). (See ''K:\Library\References\AASHTO'')
::Current edition of KDOT's [https://www.ksdot.gov/doing-business/highway-contractors/contractor-resources/specifications-for-state-road-and-bridge-construction '''Standard Specifications for State Road and Bridge Construction'''.]
::Current edition of KDOT's [[Media:2020 LPA Manual.pdf|'''LPA Project Development Manual''']].
::Current City of Overland Park [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-1 '''Municipal Code'''.]
:::[http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-3613 '''Chapter 13.10''' Public Street, Streetlighting and Sidewalk Requirements]
:::[http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-3641 '''Chapter 13.12''' Construction on Rights-of-Way.]
:::[http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-4036 '''Chapter 15.10''' Stormwater Management Program - Standards and Permitting]
::Current City of Overland Park Design and Construction Standards [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 1 - as Posted to website 06.11.2021.pdf|'''Volume 1 Design Criteria''']] and [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 2 - Specifications as posted to website 06.15.2021.pdf|'''Volume 2 Construction Specifications''']]
*'''Stormwater Conveyance and Treatment Facilities'''
:Current City of Overland Park Design and Construction Standards [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 1 - as Posted to website 06.11.2021.pdf|'''Volume 1 Design Criteria''']] and [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 2 - Specifications as posted to website 06.15.2021.pdf|'''Volume 2 Construction Specifications''']] as a supplement to '''[https://kcmetro.apwa.org/resources/specifications/ APWA Section 5600]'''.
*'''Erosion and Sediment Control'''
:Current City of Overland Park Design and Construction Standards [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 1 - as Posted to website 06.11.2021.pdf|'''Volume 1 Design Criteria''']] and [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 2 - Specifications as posted to website 06.15.2021.pdf|'''Volume 2 Construction Specifications''']] as a supplement to '''[https://kcmetro.apwa.org/resources/specifications/ APWA Section 5100]'''.
*'''Traffic Signals'''
:Traffic signals shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of the '''[https://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno_11th_Edition.htm Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices]'''. Traffic signal mast arm poles shall be designed in accordance with the [http://www.tsp2.org/2013/05/29/aashto-releases-new-specifications-for-structural-supports-for-highway-signs-luminaries-and-traffic-signals/ '''2013 AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals, Sixth Edition, LTS-6'''].
*'''Permanent Traffic Control Signs'''
:Permanent traffic control signs shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of the '''[https://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno_11th_Edition.htm Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices]''' and the City's [http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Traffic_Sign_Design_Guidelines '''Traffic Sign Design Manual'''].
*'''Pavement Markings'''
:Pavement markings shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of the '''[https://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno_11th_Edition.htm Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices]''' and the City's [http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Pavement_Marking_Design_Manual#top '''Pavement Marking Design Manual'''].
*'''Streetlights'''
:Streetlights shall be designed in accordance with [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks-gbp/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-198 '''Resolution No. 4036'''] and the City's [http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Streetlight_Design_Manual '''Streetlighting Design Manual'''].

:Current City of Overland Park Design and Construction Standards [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 1 - as Posted to website 06.11.2021.pdf|'''Volume 1 Design Criteria''']]. Refer to Part F for the design criteria for all streetlighting projects.
*'''Traffic Control'''
:Work Zone Traffic Control shall be designed in accordance with the City’s [[Media:Traffic-Control-Handbook-July-2016.pdf| '''Traffic Control Handbook''']].
*'''Bridges'''
:City of Overland Park Bridge Design Information
{{Exhibit2|II-9a.docx|No. II-9a|is a list of bridge design information.}}
{{Exhibit2|2018 Bridge Inventory SOP.pdf|No. II-9b|is Public Works Department Bridge Asset Inventory Procedure (February 2018).}}
:Also see
::Chapter [[Media:6.0 Bridge Design 2020.pdf|'''6.0 Bridge Design''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual'''
::[https://kart.ksdot.org '''LRFD Bridge Design Manual, Volume III'''], KDOT, current edition. (See ''K:\Library\References\KDOT Design Manual\KDOT Bridge Design Manual December 2021.pdf'')
::[https://store.transportation.org '''LRFD Bridge Design Specifications'''], AASHTO, current edition

*'''Johnson County Wastewater'''
{{Exhibit2|II-9c.pdf|No. II-9c|Designers Checklist for City Streets and Stormwater Improvements.}}
{{Exhibit2|II-9d.pdf|No. II-9d|Memo from JCW on existing brick manholes with new cone sections.}}
:For city street or stormwater improvement projects that require sanitary sewer relocation or extension, full sanitary sewer design plans per JCW plan requirements and specifications must be approved by JCW. See below for requirements.

::'''[https://www.jocogov.org/department/wastewater/developers-engineers-contractors/privately-financed-sewer-main-development Procedures for Privately Financed Gravity Sewer Main Projects]'''
::'''[https://www.jocogov.org/department/wastewater/developers-engineers-contractors/regulations Minimum Plan Requirements for Gravity Sewer Main Projects]'''

::'''[https://www.jocogov.org/department/wastewater/developers-engineers-contractors/regulations Construction and Material Specifications for Sanitary Sewers]'''

::'''[https://www.jocogov.org/department/wastewater/developers-engineers-contractors/standard-details Sanitary Sewer Standard Details]'''.
:For the status of sanitary sewer plan submittals and projects see Johnson County Wastewater [https://www.jocogov.org/dept/wastewater/development-and-permitting/permitting/commercial '''Commercial Permitting'''] page.
:Also see [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 7 - Initiate Utility Coordination. Schedule Utility Meeting (optional)| '''Phase II, Task No. 7''']] for Right-Of-Way agreement between JCW and City of Overland Park.
*'''Current Johnson County Stormwater Management Program Policy and Procedures'''
::See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase I - Vision#Task 3 - Prepare SMAC Project Addition Study .28Form.29|'''Phase I, Task No. 3''']]
*'''Additional Design Guidance for Reference:
::[https://store.transportation.org '''"Roadside Design Guide"'''], AASHTO, current edition;
::[http://www.trb.org/Main/Blurbs/175169.aspx '''"Highway Capacity Manual"'''](HCM), current edition;
::[https://store.transportation.org/search?q=guide%20for%20the%20development%20of%20bicycle%20facilities&categoryCode=&index=storeitem&type=All&pageNum=1&pageSize=10&sortBy=Relevance&itemType=All"'''Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities'''"], AASHTO, current edition. (See ''K:\Projects\Manual\AASHTO Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities 2012.pdf'').
::'''[https://www.access-board.gov/ada/ American with Disabilities Act (ADA) Guidelines and Standards]''', United States Access Board;
::'''[https://www.access-board.gov/prowag/ Proposed Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities in the Public Right-of-Way (PROWAG)]''', United States Access Board;
::[https://nacto.org/publication/urban-street-design-guide '''"Urban Street Design Guide"'''] NACTO, current edition;
::[https://nacto.org/wp-content/uploads/2013/10/Vega-BarachowitzDavid_DesigningCitiesPHX.pdf '''"Urban Bikeway Design Guide"'''] NACTO, current edition;
::'''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/5325/638736482029600000 "Kansas Roundabout Guide"]''' KDOT, current edition;
::'''[https://drive.google.com/file/d/1Kz3wEyc0K2AxxH3Bng4ZsNdkGrYnpxm2/view Greenway Linkages Plan for Overland Park]''';
::'''[https://www2.opkansas.org/City-Government/Agendas-and-Minutes/Community-Development/Agendas/2015/2015-03-04/DIS-4-2.pdf South Overland Park Transportation Plan]''';
::[https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/traffic-roads-transportation/bicycling/'''Overland Park Bicycle Master Plan'''];
::'''[https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/publications/research/safety/00067/00067.pdf FHA Roundabouts Informational Guide]'''.
*'''Design Exceptions:
:If, during the development of plans for proposed project, it is determined that there are circumstances that may make it impractical to meet the applicable guidelines, the Consultant/Project Manager shall fill out the following forms:

:Use [[Media:Design exceptions.docx|'''Design Exceptions''']] form to document all design exceptions and save it to the project preliminary design folder.

:Use [[Media:Design deviations.docx|'''Design Deviations''']] form to document design deviations, revisions to the standard design that do not adversely impact the design intent, and save to the project preliminary design folder.

: See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 18 - Submit Request for Design Exception to KDOT| '''Phase II, Task No. 18''']] for design exceptions on federally funded projects.

== Task No. 10 - Standard Details ==
{{Top}}

The City's Public Works Department maintains and updates [https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/building-construction/civil-engineering/construction-standards/ '''Standard Details'''] for publicly funded projects under the direction of the City Engineer.
If Johnson County Wastewater facilities are involved in the project, '''[https://www.jocogov.org/department/wastewater/developers-engineers-contractors/standard-details Sanitary Sewer Standard Details]''' shall be incorporated into the plans.

Also, the following are typical thoroughfare sections to be used for the infrastructure improvements as recommended by '''[https://www2.opkansas.org/City-Government/Agendas-and-Minutes/Community-Development/Agendas/2015/2015-03-04/DIS-4-2.pdf South Overland Park Transportation Plan]''':

[[Media:Thoroughfare Ultimate 4- and 3-Lane Sections March-2022.pdf|'''Ultimate 4- and 3-Lane Thoroughfare Sections''']];

[[Media:Thoroughfare Ultimate 2-Lane Sections March-2022.pdf|'''Ultimate 2-Lane Thoroughfare Sections''']];

[[Media:Thoroughfare Interim Sections March-2022.pdf|'''Interim Thoroughfare Sections''']].

== Task No. 11 - SMAC Preliminary Study ==
{{Top}}

For SMAC funded projects a preliminary study should be prepared and delivered to Johnson County SMAC officials prior to beginning any design work.

See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase I - Vision#Task 3 - Prepare SMAC Project Addition Study .28Form.29|'''Phase I, Task No. 3''']] for details and checklist for preparing this study.

== Task No. 12 - Other Agency Agreements (if Applicable) ==
{{Top}}

Local government agency agreements should be executed under [[index.php/Index.php/Phase I - Vision#Task 11 - Execute Other Agency Agreements|'''Phase I, Task No. 11''']]. If these agreements were not executed prior to beginning of design, execution shall be completed at this time in the preliminary design phase.

== Task No. 13 - Conduct Field Surveys ==
{{Top}}

Sufficient and required data necessary for design purposes shall be collected. The field survey shall be in accordance with state statutes, and current accepted and required surveying practices. Prior to the beginning of land survey or utility relocation work the letter to the residences adjacent to the project will be mailed out informing property owners of upcoming activities. Included with the letter is flood questionnaire to be used for storm drainage improvements consideration.
:'''[[Media:II-15f Survey Notice Template.docx|Exhibit No. II-13a]]''' ''is a sample pre-survey letter to residents''.
:[[Media:Flooding Questionnaire Template.doc|'''Exhibit No. II-13b''']] ''is a flood questionnaire''.

See City standard Scope of Services in '''[https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Phase_II_-_Preliminary_Design#Task_No._3_-_Consultant_Selection/Certification Phase II, Task 3]'''

for survey control requirements.

{{Note| Any Johnson County Vertical Control Network Bench Marks that will be disturbed as part of the project must be reset. The standard specification and a bid item for this work must be included in the contract documents. These benchmark locations can be found on Johnson County [https://maps.jocogov.org/ims/'''AIMS Mapping'''] web page under the Utilities layer.}}

== '''Task No. 14 - Continue Environmental Process''' ==
{{Top}}

Once authorization for the project is completed, KDOT will complete an initial review of the project location and scope to determine the degree of analyses that is required in order to comply with State and Federal environmental laws and regulations.

The BLP will receive from the City the Form '''[https://www.ksdot.gov/Home/Components/StaffDirectory/StaffDirectory/424/358?widgetId=2831 1307]''', along with all applicable permits attached, prior to obligation of funds, to comply with the NEPA process. (See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase III - Final Design#Task No. 14 - Submit PS&E Package|'''Phase III, Task No. 14''']]).
If detailed environmental analyses are required, the investigation will be initiated at this time. Final and complete analyses and application for permits by the City may be completed after Field Check and detailed design information is available. All investigation and permit acquisitions will be conducted in accordance with the referenced manual and BLP Policy Memos.

KDOT will control the environmental process task for projects with categorical exclusion. The complexity and effort will depend on each project. The exception would be if an Environmental Assessment or an Environmental Impact Statement is required. In this case, the City or Consultant would perform this task with KDOT and FHWA approval.

{{Note|''For KDOT Projects this task is tracked by KDOT. ''The Project Engineer shall ensure this task is complete''.}}

For more information see Chapter [[Media:4.0 Environmental 2020.pdf|'''4.0 Environmental''']] of KDOT's LPA Project Development Manual.

== Task No. 15 - Schedule First Public Information Meeting ==
{{Top}}

The first public information meeting is scheduled by the Consultant/Project Manager. This meeting shall occur during preliminary design and after field surveys. The purpose of this meeting is to present the concept plan, project schedule, hear citizen's concerns, answer questions, discuss design issues and introduce the involved City Officials and Consultant employees. For KDOT projects the Notice of Public Information Meeting must be published in the '''[https://sos.ks.gov/publications/kansas-register.html Kansas Register]''' and [http://www.thelegalrecord.net '''The Legal Record'''].

Public information invites shall be sent to the following interested parties:
*Subdivisions adjacent to the project
*Home Owners Associations adjacent to the project. Contact the City Manager's office for a current list of HOA contacts.
*Group Chairperson for [https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/neighborhoods/neighborhood-conservation-program/ '''Neighborhood Conservation Groups'''] adjacent to the project.
::''For the phone number of the group chairperson, contact the Neighborhood Planner at 913/895-6270.''

*Council Members of [https://www.opkansas.org/city-government/city-council/ '''Ward'''(s)] adjacent to the project
*City Manager
*City Communications Manager and Communications Assistant
*Funding Sources (KDOT, CARS, SMAC, etc.)
*Other City (Olathe, Leawood, etc.)
*Public Works Management (PWMG)
*Supervisory Engineer
*Construction Inspector
*Consulting Firm
*Facilities Management (if meeting is being held at a City facility)
* If deemed necessary, Project Manager can invite police personnel.

The Property Owner Conversation Log should be used throughout the project to document all conversations with property owners.

{{Note|''This and all subsequent Public Information Meeting notices should ask if participants need a language interpreter or a hearing assistance device and a phone number. All meeting rooms shall be ADA accessible.'' The KDOT '''Equal Opportunity and Civil Rights Information''' brochure in [[Media:Title VI Brochure English.pdf|'''English''']] and [[Media:Title VI Brochure Spanish.pdf|'''Spanish''']] is to be made available at all public meetings.}}

{{Exhibit|II-15a_First Public Information Meeting - In Person.docx|No. II-15a|is an example Invitation Letter to property owners.}}
{{Exhibit|II-15b_First Public Information Meeting - Virtual.docx|No. II-15b|is an example Invitation Letter to property owners for a virtual meeting.}}
{{Exhibit|II-15c_Public Meeting Sign-In Sheet_.docx|No. II-15c|is a public meeting sign in sheet.}}
{{Exhibit|II-15d_Citizen Comment Form Example.doc|No. II-15d|is an example Public Meeting Citizen Comment Form.}}
{{Exhibit|II-15e_sample public meeting flyer.pdf|No. II-15e|is an example Public Meeting Handout.}}{{Exhibit|II-15f_Survey Notice Template.docx|No. II-15f|is an example of a notice of survey.}}

For those who wish to use a Blue Valley School District facility for the public meeting, an on-line [https://www.bluevalleyk12.org/Page/34388 '''Facility Rental Reservation Request'''] is available. Once the request is submitted, the BVSD Facility Scheduling Office will send a confirmation if the requested space is available.

== Task No. 16 - Begin Title Report Process ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant and/or the Project Manager shall prepare an RFP and forward to a minimum of three land title firms. The RFP should include a map or plan indicating the location of the project and the number of tracts of land involved. Proposals will be forwarded to the Project Manager whereby a firm will be selected and an agreement executed. The RFP should request the following information:
*legal description of the property and copy of recorded deed(s),
*mailing address of the property owner,
*all lien holders of record and recorded mortgage(s),
*all easements of record and copy of recorded document(s),
*dedicated R/W and copy of recorded document(s), and
*records of previous condemnations (available in the office of the District Court of Johnson County Kansas, Olathe, Kansas).

In addition, the RFP should provide instructions on methods of delivery of the title report acceptable to the City. Finally the RFP will establish a date for completing the title certification and report.

{{Exhibit|II-16a.xlt|No. II-16a|is a list of land title companies to be considered in RFP requests.}}
{{Exhibit|II-16b.dot|No. II-16b|is a sample land title RFP letter.}}
{{Exhibit|II-16c.pdf|No. II-16c|is a sample location map with parcel numbers.}}
{{Exhibit|II-16d.dot|No. II-16d|is a sample letter to selected land title company.}}
{{Exhibit|II-16e.dot|No. II-16e|is a sample letter to land title companies not selected.}}

== Task No. 17 - Begin Geotechnical Report Process ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Engineer shall determine what appropriate geotechnical information and data is necessary to adequately design the project. Drilled shaft foundations for bridges require specialized inspection. If drilled shaft foundations are anticipated and the Consultant cannot perform this work, the service of a subconsultant may be utilized after receiving written approval from the City. For projects designed by City Staff an RFP shall be prepared and forwarded to qualified firms.

Refer to [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 3 - Consultant Selection/Certification| '''Phase II, Task No. 3''']] for information on consultant selection process.

{{Exhibit|IV-2a.docx|No. IV-2a|is a list of materials testing / geotechnical service companies.}}

For projects involving bridge construction, refer to Geotechnical Bridge Foundation Investigation Practice, found in Chapter [[Media:6.0 Bridge Design 2020.pdf|'''6.0 Bridge Design''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual'''.

== '''Task No. 18 - Submit Request for Design Exception to KDOT''' ==
{{Top}}

If, during the development of plans for proposed federally funded projects, it is determined that there are circumstances that may make it impractical to meet the applicable guidelines, the Consultant/Project Manager shall submit in writing to the Bureau of Local Projects (KDOT) any request for project design exceptions, using a summary format like the form in [[Media:Design Exception Request Summary Form 2020.pdf|'''Figure 5.1''']] of the LPA Project Development Manual. A request for a design exception may be made at any time in the design process when sufficient information is available to adequately evaluate the situation.

All design exceptions are subject to approval by the Bureau Chief of BLP. The request may involve one or more of the following controlling criteria: design speed, lane and shoulder width, bridge width, structural capacity, horizontal and vertical alignment, grades, stopping sight distance, cross slopes, superelevation, horizontal and vertical clearances. Justification for the request shall be included along with cost estimates for reasonable alternates. Supporting documents should be consistent with Section 2.3.4 of the KDOT Design Manual, Volume I, Bureau of Road Design.

(See '''KDOT Road Design Manual 2014.pdf''' in ''K:\Library\References\KDOT Design Manual'').

For design exceptions documentation, use Overland Park [[Media:Design exceptions.docx|'''Design Exceptions''']] form to be submitted in addition to the KDOT form.

For projects with other funding sources all requests for design exceptions shall be directed to the City Engineer.

Document all design exceptions regardless of funding on [[Media:Design exceptions.docx|'''Design Exceptions''']] form and save to the project preliminary design folder.

For more information see section 5.2.2.2 (Design Exception/Allowance) in Chapter [[Media:5.0 Plan Development 2020.pdf|'''5.0 Plan Development''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual'''.

For additional information regarding design exceptions on non-KDOT projects refer to [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 9 - Design Criteria| '''Phase II, Task No. 9''']] .

== Task No. 19 - Prepare Field Check Plans ==
{{Top}}

Plans should be approximately 50 percent complete for field check review including any proposed easement and R/W takings along with a preliminary construction cost estimate and updated project schedule/checklist. The plans shall be stamped "Preliminary—Field Check".

{{Exhibit|I-13b.xlt|No. I-13b|is RUPIS project schedule.}}

See [[Media:Blp-memo-03-12.pdf|'''BLP Memo 03-12 Engineer's Professional Seal and Signature on Plans.''']]

For Field Check Plans preparation and submittal requirements on federally funded projects refer to Chapter [[Media:5.0 Plan Development 2020.pdf|'''5.0 Plan Development''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual'''.

== Task No. 20 - Distribute Plans to Utility Companies. Schedule Utility Meeting. ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager will distribute field check plans to all utility company representatives and schedule the utility meeting. An agenda should accompany the meeting invite. Meeting minutes will be prepared following the meeting and distributed to all scheduled attendees.

{{Note|''When scheduling utility meeting in Google calendar, in order to avoid conflicts with other utility meetings, CH-PW Utilities (found under Rooms tab) shall be "invited" as an attendee to all meetings, pre-bid conferences and pre-construction conferences or any meetings that require utility company attendance''.}}

The purpose of the utility meeting is as follows:
*check accuracy of utility locations on plans,
*establish what utilities need to be relocated,
*See [[Media:KCP&L DWG 130.1-12.pdf|'''Evergy DWG 130.1-12''']] for clearance requirements from signal or streetlight poles to utility lines. Verify all poles have proper clearance.
*establish timetable for accomplishing the relocations, and
*re-confirm utility representative contacts.

See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 7 - Initiate Utility Coordination. Schedule Utility Meeting (optional)|'''Phase II, Task No. 7''']] for exhibits.

== Task No. 21 - Update Preliminary Cost Estimate ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager shall prepare and submit an updated preliminary construction cost estimate. The form for this estimate shall resemble the Bid form with the item description, unit, approximate quantity, unit price and total. KDOT-BLP should receive a copy of this estimate.

All cost estimates shall utilize the City's [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Bid_item_list '''Standard Bid Items'''] and correspond to the measurement and payment as shown in the [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=City_of_Overland_Park_Standard_Specifications_-_2020 '''City of Overland Park Standard Specifications'''].

== Task No. 22 - Update Preliminary Cash Flow Projection ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager shall prepare a preliminary cash flow projection, including construction costs, and submit it to the City Finance Department on the standard form.

See [[Media:Cash Flow TH-1027 6-2019 Rome.xlsx|'''Exhibit II-6''']].

== Task No. 23 - Distribute Plans for Field Check ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Engineer shall distribute field check plans along with a copy of the project cost estimate and updated RUPIS project schedule electronically via '''Bluebeam''' session to the following:
*all members of the Project Team (see '''[[Media:Maintenance Plan Review Process 2026.docx|Maintenance Plan Review Process]]''' for Maintenance Division routing),
*City Engineer,
*City Traffic Engineer,

For KDOT projects the electronic field check plans shall be provided to the BLP for transmittal to the Environmental Services Section(KDOT), who will transmit plans to appropriate regulatory and resource agencies. Invitations to the regulatory and resource agencies to participate in the field check should be rendered if environmental mitigation is required. The Consultant/Project Engineer shall provide a project cost estimate to the BLP with the plans.

For the instructions on submitting E-Plans to BLP see the following:''

'''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/5601/638733200544670000 User Guide for Electronic Plans Review]''';
'''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/5595/638733200673170000 Specifications for Electronic Plans Submittal]''';
'''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/5211/638733041153400000 FTP Instructions]'''.

{{Note|''For KDOT Projects this task is tracked by KDOT. ''The Project Engineer shall ensure this task is complete''.}}

== Task No. 24 - Submit Required Permit Applications ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager shall determine what permits will be required in order to construct the project. The following is a list of possible permits required:

*City of Overland Park [https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/building-construction/buildings-construction-licenses-permits-inspections/ '''Floodplain Development Permit'''] - necessary for any work in a FEMA floodplain, including areas that will be FEMA floodplain once Johnson County Watershed studies are adopted.

{{Exhibit|II-24a.pdf|No. II-24a|is a memo of the steps to be taken on Public Works projects.}}

{{Exhibit|II-24c.pdf|No. II-24c|is FEMA's Procedures for "No Rise" Certifications.}}

*[[Media:Temp Erosion & Pollution Control for PW Projects .pdf|'''Temporary Erosion and Pollution Control for Public Works Projects''']] is a memo summarizing permit requirements and project team procedures for Public Works projects.

*When a project disturbs more than 1 (one) acre, a Notice of Intent (NOI) permit from Kansas Department of Health and Environment (KDHE) and a Land Disturbance Permit (LDP) from the City of Overland Park are required.
:The NOI permit is submitted during final design phase of the project. The permit submittal requires clearance letters for the project site from the following agencies:
::Kansas Department of Wildlife, Parks and Tourism for threatened or endangered species habitat. Contact KDWPT by emailing the environmental review request (see [[Media:II-24 KDWPT Notification Letter.pdf|'''example''')]] to ess@ksoutdoors.com.
::Kansas Historical Society for historical and archaeological sites. The information for the project should be submitted to the KSHS via the Kansas Review & Compliance (KSR&C) system. Go to [https://review.kshs.org/Account/Login '''http://review.kshs.org'''] to create an account or log in to an existing account.
:Refer to [[index.php/Index.php/Phase III - Final Design#Task No. 9 - Submit Final Check Plans for Review|'''Phase III, Task No.9''']] for the NOI application.
:The LDP is obtained prior to commencing construction activities. Refer to [[index.php/Index.php/Phase V - Construction#Task No. 8 - Complete Contractor Permits|'''Phase V, Task No.8''']] for the LDP application.

*Permit to Construct-Obstruction in streams from Kansas Department of Agriculture''' [https://www.agriculture.ks.gov/divisions-programs/division-of-water-resources/water-structures/stream-and-floodplain-permits Division of Water Resources]''' is necessary for any work on a stream with more than 240 acres tributary drainage (some exceptions).

:'''[https://www.agriculture.ks.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/2616/638461107218370000 Exhibit No. II-24d]''' ''is DWR application for permit for Obstruction in Streams.''

*State of Kansas - Environmental Coordination Act (ECA) - approval letters from various state agencies are typically required for Stream Obstructions permits and sometimes others. Contacting these agencies directly for their approval letter can accelerate permitting.

* Listing of contact information and addresses for the [https://www.agriculture.ks.gov/divisions-programs/division-of-water-resources/water-structures/environmental-coordination-act '''ECA agencies'''].

*'''[https://www.kdhe.ks.gov/DocumentCenter/View/41615/Plugging-Abandoned-Wells-Article-PDF?bidId= Plugging Packet]''' ''is a handout detailing KDHE's requirements for plugging abandoned water wells.''

*Corps of Engineers 404 Permit - necessary for any work located within a "water of the United States", including wetlands. '''http://www.usace.army.mil/Missions/CivilWorks/RegulatoryProgramandPermits.'''

:{{Exhibit|II-24f.pdf|No. II-24f|is a sample letter requesting a project be reviewed for nationwide permit coverage. (Visit [http://www.usace.army.mil/Missions/CivilWorks/RegulatoryProgramandPermits.aspx '''COE website'''] for latest forms and instructions if an individual permit is needed).}}

*FEMA Conditional and Final Letters of Map Revision - required for certain type of major work in the floodplain, as coordinated with the floodplain administrator (see City of OP Floodplain Development Permit, above). The latest permit forms and guidance can be obtained from [https://www.fema.gov/national-flood-insurance-program/national-flood-insurance-program-forms '''FEMA's website'''].

*KDOT Highway Permits - necessary for construction or utility relocation within KDOT Right of Way are done using the online [https://www.ksdot.gov/doing-business/permits/kdot-utility-permit-system-kups '''KUPS system''']:

::::'''''Highway Permit Use of Right of Way'''''

::::'''''Cased Utility Line Waiver'''''

::::'''''Highway Permit for Highway Access'''''

::::'''''Highway Permit Attachments to Bridges and Other Structures'''''

::::'''''Access Application Information Sheet'''''

:See [[Media:KDOT Forms Instructions.pdf|'''Preparation of Application for Highway Permit Agreements''']] for instructions on preparation of KDOT Forms 304, 308, 309 and 334.

See '''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/1305/638711379952670000 2007 KDOT Utility Accommodation Policy]''' for additional information.

All project related state and/or federal permits must be submitted and Form '''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/1579/638733210123230000 1307]''' completed prior to submittal of final check plans. (See [[Media:Blp-memo-10-08.pdf|'''BLP Memo 10-08''']]). This shall be completed at least four months prior to project letting.

== Task No. 25 - Begin Field Check Plan Review ==
The persons who receive field check plans (see [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 23 - Distribute Plans for Field Check|'''Task No. 23''']]) shall commence plan review. The review shall be completed prior to the scheduled Field Check meeting.

{{Note| Any Johnson County Vertical Control Network Bench Marks that will be disturbed as part of the project must be reset. The standard specification and a bid item for this work must be included in the contract documents. These benchmark locations can be found on Johnson County [https://maps.jocogov.org/ims/'''AIMS Mapping'''] web page under the Utilities layer.}}

== Task No. 26 - Coordinate Electrical Service for Traffic Signals, Street Lighting and other City Facilities==
If applicable, begin [[Media:II-26 Electrical Services Address Procedures.pdf|'''Electrical Service Address Procedures''']] for streetlighting controllers, traffic signal controllers, electrical control centers for park irrigation controllers, flood warning or road weather information systems.

As of mid-2025, Evergy only accepts Account Setup Forms via their [https://apps.evergy.com/ServiceWork ''' online form'''].

*See [[Media:II-26 KCPL Account Setup Form - Streetlighting.pdf|'''Evergy Account Setup Form - Streetlighting Control Center (old form)'''.]]

*See [[Media:II-26 KCPL Account Setup Form - Traffic Signal.pdf|'''Evergy Account Setup Form - Traffic Signal Control Center (old form)'''.]]

It is important that you specify the electrical service rate in the "Comments" section to insure the City of Overland Park will be billed the correct rate. The correct rate is listed in each of the applicable Service Applications.

*See [[Media:II-26 Sample Letter to KCP&L for Electrical Service.pdf|'''sample letter''']] to Evergy requesting power service.
*See [https://drive.google.com/file/d/1pnyJiaJjbc-fi6Havd9ib0yjcXmgIITr/view ''' City of Overland Park Tax Exempt Certificate''']
*See [[Media:Form ST-28b Statement for Sales Tax Exemption.pdf|'''Sales Tax Exemption Form ST-28B''']]

The Account Form, Overland Park Tax Exempt Certificate and the Sales Tax Exemption Form ST-28B is required to be submitted for each control center.

== Task No. 26a - Coordinate Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) Service for Traffic Signals ==
{{Top}}

If applicable, begin [[Media:Natural gas service address procedures.pdf|'''Natural Gas Service Address Procedures''']] for CNG generators.

*[[Media:Kansas city metro gas service area boundary map.pdf|Exhibit 1: '''Kansas City Metro Gas Service Area Boundary Map''']]

*[[Media:Atmos energy pre-approved contractors list.pdf|Exhibit 2: '''Atmos Energy Pre-Approved Contractors List''']]

*[[Media:Kansas Gas Service Line Application.docx|Exhibit 3: '''Kansas Gas Service Line Application (rev 01-01-14)''']]

*[[Media:Kansas Gas Cover Letter Sample.docx|Exhibit 4: '''Kansas Gas Cover Letter Sample''']]

*[[Media:Atmos Energy new meter set application.xlsx|Exhibit 5: '''Atmos Energy New Meter Set Application''']]

*[[Media:Atmos Energy Elevated Pressure Request Form.pdf|Exhibit 6: '''Atmos Energy Request for Elevated Pressure''']]

*[[Media:Atmos Energy Cover Letter Sample.docx|Exhibit 7: '''Atmos Energy Cover Letter Sample''']]

*[https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/building-construction/buildings-construction-licenses-permits-inspections/ Exhibit 8: '''Commercial Building Permit Application''']

== Task No. 26b - Coordinate Removal of Streetlights Purchased from Evergy ==
{{Top}}

If applicable, begin the [[Media:Removal of Existing Streetlight Procedure.pdf|'''Removal of Existing Streetlight Procedure''']] for streetlights that were purchased from Evergy (KCP&L).

*See [[Media:Letter to Black & McDonald requesting the removal of streetlights.pdf|'''sample letter to Black & McDonald''']] requesting proposals for removing streetlights.

*See [[Media:Proposal to remove streetlights from Black & McDonald.pdf|'''sample streetlight removal proposal''']] from Black & McDonald.

== Task No. 27 - Schedule Field Check Meeting ==
{{Top}}

The Project Manager shall schedule the Field Check meeting. Representatives of all funding sources are to be invited. The City Engineer/City Traffic Engineer or their designated representatives will attend all meetings. Prior to Field Check Meeting, coordinate with Engineering Services for development projects permitted in the area.

:[[Media:II-7e Sign in sheet.docx|'''Exhibit No. II-7e''']] ''is a meeting sign in sheet''.

Field check will be conducted at a pre-determined location. The Consultant or the City will provide a set of plans for field check. BLP will review comments and will discuss any necessary actions with the City and the Consultant.
After the field check meeting the consultant or the City will distribute minutes and provide BLP with a response to the issues identified/discussed in the meeting.

After field check plans have been received by BLP, a Field Check Report will be developed and provided to the City, Consultant and other necessary parties.

During the site review/field check meeting it should be determined if the proposed project will have a potential impact on rail facilities. If it appears that work will be near or within railroad right-of way, the LPA will coordinate with the railroad to determine the need for flagging, liability insurance, agreements, and a possible diagnostic review.

== '''Task No. 28 - Execute Official Agreement with KDOT''' ==
When the official KDOT agreement is received by the Project Manager, it is reviewed/approved by the Law Department and placed on the City Council agenda for consideration.

:'''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/1535/638736480783200000 Exhibit No. II-28]''' is Official KDOT Utility Accommodation Policy/Agreement''.

Compliance with KDOT's Non-Discriminations policies is required on all contracts. See '''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/2397/638731509780470000 Title VI Handbook]''' for more information.

== '''Task No. 29 - Continue Environmental Process''' ==

For more information see Chapter [[Media:4.0 Environmental 2020.pdf|'''4.0 Environmental''']] of KDOT's LPA Project Development Manual.

== '''Task No. 30 - Obtain Decision for Design Exception from KDOT''' ==
The Project Manager shall keep in close contact with BLP-KDOT, if a design exception was requested. Once the decision has been made, the results shall be disseminated to all interested and required parties.
== '''Task No. 31 - Complete Public Interest Finding''' ==
{{Top}}

If the deviation from a standard practice is requested, the Project Manager shall submit a '''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/1957/638744283760630000 Proprietary Product Certification Form]''' or a Public Interest Finding (PIF) to BLP explaining the need for the deviation and why it is in the public's best interest to allow it.

For detailed information regarding the use of proprietary products see FHWA's [https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/construction/cqit/fr_qa.cfm '''Construction Program Guide'''].

== '''Task No. 32 - NHS Approval Procedure''' ==
{{Top}}

For projects on principal arterials, the Project Manager shall request special approval to administer a federally funded project on the National Highway System route, documenting the reason for the request and demonstrating that the City has successfully administered a non-NHS project. This request shall be submitted to the BLP for approval.

== Task No. 33 - Submit Right-of-Way Plans/Legal Descriptions ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager shall submit this information on the date as established with the project schedule. The legal descriptions shall be provided in electronic format along with a written original sealed by a registered land surveyor in the State of Kansas. A tract map for each property shall accompany the legal descriptions. The tract map shall clearly identify each type of proposed taking. Also included with the submittal shall be a copy of all the title company information. At this time tract files should be created in project folder under '''\2-Preliminary Design\ROW and Easement Documents\Tract Files.'''

{{Exhibit|Legal_Descriptions_and_Tract_Map.pdf|No. II-33|is an example of legal descriptions and tract map.}}
{{Exhibit|II-33a.pdf|No. II-33a|ia a Memorandum from the Register of Deeds, Johnson County, regarding legal description requirements for document indexing.}}
{{Exhibit|II-33b.pdf|No. II-33b|is a Sample Template from the Register of Deeds, Johnson County, showing required format (margin & paper size) for recording documents.}}

All prepared documents must conform to the Register of Deeds requirements and filed electronically with Johnson County RTA. If rejected, the City is notified by RTA via email.

{{Exhibit|JoCo_RTA_Rejection_Email.pdf|No. II-33c|is an example of rejection email from JoCo RTA.}}

(The rejection email is generated automatically and it applies to the whole package of documents submitted. Therefore the entire package is rejected even if only one tract has an error. It is up to the Project Engineer or Engineering Technician to figure out which one.)

{{Note|In some instances Long Term Temporary Construction Easements (TCE) have been granted to the City during the development process. These existing TCEs are usually adjacent to thoroughfares. During the R/W Plan review the project technician is to check for any previously granted Long Term TCEs adjacent to the project. The TCEs can be viewed in ArcMap by adding ''"Easement and ROW"'' Data Layer from ''"Property"'' Data Group. Each easement in this layer is linked to a ''pdf'' image of the document by which that easement was acquired.}}

== Task No. 34 - Hire Appraiser ==
{{Top}}

Project Manager shall form a Selection Committee and a qualification based selection process shall be used.
Appraiser and Acquisition Agent may be acquired by a stand-alone RFQ process or inclusion as a component of the qualifications based selection process for the Design Professional/Consultant, or as may be required by applicable federal or state laws/regulations.

{{Exhibit|II-34a APPRAISERS 3-23-26.docx|No. II-34a|is a list of City qualified appraisers.}}
{{Exhibit|II-34b_RFQ_Appraisal_Acquisition_2025.docx|No. II-34b|is a copy of City's Request for Qualifications (RFQ).}}
{{Exhibit|Summary_of_Takings_2025.pdf|No. II-34c|is a sample summary of the project right-of-way and easement takings.}}
{{Exhibit|II-34d Appraiser Agreement under 10K rev 5-16-24.docx|No. II-34d|is an Appraiser Agreement for fee under $10,000.}}
{{Exhibit|II-34e Appraiser Agreement over 10K rev 5-16-24.docx|No. II-34e|is an Appraiser Agreement for fee over $10,000.}}
{{Exhibit|II-34f Sample Intra-City Email Memo to Selection Committee 2025.pdf|No. II-34f|is a sample Intra City memorandum to the Selection Committee.}}
{{Exhibit|Proposal_City_of_OP_2025.pdf|No. II-34g|is a sample Proposal for Appraisal.}}
{{Exhibit|II-34h Ranking sheet rw proposals.pdf|No. II-34h| is a sample of ranking sheet.}}

See '''[https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/real_estate/local_public_agencies/lpa_guide/ch11.cfm FHWA's Real Estate Acquisition Guide For Local Public Agencies]''' for information that will be necessary when a project is started that requires the acquisition of real estate and receives any Federal funding.

{{Exhibit|II-34i appraisal review.dot|No. II-34i|is a copy of Appraisal Review form.}}

LPA representatives, appraisers and acquisition contractors involved with the R/W acquisition process must be certified in accordance with the ROWCP requirements. Refer to Chapter [[Media:7.0 Right of Way 2024.pdf|'''7.0 Right of Way''']] of KDOT's LPA Project Development Manual for additional information.

== Task No. 35 - Prepare R/W and Easement Documents ==
{{Top}}

The Project Manager will coordinate with the Contract Specialist assigned to the project the preparation of the various documents necessary for the takings required to construct the project.

The following is the list of the most commonly used documents:

:*[[Media:Access-easement-option-1.docx|'''Access Easement Option 1''']]
:*[[Media:Access-easement-option-2.docx|'''Access Easement Option 2''']]
:*[[Media:Deed-of-dedication.doc|'''Deed of Dedication''']]
:*[[Media:Kansas-warranty-deed.docx|'''Kansas Warranty Deed''']]
:*[[Media:Notice-of-termination-of-temporary-construction-easement.docx|'''Notice of Termination of Temporary Construction Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Permanent-drainage-easement-city-grantee.docx|'''Permanent Drainage Easement - City Grantee''']]
:*[[Media:Permanent-drainage-easement-city-grantor.docx|'''Permanent Drainage Easement - City Grantor''']]
:*[[Media:Permanent-drainage-easement-city-grantor-and-grantee.docx|'''Permanent Drainage Easement - City Grantor and Grantee''']]
:*[[Media:Permanent-maint-access-easement.docx|'''Permanent Maintenance Access Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Permanent-right-of-way-easement.docx|'''Permanent Right of Way Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Quit-claim-deed.docx|'''Quit Claim Deed''']]
:*[[Media:Real Estate Mortgage Release - Corporation.docx|'''Real Estate Mortgage Release - Corporation''']] (to be obtained when value of takings exceeds $50K)
:*[[Media:Real Estate Mortgage Release - Individual.docx|'''Real Estate Mortgage Release - Individual''']] (to be obtained when value of takings exceeds $50K)
:*[[Media:Retaining Wall Easement.docx|'''Retaining Wall Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Sidewalk-and-traffic-signal-system-easement-2.docx|'''Sidewalk and Traffic Signal System Easement''']]
:*[[Media:PSE & UE.docx|'''Sidewalk and Utility Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Sidewalk-easement.docx|'''Sidewalk Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Sidewalk-variance-ce-std.docx|'''Sidewalk Variance - City Engineer Standard''']]
:*[[Media:Sidewalk-variance-pwc.docx|'''Sidewalk Variance - Public Works Committee''']]
:*[[Media:Sight Triangle Easement .docx|'''Sight Triangle Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Street-light-easement-2.docx|'''Street Light Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Temporary-construction-easement-city-grantee rev 6-9-22.docx|'''Temporary Construction Easement - City Grantee''']]
:*[[Media:Temporary-construction-easement-city-grantor.docx|'''Temporary Construction Easement - City Grantor''']]
:*[[Media:Temporary-Construction-Easement-Grading-Version-1.docx|'''Temporary Construction Easement for Grading - Version 1''']]
:*[[Media:Temporary-Construction-Easement-Grading-Version-2.docx|'''Temporary Construction Easement for Grading - Version 2''']]
:*[[Media:Temporary-Construction-Easement-Long-Term.docx|'''Temporary Construction Easement - Long Term''']]
:*[[Media:Traffic-signal-system-easement-2.docx|'''Traffic Signal System Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Utility-easement-city-grantee.docx|'''Utility Easement - City Grantee''']]
:*[[Media:Utility-easement-city-grantor.docx|'''Utility Easement - City Grantor''']]
:*[[Media:Utility-easement-city-grantor-and-grantee.docx|'''Utility Easement - City Grantor and Grantee''']]

The following documents are shown for information only and will be generated by the City of Overland Park:

:*[[Media:EASEMENT ACQUISITION AGREEMENT-final 3-20-25.docx|'''Easement Acquisition Agreement''']]
:*[[Media:EASEMENT ACQUISITION AGREEMENT-partial mortgage final 3-20-2025.docx|'''Acquisition Agreement with Partial Mortgage Release''']]
:*[[Media:Amendment to EASEMENT ACQUISITION AGREEMENT 3-20-25.docx|'''Amendment to Easement Acquisition Agreement''']]
:*[[Media:Administrative Settlement Form 3-20-25.docx|'''Administrative Settlement Form''']]
:*[[Media:Restoration Agreement template 3-20-2025.docx|'''Restoration Agreement''']] and [[Media:Restoration Agreement-Exhibit A template.docx|'''Exhibit A''']]
:*[[Media:RIGHT OF ENTRY AGREEMENT 12.09.25.docx|'''Right of Entry Agreement''']]
All prepared right-of-way and easement documents must conform to the Register of Deeds requirements. See [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Phase_II_-_Preliminary_Design#Task_No._33_-_Submit_Right-of-Way_Plans/Legal_Descriptions'''Phase II, Task No. 33'''] for exhibits.

== Task No. 36 - Schedule Second Public Information Meeting ==
{{Top}}

The purpose of this meeting is to present the Right of Way plans to the citizens. For KDOT projects the Notice of Public Information Meeting must be published in the '''[https://sos.ks.gov/publications/kansas-register.html Kansas Register]''' and [http://www.thelegalrecord.net '''The Legal Record'''].

See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 15 - Schedule First Public Information Meeting|'''Phase II, Task No. 15''']] for list of invites.

{{Exhibit|II-36a-1_Second Public Information Meeting - With Federal Funds.docx|No. II-36a-1|is an example Invitation Letter to property owners. Project w/ Federal Funds}}
{{Exhibit|II-36a-2_Second Public Information Meeting - Without Federal Funds.docx|No. II-36a-2|is an example Invitation Letter to property owners. - w/out Federal Funds}}
{{Exhibit|II-36b_Public Meeting Sign-In Sheet.docx|No. II-36b|is a public meeting sign in sheet.}}
{{Exhibit|II-36c_Sample Public Meeting Handout.pdf|No. II-36c|is a public meeting handout.}}{{Exhibit|II-36d-1_Third Public Information Meeting - In Person, No Presentation.docx|No. II-36d-1|Third Public Information Meeting - In Person.}}{{Exhibit|II-36d-2_Third Public Information Meeting - In Person, With Presentation.docx|No. II-36d-2|Third Public Information Meeting - In Person, With Presentation.}}

{{Note|This and all subsequent Public Information Meeting notices should ask if participants need a language interpreter or a hearing assistance device and a phone number. All meeting rooms shall be ADA accessible. The KDOT '''Equal Opportunity and Civil Rights Information''' brochure in [[Media:Title VI Brochure English.pdf|'''English''']] and [[Media:Title VI Brochure Spanish.pdf|'''Spanish''']] regarding equal opportunity contracting are to be made available at all public meetings.}}

For those who wish to use a Blue Valley School District facility for the public meeting, an on-line '''[https://facilities.bluevalleyk12.org/ Facility Rental Reservation Request]''' is available. Once the request is submitted, the BVSD Facility Scheduling Office will send a confirmation if the requested space is available.

== [[index.php/Index.php/Category:Phase II Exhibits|All Phase II Exhibits]] ==

Streetlight Design Manual

2026-06-29T14:58:37Z

Brian Geiger: /* Overhead Utility Line Clearance Requirements: */ Major overhaul of the Overhead Utility Line Clearance Requirements based on Evergy's latest requirements.

== General Purpose of the Design Manual: ==
'''Last Revised August 26, 2025''' 
This Streetlight Design Manual has been written to serve as a general guideline when designing a streetlighting system for the City of Overland Park, Kansas. Although there are specific design requirements, the guidelines contained herein should not be a substitute for proper engineering design and judgment based on specific project situations. The purpose of this Streetlight Design Manual is to aid consultants as well as City of Overland Park staff to be consistent in the practice of designing streetlighting plans. It provides an overview of the design criteria to be used in the design; streetlighting installation determination; design considerations to take into account; explanation of the approved streetlighting equipment that is to be used; what information should be included on the plan sheets; and how to compute the quantities. Any questions regarding this manual may be directed to Shawn Gotfredson, P.E., Supervisory Civil Engineer at the City of Overland Park, Kansas at (913) 895-8303.

=== Purpose of Streetlighting: ===
The principal purpose of lighting is to provide improved visibility for the street users so they can make quick, accurate and safe decisions. Street users include vehicle operators, bicycle and motorcycle operators and pedestrians. Light that falls on pedestrian walkways enhances pedestrian traffic, but the streetlighting criterion does not mandate specific lighting levels on sidewalks, bike paths or other pedestrian paths. The Planning and Development Services Department has separate criteria for the lighting of pedestrian facilities and should be consulted. This document does however, mandate specific lighting levels at the conflict points of pedestrians and vehicles, such as at intersection crossing points.

=== Reference to Other Documents: ===
Wherever applicable, this design manual should be used in conjunction with the [https://www.ies.org/store/recommended-practices-and-ansi-standards/roadway-lighting/Roadway Lighting ANSI/IES RP-8-14] by the Illuminating Engineering Society, as herein modified and the [http://catalog.nfpa.org/2014-NFPA-70-National-Electrical-Code-NEC-and-Handbook-P1194.aspx?icid=B484 National Electric Code] by the National Fire Protection Association. The current editions of the [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks-gbp/doc-view.aspx?secid=198 City of Overland Park Streetlighting Resolution No. 4036], [https://dw.opkansas.org/public/FileCabinets/2fa13812-70a3-4126-848b-3a20df7175c3/Documents/832/FileDownload?targetFileType=Auto&keepAnnotations=false Design and Construction Standards, Volume 1 Design Criteria (latest edition)], [https://dw.opkansas.org/public/FileCabinets/2fa13812-70a3-4126-848b-3a20df7175c3/Documents/831/FileDownload?targetFileType=Auto&keepAnnotations=false Design and Construction Standards, Volume 2 Construction Specifications (latest edition)], the latest edition of the [https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/building-construction/civil-engineering/construction-standards/ Standard Details] and the [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Approved_Materials Approved Materials List], hereafter referred to as “City Standards” should be followed during the design of any streetlighting project.

=== Public or Private Ownership, Operation and Maintenance: ===
Different policies apply to streetlighting systems based on the final ownership, operation and maintenance of the system. The two types of systems are:
#Those that are installed in the public right-of-way that will be owned, operated and maintained by the City of Overland Park and
#Privately owned streetlighting systems that are installed in the public right-of-way that will not be owned, operated and maintained by the City of Overland Park.
Although each of the systems will be discussed, the design guidelines contained herein only apply to systems that are within the public right-of-way that are owned, operated and maintained by the City of Overland Park.

====      City-Owned, Operated and Maintained Lighting Systems: ====
:All City-owned, operated and maintained lighting systems shall be designed in accordance with the design criteria listed herein and use all pre-approved materials from the City's [http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Preapproved_Materials Approved Materials List]. All lighting systems that are being designed in conjunction with the development of any public street or any developments that require modification of any streetlighting system within the public right-of-way by private consultants working for a developer are required to meet City Standards if the City will assume all ownership, operation and maintenance responsibilities after final acceptance of the project.

====      Privately Owned, Operated and Maintained Lighting Systems: ====
:All lighting systems within the public right-of-way that have been designated “privately owned” are not required to be constructed using City approved materials. However, the lighting system shall still be designed in accordance with the design criteria listed herein for average maintained light levels and uniformity ratios for the specific functional roadway classification and pedestrian conflict area classification and be constructed in accordance with the [http://catalog.nfpa.org/2014-NFPA-70-National-Electrical-Code-NEC-and-Handbook-P1194.aspx?icid=B484National Electric Code], current edition to ensure safe operation.

:All proposals for privately owned, operated and maintained lighting systems shall be pre-approved by the Overland Park City Council prior to final plan approval and execution and recording of the City standard maintenance agreement with the Johnson County Records and Tax Administration. If at any time, the homes association or other political subdivision requests the City to assume ownership of the lighting system, the streetlighting maintenance agreement establishes specific items that would need to be addressed before the request would be considered. One requirement is that the current streetlighting system would be have to be replaced with equipment meeting the current City Standards at the sole cost of the current owner.

:Privately owned streetlighting systems shall not be permitted to connect to any City-owned streetlighting system, whether it is poles, control centers, cable, junction boxes, etc. unless otherwise stipulated in the maintenance agreement.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#General Purpose of the Design Manual:|'''General Purpose:''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=General Purpose of the Design Manual:]]
|}
----

== Design Criteria: ==
The following section addresses the design criteria used for streetlighting in the City of Overland Park. There are three types of streetlighting design that are considered:
#Continuous lighting
#Partial lighting, and
#Safety lighting.

=== Continuous Lighting: ===
Continuous lighting is defined as streetlighting that is designed to provide specific average maintained light levels and uniformity ratios between adjacent poles in accordance with the functional classification of the street and the corresponding pedestrian conflict area classification. Continuous lighting design shall be required for:
#All collector streets
#All thoroughfare streets with four or more lanes
#All interim or ultimate two-lane thoroughfares with average two-way night-time traffic volumes of greater than 3,000 vehicles, where night-time is defined as the period from 6:00 PM to 6:00 AM

Interim or ultimate two-lane thoroughfares are those streets located in the southern portion of the city that were part of the adopted South Overland Park Transportation Plan.

Interim or ultimate two-lane thoroughfares with average two-way night-time traffic volumes of less than 3,000 vehicles are not required to have continuous streetlighting unless unique situations exist such as adjacent school facilities, etc. Any legacy streetlighting systems already in place on unimproved throughfares will not be upgraded until the thoroughfare is improved.

The following streetlighting design criteria will be used for continuous streetlighting on city streets, as identified on the latest edition of the City of Overland Park [http://dw.opkansas.org/public/FileCabinets/2fa13812-70a3-4126-848b-3a20df7175c3/Documents/27/FileDownload?targetFileType=Auto&keepAnnotations=false “Official Street Map”], and the [https://maps.opkansas.org/future-development-character-framework-map/ “Future Development Character Framework Map”] available from the Planning and Development Services Department.

====      Functional Street Classifications: ====
:The functional street classifications are defined on the [https://www2.opkansas.org/files/dw/api/Docs/10347 “Official Street Map”].
:The “thoroughfare” street classification includes all thoroughfare streets whether divided or undivided; whether improved or unimproved; and whether two-lane, four-lane or six-lane excluding auxiliary left and right turn lanes.

:The “collector” street classification includes all super-collector streets, residential collector streets, apartment streets, commercial streets and industrial streets regardless of the number of lanes; whether improved or unimproved.

====      Pedestrian Conflict Area: ====
:The “high” pedestrian conflict area includes land uses where significant numbers of pedestrians are expected to be on the sidewalks or crossing the streets during darkness. These are typically more nonresidential areas, such as “Regional Activity District”, “Local Activity District”, “Downtown District”, or “Commercial Hub”, depending on the land use composition of retail areas, theaters, or major pedestrian generators. All interchanges shall be lit to "high" pedestrian conflict area criteria.

:The “medium” pedestrian conflict area includes public areas such as libraries, neighborhood shopping, schools, offices, hotels and motels, light industrial facilities, or public and semi-public areas which would be considered “Regional Activity District”, “Local Activity District”, “Public Parks and Open Space”, “Innovation / Flex Hub”, or some parts of “Downtown District”.

:The “medium” pedestrian conflict area includes residential areas with character types of “Traditional neighborhood” or “Compact Neighborhood” that have a density higher than duplexes such as quad-plexes or apartments which would typically generate a “medium” pedestrian conflict. Review the "low" pedestrian conflict area if the property contains a religious facility.

:The “low” pedestrian conflict area includes residential areas with “Suburban Neighborhood”, and some “Traditional Neighborhood” or “Compact Neighborhood” areas which are generally at or below duplex density. The “low” pedestrian conflict area also includes areas such as “Suburban Neighborhood” or “Traditional Neighborhood” which contain religious facilities without primary or secondary schools on the property.

====      Luminance Criteria: ====
:The maintained averages for luminance, as listed in Table 1, shall be met or exceeded for all continuous lighting designs. The corresponding uniformity ratios and/or veiling luminance ratios shall be equal to or better than those listed in the following table for luminance. NOTE: The average luminance value shall be obtained by taking the average of individual luminance values at points across the entire number of lanes on the roadway regardless of the direction of traffic. Medians shall be excluded from these calculations.

:{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+'''Table 1: Luminance Criteria'''
! colspan="2" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Street and Pedestrian Conflict Area
! colspan="4" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Luminance Criteria
|-
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Functional Street Classification'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Pedestrian Conflict Area'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Maintained Average (Lavg) (cd/m2)'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Uniformity Ratio (Lavg:Lmin) (Max Allowable)'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Uniformity Ratio (Lmax:Lmin) (Max Allowable)'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Veiling Luminance Ratio (LVmax:Lavg) (Max Allowable)'''
|-
| rowspan="3" align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;" valign="center"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|High
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1.2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|3.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|5.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|0.3:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Medium 
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|0.9
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|3.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|5.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|0.3:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Low 
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|0.6
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|3.5:1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|6.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|0.3:1
|-
| rowspan="3" align="center" style="background:#90ee90;" valign="center"|Collector
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|High
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|0.8
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|3.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|5.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|0.4:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Medium 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|0.6
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|3.5:1
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|6.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|0.4:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Low 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|0.4
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|4.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|8.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|0.4:1
|}

=== Partial Lighting ===
Partial lighting is defined as lighting in intersections, at points of potential conflict, of roadways without continuous lighting. This type of lighting is an interim step between safety lighting and continuous lighting that is used when traffic on roadways and intersections are at sufficiently low night-time average daily traffic volumes. In general, this type of lighting is used at the intersections of collector and residential streets with thoroughfares that have lower volumes and minimal commercial development.

The average maintained illuminance in the intersection shall conform to the values listed in Table 2 below based on the functional street classification and the pavement classification. The intersecting street with highest street classification that provides the highest light level should be used. For example, at an intersection between a thoroughfare street and a collector street, use the criteria for thoroughfare streets. The intersection lighting grid for partial lighting at intersections without continuously lighted streets should include the area between the radius points of all intersecting streets. (See Figure Below). Point spacing for calculating illuminance within the intersection lighting grid should be 5-foot maximum. Luminaire arms should be oriented perpendicular to the street centerlines and not angled toward the center of the intersection.

====      Pavement Classification: ====
:The directional surface reflectance characteristics of the pavement should be considered prior to running calculations for streetlighting. The pavement classification is based on the specularity of the pavement and a scaling factor as determined by the overall "lightness" of the pavement. For asphalt road surfaces, the pavement classification should be R2. For concrete pavement surfaces, the pavement classification should be R1.

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+'''Table 2: Average Maintained Illuminance Criteria for Partial Lighting at Intersections'''
! rowspan="2" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Functional Street Classification
! colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Pavement Classification, (Lux) / (Fc)*
! rowspan="2" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Uniformity Ratio (Eavg:Emin (Max Allowable)
|-
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''R1'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''R2 & R3'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''R4'''
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|6.0 / 0.6
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|9.0 / 0.9
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|8.0 / 0.8
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|3.0:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|Collector
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|4.0 / 0.4
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|6.0 / 0.6
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|5.0 / 0.5
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|4.0:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|Local
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|3.0 / 0.3
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|4.0 / 0.4
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|4.0 / 0.4
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|6.0:1
|}
*The street classification with the highest light level should be used. 

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Partial Lighting Conflict Area.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Conflict Area
|}

=== Safety Lighting: ===
Safety lighting is defined as lighting that does not provide specific maintained light averages and uniformity ratios between adjacent poles in accordance with the functional classification of the street and corresponding pedestrian conflict area classification. The purpose of this type of lighting design is to provide enough light on the street to enhance the safety of the street users but to avoid over lighting the area. All residential streets shall be designed based on the safety lighting design parameters.

Since June 11, 1979, the City policy has been not to continuously light residential streets. Only "partial" or "safety" lighting is provided. All streetlights on residential streets will be installed in conformance with the following basic guidelines.

====      At Intersections with Other Residential Streets: ====
:In order to provide lighting within the conflict area of two residential streets, a light pole will be installed on one corner of an intersection or opposite the intersection in the case of a T-intersection. (See Figure 1a)

====      On the Same Side as the Sidewalk: ====
:Streetlights should generally be installed on the same side of the street as the sidewalk unless there are significant utility or storm sewer conflicts. Any variance from this practice should be approved by the engineer or project manager.

====      Near Intersections with Another Pole Oriented in a Different Direction: ====
:Where an intersection between two local streets has a light pole located at the corner but the luminaire is oriented toward the direction of the primary local street, a second light pole may be located on the secondary local street oriented in the direction of its centerline as long as the light pole is installed greater than 50’ from the back of curb line on the primary local street extended, and it is not on the same corner as the light oriented toward the primary street. (The primary street is the street that is expected to have the higher traffic volume.) 
:With intersections of local streets with thoroughfare or collector streets, carry the continuous lighting of the thoroughfare or collector street through the intersection. Install a post top light at the intersection oriented toward the local street.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 1.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 1a
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 1b.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 1b
|}

====      Within Cul-de-Sac Bulbs: ====
:A light pole will be installed within the cul de sac bulb when the cul-de-sac street is longer than 200 feet measured from the intersection of the intersecting streets to the center of the cul-de-sac bulb. (See Figure 2)

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 2.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 2
|}

====      At Changes of Roadway Alignment: ====
:A light pole will be installed at changes of alignment of 60° or more which are 200 feet or more from an intersection, measured from the intersection of the local street centerlines, to the middle of the curve radius along the centerline of the local street, (See Figure 3)
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 3.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 3
|}

====      Mid-block Streetlights: ====
:A minimum number of mid block streetlights will be installed in order to achieve a desired pole spacing of approximately 250 feet. The maximum spacing between lights should not exceed 280 feet and the minimum spacing between lights should not be less than 225 feet unless otherwise approved by City staff. Lights should desirably be located on or near a property line and not in front of window lines if avoidable.

=== Intersection Lighting: ===
Intersections pose the highest conflict area for both vehicles and pedestrians. Therefore, the light levels should be higher for intersections than each individual street. The illuminance method, rather than the luminance method is the recommended design for intersection lighting. The following design criterion has been established for the illumination at street intersections on streets with continuous lighting.
====      Intersection Lighting for Continuously Lighted Streets: ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+'''Table 3: Illuminance Criteria for Intersections with Continuous Lighted Streets'''
! rowspan="2" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Functional Street Classification
! colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Average Maintained Illumination at Pavement by Pedestrian Area Classification, (Lux) / (Fc)
! rowspan="2" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Uniformity Ratio (Eavg:Emin (Max Allowable)
|-
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''High'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Medium'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Low'''
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare / Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|34.0 / 3.4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|26.0 / 2.6
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|18.0 / 1.8
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|3.0:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|Thoroughfare / Collector
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|29.0 / 2.9
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|22.0 / 2.2
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|15.0 / 1.5
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|3.0:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|Thoroughfare / Local
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|See Note 2
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|See Note 2
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|See Note 2
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|See Note 2
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Collector / Collector
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|24.0 / 2.4
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|18.0 / 1.8
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|12.0 / 1.2
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|4.0:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#a1edbb;"|Collector / Local
| align="center" style="background:#a1edbb;"|See Note 2
| align="center" style="background:#a1edbb;"|See Note 2
| align="center" style="background:#a1edbb;"|See Note 2
| align="center" style="background:#a1edbb;"|See Note 2
|-
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|Local / Local
| align="center"|See Note 1
| align="center"|See Note 1
| align="center"|See Note 1
| align="center"|See Note 1
|-
|}
Note 1: Intersection lighting analysis is not required for these types of intersections. The criterion is satisfied if a post top light is placed at each intersection per [[#_At_Intersections_with_Other_Residential_Streets:|Figure 1a]]. 
Note 2: Intersection lighting analysis is not required for these types of intersections. The criterion is satisfied if a post top light is placed at each intersection per [[#_At_Intersections_with_Other_Residential_Streets:|Figure 1b]] in addition to any continuous lighting that may be required.

The intersection lighting grid for intersections on continuously lighted streets is defined as the quadrilateral whose adjacent sides intersect at the midpoint of the curb radii at the back of curb (See Figure 4). The amount of light should be proportional to the classification of the intersecting streets and be equivalent to the sum of the values used for each separate street. If an intersecting street is illuminated above the recommended value, then the intersection illumination value should be increased proportionately. Intersections of collector and thoroughfare streets with local streets should be illuminated according to Table 3 above since criteria has not been established for continuously lighting local streets. Point spacing for calculating illuminance within the intersection lighting grid should be 5-foot maximum.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 4.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 4
|}
The LED class at intersections of identical functional street classifications (e.g. Thoroughfare / Thoroughfare) shall use the same LED class all the way around the intersection. 
The LED class on thoroughfare intersection approaches which have more than one turn lane shall increase the LED class by one LED class more than the roadway segment analysis through the length of the turn bay on the side of the turn lanes only. This occurs outside the area of the intersection analysis.

=== Roundabout Lighting ===
==== Horizontal Illuminance Recommendations ====
In order to adequately address the visibility of the roadway, pedestrians, and hazards through a roundabout, all roundabouts will be provided with lighting. The horizontal lighting levels used for the design of the roundabout lighting will be equal to the lighting levels used for intersections included in Table 2, for streets that are not continuously lighted or Table 3, for streets that are continuously lighted. In addition to these horizontal requirements there are also vertical requirements in the crosswalks if they are present.

==== Vertical Illuminance Recommendations ====
It is recommended that the averge vertical illuminance for a series of points 5 feet in height, along the centerline of the crosswalk extending to the edge of the roadway, spaced at 1.65 feet, for each driving direction, be equal to the required horizontal illuminance and uniformity for the roundabout in either Table 2 or Table 3 as applicable.

==== Pole Placement Recommendations ====
Pole placement is critical in creating good visibility in a roundabout. It is recommended that streetlight poles be placed around the perimeter of the roundabout at locations on the approach side of the crosswalks, if present.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Roundabout Perimeter Lighting.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Perimeter Pole Placement
|}

==== Calculation Grids ====
The calculation grid for the horizontal illuminance in a roundabout should include the area immediately before the splitter islands (at the start of the gore) and then throughout the roundabout. Central islands need not be included in the horizontal illuminance calculation. The grid spacing should be no greater than 6.6 feet. The calculation grid for the vertical illuminance in the crosswalk portion of a roundabout should include a series of points 5 feet in height, centered in the crosswalk, spaced at 1.65 feet, for each driving direction. The vertical illuminance calculation should be performed toward the direction of an approaching driver at 5 feet height above the roadway at a distance of one safe sight stopping distance as determined by the roundabout speed.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Roundabout Calculation Grid.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Horizontal Calculation Grid
|}

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Vertical Grid at Roundabout.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Vertical Calculation Grid
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Design Criteria:|'''Design Criteria:''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Design Criteria:]]
|}
----

== Streetlighting Installation Determination: ==
The following information has been established for all City-owned and maintained streetlighting systems installed in public right-of-way. The following explains when streetlighting will be installed. Additional information is contained in [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks-gbp/doc-view.aspx?secid=198 City of Overland Park Streetlighting Resolution No. 4036, A Resolution Establishing Policy for City-Owned Streetlighting], and the [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-3614 Overland Park Municipal Code Chapter 13.10].

=== Local Residential Streets: ===
There are four main distinct scenarios identified in which streetlights will be considered for installation. They are:
#Streets with existing City-owned streetlights,
#Streets that do not have any streetlighting,
#Streets that have streetlighting that was purchased from Kansas City Power and Light (KCP&L), and
#New streets that are being constructed either through the City’s Capital Improvement Plan (CIP) or by developers.

====      Residential Streets with Existing City-owned Streetlighting: ====
:Where street plans were approved prior to February 7, 2011, the City will replace or modify the existing streetlighting system with a new streetlighting system meeting the current streetlighting resolution as the street(s) are reconstructed as part of a major residential street reconstruction program. This does not include general pavement rehabilitation programs such as micro-surfacing, chip seal or residential street overlay programs. The City will not consider requests or petitions to upgrade the existing streetlighting system to the current standards unless all other lighting obligations within the City have been met, including replacement of Kansas City Power and Light Company streetlights the City has purchased and streets that currently do not have any streetlighting.

====      Residential Streets with no Existing Streetlighting: ====
:Where City streets do not have any existing streetlighting, the City will consider streetlighting using City at Large funds if a petition from over fifty (50) percent of the residences along the street(s) to be lighted is received and verified. Only one signature is allowed per residence on the petition. The City is responsible for receiving and verifying petitions which can be obtained from the Public Works Department. Verified, valid petitions will be listed for Public Works Committee consideration. The Public Works Committee in turn will make recommendations to the City Council for construction of local residential streetlighting consistent with the amount of funds budgeted for that purpose. When requests exceed funding, priority will be given to those local residential streets with the most police reports of nighttime crime and nighttime traffic accidents.

====      Residential Streets with Existing KCP&L Streetlighting that was Purchased: ====
:Where City streets have streetlighting that was purchased from Kansas City Power and Light Company, the City will annually prepare plans to remove existing streetlighting systems and replace them with current standard City-owned streetlighting systems as funding levels permit. The City staff will determine the street(s) that will be included in the annual streetlighting replacement project based on the streetlighting master plan. The project limits will be presented to the Public Works Committee for consideration. The Public Works Committee in turn will make recommendations to the City Council for final design and construction approval consistent with the amount of funds budgeted for that purpose.

====      New Residential Streets ====
:Where street plans were approved on or after February 7, 2011, the developers are required to install streetlights on all local residential streets which have street plans approved in accordance with [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-3632 Overland Park Municipal Code Chapter 13.10.050]
:Appropriate City staff shall have authority in determining the extent and phasing of streetlight construction, including the location of any applicable streetlight control centers that best fit into the overall master plan for future expansion of lighting circuits.

=== Collector Streets: ===
There are three main distinct scenarios identified in which streetlights will be considered for installation. They are:
#Streets with existing City-owned streetlights,
#Streets that have streetlighting that was purchased from Kansas City Power and Light (KCP&L), and
#New streets that are being constructed either through the City’s Capital Improvement Plan (CIP) or by developers.

====      Collector Streets with Existing KCP&L Streetlighting that was Purchased: ====
:Where City streets have streetlighting that was purchased from Kansas City Power and Light Company, the City will annually prepare plans to remove existing streetlighting systems and replace them with current standard City-owned streetlighting systems as funding levels permit. The City staff will determine the street(s) that will be included in the annual streetlighting replacement project based on the streetlighting master plan. The project limits will be presented to the Public Works Committee for consideration. The Public Works Committee in turn will make recommendations to the City Council for final design and construction approval consistent with the amount of funds budgeted for that purpose.

====      Collector Streets with Existing City-owned Streetlighting: ====
:Where street plans were approved prior to February 7, 2011, the City staff may initiate streetlighting requests for these types of streets via the City's Capital Improvements Program (CIP) which is reviewed and updated annually. Approved collector streetlighting projects are normally listed in the Budget.

====      New Collector Streets: ====
:Where street plans were approved on or after February 7, 2011, developers are required to install streetlights on all such types of streets which have street plans approved in accordance with the [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-3632 Overland Park Municipal Code Chapter 13.10.050]
:Appropriate City staff shall have authority in determining the extent and phasing of streetlight construction, including the location of any applicable streetlight control centers that best fits into the overall master plan for future expansion of lighting circuits.

=== Thoroughfare Streets: ===
There are two main distinct scenarios identified in which streetlights will be considered for installation. They are:
#New City-owned streetlights, and
#Streets that have streetlighting that was purchased from Kansas City Power and Light (KCP&L).

====      New Thoroughfare Streets: ====
:The City staff may initiate thoroughfare streetlighting requests for this type of street via the City's Capital Improvement Program. Approved primary thoroughfare streetlighting projects are normally listed in the Budget.

====      Thoroughfare Streets with Existing KCP&L Streetlighting that was Purchased: ====
:Where City streets have streetlighting that was purchased from Kansas City Power and Light Company, the City will annually prepare plans to remove existing streetlighting systems and replace them with current standard City-owned streetlighting systems as funding levels permit. The City staff will determine the street(s) that will be included in the annual streetlighting replacement project based on the streetlighting master plan. The project limits will be presented to the Public Works Committee for consideration. The Public Works Committee in turn will make recommendations to the City Council for final design and construction approval consistent with the amount of funds budgeted for that purpose.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Streetlighting Installation Determination:|'''Streetlighting Installation Determination:''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Streetlighting Installation Determination:]]
|}
----

== Design Considerations: ==
Before initiating the design of a streetlighting system, the designer should contact the City staff to discuss the specific design criteria for the project and determine the scope of the project. Decisions should be made in regard to the functional roadway classification and pedestrian conflict area as well as the type of equipment that will be used in the design. The following is a brief summary of general design considerations.

=== Establish the Lighting Design Criteria: ===
All streetlighting designs for collector and thoroughfare streets shall be done in accordance with the Continuous Streetlighting Design Criteria, as already discussed.

From the [[#Continuous Lighting:|Design Criteria Table]], select the row corresponding to the functional roadway classification (Major or Collector). Then select the row corresponding to the pedestrian conflict area (High, Medium or Low). Follow this row across the table to determine the maintained average luminance, average to minimum luminance uniformity ratio, maximum to minimum luminance uniformity ratio and veiling luminance ratio to be achieved in the design.

Before any design is initiated, the designer should discuss the functional roadway classification and the pedestrian conflict area classification with City staff. The pedestrian conflict area should be based on the City of Overland Park’s Future Development Character Framework Map and the functional roadway classification should be based on the City of Overland Park Official Street Map.

Design calculations, indicating the design pole spacing, should be submitted with supporting data to verify that the proper light levels have been achieved.

=== Light Loss Factor: ===
After the initial installation of the streetlighting system, the light output continues to decrease over time due to many external factors. The result of the time-dependent depreciation effects must be considered in the initial design. The lighting design is based on a specific lighting level that should always be maintained at the end of the maintenance period. Therefore, the initial lighting in the field will always be brighter than required.

The light loss factor (LLF) is a multiplying factor included in the calculations to account for factors which change in time after the initial installation of the streetlighting system. This factor is the product of many other individual factors such as the maintenance factor, lamp lumen depreciation, luminaire dirt depreciation, equipment factors, etc. The LLF is multiplied by the initial lumen rating of the light source to determine the number of maintained lumens in the design. The LLF that should be used for all high pressure sodium (HPS) City streetlighting systems is 0.81. The LLF that should be used for all LED City streetlighting systems is 0.91.

=== Luminaire Selection: ===
The luminaire selection should be based on the type of street as well as the ability to meet the lighting criteria and maximize the pole spacing. All luminaires used on collector streets and thoroughfare streets shall be LED cobrahead style. All luminaires on residential streets shall still be high pressure sodium (HPS). NOTE: The City has multiple LED cobrahead fixtures on their approved list that may yield slightly different lighting results. For design calculations, the Leotek fixtures should be used for all street and area classifications. As of April 12, 2022, the use of American Electric Autobahn fixtures for design calculations is suspended due to discontinuation of the approved product. The IES photometric files can be found on the City's [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Approved_Materials_-_Streetlighting#LED_Cobrahead_Luminaire Approved Materials List].

====      Luminaire Classifications for Collector and Thoroughfare Streets: ====
:In general cobrahead LED luminaires are rated as Class A through Class E depending on their ability to light a particular type of roadway and cross section. An approximate comparison between the different classes of LED luminaires and HPS luminaires is as follows:
:Class A LED – approximately equivalent to a 400W HPS
:Class B LED – approximately equivalent to a 310W HPS
:Class C LED – approximately equivalent to a 250W HPS
:Class D LED – approximately equivalent to a 150W HPS
:Class E LED – approximately equivalent to a 100W HPS

:One of the reasons the City has moved toward LED luminaires is to reduce the long term cost of electrical charges. Therefore, the lowest class of LED luminaire should be used in the design that satisfies the given lighting criteria. The designer should consult with the City’s project manager at the early stages in design to verify the proper fixture to use based on appropriate calculations

====      Luminaire for Residential Streets: ====
:All luminaires on residential streets shall be a post top mounted fixture with a retrofit LED lamp.

=== Street Width: ===
The street width is the distance between back of curb. On divided roadways, the street width is measured from the outside back of curb to the back of median curb. The median is not included in the calculation grid.

=== Pole Locations: ===
Pole locations will vary depending on the type of street. Residential streets, collector streets in residential neighborhoods, collector streets in commercial areas, undivided thoroughfare streets, and divided thoroughfare streets will all have different design challenges. In addition to the pole location criteria already discussed for residential streets, there are additional pole location preferences that should be kept in mind. Each of the pole location preferences will be further discussed as follows.

====      Pole Location Preferences on Residential Streets: ====
:Sidewalks are generally only constructed on one side of residential streets. Since the streetlights do provide some residual benefit of lighting the sidewalk and enhance pedestrian safety, the first choice for locating the streetlight poles should be on the sidewalk side of the street.

:As long as there is a minimum of a 4’ grass parkway between the back of curb and the sidewalk, the poles should desirably be located in the grass parkway. The minimum distance from the back of curb to the center of the streetlight pole should be 3’. If a 3’ pole setback cannot be achieved, consideration should be made to move the sidewalk adjacent to the curb, at least near the vicinity of the pole, and locate the pole 1’ behind the sidewalk.

:If streetlight poles cannot be located on the sidewalk side due to storm drainage, utility conflicts or right-of-way considerations, the poles may be moved to the other side of the street. The 3’ minimum setback from the back of curb to the center of the pole should still be maintained.

:Poles located at the intersection of residential streets should desirably be placed so the light pole can be used to mount stop, yield and street name signs. That means that they should be installed as near to the location where a vehicle should stop while maintaining a minimum of 3’ setback from the back of curb.

:All poles installed in residential areas should ideally be located on or near property lines whenever possible. In the case of larger lots, poles cannot always be located on the property line. In these cases, in order not to exceed the maximum desired pole spacing, poles can be located within the lot. The designer should take care not to locate the pole in front of large windows of houses.

:Any pole located near a residential drive entrance should be located a minimum of 3’ from the edge of the drive or concrete wing. The designer should always be careful not to mount a pole in a location that could be in the path of an errant vehicle that may be backing out of the driveway. An example would be on a curved drive entrance.

:The designer should also coordinate the location of all poles with existing trees, such that the fixture does not extend into the tree canopy or such that the tree canopy does not block the light output from the fixture.

====      Pole Location Preferences on Collector Streets: ====
:Collector streets generally have sidewalks on both sides of the street and are typically undivided roadways. Poles should be located on one side of the street which has the least conflicts with utilities.

:As long as there is a minimum of a 4’ grass parkway between the back of curb and the sidewalk, the poles should desirably be located in the grass parkway. The minimum distance from the back of curb to the center of the streetlight pole should be 3’. If a 3’ pole setback cannot be achieved, consideration should be made to move the pole 1’ behind the sidewalk. Longer bracket arms can be used to accommodate poles located behind the sidewalk.

:Any pole located near a residential or commercial drive entrance should be located a minimum of 3’ from the edge of the drive or concrete wing. The designer should always be careful not to mount a pole in a location that could be in the path of an errant vehicle that may be backing out of the driveway. An example would be on a curved drive entrance.

:The designer should also coordinate the location of all poles with existing trees, such that the fixture does not extend into the tree canopy or such that the tree canopy does not block the light output from the fixture.

:Occasionally collector streets will be constructed with a raised median the entire length or possibly on the approach of an intersection. Poles can be located within the median with luminaires mounted at 180° to each other in order to provide lighting on each side of the median.

:Where collector streets are designed with more than two lanes, such as in commercial areas where the roadway widens out to include multiple through lanes and turn lanes, it may be necessary to light the street from both sides in order to achieve the required lighting criteria. The desired pole arrangement in this case would be staggered across the street.

====      Pole Location Preferences on Undivided Thoroughfare Streets: ====
:On undivided thoroughfare streets, the light poles will generally be located on one side of the roadway, usually due to overhead power lines on the other side. The side selected to locate the poles on should be based on conflicts with overhead and underground utilities. Where situations allow, consideration should be given to a staggered arrangement if that provides the best lighting.

:At approaches to intersections, where the roadway widens out to include turn lanes, it may be necessary to light the street from both sides in order to achieve the required lighting criteria. The desired pole arrangement in this case would be staggered across the street.

====      Pole Location Preferences on Divided Thoroughfare Streets: ====
:Streetlight poles with two luminaires oriented 180° apart should be located in the center of raised medians in the case of divided thoroughfares. It is acceptable to locate streetlight poles in medians measuring a minimum of 4’ from back of curb to back of curb, since all poles will be mounted on breakaway supports.

:If the center median is depressed instead of raised, the poles should be located on the outside curb lines. The minimum distance from the back of curb to the center of the streetlight pole should be 3’. The arrangement of poles on the outside edges would preferably be staggered, but will vary depending on how wide the median is and how many lanes are in each direction.

:At approaches to intersections, where the roadway widens out to include multiple turn lanes, it may be necessary to light the street from both sides in order to achieve the required lighting criteria. The pole arrangement may be staggered to the median, opposite the median or staggered across the street, which ever provides the overall best lighting levels and pole spacing.

=== Overhead Utility Line Clearance Requirements: ===
Overhead power lines or lower-hanging cable lines should not be in contact with streetlight poles or luminaires. A minimum of 3’ horizontal and vertical clearance shall be maintained from any non-electric lines such as cable TV lines, aerial fiber lines, etc. Vertical and horizontal clearance to electric power lines shall be in accordance with Evergy requirements and varies according to the line voltage.
The updated [https://www.evergy.com/partner-with-us/construction-and-upgrades 2026 Evergy Electric Service Standards (ESS)] now apply current NESC Rule 234 requirements with a clear Accessible vs. Inaccessible distinction for other overhead items (signs, flagpoles, traffic signal supports, etc.). Traffic signal poles and arms are classified as Accessible parts because they are routinely accessed by maintenance personnel for signal changes, adjustments, and repairs. This triggers the clearances shown in [[Media:Evergy Clearance Packet 2026 Selected Sheets.pdf|Evergy Sheets 8001.13-001]]. Vertical clearance is 9.5 ft for messengers/neutrals/guys and 10.0 ft for 0–750 V supply cables to Accessible items. Horizontal clearance is 4.5 ft for messengers/neutrals/guys and 5.0 ft for 0–750 V supply cables. These clearances must be maintained under all conditions, including conductor sag and wind displacement. Higher voltage lines will require greater clearances.

The vertical clearance values have noticeably increased primarily because the legacy KCP&L detail (KCP&L Code Requirements DWG 130.1-12) and the 2015-era values it reflected treated these structures under a lower or differently categorized approach.

The designer shall be responsible for determining whether adequate clearance can be achieved and for making adjustments to the pole locations or coordinating utility relocation, if necessary.

::For constrained or crowded corridors, the recommended path is early coordination:
:#Engage Evergy Distribution Engineering during preliminary design so conflicts can be identified and resolved before detailed plans or procurement.
:#Options typically include adjusting the proposed pole/arm location or geometry, or Evergy performing make-ready work (conductor raising, pole replacement, etc.).
:#The Construction & Upgrades section of the Evergy website is the best starting point for formal requests; Evergy’s area engineers can then coordinate internally.

When the vertical or horizontal distance from the nearest energized overhead line to the pole or luminaire is less than 10 ft, the contractor shall coordinate with Evergy to ensure the location is made safe prior to pole erection, consistent with the Kansas Overhead Power Line Accident Prevention Act (K.S.A. 66-1711 et seq.). The contractor shall contact Evergy to arrange any required protective measures (sleeve installation) and to pay Evergy a fee for its services.

=== Conduit Location Preferences: ===
All electrical cable for streetlight circuits shall be installed in conduit continuous from appurtenance to appurtenance. An appurtenance is defined as a pole, junction box, service box or control center. Conduits shall be installed approximately perpendicular to any roadway crossings.

On residential and collector streetlighting designs or undivided thoroughfare designs, it is desirable to run the electrical conduit in a straight line from pole to pole or pole to junction box. Desirably, the conduit should be located in the grass parkway between the back of curb and the sidewalk. In case of conflicts, the conduit may be located under the sidewalk as long as the conduit sweeps out from underneath the sidewalk to enter junction boxes and poles. Conduit installed parallel to the street should not be installed under the roadway or curb. Conduit should be installed under the street only when crossing from one side to the other.

On divided thoroughfare projects, where poles are located in the medians, the conduit location depends on the width of the median and whether the median consists of a concrete base with brick pavers or if the median consists of grass and/or landscaping. The design layout should indicate which of the “Miscellaneous Conduit Details” applies to each streetlight pole. The various “Miscellaneous Conduit Details” are shown on the General Notes and Legend Sheet in the Standard Details. Theses details should be consulted while reviewing the following discussion which outlines both situations.

====      Brick Paver Medians: ====
:When the median is a concrete base with brick pavers, the conduit should be installed near the centerline of the median and run in a straight line from pole to pole. At intersections, conduit runs from median nose to median nose should be offset slightly so it is not directly under the proposed object marker sign post that will be located directly behind the concrete median nose. This allows the sign post to be driven into the ground at the correct location without damaging the conduit.

====      Grass or Landscaped Medians: ====
:When the median consists of grass or landscaping, the conduit should be shown to be installed 3’ behind the median curb and swept into the center of the median at each streetlight pole location. This allows the median to be landscaped between streetlight poles without the danger of cutting the conduit or cable in the future. Conduit runs from median nose to median nose should be offset slightly so it is not directly under the proposed object marker sign post that will be located directly behind the concrete median nose. This allows the sign post to be driven into the ground at the correct location without damaging the conduit.

:Conduit crossing the header between brick paver medians and grass medians should transition from the center of the median under the brick pavers, to within 3’ from the back of the median curb.

====      Grass Parkways: ====
:When the streetlights are installed in the grass parkway between the curb and sidewalk, the streetlighting conduit should sweep from the streetlight pole to the front edge of the sidewalk. This allows the grass parkway to be clear for the planting of street trees.

====      Parallel Circuits: ====
:Parallel circuits are described as multiple circuit cables in the same conduit or circuit cables in separate conduits that are adjacent to each other.

:Parallel circuit cables shall not be allowed to enter any streetlight pole foundation such that one set of circuit cables is connected to the streetlight(s) and the other circuit cables are "passed through" the pole or be routed around a pole within the same conduit. Parallel circuits shall not extend past the first pole from the controller cabinet and shall be split out in different directions at a junction box in advance of that first pole.

:Two 2” parallel conduits should be installed from the streetlight control center foundation to the Type 2 junction box immediately adjacent to the control center. Each conduit is able to carry two circuits (total of 6 cables) without exceeding the 40% fill.

====      Coordination with Traffic Signals at Intersections: ====
:At signalized intersections, the streetlighting conduit should tie into the traffic signal service box located near the median nose. The streetlighting cable should be located in the traffic signal conduit runs around the intersection instead of continuing directly from median nose to median nose through the center of the intersection.

=== Junction Box Locations: ===
Junction boxes should be installed whenever a branch circuit enters the main circuit. The junction box is used as a splice point for the cables that control the same circuit, as a future splice point for a branch circuit, or a pass through to facilitate ease of cable pulling. The following conditions in which junction boxes should be installed are described in more detail below.

====      Proposed or Future Branch Circuit at Intersections: ====
:When streetlights are installed along one side of the street, as on residential streets, collector streets or undivided thoroughfare streets, one junction box should be installed at each intersection. The preferred location is on the corner opposite of the streetlight (See Figure 5a). If there is not a proposed or future branch circuit coming into that box, a Type 1 junction box should be used. If a proposed or future branch circuit will enter a box, a Type 2 junction box should be used. If a branch circuit, or proposed future branch circuit, ties into the main line circuit on the same corner the streetlight is located, the Type 2 junction box should be located on the same corner instead of on the opposite corner (See Figure 5b). Junction boxes should not be installed on both sides of a street crossing.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
|[[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 5a.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 5a - No Branch Circuit
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
|[[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 5b.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 5b - Branch Circuit
|}

====      Median Noses at Divided Thoroughfare Street Intersections: ====
:At unsignalized thoroughfare intersections where the streetlighting conduit runs from median nose to median nose, Type 1 junction boxes should be installed in each median nose. If a branch circuit or future branch circuit will tie into the mainline cable, a Type 2 junction box should be used in the median nose at the point of the branch circuit connection. In the case of a future branch circuit, the conduit should be installed across the thoroughfare lanes and terminated in a Type 1 junction box on the corner for future connection. A 1c#10 AWG locating cable should be installed in the, otherwise empty, conduit.

:In the case of a signalized intersection, there would most likely be a traffic signal service box located in the median. The streetlighting cable should be installed in the traffic signal conduit and not median nose to median nose. The streetlighting conduit would be terminated at the service box.

====      Connecting into Existing Circuits: ====
:Junction boxes should be used to tie into an existing circuit when it is not feasible to extend the proposed conduit to the next streetlight pole. This may happen at the boundary of a construction project. In those cases, the existing streetlighting cable should be field located during construction and a junction box should be installed over the top. The cable splice from new to existing should be accomplished in the junction box.

====      At the End of Platted Streets Between Building Phases: ====
:Many times on developer constructed projects, the last streetlight pole does not end up at the end of the street section. In these cases, it is acceptable to install a Type 1 junction box at the end of the street so the conduit can be easily extended on the next building phase. Care should be taken to prevent the proliferation of junction boxes. The designer should plan accordingly to eliminate junction boxes whenever possible.

=== Streetlight Control Centers: ===
Streetlight control centers are pre-wired cabinets with relays, breakers, etc. that control when the streetlights receive electricity based on built-in photo controls. Each control center will require a photo cell to energize the streetlighting circuits. Power is provided to the individual streetlight poles only when it is dark enough to close the contact in the photo cell. Otherwise, there is no power in the system. This is a safety feature so any excavation work that cuts the cable during daylight hours will not be posed with live electrical power.

The normal design is a four circuit control center. Many times a 4-circuit controller will never control more than two or three circuits. However, every attempt should be made to locate it such that the number of circuits on one control center can be maximized.

Upon the approval of the project manager, a 1-circuit control center may be used. A 1-circuit control center may be applicable as a temporary installation between two building phases where the development master plan indicates that a new control center will be installed in subsequent development phases that will ultimate assume the load. There may also be applications in isolated areas, where it may make sense to install a single circuit controller where there is no possible way to connect to an existing streetlighting circuit or control center. One example is along the border between Overland Park and another city, where a cul-de-sac street extends into a neighborhood from the thoroughfare street. The City staff has the ultimate authority to approve or deny the use of a single circuit control center.

====      Streetlight Control Center Locations: ====
:Streetlight control center locations are subject to provisions in [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-5768City of Overland Park Municipal Code 18.180.070, Item G]. A summary of the ordinance outlining the requirements for streetlight control centers and the application to streetlight control centers is provided, herein. The preferred location in order of priority is modified to apply to current practice in the case of streetlight control centers.

=====            Utility Structure Ordinance: =====
::Any structure located within the public right-of-way shall be located behind the sidewalk and is subject to approval by the City Engineer. When placing utility structures, priority shall be given to finding available utility easements or right-of-way in preferred locations. Preferred locations, as listed in order of priority, are:
:#Properties developed with non-residential uses
:#Thoroughfare landscape/utility easements
:#Street side yards on a corner lot behind the front yard setback, and
:#Front yards within the required side yard setback.
::Locating streetlight controllers in rear yards should be avoided. Proper utility easements or streetlight easements shall be acquired if the controller is to be located outside of the right-of-way.

=====            Outside of Intersection Sight Distance Triangles: =====
::Street light control centers should not be located within the intersection sight distance triangle as defined by [https://bookstore.transportation.org/collection_detail.aspx?ID=110 A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets] by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), latest edition.

=====            Proximity to Power Source: =====
::The streetlight control center needs to be located within close proximity to the KCP&L power source, whether it is a power pole with a transformer or a ground mounted transformer. KCP&L requires that the distance from the control center to a pole mounted transformer cannot exceed 150’. The distance from the control center to a ground mounted transformer cannot exceed 200’.

=====            Maximizing Control Center Circuits: =====
::Streetlight control centers have the capacity to operate four independent circuits and should be located such that the number of circuits utilized can be maximized. Ideal locations would be at a 4-leg intersection where one circuit can extend in all the four cardinal directions or at 3-leg intersections where at least three circuits can be utilized.

::There will be situations where the voltage drop becomes too great between intersections and a controller has to be located mid-block which will only utilize two circuits. Before arbitrarily determining to install a mid-block circuit, the designer should evaluate all possible alternatives, including the extension of existing circuits on the side streets from existing control centers within the development.

::The designer, with the help of the City staff, should evaluate all existing control centers in the vicinity of the project to determine if there are any underutilized controllers that can be relocated to a better location and could still be used to back-feed the existing streetlights. The ultimate goal is to reduce the number of control centers in an area by placing them or relocating them in a more strategic location. This may require some off-site construction work to accommodate.

====      Control Center Orientation: ====
:Streetlight control centers shall be oriented such that the photocell always faces to the north or to the east. The plan symbol for the control center shows a concrete pad which always indicates the front side of the cabinet. As you would stand on the pad facing the front of the control center, the photocell is always located on the right hand side of the cabinet. The shaded portion of the triangle in the symbol represents the photocell.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 6.JPG|500px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 6
|}

====      Circuit Numbering Convention ====
:Circuit numbers will be identified by the principal direction the circuit extends. There are times, especially on residential streets, where the circuit extends in many directions. The principal direction should follow the numbering as listed below.
:Circuit number 1 shall always be to the north
:Circuit number 2 shall always be to the east
:Circuit number 3 shall always be to the south
:Circuit number 4 shall always be to the west
:Exceptions are if modifying an existing control center which already is configured differently.

See the figure below for additional information regarding controller cabinet and conduit requirements and circuit numbering convention
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Controller and Conduit Configuration.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|
|}

=== Connecting Proposed Electrical Cable into Existing Streetlight Poles: ===
When extending proposed conduit into an existing streetlight pole foundation, several things should be considered in the design. If the pole is mounted to an existing screw-in foundation, the designer should verify with the City project manager that it is new enough to have two conduit entry holes. If it is an older foundation, it may only have one conduit entry. If the existing foundation is concrete, you will not be able to connect a new conduit to extend the circuit. In either the case of an old screw-in foundation with only one conduit entry or a concrete foundation, the designer will have to either install a junction box near the pole to intercept the existing cable/conduit, or replace the foundation with a new screw-in foundation. When connecting the proposed electrical cables to the existing electrical cables in the base of the pole, new fused and un-fused disconnects as well as new multi-tap electrical connectors shall be used. The existing fixture should also be shown to be re-lamped.

=== Luminaires Located on Combination Traffic Signal/Streetlight Poles: ===
All luminaires mounted on combination traffic signal/streetlight poles at signalized intersections shall be connected to the streetlighting circuits controlled by the streetlighting control center instead of running off of the traffic signal control center.

Exceptions exist for isolated intersections where there are no surrounding streetlight control centers or streetlighting circuits. In such cases, the 3-1c #4 AWG USE streetlighting cables should be extended to the traffic signal control center for power. In addition, the designer should provide necessary notation to indicate that the multi-tap ballasts in any HPS luminaire should be wired for 120V. If the fixture is LED, the driver should not have to be modified. The luminaires should be equipped with photocells. A 15 amp circuit breaker should be called out to be installed in the secondary service pedestal to isolate the lighting circuit.

=== Requirements for House Addresses on Equipment: ===
Streetlight control centers and streetlight poles shall each be assigned a house address. The reasons for doing so and the procedures to accomplish each are discussed below:

====      House Addresses for Streetlight Poles: ====
:House addresses are field stenciled on streetlight poles to help maintenance crews respond to lamp outages or maintenance issues when a citizen calls the situation in or if the maintenance crews are being dispatched to take care of a problem. It is a way to call-in and respond to specific problems and the address identifies the exact pole that requires attention.

:House addresses are only required for streetlight poles on collector or thoroughfare streets for poles providing 30’ and 40’ mounting heights. House addresses are not required for streetlights on residential streets providing 15’ mounting heights, because the address on the house provides similar information.

:During the design, the City staff will provide the specific house numbers to the designer to add to the pole callout nomenclature. The standard practice is to assign an address at each end of the poles located at a median break or intersection. The two addresses are subtracted and the number is divided by one number less than the number of poles. The resulting number is then systematically added to the initial number, beginning with the smallest address and working toward the end. This establishes a uniform numbering system between the median breaks or intersections. Each address should be rounded to the closest numbered address. Pole addresses in a median should always be even numbers. Poles located on the south or east side of the street shall have odd numbered addresses. Poles located on the north or west side of the street shall have even numbered addresses. An example for a divided thoroughfare with the poles located in the center median follows:
:Example:
:There is a median break on College Boulevard at King and Nieman Road. The 100 block for Nieman is 11100. The 100 block for King is 11300. A streetlight is located in the west median nose at Nieman and is assigned an address of 11108. Another streetlight is located in the east median nose at King and is assigned an address of 11294. Assume that there will be eight poles total between the two median noses.

:(11294 - 11108) = 26.6
:::(8-1)
:This is the number that should be added to the initial assigned pole address beginning at the smallest address.

:Therefore, the next pole west of Nieman should be (11108 + 26.6) = 11134.6 (Round the address to 11134).
:The next pole address would be 11134.6 + 26.6 = 11161.2 (Round the address to 11162).
:Continue adding 26.6 to all subsequent non-rounded addresses, and rounding to the nearest even number for each pole.

====      House Addresses for Streetlight Control Centers: ====
:Each streetlight control center requires an electrical service address. City staff will provide the control center address to the designer after the designer determines the location and whether Kansas City Power and Light (KCP&L) can provide the necessary 240V power to the proposed location. KCP&L uses the address for billing electrical usage to the City. The City also uses the address to track invoices.

:Each address for the streetlight control center shall be followed with an “LC” extension which stands for “Lighting Controller”. The procedure for coordinating with KCP&L is addressed below in [[#Coordinating_Electrical_Service_with_KCP.26L:|“Coordinating Electrical Service with KCP&L”]].

====      Showing House Addresses on the Plans: ====
:House addresses for the streetlight control center should be shown in the station and offset callout for the pole and also should be the first number designated in each pole callout. For example:

:11302-1-4 (8',12") (11134)
::Sta 10+23.5, 30.2' Rt

:The 11302 represents the control center address; the 1 represents circuit number 1; and the 4 represents the 4th pole on circuit number 1. The 8’ and 12’ represents the luminaire bracket arm length on the left side and the right side, respectively and the 11134 is the assigned house address for the pole.

:House addresses for each pole should be shown in parenthesis immediately behind the callout for the controller address, circuit number, pole number and arm length information according to the legend in the Standard Details.

:The streetlight control center address should also be shown in a box located in the bottom right hand portion of each plan sheet in which it applies. If poles connected to that control center appear on more than one sheet, the address should appear on the same sheets. If there are poles that are fed from different control centers on one sheet, each control center address should appear on the sheet. The general format of the note should be:

:{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;"
|-
|Proposed Streetlight Control Center
|-
|Electrical Service Address:
|-
|11302 LC College Blvd
|}

:The existing address for each control center that is being removed or used in place should also be indicated in a boxed note, replacing “Proposed” with either “Remove” or “Existing”.

=== Coordinating Electrical Service with KCP&L: ===
The project manager or designer should perform the initial work to locate the streetlighting control center based on field conditions where there is an existing transformer. The streetlight control center needs to be located within close proximity to the KCP&L power source, whether it is a power pole with a transformer or a ground mounted transformer. In general, KCP&L requires that the distance from the control center to a pole mounted transformer cannot exceed 150’. The distance from the control center to a ground mounted transformer cannot exceed 200’.

KCP&L should be contacted, either verbally or in writing, to verify if power can be obtained at a particular location before a lot of design work is completed. In either case, it is beneficial to send them a plan sheet or meet them in the field. When requesting power, ask if there will be a charge to obtain power at the desired location. KCP&L can generally provide power anywhere, but there may be a significant cost to do so. Ask if there is a better location where they have an existing transformer or sectionalizer that would be better or cheaper to acquire power from. If the control center can be relocated to a better position, make the design change. If not, ask KCP&L to provide an estimate to the City for the cost associated with obtaining power before the design is finalized.

The designer should provide the City a copy of all letter correspondence or email correspondence to KCP&L to insure the necessary procedures are being performed.
After KCP&L has agreed to a preliminary power source and location, the project manager or designer should prepare a preliminary plan sheet showing the location of the power pole and the location of the control center with conduit and notes indicating the location where power will be obtained. After the power location has been established, the project manager will then assign an electrical service address to each control center as outlined in the City's [http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Phase_II_-_Preliminary_Design#Task_No._26_-_Coordinate_Electrical_Service_for_Traffic_Signals_and_Street_Lighting|Project Procedures Manual, Preliminary Design-Task No. 26 “Coordinate Electrical Service for Traffic Signals and Streetlighting"]. There you will find the Electrical Service Address Procedures, a form for Electrical Service Application and a sample letter to KCP&L requesting power service.

=== Removal of Existing Streetlights: ===
All existing streetlights that will be removed shall be identified on the plan sheets. The exact procedure varies depending on whether the existing streetlights are the ones that were purchased from KCP&L or if they are existing lights that were installed per the City of Overland Park standard details. The procedures for both are explained below:

====      Removal of Existing City Owned Streetlights Installed per Overland Park Standard Details: ====
:All existing City owned streetlights shall be shown on the plans. Any existing streetlights that will not be re-used in the final design shall be indicated to be removed by a construction note. The note should include the removal of the pole, luminaire, arm and screw-in foundation. Existing concrete pole foundations should be shown to be removed to a depth of at least 24”. All conduit and cable can be abandoned in place or can be removed at the option of the contractor if it is in conflict with other construction items.

====      Removal of Existing Streetlights Purchased from KCP&L: ====
:All existing streetlights shall be shown on the plans. The City will determine which lights should be designated to be removed. The designer shall indicate any pole not to be re-used as “Existing Streetlight to be Removed by Others”. The City of Overland Park or their on-call representative will remove the poles and not the project contractor.

:Each pole purchased from KCP&L has a PK number designated with a sticker, such as PK-1423. The designer should indicate the proper PK number on the plans next to the pole.

:City staff will coordinate with their on-call representative for the removal of the lights following the City's [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Phase_II_-_Preliminary_Design#Task_No._26b_-_Coordinate_Removal_of_Streetlights_Purchased_from_Evergy_.28KCP.26L.29|Project Procedures Manual, Phase II-Preliminary Design, Task 26b "Coordinate Removal of Streetlights Purchased from KCP&L"] during the design process and [http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Phase_V_-_Construction#Task_No._11a_-_Coordinate_Removal_of_Streetlights_Purchased_from_KCP.26L|Project Procedures Manual, Phase V-Construction-Task 11a "Coordinate Removal of Streetlights Purchased from KCP&L"] during the construction phase. The process involves writing the on-call representative to provide them a list of poles that are scheduled to be removed. The on-call representative will submit a cost estimate to perform the work which needs to be approved by the Director of Public Works. After approval, the project manager will coordinate the removal with the on-call representative and notify in an attempt to keep the lights operational as long as possible before being removed. A letter will then be sent to KCP&L instructing them to remove the lights from their database and revise their monthly billing.

=== Voltage Drop Calculations: ===
Voltage drop is an important factor in determining how many luminaires can be placed on any circuit. The voltage drop in any electrical circuit is directly dependent upon current and wire resistance.

====      Permissible Voltage Drop:====
:The permissible voltage drop is the allowable voltage drop across an entire circuit of a specific system voltage. This is generally limited to what the fixture can handle.

:With the constant wattage ballast, the permissible voltage drop is five percent of the system voltage. A factor of 0.95 is to be applied to the system voltage to allow for line fluctuations. This results in an allowable drop of 11.4 volts for a 240-volt circuit.
:Example:
:Perm Voltage Drop = System Voltage x 5% Drop x 0.95 line fluctuation factor
:::::::= 240 x 0.05 x 0.95
:::::::= 11.4 volts

====      HPS Fixture Operating Current: ====
:Operating current is determined using 95 percent of the system voltage to allow for line fluctuations. In addition, the lamp wattage is increased by a factor of 1.3 to allow for ballast load. The formula for power is P = V x I and the formula for current is I = P / V.
:The operating amps for each luminaire are based on the wattage of the lamp used.

:Operating Amps =      1.3 x Wattage                            
:::::::Voltage x Line Fluctuation Factor

:Operating Amps = 1.3 x Wattage
:::::::240 x 0.95

:The following operating amps should be used in the design calculations for HPS fixtures:

:{| width="400px" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
! colspan="5" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|HPS Fixture Operating Amps
|-
!400 Watt
!310 Watt
!250 Watt
!150 Watt
!100 Watt
|-
| align="center"|2.3 Amps
| align="center"|1.8 Amps
| align="center"|1.4 Amps
| align="center"|0.9 Amps
| align="center"|0.6 Amps
|}

====      LED Fixture Operating Current: ====
:Operating current is determined using 95 percent of the system voltage to allow for line fluctuations. Since LED fixtures have a driver instead of a ballast, there is no multiplier for ballast loss. The formula for power is P = V x I and the formula for current is I = P / V.
:The operating amps for each luminaire are based on the wattage of the lamp used.

:Operating Amps =                Wattage                            
:::::::Voltage x Line Fluctuation Factor

:Operating Amps = Wattage
::::::240 x 0.95

:LED fixtures in the same class have different wattages based on the manufacturer. The values shown in the following table are based on the worse case scenario for approved LED fixtures in each luminaire classification and should therefore be used in the voltage drop calculations:

:{| width="500px" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
! colspan="6" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|LED Fixture Operating Amps
|-
!Class A
!Class B
!Class C
!Class D
!Class E
!Residential LED Lamp
|-
| align="center"|0.9 Amps
| align="center"|0.8 Amps
| align="center"|0.6 Amps
| align="center"|0.4 Amps
| align="center"|0.2 Amps
| align="center"|0.2 Amps
|}

====      Cable Circular Mils: ====
:A circular mil is a unit of area used when denoting the cross sectional area of a wire or cable.

:1 mil = 0.001 inch

:To convert the diameter of a wire to mils: mil = d x 1,000
:Example: #4 AWG wire has a diameter of 0.2043037 inches.
:0.2043037 inches x 1,000 = 204.3037 or 204 mils
:CM = mil2

:Example: Circular mils of #4 AWG wire
:CM = (204.3037 mils)2
:CM = 41,740

====      Calculating Voltage Drop: ====
:According to Ohm's Law the voltage drop in a line is equal to the current in amperes multiplied by the resistance of the line in ohms:

:E = I x R
:Where:
::E = voltage
::I = Current (in amperes)
::R = Resistance (in ohms)

:Since the resistance of a wire conductor is inversely proportional to the cross-sectional area of the wire, increased voltage drops are developed as the wire diameters decrease. The areas of wires in circular mils and the resistance in ohms per 1000 feet that should be used in calculations are shown below for #4 AWG copper cable.

:{| width="400px" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
! colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Properties of Stranded Copper Conductors
|-
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Cable Size (AWG)
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Area (Circular Mils)
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|AC Resistance (Ohms/1,000 ft)
|-
| align="center"|4
| align="center"|41,740
| align="center"|0.310
|}

:The voltage drop in any line is calculated from the formula:

:Voltage Drop = 2 x K x Q x I x D
:::::::CM

:Where:
::K = Direct Current Constant (for copper, K = 12.9 ohms)
::Q = Aternating Current Adjustment Factor (Q = 1, for all wire less than 2/0 wire)
::I = Load, in Ampers
::D = Distance from the power supply, in feet
::CM = Cross sectional area of cable, in Circular Mills

:Voltage Drop = 2 x 12.9 x 1.0 x Operating Amps x Distance
:::::::::CM

:Add 5% to the center to center distance to allow for snaking of the conduit and cable.
:Operating amps = the operating amps of one fixture times the number of fixtures at the point of calculation. Transposing this formula, the required area in circular mils can be computed:

:Area (circular mils) = 25.8 x Operating Amps x No. of Lamps x 1.05 x Distance
::::::::::Permissible Voltage Drop

:Calculate the circular mils between every fixture in the circuit and add the total number of circular mils to get the total circular mils. Verify that this is less than the circular mils for a #4 AWG cable.

:The voltage drop should then be checked using the following equation:

:Voltage Drop = 2 x L x I x R as follows:

:Voltage Drop = 2 x Distance x Current x Resistance ÷1,000

:Where:
::L = Distance between lights. Use 1.05 x distance (5% to allow for snaking)
::I = Current = operating amps x number of lamps
::R = Resistance of cable per 1,000 feet = 0.31 (From above Table, the resistance of #4 AWG wire in ohms/1,000 ft)

:If circuit loading or voltage drop requires a larger wire size than a #4 AWG then one or more of the following can be considered:
#Locate the control center closer to the lighting system
#Install additional control centers
:Note that long runs of parallel circuits should be avoided unless otherwise approved

:Example to Determine Necessary Wire Cable Size:
:Given: Five 250-watt HPS lamps on a 240-volt circuit spaced at 200, 425, 615, 815 and 1,030 feet respectively, from the control center. There must be sufficient current to operate the first lamp as well as the next four lamps.

:1.05 x 200 ft x 1.4 amps x 5 lamps x 25.8/11.4 = 3,327 cir. mils to 1st lamp
:1.05 x 225 ft x 1.4 amps x 4 lamps x 25.8/11.4 = 2,994 cir. mils to 2nd lamp
:1.05 x 190 ft x 1.4 amps x 3 lamps x 25.8/11.4 = 1,896 cir. mils to 3rd lamp
:1.05 x 200 ft x 1.4 amps x 2 lamps x 25.8/11.4 = 1,331 cir. mils to 4th lamp
:1.05 x 215 ft x 1.4 amps x 1 lamp x 25.8/11.4 = 715 cir. mils to 5th lamp
:Total Area = 10,263 cir. mils.

:The calculated circular mils is less than the capacity of a #4 AWG wire (41,740 as shown in the above Table. This calculation will need to be made for each circuit at each streetlight control center.

:The voltage drop should then be checked using E = I x R as follows:

:Voltage Drop = 2 x Distance x Current x Resistance ÷1,000

:Voltage Drop = 2 x Distance x Operating Amps x No. of lamps x Resistance÷1,000

:2 x 1.05 x 200 ft x 1.4 amps x 5 lamps x 0.31 ohms/1,000 ft = 0.91 volt drop to 1st lamp
:2 x 1.05 x 225 ft x 1.4 amps x 4 lamps x 0.31 ohms/1,000 ft = 0.82 volt drop to 2nd lamp
:2 x 1.05 x 190 ft x 1.4 amps x 3 lamps x 0.31 ohms/1,000 ft = 0.52 volt drop to 3rd lamp
:2 x 1.05 x 200 ft x 1.4 amps x 2 lamps x 0.31 ohms/1,000 ft = 0.36 volt drop to 4th lamp
:2 x 1.05 x 215 ft x 1.4 amps x 1 lamp x 0.31 ohms/1,000 ft = 0.20 volt drop to 5th lamp
:Total Drop = 2.81 volts

:2.81 volts/(240 volts x .95) = 1.23% which is less than 5%. Therefore it is acceptable

====      Calculating Circuit Breaker Ratings: ====
:Circuit breakers are protective devices for over-current conditions. When the current passing through the circuit breaker exceeds a predetermined amount, the breaker trips and opens the faulty circuit. The amount of current required to operate the trip mechanism is referred to as the "trip rating". Proper protection of the circuit requires a breaker with the correct "tripping" current value. This value, "trip rating", can be readily computed by totaling the number of luminaires for each circuit breaker and thereby obtaining the total current being used in the circuit. To prevent unnecessary tripping of the breaker during surges and in-rush currents, the total current is usually multiplied by a factor of 1.3.

:Example:Using the previous example: 5 each - 250-watt luminaires require a normal operating current of 5 x 1.4 amps = 7 amps

:The line loss load in amperes is added as follows:

:14.5 watts/(240 volts x 0.95) + 7 amps = 7.1 amps

:The Trip rating = 7.1 amps x (1.3) = 9.2 amps.

:The streetlight controller is equipped with standard 30 amp circuit breakers. The circuit breakers can be increased to a 40 amp breaker under heavier loads. For the above example, a 30-amp breaker is more than sufficient.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Design Considerations:|'''Design Considerations:''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Design Considerations:]]
|}
----

== Approved Streetlighting Equipment: ==
The following equipment has been approved for all City-owned streetlighting systems. The following information is provided as a general discussion only and the designer is responsible to review the standard details in the selection of equipment for the streetlighting system.

=== Streetlight Poles: ===
The type of pole used is based on the classification of street it will be located on. Poles and mounting heights will vary depending on if it is a residential street, collector street or thoroughfare street.

====      Residential Streets: ====
:Poles for residential streets shall be round, tapered aluminum poles for 15-foot mounting heights.

====      Collector Streets: ====
:Poles for collector streets shall be round, tapered aluminum poles for 30-foot mounting heights.

====      Thoroughfare Streets: ====
:Poles for thoroughfare streets shall be round, tapered aluminum poles for 40-foot mounting heights.

=== Luminaire Bracket Arms: ===
For conventional lighting systems, there are several different arm lengths and styles of arms that are used. The various styles and lengths and the appropriate uses for each are summarized below.

====      Arm Styles: ====
:Type A luminaire bracket arms consist of a single member arm. Type A arms are used when the length is less than 10’. An exception to this is in applications where one pole has two arms, regardless of the orientation. If one arm is required to be a Type B style, the other arm should also be a Type B style to provide a consistent look, even if the arm is less than 10’ in length.

:Type B luminaire bracket arms consist of a two member truss arm design. Type B arms are used when the length is 10’ or greater.

====      Arm Lengths: ====
:The length of the bracket arm is dependant upon many factors such as street width, pole location in relation to the curb and the presence of a median. Typical preferences are provided as follows, but the selection of an arm length should be used that enables the designer to achieve the required lighting criteria. Single member bracket arms are available in 6’ and 8’ lengths. Twin member bracket arms are available in 10’, 12’ and 15’ lengths. Only bracket arms of these lengths are used.

=====            Collector Streets and Undivided 2-Lane Thoroughfare Streets (30’ Mounting Heights): =====
::On typical collector streets that are 36’ wide from back-of-curb to back-of-curb, either a 6’ or 8’ arm is used. Two-lane thoroughfare streets are typically one lane in each direction with a shoulder or bike lane on the sides, resulting in a similar roadway width to typical collector streets. Depending on whether the pole is located behind the sidewalk or in the grass parkway between the sidewalk and the curb, or where the street width becomes wider, such as the approaches to an intersection where additional turn lanes are added, the arm length may need to be increased to 12’ in order to achieve the required lighting criteria.

=====            Undivided 4-Lane Thoroughfare Streets (40’ Mounting Heights): =====
::On an undivided thoroughfare street, generally 6’, 8’ or 12’ arms are used unless the poles need to be offset farther behind the sidewalk due to utility conflicts or where the street width becomes wider, such as the approaches to an intersection where additional turn lanes are added.

=====            Divided Thoroughfare Streets (40’ Mounting Heights): =====
::Divided thoroughfares typically have a 24’ wide center median to divide opposing lanes of traffic. On divided thoroughfare streets where the light poles are installed in a raised median, there are a few different arm configurations that are used. In sections where there are no left turn lanes and the median is only separating through lanes of traffic, two 12’ arms oriented 180° apart are used.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 7.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 7
|}

::Where the median narrows due to the introduction of a left turn lane, a 12’ arm is installed extending over the left turn lane, and an 8’ arm is installed 180° apart extending over the through lanes in the opposite direction.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 8.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 8
|}

::In some wider sections of thoroughfares, it may be necessary to use twin 15’ arms or a 15’ arm and a 12’ arm in lieu of twin 12’ arms or a 12’ and 8’ arm depending on how wide the median is and how wide the pavement is. When the median is narrower, shorter arm lengths may be used.

::On divided thoroughfare streets with depressed medians, where the poles are located on the outside edges of the roadway, the designer may use 8’, 10’, 12’ or 15’ arms depending on what provides the best lighting design with the longest pole spacing. This will depend on the width of the pavement on each side of the median and the overall width of the median.

=== Luminaires: ===
The type of luminaire used for the design shall be based on the roadway classification, pedestrian conflict area classification and the light level required:

====      Residential Streets: ====
:Luminaires used for residential streets shall be post-top luminaire with retrofit LED lamp meeting the current standard of the City of Overland Park.

====      Collector Streets: ====
:Cobrahead luminaires shall be LED roadway luminaires meeting the current standard of the City of Overland Park. They shall be Class C LED’s (250W HPS equivalent), Class D LED’s (150W HPS equivalent), or Class E LED's (100W HPS equivalent).

====      Thoroughfare Streets: ====
:Luminaires shall be LED roadway luminaires meeting the current standard of the City of Overland Park. They shall be Class A LED’s (400W HPS equivalent), Class B (310W HPS equivalent), Class C LED’s (250W HPS equivalent), or Class D (150W HPS equivalent).

=== LED Lamps: ===
LED lamps shall be (100 watt HPS equivalent) rated at a minimum of 5,000 lumens per the City of Overland Park Approved Materials List.

=== HPS Lamps: ===
HPS lamps may be encountered when designing near existing facilities. Use the following to determine the appropriate lumens for each HPS lamp type:
:400W HPS lamp is 50,000 lumens (cobra head)
:310W HPS lamp is 35,000 lumens (cobra head)
:250W HPS lamp is 30,000 lumens (cobra head)
:150W HPS lamp is 16,000 lumens (cobra head or post top)
:100W HPS lamp is 9,500 lumens (cobra head or post top)
:70W HPS lamp is 5,800 lumens (cobra head or post top)

=== Pole Foundations: ===
There are two main types of pole foundations that are used depending upon the particular situation. The preferred type is the screw-in foundation. However, concrete foundations may be used in specific situations.

====      Screw-in Foundations: ====
:Poles shall generally be installed on galvanized steel screw-in foundations. There are four different types of screw-in foundations that are used for specific pole sizes and configurations according to the standard details.

:Type R foundations are used only with residential style 14’ tall poles (OP14 Series).

:Type T1 foundations are used only for poles with 30’ mounting heights and arm lengths and configurations for OP301, OP302 and OP303 Series poles.

:Type F1 foundations are used for poles with 40’ mounting heights and arm lengths and configurations for OP401 and OP402 Series poles.

:Type F2 foundations are used for poles with 40’ mounting heights and arm length and configurations for OP403 Series poles.

====      Concrete Foundations: ====
:The use of concrete pole foundations should be limited for special situations where a screw-in foundation is not acceptable. Examples of situations where concrete foundations are acceptable are where subsurface rock is encountered which makes it impossible to use a screw-in foundation; when it is necessary to combine a concrete foundation and a concrete retaining wall; or in parking lot areas where it is desirable use a raised concrete foundation to protect the poles from vehicle bumper damage.

=== Streetlight Control Center Foundation: ===
There are two main types of control center foundations that are used depending upon which type of streetlight control center is used. A pad mounted controller foundation for a 4-circuit streetlighting controller is the standard and obviously should be used for 4-circuit controllers. A pad mounted controller foundation for a 1 circuit controller should be used for a 1-circuit streetlighting controller.

=== Conduit: ===
Conduit shall be used for all streetlighting circuit cable as well as for electrical service cable. The type and size varies for the particular installation.

====      Streetlight Circuit Conduit: ====
:Conduit shall be 2" diameter, gray, high density polyethylene (HDPE), SDR 13.5 unless more than two circuit cables are contained in one conduit. If this is the case, a 3" diameter or larger conduit or two parallel 2" diameter conduits should be used that provides enough room for all the cables while still allowing ease of pulling. (See criteria above for discussion on parallel circuits)

====      KCP&L Electrical Service Conduit: ====
:KCP&L has specific requirements for the electrical service conduit. They will accept gray, Schedule 40 PVC conduit in a trenching application. If the conduit will be bored, it has to be SDR 13.5 HDPE (black with red stripes). If the conduit is serving a 4-circuit controller, the size shall be 3”. If the conduit is serving a 1-circuit controller, the size shall be 2” since a 3” conduit will not physically fit into the controller base collar.

=== Electrical Cable: ===
They type of electrical cable is dependant on the particular use. There are four main types of cable:
#Circuit distribution cable,
#Pole and bracket cable,
#KCP&L electrical service cable, and
#Bare copper ground cable.

====      Circuit Distribution Cable: ====
:Only #4 AWG copper USE electrical cables are allowable as circuit cables in conduit from appurtenance to appurtenance. Three wires are required for each circuit. One cable is for the system ground and the other two cables are for each hot leg of a 240volt circuit.

====      Pole and Bracket Cable: ====
:Only #10 AWG copper THHN/THWN electrical cables are allowable in the streetlight pole, luminaire bracket arm and luminaire.

:In situations where HDPE conduit is installed for possible future use, a #10 AWG copper THHN/THWN cable is also used as a locating cable so the conduit can be located in the field.

====      KCP&L Electrical Service Power Cable: ====
:The size of cable used for the electrical service cable should be based on voltage drop calculations from the power supply to the streetlighting controller cabinet. It is preferable to keep the controller cabinet as close to the power supply as possible to minimize the voltage drop and the size of the cable. For a 100 Amp service, the minimum wire size is a #2 AWG copper USE electrical cable.

====      Locating Cable: ====
:Locating cable inserted into an otherwise empty conduit that is installed for future use shall be 1c#10.

====      Solid Copper Ground Cable: ====
:A bare solid copper #6 AWG ground cable is required from the streetlight control center to the adjacent ground rod in order to provide the required grounding according to the National Electric Code.

=== Junction Boxes: ===
There are two types of junction boxes used for streetlighting projects according to their size. Where the streetlighting circuit connects to an existing or a future traffic signal, a traffic signal service box is used in place of a junction box. Each type of junction box is used in the following situations.

====      Type 1 Junction Box: ====
:Type 1 junction boxes are symbolized by a circle with a “J” in it and are used only where in-line splices are used to pass through the box or where one or two conduits enter the same box as shown below.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 9.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 9
|}

====      Type 2 Junction Box: ====
:Type 2 junction boxes are symbolized by a square with a “J” in it and are used where branch circuits are connected to the main circuit or where more than two conduits enter the same box as shown below. A type 2 junction box should also be located immediately adjacent to a streetlight control center.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 10.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 10
|}

=== Electrical Connector Kits: ===
Electrical connector kits consist of multi-tap connectors, and both fused and non-fused breakaway fuse holders and fuses.

====      Multi-tap Connectors: ====
:Each circuit consists of three #4 AWG copper USE cables coming into the pole and three #4 AWG copper USE cables coming out of the pole. Each set of incoming and outgoing cables will be connected by a multi-tap electrical connectors as detailed in the Standard Details. Three multi-tap connectors will be required in each pole base regardless of the number of luminaires installed on the pole.

====      Breakaway Fuse Holders: ====
:Breakaway fuse holders come as either fused or non-fused. They shall be installed in the base of each streetlight pole so the wires breakaway away free from the pole foundation in case of vehicular impact. Depending on whether you have one or two luminaires on the pole determines how many breakaway fused and non-fused connectors you will have.

#For single mounted luminaires, each pole will have two fused and two non-fused breakaway connectors.
#For twin mounted luminaires, each pole will have two non-fused breakaway connectors and four fused breakaway connectors.

====      Fuses and Slugs: ====
:Fused breakaway connectors are each supplied with an 8 amp fuse. The non-fused breakaway connectors have a ground slug in place of the fuse.

=== Streetlight Control Centers: ===
The City has two types of streetlight control centers that are allowed to be used under specific situations. They are either a single circuit or four circuit control center. Both control centers are designed for a 100 amp service and 240 volt single phase, three wire service. There are limited situations where Kansas City Power and Light Company cannot provide 240 volt service but can provide 208 volt power instead. This will have to be identified on a case by case basis.

=== Photo Cell: ===
Every streetlight control center will require a photo cell to control the on/off operation of the system.

=== Ground Rods and Clamps: ===
A 5/8” x 10’ ground rod and clamp is required at every control center foundation and at every concrete pole foundation, if a screw-in foundation cannot be installed.

=== Breakaway Pole Device: ===
All poles for 30’ and 40’ mounting heights shall be installed on a breakaway pole device. The breakaway device may either consist of four individual breakaway couplings that are installed on each anchor bolt or one frangible breakaway pole base according to the Standard Details. Breakaway pole devices are not required for 14’ residential type streetlight poles or if the light pole is located on a raised concrete base, such as in parking lots, or if the poles is installed on top of a concrete bridge rail.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Approved Streetlighting Equipment:|'''Approved Streetlighting Equipment:''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Approved Streetlighting Equipment:]]
|}
----

== Preparation of Plans: ==
The plans shall be prepared in accordance with the following guidelines unless otherwise pre-approved by the Engineer. The engineer or project manager shall follow the [[Media:Streetlighting Plan Review Check List.pdf|design review checklist]] during plan review or design.

=== Scale: ===
The preferred plan scale for streetlighting plans is 1”=40’. Two lines of the street plans may be located on the same sheet above and below each other. A scale and north arrow shall be indicated on each plan sheet.

=== Topography: ===
The following guidelines shall be followed in the preparation of streetlighting base maps depending on if the design is part of a larger roadway improvement project or if it is a stand-alone streetlighting project.

====      Streetlighting Plans as Part of Other Roadway Improvement Projects: ====
:Features affecting lighting design, such as drive entrances and intersections, curb and median lines, storm drainage pipes and inlets, underground and overhead utilities, existing streetlights, existing control centers, existing lighting circuits, existing junction or service boxes and proposed streetlighting system should be shown on the plans with proper symbols as shown in the “Streetlight Legend” on the Standard Details. All existing and proposed trees and landscaping shall be indicated in order to avoid conflict with new streetlight poles. New construction items should be subdued so the streetlighting conduit, poles, boxes, etc. stand out.

:All existing and proposed right-of-way, easements, etc. shall be shown on the plans. A centerline shall be shown with stationing for the main roadway as well as the side streets to be able to positively locate the poles. Street names shall be shown for major and minor streets.

:House addresses shall be labeled on each lot as well as street names to assist in locating features in the field.

====      Stand-Alone Streetlighting Plans: ====
:It is acceptable for plans to be prepared on aerial photography base maps instead of topographical survey base maps on stand-alone streetlighting plans when they are not part of a larger roadway improvement project. In such cases, underground and overhead utilities shall still be indicated on the plans along with existing streetlights, existing control centers, existing junction or service boxes along with the proposed streetlighting system with proper symbols as shown in the “Streetlight Legend” on the Standard Details.

:All existing and proposed right-of-way, easements, etc. shall also be shown. It is not necessary to develop a centerline as long as the streetlighting equipment is positively located with dimensions to existing features such as driveways, inlets, fire hydrants, etc. House addresses should be labeled on each lot as well as street names to assist in locating features in the field.

=== Plan Coordination with Roadway Design: ===
Lighting plans shall be coordinated with the road, signal, signing plans, etc. to ensure conflicts with other construction features do not exist. The designer needs to become acquainted with features such as existing overhead and underground utilities to avoid conflicts.

=== Plan Submittals: ===
There should be a minimum of three plan submittals for every streetlighting project whether it is a stand-alone project or part of a larger roadway project. Plans should be submitted at the Preliminary, Field Check and Final plan stage. The plans will be reviewed in accordance to the [[Media:Streetlighting Plan Review Check List.pdf|Streetlighting Plan Review Checklist]] as a base.

====      Preliminary Plans: ====
:Preliminary lighting plans should show the location of all poles and luminaires symbolized according to the Standard Details so the reviewer can determine proposed lamp wattage and mounting heights; tentative locations of control centers and power supplies; cable routing and junction boxes. It should also show the point by point lighting levels.

:On stand-alone projects, a cover sheet should be included that identifies the project location, utility contact numbers, scale and north arrow, table of contents, and signature blocks.

:The following information should be included on the General Notes sheet in the plans:
::Pedestrian Conflict Area
::Functional Street Classification

::Luminance Design Criteria (as listed in the Design Criteria Table)
::Avg. Maintained Luminance
::Avg: to Min. Luminance Uniformity Ratio
::Max. to Min. Luminance Uniformity Ratio
::Veiling Luminance Ratio

:Luminance Design Results (based on actual design spacing)
::Avg. Maintained Luminance
::Avg. to Min. Luminance Uniformity Ratio
::Max. to Min. Luminance Uniformity Ratio
::Veiling Luminance Ratio

:Illuminance Design Results
::Avg. Maintained Illuminance
::Avg. to Min. Illuminance Uniformity Ratio
:The illuminance design results should be reported for the design pole spacing so the actual results can be field measured and compared to the calculation results.

====      Field Check Plans: ====
:Field check lighting plans should show the location of all poles and luminaires, final locations of control centers, power supplies, cable routing and junction boxes. Each pole should be identified according to the “Streetlight Designation” in the Standard Details which includes the control center address (show as XXXX or YYYY if unknown at this stage), circuit number, pole number, arm lengths, and station and offset.

:If the streetlighting system cable is running in shared conduit with traffic signal plans, the plans should show the appropriate conduit locations and shall be coordinated with the traffic signal plans. If the proposed lighting circuits will be tied into existing systems, enough detail should be included to be able to ascertain the number of existing lights on the existing circuits in order to verify voltage drop calculations.

:Voltage drop calculations shall be submitted at the field check stage in order to verify the calculations. The Standard Details should be included in the field check submittal, including the Bill of Materials sheet. Quantities do not have to be completed at this stage.

====      Final Plans: ====
:Final lighting plans should include everything as identified in the field check plans. In addition, the final plans should include pole addresses (supplied by the City) for thoroughfare and collector streets. Pole addresses are not required for residential streetlighting plans. All “Miscellaneous Conduit Detail” references shall be identified for each pole. All control centers shall be shown with electrical service addresses and power sources accurately identified. All construction notes to clarify any construction details shall be shown. All Standard Details, including the completed Bill of Materials shall be included at this stage.

:If streetlighting cable is running in proposed traffic signal conduit, identify on both the streetlighting plans and the traffic signal plans under which bid item the conduit and cable will be paid for. If there are combination streetlighting and traffic signal poles, identify whether the poles, luminaires, bracket arms, pole and bracket cable and electrical connectors will be paid for under the traffic signal bid item or the streetlighting bid item.

:Depending on the number of comments made on the first submittal of final plans, a second set of final plans may be requested to verify that all comments have been addressed. The project manager will make that determination and convey his decision to the appropriate design staff.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Preparation of Plans:|'''Preparation of Plans:''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Preparation of Plans:]]
|}
----

== Computation of Quantities: ==
The computation of quantities is critical to providing accurate information to the contractors bidding the project. Errors in the computation of quantities results in project cost change orders and delays in the project. Care should be taken to check quantities against the plan sheet design to verify that all items are included and accurate. What follows are some general guidelines that should be used such that the computation of quantities is consistent for all designs.

=== Streetlight Poles and Bracket Arms: ===
Streetlight poles and associated luminaire arms are always aluminum, unless otherwise specified in the plans or bill of materials. Streetlight poles are quantified per each according to the mounting height with the included bracket arm length and number of bracket arms. For example a 40’ aluminum pole w/ 8’ bracket arm or a 30’ aluminum pole w/ twin 8’ bracket arms.

The pole type should be based on the mounting height, the bracket arm length and the number of bracket arms. Refer to [https://dw.opkansas.org/public/FileCabinets/2fa13812-70a3-4126-848b-3a20df7175c3/Documents/9904/FileDownload?targetFileType=Auto&keepAnnotations=false Table 1 – Luminaire Arm, Pole, Shoe Base & Anchor Bolt Data] on the Standard Detail sheet “Pole and Luminaire Details” to find the proper OP Designation that is required, such as OP14, OP301, OP402, etc. The pole designation is based on the number and length of the bracket arm as well as the mounting height. For example, a pole with a 40’ mounting height with one 12’ type B bracket arm corresponds to a OP402 series pole designation. The number of each pole type with the proper number and length of bracket arms should be listed in the Bill of Materials.

Combination lighting/signal poles are always steel, including the luminaire arms. If a combination lighting/signal pole is installed in a location where a future traffic signal is being considered, Chart B of the Traffic Signal Bill of Materials should be copied to the lighting sheet and filled out completely. This chart will be used to verify the length of the future mast arm that was considered. The combination lighting/signal pole quantity will include the luminaire bracket arm of the specified length in Chart B.

=== Pole Foundations: ===
foundations of the various types should be measured per each for each type used in the design.

====      Screw-in Foundations: ====
:Refer to the [https://dw.opkansas.org/public/FileCabinets/2fa13812-70a3-4126-848b-3a20df7175c3/Documents/9904/FileDownload?targetFileType=Auto&keepAnnotations=false Screw-in Foundation Detail table] on the Standard Detail sheet “Pole Foundation Details” to select the foundation type based on the OP pole series designation. For example, a OP401 pole designation requires an F1 foundation. A OP403 pole designation requires an F2 foundation.

====      Concrete Pole Foundations: ====
:When used, they should be measured per each for the various sizes based on mounting heights of 14’, 30’ or 40’. A concrete pole foundation cap should be included for each concrete pole foundation.

=== Luminaires: ===
Luminaires should be measured per each according to the type used in the plans.

====      Luminaires on Collector Streets: ====
:On collector streets, the cobrahead luminaires shall be LED cobraheads of the specified Class C, D or E as shown in the design.

====      Luminaires on Thoroughfare Streets: ====
:On thoroughfare streets, the luminaires shall be LED cobraheads of the specified Class A, B, or C as shown in the design.

====      Luminaires on Residential Streets: ====
:On residential streets, fixtures should be post top luminaires, including the LED lamp. When relamping existing post top luminaires, revise one of the lines of text in the Bill of Materials to read “LED Lamp Retrofit” and fill in the quantity of the number of individual lamps required.

=== Junction and Service Boxes: ===
Junction boxes and service boxes should be measured per each according to the various types. If the streetlighting conduit and cable ties into a traffic signal service box that is being constructed as part of the project, the service box should be included in the traffic signal Bill of Materials. If the service box is installed in anticipation for a future traffic signal, then it should be included in the streetlighting Bill of Materials. The designer should make it clear on the plans how the measurement and payment will be made.

=== Control Centers: ===
Streetlighting control centers should be measured per each based on the type of control center used. Occasionally, an existing control center is relocated to a new concrete foundation. In these instances, revise one of the lines of text in the Bill of Materials to read “Relocate Existing Control Center on New Foundation”.

=== Concrete Control Center Foundations: ===
Concrete control center foundations should be measured per each based on the type of control center used. A quantity should also be included for a concrete control center foundation when an existing controller is being relocated on a new foundation.

=== Ground Rods: ===
Ground rods should be measured per each. One ground rod should be included for every concrete control center foundation. If a concrete streetlight foundation is used for a particular application, one ground rod should be included for each. Ground rod clamps are subsidiary to the ground rod.

=== Photo Cells: ===
Photo cells should be measured per each. One photo cell is required in every new streetlight control center. Relocated control centers will be able to re-use the existing photo cell.

=== Conduits: ===
Conduit should be measured per linear foot for each type and diameter used.

====      KCP&L Electrical Service Conduit: ====
:Conduit should be measured from the center of the streetlight controller (not the center of the entire pad) to the center of the power pole or transformer plus 4’ to allow for the large radius sweeps at each end. No additional measurement will be made for PVC conduit elbows or conduit fittings.

:Example: If the center to center distance is 100’, the conduit length required is 100’ + 4’ = 104’

====      1” PVC Conduit for Equipment Ground: ====
:PVC conduit should be provided at each concrete control center foundation and at each concrete pole foundation. Add 3' of 1" PVC conduit at each control center foundation or concrete pole foundation.

====      HDPE Conduit: ====
:HDPE conduit should be measured from the center of one appurtenance to the center of another appurtenance plus additional lengths for conduit sweeps. Conduit elbows, conduit fittings or couplings shall be considered subsidiary to the conduit.

:*Add 4’ of conduit to the center to center distance between two streetlight poles.
:*Add 3’ of conduit to the center to center distance between a streetlight pole and a junction box.
:*Add 2’ of conduit to the center to center distance between a streetlight pole and a service box.
:*Add 3’ of conduit to the center to center distance between a streetlight control center and a junction box.
:*Add 2' of conduit to the center to center distance between two junction boxes
:*Add 0' of conduit to the center to center distance between two service boxes

:Where poles are mounted on a raised concrete pedestal, such as in parking lots, or on a bridge rail, the conduit length should be increased accordingly based on the height of the raised pedestal or bridge rail.

:Example 1: If the center to center distance between poles is 180’, the conduit length required is 180’ + 4’ = 184’

:Example 2: If the center to center distance between a pole and a box is 20’, the conduit length required is 20’ + 3’ = 23’

:Example 3: If the center to center distance between a pole and a box is 50’, the conduit length required is 50’ + 2’ = 52’

:Example 4: If the center to center distance between a control center and a junction box is 5’, the conduit length required is 5’ + 3’ = 8’

:Example 5: If the center to center distance between two junction boxes is 70', the conduit length required is 70' + 2' = 72'

:Example 6: If the center to center distance between two service boxes is 70', the conduit length required is 70' + 0' = 70'

=== Cables: ===
Cable should be measured per linear foot for each type used.

====      3-1c #4 USE Distribution Cable: ====
:The measurement for 3-1c #4 USE distribution cable should be per linear foot for the bundle of cable consisting of three wires. Cable should be measured from the center of pole, junction box or control center to the center of pole, junction box or control center. Additional cable quantities are added to account for sweeps, to provide slack and to make connections. The additional length is computed as follows:

:*Add 5’ of slack at each pole with a 30’ or 40’ mounting height, mounted on a flush mounted concrete base or screw-in foundation with a breakaway pole device
:*Add 4’ of slack at each 14’ pole, mounted on on a flush mounted concrete base or screw-in foundation, since a breakaway pole device is not required.
:*Add 5’ of slack at each junction or service box for each circuit contained within.
:*Add 5’ of slack at each streetlight control circuit for each circuit contained within.

:Where poles are mounted on a raised concrete pedestal, such as in parking lots, or on a bridge rail, the cable length should be increased accordingly based on the height of the raised pedestal or bridge rail. Keep in mind that on a raised concrete pedestal or a bridge rail, there is no need to have a breakaway pole base. Therefore, the height above ground level will have to be adjusted for cable length.

:Example 1: If the center to center distance between two streetlight poles with 40’ mounting heights is 180’, the cable length required is 180’ + 5’+ 5’ = 190’

:Example 2: If the center to center distance between two 14’ poles mounted on a flush mounted concrete base or screw-in foundation is 200’, the cable length required is 200’ + 4’ + 4’ = 208’

:Example 3: If the center to center distance between two junction boxes is 60’, the cable length required is 60’ + 5’ + 5’ = 70’

:Example 4: If the center to center distance between a 14’ streetlight pole and a junction box is 20’, the cable length required is 20’ + 4’ + 5’ = 29’

:Example 5: If the center to center distance between a junction box and a streetlighting control center is 10’, the cable length required is 10 + 5’ + 5’ = 20’ per circuit.

====      1c #10 Pole and Bracket Cable: ====
:The measurement for 1c #10 pole and bracket cable should be measured per linear foot. The length depends on the mounting height of the luminaire, the length and type of bracket arm and the number of luminaires mounted on each pole. Two 1c #10 cables are required for the power to each of the luminaires and one 1c#10 cable is required for the ground to each of the luminaires.

:Power Conductors: A 12" to 14" cable surplus in each of the 1c#10 AWG pole and bracket cables is to be provided from the multiple tap connector to the line side of the fuse holder and from the load side of the fuseholder to the luminaire. Ground Conductor for Single Arm: A 12" to 14" cable surplus in the 1c#10 AWG ground cable is to be provided from the multiple tap connector to the load side of the un-fused fuseholder and from the line side of the un-fused fuseholder to the ground lug at the base of the pole. An additional 24" of surplus cable shall be provided between the ground lug at the base of the pole and the luminaire. Ground Conductor for Dual Arms: A 12" to 14" cable surplus in the 1c#10 AWG ground cable is to be provided from the multiple tap connector to the load side of the un-fused fuseholder and from the line side of the un-fused fuseholder to the ground lug at the base of the pole. An additional 24" of surplus in each ground cable shall be provided between the ground lug at the base of the pole and each luminaire.

====      1c #10 Pole and Bracket Cable (Poles with Single Luminaire): ====
:The total length for the power cables varies depending on the pole series and the bracket arm length. The total length has to be multiplied by two since there are two wires. In the following table “AL” stands for the arm length. Additional cable also has to be added for the ground cable that attaches between the ground lug in the pole and the ground terminal in the luminaire. Each luminaire will have three wires running to it from the base of the pole.

:{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
! colspan="5" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 Pole and Bracket Cable for Poles with Single Luminaire
|-
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Mounting Height
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Pole Series
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 (Power)
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 (Ground)
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 (Total)
|-
| align="center"|15'
| align="center"|OP14
| align="center"|30.7'
| align="center"|17.3'
| align="center"|48'
|-
| align="center"|30'
| align="center"|OP301
| align="center"|56.7' + (2 x AL)
| align="center"|30.8' + AL
| align="center"|87.5' + (3 x AL)
|-
| align="center"|30'
| align="center"|OP302
| align="center"|56' + (2 x AL)
| align="center"|30' + AL
| align="center"|86' + (3 x AL)
|-
| align="center"|40'
| align="center"|OP401
| align="center"|77.7' + (2 x AL)
| align="center"|40.8' + AL
| align="center"|118.5' + (3 x AL)
|-
| align="center"|40'
| align="center"|OP402
| align="center"|76' + (2 x AL)
| align="center"|40' + AL
| align="center"|116' + (3 x AL)
|}

====      1c #10 Pole and Bracket Cable (Poles with Twin Luminaires): ====
:The total length for the power cables varies depending on the pole series and the bracket arm length. The total length has to be multiplied by four since there are two wires required for each luminaire. In the following table “AL” stands for the arm length. The equations have been set up to accommodate whether both arm lengths are the same or if there are different arm lengths on the same pole. Additional cable also has to be added for the ground cables that attach between the ground lug in the pole and the ground terminal in each luminaire. Each luminaire will have three wires running to it from the base of the pole. (See the Electrical Connector Details, in the Standard Details)

:{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
! colspan="5" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 Pole and Bracket Cable for Poles with Twin Luminaires
|-
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Mounting Height
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Pole Series
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 (Power)
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 (Ground)
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 (Total)
|-
| align="center"|30'
| align="center"|OP303
| align="center"|115.3' + (2 x AL) + (2 x AL)
| align="center"|59.3' + AL + AL
| align="center"|174.6' + (3 x AL) + (3 x AL)
|-
| align="center"|40'
| align="center"|OP401
| align="center"|155.3' + (2 x AL) + (2 x AL)
| align="center"|79.3' + AL + AL
| align="center"|234.6' + (3 x AL) + (3 x AL)
|-
| align="center"|40'
| align="center"|OP403
| align="center"|152' + (2 x AL) + (2 x AL)
| align="center"|77.7' + AL + AL
| align="center"|229.7' + (3 x AL) + (3 x AL)
|-
|}

====      Electrical Service Power Cable: ====
:The measurement for electrical service power cable should be per linear foot for the bundle of cable consisting of three wires. Cable should be measured from the center of the streetlight control center to the center of the power source. The length of spare cable at the power source depends on whether the power source is a transformer mounted on a wood pole or a ground mounted sectionalizer. Additional cable quantities are added to account for sweeps, to provide slack and to make connections. The additional length is computed as follows:

:*Add 5’ of slack at the streetlight control center mounted on a flush mounted concrete base.
:*Add 42’ of slack at the base of the wood power pole, if the cable runs from the streetlight control center to a transformer on a wood pole.
:*Add 5' of slack at the pad mounted transformer or pedestal, if the cable runs from the streetlight control center to a ground mounted transformer or pedestal.

:Example 1: If the center to center distance between the streetlight control center and the wood power pole is 180’, the cable length required is 180’ + 5’+ 42’ = 227’

:Example 2: If the center to center distance between the streetlight control center and the ground mounted sectionalizer is 100’, the cable length required is 100’ + 5’ + 5‘ = 110‘

====      1c #6 Solid Copper Ground Cable: ====
:The measurement for 1c #6 solid copper ground cable should be measured per linear foot. The required cable length at any streetlighting control center or concrete pole foundation should be 5’.

=== Electrical Connectors: ===
Electrical connectors include breakaway non-fused connector kits, breakaway fused connector kits, fuses, and multi-tap streetlight connectors. The quantity at each pole depends on whether there are one or two luminaires on each pole. Quantities should be added at each existing pole where a new circuit is being tied into an existing circuit. The number of each type of electrical connector will be measured as follows:

====      One Luminaire per Pole: ====
:*Three multi-tap electrical connectors are required
:*Two breakaway fused connector kits are required
:*Two 8 amp fuses are required
:*One breakaway non-fused connectors with ground “slug” is required

====      Two Luminaires per Pole: ====
:*Three multi-tap electrical connectors are required
:*Four breakaway fused connector kits are required
:*Four 8 amp fuses are required
:*One breakaway non-fused connectors with ground “slug” is required

=== Breakaway Pole Devices: ===
The measurement for breakaway pole devices should be per each for each breakaway frangible base or per set for a set of four breakaway couplings for every streetlight pole with a 30’ or 40’ mounting height.
Breakaway pole devices are not required for 14’ poles or if a pole is mounted on a raised concrete pedestal or bridge rail.

=== Cable Retainer Devices: ===
The measurement for cable retainer devices should be per each for each pole foundation type for every streetlight pole with a 14', 30’ or 40’ mounting height. Some screw-in foundations have the cable retainer device integral with the foundation. For purposes of pulling quantities, assume that the cable retainer device is a separate component.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Computation of Quantities:|'''Computation of Quantities:''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Computation of Quantities:]]
|}
----

File:Evergy Clearance Packet 2026 Selected Sheets.pdf

2026-06-29T14:56:46Z

Brian Geiger: File uploaded with MsUpload

File uploaded with MsUpload

Phase II - Preliminary Design

2026-06-05T19:16:51Z

Brian Geiger: /* Task No. 26 - Coordinate Electrical Service for Traffic Signals, Street Lighting and other City Facilities */ Added Evergy's Online Account Request Form link

{{Navbar}}
== Introduction ==
{{Introduction
|Phase II begins the engineering design and plan preparation process for a project. The date for beginning this process will depend upon the approved project schedule, budget and time anticipated to complete the various phases/tasks.

The project team will play an important decision-making role in managing a project. This team will consist of City staff and private consultants (if applicable).

Intra-department, public involvement, and utility company meetings are commenced during this phase.

Field check plans are prepared, distributed and reviewed along with preliminary construction cost estimates. Also, R/W and easement documents are completed and, if required, appraisers are hired.
}}

== [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II Checklist|Phase II Checklist]] ==


== Task No. 1 - Identify Project Team ==
{{Top}}

When a project is scheduled to begin the design phase, the Project Team is to be identified by the City Engineer and/or the City Traffic Engineer, depending on the scope of the project. The purpose of this team is to provide input, information, support, and execution throughout the project planning, design, and construction. The Project Team will generally include the following members: Project Manager, Traffic Engineer, Construction Inspector, Traffic Maintenance Technician, Maintenance Representative, Engineering Technician, Contract Specialist, Law Department Representative, and Finance Representative.

== Task No. 2 - Decide if City Staff to Design ==
{{Top}}

The City Engineer and/or the City Traffic Engineer in consultation with the Project Team will decide whether the project will be designed by the City Staff or by a Consulting Engineer.

== Task No. 3 - Consultant Selection/Certification ==
{{top}}

The City shall select and negotiate with a consultant for project design in accordance with the '''[https://codes.opkansas.org/governing-body-policies/doc-viewer.aspx?secid=464&keywords=4550%2Cnn4550#secid-464 City Resolution No. 5007]''' if the design is funded solely with local funds. If federal or state funds are used for the design, the City will use an approved list of consultants furnished by the BLP and will follow the current BLP Consultant Selection Procedures. If the City intends to use federal funds in the construction engineering, and use the same consultant for both preliminary engineering (PE) and construction engineering (CE), following the current BLP Consultant Selection Procedure for the PE will satisfy the requirements for the CE selection.

Prior to the beginning of the selection process, Project Manager shall notify via email DPW and CE of upcoming RFQ for consulting services. The project name, list of firms to receive the RFQ and any other pertinent information will be provided.

For more information see Chapter [[Media:3.0 PE Consultant Selection and Agreement 2024.pdf|'''3.0 Preliminary Engineering (PE) Consultant Selection and Agreement''']] and Chapter [[Media:11.0 CE Consultant Selection and Agreement 2024.pdf|'''11.0 Construction Engineering (CE) Consultant Selection and Agreement''']] of KDOT's LPA Project Development Manual.

When federal funds are used in the preliminary engineering, the City will provide KDOT a certification that appropriate steps have been completed and the process complied with all applicable regulations. Any work done prior to obligation of federal funds will be non-participating.

{{Note|''This Manual will be provided to the Consultant during the negotiating process. When negotiating an agreement with a consulting firm a narrative of services and a fee schedule is required (examples below'').}}

{{Exhibit|II-3a Engineering Architectural Services Agreement rev 5-29-24.docx|No. II-3a|City’s standard Engineering / Architectural services agreement for design projects.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3b(1) Supplemental to Engineering Architectural Services - 1-14-20.docx|No. II-3b(1)|City’s standard Supplemental Agreement for Professional Engineering Services. (First)}}

{{Exhibit|II-3b(2) Supplemental to Eng Arch Services-second and beyond 1-14-20.docx|No. II-3b(2)|City’s standard Supplemental Agreement for Professional Engineering Services. (Second and beyond)}}

{{Exhibit|II-3c Consultant Agreement-non design rev 5-16-24.docx|No. II-3c|City’s standard Consultant Agreement for non-design projects.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3d Supplemental to Consulting Services 1-14-20.docx|No. II-3d|City’s standard Supplemental Agreement to the Consultant Agreement for non-design projects.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3e.dot|No. II-3e| is a sample of City’s standard Scope of Services.}}
:(When writing contracts for projects involving bridge construction, refer to Chapter [[media:6.0_Bridge_Design_2024.pdf|'''6.0 Bridge Design''']] of KDOT's LPA Project Development Manual).

{{Exhibit|II-3e(1) Proposed Scope Streetlight 11.24.25.docx|No. II-3e(1)|City’s standard Scope of Services for a Street Lighting project.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3e(2) Proposed Scope Signal 11.14.25.docx|No. II-3e(2)|City’s standard Scope of Services for a Traffic Signal project.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3f.xlt|No. II-3f|City’s standard fee schedule for engineering services agreement.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3g_RFQ_Packet_for_Consulting_Serices_12.2024.pdf|No. II-3g|is a sample RFQ packet for consulting services.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3h_Sample_Ranking_Memo_to_Consultant_Selection_Committee.pdf|No. II-3h|is a sample Ranking Memo to Consultant Selection Committee.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3i.xlt|No. II-3i|is a sample Ranking Sheet to be completed by the Consultant Selection Committee.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3j.dot|No. II-3j|is a sample Interview Memo to Consultant Selection Committee.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3k.xlt|No. II-3k|is a sample of a compiled Ranking Sheet.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3l_Sample_letter_requesting_Interview_5.20.2024.pdf|No. II-3l|is a sample letter requesting interview of short list Consulting Firms.}}

The selection committee shall meet after ranking sheets are completed and any interviews (if applicable) have been held. This meeting is to ensure consensus of the selection committee. Approval to proceed with scope & fee negotiations must be obtained from the DPW prior to letters being sent to consultants.

{{Exhibit|II-3m_Sample_Selected_Consultant_Letter.pdf|No. II-3m|is a sample letter to selected Consulting Firm.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3n_Sample_Not_Selected_Consultant_Letter.pdf|No. II-3n|is a sample letter to Consulting Firms not selected.}}

{{Exhibit|II-3o_CONSULTING_FIRMS_5.22.2026.docx|No. II-3o|is a list of Consulting Firms.}}

== Task No. 4 - Submit Project Description to Law Department. Execute Ordinances-Resolution. ==
{{Top}}

The physical location of the project and a description of what is to be constructed is to be submitted to the Law Department. A feasibility report shall include the physical location of the project, a description of what is to be constructed, a cost estimate, and other necessary information required by the Law Department. The description project centerline shall include the permanent improvements (not tapers for street projects).

An example of a project description is as follows:

:'''''The construction of Switzer Road from north of the centerline of 159th Street to south of the centerline of 151st Street. Construction will include a dual roadway with a median. Left turn lanes will be located at side streets as required. Concrete sidewalks will be located on the west side of Switzer Road. An asphalt bike and pedestrian trail will be located on the east side of Switzer Road. The project also includes construction of storm sewers, street lights, restoration, and other items incidental to the street construction.'''''
''
The Project Manager, in conjunction with the Law Department, will determine if all necessary City ordinances or resolutions have been executed in order to authorize the project. Examples of possible documents are:

{{Exhibit|II-4a.dot|No. II-4a| Resolution on advisability of the creation of an Improvement District,}}
{{Exhibit|II-4b.dot|No. II-4b| Resolution authorizing and providing for the creation of an Improvement District,}}
:[[Media:CO 2-20-2017 Ordinance MTI-3159 (TH-1665) Publication.pdf|'''Exhibit No. II-4c''']] ''Ordinance providing for the public improvement of a Main Trafficway''.

== Task No. 5 - Prepare Project Schedule ==
{{Top}}

If a Consultant is to be hired, the anticipated construction time period shall be provided. The Consultant shall submit a schedule, indicating the design phases, R/W / easement submittal, meetings, bid opening date and construction time period. If the City Staff is designing the project, a similar schedule shall be prepared by the City Project Manager.

== Task No. 6 - Submit Cash Flow Projections (Engineering Cost) ==
{{Top}}

When requested, a cash flow projection for engineering services shall be submitted to the City Finance Department.

:[[Media:Cash Flow TH-1027 6-2019 Rome.xlsx|'''Exhibit II-6''']] ''is the standard cash flow form.''

== Task No. 7 - Initiate Utility Coordination. Schedule Utility Meeting (optional) ==
{{Top}}

Early in the preliminary design phase, the Project Manager will contact all public and private utility officials, informing them of the upcoming project (project limits and schedule) and requesting the information on their facilities (location maps, existing utility easements and any other pertinent information) in the vicinity.

{{Exhibit|II-7 email to utility companies links.docx|No. II-7|is a sample email (initial contact) to the utilities.}}
:([[media:Project location map for utilities.pdf|'''Project Location Map''']] and [[media:Utility Response Form.pdf|'''Utility Response Forms''']] should be attached to the email).

If the Project Manager chooses to hold a meeting, an agenda should be prepared and distributed in advance of the meeting to all scheduled attendees.

The typical agenda items are as follows:

*utility location maps/information;
*existing utility easements;
*project schedule;
*possible critical out-of-service time periods;
*utility representatives contact information.

Meeting minutes shall also be prepared following the meeting and distributed to all scheduled attendees, including those who were invited but did not attend.
{{Note|''When scheduling utility meeting in Google calendar, in order to avoid conflicts with other utility meetings, CH-PW Utilities (found under Rooms tab) shall be "invited" as an attendee to all meetings, pre-bid conferences and pre-construction conferences or any meetings that require utility company attendance''.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7.docx|No. II-7a|is a list of utility companies.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7b utility info request.pdf|No. II-7b|is a sample request for utility plans and easement documents.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7c Utility Meeting Request.pdf|No. II-7c|is a sample invitation letter for Utility Coordination Meeting.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7d utility meeting agenda.pdf|No. II-7d|sample agenda for Utility Coordination Meeting.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7e Sign in sheet.docx|No. II-7e|meeting sign in sheet.}}

{{Exhibit|II-7f Utility Meeting Minutes.pdf|No. II-7f|sample of utility coordination meeting minutes.}}

'''Johnson County Wastewater'''

{{Exhibit|II-7g.pdf|No. II-7g|Right-Of-Way Agreement}}

{{Exhibit|II-7h.pdf|No. II-7h|Right-Of-Way Agreement, Reference Sheet}}

{{Exhibit|II-7i.pdf|No. II-7i|Right-Of-Way Agreement, Project Checklist}}

:[[Media:MS1273 Invoice Packet.pdf|'''Exhibit No. II-7j''']] ''Payment invoice to JCW for reimbursement of relocation costs.''

'''Water District No.1 of Johnson County'''

{{Exhibit|II-7k.pdf|No. II-7k|Right-Of -Way Agreement}}

'''Transmission Pipe Line'''

{{Exhibit|II-7l.pdf|No. II-7l| is a sample of Encroachment Guidelines.}}

'''Evergy'''

{{Exhibit|II-7m KCP&L Contacts.xlsx|No. II-7m|Governmental Relocation Contact List}}

{{Exhibit|II-7n.pdf|No. II-7n|Service Territory Map}}

For Verizon inquiries see Memorandum [[Media:Verizon Inquiries.pdf|'''Request for OSP facility records''']].

Refer to the City's [[Media:Utility Relocation Guidelines.pdf|'''Utility Relocation Guidelines''']] for all relocation planning.

Refer to '''[https://drive.google.com/file/d/18FRkK-M55tHmO86mZW5fljqVTgmynk4Y/view Manual of Infrastructure Standards]''' for excavation and safety requirements.

For federally funded projects refer to Chapter [[Media:8.0 Status of Utilities 2020.pdf|'''8.0 Status of Utilities''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual''' for additional information.

== Task No. 8 - Pre-Design Meeting ==
{{Top}}

A pre-design meeting shall be scheduled prior to commencing any significant design work. A meeting agenda shall be prepared and distributed in advance of the meeting to the scheduled attendees. Meeting minutes shall be prepared and distributed to all attendees. The purpose of this meeting is to discuss varies anticipated design issues:

*specific limits of improvements;
*median openings and left/right turn storage lengths;
*utility conflicts; [[1304 - Status of Utilities.pdf]]
{{Note|''All utilities within construction limits will be shown on the 1304 Form.|1304 - Status of Utilities.pdf}}
*detailed schedule;
*design criteria as described in [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 9 - Design Criteria| '''Phase II, Task No. 9''']];
*necessary permits, such as
::[https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/permits-licenses-inspections-directory/'''Land Disturbance Permit'''];
::'''[https://www.kdhe.ks.gov/DocumentCenter/View/6311/Notice-of-Intent---Construction-Activities-PDF KDHE Stormwater NOI]''';
::[https://www.epa.gov/cwa-404/permit-program-under-cwa-section-404 Corps of Engineers '''404 Permit'''];
::'''[https://www.agriculture.ks.gov/divisions-programs/division-of-water-resources/water-structures/stream-and-floodplain-permits Kansas DWR]''';
::[https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/permits-licenses-inspections-directory/'''Floodplain Development Permit'''];
*detours/street closings;
*project phasing/traffic control;
*identify equipment or material on critical path (see note below);
*distribute City's Standard Bid Items to be used during design;
*coordinate with Engineering Services for development projects permitted in the area.

{{Note|''It may be necessary to purchase equipment or material in advance of actual project letting date. Generally this will involve separate purchasing contracts for signal poles, LED's, signal cabinets, controllers and load switches. Items on the critical path that could delay the project completion date should be identified and the need for separate purchasing contracts discussed. The BLP project manager should also be included in discussions to make sure federal/state requirements are met for the pre-purchased items''.}}

== Task No. 9 - Design Criteria ==
{{Top}}

:Project design shall be in accordance with accepted engineering practices and all applicable state, AASHTO and federal Criteria. These criteria include, but not limited to the following references:

*'''Public and Private Streets'''

::Current edition of AASHTO's [https://store.transportation.org'''A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets''' 2018, 7th Edition] (Green Book). (See ''K:\Library\References\AASHTO'')
::Current edition of KDOT's [https://www.ksdot.gov/doing-business/highway-contractors/contractor-resources/specifications-for-state-road-and-bridge-construction '''Standard Specifications for State Road and Bridge Construction'''.]
::Current edition of KDOT's [[Media:2020 LPA Manual.pdf|'''LPA Project Development Manual''']].
::Current City of Overland Park [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-1 '''Municipal Code'''.]
:::[http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-3613 '''Chapter 13.10''' Public Street, Streetlighting and Sidewalk Requirements]
:::[http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-3641 '''Chapter 13.12''' Construction on Rights-of-Way.]
:::[http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-4036 '''Chapter 15.10''' Stormwater Management Program - Standards and Permitting]
::Current City of Overland Park Design and Construction Standards [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 1 - as Posted to website 06.11.2021.pdf|'''Volume 1 Design Criteria''']] and [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 2 - Specifications as posted to website 06.15.2021.pdf|'''Volume 2 Construction Specifications''']]
*'''Stormwater Conveyance and Treatment Facilities'''
:Current City of Overland Park Design and Construction Standards [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 1 - as Posted to website 06.11.2021.pdf|'''Volume 1 Design Criteria''']] and [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 2 - Specifications as posted to website 06.15.2021.pdf|'''Volume 2 Construction Specifications''']] as a supplement to '''[https://kcmetro.apwa.org/resources/specifications/ APWA Section 5600]'''.
*'''Erosion and Sediment Control'''
:Current City of Overland Park Design and Construction Standards [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 1 - as Posted to website 06.11.2021.pdf|'''Volume 1 Design Criteria''']] and [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 2 - Specifications as posted to website 06.15.2021.pdf|'''Volume 2 Construction Specifications''']] as a supplement to '''[https://kcmetro.apwa.org/resources/specifications/ APWA Section 5100]'''.
*'''Traffic Signals'''
:Traffic signals shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of the '''[https://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno_11th_Edition.htm Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices]'''. Traffic signal mast arm poles shall be designed in accordance with the [http://www.tsp2.org/2013/05/29/aashto-releases-new-specifications-for-structural-supports-for-highway-signs-luminaries-and-traffic-signals/ '''2013 AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals, Sixth Edition, LTS-6'''].
*'''Permanent Traffic Control Signs'''
:Permanent traffic control signs shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of the '''[https://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno_11th_Edition.htm Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices]''' and the City's [http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Traffic_Sign_Design_Guidelines '''Traffic Sign Design Manual'''].
*'''Pavement Markings'''
:Pavement markings shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of the '''[https://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno_11th_Edition.htm Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices]''' and the City's [http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Pavement_Marking_Design_Manual#top '''Pavement Marking Design Manual'''].
*'''Streetlights'''
:Streetlights shall be designed in accordance with [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks-gbp/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-198 '''Resolution No. 4036'''] and the City's [http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Streetlight_Design_Manual '''Streetlighting Design Manual'''].

:Current City of Overland Park Design and Construction Standards [[Media:2021 Design Criteria Volume 1 - as Posted to website 06.11.2021.pdf|'''Volume 1 Design Criteria''']]. Refer to Part F for the design criteria for all streetlighting projects.
*'''Traffic Control'''
:Work Zone Traffic Control shall be designed in accordance with the City’s [[Media:Traffic-Control-Handbook-July-2016.pdf| '''Traffic Control Handbook''']].
*'''Bridges'''
:City of Overland Park Bridge Design Information
{{Exhibit2|II-9a.docx|No. II-9a|is a list of bridge design information.}}
{{Exhibit2|2018 Bridge Inventory SOP.pdf|No. II-9b|is Public Works Department Bridge Asset Inventory Procedure (February 2018).}}
:Also see
::Chapter [[Media:6.0 Bridge Design 2020.pdf|'''6.0 Bridge Design''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual'''
::[https://kart.ksdot.org '''LRFD Bridge Design Manual, Volume III'''], KDOT, current edition. (See ''K:\Library\References\KDOT Design Manual\KDOT Bridge Design Manual December 2021.pdf'')
::[https://store.transportation.org '''LRFD Bridge Design Specifications'''], AASHTO, current edition

*'''Johnson County Wastewater'''
{{Exhibit2|II-9c.pdf|No. II-9c|Designers Checklist for City Streets and Stormwater Improvements.}}
{{Exhibit2|II-9d.pdf|No. II-9d|Memo from JCW on existing brick manholes with new cone sections.}}
:For city street or stormwater improvement projects that require sanitary sewer relocation or extension, full sanitary sewer design plans per JCW plan requirements and specifications must be approved by JCW. See below for requirements.

::'''[https://www.jocogov.org/department/wastewater/developers-engineers-contractors/privately-financed-sewer-main-development Procedures for Privately Financed Gravity Sewer Main Projects]'''
::'''[https://www.jocogov.org/department/wastewater/developers-engineers-contractors/regulations Minimum Plan Requirements for Gravity Sewer Main Projects]'''

::'''[https://www.jocogov.org/department/wastewater/developers-engineers-contractors/regulations Construction and Material Specifications for Sanitary Sewers]'''

::'''[https://www.jocogov.org/department/wastewater/developers-engineers-contractors/standard-details Sanitary Sewer Standard Details]'''.
:For the status of sanitary sewer plan submittals and projects see Johnson County Wastewater [https://www.jocogov.org/dept/wastewater/development-and-permitting/permitting/commercial '''Commercial Permitting'''] page.
:Also see [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 7 - Initiate Utility Coordination. Schedule Utility Meeting (optional)| '''Phase II, Task No. 7''']] for Right-Of-Way agreement between JCW and City of Overland Park.
*'''Current Johnson County Stormwater Management Program Policy and Procedures'''
::See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase I - Vision#Task 3 - Prepare SMAC Project Addition Study .28Form.29|'''Phase I, Task No. 3''']]
*'''Additional Design Guidance for Reference:
::[https://store.transportation.org '''"Roadside Design Guide"'''], AASHTO, current edition;
::[http://www.trb.org/Main/Blurbs/175169.aspx '''"Highway Capacity Manual"'''](HCM), current edition;
::[https://store.transportation.org/search?q=guide%20for%20the%20development%20of%20bicycle%20facilities&categoryCode=&index=storeitem&type=All&pageNum=1&pageSize=10&sortBy=Relevance&itemType=All"'''Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities'''"], AASHTO, current edition. (See ''K:\Projects\Manual\AASHTO Guide for the Development of Bicycle Facilities 2012.pdf'').
::'''[https://www.access-board.gov/ada/ American with Disabilities Act (ADA) Guidelines and Standards]''', United States Access Board;
::'''[https://www.access-board.gov/prowag/ Proposed Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities in the Public Right-of-Way (PROWAG)]''', United States Access Board;
::[https://nacto.org/publication/urban-street-design-guide '''"Urban Street Design Guide"'''] NACTO, current edition;
::[https://nacto.org/wp-content/uploads/2013/10/Vega-BarachowitzDavid_DesigningCitiesPHX.pdf '''"Urban Bikeway Design Guide"'''] NACTO, current edition;
::'''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/5325/638736482029600000 "Kansas Roundabout Guide"]''' KDOT, current edition;
::'''[https://drive.google.com/file/d/1Kz3wEyc0K2AxxH3Bng4ZsNdkGrYnpxm2/view Greenway Linkages Plan for Overland Park]''';
::'''[https://www2.opkansas.org/City-Government/Agendas-and-Minutes/Community-Development/Agendas/2015/2015-03-04/DIS-4-2.pdf South Overland Park Transportation Plan]''';
::[https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/traffic-roads-transportation/bicycling/'''Overland Park Bicycle Master Plan'''];
::'''[https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/publications/research/safety/00067/00067.pdf FHA Roundabouts Informational Guide]'''.
*'''Design Exceptions:
:If, during the development of plans for proposed project, it is determined that there are circumstances that may make it impractical to meet the applicable guidelines, the Consultant/Project Manager shall fill out the following forms:

:Use [[Media:Design exceptions.docx|'''Design Exceptions''']] form to document all design exceptions and save it to the project preliminary design folder.

:Use [[Media:Design deviations.docx|'''Design Deviations''']] form to document design deviations, revisions to the standard design that do not adversely impact the design intent, and save to the project preliminary design folder.

: See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 18 - Submit Request for Design Exception to KDOT| '''Phase II, Task No. 18''']] for design exceptions on federally funded projects.

== Task No. 10 - Standard Details ==
{{Top}}

The City's Public Works Department maintains and updates [https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/building-construction/civil-engineering/construction-standards/ '''Standard Details'''] for publicly funded projects under the direction of the City Engineer.
If Johnson County Wastewater facilities are involved in the project, '''[https://www.jocogov.org/department/wastewater/developers-engineers-contractors/standard-details Sanitary Sewer Standard Details]''' shall be incorporated into the plans.

Also, the following are typical thoroughfare sections to be used for the infrastructure improvements as recommended by '''[https://www2.opkansas.org/City-Government/Agendas-and-Minutes/Community-Development/Agendas/2015/2015-03-04/DIS-4-2.pdf South Overland Park Transportation Plan]''':

[[Media:Thoroughfare Ultimate 4- and 3-Lane Sections March-2022.pdf|'''Ultimate 4- and 3-Lane Thoroughfare Sections''']];

[[Media:Thoroughfare Ultimate 2-Lane Sections March-2022.pdf|'''Ultimate 2-Lane Thoroughfare Sections''']];

[[Media:Thoroughfare Interim Sections March-2022.pdf|'''Interim Thoroughfare Sections''']].

== Task No. 11 - SMAC Preliminary Study ==
{{Top}}

For SMAC funded projects a preliminary study should be prepared and delivered to Johnson County SMAC officials prior to beginning any design work.

See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase I - Vision#Task 3 - Prepare SMAC Project Addition Study .28Form.29|'''Phase I, Task No. 3''']] for details and checklist for preparing this study.

== Task No. 12 - Other Agency Agreements (if Applicable) ==
{{Top}}

Local government agency agreements should be executed under [[index.php/Index.php/Phase I - Vision#Task 11 - Execute Other Agency Agreements|'''Phase I, Task No. 11''']]. If these agreements were not executed prior to beginning of design, execution shall be completed at this time in the preliminary design phase.

== Task No. 13 - Conduct Field Surveys ==
{{Top}}

Sufficient and required data necessary for design purposes shall be collected. The field survey shall be in accordance with state statutes, and current accepted and required surveying practices. Prior to the beginning of land survey or utility relocation work the letter to the residences adjacent to the project will be mailed out informing property owners of upcoming activities. Included with the letter is flood questionnaire to be used for storm drainage improvements consideration.
:'''[[Media:II-15f Survey Notice Template.docx|Exhibit No. II-13a]]''' ''is a sample pre-survey letter to residents''.
:[[Media:Flooding Questionnaire Template.doc|'''Exhibit No. II-13b''']] ''is a flood questionnaire''.

See City standard Scope of Services in '''[https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Phase_II_-_Preliminary_Design#Task_No._3_-_Consultant_Selection/Certification Phase II, Task 3]'''

for survey control requirements.

{{Note| Any Johnson County Vertical Control Network Bench Marks that will be disturbed as part of the project must be reset. The standard specification and a bid item for this work must be included in the contract documents. These benchmark locations can be found on Johnson County [https://maps.jocogov.org/ims/'''AIMS Mapping'''] web page under the Utilities layer.}}

== '''Task No. 14 - Continue Environmental Process''' ==
{{Top}}

Once authorization for the project is completed, KDOT will complete an initial review of the project location and scope to determine the degree of analyses that is required in order to comply with State and Federal environmental laws and regulations.

The BLP will receive from the City the Form '''[https://www.ksdot.gov/Home/Components/StaffDirectory/StaffDirectory/424/358?widgetId=2831 1307]''', along with all applicable permits attached, prior to obligation of funds, to comply with the NEPA process. (See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase III - Final Design#Task No. 14 - Submit PS&E Package|'''Phase III, Task No. 14''']]).
If detailed environmental analyses are required, the investigation will be initiated at this time. Final and complete analyses and application for permits by the City may be completed after Field Check and detailed design information is available. All investigation and permit acquisitions will be conducted in accordance with the referenced manual and BLP Policy Memos.

KDOT will control the environmental process task for projects with categorical exclusion. The complexity and effort will depend on each project. The exception would be if an Environmental Assessment or an Environmental Impact Statement is required. In this case, the City or Consultant would perform this task with KDOT and FHWA approval.

{{Note|''For KDOT Projects this task is tracked by KDOT. ''The Project Engineer shall ensure this task is complete''.}}

For more information see Chapter [[Media:4.0 Environmental 2020.pdf|'''4.0 Environmental''']] of KDOT's LPA Project Development Manual.

== Task No. 15 - Schedule First Public Information Meeting ==
{{Top}}

The first public information meeting is scheduled by the Consultant/Project Manager. This meeting shall occur during preliminary design and after field surveys. The purpose of this meeting is to present the concept plan, project schedule, hear citizen's concerns, answer questions, discuss design issues and introduce the involved City Officials and Consultant employees. For KDOT projects the Notice of Public Information Meeting must be published in the '''[https://sos.ks.gov/publications/kansas-register.html Kansas Register]''' and [http://www.thelegalrecord.net '''The Legal Record'''].

Public information invites shall be sent to the following interested parties:
*Subdivisions adjacent to the project
*Home Owners Associations adjacent to the project. Contact the City Manager's office for a current list of HOA contacts.
*Group Chairperson for [https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/neighborhoods/neighborhood-conservation-program/ '''Neighborhood Conservation Groups'''] adjacent to the project.
::''For the phone number of the group chairperson, contact the Neighborhood Planner at 913/895-6270.''

*Council Members of [https://www.opkansas.org/city-government/city-council/ '''Ward'''(s)] adjacent to the project
*City Manager
*City Communications Manager and Communications Assistant
*Funding Sources (KDOT, CARS, SMAC, etc.)
*Other City (Olathe, Leawood, etc.)
*Public Works Management (PWMG)
*Supervisory Engineer
*Construction Inspector
*Consulting Firm
*Facilities Management (if meeting is being held at a City facility)
* If deemed necessary, Project Manager can invite police personnel.

The Property Owner Conversation Log should be used throughout the project to document all conversations with property owners.

{{Note|''This and all subsequent Public Information Meeting notices should ask if participants need a language interpreter or a hearing assistance device and a phone number. All meeting rooms shall be ADA accessible.'' The KDOT '''Equal Opportunity and Civil Rights Information''' brochure in [[Media:Title VI Brochure English.pdf|'''English''']] and [[Media:Title VI Brochure Spanish.pdf|'''Spanish''']] is to be made available at all public meetings.}}

{{Exhibit|II-15a_First Public Information Meeting - In Person.docx|No. II-15a|is an example Invitation Letter to property owners.}}
{{Exhibit|II-15b_First Public Information Meeting - Virtual.docx|No. II-15b|is an example Invitation Letter to property owners for a virtual meeting.}}
{{Exhibit|II-15c_Public Meeting Sign-In Sheet_.docx|No. II-15c|is a public meeting sign in sheet.}}
{{Exhibit|II-15d_Citizen Comment Form Example.doc|No. II-15d|is an example Public Meeting Citizen Comment Form.}}
{{Exhibit|II-15e_sample public meeting flyer.pdf|No. II-15e|is an example Public Meeting Handout.}}{{Exhibit|II-15f_Survey Notice Template.docx|No. II-15f|is an example of a notice of survey.}}

For those who wish to use a Blue Valley School District facility for the public meeting, an on-line [https://www.bluevalleyk12.org/Page/34388 '''Facility Rental Reservation Request'''] is available. Once the request is submitted, the BVSD Facility Scheduling Office will send a confirmation if the requested space is available.

== Task No. 16 - Begin Title Report Process ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant and/or the Project Manager shall prepare an RFP and forward to a minimum of three land title firms. The RFP should include a map or plan indicating the location of the project and the number of tracts of land involved. Proposals will be forwarded to the Project Manager whereby a firm will be selected and an agreement executed. The RFP should request the following information:
*legal description of the property and copy of recorded deed(s),
*mailing address of the property owner,
*all lien holders of record and recorded mortgage(s),
*all easements of record and copy of recorded document(s),
*dedicated R/W and copy of recorded document(s), and
*records of previous condemnations (available in the office of the District Court of Johnson County Kansas, Olathe, Kansas).

In addition, the RFP should provide instructions on methods of delivery of the title report acceptable to the City. Finally the RFP will establish a date for completing the title certification and report.

{{Exhibit|II-16a.xlt|No. II-16a|is a list of land title companies to be considered in RFP requests.}}
{{Exhibit|II-16b.dot|No. II-16b|is a sample land title RFP letter.}}
{{Exhibit|II-16c.pdf|No. II-16c|is a sample location map with parcel numbers.}}
{{Exhibit|II-16d.dot|No. II-16d|is a sample letter to selected land title company.}}
{{Exhibit|II-16e.dot|No. II-16e|is a sample letter to land title companies not selected.}}

== Task No. 17 - Begin Geotechnical Report Process ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Engineer shall determine what appropriate geotechnical information and data is necessary to adequately design the project. Drilled shaft foundations for bridges require specialized inspection. If drilled shaft foundations are anticipated and the Consultant cannot perform this work, the service of a subconsultant may be utilized after receiving written approval from the City. For projects designed by City Staff an RFP shall be prepared and forwarded to qualified firms.

Refer to [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 3 - Consultant Selection/Certification| '''Phase II, Task No. 3''']] for information on consultant selection process.

{{Exhibit|IV-2a.docx|No. IV-2a|is a list of materials testing / geotechnical service companies.}}

For projects involving bridge construction, refer to Geotechnical Bridge Foundation Investigation Practice, found in Chapter [[Media:6.0 Bridge Design 2020.pdf|'''6.0 Bridge Design''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual'''.

== '''Task No. 18 - Submit Request for Design Exception to KDOT''' ==
{{Top}}

If, during the development of plans for proposed federally funded projects, it is determined that there are circumstances that may make it impractical to meet the applicable guidelines, the Consultant/Project Manager shall submit in writing to the Bureau of Local Projects (KDOT) any request for project design exceptions, using a summary format like the form in [[Media:Design Exception Request Summary Form 2020.pdf|'''Figure 5.1''']] of the LPA Project Development Manual. A request for a design exception may be made at any time in the design process when sufficient information is available to adequately evaluate the situation.

All design exceptions are subject to approval by the Bureau Chief of BLP. The request may involve one or more of the following controlling criteria: design speed, lane and shoulder width, bridge width, structural capacity, horizontal and vertical alignment, grades, stopping sight distance, cross slopes, superelevation, horizontal and vertical clearances. Justification for the request shall be included along with cost estimates for reasonable alternates. Supporting documents should be consistent with Section 2.3.4 of the KDOT Design Manual, Volume I, Bureau of Road Design.

(See '''KDOT Road Design Manual 2014.pdf''' in ''K:\Library\References\KDOT Design Manual'').

For design exceptions documentation, use Overland Park [[Media:Design exceptions.docx|'''Design Exceptions''']] form to be submitted in addition to the KDOT form.

For projects with other funding sources all requests for design exceptions shall be directed to the City Engineer.

Document all design exceptions regardless of funding on [[Media:Design exceptions.docx|'''Design Exceptions''']] form and save to the project preliminary design folder.

For more information see section 5.2.2.2 (Design Exception/Allowance) in Chapter [[Media:5.0 Plan Development 2020.pdf|'''5.0 Plan Development''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual'''.

For additional information regarding design exceptions on non-KDOT projects refer to [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 9 - Design Criteria| '''Phase II, Task No. 9''']] .

== Task No. 19 - Prepare Field Check Plans ==
{{Top}}

Plans should be approximately 50 percent complete for field check review including any proposed easement and R/W takings along with a preliminary construction cost estimate and updated project schedule/checklist. The plans shall be stamped "Preliminary—Field Check".

{{Exhibit|I-13b.xlt|No. I-13b|is RUPIS project schedule.}}

See [[Media:Blp-memo-03-12.pdf|'''BLP Memo 03-12 Engineer's Professional Seal and Signature on Plans.''']]

For Field Check Plans preparation and submittal requirements on federally funded projects refer to Chapter [[Media:5.0 Plan Development 2020.pdf|'''5.0 Plan Development''']] of KDOT's '''LPA Project Development Manual'''.

== Task No. 20 - Distribute Plans to Utility Companies. Schedule Utility Meeting. ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager will distribute field check plans to all utility company representatives and schedule the utility meeting. An agenda should accompany the meeting invite. Meeting minutes will be prepared following the meeting and distributed to all scheduled attendees.

{{Note|''When scheduling utility meeting in Google calendar, in order to avoid conflicts with other utility meetings, CH-PW Utilities (found under Rooms tab) shall be "invited" as an attendee to all meetings, pre-bid conferences and pre-construction conferences or any meetings that require utility company attendance''.}}

The purpose of the utility meeting is as follows:
*check accuracy of utility locations on plans,
*establish what utilities need to be relocated,
*See [[Media:KCP&L DWG 130.1-12.pdf|'''Evergy DWG 130.1-12''']] for clearance requirements from signal or streetlight poles to utility lines. Verify all poles have proper clearance.
*establish timetable for accomplishing the relocations, and
*re-confirm utility representative contacts.

See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 7 - Initiate Utility Coordination. Schedule Utility Meeting (optional)|'''Phase II, Task No. 7''']] for exhibits.

== Task No. 21 - Update Preliminary Cost Estimate ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager shall prepare and submit an updated preliminary construction cost estimate. The form for this estimate shall resemble the Bid form with the item description, unit, approximate quantity, unit price and total. KDOT-BLP should receive a copy of this estimate.

All cost estimates shall utilize the City's [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Bid_item_list '''Standard Bid Items'''] and correspond to the measurement and payment as shown in the [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=City_of_Overland_Park_Standard_Specifications_-_2020 '''City of Overland Park Standard Specifications'''].

== Task No. 22 - Update Preliminary Cash Flow Projection ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager shall prepare a preliminary cash flow projection, including construction costs, and submit it to the City Finance Department on the standard form.

See [[Media:Cash Flow TH-1027 6-2019 Rome.xlsx|'''Exhibit II-6''']].

== Task No. 23 - Distribute Plans for Field Check ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Engineer shall distribute field check plans along with a copy of the project cost estimate and updated RUPIS project schedule electronically via '''Bluebeam''' session to the following:
*all members of the Project Team (see [[Media:Maintenance Plan Review Process 2020.docx|'''Maintenance Plan Review Process''']] for Maintenance Division routing),
*City Engineer,
*City Traffic Engineer,

For KDOT projects the electronic field check plans shall be provided to the BLP for transmittal to the Environmental Services Section(KDOT), who will transmit plans to appropriate regulatory and resource agencies. Invitations to the regulatory and resource agencies to participate in the field check should be rendered if environmental mitigation is required. The Consultant/Project Engineer shall provide a project cost estimate to the BLP with the plans.

For the instructions on submitting E-Plans to BLP see the following:''

'''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/5601/638733200544670000 User Guide for Electronic Plans Review]''';
'''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/5595/638733200673170000 Specifications for Electronic Plans Submittal]''';
'''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/5211/638733041153400000 FTP Instructions]'''.

{{Note|''For KDOT Projects this task is tracked by KDOT. ''The Project Engineer shall ensure this task is complete''.}}

== Task No. 24 - Submit Required Permit Applications ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager shall determine what permits will be required in order to construct the project. The following is a list of possible permits required:

*City of Overland Park [https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/building-construction/buildings-construction-licenses-permits-inspections/ '''Floodplain Development Permit'''] - necessary for any work in a FEMA floodplain, including areas that will be FEMA floodplain once Johnson County Watershed studies are adopted.

{{Exhibit|II-24a.pdf|No. II-24a|is a memo of the steps to be taken on Public Works projects.}}

{{Exhibit|II-24c.pdf|No. II-24c|is FEMA's Procedures for "No Rise" Certifications.}}

*[[Media:Temp Erosion & Pollution Control for PW Projects .pdf|'''Temporary Erosion and Pollution Control for Public Works Projects''']] is a memo summarizing permit requirements and project team procedures for Public Works projects.

*When a project disturbs more than 1 (one) acre, a Notice of Intent (NOI) permit from Kansas Department of Health and Environment (KDHE) and a Land Disturbance Permit (LDP) from the City of Overland Park are required.
:The NOI permit is submitted during final design phase of the project. The permit submittal requires clearance letters for the project site from the following agencies:
::Kansas Department of Wildlife, Parks and Tourism for threatened or endangered species habitat. Contact KDWPT by emailing the environmental review request (see [[Media:II-24 KDWPT Notification Letter.pdf|'''example''')]] to ess@ksoutdoors.com.
::Kansas Historical Society for historical and archaeological sites. The information for the project should be submitted to the KSHS via the Kansas Review & Compliance (KSR&C) system. Go to [https://review.kshs.org/Account/Login '''http://review.kshs.org'''] to create an account or log in to an existing account.
:Refer to [[index.php/Index.php/Phase III - Final Design#Task No. 9 - Submit Final Check Plans for Review|'''Phase III, Task No.9''']] for the NOI application.
:The LDP is obtained prior to commencing construction activities. Refer to [[index.php/Index.php/Phase V - Construction#Task No. 8 - Complete Contractor Permits|'''Phase V, Task No.8''']] for the LDP application.

*Permit to Construct-Obstruction in streams from Kansas Department of Agriculture''' [https://www.agriculture.ks.gov/divisions-programs/division-of-water-resources/water-structures/stream-and-floodplain-permits Division of Water Resources]''' is necessary for any work on a stream with more than 240 acres tributary drainage (some exceptions).

:'''[https://www.agriculture.ks.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/2616/638461107218370000 Exhibit No. II-24d]''' ''is DWR application for permit for Obstruction in Streams.''

*State of Kansas - Environmental Coordination Act (ECA) - approval letters from various state agencies are typically required for Stream Obstructions permits and sometimes others. Contacting these agencies directly for their approval letter can accelerate permitting.

* Listing of contact information and addresses for the [https://www.agriculture.ks.gov/divisions-programs/division-of-water-resources/water-structures/environmental-coordination-act '''ECA agencies'''].

*'''[https://www.kdhe.ks.gov/DocumentCenter/View/41615/Plugging-Abandoned-Wells-Article-PDF?bidId= Plugging Packet]''' ''is a handout detailing KDHE's requirements for plugging abandoned water wells.''

*Corps of Engineers 404 Permit - necessary for any work located within a "water of the United States", including wetlands. '''http://www.usace.army.mil/Missions/CivilWorks/RegulatoryProgramandPermits.'''

:{{Exhibit|II-24f.pdf|No. II-24f|is a sample letter requesting a project be reviewed for nationwide permit coverage. (Visit [http://www.usace.army.mil/Missions/CivilWorks/RegulatoryProgramandPermits.aspx '''COE website'''] for latest forms and instructions if an individual permit is needed).}}

*FEMA Conditional and Final Letters of Map Revision - required for certain type of major work in the floodplain, as coordinated with the floodplain administrator (see City of OP Floodplain Development Permit, above). The latest permit forms and guidance can be obtained from [https://www.fema.gov/national-flood-insurance-program/national-flood-insurance-program-forms '''FEMA's website'''].

*KDOT Highway Permits - necessary for construction or utility relocation within KDOT Right of Way are done using the online [https://www.ksdot.gov/doing-business/permits/kdot-utility-permit-system-kups '''KUPS system''']:

::::'''''Highway Permit Use of Right of Way'''''

::::'''''Cased Utility Line Waiver'''''

::::'''''Highway Permit for Highway Access'''''

::::'''''Highway Permit Attachments to Bridges and Other Structures'''''

::::'''''Access Application Information Sheet'''''

:See [[Media:KDOT Forms Instructions.pdf|'''Preparation of Application for Highway Permit Agreements''']] for instructions on preparation of KDOT Forms 304, 308, 309 and 334.

See '''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/1305/638711379952670000 2007 KDOT Utility Accommodation Policy]''' for additional information.

All project related state and/or federal permits must be submitted and Form '''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/1579/638733210123230000 1307]''' completed prior to submittal of final check plans. (See [[Media:Blp-memo-10-08.pdf|'''BLP Memo 10-08''']]). This shall be completed at least four months prior to project letting.

== Task No. 25 - Begin Field Check Plan Review ==
The persons who receive field check plans (see [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 23 - Distribute Plans for Field Check|'''Task No. 23''']]) shall commence plan review. The review shall be completed prior to the scheduled Field Check meeting.

{{Note| Any Johnson County Vertical Control Network Bench Marks that will be disturbed as part of the project must be reset. The standard specification and a bid item for this work must be included in the contract documents. These benchmark locations can be found on Johnson County [https://maps.jocogov.org/ims/'''AIMS Mapping'''] web page under the Utilities layer.}}

== Task No. 26 - Coordinate Electrical Service for Traffic Signals, Street Lighting and other City Facilities==
If applicable, begin [[Media:II-26 Electrical Services Address Procedures.pdf|'''Electrical Service Address Procedures''']] for streetlighting controllers, traffic signal controllers, electrical control centers for park irrigation controllers, flood warning or road weather information systems.

As of mid-2025, Evergy only accepts Account Setup Forms via their [https://apps.evergy.com/ServiceWork ''' online form'''].

*See [[Media:II-26 KCPL Account Setup Form - Streetlighting.pdf|'''Evergy Account Setup Form - Streetlighting Control Center'''.]]

*See [[Media:II-26 KCPL Account Setup Form - Traffic Signal.pdf|'''Evergy Account Setup Form - Traffic Signal Control Center'''.]]

It is important that you specify the electrical service rate in the "Comments" section to insure the City of Overland Park will be billed the correct rate. The correct rate is listed in each of the applicable Service Applications.

*See [[Media:II-26 Sample Letter to KCP&L for Electrical Service.pdf|'''sample letter''']] to Evergy requesting power service.
*See [https://drive.google.com/file/d/1pnyJiaJjbc-fi6Havd9ib0yjcXmgIITr/view ''' City of Overland Park Tax Exempt Certificate''']
*See [[Media:Form ST-28b Statement for Sales Tax Exemption.pdf|'''Sales Tax Exemption Form ST-28B''']]

The Account Form, Overland Park Tax Exempt Certificate and the Sales Tax Exemption Form ST-28B is required to be submitted for each control center.

== Task No. 26a - Coordinate Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) Service for Traffic Signals ==
{{Top}}

If applicable, begin [[Media:Natural gas service address procedures.pdf|'''Natural Gas Service Address Procedures''']] for CNG generators.

*[[Media:Kansas city metro gas service area boundary map.pdf|Exhibit 1: '''Kansas City Metro Gas Service Area Boundary Map''']]

*[[Media:Atmos energy pre-approved contractors list.pdf|Exhibit 2: '''Atmos Energy Pre-Approved Contractors List''']]

*[[Media:Kansas Gas Service Line Application.docx|Exhibit 3: '''Kansas Gas Service Line Application (rev 01-01-14)''']]

*[[Media:Kansas Gas Cover Letter Sample.docx|Exhibit 4: '''Kansas Gas Cover Letter Sample''']]

*[[Media:Atmos Energy new meter set application.xlsx|Exhibit 5: '''Atmos Energy New Meter Set Application''']]

*[[Media:Atmos Energy Elevated Pressure Request Form.pdf|Exhibit 6: '''Atmos Energy Request for Elevated Pressure''']]

*[[Media:Atmos Energy Cover Letter Sample.docx|Exhibit 7: '''Atmos Energy Cover Letter Sample''']]

*[https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/building-construction/buildings-construction-licenses-permits-inspections/ Exhibit 8: '''Commercial Building Permit Application''']

== Task No. 26b - Coordinate Removal of Streetlights Purchased from Evergy ==
{{Top}}

If applicable, begin the [[Media:Removal of Existing Streetlight Procedure.pdf|'''Removal of Existing Streetlight Procedure''']] for streetlights that were purchased from Evergy (KCP&L).

*See [[Media:Letter to Black & McDonald requesting the removal of streetlights.pdf|'''sample letter to Black & McDonald''']] requesting proposals for removing streetlights.

*See [[Media:Proposal to remove streetlights from Black & McDonald.pdf|'''sample streetlight removal proposal''']] from Black & McDonald.

== Task No. 27 - Schedule Field Check Meeting ==
{{Top}}

The Project Manager shall schedule the Field Check meeting. Representatives of all funding sources are to be invited. The City Engineer/City Traffic Engineer or their designated representatives will attend all meetings. Prior to Field Check Meeting, coordinate with Engineering Services for development projects permitted in the area.

:[[Media:II-7e Sign in sheet.docx|'''Exhibit No. II-7e''']] ''is a meeting sign in sheet''.

Field check will be conducted at a pre-determined location. The Consultant or the City will provide a set of plans for field check. BLP will review comments and will discuss any necessary actions with the City and the Consultant.
After the field check meeting the consultant or the City will distribute minutes and provide BLP with a response to the issues identified/discussed in the meeting.

After field check plans have been received by BLP, a Field Check Report will be developed and provided to the City, Consultant and other necessary parties.

During the site review/field check meeting it should be determined if the proposed project will have a potential impact on rail facilities. If it appears that work will be near or within railroad right-of way, the LPA will coordinate with the railroad to determine the need for flagging, liability insurance, agreements, and a possible diagnostic review.

== '''Task No. 28 - Execute Official Agreement with KDOT''' ==
When the official KDOT agreement is received by the Project Manager, it is reviewed/approved by the Law Department and placed on the City Council agenda for consideration.

:'''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/1535/638736480783200000 Exhibit No. II-28]''' is Official KDOT Utility Accommodation Policy/Agreement''.

Compliance with KDOT's Non-Discriminations policies is required on all contracts. See '''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/2397/638731509780470000 Title VI Handbook]''' for more information.

== '''Task No. 29 - Continue Environmental Process''' ==

For more information see Chapter [[Media:4.0 Environmental 2020.pdf|'''4.0 Environmental''']] of KDOT's LPA Project Development Manual.

== '''Task No. 30 - Obtain Decision for Design Exception from KDOT''' ==
The Project Manager shall keep in close contact with BLP-KDOT, if a design exception was requested. Once the decision has been made, the results shall be disseminated to all interested and required parties.
== '''Task No. 31 - Complete Public Interest Finding''' ==
{{Top}}

If the deviation from a standard practice is requested, the Project Manager shall submit a '''[https://www.ksdot.gov/home/showpublisheddocument/1957/638744283760630000 Proprietary Product Certification Form]''' or a Public Interest Finding (PIF) to BLP explaining the need for the deviation and why it is in the public's best interest to allow it.

For detailed information regarding the use of proprietary products see FHWA's [https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/construction/cqit/fr_qa.cfm '''Construction Program Guide'''].

== '''Task No. 32 - NHS Approval Procedure''' ==
{{Top}}

For projects on principal arterials, the Project Manager shall request special approval to administer a federally funded project on the National Highway System route, documenting the reason for the request and demonstrating that the City has successfully administered a non-NHS project. This request shall be submitted to the BLP for approval.

== Task No. 33 - Submit Right-of-Way Plans/Legal Descriptions ==
{{Top}}

The Consultant/Project Manager shall submit this information on the date as established with the project schedule. The legal descriptions shall be provided in electronic format along with a written original sealed by a registered land surveyor in the State of Kansas. A tract map for each property shall accompany the legal descriptions. The tract map shall clearly identify each type of proposed taking. Also included with the submittal shall be a copy of all the title company information. At this time tract files should be created in project folder under '''\2-Preliminary Design\ROW and Easement Documents\Tract Files.'''

{{Exhibit|Legal_Descriptions_and_Tract_Map.pdf|No. II-33|is an example of legal descriptions and tract map.}}
{{Exhibit|II-33a.pdf|No. II-33a|ia a Memorandum from the Register of Deeds, Johnson County, regarding legal description requirements for document indexing.}}
{{Exhibit|II-33b.pdf|No. II-33b|is a Sample Template from the Register of Deeds, Johnson County, showing required format (margin & paper size) for recording documents.}}

All prepared documents must conform to the Register of Deeds requirements and filed electronically with Johnson County RTA. If rejected, the City is notified by RTA via email.

{{Exhibit|JoCo_RTA_Rejection_Email.pdf|No. II-33c|is an example of rejection email from JoCo RTA.}}

(The rejection email is generated automatically and it applies to the whole package of documents submitted. Therefore the entire package is rejected even if only one tract has an error. It is up to the Project Engineer or Engineering Technician to figure out which one.)

{{Note|In some instances Long Term Temporary Construction Easements (TCE) have been granted to the City during the development process. These existing TCEs are usually adjacent to thoroughfares. During the R/W Plan review the project technician is to check for any previously granted Long Term TCEs adjacent to the project. The TCEs can be viewed in ArcMap by adding ''"Easement and ROW"'' Data Layer from ''"Property"'' Data Group. Each easement in this layer is linked to a ''pdf'' image of the document by which that easement was acquired.}}

== Task No. 34 - Hire Appraiser ==
{{Top}}

Project Manager shall form a Selection Committee and a qualification based selection process shall be used.
Appraiser and Acquisition Agent may be acquired by a stand-alone RFQ process or inclusion as a component of the qualifications based selection process for the Design Professional/Consultant, or as may be required by applicable federal or state laws/regulations.

{{Exhibit|II-34a APPRAISERS 3-23-26.docx|No. II-34a|is a list of City qualified appraisers.}}
{{Exhibit|II-34b_RFQ_Appraisal_Acquisition_2025.docx|No. II-34b|is a copy of City's Request for Qualifications (RFQ).}}
{{Exhibit|Summary_of_Takings_2025.pdf|No. II-34c|is a sample summary of the project right-of-way and easement takings.}}
{{Exhibit|II-34d Appraiser Agreement under 10K rev 5-16-24.docx|No. II-34d|is an Appraiser Agreement for fee under $10,000.}}
{{Exhibit|II-34e Appraiser Agreement over 10K rev 5-16-24.docx|No. II-34e|is an Appraiser Agreement for fee over $10,000.}}
{{Exhibit|II-34f Sample Intra-City Email Memo to Selection Committee 2025.pdf|No. II-34f|is a sample Intra City memorandum to the Selection Committee.}}
{{Exhibit|Proposal_City_of_OP_2025.pdf|No. II-34g|is a sample Proposal for Appraisal.}}
{{Exhibit|II-34h Ranking sheet rw proposals.pdf|No. II-34h| is a sample of ranking sheet.}}

See '''[https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/real_estate/local_public_agencies/lpa_guide/ch11.cfm FHWA's Real Estate Acquisition Guide For Local Public Agencies]''' for information that will be necessary when a project is started that requires the acquisition of real estate and receives any Federal funding.

{{Exhibit|II-34i appraisal review.dot|No. II-34i|is a copy of Appraisal Review form.}}

LPA representatives, appraisers and acquisition contractors involved with the R/W acquisition process must be certified in accordance with the ROWCP requirements. Refer to Chapter [[Media:7.0 Right of Way 2024.pdf|'''7.0 Right of Way''']] of KDOT's LPA Project Development Manual for additional information.

== Task No. 35 - Prepare R/W and Easement Documents ==
{{Top}}

The Project Manager will coordinate with the Contract Specialist assigned to the project the preparation of the various documents necessary for the takings required to construct the project.

The following is the list of the most commonly used documents:

:*[[Media:Access-easement-option-1.docx|'''Access Easement Option 1''']]
:*[[Media:Access-easement-option-2.docx|'''Access Easement Option 2''']]
:*[[Media:Deed-of-dedication.doc|'''Deed of Dedication''']]
:*[[Media:Kansas-warranty-deed.docx|'''Kansas Warranty Deed''']]
:*[[Media:Notice-of-termination-of-temporary-construction-easement.docx|'''Notice of Termination of Temporary Construction Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Permanent-drainage-easement-city-grantee.docx|'''Permanent Drainage Easement - City Grantee''']]
:*[[Media:Permanent-drainage-easement-city-grantor.docx|'''Permanent Drainage Easement - City Grantor''']]
:*[[Media:Permanent-drainage-easement-city-grantor-and-grantee.docx|'''Permanent Drainage Easement - City Grantor and Grantee''']]
:*[[Media:Permanent-maint-access-easement.docx|'''Permanent Maintenance Access Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Permanent-right-of-way-easement.docx|'''Permanent Right of Way Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Quit-claim-deed.docx|'''Quit Claim Deed''']]
:*[[Media:Real Estate Mortgage Release - Corporation.docx|'''Real Estate Mortgage Release - Corporation''']] (to be obtained when value of takings exceeds $50K)
:*[[Media:Real Estate Mortgage Release - Individual.docx|'''Real Estate Mortgage Release - Individual''']] (to be obtained when value of takings exceeds $50K)
:*[[Media:Retaining Wall Easement.docx|'''Retaining Wall Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Sidewalk-and-traffic-signal-system-easement-2.docx|'''Sidewalk and Traffic Signal System Easement''']]
:*[[Media:PSE & UE.docx|'''Sidewalk and Utility Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Sidewalk-easement.docx|'''Sidewalk Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Sidewalk-variance-ce-std.docx|'''Sidewalk Variance - City Engineer Standard''']]
:*[[Media:Sidewalk-variance-pwc.docx|'''Sidewalk Variance - Public Works Committee''']]
:*[[Media:Sight Triangle Easement .docx|'''Sight Triangle Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Street-light-easement-2.docx|'''Street Light Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Temporary-construction-easement-city-grantee rev 6-9-22.docx|'''Temporary Construction Easement - City Grantee''']]
:*[[Media:Temporary-construction-easement-city-grantor.docx|'''Temporary Construction Easement - City Grantor''']]
:*[[Media:Temporary-Construction-Easement-Grading-Version-1.docx|'''Temporary Construction Easement for Grading - Version 1''']]
:*[[Media:Temporary-Construction-Easement-Grading-Version-2.docx|'''Temporary Construction Easement for Grading - Version 2''']]
:*[[Media:Temporary-Construction-Easement-Long-Term.docx|'''Temporary Construction Easement - Long Term''']]
:*[[Media:Traffic-signal-system-easement-2.docx|'''Traffic Signal System Easement''']]
:*[[Media:Utility-easement-city-grantee.docx|'''Utility Easement - City Grantee''']]
:*[[Media:Utility-easement-city-grantor.docx|'''Utility Easement - City Grantor''']]
:*[[Media:Utility-easement-city-grantor-and-grantee.docx|'''Utility Easement - City Grantor and Grantee''']]

The following documents are shown for information only and will be generated by the City of Overland Park:

:*[[Media:EASEMENT ACQUISITION AGREEMENT-final 3-20-25.docx|'''Easement Acquisition Agreement''']]
:*[[Media:EASEMENT ACQUISITION AGREEMENT-partial mortgage final 3-20-2025.docx|'''Acquisition Agreement with Partial Mortgage Release''']]
:*[[Media:Amendment to EASEMENT ACQUISITION AGREEMENT 3-20-25.docx|'''Amendment to Easement Acquisition Agreement''']]
:*[[Media:Administrative Settlement Form 3-20-25.docx|'''Administrative Settlement Form''']]
:*[[Media:Restoration Agreement template 3-20-2025.docx|'''Restoration Agreement''']] and [[Media:Restoration Agreement-Exhibit A template.docx|'''Exhibit A''']]
:*[[Media:RIGHT OF ENTRY AGREEMENT 12.09.25.docx|'''Right of Entry Agreement''']]
All prepared right-of-way and easement documents must conform to the Register of Deeds requirements. See [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Phase_II_-_Preliminary_Design#Task_No._33_-_Submit_Right-of-Way_Plans/Legal_Descriptions'''Phase II, Task No. 33'''] for exhibits.

== Task No. 36 - Schedule Second Public Information Meeting ==
{{Top}}

The purpose of this meeting is to present the Right of Way plans to the citizens. For KDOT projects the Notice of Public Information Meeting must be published in the '''[https://sos.ks.gov/publications/kansas-register.html Kansas Register]''' and [http://www.thelegalrecord.net '''The Legal Record'''].

See [[index.php/Index.php/Phase II - Preliminary Design#Task No. 15 - Schedule First Public Information Meeting|'''Phase II, Task No. 15''']] for list of invites.

{{Exhibit|II-36a-1_Second Public Information Meeting - With Federal Funds.docx|No. II-36a-1|is an example Invitation Letter to property owners. Project w/ Federal Funds}}
{{Exhibit|II-36a-2_Second Public Information Meeting - Without Federal Funds.docx|No. II-36a-2|is an example Invitation Letter to property owners. - w/out Federal Funds}}
{{Exhibit|II-36b_Public Meeting Sign-In Sheet.docx|No. II-36b|is a public meeting sign in sheet.}}
{{Exhibit|II-36c_Sample Public Meeting Handout.pdf|No. II-36c|is a public meeting handout.}}{{Exhibit|II-36d-1_Third Public Information Meeting - In Person, No Presentation.docx|No. II-36d-1|Third Public Information Meeting - In Person.}}{{Exhibit|II-36d-2_Third Public Information Meeting - In Person, With Presentation.docx|No. II-36d-2|Third Public Information Meeting - In Person, With Presentation.}}

{{Note|This and all subsequent Public Information Meeting notices should ask if participants need a language interpreter or a hearing assistance device and a phone number. All meeting rooms shall be ADA accessible. The KDOT '''Equal Opportunity and Civil Rights Information''' brochure in [[Media:Title VI Brochure English.pdf|'''English''']] and [[Media:Title VI Brochure Spanish.pdf|'''Spanish''']] regarding equal opportunity contracting are to be made available at all public meetings.}}

For those who wish to use a Blue Valley School District facility for the public meeting, an on-line '''[https://facilities.bluevalleyk12.org/ Facility Rental Reservation Request]''' is available. Once the request is submitted, the BVSD Facility Scheduling Office will send a confirmation if the requested space is available.

== [[index.php/Index.php/Category:Phase II Exhibits|All Phase II Exhibits]] ==

Streetlight Design Manual

2026-05-06T16:31:27Z

Brian Geiger: /* General Purpose of the Design Manual: */ Updated Last Revised date.

== General Purpose of the Design Manual: ==
'''Last Revised August 26, 2025''' 
This Streetlight Design Manual has been written to serve as a general guideline when designing a streetlighting system for the City of Overland Park, Kansas. Although there are specific design requirements, the guidelines contained herein should not be a substitute for proper engineering design and judgment based on specific project situations. The purpose of this Streetlight Design Manual is to aid consultants as well as City of Overland Park staff to be consistent in the practice of designing streetlighting plans. It provides an overview of the design criteria to be used in the design; streetlighting installation determination; design considerations to take into account; explanation of the approved streetlighting equipment that is to be used; what information should be included on the plan sheets; and how to compute the quantities. Any questions regarding this manual may be directed to Shawn Gotfredson, P.E., Supervisory Civil Engineer at the City of Overland Park, Kansas at (913) 895-8303.

=== Purpose of Streetlighting: ===
The principal purpose of lighting is to provide improved visibility for the street users so they can make quick, accurate and safe decisions. Street users include vehicle operators, bicycle and motorcycle operators and pedestrians. Light that falls on pedestrian walkways enhances pedestrian traffic, but the streetlighting criterion does not mandate specific lighting levels on sidewalks, bike paths or other pedestrian paths. The Planning and Development Services Department has separate criteria for the lighting of pedestrian facilities and should be consulted. This document does however, mandate specific lighting levels at the conflict points of pedestrians and vehicles, such as at intersection crossing points.

=== Reference to Other Documents: ===
Wherever applicable, this design manual should be used in conjunction with the [https://www.ies.org/store/recommended-practices-and-ansi-standards/roadway-lighting/Roadway Lighting ANSI/IES RP-8-14] by the Illuminating Engineering Society, as herein modified and the [http://catalog.nfpa.org/2014-NFPA-70-National-Electrical-Code-NEC-and-Handbook-P1194.aspx?icid=B484 National Electric Code] by the National Fire Protection Association. The current editions of the [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks-gbp/doc-view.aspx?secid=198 City of Overland Park Streetlighting Resolution No. 4036], [https://dw.opkansas.org/public/FileCabinets/2fa13812-70a3-4126-848b-3a20df7175c3/Documents/832/FileDownload?targetFileType=Auto&keepAnnotations=false Design and Construction Standards, Volume 1 Design Criteria (latest edition)], [https://dw.opkansas.org/public/FileCabinets/2fa13812-70a3-4126-848b-3a20df7175c3/Documents/831/FileDownload?targetFileType=Auto&keepAnnotations=false Design and Construction Standards, Volume 2 Construction Specifications (latest edition)], the latest edition of the [https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/building-construction/civil-engineering/construction-standards/ Standard Details] and the [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Approved_Materials Approved Materials List], hereafter referred to as “City Standards” should be followed during the design of any streetlighting project.

=== Public or Private Ownership, Operation and Maintenance: ===
Different policies apply to streetlighting systems based on the final ownership, operation and maintenance of the system. The two types of systems are:
#Those that are installed in the public right-of-way that will be owned, operated and maintained by the City of Overland Park and
#Privately owned streetlighting systems that are installed in the public right-of-way that will not be owned, operated and maintained by the City of Overland Park.
Although each of the systems will be discussed, the design guidelines contained herein only apply to systems that are within the public right-of-way that are owned, operated and maintained by the City of Overland Park.

====      City-Owned, Operated and Maintained Lighting Systems: ====
:All City-owned, operated and maintained lighting systems shall be designed in accordance with the design criteria listed herein and use all pre-approved materials from the City's [http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Preapproved_Materials Approved Materials List]. All lighting systems that are being designed in conjunction with the development of any public street or any developments that require modification of any streetlighting system within the public right-of-way by private consultants working for a developer are required to meet City Standards if the City will assume all ownership, operation and maintenance responsibilities after final acceptance of the project.

====      Privately Owned, Operated and Maintained Lighting Systems: ====
:All lighting systems within the public right-of-way that have been designated “privately owned” are not required to be constructed using City approved materials. However, the lighting system shall still be designed in accordance with the design criteria listed herein for average maintained light levels and uniformity ratios for the specific functional roadway classification and pedestrian conflict area classification and be constructed in accordance with the [http://catalog.nfpa.org/2014-NFPA-70-National-Electrical-Code-NEC-and-Handbook-P1194.aspx?icid=B484National Electric Code], current edition to ensure safe operation.

:All proposals for privately owned, operated and maintained lighting systems shall be pre-approved by the Overland Park City Council prior to final plan approval and execution and recording of the City standard maintenance agreement with the Johnson County Records and Tax Administration. If at any time, the homes association or other political subdivision requests the City to assume ownership of the lighting system, the streetlighting maintenance agreement establishes specific items that would need to be addressed before the request would be considered. One requirement is that the current streetlighting system would be have to be replaced with equipment meeting the current City Standards at the sole cost of the current owner.

:Privately owned streetlighting systems shall not be permitted to connect to any City-owned streetlighting system, whether it is poles, control centers, cable, junction boxes, etc. unless otherwise stipulated in the maintenance agreement.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#General Purpose of the Design Manual:|'''General Purpose:''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=General Purpose of the Design Manual:]]
|}
----

== Design Criteria: ==
The following section addresses the design criteria used for streetlighting in the City of Overland Park. There are three types of streetlighting design that are considered:
#Continuous lighting
#Partial lighting, and
#Safety lighting.

=== Continuous Lighting: ===
Continuous lighting is defined as streetlighting that is designed to provide specific average maintained light levels and uniformity ratios between adjacent poles in accordance with the functional classification of the street and the corresponding pedestrian conflict area classification. Continuous lighting design shall be required for:
#All collector streets
#All thoroughfare streets with four or more lanes
#All interim or ultimate two-lane thoroughfares with average two-way night-time traffic volumes of greater than 3,000 vehicles, where night-time is defined as the period from 6:00 PM to 6:00 AM

Interim or ultimate two-lane thoroughfares are those streets located in the southern portion of the city that were part of the adopted South Overland Park Transportation Plan.

Interim or ultimate two-lane thoroughfares with average two-way night-time traffic volumes of less than 3,000 vehicles are not required to have continuous streetlighting unless unique situations exist such as adjacent school facilities, etc. Any legacy streetlighting systems already in place on unimproved throughfares will not be upgraded until the thoroughfare is improved.

The following streetlighting design criteria will be used for continuous streetlighting on city streets, as identified on the latest edition of the City of Overland Park [http://dw.opkansas.org/public/FileCabinets/2fa13812-70a3-4126-848b-3a20df7175c3/Documents/27/FileDownload?targetFileType=Auto&keepAnnotations=false “Official Street Map”], and the [https://maps.opkansas.org/future-development-character-framework-map/ “Future Development Character Framework Map”] available from the Planning and Development Services Department.

====      Functional Street Classifications: ====
:The functional street classifications are defined on the [https://www2.opkansas.org/files/dw/api/Docs/10347 “Official Street Map”].
:The “thoroughfare” street classification includes all thoroughfare streets whether divided or undivided; whether improved or unimproved; and whether two-lane, four-lane or six-lane excluding auxiliary left and right turn lanes.

:The “collector” street classification includes all super-collector streets, residential collector streets, apartment streets, commercial streets and industrial streets regardless of the number of lanes; whether improved or unimproved.

====      Pedestrian Conflict Area: ====
:The “high” pedestrian conflict area includes land uses where significant numbers of pedestrians are expected to be on the sidewalks or crossing the streets during darkness. These are typically more nonresidential areas, such as “Regional Activity District”, “Local Activity District”, “Downtown District”, or “Commercial Hub”, depending on the land use composition of retail areas, theaters, or major pedestrian generators. All interchanges shall be lit to "high" pedestrian conflict area criteria.

:The “medium” pedestrian conflict area includes public areas such as libraries, neighborhood shopping, schools, offices, hotels and motels, light industrial facilities, or public and semi-public areas which would be considered “Regional Activity District”, “Local Activity District”, “Public Parks and Open Space”, “Innovation / Flex Hub”, or some parts of “Downtown District”.

:The “medium” pedestrian conflict area includes residential areas with character types of “Traditional neighborhood” or “Compact Neighborhood” that have a density higher than duplexes such as quad-plexes or apartments which would typically generate a “medium” pedestrian conflict. Review the "low" pedestrian conflict area if the property contains a religious facility.

:The “low” pedestrian conflict area includes residential areas with “Suburban Neighborhood”, and some “Traditional Neighborhood” or “Compact Neighborhood” areas which are generally at or below duplex density. The “low” pedestrian conflict area also includes areas such as “Suburban Neighborhood” or “Traditional Neighborhood” which contain religious facilities without primary or secondary schools on the property.

====      Luminance Criteria: ====
:The maintained averages for luminance, as listed in Table 1, shall be met or exceeded for all continuous lighting designs. The corresponding uniformity ratios and/or veiling luminance ratios shall be equal to or better than those listed in the following table for luminance. NOTE: The average luminance value shall be obtained by taking the average of individual luminance values at points across the entire number of lanes on the roadway regardless of the direction of traffic. Medians shall be excluded from these calculations.

:{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+'''Table 1: Luminance Criteria'''
! colspan="2" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Street and Pedestrian Conflict Area
! colspan="4" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Luminance Criteria
|-
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Functional Street Classification'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Pedestrian Conflict Area'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Maintained Average (Lavg) (cd/m2)'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Uniformity Ratio (Lavg:Lmin) (Max Allowable)'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Uniformity Ratio (Lmax:Lmin) (Max Allowable)'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Veiling Luminance Ratio (LVmax:Lavg) (Max Allowable)'''
|-
| rowspan="3" align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;" valign="center"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|High
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1.2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|3.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|5.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|0.3:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Medium 
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|0.9
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|3.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|5.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|0.3:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Low 
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|0.6
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|3.5:1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|6.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|0.3:1
|-
| rowspan="3" align="center" style="background:#90ee90;" valign="center"|Collector
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|High
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|0.8
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|3.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|5.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|0.4:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Medium 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|0.6
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|3.5:1
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|6.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|0.4:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Low 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|0.4
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|4.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|8.0:1
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|0.4:1
|}

=== Partial Lighting ===
Partial lighting is defined as lighting in intersections, at points of potential conflict, of roadways without continuous lighting. This type of lighting is an interim step between safety lighting and continuous lighting that is used when traffic on roadways and intersections are at sufficiently low night-time average daily traffic volumes. In general, this type of lighting is used at the intersections of collector and residential streets with thoroughfares that have lower volumes and minimal commercial development.

The average maintained illuminance in the intersection shall conform to the values listed in Table 2 below based on the functional street classification and the pavement classification. The intersecting street with highest street classification that provides the highest light level should be used. For example, at an intersection between a thoroughfare street and a collector street, use the criteria for thoroughfare streets. The intersection lighting grid for partial lighting at intersections without continuously lighted streets should include the area between the radius points of all intersecting streets. (See Figure Below). Point spacing for calculating illuminance within the intersection lighting grid should be 5-foot maximum. Luminaire arms should be oriented perpendicular to the street centerlines and not angled toward the center of the intersection.

====      Pavement Classification: ====
:The directional surface reflectance characteristics of the pavement should be considered prior to running calculations for streetlighting. The pavement classification is based on the specularity of the pavement and a scaling factor as determined by the overall "lightness" of the pavement. For asphalt road surfaces, the pavement classification should be R2. For concrete pavement surfaces, the pavement classification should be R1.

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+'''Table 2: Average Maintained Illuminance Criteria for Partial Lighting at Intersections'''
! rowspan="2" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Functional Street Classification
! colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Pavement Classification, (Lux) / (Fc)*
! rowspan="2" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Uniformity Ratio (Eavg:Emin (Max Allowable)
|-
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''R1'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''R2 & R3'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''R4'''
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|6.0 / 0.6
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|9.0 / 0.9
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|8.0 / 0.8
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|3.0:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|Collector
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|4.0 / 0.4
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|6.0 / 0.6
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|5.0 / 0.5
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|4.0:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|Local
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|3.0 / 0.3
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|4.0 / 0.4
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|4.0 / 0.4
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|6.0:1
|}
*The street classification with the highest light level should be used. 

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Partial Lighting Conflict Area.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Conflict Area
|}

=== Safety Lighting: ===
Safety lighting is defined as lighting that does not provide specific maintained light averages and uniformity ratios between adjacent poles in accordance with the functional classification of the street and corresponding pedestrian conflict area classification. The purpose of this type of lighting design is to provide enough light on the street to enhance the safety of the street users but to avoid over lighting the area. All residential streets shall be designed based on the safety lighting design parameters.

Since June 11, 1979, the City policy has been not to continuously light residential streets. Only "partial" or "safety" lighting is provided. All streetlights on residential streets will be installed in conformance with the following basic guidelines.

====      At Intersections with Other Residential Streets: ====
:In order to provide lighting within the conflict area of two residential streets, a light pole will be installed on one corner of an intersection or opposite the intersection in the case of a T-intersection. (See Figure 1a)

====      On the Same Side as the Sidewalk: ====
:Streetlights should generally be installed on the same side of the street as the sidewalk unless there are significant utility or storm sewer conflicts. Any variance from this practice should be approved by the engineer or project manager.

====      Near Intersections with Another Pole Oriented in a Different Direction: ====
:Where an intersection between two local streets has a light pole located at the corner but the luminaire is oriented toward the direction of the primary local street, a second light pole may be located on the secondary local street oriented in the direction of its centerline as long as the light pole is installed greater than 50’ from the back of curb line on the primary local street extended, and it is not on the same corner as the light oriented toward the primary street. (The primary street is the street that is expected to have the higher traffic volume.) 
:With intersections of local streets with thoroughfare or collector streets, carry the continuous lighting of the thoroughfare or collector street through the intersection. Install a post top light at the intersection oriented toward the local street.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 1.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 1a
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 1b.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 1b
|}

====      Within Cul-de-Sac Bulbs: ====
:A light pole will be installed within the cul de sac bulb when the cul-de-sac street is longer than 200 feet measured from the intersection of the intersecting streets to the center of the cul-de-sac bulb. (See Figure 2)

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 2.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 2
|}

====      At Changes of Roadway Alignment: ====
:A light pole will be installed at changes of alignment of 60° or more which are 200 feet or more from an intersection, measured from the intersection of the local street centerlines, to the middle of the curve radius along the centerline of the local street, (See Figure 3)
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 3.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 3
|}

====      Mid-block Streetlights: ====
:A minimum number of mid block streetlights will be installed in order to achieve a desired pole spacing of approximately 250 feet. The maximum spacing between lights should not exceed 280 feet and the minimum spacing between lights should not be less than 225 feet unless otherwise approved by City staff. Lights should desirably be located on or near a property line and not in front of window lines if avoidable.

=== Intersection Lighting: ===
Intersections pose the highest conflict area for both vehicles and pedestrians. Therefore, the light levels should be higher for intersections than each individual street. The illuminance method, rather than the luminance method is the recommended design for intersection lighting. The following design criterion has been established for the illumination at street intersections on streets with continuous lighting.
====      Intersection Lighting for Continuously Lighted Streets: ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+'''Table 3: Illuminance Criteria for Intersections with Continuous Lighted Streets'''
! rowspan="2" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Functional Street Classification
! colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Average Maintained Illumination at Pavement by Pedestrian Area Classification, (Lux) / (Fc)
! rowspan="2" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Uniformity Ratio (Eavg:Emin (Max Allowable)
|-
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''High'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Medium'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Low'''
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare / Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|34.0 / 3.4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|26.0 / 2.6
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|18.0 / 1.8
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|3.0:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|Thoroughfare / Collector
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|29.0 / 2.9
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|22.0 / 2.2
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|15.0 / 1.5
| align="center" style="background:#afeeee;"|3.0:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|Thoroughfare / Local
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|See Note 2
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|See Note 2
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|See Note 2
| align="center" style="background:#e0ffff;"|See Note 2
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Collector / Collector
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|24.0 / 2.4
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|18.0 / 1.8
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|12.0 / 1.2
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|4.0:1
|-
| align="center" style="background:#a1edbb;"|Collector / Local
| align="center" style="background:#a1edbb;"|See Note 2
| align="center" style="background:#a1edbb;"|See Note 2
| align="center" style="background:#a1edbb;"|See Note 2
| align="center" style="background:#a1edbb;"|See Note 2
|-
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|Local / Local
| align="center"|See Note 1
| align="center"|See Note 1
| align="center"|See Note 1
| align="center"|See Note 1
|-
|}
Note 1: Intersection lighting analysis is not required for these types of intersections. The criterion is satisfied if a post top light is placed at each intersection per [[#_At_Intersections_with_Other_Residential_Streets:|Figure 1a]]. 
Note 2: Intersection lighting analysis is not required for these types of intersections. The criterion is satisfied if a post top light is placed at each intersection per [[#_At_Intersections_with_Other_Residential_Streets:|Figure 1b]] in addition to any continuous lighting that may be required.

The intersection lighting grid for intersections on continuously lighted streets is defined as the quadrilateral whose adjacent sides intersect at the midpoint of the curb radii at the back of curb (See Figure 4). The amount of light should be proportional to the classification of the intersecting streets and be equivalent to the sum of the values used for each separate street. If an intersecting street is illuminated above the recommended value, then the intersection illumination value should be increased proportionately. Intersections of collector and thoroughfare streets with local streets should be illuminated according to Table 3 above since criteria has not been established for continuously lighting local streets. Point spacing for calculating illuminance within the intersection lighting grid should be 5-foot maximum.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 4.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 4
|}
The LED class at intersections of identical functional street classifications (e.g. Thoroughfare / Thoroughfare) shall use the same LED class all the way around the intersection. 
The LED class on thoroughfare intersection approaches which have more than one turn lane shall increase the LED class by one LED class more than the roadway segment analysis through the length of the turn bay on the side of the turn lanes only. This occurs outside the area of the intersection analysis.

=== Roundabout Lighting ===
==== Horizontal Illuminance Recommendations ====
In order to adequately address the visibility of the roadway, pedestrians, and hazards through a roundabout, all roundabouts will be provided with lighting. The horizontal lighting levels used for the design of the roundabout lighting will be equal to the lighting levels used for intersections included in Table 2, for streets that are not continuously lighted or Table 3, for streets that are continuously lighted. In addition to these horizontal requirements there are also vertical requirements in the crosswalks if they are present.

==== Vertical Illuminance Recommendations ====
It is recommended that the averge vertical illuminance for a series of points 5 feet in height, along the centerline of the crosswalk extending to the edge of the roadway, spaced at 1.65 feet, for each driving direction, be equal to the required horizontal illuminance and uniformity for the roundabout in either Table 2 or Table 3 as applicable.

==== Pole Placement Recommendations ====
Pole placement is critical in creating good visibility in a roundabout. It is recommended that streetlight poles be placed around the perimeter of the roundabout at locations on the approach side of the crosswalks, if present.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Roundabout Perimeter Lighting.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Perimeter Pole Placement
|}

==== Calculation Grids ====
The calculation grid for the horizontal illuminance in a roundabout should include the area immediately before the splitter islands (at the start of the gore) and then throughout the roundabout. Central islands need not be included in the horizontal illuminance calculation. The grid spacing should be no greater than 6.6 feet. The calculation grid for the vertical illuminance in the crosswalk portion of a roundabout should include a series of points 5 feet in height, centered in the crosswalk, spaced at 1.65 feet, for each driving direction. The vertical illuminance calculation should be performed toward the direction of an approaching driver at 5 feet height above the roadway at a distance of one safe sight stopping distance as determined by the roundabout speed.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Roundabout Calculation Grid.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Horizontal Calculation Grid
|}

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Vertical Grid at Roundabout.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Vertical Calculation Grid
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Design Criteria:|'''Design Criteria:''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Design Criteria:]]
|}
----

== Streetlighting Installation Determination: ==
The following information has been established for all City-owned and maintained streetlighting systems installed in public right-of-way. The following explains when streetlighting will be installed. Additional information is contained in [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks-gbp/doc-view.aspx?secid=198 City of Overland Park Streetlighting Resolution No. 4036, A Resolution Establishing Policy for City-Owned Streetlighting], and the [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-3614 Overland Park Municipal Code Chapter 13.10].

=== Local Residential Streets: ===
There are four main distinct scenarios identified in which streetlights will be considered for installation. They are:
#Streets with existing City-owned streetlights,
#Streets that do not have any streetlighting,
#Streets that have streetlighting that was purchased from Kansas City Power and Light (KCP&L), and
#New streets that are being constructed either through the City’s Capital Improvement Plan (CIP) or by developers.

====      Residential Streets with Existing City-owned Streetlighting: ====
:Where street plans were approved prior to February 7, 2011, the City will replace or modify the existing streetlighting system with a new streetlighting system meeting the current streetlighting resolution as the street(s) are reconstructed as part of a major residential street reconstruction program. This does not include general pavement rehabilitation programs such as micro-surfacing, chip seal or residential street overlay programs. The City will not consider requests or petitions to upgrade the existing streetlighting system to the current standards unless all other lighting obligations within the City have been met, including replacement of Kansas City Power and Light Company streetlights the City has purchased and streets that currently do not have any streetlighting.

====      Residential Streets with no Existing Streetlighting: ====
:Where City streets do not have any existing streetlighting, the City will consider streetlighting using City at Large funds if a petition from over fifty (50) percent of the residences along the street(s) to be lighted is received and verified. Only one signature is allowed per residence on the petition. The City is responsible for receiving and verifying petitions which can be obtained from the Public Works Department. Verified, valid petitions will be listed for Public Works Committee consideration. The Public Works Committee in turn will make recommendations to the City Council for construction of local residential streetlighting consistent with the amount of funds budgeted for that purpose. When requests exceed funding, priority will be given to those local residential streets with the most police reports of nighttime crime and nighttime traffic accidents.

====      Residential Streets with Existing KCP&L Streetlighting that was Purchased: ====
:Where City streets have streetlighting that was purchased from Kansas City Power and Light Company, the City will annually prepare plans to remove existing streetlighting systems and replace them with current standard City-owned streetlighting systems as funding levels permit. The City staff will determine the street(s) that will be included in the annual streetlighting replacement project based on the streetlighting master plan. The project limits will be presented to the Public Works Committee for consideration. The Public Works Committee in turn will make recommendations to the City Council for final design and construction approval consistent with the amount of funds budgeted for that purpose.

====      New Residential Streets ====
:Where street plans were approved on or after February 7, 2011, the developers are required to install streetlights on all local residential streets which have street plans approved in accordance with [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-3632 Overland Park Municipal Code Chapter 13.10.050]
:Appropriate City staff shall have authority in determining the extent and phasing of streetlight construction, including the location of any applicable streetlight control centers that best fit into the overall master plan for future expansion of lighting circuits.

=== Collector Streets: ===
There are three main distinct scenarios identified in which streetlights will be considered for installation. They are:
#Streets with existing City-owned streetlights,
#Streets that have streetlighting that was purchased from Kansas City Power and Light (KCP&L), and
#New streets that are being constructed either through the City’s Capital Improvement Plan (CIP) or by developers.

====      Collector Streets with Existing KCP&L Streetlighting that was Purchased: ====
:Where City streets have streetlighting that was purchased from Kansas City Power and Light Company, the City will annually prepare plans to remove existing streetlighting systems and replace them with current standard City-owned streetlighting systems as funding levels permit. The City staff will determine the street(s) that will be included in the annual streetlighting replacement project based on the streetlighting master plan. The project limits will be presented to the Public Works Committee for consideration. The Public Works Committee in turn will make recommendations to the City Council for final design and construction approval consistent with the amount of funds budgeted for that purpose.

====      Collector Streets with Existing City-owned Streetlighting: ====
:Where street plans were approved prior to February 7, 2011, the City staff may initiate streetlighting requests for these types of streets via the City's Capital Improvements Program (CIP) which is reviewed and updated annually. Approved collector streetlighting projects are normally listed in the Budget.

====      New Collector Streets: ====
:Where street plans were approved on or after February 7, 2011, developers are required to install streetlights on all such types of streets which have street plans approved in accordance with the [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-3632 Overland Park Municipal Code Chapter 13.10.050]
:Appropriate City staff shall have authority in determining the extent and phasing of streetlight construction, including the location of any applicable streetlight control centers that best fits into the overall master plan for future expansion of lighting circuits.

=== Thoroughfare Streets: ===
There are two main distinct scenarios identified in which streetlights will be considered for installation. They are:
#New City-owned streetlights, and
#Streets that have streetlighting that was purchased from Kansas City Power and Light (KCP&L).

====      New Thoroughfare Streets: ====
:The City staff may initiate thoroughfare streetlighting requests for this type of street via the City's Capital Improvement Program. Approved primary thoroughfare streetlighting projects are normally listed in the Budget.

====      Thoroughfare Streets with Existing KCP&L Streetlighting that was Purchased: ====
:Where City streets have streetlighting that was purchased from Kansas City Power and Light Company, the City will annually prepare plans to remove existing streetlighting systems and replace them with current standard City-owned streetlighting systems as funding levels permit. The City staff will determine the street(s) that will be included in the annual streetlighting replacement project based on the streetlighting master plan. The project limits will be presented to the Public Works Committee for consideration. The Public Works Committee in turn will make recommendations to the City Council for final design and construction approval consistent with the amount of funds budgeted for that purpose.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Streetlighting Installation Determination:|'''Streetlighting Installation Determination:''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Streetlighting Installation Determination:]]
|}
----

== Design Considerations: ==
Before initiating the design of a streetlighting system, the designer should contact the City staff to discuss the specific design criteria for the project and determine the scope of the project. Decisions should be made in regard to the functional roadway classification and pedestrian conflict area as well as the type of equipment that will be used in the design. The following is a brief summary of general design considerations.

=== Establish the Lighting Design Criteria: ===
All streetlighting designs for collector and thoroughfare streets shall be done in accordance with the Continuous Streetlighting Design Criteria, as already discussed.

From the [[#Continuous Lighting:|Design Criteria Table]], select the row corresponding to the functional roadway classification (Major or Collector). Then select the row corresponding to the pedestrian conflict area (High, Medium or Low). Follow this row across the table to determine the maintained average luminance, average to minimum luminance uniformity ratio, maximum to minimum luminance uniformity ratio and veiling luminance ratio to be achieved in the design.

Before any design is initiated, the designer should discuss the functional roadway classification and the pedestrian conflict area classification with City staff. The pedestrian conflict area should be based on the City of Overland Park’s Future Development Character Framework Map and the functional roadway classification should be based on the City of Overland Park Official Street Map.

Design calculations, indicating the design pole spacing, should be submitted with supporting data to verify that the proper light levels have been achieved.

=== Light Loss Factor: ===
After the initial installation of the streetlighting system, the light output continues to decrease over time due to many external factors. The result of the time-dependent depreciation effects must be considered in the initial design. The lighting design is based on a specific lighting level that should always be maintained at the end of the maintenance period. Therefore, the initial lighting in the field will always be brighter than required.

The light loss factor (LLF) is a multiplying factor included in the calculations to account for factors which change in time after the initial installation of the streetlighting system. This factor is the product of many other individual factors such as the maintenance factor, lamp lumen depreciation, luminaire dirt depreciation, equipment factors, etc. The LLF is multiplied by the initial lumen rating of the light source to determine the number of maintained lumens in the design. The LLF that should be used for all high pressure sodium (HPS) City streetlighting systems is 0.81. The LLF that should be used for all LED City streetlighting systems is 0.91.

=== Luminaire Selection: ===
The luminaire selection should be based on the type of street as well as the ability to meet the lighting criteria and maximize the pole spacing. All luminaires used on collector streets and thoroughfare streets shall be LED cobrahead style. All luminaires on residential streets shall still be high pressure sodium (HPS). NOTE: The City has multiple LED cobrahead fixtures on their approved list that may yield slightly different lighting results. For design calculations, the Leotek fixtures should be used for all street and area classifications. As of April 12, 2022, the use of American Electric Autobahn fixtures for design calculations is suspended due to discontinuation of the approved product. The IES photometric files can be found on the City's [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php?title=Approved_Materials_-_Streetlighting#LED_Cobrahead_Luminaire Approved Materials List].

====      Luminaire Classifications for Collector and Thoroughfare Streets: ====
:In general cobrahead LED luminaires are rated as Class A through Class E depending on their ability to light a particular type of roadway and cross section. An approximate comparison between the different classes of LED luminaires and HPS luminaires is as follows:
:Class A LED – approximately equivalent to a 400W HPS
:Class B LED – approximately equivalent to a 310W HPS
:Class C LED – approximately equivalent to a 250W HPS
:Class D LED – approximately equivalent to a 150W HPS
:Class E LED – approximately equivalent to a 100W HPS

:One of the reasons the City has moved toward LED luminaires is to reduce the long term cost of electrical charges. Therefore, the lowest class of LED luminaire should be used in the design that satisfies the given lighting criteria. The designer should consult with the City’s project manager at the early stages in design to verify the proper fixture to use based on appropriate calculations

====      Luminaire for Residential Streets: ====
:All luminaires on residential streets shall be a post top mounted fixture with a retrofit LED lamp.

=== Street Width: ===
The street width is the distance between back of curb. On divided roadways, the street width is measured from the outside back of curb to the back of median curb. The median is not included in the calculation grid.

=== Pole Locations: ===
Pole locations will vary depending on the type of street. Residential streets, collector streets in residential neighborhoods, collector streets in commercial areas, undivided thoroughfare streets, and divided thoroughfare streets will all have different design challenges. In addition to the pole location criteria already discussed for residential streets, there are additional pole location preferences that should be kept in mind. Each of the pole location preferences will be further discussed as follows.

====      Pole Location Preferences on Residential Streets: ====
:Sidewalks are generally only constructed on one side of residential streets. Since the streetlights do provide some residual benefit of lighting the sidewalk and enhance pedestrian safety, the first choice for locating the streetlight poles should be on the sidewalk side of the street.

:As long as there is a minimum of a 4’ grass parkway between the back of curb and the sidewalk, the poles should desirably be located in the grass parkway. The minimum distance from the back of curb to the center of the streetlight pole should be 3’. If a 3’ pole setback cannot be achieved, consideration should be made to move the sidewalk adjacent to the curb, at least near the vicinity of the pole, and locate the pole 1’ behind the sidewalk.

:If streetlight poles cannot be located on the sidewalk side due to storm drainage, utility conflicts or right-of-way considerations, the poles may be moved to the other side of the street. The 3’ minimum setback from the back of curb to the center of the pole should still be maintained.

:Poles located at the intersection of residential streets should desirably be placed so the light pole can be used to mount stop, yield and street name signs. That means that they should be installed as near to the location where a vehicle should stop while maintaining a minimum of 3’ setback from the back of curb.

:All poles installed in residential areas should ideally be located on or near property lines whenever possible. In the case of larger lots, poles cannot always be located on the property line. In these cases, in order not to exceed the maximum desired pole spacing, poles can be located within the lot. The designer should take care not to locate the pole in front of large windows of houses.

:Any pole located near a residential drive entrance should be located a minimum of 3’ from the edge of the drive or concrete wing. The designer should always be careful not to mount a pole in a location that could be in the path of an errant vehicle that may be backing out of the driveway. An example would be on a curved drive entrance.

:The designer should also coordinate the location of all poles with existing trees, such that the fixture does not extend into the tree canopy or such that the tree canopy does not block the light output from the fixture.

====      Pole Location Preferences on Collector Streets: ====
:Collector streets generally have sidewalks on both sides of the street and are typically undivided roadways. Poles should be located on one side of the street which has the least conflicts with utilities.

:As long as there is a minimum of a 4’ grass parkway between the back of curb and the sidewalk, the poles should desirably be located in the grass parkway. The minimum distance from the back of curb to the center of the streetlight pole should be 3’. If a 3’ pole setback cannot be achieved, consideration should be made to move the pole 1’ behind the sidewalk. Longer bracket arms can be used to accommodate poles located behind the sidewalk.

:Any pole located near a residential or commercial drive entrance should be located a minimum of 3’ from the edge of the drive or concrete wing. The designer should always be careful not to mount a pole in a location that could be in the path of an errant vehicle that may be backing out of the driveway. An example would be on a curved drive entrance.

:The designer should also coordinate the location of all poles with existing trees, such that the fixture does not extend into the tree canopy or such that the tree canopy does not block the light output from the fixture.

:Occasionally collector streets will be constructed with a raised median the entire length or possibly on the approach of an intersection. Poles can be located within the median with luminaires mounted at 180° to each other in order to provide lighting on each side of the median.

:Where collector streets are designed with more than two lanes, such as in commercial areas where the roadway widens out to include multiple through lanes and turn lanes, it may be necessary to light the street from both sides in order to achieve the required lighting criteria. The desired pole arrangement in this case would be staggered across the street.

====      Pole Location Preferences on Undivided Thoroughfare Streets: ====
:On undivided thoroughfare streets, the light poles will generally be located on one side of the roadway, usually due to overhead power lines on the other side. The side selected to locate the poles on should be based on conflicts with overhead and underground utilities. Where situations allow, consideration should be given to a staggered arrangement if that provides the best lighting.

:At approaches to intersections, where the roadway widens out to include turn lanes, it may be necessary to light the street from both sides in order to achieve the required lighting criteria. The desired pole arrangement in this case would be staggered across the street.

====      Pole Location Preferences on Divided Thoroughfare Streets: ====
:Streetlight poles with two luminaires oriented 180° apart should be located in the center of raised medians in the case of divided thoroughfares. It is acceptable to locate streetlight poles in medians measuring a minimum of 4’ from back of curb to back of curb, since all poles will be mounted on breakaway supports.

:If the center median is depressed instead of raised, the poles should be located on the outside curb lines. The minimum distance from the back of curb to the center of the streetlight pole should be 3’. The arrangement of poles on the outside edges would preferably be staggered, but will vary depending on how wide the median is and how many lanes are in each direction.

:At approaches to intersections, where the roadway widens out to include multiple turn lanes, it may be necessary to light the street from both sides in order to achieve the required lighting criteria. The pole arrangement may be staggered to the median, opposite the median or staggered across the street, which ever provides the overall best lighting levels and pole spacing.

=== Overhead Utility Line Clearance Requirements: ===
Overhead power lines or lower hanging cable lines should not be in contact with streetlight poles or luminaires. A minimum of 3’ horizontal and vertical clearance shall be maintained from any non-electric lines such as cable TV lines, aerial fiber lines, etc. Vertical and horizontal clearance to electric power lines shall be in accordance with KCP&L requirements and varies according to the line voltage. For lower voltage lines, the vertical and horizontal clearance should be in accordance with [[Media:KCP&L Minimum Clearance Requirements.pdf|KCP&L Code Requirements DWG 130.1-12]]. The designer shall be responsible to determine if adequate clearance can be achieved and make adjustments to the pole locations or coordinate utility relocation if necessary. Whenever the vertical or horizontal distance from the nearest line to the pole or luminaire is less than 10’, KCP&L requires the line to be sleeved temporarily during the pole erection. The contractor will be required to contact KCP&L and coordinate the time the sleeves are necessary and to pay KCP&L a fee for their services.

=== Conduit Location Preferences: ===
All electrical cable for streetlight circuits shall be installed in conduit continuous from appurtenance to appurtenance. An appurtenance is defined as a pole, junction box, service box or control center. Conduits shall be installed approximately perpendicular to any roadway crossings.

On residential and collector streetlighting designs or undivided thoroughfare designs, it is desirable to run the electrical conduit in a straight line from pole to pole or pole to junction box. Desirably, the conduit should be located in the grass parkway between the back of curb and the sidewalk. In case of conflicts, the conduit may be located under the sidewalk as long as the conduit sweeps out from underneath the sidewalk to enter junction boxes and poles. Conduit installed parallel to the street should not be installed under the roadway or curb. Conduit should be installed under the street only when crossing from one side to the other.

On divided thoroughfare projects, where poles are located in the medians, the conduit location depends on the width of the median and whether the median consists of a concrete base with brick pavers or if the median consists of grass and/or landscaping. The design layout should indicate which of the “Miscellaneous Conduit Details” applies to each streetlight pole. The various “Miscellaneous Conduit Details” are shown on the General Notes and Legend Sheet in the Standard Details. Theses details should be consulted while reviewing the following discussion which outlines both situations.

====      Brick Paver Medians: ====
:When the median is a concrete base with brick pavers, the conduit should be installed near the centerline of the median and run in a straight line from pole to pole. At intersections, conduit runs from median nose to median nose should be offset slightly so it is not directly under the proposed object marker sign post that will be located directly behind the concrete median nose. This allows the sign post to be driven into the ground at the correct location without damaging the conduit.

====      Grass or Landscaped Medians: ====
:When the median consists of grass or landscaping, the conduit should be shown to be installed 3’ behind the median curb and swept into the center of the median at each streetlight pole location. This allows the median to be landscaped between streetlight poles without the danger of cutting the conduit or cable in the future. Conduit runs from median nose to median nose should be offset slightly so it is not directly under the proposed object marker sign post that will be located directly behind the concrete median nose. This allows the sign post to be driven into the ground at the correct location without damaging the conduit.

:Conduit crossing the header between brick paver medians and grass medians should transition from the center of the median under the brick pavers, to within 3’ from the back of the median curb.

====      Grass Parkways: ====
:When the streetlights are installed in the grass parkway between the curb and sidewalk, the streetlighting conduit should sweep from the streetlight pole to the front edge of the sidewalk. This allows the grass parkway to be clear for the planting of street trees.

====      Parallel Circuits: ====
:Parallel circuits are described as multiple circuit cables in the same conduit or circuit cables in separate conduits that are adjacent to each other.

:Parallel circuit cables shall not be allowed to enter any streetlight pole foundation such that one set of circuit cables is connected to the streetlight(s) and the other circuit cables are "passed through" the pole or be routed around a pole within the same conduit. Parallel circuits shall not extend past the first pole from the controller cabinet and shall be split out in different directions at a junction box in advance of that first pole.

:Two 2” parallel conduits should be installed from the streetlight control center foundation to the Type 2 junction box immediately adjacent to the control center. Each conduit is able to carry two circuits (total of 6 cables) without exceeding the 40% fill.

====      Coordination with Traffic Signals at Intersections: ====
:At signalized intersections, the streetlighting conduit should tie into the traffic signal service box located near the median nose. The streetlighting cable should be located in the traffic signal conduit runs around the intersection instead of continuing directly from median nose to median nose through the center of the intersection.

=== Junction Box Locations: ===
Junction boxes should be installed whenever a branch circuit enters the main circuit. The junction box is used as a splice point for the cables that control the same circuit, as a future splice point for a branch circuit, or a pass through to facilitate ease of cable pulling. The following conditions in which junction boxes should be installed are described in more detail below.

====      Proposed or Future Branch Circuit at Intersections: ====
:When streetlights are installed along one side of the street, as on residential streets, collector streets or undivided thoroughfare streets, one junction box should be installed at each intersection. The preferred location is on the corner opposite of the streetlight (See Figure 5a). If there is not a proposed or future branch circuit coming into that box, a Type 1 junction box should be used. If a proposed or future branch circuit will enter a box, a Type 2 junction box should be used. If a branch circuit, or proposed future branch circuit, ties into the main line circuit on the same corner the streetlight is located, the Type 2 junction box should be located on the same corner instead of on the opposite corner (See Figure 5b). Junction boxes should not be installed on both sides of a street crossing.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
|[[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 5a.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 5a - No Branch Circuit
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
|[[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 5b.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 5b - Branch Circuit
|}

====      Median Noses at Divided Thoroughfare Street Intersections: ====
:At unsignalized thoroughfare intersections where the streetlighting conduit runs from median nose to median nose, Type 1 junction boxes should be installed in each median nose. If a branch circuit or future branch circuit will tie into the mainline cable, a Type 2 junction box should be used in the median nose at the point of the branch circuit connection. In the case of a future branch circuit, the conduit should be installed across the thoroughfare lanes and terminated in a Type 1 junction box on the corner for future connection. A 1c#10 AWG locating cable should be installed in the, otherwise empty, conduit.

:In the case of a signalized intersection, there would most likely be a traffic signal service box located in the median. The streetlighting cable should be installed in the traffic signal conduit and not median nose to median nose. The streetlighting conduit would be terminated at the service box.

====      Connecting into Existing Circuits: ====
:Junction boxes should be used to tie into an existing circuit when it is not feasible to extend the proposed conduit to the next streetlight pole. This may happen at the boundary of a construction project. In those cases, the existing streetlighting cable should be field located during construction and a junction box should be installed over the top. The cable splice from new to existing should be accomplished in the junction box.

====      At the End of Platted Streets Between Building Phases: ====
:Many times on developer constructed projects, the last streetlight pole does not end up at the end of the street section. In these cases, it is acceptable to install a Type 1 junction box at the end of the street so the conduit can be easily extended on the next building phase. Care should be taken to prevent the proliferation of junction boxes. The designer should plan accordingly to eliminate junction boxes whenever possible.

=== Streetlight Control Centers: ===
Streetlight control centers are pre-wired cabinets with relays, breakers, etc. that control when the streetlights receive electricity based on built-in photo controls. Each control center will require a photo cell to energize the streetlighting circuits. Power is provided to the individual streetlight poles only when it is dark enough to close the contact in the photo cell. Otherwise, there is no power in the system. This is a safety feature so any excavation work that cuts the cable during daylight hours will not be posed with live electrical power.

The normal design is a four circuit control center. Many times a 4-circuit controller will never control more than two or three circuits. However, every attempt should be made to locate it such that the number of circuits on one control center can be maximized.

Upon the approval of the project manager, a 1-circuit control center may be used. A 1-circuit control center may be applicable as a temporary installation between two building phases where the development master plan indicates that a new control center will be installed in subsequent development phases that will ultimate assume the load. There may also be applications in isolated areas, where it may make sense to install a single circuit controller where there is no possible way to connect to an existing streetlighting circuit or control center. One example is along the border between Overland Park and another city, where a cul-de-sac street extends into a neighborhood from the thoroughfare street. The City staff has the ultimate authority to approve or deny the use of a single circuit control center.

====      Streetlight Control Center Locations: ====
:Streetlight control center locations are subject to provisions in [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-5768City of Overland Park Municipal Code 18.180.070, Item G]. A summary of the ordinance outlining the requirements for streetlight control centers and the application to streetlight control centers is provided, herein. The preferred location in order of priority is modified to apply to current practice in the case of streetlight control centers.

=====            Utility Structure Ordinance: =====
::Any structure located within the public right-of-way shall be located behind the sidewalk and is subject to approval by the City Engineer. When placing utility structures, priority shall be given to finding available utility easements or right-of-way in preferred locations. Preferred locations, as listed in order of priority, are:
:#Properties developed with non-residential uses
:#Thoroughfare landscape/utility easements
:#Street side yards on a corner lot behind the front yard setback, and
:#Front yards within the required side yard setback.
::Locating streetlight controllers in rear yards should be avoided. Proper utility easements or streetlight easements shall be acquired if the controller is to be located outside of the right-of-way.

=====            Outside of Intersection Sight Distance Triangles: =====
::Street light control centers should not be located within the intersection sight distance triangle as defined by [https://bookstore.transportation.org/collection_detail.aspx?ID=110 A Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets] by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), latest edition.

=====            Proximity to Power Source: =====
::The streetlight control center needs to be located within close proximity to the KCP&L power source, whether it is a power pole with a transformer or a ground mounted transformer. KCP&L requires that the distance from the control center to a pole mounted transformer cannot exceed 150’. The distance from the control center to a ground mounted transformer cannot exceed 200’.

=====            Maximizing Control Center Circuits: =====
::Streetlight control centers have the capacity to operate four independent circuits and should be located such that the number of circuits utilized can be maximized. Ideal locations would be at a 4-leg intersection where one circuit can extend in all the four cardinal directions or at 3-leg intersections where at least three circuits can be utilized.

::There will be situations where the voltage drop becomes too great between intersections and a controller has to be located mid-block which will only utilize two circuits. Before arbitrarily determining to install a mid-block circuit, the designer should evaluate all possible alternatives, including the extension of existing circuits on the side streets from existing control centers within the development.

::The designer, with the help of the City staff, should evaluate all existing control centers in the vicinity of the project to determine if there are any underutilized controllers that can be relocated to a better location and could still be used to back-feed the existing streetlights. The ultimate goal is to reduce the number of control centers in an area by placing them or relocating them in a more strategic location. This may require some off-site construction work to accommodate.

====      Control Center Orientation: ====
:Streetlight control centers shall be oriented such that the photocell always faces to the north or to the east. The plan symbol for the control center shows a concrete pad which always indicates the front side of the cabinet. As you would stand on the pad facing the front of the control center, the photocell is always located on the right hand side of the cabinet. The shaded portion of the triangle in the symbol represents the photocell.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 6.JPG|500px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 6
|}

====      Circuit Numbering Convention ====
:Circuit numbers will be identified by the principal direction the circuit extends. There are times, especially on residential streets, where the circuit extends in many directions. The principal direction should follow the numbering as listed below.
:Circuit number 1 shall always be to the north
:Circuit number 2 shall always be to the east
:Circuit number 3 shall always be to the south
:Circuit number 4 shall always be to the west
:Exceptions are if modifying an existing control center which already is configured differently.

See the figure below for additional information regarding controller cabinet and conduit requirements and circuit numbering convention
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Controller and Conduit Configuration.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|
|}

=== Connecting Proposed Electrical Cable into Existing Streetlight Poles: ===
When extending proposed conduit into an existing streetlight pole foundation, several things should be considered in the design. If the pole is mounted to an existing screw-in foundation, the designer should verify with the City project manager that it is new enough to have two conduit entry holes. If it is an older foundation, it may only have one conduit entry. If the existing foundation is concrete, you will not be able to connect a new conduit to extend the circuit. In either the case of an old screw-in foundation with only one conduit entry or a concrete foundation, the designer will have to either install a junction box near the pole to intercept the existing cable/conduit, or replace the foundation with a new screw-in foundation. When connecting the proposed electrical cables to the existing electrical cables in the base of the pole, new fused and un-fused disconnects as well as new multi-tap electrical connectors shall be used. The existing fixture should also be shown to be re-lamped.

=== Luminaires Located on Combination Traffic Signal/Streetlight Poles: ===
All luminaires mounted on combination traffic signal/streetlight poles at signalized intersections shall be connected to the streetlighting circuits controlled by the streetlighting control center instead of running off of the traffic signal control center.

Exceptions exist for isolated intersections where there are no surrounding streetlight control centers or streetlighting circuits. In such cases, the 3-1c #4 AWG USE streetlighting cables should be extended to the traffic signal control center for power. In addition, the designer should provide necessary notation to indicate that the multi-tap ballasts in any HPS luminaire should be wired for 120V. If the fixture is LED, the driver should not have to be modified. The luminaires should be equipped with photocells. A 15 amp circuit breaker should be called out to be installed in the secondary service pedestal to isolate the lighting circuit.

=== Requirements for House Addresses on Equipment: ===
Streetlight control centers and streetlight poles shall each be assigned a house address. The reasons for doing so and the procedures to accomplish each are discussed below:

====      House Addresses for Streetlight Poles: ====
:House addresses are field stenciled on streetlight poles to help maintenance crews respond to lamp outages or maintenance issues when a citizen calls the situation in or if the maintenance crews are being dispatched to take care of a problem. It is a way to call-in and respond to specific problems and the address identifies the exact pole that requires attention.

:House addresses are only required for streetlight poles on collector or thoroughfare streets for poles providing 30’ and 40’ mounting heights. House addresses are not required for streetlights on residential streets providing 15’ mounting heights, because the address on the house provides similar information.

:During the design, the City staff will provide the specific house numbers to the designer to add to the pole callout nomenclature. The standard practice is to assign an address at each end of the poles located at a median break or intersection. The two addresses are subtracted and the number is divided by one number less than the number of poles. The resulting number is then systematically added to the initial number, beginning with the smallest address and working toward the end. This establishes a uniform numbering system between the median breaks or intersections. Each address should be rounded to the closest numbered address. Pole addresses in a median should always be even numbers. Poles located on the south or east side of the street shall have odd numbered addresses. Poles located on the north or west side of the street shall have even numbered addresses. An example for a divided thoroughfare with the poles located in the center median follows:
:Example:
:There is a median break on College Boulevard at King and Nieman Road. The 100 block for Nieman is 11100. The 100 block for King is 11300. A streetlight is located in the west median nose at Nieman and is assigned an address of 11108. Another streetlight is located in the east median nose at King and is assigned an address of 11294. Assume that there will be eight poles total between the two median noses.

:(11294 - 11108) = 26.6
:::(8-1)
:This is the number that should be added to the initial assigned pole address beginning at the smallest address.

:Therefore, the next pole west of Nieman should be (11108 + 26.6) = 11134.6 (Round the address to 11134).
:The next pole address would be 11134.6 + 26.6 = 11161.2 (Round the address to 11162).
:Continue adding 26.6 to all subsequent non-rounded addresses, and rounding to the nearest even number for each pole.

====      House Addresses for Streetlight Control Centers: ====
:Each streetlight control center requires an electrical service address. City staff will provide the control center address to the designer after the designer determines the location and whether Kansas City Power and Light (KCP&L) can provide the necessary 240V power to the proposed location. KCP&L uses the address for billing electrical usage to the City. The City also uses the address to track invoices.

:Each address for the streetlight control center shall be followed with an “LC” extension which stands for “Lighting Controller”. The procedure for coordinating with KCP&L is addressed below in [[#Coordinating_Electrical_Service_with_KCP.26L:|“Coordinating Electrical Service with KCP&L”]].

====      Showing House Addresses on the Plans: ====
:House addresses for the streetlight control center should be shown in the station and offset callout for the pole and also should be the first number designated in each pole callout. For example:

:11302-1-4 (8',12") (11134)
::Sta 10+23.5, 30.2' Rt

:The 11302 represents the control center address; the 1 represents circuit number 1; and the 4 represents the 4th pole on circuit number 1. The 8’ and 12’ represents the luminaire bracket arm length on the left side and the right side, respectively and the 11134 is the assigned house address for the pole.

:House addresses for each pole should be shown in parenthesis immediately behind the callout for the controller address, circuit number, pole number and arm length information according to the legend in the Standard Details.

:The streetlight control center address should also be shown in a box located in the bottom right hand portion of each plan sheet in which it applies. If poles connected to that control center appear on more than one sheet, the address should appear on the same sheets. If there are poles that are fed from different control centers on one sheet, each control center address should appear on the sheet. The general format of the note should be:

:{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;"
|-
|Proposed Streetlight Control Center
|-
|Electrical Service Address:
|-
|11302 LC College Blvd
|}

:The existing address for each control center that is being removed or used in place should also be indicated in a boxed note, replacing “Proposed” with either “Remove” or “Existing”.

=== Coordinating Electrical Service with KCP&L: ===
The project manager or designer should perform the initial work to locate the streetlighting control center based on field conditions where there is an existing transformer. The streetlight control center needs to be located within close proximity to the KCP&L power source, whether it is a power pole with a transformer or a ground mounted transformer. In general, KCP&L requires that the distance from the control center to a pole mounted transformer cannot exceed 150’. The distance from the control center to a ground mounted transformer cannot exceed 200’.

KCP&L should be contacted, either verbally or in writing, to verify if power can be obtained at a particular location before a lot of design work is completed. In either case, it is beneficial to send them a plan sheet or meet them in the field. When requesting power, ask if there will be a charge to obtain power at the desired location. KCP&L can generally provide power anywhere, but there may be a significant cost to do so. Ask if there is a better location where they have an existing transformer or sectionalizer that would be better or cheaper to acquire power from. If the control center can be relocated to a better position, make the design change. If not, ask KCP&L to provide an estimate to the City for the cost associated with obtaining power before the design is finalized.

The designer should provide the City a copy of all letter correspondence or email correspondence to KCP&L to insure the necessary procedures are being performed.
After KCP&L has agreed to a preliminary power source and location, the project manager or designer should prepare a preliminary plan sheet showing the location of the power pole and the location of the control center with conduit and notes indicating the location where power will be obtained. After the power location has been established, the project manager will then assign an electrical service address to each control center as outlined in the City's [http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Phase_II_-_Preliminary_Design#Task_No._26_-_Coordinate_Electrical_Service_for_Traffic_Signals_and_Street_Lighting|Project Procedures Manual, Preliminary Design-Task No. 26 “Coordinate Electrical Service for Traffic Signals and Streetlighting"]. There you will find the Electrical Service Address Procedures, a form for Electrical Service Application and a sample letter to KCP&L requesting power service.

=== Removal of Existing Streetlights: ===
All existing streetlights that will be removed shall be identified on the plan sheets. The exact procedure varies depending on whether the existing streetlights are the ones that were purchased from KCP&L or if they are existing lights that were installed per the City of Overland Park standard details. The procedures for both are explained below:

====      Removal of Existing City Owned Streetlights Installed per Overland Park Standard Details: ====
:All existing City owned streetlights shall be shown on the plans. Any existing streetlights that will not be re-used in the final design shall be indicated to be removed by a construction note. The note should include the removal of the pole, luminaire, arm and screw-in foundation. Existing concrete pole foundations should be shown to be removed to a depth of at least 24”. All conduit and cable can be abandoned in place or can be removed at the option of the contractor if it is in conflict with other construction items.

====      Removal of Existing Streetlights Purchased from KCP&L: ====
:All existing streetlights shall be shown on the plans. The City will determine which lights should be designated to be removed. The designer shall indicate any pole not to be re-used as “Existing Streetlight to be Removed by Others”. The City of Overland Park or their on-call representative will remove the poles and not the project contractor.

:Each pole purchased from KCP&L has a PK number designated with a sticker, such as PK-1423. The designer should indicate the proper PK number on the plans next to the pole.

:City staff will coordinate with their on-call representative for the removal of the lights following the City's [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Phase_II_-_Preliminary_Design#Task_No._26b_-_Coordinate_Removal_of_Streetlights_Purchased_from_Evergy_.28KCP.26L.29|Project Procedures Manual, Phase II-Preliminary Design, Task 26b "Coordinate Removal of Streetlights Purchased from KCP&L"] during the design process and [http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Phase_V_-_Construction#Task_No._11a_-_Coordinate_Removal_of_Streetlights_Purchased_from_KCP.26L|Project Procedures Manual, Phase V-Construction-Task 11a "Coordinate Removal of Streetlights Purchased from KCP&L"] during the construction phase. The process involves writing the on-call representative to provide them a list of poles that are scheduled to be removed. The on-call representative will submit a cost estimate to perform the work which needs to be approved by the Director of Public Works. After approval, the project manager will coordinate the removal with the on-call representative and notify in an attempt to keep the lights operational as long as possible before being removed. A letter will then be sent to KCP&L instructing them to remove the lights from their database and revise their monthly billing.

=== Voltage Drop Calculations: ===
Voltage drop is an important factor in determining how many luminaires can be placed on any circuit. The voltage drop in any electrical circuit is directly dependent upon current and wire resistance.

====      Permissible Voltage Drop:====
:The permissible voltage drop is the allowable voltage drop across an entire circuit of a specific system voltage. This is generally limited to what the fixture can handle.

:With the constant wattage ballast, the permissible voltage drop is five percent of the system voltage. A factor of 0.95 is to be applied to the system voltage to allow for line fluctuations. This results in an allowable drop of 11.4 volts for a 240-volt circuit.
:Example:
:Perm Voltage Drop = System Voltage x 5% Drop x 0.95 line fluctuation factor
:::::::= 240 x 0.05 x 0.95
:::::::= 11.4 volts

====      HPS Fixture Operating Current: ====
:Operating current is determined using 95 percent of the system voltage to allow for line fluctuations. In addition, the lamp wattage is increased by a factor of 1.3 to allow for ballast load. The formula for power is P = V x I and the formula for current is I = P / V.
:The operating amps for each luminaire are based on the wattage of the lamp used.

:Operating Amps =      1.3 x Wattage                            
:::::::Voltage x Line Fluctuation Factor

:Operating Amps = 1.3 x Wattage
:::::::240 x 0.95

:The following operating amps should be used in the design calculations for HPS fixtures:

:{| width="400px" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
! colspan="5" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|HPS Fixture Operating Amps
|-
!400 Watt
!310 Watt
!250 Watt
!150 Watt
!100 Watt
|-
| align="center"|2.3 Amps
| align="center"|1.8 Amps
| align="center"|1.4 Amps
| align="center"|0.9 Amps
| align="center"|0.6 Amps
|}

====      LED Fixture Operating Current: ====
:Operating current is determined using 95 percent of the system voltage to allow for line fluctuations. Since LED fixtures have a driver instead of a ballast, there is no multiplier for ballast loss. The formula for power is P = V x I and the formula for current is I = P / V.
:The operating amps for each luminaire are based on the wattage of the lamp used.

:Operating Amps =                Wattage                            
:::::::Voltage x Line Fluctuation Factor

:Operating Amps = Wattage
::::::240 x 0.95

:LED fixtures in the same class have different wattages based on the manufacturer. The values shown in the following table are based on the worse case scenario for approved LED fixtures in each luminaire classification and should therefore be used in the voltage drop calculations:

:{| width="500px" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
! colspan="6" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|LED Fixture Operating Amps
|-
!Class A
!Class B
!Class C
!Class D
!Class E
!Residential LED Lamp
|-
| align="center"|0.9 Amps
| align="center"|0.8 Amps
| align="center"|0.6 Amps
| align="center"|0.4 Amps
| align="center"|0.2 Amps
| align="center"|0.2 Amps
|}

====      Cable Circular Mils: ====
:A circular mil is a unit of area used when denoting the cross sectional area of a wire or cable.

:1 mil = 0.001 inch

:To convert the diameter of a wire to mils: mil = d x 1,000
:Example: #4 AWG wire has a diameter of 0.2043037 inches.
:0.2043037 inches x 1,000 = 204.3037 or 204 mils
:CM = mil2

:Example: Circular mils of #4 AWG wire
:CM = (204.3037 mils)2
:CM = 41,740

====      Calculating Voltage Drop: ====
:According to Ohm's Law the voltage drop in a line is equal to the current in amperes multiplied by the resistance of the line in ohms:

:E = I x R
:Where:
::E = voltage
::I = Current (in amperes)
::R = Resistance (in ohms)

:Since the resistance of a wire conductor is inversely proportional to the cross-sectional area of the wire, increased voltage drops are developed as the wire diameters decrease. The areas of wires in circular mils and the resistance in ohms per 1000 feet that should be used in calculations are shown below for #4 AWG copper cable.

:{| width="400px" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
! colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Properties of Stranded Copper Conductors
|-
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Cable Size (AWG)
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Area (Circular Mils)
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|AC Resistance (Ohms/1,000 ft)
|-
| align="center"|4
| align="center"|41,740
| align="center"|0.310
|}

:The voltage drop in any line is calculated from the formula:

:Voltage Drop = 2 x K x Q x I x D
:::::::CM

:Where:
::K = Direct Current Constant (for copper, K = 12.9 ohms)
::Q = Aternating Current Adjustment Factor (Q = 1, for all wire less than 2/0 wire)
::I = Load, in Ampers
::D = Distance from the power supply, in feet
::CM = Cross sectional area of cable, in Circular Mills

:Voltage Drop = 2 x 12.9 x 1.0 x Operating Amps x Distance
:::::::::CM

:Add 5% to the center to center distance to allow for snaking of the conduit and cable.
:Operating amps = the operating amps of one fixture times the number of fixtures at the point of calculation. Transposing this formula, the required area in circular mils can be computed:

:Area (circular mils) = 25.8 x Operating Amps x No. of Lamps x 1.05 x Distance
::::::::::Permissible Voltage Drop

:Calculate the circular mils between every fixture in the circuit and add the total number of circular mils to get the total circular mils. Verify that this is less than the circular mils for a #4 AWG cable.

:The voltage drop should then be checked using the following equation:

:Voltage Drop = 2 x L x I x R as follows:

:Voltage Drop = 2 x Distance x Current x Resistance ÷1,000

:Where:
::L = Distance between lights. Use 1.05 x distance (5% to allow for snaking)
::I = Current = operating amps x number of lamps
::R = Resistance of cable per 1,000 feet = 0.31 (From above Table, the resistance of #4 AWG wire in ohms/1,000 ft)

:If circuit loading or voltage drop requires a larger wire size than a #4 AWG then one or more of the following can be considered:
#Locate the control center closer to the lighting system
#Install additional control centers
:Note that long runs of parallel circuits should be avoided unless otherwise approved

:Example to Determine Necessary Wire Cable Size:
:Given: Five 250-watt HPS lamps on a 240-volt circuit spaced at 200, 425, 615, 815 and 1,030 feet respectively, from the control center. There must be sufficient current to operate the first lamp as well as the next four lamps.

:1.05 x 200 ft x 1.4 amps x 5 lamps x 25.8/11.4 = 3,327 cir. mils to 1st lamp
:1.05 x 225 ft x 1.4 amps x 4 lamps x 25.8/11.4 = 2,994 cir. mils to 2nd lamp
:1.05 x 190 ft x 1.4 amps x 3 lamps x 25.8/11.4 = 1,896 cir. mils to 3rd lamp
:1.05 x 200 ft x 1.4 amps x 2 lamps x 25.8/11.4 = 1,331 cir. mils to 4th lamp
:1.05 x 215 ft x 1.4 amps x 1 lamp x 25.8/11.4 = 715 cir. mils to 5th lamp
:Total Area = 10,263 cir. mils.

:The calculated circular mils is less than the capacity of a #4 AWG wire (41,740 as shown in the above Table. This calculation will need to be made for each circuit at each streetlight control center.

:The voltage drop should then be checked using E = I x R as follows:

:Voltage Drop = 2 x Distance x Current x Resistance ÷1,000

:Voltage Drop = 2 x Distance x Operating Amps x No. of lamps x Resistance÷1,000

:2 x 1.05 x 200 ft x 1.4 amps x 5 lamps x 0.31 ohms/1,000 ft = 0.91 volt drop to 1st lamp
:2 x 1.05 x 225 ft x 1.4 amps x 4 lamps x 0.31 ohms/1,000 ft = 0.82 volt drop to 2nd lamp
:2 x 1.05 x 190 ft x 1.4 amps x 3 lamps x 0.31 ohms/1,000 ft = 0.52 volt drop to 3rd lamp
:2 x 1.05 x 200 ft x 1.4 amps x 2 lamps x 0.31 ohms/1,000 ft = 0.36 volt drop to 4th lamp
:2 x 1.05 x 215 ft x 1.4 amps x 1 lamp x 0.31 ohms/1,000 ft = 0.20 volt drop to 5th lamp
:Total Drop = 2.81 volts

:2.81 volts/(240 volts x .95) = 1.23% which is less than 5%. Therefore it is acceptable

====      Calculating Circuit Breaker Ratings: ====
:Circuit breakers are protective devices for over-current conditions. When the current passing through the circuit breaker exceeds a predetermined amount, the breaker trips and opens the faulty circuit. The amount of current required to operate the trip mechanism is referred to as the "trip rating". Proper protection of the circuit requires a breaker with the correct "tripping" current value. This value, "trip rating", can be readily computed by totaling the number of luminaires for each circuit breaker and thereby obtaining the total current being used in the circuit. To prevent unnecessary tripping of the breaker during surges and in-rush currents, the total current is usually multiplied by a factor of 1.3.

:Example:Using the previous example: 5 each - 250-watt luminaires require a normal operating current of 5 x 1.4 amps = 7 amps

:The line loss load in amperes is added as follows:

:14.5 watts/(240 volts x 0.95) + 7 amps = 7.1 amps

:The Trip rating = 7.1 amps x (1.3) = 9.2 amps.

:The streetlight controller is equipped with standard 30 amp circuit breakers. The circuit breakers can be increased to a 40 amp breaker under heavier loads. For the above example, a 30-amp breaker is more than sufficient.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Design Considerations:|'''Design Considerations:''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Design Considerations:]]
|}
----

== Approved Streetlighting Equipment: ==
The following equipment has been approved for all City-owned streetlighting systems. The following information is provided as a general discussion only and the designer is responsible to review the standard details in the selection of equipment for the streetlighting system.

=== Streetlight Poles: ===
The type of pole used is based on the classification of street it will be located on. Poles and mounting heights will vary depending on if it is a residential street, collector street or thoroughfare street.

====      Residential Streets: ====
:Poles for residential streets shall be round, tapered aluminum poles for 15-foot mounting heights.

====      Collector Streets: ====
:Poles for collector streets shall be round, tapered aluminum poles for 30-foot mounting heights.

====      Thoroughfare Streets: ====
:Poles for thoroughfare streets shall be round, tapered aluminum poles for 40-foot mounting heights.

=== Luminaire Bracket Arms: ===
For conventional lighting systems, there are several different arm lengths and styles of arms that are used. The various styles and lengths and the appropriate uses for each are summarized below.

====      Arm Styles: ====
:Type A luminaire bracket arms consist of a single member arm. Type A arms are used when the length is less than 10’. An exception to this is in applications where one pole has two arms, regardless of the orientation. If one arm is required to be a Type B style, the other arm should also be a Type B style to provide a consistent look, even if the arm is less than 10’ in length.

:Type B luminaire bracket arms consist of a two member truss arm design. Type B arms are used when the length is 10’ or greater.

====      Arm Lengths: ====
:The length of the bracket arm is dependant upon many factors such as street width, pole location in relation to the curb and the presence of a median. Typical preferences are provided as follows, but the selection of an arm length should be used that enables the designer to achieve the required lighting criteria. Single member bracket arms are available in 6’ and 8’ lengths. Twin member bracket arms are available in 10’, 12’ and 15’ lengths. Only bracket arms of these lengths are used.

=====            Collector Streets and Undivided 2-Lane Thoroughfare Streets (30’ Mounting Heights): =====
::On typical collector streets that are 36’ wide from back-of-curb to back-of-curb, either a 6’ or 8’ arm is used. Two-lane thoroughfare streets are typically one lane in each direction with a shoulder or bike lane on the sides, resulting in a similar roadway width to typical collector streets. Depending on whether the pole is located behind the sidewalk or in the grass parkway between the sidewalk and the curb, or where the street width becomes wider, such as the approaches to an intersection where additional turn lanes are added, the arm length may need to be increased to 12’ in order to achieve the required lighting criteria.

=====            Undivided 4-Lane Thoroughfare Streets (40’ Mounting Heights): =====
::On an undivided thoroughfare street, generally 6’, 8’ or 12’ arms are used unless the poles need to be offset farther behind the sidewalk due to utility conflicts or where the street width becomes wider, such as the approaches to an intersection where additional turn lanes are added.

=====            Divided Thoroughfare Streets (40’ Mounting Heights): =====
::Divided thoroughfares typically have a 24’ wide center median to divide opposing lanes of traffic. On divided thoroughfare streets where the light poles are installed in a raised median, there are a few different arm configurations that are used. In sections where there are no left turn lanes and the median is only separating through lanes of traffic, two 12’ arms oriented 180° apart are used.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 7.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 7
|}

::Where the median narrows due to the introduction of a left turn lane, a 12’ arm is installed extending over the left turn lane, and an 8’ arm is installed 180° apart extending over the through lanes in the opposite direction.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 8.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 8
|}

::In some wider sections of thoroughfares, it may be necessary to use twin 15’ arms or a 15’ arm and a 12’ arm in lieu of twin 12’ arms or a 12’ and 8’ arm depending on how wide the median is and how wide the pavement is. When the median is narrower, shorter arm lengths may be used.

::On divided thoroughfare streets with depressed medians, where the poles are located on the outside edges of the roadway, the designer may use 8’, 10’, 12’ or 15’ arms depending on what provides the best lighting design with the longest pole spacing. This will depend on the width of the pavement on each side of the median and the overall width of the median.

=== Luminaires: ===
The type of luminaire used for the design shall be based on the roadway classification, pedestrian conflict area classification and the light level required:

====      Residential Streets: ====
:Luminaires used for residential streets shall be post-top luminaire with retrofit LED lamp meeting the current standard of the City of Overland Park.

====      Collector Streets: ====
:Cobrahead luminaires shall be LED roadway luminaires meeting the current standard of the City of Overland Park. They shall be Class C LED’s (250W HPS equivalent), Class D LED’s (150W HPS equivalent), or Class E LED's (100W HPS equivalent).

====      Thoroughfare Streets: ====
:Luminaires shall be LED roadway luminaires meeting the current standard of the City of Overland Park. They shall be Class A LED’s (400W HPS equivalent), Class B (310W HPS equivalent), Class C LED’s (250W HPS equivalent), or Class D (150W HPS equivalent).

=== LED Lamps: ===
LED lamps shall be (100 watt HPS equivalent) rated at a minimum of 5,000 lumens per the City of Overland Park Approved Materials List.

=== HPS Lamps: ===
HPS lamps may be encountered when designing near existing facilities. Use the following to determine the appropriate lumens for each HPS lamp type:
:400W HPS lamp is 50,000 lumens (cobra head)
:310W HPS lamp is 35,000 lumens (cobra head)
:250W HPS lamp is 30,000 lumens (cobra head)
:150W HPS lamp is 16,000 lumens (cobra head or post top)
:100W HPS lamp is 9,500 lumens (cobra head or post top)
:70W HPS lamp is 5,800 lumens (cobra head or post top)

=== Pole Foundations: ===
There are two main types of pole foundations that are used depending upon the particular situation. The preferred type is the screw-in foundation. However, concrete foundations may be used in specific situations.

====      Screw-in Foundations: ====
:Poles shall generally be installed on galvanized steel screw-in foundations. There are four different types of screw-in foundations that are used for specific pole sizes and configurations according to the standard details.

:Type R foundations are used only with residential style 14’ tall poles (OP14 Series).

:Type T1 foundations are used only for poles with 30’ mounting heights and arm lengths and configurations for OP301, OP302 and OP303 Series poles.

:Type F1 foundations are used for poles with 40’ mounting heights and arm lengths and configurations for OP401 and OP402 Series poles.

:Type F2 foundations are used for poles with 40’ mounting heights and arm length and configurations for OP403 Series poles.

====      Concrete Foundations: ====
:The use of concrete pole foundations should be limited for special situations where a screw-in foundation is not acceptable. Examples of situations where concrete foundations are acceptable are where subsurface rock is encountered which makes it impossible to use a screw-in foundation; when it is necessary to combine a concrete foundation and a concrete retaining wall; or in parking lot areas where it is desirable use a raised concrete foundation to protect the poles from vehicle bumper damage.

=== Streetlight Control Center Foundation: ===
There are two main types of control center foundations that are used depending upon which type of streetlight control center is used. A pad mounted controller foundation for a 4-circuit streetlighting controller is the standard and obviously should be used for 4-circuit controllers. A pad mounted controller foundation for a 1 circuit controller should be used for a 1-circuit streetlighting controller.

=== Conduit: ===
Conduit shall be used for all streetlighting circuit cable as well as for electrical service cable. The type and size varies for the particular installation.

====      Streetlight Circuit Conduit: ====
:Conduit shall be 2" diameter, gray, high density polyethylene (HDPE), SDR 13.5 unless more than two circuit cables are contained in one conduit. If this is the case, a 3" diameter or larger conduit or two parallel 2" diameter conduits should be used that provides enough room for all the cables while still allowing ease of pulling. (See criteria above for discussion on parallel circuits)

====      KCP&L Electrical Service Conduit: ====
:KCP&L has specific requirements for the electrical service conduit. They will accept gray, Schedule 40 PVC conduit in a trenching application. If the conduit will be bored, it has to be SDR 13.5 HDPE (black with red stripes). If the conduit is serving a 4-circuit controller, the size shall be 3”. If the conduit is serving a 1-circuit controller, the size shall be 2” since a 3” conduit will not physically fit into the controller base collar.

=== Electrical Cable: ===
They type of electrical cable is dependant on the particular use. There are four main types of cable:
#Circuit distribution cable,
#Pole and bracket cable,
#KCP&L electrical service cable, and
#Bare copper ground cable.

====      Circuit Distribution Cable: ====
:Only #4 AWG copper USE electrical cables are allowable as circuit cables in conduit from appurtenance to appurtenance. Three wires are required for each circuit. One cable is for the system ground and the other two cables are for each hot leg of a 240volt circuit.

====      Pole and Bracket Cable: ====
:Only #10 AWG copper THHN/THWN electrical cables are allowable in the streetlight pole, luminaire bracket arm and luminaire.

:In situations where HDPE conduit is installed for possible future use, a #10 AWG copper THHN/THWN cable is also used as a locating cable so the conduit can be located in the field.

====      KCP&L Electrical Service Power Cable: ====
:The size of cable used for the electrical service cable should be based on voltage drop calculations from the power supply to the streetlighting controller cabinet. It is preferable to keep the controller cabinet as close to the power supply as possible to minimize the voltage drop and the size of the cable. For a 100 Amp service, the minimum wire size is a #2 AWG copper USE electrical cable.

====      Locating Cable: ====
:Locating cable inserted into an otherwise empty conduit that is installed for future use shall be 1c#10.

====      Solid Copper Ground Cable: ====
:A bare solid copper #6 AWG ground cable is required from the streetlight control center to the adjacent ground rod in order to provide the required grounding according to the National Electric Code.

=== Junction Boxes: ===
There are two types of junction boxes used for streetlighting projects according to their size. Where the streetlighting circuit connects to an existing or a future traffic signal, a traffic signal service box is used in place of a junction box. Each type of junction box is used in the following situations.

====      Type 1 Junction Box: ====
:Type 1 junction boxes are symbolized by a circle with a “J” in it and are used only where in-line splices are used to pass through the box or where one or two conduits enter the same box as shown below.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 9.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 9
|}

====      Type 2 Junction Box: ====
:Type 2 junction boxes are symbolized by a square with a “J” in it and are used where branch circuits are connected to the main circuit or where more than two conduits enter the same box as shown below. A type 2 junction box should also be located immediately adjacent to a streetlight control center.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Streetlight Design Manual Figure 10.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Figure 10
|}

=== Electrical Connector Kits: ===
Electrical connector kits consist of multi-tap connectors, and both fused and non-fused breakaway fuse holders and fuses.

====      Multi-tap Connectors: ====
:Each circuit consists of three #4 AWG copper USE cables coming into the pole and three #4 AWG copper USE cables coming out of the pole. Each set of incoming and outgoing cables will be connected by a multi-tap electrical connectors as detailed in the Standard Details. Three multi-tap connectors will be required in each pole base regardless of the number of luminaires installed on the pole.

====      Breakaway Fuse Holders: ====
:Breakaway fuse holders come as either fused or non-fused. They shall be installed in the base of each streetlight pole so the wires breakaway away free from the pole foundation in case of vehicular impact. Depending on whether you have one or two luminaires on the pole determines how many breakaway fused and non-fused connectors you will have.

#For single mounted luminaires, each pole will have two fused and two non-fused breakaway connectors.
#For twin mounted luminaires, each pole will have two non-fused breakaway connectors and four fused breakaway connectors.

====      Fuses and Slugs: ====
:Fused breakaway connectors are each supplied with an 8 amp fuse. The non-fused breakaway connectors have a ground slug in place of the fuse.

=== Streetlight Control Centers: ===
The City has two types of streetlight control centers that are allowed to be used under specific situations. They are either a single circuit or four circuit control center. Both control centers are designed for a 100 amp service and 240 volt single phase, three wire service. There are limited situations where Kansas City Power and Light Company cannot provide 240 volt service but can provide 208 volt power instead. This will have to be identified on a case by case basis.

=== Photo Cell: ===
Every streetlight control center will require a photo cell to control the on/off operation of the system.

=== Ground Rods and Clamps: ===
A 5/8” x 10’ ground rod and clamp is required at every control center foundation and at every concrete pole foundation, if a screw-in foundation cannot be installed.

=== Breakaway Pole Device: ===
All poles for 30’ and 40’ mounting heights shall be installed on a breakaway pole device. The breakaway device may either consist of four individual breakaway couplings that are installed on each anchor bolt or one frangible breakaway pole base according to the Standard Details. Breakaway pole devices are not required for 14’ residential type streetlight poles or if the light pole is located on a raised concrete base, such as in parking lots, or if the poles is installed on top of a concrete bridge rail.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Approved Streetlighting Equipment:|'''Approved Streetlighting Equipment:''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Approved Streetlighting Equipment:]]
|}
----

== Preparation of Plans: ==
The plans shall be prepared in accordance with the following guidelines unless otherwise pre-approved by the Engineer. The engineer or project manager shall follow the [[Media:Streetlighting Plan Review Check List.pdf|design review checklist]] during plan review or design.

=== Scale: ===
The preferred plan scale for streetlighting plans is 1”=40’. Two lines of the street plans may be located on the same sheet above and below each other. A scale and north arrow shall be indicated on each plan sheet.

=== Topography: ===
The following guidelines shall be followed in the preparation of streetlighting base maps depending on if the design is part of a larger roadway improvement project or if it is a stand-alone streetlighting project.

====      Streetlighting Plans as Part of Other Roadway Improvement Projects: ====
:Features affecting lighting design, such as drive entrances and intersections, curb and median lines, storm drainage pipes and inlets, underground and overhead utilities, existing streetlights, existing control centers, existing lighting circuits, existing junction or service boxes and proposed streetlighting system should be shown on the plans with proper symbols as shown in the “Streetlight Legend” on the Standard Details. All existing and proposed trees and landscaping shall be indicated in order to avoid conflict with new streetlight poles. New construction items should be subdued so the streetlighting conduit, poles, boxes, etc. stand out.

:All existing and proposed right-of-way, easements, etc. shall be shown on the plans. A centerline shall be shown with stationing for the main roadway as well as the side streets to be able to positively locate the poles. Street names shall be shown for major and minor streets.

:House addresses shall be labeled on each lot as well as street names to assist in locating features in the field.

====      Stand-Alone Streetlighting Plans: ====
:It is acceptable for plans to be prepared on aerial photography base maps instead of topographical survey base maps on stand-alone streetlighting plans when they are not part of a larger roadway improvement project. In such cases, underground and overhead utilities shall still be indicated on the plans along with existing streetlights, existing control centers, existing junction or service boxes along with the proposed streetlighting system with proper symbols as shown in the “Streetlight Legend” on the Standard Details.

:All existing and proposed right-of-way, easements, etc. shall also be shown. It is not necessary to develop a centerline as long as the streetlighting equipment is positively located with dimensions to existing features such as driveways, inlets, fire hydrants, etc. House addresses should be labeled on each lot as well as street names to assist in locating features in the field.

=== Plan Coordination with Roadway Design: ===
Lighting plans shall be coordinated with the road, signal, signing plans, etc. to ensure conflicts with other construction features do not exist. The designer needs to become acquainted with features such as existing overhead and underground utilities to avoid conflicts.

=== Plan Submittals: ===
There should be a minimum of three plan submittals for every streetlighting project whether it is a stand-alone project or part of a larger roadway project. Plans should be submitted at the Preliminary, Field Check and Final plan stage. The plans will be reviewed in accordance to the [[Media:Streetlighting Plan Review Check List.pdf|Streetlighting Plan Review Checklist]] as a base.

====      Preliminary Plans: ====
:Preliminary lighting plans should show the location of all poles and luminaires symbolized according to the Standard Details so the reviewer can determine proposed lamp wattage and mounting heights; tentative locations of control centers and power supplies; cable routing and junction boxes. It should also show the point by point lighting levels.

:On stand-alone projects, a cover sheet should be included that identifies the project location, utility contact numbers, scale and north arrow, table of contents, and signature blocks.

:The following information should be included on the General Notes sheet in the plans:
::Pedestrian Conflict Area
::Functional Street Classification

::Luminance Design Criteria (as listed in the Design Criteria Table)
::Avg. Maintained Luminance
::Avg: to Min. Luminance Uniformity Ratio
::Max. to Min. Luminance Uniformity Ratio
::Veiling Luminance Ratio

:Luminance Design Results (based on actual design spacing)
::Avg. Maintained Luminance
::Avg. to Min. Luminance Uniformity Ratio
::Max. to Min. Luminance Uniformity Ratio
::Veiling Luminance Ratio

:Illuminance Design Results
::Avg. Maintained Illuminance
::Avg. to Min. Illuminance Uniformity Ratio
:The illuminance design results should be reported for the design pole spacing so the actual results can be field measured and compared to the calculation results.

====      Field Check Plans: ====
:Field check lighting plans should show the location of all poles and luminaires, final locations of control centers, power supplies, cable routing and junction boxes. Each pole should be identified according to the “Streetlight Designation” in the Standard Details which includes the control center address (show as XXXX or YYYY if unknown at this stage), circuit number, pole number, arm lengths, and station and offset.

:If the streetlighting system cable is running in shared conduit with traffic signal plans, the plans should show the appropriate conduit locations and shall be coordinated with the traffic signal plans. If the proposed lighting circuits will be tied into existing systems, enough detail should be included to be able to ascertain the number of existing lights on the existing circuits in order to verify voltage drop calculations.

:Voltage drop calculations shall be submitted at the field check stage in order to verify the calculations. The Standard Details should be included in the field check submittal, including the Bill of Materials sheet. Quantities do not have to be completed at this stage.

====      Final Plans: ====
:Final lighting plans should include everything as identified in the field check plans. In addition, the final plans should include pole addresses (supplied by the City) for thoroughfare and collector streets. Pole addresses are not required for residential streetlighting plans. All “Miscellaneous Conduit Detail” references shall be identified for each pole. All control centers shall be shown with electrical service addresses and power sources accurately identified. All construction notes to clarify any construction details shall be shown. All Standard Details, including the completed Bill of Materials shall be included at this stage.

:If streetlighting cable is running in proposed traffic signal conduit, identify on both the streetlighting plans and the traffic signal plans under which bid item the conduit and cable will be paid for. If there are combination streetlighting and traffic signal poles, identify whether the poles, luminaires, bracket arms, pole and bracket cable and electrical connectors will be paid for under the traffic signal bid item or the streetlighting bid item.

:Depending on the number of comments made on the first submittal of final plans, a second set of final plans may be requested to verify that all comments have been addressed. The project manager will make that determination and convey his decision to the appropriate design staff.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Preparation of Plans:|'''Preparation of Plans:''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Preparation of Plans:]]
|}
----

== Computation of Quantities: ==
The computation of quantities is critical to providing accurate information to the contractors bidding the project. Errors in the computation of quantities results in project cost change orders and delays in the project. Care should be taken to check quantities against the plan sheet design to verify that all items are included and accurate. What follows are some general guidelines that should be used such that the computation of quantities is consistent for all designs.

=== Streetlight Poles and Bracket Arms: ===
Streetlight poles and associated luminaire arms are always aluminum, unless otherwise specified in the plans or bill of materials. Streetlight poles are quantified per each according to the mounting height with the included bracket arm length and number of bracket arms. For example a 40’ aluminum pole w/ 8’ bracket arm or a 30’ aluminum pole w/ twin 8’ bracket arms.

The pole type should be based on the mounting height, the bracket arm length and the number of bracket arms. Refer to [https://dw.opkansas.org/public/FileCabinets/2fa13812-70a3-4126-848b-3a20df7175c3/Documents/9904/FileDownload?targetFileType=Auto&keepAnnotations=false Table 1 – Luminaire Arm, Pole, Shoe Base & Anchor Bolt Data] on the Standard Detail sheet “Pole and Luminaire Details” to find the proper OP Designation that is required, such as OP14, OP301, OP402, etc. The pole designation is based on the number and length of the bracket arm as well as the mounting height. For example, a pole with a 40’ mounting height with one 12’ type B bracket arm corresponds to a OP402 series pole designation. The number of each pole type with the proper number and length of bracket arms should be listed in the Bill of Materials.

Combination lighting/signal poles are always steel, including the luminaire arms. If a combination lighting/signal pole is installed in a location where a future traffic signal is being considered, Chart B of the Traffic Signal Bill of Materials should be copied to the lighting sheet and filled out completely. This chart will be used to verify the length of the future mast arm that was considered. The combination lighting/signal pole quantity will include the luminaire bracket arm of the specified length in Chart B.

=== Pole Foundations: ===
foundations of the various types should be measured per each for each type used in the design.

====      Screw-in Foundations: ====
:Refer to the [https://dw.opkansas.org/public/FileCabinets/2fa13812-70a3-4126-848b-3a20df7175c3/Documents/9904/FileDownload?targetFileType=Auto&keepAnnotations=false Screw-in Foundation Detail table] on the Standard Detail sheet “Pole Foundation Details” to select the foundation type based on the OP pole series designation. For example, a OP401 pole designation requires an F1 foundation. A OP403 pole designation requires an F2 foundation.

====      Concrete Pole Foundations: ====
:When used, they should be measured per each for the various sizes based on mounting heights of 14’, 30’ or 40’. A concrete pole foundation cap should be included for each concrete pole foundation.

=== Luminaires: ===
Luminaires should be measured per each according to the type used in the plans.

====      Luminaires on Collector Streets: ====
:On collector streets, the cobrahead luminaires shall be LED cobraheads of the specified Class C, D or E as shown in the design.

====      Luminaires on Thoroughfare Streets: ====
:On thoroughfare streets, the luminaires shall be LED cobraheads of the specified Class A, B, or C as shown in the design.

====      Luminaires on Residential Streets: ====
:On residential streets, fixtures should be post top luminaires, including the LED lamp. When relamping existing post top luminaires, revise one of the lines of text in the Bill of Materials to read “LED Lamp Retrofit” and fill in the quantity of the number of individual lamps required.

=== Junction and Service Boxes: ===
Junction boxes and service boxes should be measured per each according to the various types. If the streetlighting conduit and cable ties into a traffic signal service box that is being constructed as part of the project, the service box should be included in the traffic signal Bill of Materials. If the service box is installed in anticipation for a future traffic signal, then it should be included in the streetlighting Bill of Materials. The designer should make it clear on the plans how the measurement and payment will be made.

=== Control Centers: ===
Streetlighting control centers should be measured per each based on the type of control center used. Occasionally, an existing control center is relocated to a new concrete foundation. In these instances, revise one of the lines of text in the Bill of Materials to read “Relocate Existing Control Center on New Foundation”.

=== Concrete Control Center Foundations: ===
Concrete control center foundations should be measured per each based on the type of control center used. A quantity should also be included for a concrete control center foundation when an existing controller is being relocated on a new foundation.

=== Ground Rods: ===
Ground rods should be measured per each. One ground rod should be included for every concrete control center foundation. If a concrete streetlight foundation is used for a particular application, one ground rod should be included for each. Ground rod clamps are subsidiary to the ground rod.

=== Photo Cells: ===
Photo cells should be measured per each. One photo cell is required in every new streetlight control center. Relocated control centers will be able to re-use the existing photo cell.

=== Conduits: ===
Conduit should be measured per linear foot for each type and diameter used.

====      KCP&L Electrical Service Conduit: ====
:Conduit should be measured from the center of the streetlight controller (not the center of the entire pad) to the center of the power pole or transformer plus 4’ to allow for the large radius sweeps at each end. No additional measurement will be made for PVC conduit elbows or conduit fittings.

:Example: If the center to center distance is 100’, the conduit length required is 100’ + 4’ = 104’

====      1” PVC Conduit for Equipment Ground: ====
:PVC conduit should be provided at each concrete control center foundation and at each concrete pole foundation. Add 3' of 1" PVC conduit at each control center foundation or concrete pole foundation.

====      HDPE Conduit: ====
:HDPE conduit should be measured from the center of one appurtenance to the center of another appurtenance plus additional lengths for conduit sweeps. Conduit elbows, conduit fittings or couplings shall be considered subsidiary to the conduit.

:*Add 4’ of conduit to the center to center distance between two streetlight poles.
:*Add 3’ of conduit to the center to center distance between a streetlight pole and a junction box.
:*Add 2’ of conduit to the center to center distance between a streetlight pole and a service box.
:*Add 3’ of conduit to the center to center distance between a streetlight control center and a junction box.
:*Add 2' of conduit to the center to center distance between two junction boxes
:*Add 0' of conduit to the center to center distance between two service boxes

:Where poles are mounted on a raised concrete pedestal, such as in parking lots, or on a bridge rail, the conduit length should be increased accordingly based on the height of the raised pedestal or bridge rail.

:Example 1: If the center to center distance between poles is 180’, the conduit length required is 180’ + 4’ = 184’

:Example 2: If the center to center distance between a pole and a box is 20’, the conduit length required is 20’ + 3’ = 23’

:Example 3: If the center to center distance between a pole and a box is 50’, the conduit length required is 50’ + 2’ = 52’

:Example 4: If the center to center distance between a control center and a junction box is 5’, the conduit length required is 5’ + 3’ = 8’

:Example 5: If the center to center distance between two junction boxes is 70', the conduit length required is 70' + 2' = 72'

:Example 6: If the center to center distance between two service boxes is 70', the conduit length required is 70' + 0' = 70'

=== Cables: ===
Cable should be measured per linear foot for each type used.

====      3-1c #4 USE Distribution Cable: ====
:The measurement for 3-1c #4 USE distribution cable should be per linear foot for the bundle of cable consisting of three wires. Cable should be measured from the center of pole, junction box or control center to the center of pole, junction box or control center. Additional cable quantities are added to account for sweeps, to provide slack and to make connections. The additional length is computed as follows:

:*Add 5’ of slack at each pole with a 30’ or 40’ mounting height, mounted on a flush mounted concrete base or screw-in foundation with a breakaway pole device
:*Add 4’ of slack at each 14’ pole, mounted on on a flush mounted concrete base or screw-in foundation, since a breakaway pole device is not required.
:*Add 5’ of slack at each junction or service box for each circuit contained within.
:*Add 5’ of slack at each streetlight control circuit for each circuit contained within.

:Where poles are mounted on a raised concrete pedestal, such as in parking lots, or on a bridge rail, the cable length should be increased accordingly based on the height of the raised pedestal or bridge rail. Keep in mind that on a raised concrete pedestal or a bridge rail, there is no need to have a breakaway pole base. Therefore, the height above ground level will have to be adjusted for cable length.

:Example 1: If the center to center distance between two streetlight poles with 40’ mounting heights is 180’, the cable length required is 180’ + 5’+ 5’ = 190’

:Example 2: If the center to center distance between two 14’ poles mounted on a flush mounted concrete base or screw-in foundation is 200’, the cable length required is 200’ + 4’ + 4’ = 208’

:Example 3: If the center to center distance between two junction boxes is 60’, the cable length required is 60’ + 5’ + 5’ = 70’

:Example 4: If the center to center distance between a 14’ streetlight pole and a junction box is 20’, the cable length required is 20’ + 4’ + 5’ = 29’

:Example 5: If the center to center distance between a junction box and a streetlighting control center is 10’, the cable length required is 10 + 5’ + 5’ = 20’ per circuit.

====      1c #10 Pole and Bracket Cable: ====
:The measurement for 1c #10 pole and bracket cable should be measured per linear foot. The length depends on the mounting height of the luminaire, the length and type of bracket arm and the number of luminaires mounted on each pole. Two 1c #10 cables are required for the power to each of the luminaires and one 1c#10 cable is required for the ground to each of the luminaires.

:Power Conductors: A 12" to 14" cable surplus in each of the 1c#10 AWG pole and bracket cables is to be provided from the multiple tap connector to the line side of the fuse holder and from the load side of the fuseholder to the luminaire. Ground Conductor for Single Arm: A 12" to 14" cable surplus in the 1c#10 AWG ground cable is to be provided from the multiple tap connector to the load side of the un-fused fuseholder and from the line side of the un-fused fuseholder to the ground lug at the base of the pole. An additional 24" of surplus cable shall be provided between the ground lug at the base of the pole and the luminaire. Ground Conductor for Dual Arms: A 12" to 14" cable surplus in the 1c#10 AWG ground cable is to be provided from the multiple tap connector to the load side of the un-fused fuseholder and from the line side of the un-fused fuseholder to the ground lug at the base of the pole. An additional 24" of surplus in each ground cable shall be provided between the ground lug at the base of the pole and each luminaire.

====      1c #10 Pole and Bracket Cable (Poles with Single Luminaire): ====
:The total length for the power cables varies depending on the pole series and the bracket arm length. The total length has to be multiplied by two since there are two wires. In the following table “AL” stands for the arm length. Additional cable also has to be added for the ground cable that attaches between the ground lug in the pole and the ground terminal in the luminaire. Each luminaire will have three wires running to it from the base of the pole.

:{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
! colspan="5" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 Pole and Bracket Cable for Poles with Single Luminaire
|-
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Mounting Height
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Pole Series
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 (Power)
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 (Ground)
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 (Total)
|-
| align="center"|15'
| align="center"|OP14
| align="center"|30.7'
| align="center"|17.3'
| align="center"|48'
|-
| align="center"|30'
| align="center"|OP301
| align="center"|56.7' + (2 x AL)
| align="center"|30.8' + AL
| align="center"|87.5' + (3 x AL)
|-
| align="center"|30'
| align="center"|OP302
| align="center"|56' + (2 x AL)
| align="center"|30' + AL
| align="center"|86' + (3 x AL)
|-
| align="center"|40'
| align="center"|OP401
| align="center"|77.7' + (2 x AL)
| align="center"|40.8' + AL
| align="center"|118.5' + (3 x AL)
|-
| align="center"|40'
| align="center"|OP402
| align="center"|76' + (2 x AL)
| align="center"|40' + AL
| align="center"|116' + (3 x AL)
|}

====      1c #10 Pole and Bracket Cable (Poles with Twin Luminaires): ====
:The total length for the power cables varies depending on the pole series and the bracket arm length. The total length has to be multiplied by four since there are two wires required for each luminaire. In the following table “AL” stands for the arm length. The equations have been set up to accommodate whether both arm lengths are the same or if there are different arm lengths on the same pole. Additional cable also has to be added for the ground cables that attach between the ground lug in the pole and the ground terminal in each luminaire. Each luminaire will have three wires running to it from the base of the pole. (See the Electrical Connector Details, in the Standard Details)

:{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
! colspan="5" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 Pole and Bracket Cable for Poles with Twin Luminaires
|-
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Mounting Height
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Pole Series
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 (Power)
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 (Ground)
! style="background:#dcdcdc;"|1c#10 (Total)
|-
| align="center"|30'
| align="center"|OP303
| align="center"|115.3' + (2 x AL) + (2 x AL)
| align="center"|59.3' + AL + AL
| align="center"|174.6' + (3 x AL) + (3 x AL)
|-
| align="center"|40'
| align="center"|OP401
| align="center"|155.3' + (2 x AL) + (2 x AL)
| align="center"|79.3' + AL + AL
| align="center"|234.6' + (3 x AL) + (3 x AL)
|-
| align="center"|40'
| align="center"|OP403
| align="center"|152' + (2 x AL) + (2 x AL)
| align="center"|77.7' + AL + AL
| align="center"|229.7' + (3 x AL) + (3 x AL)
|-
|}

====      Electrical Service Power Cable: ====
:The measurement for electrical service power cable should be per linear foot for the bundle of cable consisting of three wires. Cable should be measured from the center of the streetlight control center to the center of the power source. The length of spare cable at the power source depends on whether the power source is a transformer mounted on a wood pole or a ground mounted sectionalizer. Additional cable quantities are added to account for sweeps, to provide slack and to make connections. The additional length is computed as follows:

:*Add 5’ of slack at the streetlight control center mounted on a flush mounted concrete base.
:*Add 42’ of slack at the base of the wood power pole, if the cable runs from the streetlight control center to a transformer on a wood pole.
:*Add 5' of slack at the pad mounted transformer or pedestal, if the cable runs from the streetlight control center to a ground mounted transformer or pedestal.

:Example 1: If the center to center distance between the streetlight control center and the wood power pole is 180’, the cable length required is 180’ + 5’+ 42’ = 227’

:Example 2: If the center to center distance between the streetlight control center and the ground mounted sectionalizer is 100’, the cable length required is 100’ + 5’ + 5‘ = 110‘

====      1c #6 Solid Copper Ground Cable: ====
:The measurement for 1c #6 solid copper ground cable should be measured per linear foot. The required cable length at any streetlighting control center or concrete pole foundation should be 5’.

=== Electrical Connectors: ===
Electrical connectors include breakaway non-fused connector kits, breakaway fused connector kits, fuses, and multi-tap streetlight connectors. The quantity at each pole depends on whether there are one or two luminaires on each pole. Quantities should be added at each existing pole where a new circuit is being tied into an existing circuit. The number of each type of electrical connector will be measured as follows:

====      One Luminaire per Pole: ====
:*Three multi-tap electrical connectors are required
:*Two breakaway fused connector kits are required
:*Two 8 amp fuses are required
:*One breakaway non-fused connectors with ground “slug” is required

====      Two Luminaires per Pole: ====
:*Three multi-tap electrical connectors are required
:*Four breakaway fused connector kits are required
:*Four 8 amp fuses are required
:*One breakaway non-fused connectors with ground “slug” is required

=== Breakaway Pole Devices: ===
The measurement for breakaway pole devices should be per each for each breakaway frangible base or per set for a set of four breakaway couplings for every streetlight pole with a 30’ or 40’ mounting height.
Breakaway pole devices are not required for 14’ poles or if a pole is mounted on a raised concrete pedestal or bridge rail.

=== Cable Retainer Devices: ===
The measurement for cable retainer devices should be per each for each pole foundation type for every streetlight pole with a 14', 30’ or 40’ mounting height. Some screw-in foundations have the cable retainer device integral with the foundation. For purposes of pulling quantities, assume that the cable retainer device is a separate component.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Computation of Quantities:|'''Computation of Quantities:''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Computation of Quantities:]]
|}
----

Approved Materials - Traffic Control

2026-04-29T15:24:50Z

Brian Geiger: /* Audible Information Device */ Added PSS's Parakeet AID

File:TRF PQL TC CAT PSS Parakeet.pdf

2026-04-29T15:24:41Z

Brian Geiger: File uploaded with MsUpload

File uploaded with MsUpload

File:TRF PQL TC PHOT PSS Parakeet Side.JPG

2026-04-29T15:24:41Z

Brian Geiger: File uploaded with MsUpload

File uploaded with MsUpload

File:TRF PQL TC PHOT PSS Parakeet Inside.JPG

2026-04-29T15:24:39Z

Brian Geiger: File uploaded with MsUpload

File uploaded with MsUpload

File:TRF PQL TC PHOT PSS Parakeet Front.JPG

2026-04-29T15:24:37Z

Brian Geiger: File uploaded with MsUpload

File uploaded with MsUpload

File:TRF PQL TC PHOT PSS Parakeet Back.JPG

2026-04-29T15:24:35Z

Brian Geiger: File uploaded with MsUpload

File uploaded with MsUpload

File:TRF PQL TC MEM PSS Parakeet.pdf

2026-04-29T15:24:33Z

Brian Geiger: File uploaded with MsUpload

File uploaded with MsUpload

Approved Materials - Specialty Items

2026-04-09T14:30:40Z

Brian Geiger: /* Wall Packs */ Trail lighting is now 1.0 footcandle minimum based on Mike Burton's and Brian Geiger's evaluation of trail lighting under 135th St bridges and US-69 bridges for Tomahawk Creek Trail.

{{Return to AML}}

{{PQLDisclaimer}}

<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>
= Permanent Signing Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Street Lighting form.]]}}
== LED Sign Borders ==
=== 91st St and Glenwood ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://trafficalm.com/ TraffiCalm]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder.pdf|Controller & 30W Solar Panel M75-SA300-BSC3 36" Stop Sign Flasher Ring M75-R3636-WR01]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder.pdf|7/23/21]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder CableConnection.jpg|Cable Connection]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder LEDBorder.jpg|LED Border]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder LightEngine.jpg|Controller]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder SolarPanel.jpg|Solar Panel]]
|}

= Streetlighting Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Street Lighting form.]]}}
== Bollards ==
=== Downtown Streetscape ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.hubbell.com/kimlighting/en/ KIM Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL CAT KIM Bollard.pdf|VRB1-20L4KUV-BL]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL MEM KIM Bollard.pdf|4/9/20]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL PHOT KIM Bollard.JPG|Bollard]]
|}

== Bracket Arms ==
=== Residential Side Mount Streetlight Adapter Arm for Small Cell Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.sentrylighting.com/ Sentry]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Sentry SmallPoleArmAdapterArm.pdf|SAL-WSB-PB]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Sentry SmallPoleArmAdapterArm.pdf|3/26/19]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Used only on small cell poles in areas with residential post top luminaires - Black}}

=== Slip Fitter Arm at Indian Creek Recreation Center Parking Lot ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/brackets/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont SlipFitter.pdf|1HT90H24]]
|3/21/16
|
|}

== Decorative Light Bases ==
=== Indian Creek Park Recreation Center Parking Lot ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI Valmont DecorativeLightPoleBase CH22AC.pdf|CH22AC-DBL]]
|3/21/16
|
|}

== Light Fixtures ==
Specialty luminaires shall have stickers denoting pertinant information on the luminaire housing when feasible as described below.
Specialty luminaires shall have a specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read:

XTY

ZK

Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
Some possible examples of these combinations are shown below.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Luminaire Housing Sticker Designs.jpg|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Possible Specialty Luminaire Sticker Combinations
|}

=== Fire Station #41 ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Class E Type 2 4K Leotek LEDs were also used in the parking lot which are standard streetlight LEDs.
|[http://www.leotek.com/ Leotek]
|'''GreenCobra Midsize GCM1''' 
'''Class C Type 4:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCMClassCType4LLPC.pdf|GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-GY-125-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcm/IES File: GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-XX-125 S.ies]
|Approved as part of PB-1823.
|
|-

{{PQLNote|CCT = 4,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Needs a photocell on top as there is no cabinet controlling the lights with a photocell. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== Myron Scafe, Jack Sanders, and Westgate Parking Lots ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/ American Electric Lighting]
|'''Autobahn ATB2'''
'''Class A:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: None currently installed.
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB2&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB2_80B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Class B:'''
 Standard Gray Finish, Type 3 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_AmericanElectric_AutobahnATB2ClassBType3.pdf|ATB2-60BLEDE70-MVOLT-R3-IL-NL-P7-SH-RFD310023]] Installed at Sanders (MR-1883) and Scafe (MR-1882).
 Standard Gray Finish, Type 4 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_AmericanElectric_AutobahnATB2ClassBType4.pdf|ATB2-60BLEDE70-MVOLT-R4-IL-NL-P7-SH-RFD310024]] Installed at Sanders (MR-1883) and Scafe (MR-1882).
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB2&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB2_60B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Class C:'''
 Standard Gray Finish, Type 4 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_AmericanElectric_AutobahnATB2ClassCType4.pdf|ATB2-40BLEDE70-MVOLT-R4-IL-P7-SH-RFD328772]] Proposed at City parking lot east of Marty and north of 80th St (SL-2550).
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB2&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB2_40B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Autobahn ATB0''' 
'''Class D:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: None currently installed.
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB0&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB0_30B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Class E:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: None currently installed.
 Special Black Finish, Type 3 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF PQL SL CAT AmericanElectric AutobahnATB0ClassE.pdf|ATB0-20BLEDE70-MVOLT-R3-IL-P7-SH-RFD223679-RFWD6463]] Installed at Westgate (MR-1762).
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB0&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB0_20B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
|Approved as part of project MR-1882 and MR-1883 plans in 2020.
|[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn TopView.JPG|Top View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn BottomView.JPG|Bottom View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn SideView.JPG|Side View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn BackView.JPG|Back View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn BirdGuard.JPG|Bird Guard]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn DriverCompartment.JPG|Driver Compartment]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn WiringCompartment.JPG|Wiring Compartment]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn WireTerminal.JPG|Wiring Terminal]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn LevelBubble.JPG|Level Bubble]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn HousingLatch.JPG|Housing Latch]]
|-

{{PQLNote|10 Year Warranty. CCT = 4,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. 7 Pin twistlock photocell receptacle with shorting cap. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== City Hall, Deanna Rose Farmstead, Fire Training Center, Soccer Complex, Blue Valley Maintenance, St. Andrews, and Tomahawk Ridge Parking Lots ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Classes were approximated to typical streetlight LEDs based on lumen output.
|[https://nlslighting.com/ NLS Lighting]
|'''NV Series'''
'''Class C:'''
 Various Color Finishes, Type 4 Distribution, 5,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_NLS_NVClassCT45K.pdf|NV1-T4-32L-1-50k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T4-32L-1-50K.IES] 
'''Class D:'''
 Black Finish, Type 4 Distribution, 5,000 Kelvin: Soccer Complex Short Poles 
[[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_NLS_NVClassDT45K.pdf|NV1-T4-16L-1-50k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T4-16L-1-50K.IES]
|Approved as part of PB-2068 project in 2022.
|
|-

{{PQLNote|CCT = 5,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== Deanna Rose Farmstead East Lot, Jack Sanders, and St. Andrews Tennis Courts ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Classes were approximated to typical streetlight LEDs based on lumen output.
|[https://nlslighting.com/ NLS Lighting]
|'''NV Series'''
'''Class C:''' 
Various Color Finishes, Type 2 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: 
[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_NLS_NVClassCT24K.pdf|NV1-T2-32L-1-40k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T2-32L-1-40K.IES] 
Various Color Finishes, Type 5 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: 
[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_NLS_NVClassCT54K.pdf|NV1-T5-32L-1-40k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T5-32L-1-40K.IES] 
|Approved as part of PB-2068 project in 2022.
|
|-

{{PQLNote|CCT = 4,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== Dennis Garrett ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.leotek.com/ Leotek]
|'''GreenCobra GCL1'''
'''Class A:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCLClassAType5LLPC.pdf|GCL1-80J-MV-40K-5-GY-220-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcl/IES File: GCL1-80J-MV-40K-5-XX-220 S.ies]
'''Class B'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCLClassBType4LLPC.pdf|GCL1-80J-MV-40K-4-GY-190-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcl/IES File: GCL1-80J-MV-40K-4-XX-190 S.ies]
'''GreenCobra Midsize GCM1''' 
'''Class C Type 2:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCMClassCType2LLPC.pdf|GCM1-60J-MV-40K-2R-GY-125-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcm/IES File: GCM1-60J-MV-40K-2R-XX-125 S.ies]
'''Class C Type 4:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCMClassCType4LLPC.pdf|GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-GY-125-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcm/IES File: GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-XX-125 S.ies]
'''Class D:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCMClassDType4LLPC.pdf|GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-GY-105-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcm/IES File: GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-XX-105 S.ies]
|Approved as part of PB-2068 project in 2022.
|
|-

{{PQLNote|CCT = 4,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Needs a photocell on top as there is no cabinet controlling the lights with a photocell. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== Antioch & I-435 Bridge Decorative Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Bega
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Bega BridgeFixture.pdf|8189P-Blk-120 w/ GE 12870 Fluorescent lamp]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI Detail Bega BridgeFixture.pdf|Shop Drawing]]
|7/21/04
|
|}
{{PQLNote|120 Volt, Black, Fluorescent lamp}}

=== 110th Street & Lamar Roundabout Decorative Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Type III Distribution, LED, Black. 7 Pin twistlock photocell receptacle with shorting cap. Approximately Class B lumen output.
|[https://lithonia.acuitybrands.com/ Acuity Lithonia]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Acuity RSX1.pdf|RSX1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Acuity RSX1.pdf|3/21/2022]]
|
|-
|These are for replacement of existing heads only. This fixture is no longer approved. Type II Distribution, 400W MH, Black
|[https://www.signify.com/en-us/brands/gardco Gardco Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Gardco GullwingG18.pdf|Gullwing #G18-1-2XL-400-MH-240-BLP]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Gardco GullwingG18.pdf|4/26/02]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== 110th & Lamar Roundabout Landscape Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://hydrel.acuitybrands.com/ Hydrel]
|4710A-175M-120-SP-ISSDLA-BZ
|4/26/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|175W MH, Bronze}}

=== Wall Packs ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Installed at: Locations TBD along US-69 ETL Project
|[https://holophane.acuitybrands.com/ Holophane]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Holophane WallConnectLED.pdf|WCNG P4 40K U4W MVOLT ZT 20KV BZSDP LTCH PR7 DF AO SH]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Holophane WallConnectLED.pdf|11/15/2023]]
|
|-
|Installed at: Antioch & I-435 Bicycle Tunnel Indian Creek Bicycle Trail under I-435 These are for replacement of existing Liton heads only.
|[https://liton.com/ Liton]
|[[Media:TR PQL SI CAT Liton WLP32WallPack.pdf|WLP32-120W]]
|[[Media:TR PQL SI MEM Liton WLP32WallPack.pdf|6/27/2023]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Liton WLP32WallPackSide.JPG|Side]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Adjustable Output is approved. For use in tunnels and bridge underpasses. Trail lighting separate from an adjacent roadway will be designed with adjustable output codes to adjust the average maintained illuminance to meet a minimum of 1.0 footcandle and a 3:1 average:minimum uniformity.}}

=== Soffit Lights ===
{| width="1000px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Installed at: Locations TBD along US-69 ETL Project
|[https://holophane.acuitybrands.com/ Holophane]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Holophane SoffitMountLED.pdf|PPSQL2-P20-40K-MVOLT-GL-T5R-SSM-AO PPSQL2-P80-40K-MVOLT-GL-T5R-SSM-AO]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Holophane SoffitMountLED.pdf|9/22/2023]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Adjustable Output is approved. For use in tunnels and bridge underpasses. Trail lighting separate from an adjacent roadway will be designed with adjustable output codes to adjust the average maintained illuminance between 1.0 footcandle and 3.7 footcandle and a 3:1 average:minimum uniformity. Order with Bird Shroud.}}

=== Wall-Mounted Type 2 Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Installed at: Locations TBD along US-69 ETL Project
|[https://www.hubbell.com/ Hubbell]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Hubbell Type2WallJB.pdf|RSC121808NKSS]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Hubbell Type2WallJB.pdf|12/13/2023]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|For use in tunnels and bridge underpasses as a wall mounted junction box.}}

=== 133rd & Lamar; 132nd Street & US-69 Overpass; Vineyards and Mills Farm Roundabouts ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|These are for replacement of existing heads only. This fixture is no longer approved.
|[https://www.currentlighting.com/aal Architectural Area Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_ArchitecturalAreaLighting_Promenade.pdf|PRMSH3150HPS-Mogul-240MT-BLK-06A-1814 Sleeve]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_ArchitecturalAreaLighting_Promenade.pdf|8/28/06]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Promenade – Black Mogul base lamp and reflector system Photometric curve PRM3-H2-150HPS.IES}}

=== Matt Ross Community Center Parking Lot Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Wide Lite/ Genlyte Company
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT WideLite OptraLuminaire.pdf|Optra Area Luminaire]] '''Symmetric Distribution:''' OPP-250-S-QV-SR-SA '''Asymmetric Distribution:''' OPP-250-A-QV-SR-SA
|3/16/06
|
|}
{{PQLNote|250W MH Segmented reflector with vertical lamp Multi-tap ballast Satin Aluminum finish Arm mount to round pole}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Downtown OP ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.sentrylighting.com/ Sentry]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Sentry DecorativeDowntownLuminaire.pdf|SGO-150HPS-240V-MT-III-BK (No Finial)]] 
:[http://www.sentrylighting.com/IESFilesList.aspx?pid=153IES File: SGO-150HPS-III]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Sentry DecorativeDowntownLuminaire.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[https://scgrp.com/ StressCrete]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_StressCrete_K109.pdf|K109R-P4AR-III-75(SSL)-120:277-K30-30K-3DT-BK, Drawing Number: OP-K109-1]] 
:[https://scgrp.com/ies-files-search/IES File: 0100np4ar3x07530xxe.ies]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_StressCrete_K109.pdf|4/16/2025]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_Profile.JPG|Profile]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_HouseSide.JPG|House side]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_TopDisconnect.JPG|Top Disconnect]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_BottomDisconnect.JPG|Bottom Disconnect]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_Driver.JPG|Driver]]
|}

=== 95th St & Nall Ave; 71st St & Metcalf Ave; 75th St & Metcalf Ave; 87th St & Metcalf Ave ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|KIM Lighting
|KIM Era Lantern 1A/LET26SCH3/400HPS240/** HA33L-TM1/HF2/HAF2 ''This has to be a tenon mount because of the fluted signal pole shaft''
|1/26/09
|
|Single Top Mounted, Single Curved Arm, 400W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution TM!= Tenon Mount Ribbon Arm HF2/ HAF2 = Two Finials ** = Custom Color RAL 6012 (Hunter Green) BL (Black FED-STD-595 #27038)
|}

=== 79th St & Metcalf Ave ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|KIM Lighting
|KIM Era Lantern 1A/LET26SCH3/250HPS240/**/BF HA33L/**/HAF2 ''This does not require a tenon because the pole is not fluted.''
|2/26/13
|
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|Single Top Mounted Single Curved Arm 250W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution HAF2 - Finial on the top arm stud ** - Custom Color RAL 8019 Dark Bronze}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== 159th Street Bridge Over US-69 Highway ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|KIM Lighting
|KIM Era Lantern FM/LEB26SCH3/400HPS240/**/TF Should accommodate 4.5” top pole O.D. w/ 0.188” wall
|12/13/10
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Post Top Flush Mounted Single Curved Arm Top Finial 400W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution ** BL (Black FED-STD-595 #27038)}}

=== 127th Street (Metcalf Ave to Nall Ave) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|[https://www.currentlighting.com/kimlighting Kim Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_Kim_Era.pdf|KIM Era Lantern 2B/LET26SCH3/250HPS240/**/BF Twin Bracket Arms @ 180 degrees 2B/HA33L/HAF2]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_Kim_Era.pdf|12/13/10]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Twin Top Mounted Single Curved Arm Bottom Finial 250W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution Ribbon Arm w/ top finial ** BL (Black FED-STD-595 #27038)}}

=== 95th St & Quivira, 95th St & Oak Park East, and 95th St & Nieman Rd Intersections on Joint Use Signal Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|

|KIM Lighting
|KIM Warp 9 HPS – Single w/2” slipfitter for Type A or B arm 1A/WP9LM3/400HPS240/CC/HSF/TB
|8/2/09
|
|}
{{PQLNote|400W HPS, 240V Type III Distribution CC - Custom Color (RAL 6012 Hunter Green)}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Quivira Road: 95th St. to 99th St. ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.currentlighting.com/kimlighting KIM Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_KimLighting_Warp9HPS.pdf|KIM Warp9 HPS – Twin Std Arms 2B/WP9LM3/400HPS240/CC/TB KIM Warp9 HPS – Single Std Arm 1A/WP9LM3/250HPS240/CC/TB]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_KimLighting_Warp9HPS.pdf|8/2/09]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|250W or 400W HPS, 240V Type III Distribution CC - Custom Color (RAL 6012 Hunter Green)}}

== Lamps ==
=== LED Lamps ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Maintenance Only Downtown Globes Only 
|[https://www.keystonetech.com// Keystone]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Keystone LEDLampInGlobe.pdf|KT-LED100PSHID-EX39-830-D-G4]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Keystone LEDLampInGlobe.pdf|5/22/2024]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Only for installation only in the downtown Sentry Globe (SGO-150HPS-240V-MT-III-BK (No Finial)) fixtures.}}

==Outdoor Electrical Connections==
=== Outdoor Receptacle Covers ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://global.abb/group/en ABB]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover.pdf|CKMUV]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover.pdf|11/1/2021]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover Front.JPG|Front]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover Side.JPG|Side]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover Open.JPG|Open]]
|}
{{PQLNote|NEMA 3R While-In-Use Metal Large enough to fit two electrical extension cords while the cover is fully closed}}

=== Outdoor Receptacles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.hubbell.com/ Hubbell]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Hubbell OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|GFTW20W]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Hubbell OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|11/1/2021]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.leviton.com/en Leviton]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Leviton OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|GFWT2]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Leviton OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|11/1/2021]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|GFCI Commercial grade Designed for wet and damp locations Tamper-Resistant LED status indicator}}

== Photocell ==
=== System Photocell Receptacle ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.acuitybrands.com/ Acuity]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Acuity Receptacle.pdf|DUR103]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Acuity Receptacle.pdf|11/9/2022]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Acuity Receptacle TopView.JPG|Top View]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Acuity Receptacle SideView.JPG|Side View]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Acuity Receptacle BottomView.JPG|Bottom View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Used on external disconnects for city buildings.}}

== Poles ==
=== Special Light Poles for City Parking Lots ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont A42365 Rev3.pdf|Dwg No. A42365 – Revision 3 - 05/31/23]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Valmont A42365 Rev3.pdf|7/27/2020]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Pole height is 31' Mount Pole ID Tag 2'5" up from base of pole to match typical 30' poles. Designed for mounting lots of IT equipment Field drilled 2" max dia holes shall be a minimum of 12" above and 90 degrees from the hand hole Nylon hand hole screws Poles installed at Sanders, Scafe, and Fire Station 41}}

=== Special Light Poles for City Parking Lots w/ 20' Height Restrictions===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_Valmont_A56721.pdf|Dwg No. A56721 - 5/30/2025]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_Valmont_A56721.pdf|7/1/2025]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Pole height is 18' Mount Pole ID Tag 2'5" up from base of pole to match typical poles. Designed for mounting lots of IT equipment Field drilled 2" max dia holes shall be a minimum of 12" above and 90 degrees from the hand hole Nylon hand hole screws Poles approved for Arboretum driveways.}}

=== Special Light Poles for Indian Creek Recreation Center Parking Lot ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/poles-and-posts Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI Valmont 30ftLightPole IndianCrkRecCenter.pdf|R-290845806T4-P9-DBL]]
|3/21/2016
|
|}

=== 110th Street & Roundabout Square Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Gardco Lighting
|#SSS 30-5-11-BLP
|4/26/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|5” square, straight, steel - Black}}

=== Matt Ross Community Center Parking Lot Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://submittal.info/LoginMenu.asp KW Industries]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT KWIndustries MattRossLightPoles.pdf|RSP18-4.0-11-NA-DM10-BC]]
|3/21/06
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Round Steel Satin Aluminum finish Arm mount option}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Decorative Poles for Downtown OP and 132nd Street Bridge over US-69 Highway ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.hapco.com/ Hapco]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole.pdf|Dwg No. C19043 – 8/3/10]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole.pdf|8/5/10]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole Base.jpg|Base]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole Handhole.jpg|Handhole]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole BoltCover.jpg|Bolt Cover]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Nylon hand hole screws}}

=== Special Pole for 159th Street Bridge over US-69 Highway ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|Dwg No. SKKP110211B -1 11/2/11
|11/11/11
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|Dwg No. LH30800 – 10/17/11
|11/1/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shaft Length is 29’-3” or 39’-3” as specified Color: Black FED-STD-595 #27038 or Hunter Green # RAL 6012}}

=== Special Pole for Era Lantern Bolt Pattern 127th St (Metcalf to Nall) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|OP301-LANTERN Dwg No. SKKP110211A-001 –Single Dwg No. SKKP110211A-002 – Twin OP401-LANTERN Dwg No. SKKP012011A-001 –Single Dwg No. SKKP012011A-002 – Twin Pole Cap & Finial – F0004
|11/11/11
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|OP301-LANTERN OP401-LANTERN
|11/2/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shaft Length is 29’-3” or 39’-3” as specified Pole Cap & Finial Color: Black FED-STD-595 #27038 or Hunter Green # RAL 6012}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Special Pole for Warp9 Bolt Pattern Quivira Rd (99th to 95th) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|OP301-WARP Dwg No. SKKP110211C-001 – Single Dwg No. SKKP110211C-002 – Twin OP401-WARP Dwg No SKKP013111A-001 – Single Dwg No SKKP013111A-002 – Twin
|11/11/11
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|OP301-WARP OP401-WARP
|11/2/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shaft Length is 29’-3” or 39’-3” as specified Color: Black FED-STD-595 #27038 or Hunter Green # RAL 6012}}

== Screw-In Foundations==
=== Screw-In Foundations for Downtown OP Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|AB Chance
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT ABChance DecorativeDowntownScrewInFoundation.pdf|T112-03631701 Dwg No. SA11203631701 Rev A]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM ABChance DecorativeDowntownScrewInFoundation.pdf|8/5/10]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Used with Hapco Decorative Pole}}

= Traffic Signal Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-TS-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Traffic Signals form.]]}}
== Decorative Signal Poles ==
=== Mast Arm Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|95th St & Nall Ave
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPole 95thandNall.pdf|Pole: Tapered, 16-Sharp Fluted w/ 2.875” OD x 4” L Tenon Mast Arm: Smooth Round Tapered Pole Cap: Standard]]
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306-GG
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPole VisionMetcalf.pdf|Pole: Tapered, 16-Sharp Fluted w/ 2.875” OD x 4” L Tenon Mast Arm: Smooth Round Tapered Pole Cap: Metro Series]]
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306-B
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|Valmont
|Pole: Tapered, 16-Sharp Fluted w/ 2.875” OD x 4” L Tenon Mast Arm: Smooth Round Tapered Pole Cap: Metro Series
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306 / RAL 8019 Medium Bronze
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPole OakParkMall.pdf|Standard pole and mast arm Pole Cap: Spear Series]]
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306-GG
|}
{{PQLNote|Color Codes: GG = RAL 6012 OP Green B = Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black}}

{{PQLReturn}}

=== Pedestal Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|83rd St & Metcalf Ave
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont PedestalPole 83rd&Metcalf.pdf|Pole: Straight, Round, Smooth Pole Cap: Metro Series]]
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black
|
|-
|95th St & Nall Ave
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont PedestalPole 95th&Nall.pdf|Pole: Straight, 16-Flat Fluted]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|Valmont
|Pole: Straight, 16-Flat Fluted Pole Cap: Metro Series
|
|
|Finish/Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|Valmont
|Pole: Straight, 16-Flat Fluted Pole Cap: Metro Series
|
|
|Color: RAL 8019 Medium Bronze Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|Valmont
|4 ½” dia straight pole Pole Cap: Spear Series
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|}
{{PQLNote|Color Codes: GG = RAL 6012 OP Green B = Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Round and Fluted Poles are Spun Aluminum}}

=== Decorative Bases for Mast Arm Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleContourBase.pdf|Contour Series CN20AC, CN27AC & CN34AC]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|95th St & Nall Ave
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleWashingtonBase.pdf|Washington Series WA25AB, WA30AB & WA36AB]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleSterlingBase.pdf|Sterling Series |ST24AB, ST25AB & ST31AB]]
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleSterlingBase.pdf|Sterling Series |ST24AB, ST25AB & ST31AB]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 8019 Medium Bronze Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive) 83rd St, 81st St HAWK/PHB
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleHuntingtonBase.pdf|Huntington Series]] 
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Decorative Bases for Pedestrian Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|Valmont
|Contour Series CN18AC
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|95th & Nall
|Valmont
|Washington Series WA18AB
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|Valmont
|Sterling Series ST18AB
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|Valmont
|Sterling Series ST18AB
|
|
|Color: RAL 8019 Medium Bronze Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive) 83rd St, 81st St HAWK/PHB
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/poles-and-posts Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont PedestalPoleHuntingtonBase.pdf|Huntington Series]] 
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat Round, Non-tapered There are non-public model numbers including increased pole wall thicknesses. Have manufacturer provide model number based on loading.
|}
{{PQLNote|Recommend using Valmont's integrated decorative base and pole rather than trying to add a decorative base over a standard pedestal pole. This improves ease of access to wires in base.}}

== Pedestrian Pushbutton Pole ==
=== Pedestrian Pushbutton Pole and Foundation ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Maintenance Only
|AB Chance
|Screw-in-Foundation: T1121363 / Dwg No. SA1121363 Ped Button Post: T1121364 / Dwg No. SA1121364
|10/21/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Hot dip galvanized finished smooth.}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Pole Base Cover ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Lithonia
|RSS FBC 3-5IN RND JMA 1751 DNA
|1/7/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|ABS Plastic. Square base with 3.5” diameter hole. Two-piece cover – natural aluminum}}
 

==Solar Traffic Signal Equipment==
=== Batteries ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.concordebattery.com/ Concorde Battery Corp] [https://www.sunxtender.com/ Sun Xtender]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Concorde Batteries.pdf| Sun Xtender Series]]
|3/25/22
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Size depends on the specific job requirements}}

=== Confimirmation Light ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://traffic.tomar.com/ Tomar Electronics]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Tomar ConfirmationLight.pdf|801 Mini I Strobe]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Control Unit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.solar-traffic-controls.com/ Solar Traffic Controls]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT SolarTrafficControl DigitalPowerController.pdf|DPC-2000]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== DC LED Kits ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.solar-traffic-controls.com/ Solar Traffic Controls]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT SolarTrafficControl DCLEDKit.pdf|12" Amber: 8412A2385]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Solar Cabinet Enclosure ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.solar-traffic-controls.com/ Solar Traffic Controls]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT SolarTrafficControls CabinetEnclsoure.pdf|2B Enclosure]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Solar Panel ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.amerescosolar.com/ Ameresco Solar]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Ameresco SolarPanel.pdf|60W Solar Panel: Model- 60J]]
|3/25/22
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Wattage and Size depends on the specific job requirements}}

=== Smart Relay ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://us.idec.com/ IDEC Corp]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT IDEC SmartRelay.pdf|xxxxx]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Strobeswitch ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://traffic.tomar.com/ Tomar Electronics]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Tomar StrobeswitchDetector.pdf|1790-1014]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

= Biking Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SGN-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Permanent Signing form.]]}}
== Bike Racks ==
=== Standard Racks ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.dero.com// Dero]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.pdf|Inverted-U Hoop Rack Heavy Duty]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.pdf|11/13/2024]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.JPG|Rack]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Galvanized or Stainless Steel only.}}

=== Downtown OP ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.landscapeforms.com/ LandscapeForms]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LandscapeForms_Loop.pdf|Loop Bike Rack]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_LandscapeForms_Loop.pdf|1/14/2026]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_LandscapeForms_Loop_Front.jpg|Front]] 
[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_LandscapeForms_Loop_SideView.jpg|Side]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Forest or Matte Black.}}

= EV Charging Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Streetlighting form.]]}}
== Electrical Meter Control Center ==
=== Electrical Meter Control Center ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Approved for use at: 
Scheels Soccer Complex 
Deanna Rose Children's Farmstead
|[http://www.milbankmfg.com/ Milbank]
|[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_Milbank_EV400AControlCenter.pdf|CP3B54C1ERAOSP1]]
|[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_Milbank_EV400AControlCenter.pdf|9/20/2022]]
|
|-
{{PQLNote|None.}}

Approved Materials - Traffic Signals

2026-04-02T14:38:20Z

Brian Geiger: /* Mini Pre-empt Detector Bracket */ Replacement part AG-0163.

{{Return to AML}}
[http://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Contractor_Submittal_Forms '''Contractor Submittal Forms''']
{{PQLDisclaimer}}

<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>
== Anchor Bolts ==
=== Anchor Bolts For Signal Mast Arm Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.jhbotts.com/ JH Botts]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT JHBotts AnchorBoltsMastArmPoles.pdf|Anchor Bolt Detail 1 1/2" x 54" x 6": 6 UNC 2A x 10" (54" + 6") GALV 20" 1 3/4" x 84" x 6": 5 UNC 2A x 10" (84" + 6") GALV 20" 2" x 84" x 6": 4 1/2 UNC 2A x 10" (84" + 6") GALV 20"]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM JHBotts AnchorBoltsMastArmPoles.pdf|1/21/15]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.millerberndmfg.com/ Millerbernd]
|Use Column for "Part No. Bolt w/2 Nuts & 2 Flat Washers" [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Millerbernd AnchorBoltsMastArmPole Combined.pdf|1 1/2" x 54" x 6": 460A579-12DNFW 1 3/4" x 84" x 6": 460A579-4DNFW 2" x 84" x 6": 460A579-5DNFW]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Millerbernd AnchorBoltsMastArmPoles.pdf|7/30/15]]
|
|-
|Madden Bolt Corp fabricates for Union Metal
|[https://www.unionmetal.com/ Union Metal]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT UnionMetal AnchorBoltsMastArmPoles.pdf|1 1/2" x 54" x 6": 311657 1 3/4" x 84" x 6": 311658 2" x 84" x 6": 311659]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM UnionMetal AnchorBoltsMastArmPoles.pdf|7/5/16]]
|
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|ASTM F1554 GR55 Threads shall be rolled}}

=== Anchor Bolts For Pedestal Signal Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://componentproducts.com/ Component Products, Inc]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT ComponentProducts PedestalPoleAnchorBolt.pdf|CPI-AB-18]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM ComponentProducts PedestalPoleAnchorBolt.pdf|4/24/14]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.gadestraffic.com/ Gades Sales]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GadesSales PedestalPoleAnchorBolts.pdf|PB-5518-GLV]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM GadesSales PedestalPoleAnchorBolts.pdf|4/24/14]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.jhbotts.com/ JH Botts]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT JHBotts AnchorBoltsMastArmPoles.pdf|.750"-10 UNC 2A x 6" (17" + 3") GALV 20"]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM JHBotts AnchorBoltsMastArmPoles.pdf|1/21/15]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.pelcoinc.com/ Pelco Products, Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco PedestalPoleAnchorBolts.pdf|PB-5518-GLV]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM PelcoProducts PedestalPoleAnchorBolts.pdf|4/23/14]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|ASTM A36, Gr 50 or Gr 55 Threads shall be rolled 17" - 18" Length}}

{{PQLReturn}}

== Backplates (Vehicular) ==
=== Standard Vehicular Backplates ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.gadestraffic.com/ Gades Sales / Neodesha Plastics]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Gades Backplates.pdf|BP481PO – 1 section BP483PO – 3 section BP484PO – 4 section BP485PO – 5 section]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Gades Backplates.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.midamsignal.com/ Mid American Signal]
|For Econolite or North American Signal Heads [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT MidAmericaSignal Backplates.pdf|MI-1003-L2 – 3 section]] For McCain Signal Heads [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT MidAmericaSignal Backplates.pdf|MI-1003-N – 3 section]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM MidAmericaSignal Backplates.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.mobotrexmanufacturing.com/products/ Mobotrex / Eagle]
|For Mobotrex / Eagle Signal Heads [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT MobotrexEagle Backplates.pdf|BVD501ANFXX0N0-00 – 1 section BVD503ANFXX0N0-00 – 3 section BVD504ANFXX0N0-00 – 4 section Where XX = 02 for AstroBracket and 05 for SkyBracket BVD503TNF050N0-00 – HAWK]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM MobotrexEagle Backplates.pdf|3/25/19]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.pelcoinc.com/ Pelco Products, Inc.]
|For Econolite or North American Signal Heads [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco Backplates.pdf|BK-1001-L3 – 1 section BK-1003-L3 – 3 section BK-1004-L3 – 4 section BK-1005-L3 – 5 section]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco HAWKBackplates.pdf|BK-2032-L3 - HAWK]] For McCain Signal Heads [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco Backplates.pdf|BK-1001-N – 1 section BK-1003-N – 3 section BK-1004-N – 4 section BK-1005-N – 5 section]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco HAWKBackplates.pdf|BK-2032-N - HAWK]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Pelco Backplates.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|0.125” thick 12” Signal Head Sections}}

=== Flexible Vehicular Backplates ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|'''For Maintenance Use Only'''
|[https://www.pelcoinc.com/ Pelco Products Inc.]
|Universal AeroFlex Options [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco UniversalFlexibleBackplate.pdf|'''Standard''' BK-8000-3-PNC - 3 Section BK-8000-4-PNC - 4 Section '''With Fluorescent Border''' BK-8000-3-RT2-PNC - 3 Section BK-8000-4-RT2-PNC - 4 Section]] Eagle DuraSig-Specific Poly AeroFlex Options [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco EagleFlexibleBackplate.pdf|'''Standard''' BK-8100-3-EagleSG-PNC - 3 Section BK-8100-4-EagleSG-PNC - 4 Section '''With Fluorescent Border''' BK-8100-3-EagleSG-RT2-PNC - 3 Section BK-8100-4-EagleSG-RT2-PNC - 4 Section]] McCain Specific Poly AeroFlex Options [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco McCainFlexibleBackplate.pdf|'''Standard''' BK-8100-3-McCain-PNC - 3 Section BK-8100-4-McCain-PNC - 4 Section '''With Fluorescent Border''' BK-8100-3-McCain-RT2-PNC - 3 Section BK-8100-4-McCain-RT2-PNC - 4 Section]] 
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Pelco FlexibleBackplates.pdf|8/2/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Pelco FlexibleBackplates Front.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Pelco FlexibleBackplates Back.JPG|Back View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Pelco FlexibleBackplates Connection.JPG|Connection]]
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|Universal backplates will fit McCain 12" Poly, Econolite 12" Poly, TCT/Peek 12" Poly}}

{{PQLReturn}}

== Cable ==

=== Illuminated Street Name Sign Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://adcable.com/products/imsa-traffic.html Advanced Digital Cable]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AdvancedDigitalCable Power&MonitoringCable.pdf|8103]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AdvancedDigitalCable Power&MonitoringCable.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.falconfinewire.com/ Falcon Fine Wire]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FalconFineWire Power&MonitoringCable.pdf|980314X19-1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM FalconFineWire Power&MonitoringCable.pdf|4/24/08]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire Power&MonitoringCable Label.JPG|Label]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire Power&MonitoringCable Cable.JPG|Cable]]
|}
{{PQLNote|1-3c#14 IMSA 19-1}}

=== Electrical Service Cable (Traffic Signals) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://adcable.com/products/industrial-wire-cable.html Advanced Diital Cable]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AdvancedDigitalCable ElectricalServiceCable.pdf|304]] UL file # E197262
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AdvancedDigitalCable ElectricalServiceCable.pdf|5/20/16]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AdvancedDigitalCable ElectricalServiceCable Label.JPG|Mfg Label]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AdvancedDigitalCable ElectricalServiceCable Label1.JPG|AWG Label]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AdvancedDigitalCable ElectricalServiceCable.JPG|Cable]]
|-
|
|[https://www.alanwire.com/ Alan Wire]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlanWire SignalServiceCable.pdf|04USE11 – 500’]] UL file #E319493
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AlanWire ElectricalServiceWireCable.pdf|1/30/12]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AlanWire SignalServiceCable Cable.JPG|Cable]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AlanWire SignalServiceCable Efile.JPG|E-File]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AlanWire SignalServiceCable Label.JPG|Label]]
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|[https://www.cerrowire.com/ Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cerro ElectricalServiceWireCable.pdf|1201-4401-Black 1201-4402 - White 1201-1105 - Green]] UL file # E11098
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Cerro ElectricalServiceWireCable.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|Part of the Prysmian Group
|[https://na.prysmiangroup.com/ Draka]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Draka ElectricalServiceWireCable.pdf|388932]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Draka ElectricalServiceWireCable.pdf|7/8/09]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.encorewire.com/ Encore Wire LTD]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Encore ElectricalServiceCable.pdf|UL file # E174428]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Encore ElectricalServiceCable.pdf|8/1/03]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Encore ElectricalServiceCable Cable.jpg|Cable]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Encore ElectricalServiceCable Efile.jpg|E-File]]
|-
|
|[http://www.kristechwire.com/ Kris Tech Wire Co, Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Kris-TechCable ElectricalServiceCable.pdf|0407-RHW/USE-BK]] UL file # E207249
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM KrisTechWire ElectricalServiceWireCable.pdf|11/24/03]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Kris-TechCable ElectricalServiceCable Cable.jpg|Cable]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Kris-TechCable ElectricalServiceCable label.jpg|Label]]
|-
|
|[http://www.servicewire.com/ServiceWire.htm Service Wire Co]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT ServiceWire ElectricalServiceCable.pdf|USEVW4BK]] UL file # E105667
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM ServiceWire ElectricalServiceCable.pdf|5/7/02]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS ServiceWire DistributionCable Cable.JPG|Cable]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS ServiceWire DistributionCable Label.JPG|Label]]
|-
|
|[http://www.southwire.com/ Southwire Co]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Southwire ElectricalServiceCable.pdf|113472 – Black 476565 – White 952663 - Green]] UL file # E32071
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Southwire ElectricalServiceCable.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|No. 4 AWG USE Copper Single cable, not three cables twisted on the reel}}

=== Electrical Service Cable (Electric Vehicle Stations) ===
{| class="wikitable"
|}
{| class="wikitable"
|'''Notes'''
|'''Manufacturer'''
|'''Catalog Number'''
|'''Approval Date'''
|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Advanced Diital Cable
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AdvancedDigitalCable ElectricalServiceCable.pdf|301]]

Black, Green, White

UL file # E197262
|7/14/025
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AdvancedDigitalCable ElectricalServiceCable Label.JPG|Mfg Label]]

[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AdvancedDigitalCable ElectricalServiceCable Label1.JPG|AWG Label]]

[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AdvancedDigitalCable ElectricalServiceCable.JPG|Cable]]
|-
|
|Alan Wire
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlanWire SignalServiceCable.pdf|01USE11 – 500’]]

Black Only

UL file #E319493
|7/14/2025
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AlanWire SignalServiceCable Cable.JPG|Cable]]

[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AlanWire SignalServiceCable Efile.JPG|E-File]]

[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AlanWire SignalServiceCable Label.JPG|Label]]
|-
|Member of The Marmon Group of Companies
|Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cerro ElectricalServiceWireCable.pdf|1201-4701-Black]]

[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cerro ElectricalServiceWireCable.pdf|1201-4702 - White]]

[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cerro ElectricalServiceWireCable.pdf|1201-4705 - Green]]

UL file # E11098
|7/14/2025
|
|-
|
|Encore Wire LTD
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Encore ElectricalServiceCable.pdf|UL file # E174428]]
|7/14/2025
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Encore ElectricalServiceCable Cable.jpg|Cable]]

[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Encore ElectricalServiceCable Efile.jpg|E-File]]
|-
|
|Kris Tech Wire Co, Inc.
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Kris-TechCable ElectricalServiceCable.pdf|0407-RHW/USE-BK]]

UL file # E207249
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM KrisTechWire ElectricalServiceWireCable.pdf|11/24/03]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Kris-TechCable ElectricalServiceCable Cable.jpg|Cable]]

[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Kris-TechCable ElectricalServiceCable label.jpg|Label]]
|-
|
|Service Wire Co
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT ServiceWire ElectricalServiceCable.pdf|USEVW1BK]]

UL file # E105667
|7/14/2025
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS ServiceWire DistributionCable Cable.JPG|Cable]]

[[Media:TRF PQL TS ServiceWire DistributionCable Label.JPG|Label]]
|-
|
|Southwire Co
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Southwire ElectricalServiceCable.pdf|113506 – Black]]

UL file # E32071
|7/14/2025
|
|}
{{PQLNote|No. 2 AWG USE-2 Copper Single cable, not three cables twisted on the reel}}

=== Emergency Vehicle Pre-emption (EVP) Detector Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.belden.com/products/ Belden]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Belden EVPDetectorCable.pdf|580461]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Belden EVPDetectorCable.pdf|11/7/05]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Belden EVPDetectorCable.jpg|Cable]]
|-
|
|[http://www.gtt.com/ Global Traffic Technologies]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GTT EVPDetectorCable.pdf|Model 138]]
|[[Media:TRF-PQL TS MEM GTT EVPDetectorCable.pdf|3/24/08]]
|[[Media:TRF-PQL TS PHOT GTT EVPDetectorCable.jpg|Cable]]
|}

=== Induction Loop Cable 1c#14 ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.advanceddigitalcable.com/detection-notification/tube-loop-detector.html?highlight=WyJpbXNhIiwiNTEtNSIsImltc2EgNTEtNSJd Advanced Digital Cable]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AdvancedDigitalCable InductionLoopCable.pdf|8450]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AdvancedDigitalCable InductionLoopCable.pdf|6/29/09]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.belden.com/docs/upload/IMSA-Catalog-IMSA-Cat.pdf Belden]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Belden InductionLoopCable.pdf|580206]]
|6/17/03
|
|-
|
|[http://www.falconfinewire.com/#!__products/vstc3=51-5-&-51-7 Falcon Fine Wire]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FalconFineWire InductionLoopCable.pdf|14-1 IMSA 51-5]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM FalconFineWire InductionLoopCable.pdf|4/20/01]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.jamesmonroewire.com/ James Monroe Wire and Cable Corporation]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT JamesMonroeWire InductionLoopCable.pdf|IMSA 51-5]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM JamesMonroeWire InductionLoopCable.pdf|9/1/99]]
|

|}
{{PQLNote|IMSA Type 51-5 Tube Loop Detector Cable PVC/nylon Insulated cable PVC Tube 600 Volt}}

=== Multi-conductor 7c#14 and 2c#14 ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.advanceddigitalcable.com/signal/imsa-19-1-stranded.html Advanced Digital Cable / Clifford of Vermont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AvancedDigitalCable MultiConductorSignalCable.pdf|7c – 8107 / 7C14B7I19-1 2c – 8102 / 2C14B7I19-1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM CliffardofVT MultiConductorSignalCable.pdf|5/5/03]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AvancedDigitalCable MultiConductorSignalCable 2Conductor.JPG|2 Condctor Cable]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AvancedDigitalCable MultiConductorSignalCable 7Conductor.JPG|7 Conductor Cable]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AvancedDigitalCable MultiConductorSignalCable 7CMylarWrap.JPG|Mylar Wrap]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AvancedDigitalCable MultiConductorSignalCable 7CLabel.JPG|Label]]
|-
|
|[http://www.falconfinewire.com/#!__products/vstc3=19-1-14awg Falcon Fine Wire]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FalconFineWire MultiConductorSignalCable.pdf|7c – 980714X19-1-00 2c – 980214X19-1-00]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM FalconFineWire MultiConductorSignalCable.pdf|5/23/05]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire MultiConductorSignalCable 7cLabel.jpg|7c Label]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire MultiConductorSignalCable 7cMylarWrap.jpg|7c Mylar Wrap]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire MultiConductorSignalCable 7cCable.JPG|7c Cable]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire MultiConductorSignalCable 2cLabel.jpg|2c Label]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire MultiConductorSignalCable 2cMylarWrap.jpg|2c Mylar Wrap]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire MultiConductorSignalCable 2cCable.jpg|2c Cable]]
|-
|
|[http://www.jamesmonroewire.com/ James Monroe Wire and Cable Corporation]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT JamesMonroeSignalCable MultiConductorSignalCable.pdf|7c – IMSA 19-1 2c – IMSA 19-1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM JamesMonroeSignalCable MultiConductorSignalCable.pdf|9/1/99]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|IMSA 19-1 600 Volt Stranded Copper #14 AWG}}

=== Micro loop Home Run ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Global Traffic Technologies bought out 3M
|[http://www.gtt.com/canoga-traffic-sensing/ Global Traffic Technologies]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT 3M MicroLoopDetectorLeadInCable.pdf|Model Canoga 30003]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM 3M MicroLoopDetectorLeadInCable.pdf|5/20/03]]
|
|}

=== Radar Detector Home Run Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.awcwire.com/ Allied Wire & Cable]
|091102WGP12
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AlliedWire RadarDetectorCable.pdf|1/10/11]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.falconfinewire.com/ Falcon Fine Wire]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FalconFineWire RadarDetectorHomeRunCable.pdf|532P2218HD-08]] 2 pair 22 AWG communication wires 1 pair 18 AWG power wires
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM FalconFineWire RadarDetectorHomeRunCable.pdf|11/13/14]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire RadarDetectorHomeRunCable.JPG|Separated Cable]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire RadarDetectorHomeRunCable Stripped.JPG|Bundled Cable]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire RadarDetectorHomeRunCable Label1.JPG|"Matrix Advance" Label]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire RadarDetectorHomeRunCable Label2.JPG|Label showing wire guage]]
|-
|
|[http://www.wavetronix.com/en/support/product_lines/1/products/121 Orion Wire / Wavetronix]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Wavetronix RadarHomeRunDetectorCable.pdf|WX-SS-H705]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Wavetronix RadarHomeRunDetectorCable.pdf|1/10/11]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|2 pair 22 AWG communication wires (blue, blue/white, orange, orange/white) 1 pair 20 AWG power wires (red and black) 1 drain cable, unless otherwise shown}}

=== Radar Detector Harness Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.wavetronix.com/en/support/product_lines/1/products/121 Orion Wire / Wavetronix]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Wavetronix RadarDetectorHarnessCable.pdf|WX-SS-H704-100]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Orion RadarDetectorHarnessCable.pdf|1/10/11]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|100’ harness to be spliced to home run cable at pole base Cable harness to be supplied with the detector.}}

=== Shielded Detector Lead-in 2c#14 ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.advanceddigitalcable.com/detection-notification/imsa-50-2-loop-lead-in.html Advanced Digital Cable]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AdvancedDigitalCable ShieldedDetectorLeadInCable.pdf|8780]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AdvancedDigitalCable ShieldedDetectorLeadInCable.pdf|6/29/09]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AdvancedDigitalCable ShieldedDetectorLeadInCable Cable.JPG|Cable]]
|-
|
|[http://www.belden.com/products/ Belden]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT BeldenCable ShieldedDetectorLeadInCable.pdf|601765]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM BeldenCable ShieldedDetectorLeadInCable.pdf|2/1/01]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT BeldenCable ShieldedDetectorLeadInCable Cable.JPG|Cable]]
|-
|
|[http://www.falconfinewire.com/#!__products/vstc1=trafficcontrol&signalcables Falcon Fine Wire]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FalconFineWire ShieldedDetectorLeadInCable.pdf|98021450-2]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM FalconFineWire ShieldedDetectorLeadInCable.pdf|5/5/06]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire ShieldedDetectorLeadInCable Cable.JPG|Cable]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire ShieldedDetectorLeadInCable Label.JPG|Label]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire ShieldedDetectorLeadInCable Shield.JPG|Shield and Drain Wire]]
|-
|
|[http://www.jamesmonroewire.com/ James Monroe Wire and Cable Corporation]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT JamesMonroeCable ShieldedDetectorLeadInCable.pdf|JM43465]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM JamesMonroeCable ShieldedDetectorLeadInCable.pdf|9/1/99]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|IMSA Type 50-2 Loop Lead-in Cable Polyethylene Insulated 600 Volt Stranded Copper #14 AWG}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== #10 AWG System Ground Wire and Tracer Wire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://adcable.com/products/industrial-wire-cable.html Advanced Digital Cable]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AdvancedDigitalCable SystemGroundCable.pdf|Green - 410GN Red - 410RD]] UL File # E208489
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AdvancedDigitalCable SystemGroundCable.pdf|5/20/16]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AdvancedDigitalCable SystemGroundCable.JPG|Ground Cable]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AdvancedDigitalCable SystemGroundCable Label.JPG|Mfg Label]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AdvancedDigitalCable SystemGroundCable AWG Label.JPG|AWG Label]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AdvancedDigitalCable TracerCable.JPG|Tracer Cable]]
|-
|
|[http://www.cerrowire.com/circuit-sized-thhn--thwn Cerowire Wire & Cable Co., Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL CAT CerroWire Pole&BracketCable.pdf|Red – 112-3803 Green – 112-3805 UL file # E15119]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM CerroWire SystemGroundandTracerWire.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.encorewire.com/ Encore Wire LTD]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Encore SystemGroundandTracerWire.pdf|UL file # E123774]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Encore SystemGroundandTracerWire.pdf|8/1/03]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.republicwire.com/products Republic Wire]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT RepublicWire SystemGroundTracerCable.pdf|UL File E167613]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM RepublicWire SystemGroundTracerCable.pdf|5/8/23]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT RepublicWire SystemGroundTracerCable Label1.JPG|Label Name]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT RepublicWire SystemGroundTracerCable Label2.JPG|Label Cable Type]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT RepublicWire SystemGroundTracerCable Label3.JPG|Label UL File]]
|-
|
|[https://www.southwire.com/ Southwire]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Southwire SystemGroundCable.pdf|Green - 22-97-73 Red - 22-97-57 UL file # E23919]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Southwire SystemGroundandTracerWire.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-

|}
{{PQLNote|Stranded copper #10 AWG THHN/THWN-2 600 volt Tracer wire shall have Red insulation Ground wire shall have Green insulation}}

=== #6 AWG Equipment Ground Wire ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://adcable.com/products/industrial-wire-cable.html Advanced Digital Cable]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AdvancedDigitalCable GroundingCable.pdf|BC06S]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AdvancedDigitalCable GroundingCable.pdf|5/20/16]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AdvancedDigitalCable GroundingCable.JPG|Bare Copper Cable]]
|-
|
|[https://www.cerrowire.com/ Cerro Wire & Cable Co, Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL CAT CerroWire GroundCable.pdf|Product Number 050-2200 or 050-2215]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Cerro EquipmentGroundWire.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.encorewire.com/ Encore Wire LTD]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Encore EquipmentGroundWire.pdf|Bare No. 6 AWG]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Encore EquipmentGroundWire.pdf|8/1/03]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.servicewire.com/ Service Wire Co]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT ServiceWire GroundWire.pdf|BSOS6]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM ServiceWire EquipmentGroundWire.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.southwire.com/ Southwire]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Southwire GroundWire.pdf|Bare No. 6 AWG]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM South GroundWire.pdf|5/5/03]]
|

|}
{{PQLNote|Bare copper soft drawn solid copper #6 AWG}}

=== Video Detection Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Econolite Exclusive
|[http://www.falconfinewire.com/ Falcon Fine Wire]
|970316TS-00-1MP
|[[Media:TR PQL TS MEM FalconFineWire VideoDetectionCable.pdf|1/30/12]]
|[[Media:TR PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire VideoDetectionCable Cable.pdf|Cable]] [[Media:TR PQL TS PHOT FalconFineWire VideoDetectionCable Jacket.pdf|Jacket]]
|-
|Econolite Exclusive
|Isotec
|X339313-00 (for Econolite Solo Terra Systems)
|[[Media:TR PQL TS MEM Isotec VideoDetectionCable.pdf|4/25/08]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Isotec VideoDetectionCable Cable.JPG|Cable]]
|}
{{PQLNote|16 AWG/3c}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Conduit and Fittings ==
=== HDPE Signal Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.bdiky.com/ Blue Diamond Industires]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT BlueDiamond 1inHDPECond.pdf|1" - BDI114BK-WHS]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT BlueDiamond 1.5inHDPECond.pdf|1 ½” - BDI164BK-WHS]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT BlueDiamond 2inHDPECond.pdf|2" - BDI214BK-WHS]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT BlueDiamond 3inHDPECond.pdf|3" - BDI314BK-WHS]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT BlueDiamond 4inHDPECond.pdf|4" -BDI414BK-WHS]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM CAT BlueDiamond HDPECond.pdf|3/9/23]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT BlueDiamond 1.5inHDPECond Label.JPG|1 ½” Cond Line Code]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT BlueDiamond 2inHDPECond Label.JPG|2" Cond Line Code]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT BlueDiamond 3inHDPECond Label.JPG|3" Cond Line Code]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT BlueDiamond 4inHDPECond Label.JPG|4" Cond Line Code]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT BlueDiamond HDPECond EndView.JPG|End View]]
|-
|
|[https://bulldogpipe.com/standard-hdpe-conduit/ Bulldog Pipe LLC]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Bulldog HDPEConduit.pdf|1” – C100SDR135BKTWT//XX0PZZW 1 ½” – C150SDR135BKTWT//XX0PZZW 2” – C200SDR135BKTWT//XX0PZZW 3” – C300SDR135BKTWT//XX0PZZW 4” – C400SDR135BKTWT//XX0PZZW]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Bulldog HDPEConduit.pdf|2/12/25]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Bulldog HDPEConduit.JPG|Bull Dog HDPE Conduit]]
|-
|
|[http://www.duraline.com/conduit/smoothwall Dura-Line]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT DuraLine HDPESignalConduit.pdf|1” – HDP100RSDR013SWBLKWHTNEMPT 1 ½” – HDP150RSDR013SWBLKWHTNEMPT 2” – HDP200RSDR013SWBLKWHTNEMPT 3” – HDP300RSDR013SWBLKWHTNEMPT 4” – HDP400RSDR013SWBLKWHTNEMPT]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM DuraLine HDPEConduit.pdf|1/09/17]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.endurancepoly.com/ Endurance]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Endurance HDPEConduit.pdf|1” – CC4BKWHA1SNXX 1 ½” – CE4BKWHA1SNXX 2” – CF4BKWHA1SNXX 3” – CH4BKWHA1SNXX 4” – CI4BKWHA1SNXX]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Endurance HDPEConduit.pdf|2/13/25]]
|
|-
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Include "City Traffic" in the product line code SDR 13.5 Black with three or four longitudinal white stripes Smooth wall UV Stabilized}}

=== HDPE Service Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.bdiky.com/ Blue Diamond Industries]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT BlueDiamond 2inElecServiceHDPECond.pdf|2" - BDI214BK-RDS]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT BlueDiamond 3inElecServiceHDPECond.pdf|3" - BDI314BK-RDS]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM BlueDiamond ElecServiceHDPECond.pdf|3/9/23]]
|
|-
|
|[https://bulldogpipe.com/standard-hdpe-conduit/ Bulldog Pipe LLC]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Bulldog ServiceHDPEConduit.pdf|2” – C200SDR135BKTRD//XX0PZZW 3” – C300SDR135BKTRD//XX0PZZW]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Bulldog ServiceHDPEConduit.pdf|2/12/25]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.duraline.com/conduit/smoothwall Dura-Line]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT DuraLine HDPEServiceConduit.pdf|2” – 2SDR135BLK/RED 3” – 3SDR135BLK/RED]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM DuraLine HDPEServiceConduit.pdf|3/8/13]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.endurancepoly.com/ Endurance]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Endur ServHDPEConduit.pdf|2” – CF4BKRDA1SNXX 3” – CH4BKRDA1SNXX]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL MEM Endurance ElectricalServiceHDPEConduit.pdf|2/13/25]]
|
|-

|}
{{PQLNote|SDR 13.5 Black with three or four longitudinal red stripes Smooth wall UV Stabilized}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== HDPE Couplings ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.polywater.com/index.html American Polywater]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AmericanPolywater Bonduit.pdf|Bonduit Conduit Adhesive]] Use with standard Sch 40 PVC Couplings
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AmericanPolywater Bonduit.pdf|10/11/10]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AmericanPolywater Bonduit.JPG|Cartridge]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AmericanPolywater Bonduit Equipment.JPG|Equipment]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AmericanPolywater Bonduit Nozzle.JPG|Nozzle]]
|-
|
|[https://www.cabletecusa.com/ Cabletec]
|HDPE to HDPE Coupling: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cabletec HDPEtoHDPECouplings.pdf|1" - AS 1.315 1-1/2" - AS 1.900 2" - AS 2.375 3" - AS 3.500 4" - AS 4.500]] HDPE to PVC Coupling: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cabletec HDPEtoPVCCouplings.pdf|1" - ASP 1.315 1-1/2" - ASP 1.900 2" - ASP 2.375 3" - ASP 3.500 4" - ASP 4.500]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Cabletec HDPEtoHDPECouplings.pdf|8/2/01]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Cabletec HDPEtoPVCCouplings.pdf|12/22/17]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.duraline.com/catalog/couplers/push-lock Dura-Line]
|HDPE to HDPE Coupling or HDPE to PVC Coupling: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT DuraLine ShurLockCoupling.pdf|ShurLock Couplings 1" - 20000118 1 ½” – 20000122 2" - 20000123 (1-400761) 3" - 20000173 4" - 20000245]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM DuraLine ShurlockCoupling.pdf|7/11/14]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT DuraLine ShurLockCoupling Side.JPG|Side View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT DuraLine ShurLockCoupling Label.jpg|Label View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT DuraLine ShurLockCoupling End.jpg|End View]]
|-
|
|[http://www.centralplastics.com/en_US.html Georg Fischer/Central Plastics Company]
|HDPE to HDPE Electrofusion Couplings [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GFCP HDPE Couplings.pdf|1 ½” - 5760028 2” - 5760030 3” - 10000358 4” - 10000360]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM GFCP HDPE Couplings.pdf|5/5/06]]
|
|-

|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Schedule 40 PVC Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Part of Atkore International
|[https://www.atkore.com/About-Us/Brands/Allied-Tube-and-Conduit Allied Tube & Conduit]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube Sch40PVCConduit.pdf|1" - 4010010 (10' length) 1" - 4010020 (20' length) 1 ½” - 4015010 (10' length) 1 ½” - 4015020 (20' length) 2" - 4020010 (10' length) 2" - 4020020 (20' length) 3" - 4030010 (10' length) 3" - 4030020 (20' lengths) 4" - 4040010 (10' length) 4" - 4040020 (20' length)]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AlliedTube Sch40PVCConduit.pdf|8/30/23]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.cantexinc.com/Products/Schedule_40/Conduit/index.php Cantex]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex PVCConduit.pdf|1” – A52BA12 1 ½” – A52BE12 2” – A52CA12 3” – A52DA12 4” – A52EA12]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Cantex PVCConduit.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|Part of Atkore International
|[http://www.heritageplastics.com/ Heritage Plastics]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics PVCConduit.pdf|1” – 511010 (10’ length) 1" - 511020 (20’ length) 1 ½” – 511510 (10’ length) 1 ½” - 511520 (20’ length) 2” – 512010 (10’ length) 2" - 512020 (20’ length) 3” – 513010 (10’ length) 3" - 513020 (20’ length) 4” – 514010 (10’ length) 4" - 515020 (20’ length)]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM HeritagePlastics PVCConduit.pdf|7/24/12]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.ipexinc.com/Home.aspx?LanguageCode=en-CA IPEX / Scepter]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXScepter PVCConduit.pdf|1” – 032410 – 10’or 032411 – 20’ 1 ½” – 032415 – 10’or 032416 – 20’ 2” – 032420 – 10’ or 032421 – 20’ 3” – 032430 – 10’ or 032431 – 20’ 4” – 032440 – 10’ or 032441 – 20’]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM IPEXScepter PVCConduit.pdf|12/22/05]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.primeconduit.com/schedule-40-80/ Prime Conduit]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PrimeConduit PVCConduit.pdf|1” – 49008-010 (10’ length) 1” – 49008-020 (20’ length) 1 ½” – 49010-010 (10’ length) 1 ½” – 49010-020 (20’ length) 2” – 49011-010(10’ length) 2” – 40911-020 (20’ length) 3” – 49013-010 (10’ length) 3” – 49013-020 (20’ length) 4” – 49015-010 (10’ length) 4” – 49015-020 (20’ length)]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM PrimeConduit PVCConduit.pdf|5/26/09]]
|
|-
|
|[https://cortekconduitsolutions.com/ Rocky Mountain Colby Pipe]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT RockyMtnColby PVCConduit.pdf|1" – 504010010U (10' length) 1" – 504010020U (20' length) 1 1/2" – 504015010 (10' length) 1 1/2" – 504015020U (20' length) 2” – 504020010U (10’ length) 2" – 504020020U (20’ length) 3” – 504030010U (10’ length) 3" – 504030020U (20' length) 4” – 504040010U (10’ length) 4" – 504040020U (20’ length)]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM RockyMtnColby PVCConduit.pdf|4/7/09]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Schedule 40}}

{{PQLReturn}}

=== Schedule 80 PVC Conduit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Part of Atkore International
|[https://www.atkore.com/About-Us/Brands/Allied-Tube-and-Conduit Allied Tube & Conduit]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube Sch80PVCConduit.pdf|1" - 8010010 (10' length) 1" - 8010020 (20' length) 1 ½” - 8015010 (10' length) 1 ½” - 8015020 (20' length) 2" - 8020010 (10' length) 2" - 8020020 (20' length) 3" - 8030010 (10' length) 3" - 8030020 (20' lengths) 4" - 8040010 (10' length) 4" - 8040020 (20' length)]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AlliedTube Sch80PVCConduit.pdf|8/30/23]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.cantexinc.com/index.php Cantex]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex Schedule80PVCConduit.pdf|1” – A53BA12 1 ½” – A53BE12 2” – A53CA12 3" – A53DA12 4" – A53EA12]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Cantex Schedule80PVCConduit.pdf|1/29/19]]
|
|-
|Part of Atkore International
|[http://www.heritageplastics.com/index.html Heritage Plastics]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics Schedule80PVCConduit.pdf|1” – 9304 (10’ length) 1" – 9504 (20’ length) 1 ½” – 9306 (10’ length) 1 ½” – 9506 (20’ length) 2” – 9308 (10’ length) 2" – 9508 (20’ length) 3” – 9312 (10’ length) 3" – 9512 (20’ length) 4” – 9316 (10’ length) 4" – 9516(20’ length)]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM HeritagePlastics Schedul80PVCConduit.pdf|1/29/19]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.ipexamerica.com/default.aspx IPEX / Scepter]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IpexScepter Schedule80PVCConduit.pdf|1” – 032510 (10’length) 1” – 032511 (20’ length) 1 ½” – 032515 (10' length) 1 ½” – 032516 (20' length) 2” – 032520 (10’length) 2" – 032521 (20’ length) 3” – 032530 (10’ length) 3" - 032531 (20’ length) 4” – 032540 (10’ length) 4" – 032541 (20’ length)]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM IPEXScepter Schedule80PVCConduit.pdf|1/29/19]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.primeconduit.com/ Prime Conduit]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PrimeConduit Schedule80PVCConduit.pdf|1” – 49408-010 (10’ length) 1” – 49408-020 (20’ length) 1 1/2" – 49410-010 (10' length) 1 1/2" – 49410-020 (20' length) 2” – 49411-010 (10’ length) 2” – 40911-020 (20’ length) 3” – 49413-010 (10’ length) 3” – 49413-020 (20’ length) 4" – 49415-010 (10' length) 4" – 49415-020 (20' length)]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM PrimeConduit Schedule80PVCConduit.pdf|1/29/19]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.rmcp.com/ Rocky Mountain Colby Pipe]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT RockyMountainColbyPipe Schedule80PVCConduit.pdf|1" – 508010010U (10' length) 1" – 508010020U (20' length) 1 1/2" – 508015010 (10' length) 1 1/2" – 508015020U (20' length) 2” – 508020010U (10’ length) 2" – 508020020U (20’ length) 3” – 508030010U (10’ length) 3" – 508030020U (20' length) 4” – 508040010U (10’ length) 4" – 508040020U (20’ length)]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM RockyMountainColbyPipe Schedule80PVCConduit.pdf|1/29/19]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Schedule 80 PVC shall only be used in above ground applications or exposed on the underside of bridge decks.}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Schedule 40 PVC Fittings ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Part of Atkore International
|[http://www.alliedeg.us/ Allied Tube & Conduit]
|'''[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit PVCCouplings.pdf|Standard Couplings]]:'''  1” – 59603  1 ½” – 59605  2” – 59606  3" – 59608  4" – 59610
'''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit 36RSpecialPlain90Elbow.pdf|Plain End]]) / (Bell End)'''  2” – 59730 / NA 
'''90º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit PlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit BellEndElbows.pdf|Belled End]])'''  1” – 59590 / 802754  1 ½” – 59592 / 802756  2” – 59593 / 807757  3” – 59595 / 802759  4" – 59597 / 802762 
'''45º Elbows:([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit PlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit BellEndElbows.pdf|Belled End]])'''  1” – 59577 / 802768  1 ½” – 59579 / 802770  2” – 59580 / 802771  3” – 59582 / 802773  4” – 59584 / 802775 
'''30º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit PlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit BellEndElbows.pdf|Belled End]])'''  1” – 59563 / 802780  1 ½” – 59565 / 802782  2” – 59566 / 802783  3" – 59568 / 802785  4” – 59570 / 802787 
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AlliedTube&Conduit Sch40PVCFittings.pdf|9/3/14]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.cantexinc.com/Products/NM_Fittings_Accessories/ Cantex]
|'''[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex PVCFittings Coupling.pdf|Standard Couplings:]]''' 1” – 6141625 1 ½” – 6141627 2” – 6141628 3” – 6141630 4” - 6141632 
'''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex PVCFittings 36RSpecialPlain90Elbow.pdf|Plain End]]) / ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex PVCFittings 36RSpecialBelled90Elbow.pdf|Belled End]])''' 2” – 5133848 / 5233848 
'''90º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex PVCFittings 90ElbowPlainEnd.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex PVCFittings 90ElbowBelledEnd.pdf|Belled End]])''' 1” – 5133825 / 5233825 1 ½” – 5133827 / 5233827 2” – 5133828 / 5233828 3” – 5133830 / 5233830 4” – 5133832 / 5233832 
'''45º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex PVCFittings 45ElbowPlainEnd.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex PVCFittings 45BelledEnd.pdf|Belled End]])''' 1” – 5133765 / 5233765 1 ½” – 5133767 / 5233767 2” – 5133768 / 5233768 3” – 5133770 / 5233770 4” – 5133772 / 5233772 
'''30º Elbows: (Plain End / Belled End)''' 1” – 5133745 / 5233745 1 ½” – 5133747 / 5233747 2” – 5133748 / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex PVCFittings 30BelledEnd2-4in.pdf|5233748]] 3” – 5133750 / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex PVCFittings 30BelledEnd2-4in.pdf|5233750]] 4” – 5133775 / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex PVCFittings 30BelledEnd2-4in.pdf|5233776]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Cantex PVCFittings.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|Part of Atkore International
|[http://www.heritageplastics.com/products-downloads.html Heritage Plastics]
|'''[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics PVCFittings Coupling.pdf|Standard Couplings:]]''' 1” – 610002 1 ½” – 610004 2” – 610005 3” – 610007 4” – 610009 
'''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics PVCFittings 36RSpecialPlain90Elbow.pdf|Plain End]]) / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics PVCFittings 36RSpecialBelled90Elbow.pdf|Belled End]])''' 2” – 611353 / 611140 
'''90º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics PVCFittings 90ElbowPlainEnd.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics PVCFittings 90ElbowBelledEnd.pdf|Belled End]])''' 1” – 611002 / 611058 1 ½” – 611004 /611060 2” – 611005 / 611061 3” – 611007 / 611063 4” – 611009 / 611065 
'''45º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics PVCFittings 90ElbowPlainEnd.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics PVCFittings 90ElbowBelledEnd.pdf|Belled End]])''' 1” – 611016 / 611071 1 ½” – 611018 / 611073 2” – 611019 / 611074 3” – 611021 / 611076 4” – 611023 / 611078 
'''30º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics PVCFittings 90ElbowPlainEnd.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics PVCFittings 90ElbowBelledEnd.pdf|Belled End]])''' 1” – 611030 / 611085 1 ½” – 611032 / 611087 2” – 611033 / 611088 3” – 611035 / 611090 4” – 611037 / 611092
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM HeritagePlastics PVCFittings.pdf|7/24/12]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.ipexinc.com/Home.aspx?LanguageCode=en-CA IPEX / Scepter]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXScepter PVCCouplings.pdf|'''Standard Couplings:''']] 1” – EC20 / 077003 1 ½” – EC30 / 077005 2” – EC35 / 077006 3” – EC45 / 077008 4” – EC55 / 077010 
'''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXScepter PVCLargeRadiusElbows.pdf|Plain End / Belled End)]]''' 2” – 068765 / 068054 
'''90º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXScepter PVCStdPlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXScepter PVCStdBellEndElbows.pdf|Belled End]])''' 1” – EE2090 / EE2090B 1 ½” – EE3090 / EE3090B 2” – EE3590 / EE3590B 3” – EE4590 / EE4590B 4” – EE5590 / EE5590B 
'''45º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXScepter PVCStdPlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXScepter PVCStdBellEndElbows.pdf|Belled End]])''' 1” – EE2045 / EE2045B 1 ½” – EE3045 / EE3045B 2” – EE3545 / EE3545B 3” – EE4545 / EE4545B 4” – EE5545 / EE5545B 
'''30º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXScepter PVCStdPlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXScepter PVCStdBellEndElbows.pdf|Belled End]])''' 1” – EE2030 / NA 1 ½” – EE3030 / NA 2” – EE3530 / NA 3” – EE4530 / NA 4” – EE5530 / NA 
'''22.5º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXScepter PVCStdPlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXScepter PVCStdBellEndElbows.pdf|Belled End]])''' 1” – NA / NA 1 ½” – EE1522 / NA 2” – EE2022 / NA 3” – EE3022 / NA 4” – EE4022 / NA
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM IPEXScepter PVCStdFittings.pdf|12/22/05]]
|
|-
|Formerly Carlon
|[http://www.primeconduit.com/ Prime Conduit]
|'''[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PrimeConduit PVCCoupling.pdf|Standard Couplings:]]''' 1” – CP100 1 ½” – CP150 2” – CP200 3” – CP300 4” – CP400 
'''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PrimeConduit PVCElbows.pdf|Plain End / Belled End]])''' 2” – UA9FJ / UA9FJB '''90º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PrimeConduit PVCElbows.pdf|Plain End / Belled End]])''' 1” – UA9AF / UA9AFB 1 ½” – UA9AH / UA9AHB 2” – UA9AJ / UA9AJB 3” – UA9AL / UA9ALB 4” – UA9AN / UA9ANB 
'''45º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PrimeConduit PVCElbows.pdf|Plain End / Belled End]])''' 1” – UA7AF / UA7AFB 1 ½” – UA7AH / UA7AHB 2” – UA7AJ / UA7AJB 3” – UA7AL / UA7ALB 4” – UA7AN / UA7ANB 
'''30º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PrimeConduit PVCElbows.pdf|Plain End / Belled End]])''' 1” – UA6AF / UA6AFB 1 ½” – UA6AH / UA6AHB 2” – UA6AJ / UA6AJB 3” – UA6AL / UA6ALB 4” – UA6AN / UA6ANB 
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM PrimeConduit PVCFittings.pdf|5/26/09]]
|
|}

=== Schedule 80 PVC Fittings ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Part of Atkore International
|[http://www.alliedeg.us/ Allied Tube & Conduit]
|'''[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit Sch80Couplings.pdf|Standard Couplings]]:'''  1” – 59603  1 ½” – 59605  2” – 59606  3" – 59608  4" – 59610 
'''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: ([[Media:TRF PQL SL CAT AlliedTube&Conduit Sch80SpecialRadiusPlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL SL CAT AlliedTube&Conduit Sch80SpecialRadiusBellEndElbows.pdf|Bell End)]]'''  2” – 597394 / 926011 
'''90º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit Sch80PlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit Sch80BellEndElbows.pdf|Belled End]])'''  1” – 59014 / 924949  1 ½” – 59016 / NA  2” – 59017 / 924970  3” – 59019 / 924993  4” – 59021 / 925006 
'''45º Elbows:([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit Sch80PlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit Sch80BellEndElbows.pdf|Belled End]])'''  1” – 59002 / NA  1 ½” – 59004 / 903486  2” – 59005 / 924967  3” – 59007 / 924990  4" – 59009 / 925006 
'''30º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit Sch80PlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit Sch80BellEndElbows.pdf|Belled End]])'''  1” – 59066 / NA  1 ½” – 59068 / NA  2” – 59069 / NA  3" – 59071 / NA  4” – 59072 / NA 
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AlliedTube Sch80PVCElbows&Couplings.pdf|1/29/19]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.cantexinc.com Cantex]
|'''[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex Couplings.pdf|Standard Couplings]]:'''  1” – 6141625  1 ½" – 6141627  2” – 6141628  3" – 6141630  4" – 6141632 
'''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex Sch8036RSpecialPain90Elbow.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex Sch8036RSpecialBell90Elbow.pdf|Belled End]])'''  2” – 5121021 / 5121047 
'''90º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex Sch80Plain90Elbow.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex Sch80Bell90Elbow.pdf|Belled End]])'''  1” – 5121055 / NA  1 ½” – 5121057 / 5221057  2” – 5121058 / 5221058  3” – 5121060 / 5221060  4” – 5121061 / 5221061 
'''45º Elbows:([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex Sch80Plain45Elbow.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex Sch80Bell45Elbow.pdf|Belled End]])'''  1” – 5121005 / NA  1 ½” – 5121007 / 5221007  2” – 5121008 / 5221008  3” – 5121010 / 5221010  4” – 5121011 / 5221011 
'''30º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex Sch80Plain30Elbow.pdf|Plain End]] / Belled End)'''  1” – 5121002 / NA  1 ½” – 5121850 / NA  2” – 5121108 / NA  3" – 5121110 / NA  4” – 5121111 / NA 
'''22.5º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex Sch80Plain22.5Elbow.pdf|Plain End]] / [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex Sch80Bell22.5Elbow.pdf|Belled End]])'''  1” – NA / NA  1 ½” – 5136649 / NA  2” – 5136659 / 5221052  3" – 5136679 / 5236679  4” – 5121868 / 5221868

|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Cantex Sch80PVCElbows&Couplings.pdf|1/29/19]]
|
|-
|Part of Atkore International
|[http://www.heritageplastics.com/products-downloads.html Heritage Plastics]
|'''[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics Couplings.pdf|Standard Couplings:]]'''  1” – 59603  1 ½" – 59605  2” – 59606  3” – 59608  4" – 59610 
'''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics Sch80SpecialRadiusPlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]]) / ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics Sch80SpecialRadiusBellEndElbows.pdf|Belled End]])'''  2” – 597394 / 926011 
'''90º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics Sch80PlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]]) / ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics Sch80BellEndElbows.pdf|Belled End]])'''  1” – 59014 / 924949  1 ½" – 59016 / NA  2” – 59017 / 924970  3" - 59019 / 924993  4" – 59021 / 925006 
'''45º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics Sch80PlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]]) / ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics Sch80BellEndElbows.pdf|Belled End]])'''  1” – 59002 / NA  1 ½" – 59004 / 903486  2” – 59005 / 924967  3” – 59007 / 924990  4" – 59021 / 925003 
'''30º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT HeritagePlastics Sch80PlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]]) / (Belled End)'''  1” – 59066 / NA  1 ½" – 59068 / NA  2” – 59069 / NA  3” – 59071 / NA  4" – 59072 / NA
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM HeritagePlastics Sch80PVCElbows&Couplings.pdf|1/29/19]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.ipexna.com/usa IPEX / Scepter]
|'''[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXSceptor PVCCouplings.pdf|Standard Couplings:]]'''  1” – EC20  1 ½” – ED30  2” – EC35  3” – EC45  4" – ED55 
'''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXSceptor Sch80Special36RPlainEndElbows.pdf|(Plain End]] / Belled End)'''  2” – 068775 / NA 
'''90º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXSceptor Sch80PlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]] / Belled End)'''  1” – 80EE2090 / NA  1 ½” – 80EE3090 / NA  2” – 80EE3590 / NA  3” – 80EE4590 /
NA 4" - 80EE5590 / NA 
'''45º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXSceptor Sch80PlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]] / Belled End)'''  1” – 80EE2045 / NA 1 ½” – 80EE3045 / NA  2” – 80EE3545 / NA  3” – 80EE4545 /
NA 4" – 80EE5545 / NA 
'''30º Elbows: ([[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXSceptor Sch80PlainEndElbows.pdf|Plain End]] / Belled End)'''  1” – 80EE2030 / NA 1 ½” – 80EE3030 / NA  2” – 80EE3530 / NA  3” – 80EE4530 /
NA 4" – 80EE5530 / NA
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM IPEXSceptor Sch80PVCElbows&Couplings.pdf|1/29/19]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.primeconduit.com/# Prime Conduit]
|'''[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PrimeConduit PVCCouplings.pdf|Standard Couplings:]]'''  1” – CP100  1 ½” – CP150  2” – CP200  3" – CP300  4” – CP400
'''90º Elbows 36” Radius for Power: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PrimeConduit PVCElbows.pdf|(Plain End / Belled End)]]'''  2” – UB9FJ / UB9FJB 
'''90º Elbows: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PrimeConduit PVCElbows.pdf|(Plain End / Belled End)]]'''  1” – UB9AF / UB9AFB  1 ½” – UB9AH / UB9AHB  2” – UB9AJ / UB9AJB  3” – UB9AL / UB9ALB  4” – UB9AN / UB9ANB 
'''45º Elbows: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PrimeConduit PVCElbows.pdf|(Plain End / Belled End)]]'''  1” – UB7AF / UB7AFB  1 ½” – UB7AH / UB7AHB  2” – UB7AJ / UB7AJB  3” – UB7AL / UB7ALB  4” – UB7AN / UB7ANB 
'''30º Elbows: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PrimeConduit PVCElbows.pdf|(Plain End / Belled End)]]'''  1” – UB6AF / UB6AFB  1 ½” – UB6AH / UB6AHB  2” – UB6AJ / UB6AJB  3” – UB6AL / UB6ALB  4” – UB6AN / UB6ANB 
'''22.5º Elbows: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PrimeConduit PVCElbows.pdf|(Plain End / Belled End)]]'''  1” – UB5AF / UB5AFB  1 ½” – UB5AH / UB5AHB  2” – UB5AJ / UB5AJB  3” – UB5AL / UB5ALB  4” – UB5AN / UB5ANB
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL MEM PrimeConduit Sch80PVCElbows&Couplings.pdf|1/29/19]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|To be used with Schedule 80 PVC conduit}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Bridge Expansion Couplings ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.alliedeg.us/index.php Allied Tube & Conduit]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AlliedTube&Conduit ExpansionCoupling.pdf|1" - 789648 1 ½” - 789650 2" - 789651 3" - 789653 4" - 789655]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AlliedTube&Conduit ExpansionCoupling.pdf|5/2/14]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.cantexinc.com/Products/Utility_Duct/Utility_Duct_Couplings/Expansion_Couplings_2_Piece.php Cantex]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Cantex BridgeExpansionCouplings.pdf|1” – 5144033 1 ½” – 5144035 2” – 5144036 3” – 5144038 4” – 5144040]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Cantex BridgeExpansionCoupling.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.ipexinc.com/Home.aspx?LanguageCode=en-CA IPEX / Scepter]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT IPEXScepter ExpansionCoupling.pdf|1” – EJ20 1 ½” – EJ30 2” – EJ35 3” – EJ45 4” – EJ55]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM IPEXScepter ExpansionCoupling.pdf|9/26/13]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.primeconduit.com/ Prime Conduit]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PrimeConduit ExpansionCoupling.pdf|1” – EC2PC100 1 ½” – EC2PC150 2” – EC2PC200 3” – EC2PC300 4” – EC2PC400]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM PrimeConduit ExpansionCoupling.pdf|9/26/13]]
|
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Controller Cabinet ==
=== ATC Pad Mount Traffic Signal Cabinet ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.econolite.com/ Econolite]
|Single Wide: ATCC1201 Double Wide: ATCC1202
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Econolite ATCCabinets.pdf|6/16/22]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.mccain-inc.com/products/cabinets McCain]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT McCain ATCCabinet.pdf|Single Wide: 352i]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT McCain ATCDoubleCabinet.pdf|Double Wide: 353i]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM McCain ATCCabinet.pdf|11/15/18]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain ATCCabinet Front.JPG|Single Cabinet Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain ATCCabinet CleanPowerBus.jpg|Clean Power Bus]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain ATCCabinet FieldInputTerminal.JPG|Field Input Terminal]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain ATCCabinet InputOutputAssembly.jpg|Input/Output Assembly]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain ATCCabinet PowerAssembly.jpg|Power Assembly]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain ATCCabinet RearView.JPG|Rear View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain ATCCabinet SurgeProtector.jpg|Surge Protector]]
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|Includes the following: 24 channel input assembly 16 channel output assembly 8" cabinet riser Corbin Locks MOV's for field outputs Rear mounted field output terminals and field input terminal panels Rear facing panel terminals for pedestrian and EVP 4 fans and 2 thermostats in the double cabinets and 2 fans and 1 thermostat in single cabinets}}

=== 332 Pad Mount Traffic Signal Cabinet ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|'''For Maintenance Use Only'''
|[https://www.mccain-inc.com/ McCain]
|Model 332 / M35378
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM McCain PadMountTSCabinet.pdf|10/12/11]]
|
|-
|}

=== 333 Double Pad Mount Traffic Signal Cabinet ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|'''For Maintenance Use Only'''
|[https://www.mccain-inc.com/ McCain]
|Model 333JP-OPKS
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM McCain DoublePadMountTSCabinet.pdf|6/16/10]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|These should be fabricated to “Overland Park Special” configurations}}

== Detection Systems ==
=== Pedestrian Pushbuttons ADA Audible ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.polara.com Polara Engineering, Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara iNS2Wire 2-WirePushButtonStation.pdf|iNS23TN1-X Push Button Station w/ 9”x15” frame]]

[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara ControlUnit iCCUS2.pdf|iCCU-S2 Shelf Mount Control Unit]]

Accessories

[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara iNSAccessories.pdf|iN2-ICB Interconnect Board]]

[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara iNSAccessories.pdf|iN2-SDLC-Cable]]

[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara iNS2Wire StraightMountingExtender.pdf|iNS-EXT-LL-PC-X Straight Mounting Extender]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara iNS2Wire AngledMountingExtender.pdf|iNS-EXTANG-LL-PC-X Angled Mounting Extender]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara iNS2Wire CurvedMountingExtender.pdf|iNS-EXTHTRED-PC-X Curved Mounting Extender]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara iNS2Wire DualMountsFlexible.pdf|iNSPA4x2-B Dual Mounting Bracket Flexible]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara iNS2Wire 90DegreeAdaptor.pdf|iNS-90DEGADPTR-PC-X 90-Degree Adaptor]]
|[[Media:TR PQL FO MEM Polara Push Buttons.pdf|2/11/2025]]
|[[Media:TR PQL FO PHOT Polara ins2.jpg|Push Button Front view]]

[[Media:TR PQL FO PHOT Polara iCCU-S2.jpg|iCCU-S2 Front View]]

[[Media:TR PQL FO MEM Polara Panel.jpg|iN2-ICB Interconnect Board]]
|-
|The iNS mounting brackets are compatible with iNS or iN buttons. Use the 2-wire PBS in a 3-wire configuration.

'''For Maintenance Use Only'''
|[http://www.polara.com Polara Engineering, Inc.]
|iNS iNavigator 2-Wire APS in a 3-Wire configuration [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara iNS2Wire 2-WirePushButtonStation.pdf|iNS23TN1-X Push Button Station w/ 9”x15” frame]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara iNS3Wire PedHeadControlUnit.pdf|iPHCU3W Ped Head Control Unit]] Accessories [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara iNS3Wire StraightMountingExtender.pdf|iNS-EXT-LL-PC-X Straight Mounting Extender]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara iNS3Wire AngledMountingExtender.pdf|iNS-EXTANG-LL-PC-X Angled Mounting Extender]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara iNS3Wire CurvedMountingExtender.pdf|iNS-EXTHTRED-PC-X Curved Mounting Extender]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara iNS3Wire DualMountsFlexible.pdf|iNSPA4x2-B Dual Mounting Bracket Flexible]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara iNS3Wire 90DegreeAdaptor.pdf|iNS-90DEGADPTR-PC-X 90-Degree Adaptor]] 
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Polara iNS3Wire 3-WirePushButtonStation.pdf|1/6/2021]]
|
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|Red LED indicator Auto volume adjustment for ambient noise levels LL = Length of Extension: 06 for 6" or 12 for 12" X = Color: B for Black or Y for Yellow. Audible locator tones shall be set to be audible 6 to 12 feet from the push button, or to the building line, whichever is less. A percussive tone is required where an APS is provided at a signle crossing or where two APS are 10' or more from each other at a corner. Custom Message (Recorded at Factory w/ electronic copy sent to City) where the APS are less than 10' apart. For standard signal poles, the color of the frame, bracket, and adapter, if used, shall be powder coated yellow. The extender shall remain galvanized with no color. For decorative signal poles, the color of the extender, frame, bracket, and adapter, if used, shall be powder coated black.}}

=== Pedestrian Pushbuttons ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|'''For Maintenance Use Only/or as Specified'''
|[http://www.polara.com/bdspecifications.php Polara Engineering, Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PolaraEngineeringInc PedestrianPushbuttons.pdf|Bulldog Series Push Button Assembly: BDSP-010-X]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PolaraEngineeringInc PedestrianPushbuttonPoleMountAdaptor.pdf|Pole Mount Adaptor: BDPM3-X]] '''Accessories For Maintenance Use Only/or as Specified''' 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara Bulldog PBF2C REV-A.pdf|Push Button Frame 2C with 9"x15" Plate Adapter: PBF2C-9x15-X]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara Bulldog iNSStraightMountingExtender.pdf|Straight Mounting Extender: iNS-EXT-LL-PC-X]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara Bulldog iNSAngledMountingExtender.pdf|Angled Mounting Extender: iNS-EXTANG-LL-PC-X]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara Bulldog iNSCurvedMountingExtender.pdf|Curved Mounting Extender: iNS-EXTHTRED-PC-X]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara Bulldog iNS90DegreeAdaptor.pdf|90-Degree Adaptor: iNS-90DEGADPTR-PC-X]] 
 Approved for use, but no longer being manufactured as of January 2021: 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara Bulldog StraightMountingExtender.pdf|Straight Mounting Extender: iN-EXT-LL-PC-X]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara Bulldog AngledMountingExtender.pdf|Angled Mounting Extender: iN-EXTANG-LL-PC-X]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara Bulldog CurvedMountingExtender.pdf|Curved Mounting Extender: iN-EXTHTRED-PC-X]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara Bulldog DualMounts.pdf|Dual Mounting Bracket: iNPBF2S-4.5-PC-X]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara Bulldog DualMountsFlexible.pdf|Dual Mounting Bracket Flexible: iNPA4x2-B]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Polara Bulldog 90DegreeAdaptor.pdf|90-Degree Adaptor: iN-90DEGADPTR-PC-X]] 
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM PolaraEngineeringInc PedestrianPushbuttons.pdf|1/26/15]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Yellow body with sound on actuation '''NO LED Flash''' LL = Length of Extension: 06 for 6" or 12 for 12" X = Color: B for Black or Y for Yellow. For standard signal poles, the color of the frame, bracket, and adapter, if used, shall be powder coated yellow. The extender shall remain galvanized with no color. For decorative signal poles, the color of the extender, frame, bracket, and adapter, if used, shall be powder coated black.
}}

=== Emergency Vehicle Pre-empt (EVP) Detectors ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.gtt.com/ Global Traffic Technologies]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GTT EVPDetector.pdf|Model 721]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM GTT EVPDetector.pdf|2/218/08]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT GTT EVPDetector Side.JPG|Side View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT GTT EVPDetector CableTerminal.JPG|Cable Terminal]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Two Direction Single Channel}}

=== Pre-formed Detector Loop ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://neverfailloops.com/ Never-Fail Loop Systems]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT NeverFailLoopSystem PreformedLoopDetectorsModelA.pdf|Model A]] – in or under asphalt [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT NeverFailLoopSystem PreformedLoopDetectorsModelC.pdf|Model C]] – in concrete or bridge decks
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM NeverFailLoopSystem PreformedLoopDetectors.pdf|6/6/00]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.patriotdetection.com/index.php Patriot Detection]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PatriotDetection Pre-formedLoops.pdf|Model CG16MM]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM PatriotDetection Pre-formedLoops.pdf|9/1/15]]
|
|-
|Purchased by EDI
|[https://www.editraffic.com/brands?cat=load-switches-flashers Reno]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Reno PreformedDetectorLoop.pdf|Rectangular Loop: Model PLH-XX-YY Quadrupole Loop: Model PLH-XX-YY-ZZ]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Reno PreformedDetectorLoop.pdf|7/7/16]]
|
|-
|}

=== Advance Radar Detectors ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.wavetronix.com/en Wavetronix]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Wavetronix AdvanceDetector.pdf|Model WX-SS-200V SmartSensor Advance Unit]] SDLC Cabinet Interface Device [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Wavetronix 6-PortSDLCInterface.pdf|6 Terminal Ports: Arc6 102-0594 (WX-500-0417)]] Includes [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Wavetronix SmartSensorSurgeCard.pdf|Surge Card: 102-0562 (WX-500-0381)]] Requires [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Wavetronix 6-PortSDLCInterfaceBracket.pdf|Cabinet Interface Mounting Bracket 102-0486 (WX-500-0394)]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Wavetronix AdvanceDetector.pdf|1/10/11]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Include the SDLC Cabinet Interface Module}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Presence Radar Detectors ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.iteris.com/ Iteris]
|4 Approaches with Presence Detection Only [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Iteris RadarDetectionSystem.pdf|Detection System: RAD-SYS-4-BH-SM-TS2]] Includes CCU, 4 Sensors, Power Supply and Surge Protection
Individual Parts: Presence Detector Sensor: RAD-SENSOR-BH-PAK CCU: RAD-CCU-SM4-TS2-PAK Surge Protection Device: ASCO - HVCP-48-4RJ45
 [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Iteris AdvanceRadarDetection.pdf|Presence Plus Advance Detector Sensor: RADPL-SENSOR-BH-PAK]]
 Mounting Brackets: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Iteris SensorMountingBracket.pdf|CAMBRKT4]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Iteris RadarDetectionSystem.pdf|3/11/21]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Iteris RadarDetectionSystem CCU.JPG|CCU]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Iteris RadarDetectionSystem CCU Side.JPG|CCU Side]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Iteris RadarDetectionSystem PowerSupply.JPG|Power Supply]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Iteris RadarDetectionSystem PowerSupply Side.JPG|Power Supply Side]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Iteris RadarDetectionSystem PowerSupply SurgeProtection.JPG|Surge Protector]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Iteris RadarDetectionSystem Bracket.JPG|Bracket]]
|-
|
|[http://www.wavetronix.com/en Wavetronix]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Wavetronix PresenceRadarDetector.pdf|Model WX-SS-225 SmartSensor Matrix Presence Unit]] SDLC Cabinet Interface Device [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Wavetronix 6-PortSDLCInterface.pdf|6 Terminal Ports: Arc6 102-0594 (WX-500-0417)]] Includes [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Wavetronix SmartSensorSurgeCard.pdf|Surge Card: 102-0562 (WX-500-0381)]] Requires [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Wavetronix 6-PortSDLCInterfaceBracket.pdf|Cabinet Interface Mounting Bracket 102-0486 (WX-500-0394)]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Wavetronix PresenceRadarDetector.pdf|5/30/13]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Wavetronix ARC6-Terminal Port SDLCInterfaceModule Front.JPG|SDLC Interface Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Wavetronix ARC6-Terminal Port SDLCInterfaceModule Back.JPG|SDLC Interface Back View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Wavetronix ARC6-Terminal Port SDLCInterfaceModule.JPG|SDLC Interface Iso View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Wavetronix ARC6-Terminal Port SDLCInterfaceModule SurgeCard.JPG|SDLC Interface Surge Protector Card]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Wavetronix PresenceRadarDetector CablePort.JPG|Sensor Cable Ports]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Wavetronix SDLCInterfaceModule Wire Plug.JPG|SDLC Module Wire Plug]]
|}
{{PQLNote|For Wavetronix: Include the SDLC Interface Module}}

=== Vehicle Detectors (Loops) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Global Traffic Technologies bought out 3M
|[http://www.gtt.com/canoga-traffic-sensing/ Global Traffic Technologies / 3M / Canoga]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GTT VehicleDetectors.pdf|Model C922 – Two Channel Model C924 – Four Channel]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM GTT VehicleDetectors.pdf|2/18/08]]
|
|-
|Purchased by EDI
|[http://www.renoae.com/Category/traffic/1 Reno]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Reno VehicleDetectors2Ch.pdf|Model C-1200-SS Series – Two Channel]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Reno VehicleDetectors4Ch.pdf|Model E-1200-SS Series – Four Channel]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Reno VehicleDetectors.pdf|2/10/12]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|It shall have TS2 status output available}}

=== Video Detection Systems ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|'''Used for Specified Projects Only'''
|NoTraffic
|NT-DET
NoTraffic Single Intersection with 5 Years of Service. Detection and Basic Analytics Services- Standard (4 approaches).

Includes: Nexus Unit, (3) Type 1 Sensors, (1) Type 2 Sensors V2X RSU, (1) Standard DIN Rail – Main DIN, (1)DIN Rail-Power DIN, (1) Antenna

Individual Parts:

PRD-SU000100-04 Nexus Unit

PRD-SU000101-10 Sensor Type 1

PRD-SU000100-10 Sensor Type 2 V2X RSU

PRD-DR000001-01Main DIN

PRD- DR000002-01 Power DIN

ANT-00000001-01 Synergy 9 in 1 Antenna

'''SKYBRACKET Mounting Bracket'''

SS-SB29-ACM-74

'''TSC Antenna Bracket'''

VID-NT ANT MT V2
|6/10/2025
|
|
|-
|'''Used for Maintenance Replacements Only'''
|[http://www.econolite.com/index.php/products/detection/ Econolite/Autoscope Encore MVP]
|Image Sensor: AENCORENP Interface Panel: ATIP1 Access Point: ATAPE Interface Cable Kit: ASTCBL10 SDLC Cable Harness: 33550G5
|9/11/13
|
|Easy-Lock Harting Connector On-Board Ethernet Port SDLC Cable Harness for TS-2 Comm to ASC/3 – Rack Mount Controller
|-

|'''Used for Maintenance Replacements Only'''
|[https://gridsmart.com/ Gridsmart]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Gridsmart FisheyeCameraAssembly.pdf|Fisheye Camera Assembly: GS3-SMK]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Gridsmart Processor.pdf|Processor: GS-3-GS2]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Gridsmart FisheyeCamera.pdf|Fisheye Camera Replacement Only: GS-3-CAM]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Gridsmart MountingBracket.pdf|Mounting Bracket: GS-3-CBL]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS TS CAT Gridsmart SDLCCable.pdf|5/20/20]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Gridsmart VideoDetectionSystem CameraSideView.JPG|Fisheye Camera Side View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Gridsmart VideoDetectionSystem PoleAssembly.JPG|Pole Assembly]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Gridsmart VideoDetectionSystem CameraConnection.JPG|Camera Mount]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Gridsmart VideoDetectionSystem JunctionBoxInterior.JPG|Junction Box]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Gridsmart VideoDetectionSystem ProcessorFrontClosed.JPG|Processor]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Gridsmart VideoDetectionSystem RJ45Connector.JPG|RJ-45 Connector]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Gridsmart VideoDetectionSystem CableHarnessEnd.JPG|Cable Harness]]
|One CPU handles 1 fisheye camera and up to 3 traditional cameras or 2 fisheye cameras
|-
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Grounding Equipment ==
=== Ground Rod ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.erico.com/products/copper-bonded.asp Erico Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Erico-Eritech Groundrod.pdf|5/8” x 8’-0” Cat. No. 615880 5/8” x 10’-0” Cat. No. 615800]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM EricoEritech GroundRod.pdf|2/27/02]]
|
|-
|
|[https://galvanelectrical.com/ Galvan Industries]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Galvan GroundRod.pdf|5/8" x 8'-0" Cat. No. 6258 5/8" x 10'-0: Cat. No. 6260]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Galvan GroundRod.pdf|12/20/13]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.hubbellpowersystems.com/pole-line/grounding/copper/ Hubbell]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT ChanceHubbell GroundRod.pdf|5/8" x 8’-0” Cat. No. C615880 5/8” x 10’-0” Cat No. C635800]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM ChanceHubbell GroundRod.pdf|4/24/12]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.tnb.com/pub/index.php Thomas & Betts]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Thomas&Betts Groundrod.pdf|5/8” x 8’-0” Cat. No. 6258 5/8” x 10’-0” Cat No. 6260]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Thomas&Betts GroundRod.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|5/8” x 10’-0” long at poles and controller cabinet 5/8” x 8’-0” long at service boxes Copper clad steel core UL listed}}

=== Ground Rod Clamp ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.burndy.com/ Burndy]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Burndy GroundRodClamp.pdf|GRC58 – 5/8”]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Burndy GroundRodClamp.pdf|2/27/02]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Burndy GroundRodClamp.JPG|Clamp]]
|-
|
|[http://www.erico.com/products/RodAccessories.asp Erico Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Erico-Eritech GroundRodClamp.pdf|HDC58 – 5/8”]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM EricoEritech GroundRodClamp.pdf|12/1/05]]
|
|-
|
|[https://galvanelectrical.com/ Galvan Industries]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Galvan GroundRodClamp.pdf|SRC – 5/8”]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Galvan GroundRodClamp.pdf|12/20/13]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.tnb.com/pub/en/node/2 Thomas & Betts]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT ThomasBetts GroundRodClamp.pdf|JAB58H - 5/8"]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM ThomasBetts GroundRodClamps.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Hex head set screw Copper alloy Long bearing surface UL listed}}

{{PQLReturn}}
== Junction and Service Boxes ==
=== Type 1 Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://armorcastprod.com Armorcast]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Armorcast Type1JunctionBox.pdf|A6001423TA – Assembly A6001422T – Cover only A6001423 – Box only]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Armorcast Type1JunctionBox.pdf|1/11/01]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.jhamericanenclosures.com/products J&H]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT J&H Type1JunctionBox.pdf|APC121212T22 - Assembly]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM J&H Type1JunctionBox.pdf|5/2/2024]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT J&H Type1JunctionBox Side.jpg|Side View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT J&H Type1JunctionBox Top.jpg|Top View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT J&H Type1JunctionBox Angle.jpg|Angle]]
|-
|
|[http://www.newbasis.com New Basis]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT NewBasis ServiceBoxLabel.pdf|Cover Label]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT NewBasis Type1JunctionBox.pdf|PCB121212-00000 – Box only PCC1212PC1-90005 – Cover only PCA121212-00030 - Assembly]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM NewBasis Type1JunctionBox.pdf|8/8/03]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NewBasis Type1JunctionBox Side.jpg|Side View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NewBasis Type1JunctionBox Top.JPG|Top View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NewBasis Type1JunctionBox Cover.JPG|Cover]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NewBasis Type1JunctionBox BoltHole.jpg|Bolt Hole]]
|-
|
|[https://oldcastleinfrastructure.com/ Oldcastle Infrastructure]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT OldCastle Type1JunctionBox.pdf|12122001 - Body Only 12124405 - Lid Only]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM OldCastle Type1JunctionBox.pdf|6/5/14]]
|
|-
|Quazite was purchased by Hubbell Power Systems
|[http://www.hubbellpowersystems.com/about/quazite Quazite]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Quazite Type1JunctionBox.pdf|PC1212BA12 – Box only]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Quazite Type1JunctionBoxCover.pdf|PC1212HA0046 – Cover only]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Quazite Type1JunctionBoxAssembly.pdf|PC1212Z50346 - Assembly]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Quazite ServiceBoxCoverCodes.pdf|Cover Codes]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Quazite Type1JunctionBox.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[https://terra-vaults.com/ Terra Vaults]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT TerraVaults Type1JunctionBox.pdf|1212-12 Assembly]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM TerraVaults Type1JunctionBox.pdf|3/17/26]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Minimum Box Assembly Rating - Tier 15 (22,500 lbs test load) Logo to read “Traffic Signal” 1 Piece cover to be ¾” min thick Straight wall No mouseholes 3/8” – 16 NC stainless steel hex head bolts and washers}}

=== Type 2 Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://armorcastprod.com Armorcast]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Armorcast Type2JunctionBox.pdf|A6001429TA - Assembly A6001428T – Cover only A6001429 – Box only]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Armorcast Type2JunctionBox.pdf|7/30/01]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Armorcast Type2JunctionBox Side.JPG|Side View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Armorcast Type2JunctionBox Top.JPG|Top View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Armorcast Type2JunctionBox Bottom.JPG|Bottom View]]
|-
|
|[https://www.jhamericanenclosures.com/products J&H]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT J&H Type2JunctionBox.pdf|APC111818T22 - Assembly]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM J&H Type2JunctionBox.pdf|5/2/2024]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT J&H Type2JunctionBox Side1.jpg|Side View 1]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT J&H Type2JunctionBox Side1.jpg|Side View 2]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT J&H Type2JunctionBox Top.jpg|Top View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT J&H Type2JunctionBox Angle.jpg|Angle]]
|-
|
|[http://www.newbasis.com New Basis]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT NewBasis ServiceBoxLabel.pdf|Cover Label]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT NewBasis Type2JunctionBox.pdf|PCB111812-00000 – Box only PCC11181P1-90019 – Cover only PCA111812-00030 - Assembly]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM NewBasis Type2JunctionBox.pdf|8/8/03]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NewBasis Type2JunctionBox Side.jpg|Side View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NewBasis Type2JunctionBox Top.JPG|Top View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NewBasis Type2JunctionBox Cover.JPG|Cover]]
|-
|
|[https://oldcastleinfrastructure.com/ Oldcastle Infrastructure]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT OldCastle Type2JunctionBox.pdf|11182001 - Body Only 11184611 - Lid Only 11181613 - Unit]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM OldCastle Type2JunctionBox.pdf|6/5/14]]
|
|-
|Quazite was purchased by Hubbell Power Systems
|[http://www.hubbellpowersystems.com/about/quazite Quazite]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Quazite Type2JunctionBox.pdf|PG1118BA12 – Box only]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Quazite Type2JunctionBoxCover.pdf|PG1118HA0046 – Cover only]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Quazite Type2JunctionBoxAssembly.pdf|PG1118Z50946 - Assembly]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Quazite ServiceBoxCoverCodes.pdf|Cover Codes]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Quazite Type2JunctionBox.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[https://terra-vaults.com/ Terra Vaults]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT TerraVaults Type2JunctionBox.pdf|1118-18 Assembly]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM TerraVaults Type2JunctionBox.pdf|3/17/2026]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Minimum Box Assembly Rating - Tier 15 (22,500 lbs test load) Logo to read “Traffic Signal” 1 Piece cover to be 2” thick Straight wall No mouseholes 3/8” – 16 NC hex head bolts and washers}}

=== Type 1 Service Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://armorcastprod.com Armorcast]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Armorcast Type1ServiceBox.pdf|A6001974TAPCX24 - Assembly A6001975T – Cover only A6001974PCX24 – Box only]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Armorcast Type1ServiceBox.pdf|7/30/01]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Armorcast Type1ServiceBox End.jpg|End View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Armorcast Type1ServiceBox Top.jpg|Top View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Armorcast Type1ServiceBox Bottom.jpg|Bottom View]]
|-
|
|[https://www.jhamericanenclosures.com/products J&H]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT J&H Type1ServiceBox.pdf|APC243624 - Assembly]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM J&H Type1ServiceBox.pdf|5/2/2024]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT J&H Type1ServiceBox Side1.jpg|Side View 1]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT J&H Type1ServiceBox Side2.jpg|Side View 2]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT J&H Type1ServiceBox Top.jpg|Top View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT J&H Type1ServiceBox Angle.jpg|Angle]]
|-
|
|[http://www.channell.com/ Channell Commercial Corp]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Channell Type1ServiceBox.pdf|BULKU243624F061010 - Assembly BULKUA2436E061010 - Cover only BULKUA2436240 - Box only]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Channell Type1ServiceBox.pdf|8/5/16]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL FO PHOT Channell ServiceBoxGrounding.pdf|Cover Ground Wire]]
|-
|
|[http://www.newbasis.com New Basis]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT NewBasis ServiceBoxLabel.pdf|Cover Label]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT NewBasis Type1ServiceBox.pdf|PCB24362400000 – Box only PCC2436P1-00030 – Cover only PCA243624-00030 – Assembly]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM NewBasis Type1ServiceBox.pdf|2/26/02]]
|
|-
|
|[https://oldcastleinfrastructure.com/ Oldcastle Infrastructure]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT OldCastle Type1ServiceBox.pdf|24362214 - Body Only 24364613 - Lid Only 24361616 - Unit]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM OldCastle Type1ServiceBox.pdf|6/5/14]]
|
|-
|Quazite was purchased by Hubbell Power Systems
|[http://www.hubbellpowersystems.com/about/quazite Quazite]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Quazite Type1ServiceBox.pdf|PG2436BA24 – Box only]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Quazite Type1ServiceBoxCover.pdf|PG2436HA0046 – Cover only]] PG2436Z50246 - Assembly [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Quazite ServiceBoxCoverCodes.pdf|Cover Codes]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Quazite Type1ServiceBox.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[https://terra-vaults.com/ Terra Vaults]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT TerraVaults Type1ServiceBox.pdf|2436-24 Assembly]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM TerraVaults Type1ServiceBox.pdf|3/17/2026]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Minimum Box Assembly Rating - Tier 15 (22,500 lbs test load) Logo to read “Traffic Signal” 1 Piece cover to be 3” thick Straight wall No mouseholes 3/8” – 16 NC hex head bolts and washers}}

=== Type 2 Service Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://armorcastprod.com Armorcast]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Armorcast Type2ServiceBox.pdf|A6001430TAPCX24 – Assembly A6001470T (2 pc. Req.) – Cover only A6001430PCX24 – Box only]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Armorcast Type2ServiceBox.pdf|7/30/01]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Armorcast Type2ServiceBox Side.JPG|Side View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Armorcast Type2ServiceBox End.JPG|End View]]
|-
|
|[https://www.jhamericanenclosures.com/products J&H]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT J&H Type2ServiceBox.pdf|APC304836 - Assembly]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM J&H Type2ServiceBox.pdf|5/2/2024]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT J&H Type2ServiceBox Side1.jpg|Side View 1]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT J&H Type2ServiceBox Side2.jpg|Side View 2]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT J&H Type2ServiceBox Top.jpg|Top View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT J&H Type2ServiceBox Angle.jpg|Angle]]
|-
|
|[http://www.channell.com/ Channell Commercial Corp]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Channell Type2ServiceBox.pdf|BULKU304824F081010 - Assembly BULKUA3048E081010 - Cover Only BULKUA3048240 - Box only]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Channell Type2ServiceBox.pdf|8/5/16]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL FO PHOT Channell ServiceBoxGrounding.pdf|Cover Ground Wire]]
|-
|
|[http://www.newbasis.com New Basis]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT NewBasis ServiceBoxLabel.pdf|Cover Label]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT NewBasis Type2ServiceBox.pdf|PCB30482400000 – Box only PCC3048P2-90039 – Cover only PCA304824-00062 – Assembly]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM NewBasis Type2ServiceBox.pdf|2/26/02]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NewBasis Type2ServiceBox Side.JPG|Side View]]
|-
|
|[https://oldcastleinfrastructure.com/ Oldcastle Infrastructure]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT OldCastle Type2ServiceBox.pdf|30482021 - Body Only 30484611 - Lid Only]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM OldCastle Type2ServiceBox.pdf|6/5/14]]
|
|-
|Quazite was purchased by Hubbell Power Systems
|[http://www.hubbellpowersystems.com/about/quazite Quazite]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Quazite Type2ServiceBox.pdf|PG3048BA24 – Box only]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Quazite Type2ServiceBoxCover.pdf|PG3048HS0046 – Cover only]] PG3048Z52546 - Assembly [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Quazite ServiceBoxCoverCodes.pdf|Cover Codes]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Quazite Type2ServiceBox.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[https://terra-vaults.com/ Terra Vaults]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT TerraVaults Type2ServiceBox.pdf|3048-24 Assembly]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM TerraVaults Type2ServiceBox.pdf|3/17/2026]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Minimum Box Assembly Rating - Tier 15 (22,500 lbs test load) Logo to read “Traffic Signal” 2 Piece cover to be 3” thick underlapping Straight wall No mouseholes 3/8” – 16 NC hex head bolts and washers}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== LED Units ==
=== Red LED Arrow ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.dialight.com/Document/Index/4499!$51#51 Frontier]
|[[Media:TRF PQL CAT Dialight LEDArrows.pdf|432-1314-001XOD15]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL MEM Dialight Arrow&BallLEDs.pdf|11/13/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL PHOT Dialight LEDArrows RedArrow.jpg|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL PHOT Dialight LEDArrows RedArrowBack.jpg|Back View]] [[Media:TRF PQL PHOT Dialight LEDArrows RedArrowLabel.jpg|Label]]
|-
|
|[https://leotek.com/traffic-signal-lighting-modules/ Leotek]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Leotek LEDArrows.pdf|TSL-12RA-DT-A1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Leotek LED.pdf|11/13/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDRedArrow Front.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDRed Arrow Back.JPG|Back View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|DiaLight has changed their name to Frontier Tinted lens Incandescent look 15 Year Warranty}}

=== Yellow LED Arrow ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.dialight.com/Document/Index/4499!$51#51 Frontier]
|[[Media:TRF PQL CAT Dialight LEDArrows.pdf|431-3334-901XOD15]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL MEM Dialight Arrow&BallLEDs.pdf|11/13/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL PHOT Dialight LEDArrows YellowArrow.jpg|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL PHOT Dialight LEDArrows YellowArrowBack.jpg|Back View]] [[Media:TRF PQL PHOT Dialight LEDArrows YellowArrowLabel.jpg|Label]]
|-
|
|[https://leotek.com/traffic-signal-lighting-modules/ Leotek]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Leotek LEDArrows.pdf|TSL-12YA-DT-A1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Leotek LED.pdf|11/13/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDYellow Arrow Front.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDYellow Arrow Back.JPG|Back View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|DiaLight has changed their name to Frontier Tinted lens Incandescent look 15 Year Warranty}}

=== Green LED Arrow ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.dialight.com/Document/Index/4499!$51#51 Frontier]
|[[Media:TRF PQL CAT Dialight LEDArrows.pdf|432-2324-001XOD15]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL MEM Dialight Arrow&BallLEDs.pdf|11/13/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Dialight LEDGreenArrow Front.jpg|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Dialight LEDGreenArrow Wiring.jpg|Wiring]]
|-
|
|[https://leotek.com/traffic-signal-lighting-modules/ Leotek]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Leotek LEDArrows.pdf|TSL-12GA-DT-A1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Leotek LED.pdf|11/13/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDGreen Arrow Front.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDGreen Arrow Back.JPG|Back View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|DiaLight has changed their name to Frontier Tinted lens Incandescent look 15 Year Warranty}}

=== Bi-Modal Green/Yellow LED Arrow ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.dialight.com/Document/Index/4499!$51#51 Frontier]
|430-6370-001
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Dialight LED.pdf|4/30/10]]
|
|-
|
|[https://leotek.com/traffic-signal-lighting-modules/ Leotek]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Leotek LEDBi-ModalArrows.pdf|TSL-12BM-LD-A1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Leotek LED.pdf|4/3/18]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDBi-ModalArrow Front.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDBi-ModalArrow Back.JPG|Back View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDBi-ModalArrow Label.JPG|Label]]
|}
{{PQLNote|DiaLight has changed their name to Frontier Clear Lens, pixilated arrow}}

=== Red Ball LED ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.dialight.com/Document/Index/4499!$51#51 Frontier]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Dialight LEDBallArrow.pdf|DuraLED 433-1210-003XL15]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL CAT Dialight LEDBalls.pdf|11/13/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL PHOT Dialight LEDBalls RedBall.jpg|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL PHOT Dialight LEDBalls RedBallBack.jpg|Back View]] [[Media:TRF PQL PHOT Dialight LEDBalls RedBallLabel.jpg|Label]]
|-
|
|[https://leotek.com/traffic-signal-lighting-modules/ Leotek]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Leotek LEDBall.pdf|TSL-12R-DT-A1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Leotek LED.pdf|11/13/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDRedBall Front.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDRedBall Back.JPG|Back View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|DiaLight has changed their name to Frontier Tinted lens Incandescent look 15 Year Warranty}}

=== Yellow Ball LED ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.dialight.com/Document/Index/4499!$51#51 Frontier]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Dialight LEDBallArrow.pdf|DuraLED 433-3230-901XL15]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL CAT Dialight LEDBalls.pdf|11/13/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL PHOT Dialight LEDBalls YellowBall.jpg|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL PHOT Dialight LEDBalls YellowBallBack.jpg|Back View]] [[Media:TRF PQL PHOT Dialight LEDBalls YellowBallLabel.jpg|Label]]
|-
|
|[https://leotek.com/traffic-signal-lighting-modules/ Leotek]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Leotek LEDBall.pdf|TSL-12Y-DT-A1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Leotek LED.pdf|11/13/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDYellowBall Front.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDYellowBall Back.JPG|Back View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDYellowBall Label.jpg|Yellow Ball Label]]
|}
{{PQLNote|DiaLight has changed their name to Frontier Tinted lens Incandescent look 15 Year Warranty}}

=== Green Ball LED ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.dialight.com/Document/Index/4499!$51#51 Frontier]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Dialight LEDBallArrow.pdf|DuraLED 433-2220-001XL15]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL CAT Dialight LEDBalls.pdf|11/13/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL PHOT Dialight LEDBalls GreenBall.jpg|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL PHOT Dialight LEDBalls GreenBallBack.jpg|Back View]] [[Media:TRF PQL PHOT Dialight LEDBalls GreenBallLabel.jpg|Label]]
|-
|
|[https://leotek.com/traffic-signal-lighting-modules/ Leotek]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Leotek LEDBall.pdf|TSL-12G-DT-A1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Leotek LED.pdf|11/13/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDGreenBall Front.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDGreenBall Back.JPG|Back View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|DiaLight has changed their name to Frontier Tinted lens Incandescent look 15 Year Warranty}}

=== Countdown Pedestrian LED ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.dialightsignalsandcomponents.com/Product/Category/ITE_Specification#51 Frontier]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Dialight LEDCountdownPed.pdf|430-6479-001X]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Dialight LED.pdf|4/30/10]]
|
|-
|
|[https://leotek.com/traffic-signal-lighting-modules/ Leotek]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Leotek LEDPedCountdown.pdf|TSL-PED-16-SPC-V1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Leotek LED.pdf|4/3/18]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDPedCountdown Front.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDPedCountdown Label.JPG|Label]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Leotek LEDPedCountdown Back.JPG|Back View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|DiaLight has changed their name to Frontier 16” X 18” Hand/Person display symbol Orange/White display color Incandescent look Filled/Overlay Style 9” Numerals}}

== Loop Sealants ==
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://3mcollision.com/bondo-detector-loop-sealant-5000-4-5-gallon-pail-35382.html#moreInfoDetails 3M]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT 3M LoopSealant.pdf|5000]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM 3M LoopSealant.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|Purchased by Royal Adhesives & Sealants Under acquisition by HB Fuller
|[http://www.chemque.com/pages.php?page=Q-Seal Chemque]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Chemque LoopSealant.pdf|Q-Seal 290S - Grey or Black]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Chemque LoopSealant.pdf|10/23/03]]
|
|-
|
|[https://crafco.com/ Crafco Inc]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Crafco LoopSealant.pdf|RoadSaver 221, Part No. 34221]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Crafco LoopSealant.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.ruscoe.com/highway-products/ Ruscoe Highway Products]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Ruscoe LoopSealant.pdf|Permanent Sealer 974 – Gray or Black]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Ruscoe LoopSealant.pdf|7/3/13]]
|
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Miscellaneous Controller Equipment ==

=== ATC Cabinet Specific Equipment ===

==== ATC Controller ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.econolite.com/ Econolite]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Econolite 2070Controller.pdf|2070EOS1D6500 w/EOS]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Econolite 2070Controller.pdf|11/8/21]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.mccain-inc.com/ McCain]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT McCain ATC2070Controller.pdf|ATC eX 2070 PN: M46541]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT McCain ATC2070Controller.pdf|10/16/18]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.q-free.com/ Q-Free / Intelight]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Q-Free Controller.pdf|YCT-2070LX-MT]] Individual Component Parts: Controller: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Q-Free Controller.pdf|2070LX]] FIO Module: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Q-Free FIOModule.pdf|2070-2E+]] 1C CPU Module: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Q-Free CPUModule.pdf|2070-1C]] Software:[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Q-Free Software.pdf|MAXTIME 1C]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Q-Free Controller.pdf|11/4/21]]
|
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|With Data Key Firmware shall be provided with the controller}}

==== ATC Cabinet Power Supply ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.editraffic.com/ EDI / Eberle Design Inc]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT EDI ATCCabinetPowerSupply.pdf|PS-2216-24-HV]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM EDI ATCCabinetPowerSupply.pdf|10/16/18]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Used only in ATC Cabinet.}}

==== Auxiliary Display Unit (ADU) ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.editraffic.com/atcc/ EDI / Eberle Design Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT EDI AuxiliaryDisplayUnit.pdf|ADU]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM EDI AuxiliaryDisplayUnit.pdf|10/16/18]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Used only in ATC Cabinet}}

==== Cabinet Alarm Panel ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.econolite.com/ Econolite]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Econolite CabinetAlarmPanel.pdf|177-1018-501]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Econolite CabinetAlarmPanel.pdf|6/16/22]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.mccain-inc.com/ McCain Traffic]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT McCain ATCCabinetAlarmPanel.pdf|2521 - Cabinet Alarm Panel and Harness]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM McCain ATCCabinetAlarmPanel.pdf|11/3/21]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain ATCCabinetAlarmPanel Front.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain ATCCabinetAlarmPanel Back.JPG|Back View]]
|-
|
|[https://www.mobotrex.com/ Mobotrex]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Mobotrex CabinetAlarmPanel.pdf|AAD18150-001]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Mobotrex CabinetAlarmPanel.pdf|11/8/21]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Used only in ATC Cabinet}}

==== Cabinet Monitor Unit (CMU) ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.editraffic.com/atcc/ EDI / Eberle Design Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT EDI CMUmodule.pdf|CMUip-2212-HV]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM EDI CabinetMonitorUnit.pdf|10/16/18]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT EDI CMUmodule Front.jpg|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT EDI CMUmodule Side.jpg|Side View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Used only in ATC traffic signal cabinet in place of the conflict monitor}}

==== ATC Flasher ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.editraffic.com/atcc/ EDI / Eberle Design Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT EDI HDSwitchPack.pdf|2202-HV]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT EDI HDSwitchPack.pdf|10/16/18]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT EDI ATCFlasher Front.jpg|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT EDI ATCFlasher Side.jpg|Side View]]
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|Used only in ATC Cabinet. Part is also used for the High Density Switch Pack / Load Switch in ATC Cabinet}}

==== High Density Flash Transfer Relay ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.struthers-dunn.com/index.html Struthers-Dunn]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Struthers-Dunn HDFlashTransferRelay.pdf|21XBXHL-48VDC]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Struthers-Dunn HDFlashTransferRelay.pdf|10/16/18]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Used only in ATC Cabinet.}}

==== High Density Switch Pack / Load Switch ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.editraffic.com/atcc/ EDI / Eberle Design Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT EDI HDSwitchPack.pdf|2202-HV]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT EDI HDSwitchPack.pdf|10/16/18]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT EDI HDSwitchPack Front.jpg|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT EDI HDSwitchPack Side.jpg|Side View]]
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|Used only in ATC Cabinet. Part is also used for the Flasher in ATC Cabinet}}

==== Serial Interface Unit (SIU) ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.editraffic.com/atcc/ EDI / Eberle Design Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT EDI SIUmodule.pdf|SIU-2218]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM EDI SerialInterfaceUnit.pdf|10/16/18]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT EDI SIUmodule Front.jpg|Front View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Only used in ATC Cabinet}}

=== General Cabinet Equipment ===

==== 1C CPU Module ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Purchase with EOS Firmware
|[https://www.econolite.com/products/controllers/2070-1c/ Econolite]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Econolite 1CModule.pdf|Model 2070-1C]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Econolitedoc 1CModule.pdf|2/15/17]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Econolite 1CModule Front.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Econolite 1CModule Side.JPG|Side View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|For use in upgrading existing 2070 controllers only}}

==== AC Isolator ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.sgdi.com/gdi_2013_web_site_020.htm GDI Communications]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GDI ACIsolator.pdf|ACIM252]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM GDI ACIsolator.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.pdctraffic.com/products/isolators/ PDC / Power Distribution & Control]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PDC ACIsolator.pdf|ACI-88 Model 252]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM PDC ACIsolator.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Model 252}}

==== Auxiliary Output File ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.mccain-inc.com/ McCain Traffic]
|CABSP-1521020033X KS
|2/26/20
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain AuxiliaryOutputFile Front.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain AuxiliaryOutputFile Back.JPG|Back View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain AuxiliaryOutputFile Top.JPG|Top View]]
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|With AC Jumper for 15 Pin Connection
Used in a 332 cabinet to add four additional load switches for flashing yellow left applications}}

==== Conflict Monitor ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.editraffic.com/traffic-control/ EDI / Eberle Design, Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT EDI ConflictMonitor.pdf|2018 KCLip – (Std 332 Cabinet) with Datakey programming and Ethernet port]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM EDI ConflictMonitor.pdf|2/19/09]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT EDI ConflictMonitor FrontView.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT EDI ConflictMonitor SideView.JPG|Side View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Not used with ATC Cabinet. See “Conflict Management Unit” below}}

==== DC Isolator ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.editraffic.com/ EDI]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT EDI 242DCIsolator.pdf|242L]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM EDI 242DCIsolator.pdf|10/12/21]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT EDI 242DCIsolator.jpg|Front View]]
|-
|
|[http://www.sgdi.com/gdi_2013_web_site_020.htm GDI Communications]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GDI DCIsolator.pdf|DIM242]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM GDI DCIsolator.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.pdctraffic.com/products/isolators/ PDC / Power Distribution & Control]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PDC DCIsolator.pdf|DCI-82 Model 242]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM PDC DCIsolator.pdf|5/5/03]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT PDC DCIsolator FrontView.pdf.jpg|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHTO PDC DCIsolator SideView.jpg|Side View]]
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|Model 242 See “Detector Test Switch Module” below.}}

==== Flash Transfer Relay ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.struthers-dunn.com/ Struthers-Dunn]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Struthers-Dunn FlashTransferRelay.pdf|W21ACPX-2]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Struthers-Dunn FlashTransferRelay.pdf|8/6/20]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Struthers-Dunn FlashTransferRelay.jpg|Front]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Model 430 Not used with ATC Cabinet. See “High Density Flash Transfer Relay” below}}

==== Flasher Unit ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.editraffic.com/products-page/model-204-225-2/ EDI / Eberle Design, Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT EDI FlasherUnit.pdf|EDI 204]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM EDI FlasherUnit.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.sgdi.com/gdi_2013_web_site_020.htm GDI Communications]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GDI FlasherUnit.pdf|FL204]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM GDI FlasherUnit.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.pdctraffic.com/products/flashers/ PDC / Power Distribution & Control]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PDC FlasherUnit.pdf|SSF-88]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM PDC FlasherUnit.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|Purchased by EDI
|[https://www.editraffic.com/brands?cat=load-switches-flashers Reno A&E]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Reno FlasherUnit.pdf|FL-200]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Reno FlasherUnit.pdf|11/3/05]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.tscorp1.com/flashers.htm TSC / Traffic Sensor Corp]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT TSC FlasherUnit.pdf|TSC 204]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM TSC FlasherUnit.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Model 204 Not used with ATC Cabinet. See “High Density Switch Pack” below}}

==== Power Distribution Assembly (PDA) ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.mccain-inc.com/ McCain]
|PDA#2 M63186
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM McCain PowerDistributionAssembly.pdf|7/14/10]]
|
|-
|}

==== Power Distribution Surge Protection Unit ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|MTL Instruments Group is the umbrella company
|[https://www.mtl-inst.com/product/rack_pro_range Cooper/Crouse-Hinds/ Atlantic Scientific]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AtlanticScientific PowerDistrSurgeProtector.pdf|RP35326]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AtlanticScientific PowerDistrSurgeProtector.pdf|10/28/2008]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AtlanticScientific PowerDistrSurgeProtector Front.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AtlanticScientific PowerDistrSurgeProtector Back.JPG|Back View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AtlanticScientific PowerDistrSurgeProtector Top.JPG|Top View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT AtlanticScientific PowerDistrSurgeProtector Lights.JPG|Indicator Lights]]
|-
|
|[http://geistapp.geistglobal.com/specs/1454 Geist Manufacturing, Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Geist PowerDistributionSurgeProtectorUnit.pdf|SPX084-10]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Geist PowerDistributionSurgeProtectorUnit.pdf|11/4/05]]
|
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|Room for 4 to 6 transformer spaced outlets on one side and 4 to 6 standard outlets on the other side 15 amp breaker Rack mounted NEMA 5-15}}

==== Power Supply ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.editraffic.com/power-supplies-1702070/ EDI]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT EDI PowerSupply.pdf|Model 206L]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM EDI PowerSupply.pdf|7/9/10]]
|
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|High efficiency power saving w/ solid state transfer relay}}

==== Pre-empt Phase Selectors / Discriminator Module ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Miovision purchased GTT
|[https://miovision.com/opticom/ Miovision]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GTT 2ChannelPhaseSelector.pdf|Model 762 – Two Channel]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GTT 4ChannelPhaseSelector.pdf|Model 764 – Four Channel]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GTT EVPAuxiliaryInputFile.pdf|Model 768 Auxiliary Interface Panel]] (If specified)
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM GTT PhaseSelectors.pdf|4/19/11]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT GTT EVPPhaseSelector 764Card.JPG|764 Phase Selector]]
|-
|'''USED ONLY FOR MAINTENANCE'''
|[https://traffic.tomar.com/collections/ospoc-series-opticom-compatible-optical-signal-processors Tomar]
|[[Media:TR PQL FO CAT OSPOCWV2-4.pdf|OSPOCWV2-4 - Four Channel Wide Panel]]
|2/11/2025
|
|}
{{PQLNote|With Ethernet Ports}}

==== Switchpack / Load Switch ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.sgdi.com/gdi_2013_web_site_020.htm GDI Communications]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GDI LoadSwitch.pdf|LS200-6]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM GDI LoadSwitch.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.pdctraffic.com PDC / Power Distribution & Control]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PDC LoadSwitch.pdf|SSS-87IO]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM PDC LoadSwitch.pdf|5/5/03]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT PDC LoadSwitch.jpg|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT PDC LoadSwitch Side.jpg|Side View]]
|-
|Purchased by EDI
|[http://www.renoae.com/ Reno A&E]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Reno LoadSwitch.pdf|LS-200]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Reno LoadSwitch.pdf|11/3/05]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Reno LoadSwitch Front.JPG|Front View]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Reno LoadSwitch Side.JPG|Side View]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Reno LoadSwitch Back.jpg|Back View]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Reno LoadSwitch End.JPG|End View]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Reno LoadSwitch Label.jpg|Label]]
|-
|
|[http://www.tscorp1.com/index.html TSC / Traffic Sensor Corp]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT TSC LoadSwitch.pdf|TSC200]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM TSC LoadSwitch.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Model 200 with Input and Output monitoring Not used with ATC Cabinet. See “High Density Switch Pack” above}}

==== Surge Protector (Traffic Signal Cabinet) ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.emerson.com/en-US/Pages/Default.aspx Edco/Emerson Network Power]
|[[media:TRF PQL TS CAT Edco CabinetSurgeProtector.pdf|SHA-1250 w/ SHA-1250-BASE-A]]
|[[media:TRF PQL TS MEM Edco CabinetSurgeProtector.pdf|8/5/10]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.hescorls.com/ Hesco/RLS]
|[[media:TRF PQL TS CAT Hesco CabinetSurgeProtection.pdf|HE1750]]
|[[media:TRF PQL TS MEM Hesco CabinetSurgeProtection.pdf|10/16/18]]
|
|-
{{PQLNote|For 332 and ATC Cabinets}}

==== Utility Power Surge Protector (Secondary Service Enclosure) ====
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Partners with Pentair Engineered Electrical & Fastening Systems
|[http://www.erico.com/products.asp?folderID=42 Nvent/Erico / Critec]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Erico UtilityPowerSurgeProtector.pdf|TDX-100S120240]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Erico UtilityPowerSurgeProtector.pdf|11/26/14]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Erico UtilityPowerSurgeProtector TopView.JPG|Top View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Erico UtilityPowerSurgeProtector PullOutInterior.JPG|Pull Out Drawer]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Erico UtilityPowerSurgeProtector TopInsideView.JPG|Top Inside View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Erico UtilityPowerSurgeProtector ReplacementModule.JPG|Replacement Module]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Note: NEMA-4 weather tight housing Output contacts Replaceable cartridge overcurrent fuse protection Replaceable modules Event timer}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Mounting Brackets ==

=== Mast Arm Signal Head Bracket ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.pelcoinc.com/ Pelco]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco VehicleHeadMastArmSignalBracket.pdf|AG-0125-1-LL-PXX (1-Section) AG-0125-3-LL-PXX (3-Section) AG-0125-4-LL-PXX (4-Section)]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco HAWKSignalMastArmBracket.pdf|AG-0168-LL-PXX (HAWK)]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Pelco VehicleHeadMastArmSignalBracket.pdf|4/19/19]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Pelco HAWKSignalMastArmBracket.pdf|4/19/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Pelco MastArmMountingBracket Hinge.JPG|Open Hinge View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Pelco MastArmMountingBracket TopView.JPG|Top View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Pelco MastArmMountingBracket SideView.JPG|Side View]]
|-
|A Division of Olson Aluminum Castings
|[http://www.skybracket.com/ Sky Bracket]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT SkyBracket SignalHeadMountingBracket.pdf|SS-SBLL-18 (1-Section) SS-SBLL-46 (3-Section) SS-SBLL-60 (4-Section)]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT SkyBracket HAWKMastArmBracket.pdf|SS-SBLL_HPB-18 (HAWK)]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM SkyBracket MastArmMountingBracket.pdf|1/11/19]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM SkyBracket HAWKMastArmBracket.pdf|1/11/19]]
|Shown with previously approved cable mounting system. [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT SkyBracket SignalHeadMountingBracket BracketandTubeFront.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT SkyBracket SignalHeadMountingBracket BracketandTubeSide.JPG|Side View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT SkyBracket SignalHeadMountingBracket BracketBack.JPG|Back View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT SkyBracket SignalHeadMountingBracket LowerArmTube.JPG|Lower Arm]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT SkyBracket SignalHeadMountingBracket Upper ArmTube.JPG|Upper Arm]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT SkyBracket SignalHeadMountingBracket TubeCrossSection.JPG|Tube Section]]
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|Stainless steel banding/cable and hardware For Pelco: Required cable length (LL) to be determined by contractor based on manufacturer's recommendations as follows: 62" – for mast arm diameters ranging from 2” to 7” 84" – for mast arm diameters ranging from 7.1” to 10.5” 96" – for mast arm diameters ranging from 10.6” to 12.4” 110" – for mast arm diameters ranging from 12.5” to 14.6” 120" – for mast arm diameters ranging from 14.7” to 16.2” 132" – for mast arm diameters ranging from 16.3” to 18.2” Color (XX) shall be as follows: NC - No Color 33 - Glossy Black 71 - RAL6012 Green 39 - RAL8019 Dark Bronze For Sky Bracket: Required band length (LL) to be determined by contractor based on manufacturer's recommendations as follows: 29” – for mast arm diameters ranging from 2” to 7” 42” – for mast arm diameters ranging from 8” to 11” 59” – for mast arm diameters ranging from 12” to 17” If other than standard color, specify SB-BLK for Black Powder Coat or SP-SPL for Special Color Powder Coat}}

=== Mini Pre-empt Detector Bracket ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|AB-0163 is being superceeded by the Galaxy MiniBrac (AG-0163) as of March 1, 2026. Awaiting data sheet.
|[https://www.pelcoinc.com/ Pelco Products, Inc.]
|Band Mount [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco EVPDetectorBandingMountingBracket.pdf|Astro Brac AB-0155-LL-PXX]] Cable Mount [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco EVPDetectorCableMountingBracket.pdf|Astro Brac AB-0163-LL-PXX]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Pelco EVPDetectorBandingMountingBracket.pdf|1/11/19]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Pelco EVPDetectorCableMountingBracket.pdf|12/29/04]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.skybracket.com/ Sky Bracket]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT SkyBracket EVPMountingBracket.PDF|SBLL-MM-075]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM SkyBracket EVPMountingBracket.pdf|11/25/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT SkyBracket EVPMountingBracket Back.JPG|Back]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT SkyBracket EVPMountingBracket BackAngle.JPG|Back Angle]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT SkyBracket EVPMountingBracket Front.JPG|Front]] 
|}
{{PQLNote|Stainless Steel banding or cable mount LL = Banding Length Based on Mast Arm Diameter: 29” – for mast arm diameters ranging from 2” to 7” 42" – for mast arm diameters ranging from 8” to 11” 59" – for mast arm diameters ranging from 12” to 17) LL = Cable Length Based on Mast Arm Diameter: 45" - for mast arm diameters ranging from 2" to 11" 62" - for mast arm diameters ranging from 11.1" to 16.6" 84" - for mast arm diameters ranging from 16.7" to 22" Color (XX) shall be as follows: NC - No Color 33 - Glossy Black 71 - RAL6012 Green 39 - RAL8019 Dark Bronze}}

=== Radar Detector Mounting Bracket ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|For a ''Presence'' sensor mounted on a mast arm. For an ''Advance'' sensor mounted on a mast arm.
|[https://www.pelcoinc.com/ Pelco Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco RadarDetectorMountingBracket.pdf|SP-5987-23-LL-PXX]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL PS MEM Pelco RadarDetectorMountingBracket.pdf|8/6/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Pelco MastArmMountingBracket Hinge.JPG|Open Hinge View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Pelco MastArmMountingBracket TopView.JPG|Top View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Pelco MastArmMountingBracket SideView.JPG|Side View]]
|-
|For a ''Presence'' sensor mounted on a mast arm. For an ''Advance'' sensor mounted on a mast arm.
|[http://www.skybracket.com/ Sky Bracket]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT SkyBracket RadarDetectorMountingBracket.pdf|Bracket: SS-SBLL-ACM-24]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT SkyBracket RadarDetectorMountingAdaptor.pdf|Burle Style Adapter Plate: SB-PLT]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM SkyBracket RadarDetectorMountingBracket.pdf|1/11/19]]
|Showing previously approved cable mounting system. [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT SkyBracket RadarMountingBracket BracketandTubeFront.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT SkyBracket RadarMountingBracket BracketandTubeSide.JPG|Side View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT SkyBracket RadarMountingBracket BracketBack.JPG|Back View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT SkyBracket RadarMountingBracket End.JPG|Mounting End]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT SkyBracket RadarMountingBracket TubeCrossSection.JPG|Tube Section]]
|-
|For a ''Presence'' sensor mounted on a vertical pole. For an ''Advance'' sensor mounted on a mast arm or a vertical pole.
|[http://www.wavetronix.com/en Wavetronix]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Wavetronixr RadarDetectorMountingBracket.pdf|WX-SS-611]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Wavetronixr RadarDetectorMountingBracket.pdf|4/29/16]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Wavetronixr RadarDetectorMountingBracket Top.JPG|Top View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Wavetronixr RadarDetectorMountingBracket Side.JPG|Side View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Wavetronixr RadarDetectorMountingBracket Connection.JPG|Connection Segments]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Stainless steel banding/cable and hardware For Pelco: Required cable length (LL) to be determined by contractor based on manufacturer's recommendations as follows: 62" – for mast arm diameters ranging from 2” to 7” 84" – for mast arm diameters ranging from 7.1” to 10.5” 96" – for mast arm diameters ranging from 10.6” to 12.4” 110" – for mast arm diameters ranging from 12.5” to 14.6” 120" – for mast arm diameters ranging from 14.7” to 16.2” 132" – for mast arm diameters ranging from 16.3” to 18.2” Color (XX) shall be as follows: NC - No Color 33 - Glossy Black 71 - RAL6012 Green 39 - RAL8019 Dark Bronze For SkyBracket: Required banding length (LL) to be determined by contractor based on manufacturer's recommendations as follows: 29” – for mast arm diameters ranging from 2” to 7” 42” – for mast arm diameters ranging from 8” to 11” 59” – for mast arm diameters ranging from 12” to 17” If other than standard color, specify SB-BLK for Black Powder Coat or SP-SPL for Special Color Powder Coat}}

=== Side Mount Signal Head and Pedestrian Signal Head Bracket ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Auto/Eagle
|UKS-1452X
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|[http://componentproducts.com/ Component Products, Inc.]
|TSP880-X
|5/5/03
|
|-
|
|Gades
|UKS1452X / PDM-405
|5/5/03
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Yellow polycarbonate X=Y for Yellow X= B for Black}}

{{PQLReturn}}

== Poles ==
=== Aluminum Pedestal Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://componentproducts.com/ Component Products, Inc]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT ComponentProducts PedestalPoleBase.pdf|Square Pedestal Base: CPI-BAS-1-P]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT ComponentProducts PedestalPoleCap.pdf|Pole Cap: CPI-APC-1]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT ComponentProducts PedestalPoleShaft.pdf|9’ Pedestal Pole: CPI-AP-9-40 13’ Pedestal Pole: CPI-AP-13-40 14’ Pedestal Pole: CPI-AP-14-40]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT ComponentProducts PedestalPoleCollar.pdf|Base Collar: CPI-RBC-1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM ComponentProducts PedestalPole&Base.pdf|4/24/14]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT ComponentProducts PedestalPoleBase.jpg|Base]]
|-
|
|[http://www.gadestraffic.com/ Gades Sales]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GadesSales PedestalPoleBase.pdf|Square Pedestal Base: PB-5335-1S-GL-PNC]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GadesSales PedestalPoleCap.pdf|Pole Cap: PB-5402-PNC]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GadesSales PedestalPoleShaft.pdf|9’ Pedestal Pole: PB5100-9-PNC 13’ Pedestal Pole: PB5100-13-PNC 14’ Pedestal Pole: PB5100-14-PNC]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT GadesSales PedestalPoleCollar.pdf|Base Collar: PB-5325-PNC]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM GadesSales PedestalPole&Base.pdf|4/24/14]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT GadesSales PedestrianPoleBase Side.jpg|Side View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT GadesSales PedestrianPoleBase Bottom.jpg|Bottom View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT GadesSales PedestrianPoleBase PipeThreads.jpg|Threaded Opening]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT GadesSales PedestrianPoleBase Cover.jpg|Cover]]
|-
|
|[http://www.pelcoinc.com/ Pelco Products, Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco PedestalPoleBase.pdf|Square Pedestal Base: PB-5335-1S-GL-PNC]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco PedestalPoleCap.pdf|Pole Cap: PB-5402-PNC]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco PedestalPoleShaft.pdf|9’ Pedestal Pole: PB-5100-9-PNC 13’ Pedestal Pole: PB-5100-13-PNC 14’ Pedestal Pole: PB-5100-14-PNC]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco PedestalPoleCollar.pdf|Base Collar: PB-5325-PNC]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Pelco PedestalPole&Base.pdf|4/23/14]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Pelco PedestalPole&Base.jpg|Base]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Pelco PedestalPoleBase&Collar.JPG|Base & Collar]]
|}
{{PQLNote|See "Anchor Bolts" for part number information Pole tube is schedule 40 Include base collar with every pole Set screws required in base collar Include 2 7/8” OD x 7/8” ID galvanized flat washers Include anchor bolts}}

=== Galvanized Steel Signal Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.millerberndmfg.com/ Millerbernd Manufacturing Company]
|1994 AASHTO: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Millerbernd MastArmPoles1994.pdf|780B661]] 2013 AASHTO: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Millerbernd MastArmPole.pdf| 780B1885 Rev D]] Identification Label: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Millerbernd MastArmPoleLabel.pdf|Single Arm]] : [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Millerbernd MastArmPoleLabel2.pdf|Double Arm]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Millerbernd MastArmPoles1994.pdf|8/10/10]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Millerbernd MastArmPoles.pdf|11/10/14]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.unionmetal.com/ Union Metal]
|1994 AASHTO: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT UnionMetal GalvanizedSignalMastArmPoles.pdf|50915-B1 Rev 9]] 2013 AASHTO: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT UnionMetal GalvanizedSteelSignalPole.pdf|50915-B19 Rev 6.1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM UnionMetal GalvanizedSignalMastArmPoles.pdf|10/27/04]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM UnionMetal GalvanizedSignalPole.pdf|8/31/15]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.valmont.com/ Valmont]
|1994 AASHTO: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT 1994AASHTOValmont MastArmPoles.pdf|DB00175 Rev E]] 2013 AASHTO: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Valmont GalvanizedSteelSignalPole.pdf|DB01086 Rev H]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM 1994AASHTOValmont MastArmPoles.pdf|1/26/12]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Valmont GalvanizedSignalPole.pdf|7/28/14]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|See "Anchor Bolts" for part number information Shall meet 2013 AASHTO Criteria unless otherwise specified in the bid plans, documents and details 2013 AASHTO criteria is for a 50-year recurrence interval, fatigue category 2 but does not include design to resist galloping or truck induced gusts }}

=== Pedestrian Pushbutton Pole and Foundation ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.freymfgcorp.com Frey Manufacturing Corp.]
|Pedestrian Pushbutton Pole with Pole Cap: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FreyMfg PedestrianPushbuttonPole.pdf|CP6ACT4840TCSS / Dwg No. 8.1.0 Rev. 1]] Pedestrian Pushbutton Pole Cap: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FreyMfg PedestrianPushbuttonPoleCap.pdf|TCSS Top Cap with Set Screws for 4" Pipe / Dwg No. 8.4.1 Rev. 1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM FreyMfg CrosswalkPedestal.pdf|11/30/17]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FreyMfg PedestrianPoleShortDemo.JPG|Pedestrian Pole]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FreyMfg BreakawayBase.JPG|Breakaway Base]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FreyMfg BreakawayBase2.JPG|Breakaway Base Angle]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FreyMfg PedestalDoor..JPG|Pedestal Door]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FreyMfg PoleCap.JPG|Pole Cap]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FreyMfg Bolts.JPG|Bolts]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Frey Mfg pole requires approved Two-Part Epoxy.
}}

== Power Backup Systems ==
=== Battery Backup UPS System and Accessories ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;" |'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;" |'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;" |'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;" |'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;" |'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.clary.com/products/traffic-its/sp-series/sp1250lx#downloads Clary]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Clary BatteryBackupUPS.pdf|SP 1250-XLE – Uninterruptible Traffic System with Integrated PIM and Programmable Display SPO-09A3 – SNMP Adapter with cables manual and software SPH-303 – Bypass Switch with GFCI and Generator Plug SP-19N1 – Battery Cable 48-volt system]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Clary BatteryBackupUPS.pdf|1/22/2025]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Clary UPS.JPG|UPS Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Clary UPS Contacts.JPG|UPS Contacts]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Clary BatteryBackupUPSOnly Bypass Switch.JPG|Bypass Switch]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Clary BatteryBackupUPSOnly BypassSwitchLabel.JPG|Bypass Switch Label]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Ethernet port capabilities See Battery requirements below. '''Use ONLY the specified batteries as listed for each UPS system as listed in the table below.'''}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Manual Bypass Switch / 30 amp ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.clary.com/ Clary Corporation]
|Switch: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Clary PowerTransferSwitch.pdf|SPH-303]] Mounting Bracket: UPS-BRACKET SPH303
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Clary PowerTransferSwitch.pdf|4/2/21]]
|
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|This is used when there is not battery backup / UPS is specified}}

== Batteries ==

=== Batteries for UPS===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|
|[https://www.clary.com/product/sp1250xle/ Clary]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Clary BatteryforUPSBackup.pdf|OP48C – Batteries (set of four) 48-volt system (Stand alone BBS)]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Clary BatteryforUPSBackup.pdf|10/7/11]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Clary BatteryforUPSBackup.JPG|Battery]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Clary BatteryforUPSBackup Batteries&Cable.JPG|Battery String]]
|Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA)
|}

== Rebar Support Products ==

=== Support Spacers ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.foundationtechnologies.com/products/#shaftspacer-systems Foundation Technologies, Inc]
|Drill Shaft Wheels: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FoundationTechnologies DrillShaftWheels.pdf|SS406 - 3" Clearance SS303 - 1 1/2" Clearance]] Support Boots: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FoundationTechnologies SupportBoots.pdf|BB711]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM FoundationTechnologies RebarSupportSpacers.pdf|1/12/21]]
|
|-
|
|[https://pieresearch.com/ Pieresearch]
|Drill Shaft Wheels: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pieresearch DrillShaftWheels.pdf|6QLHD - 3" Clearance 4QLHD - 2" Clearance]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS DWG Pieresearch DrillShaftWheels.pdf|Technical Drawing]] Support Boots: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pieresearch SupportBoots.pdf|#5 - #14 Bars: 3PB]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS DWG Pieresearch SupportBoots.pdf|Technical Drawing]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Pieresearch RebarSupportSpacers.pdf|7/12/19]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.rebarsupportproducts.com/ Rebar Support Products]
|Drill Shaft Wheels: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT RebarSupportProducts DrillShaftWheels.pdf|DP300 - 3" Clearance DP200 - 2" Clearance]] Support Boots: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT RebarSupportProducts SupportBoots.pdf|#3 - #8 Bars: BB38 #8 - #11 Bars: BB811]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM RebarSupportProducts RebarSupportSpacers.pdf|7/12/19]]
|
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|Number of Wheels Min number per tier: 4 Min spacing from top of shaft: 6' Max spacing from bottom of shaft: 2' Max spacing along shaft: 8' Number of Pier Supports One per every 1,500 lbs of cage weight Min one on every other vertical bar}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Secondary Service Pedestals ==
=== Aluminum Electrical Service Enclosure ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.myerspowerproducts.com/ Myers Custom Products, Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Myers SecondaryServicePedestal.pdf|MEA-IIVLM-TS-R-LB]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Myers SecondaryServicePedestal.pdf|4/19/19]]
|
|-
|Purchased by Myers Custom Products, Inc
|[http://www.pedestals.net/contact_us.php Pacific Utility Products]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT PacificUtilityProducts SecondaryServicePedestal.pdf|USP2R-100-112C-OPK-TS-AL-LBP]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM PacificUtilityProducts SecondaryServicePedestal.pdf|2/17/12]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT PacificUtilityProducts SecondaryServicePedestal FrontView.JPG|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT PacificUtilityProducts SecondaryServicePedestal InteriorView.JPG|Interior View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT PacificUtilityProducts SecondaryServicePedestal MeterSocket.JPG|Meter Socket]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT PacificUtilityProducts SecondaryServicePedestal Lock.JPG|Lock]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT PacificUtilityProducts SecondaryServicePedestal Breaker.JPG|Breaker]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT PacificUtilityProducts SecondaryServicePedestal BottomView.JPG|Bottom View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|0.125” Aluminum, 30 amp breaker Corbin #2 lock on door No photocell or lighting relays Ringless Meter Socket with Lever By-Pass}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Battery Backup / Electrical Service Enclosure ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|'''USED ONLY FOR MAINTENANCE REPLACEMENTS'''
|[http://www.myerspowerproducts.com/ Myers Custom Products, Inc.]
|Cabinet – MET2-PB-M030-AC-EMI Drawing No. F518506
|8/23/05
|
|-
|'''USED ONLY FOR MAINTENANCE REPLACEMENTS'''
|Pacific Utility Products
|Cabinet – USP29-57-BBS
|7/9/10
|
|-
|'''USED ONLY FOR MAINTENANCE REPLACEMENTS'''
|Traffic Signal Controls
|Cabinet – 2116UPME1401
|9/3/09
|
|}
{{PQLNote|0.125” aluminum Manual transfer switch behind police door For use with external portable generator See below for External Generator Receptacle data 20Amp breaker for CCTV Camera Disconnect}}

=== CNG External Generator Receptacle ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hubbell
|HBL2710SW including HBL2715 flanged receptacle
|4/2/12
|
|-
|
|Reliance Controls
|PK30 Power Inlet Kit, including L1430F flanged receptacle
|4/2/12
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Twist Lock Recessed Male, 30 Amp 120/240 Volt, 4 prong including ground with outdoor hinged cover}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Signal Heads ==
=== Signal Head Louvers ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.pelcoinc.com/Traffic.aspx Pelco]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Pelco SignalHeadLouvers.pdf|GL-1010-X-UC-P02]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Pelco SignalHeadLouvers.pdf|11/14/14]]
|
|-

|}
{{PQLNote|Geometrically programmed louver with black visor X = 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 15, 23.5 or 42 degrees depending on the cut-off angle desired. The maximum number of louvers comes with the 7 degree cut-off UC = Universal Clips P02 = Black}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Vehicular Signal Heads ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.econolite.com/index.php/products/signals/ Econolite Control Products, Inc.]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Econolite VehiclularSignalHead.pdf|Yellow Body: TP11VJC2P0H0 for 1 Section TP31VJC2P0H0 for 3 Section TP41VJC2P0H0 for 4 Section Black Body: TP11VJF2P0H0 for 1 Section TP31VJF2P0H0 for 3 Section TP41VJF2P0H0 for 4 Section]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Econolite VehiclularSignalHead.pdf|5/9/03]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Econolite VehiclularSignalHead FrontView.jpg|Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Econolite VehiclularSignalHead Back.JPG|Back View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Econolite VehiclularSignalHead Body.JPG|Open Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Econolite VehiclularSignalHead WiringTerminals.JPG|Wiring Terminals]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Econolite VehiclularSignalHead Latch.jpg|Latch]]
|-
|
|[http://www.mccain-inc.com/traffic.html McCain Traffic Supply]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT McCain VehiclularSignalHead.pdf|Yellow Body: M22167-P for 1 Section M22436-P for 3 Section M31084-P for 4 Section Black Body: M22168-P for 1 Section M22435-P for 3 Section M30883-P for 4 Section]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT McCain VehicularSignalVisor.pdf|M19271 Black Poly Visors]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT McCain VehicularSignalVisor.pdf|5/14/13]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain VehiclularSignalHead Body.JPG|Open Front View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain VehiclularSignalHead WiringTerminal.JPG|Wiring Terminal]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain VehiclularSignalHead SideView.JPG|Side View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain VehiclularSignalHead Latch.JPG|Latch]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT McCain VehiclularSignalHead Label.JPG|Label]]
|-
|
|[https://www.mobotrex.com/ Mobotrex / Eagle Signal]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS BRO Mobotrex-Eagle VehicularSignalHead.pdf|Brochure]] Yellow Body [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Mobotrex-Eagle 1SectVehicularSignalHead.pdf|SA101A1C11YBB10-00 for 1 Section]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Mobotrex-Eagle 3SectVehicularSignalHead.pdf|SA103A1C11YBB30-00 for 3 Section]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Mobotrex-Eagle 4SectVehicularSignalHead.pdf|SA104A1C11YBB40-00 for 4 Section]] SA1031T3T1111YBB - HAWK Black Body: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Mobotrex-Eagle 1SectVehicularSignalHead.pdf|SA101A1C11BBB10-00 for 1 Section]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Mobotrex-Eagle 3SectVehicularSignalHead.pdf|SA103A1C11BBB30-00 for 3 Section]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Mobotrex-Eagle 4SectVehicularSignalHead.pdf|SA104A1C11BBB40-00 for 4 Section]] SA1031T3T1111BBB - HAWK
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Mobotrex-Eagle VehicularSignalHead.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.northamericansignal.com/ North American Signal]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT NorthAmerican VehicleSignal.pdf|Yellow Body: PT100YB-OTB-MAS for 1-Section PT300YB-OTB-MAS for 3-Section PT400YB-0TB-MAS for 4-Section Black Body PT100BB-0TB-MAS for 1-Section PT300BB-0TB-MAS for 3-Section PT400BB-0TB-MAS for 4-Section]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM NorthAmerican VehicleSignal.pdf|11/15/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NorthAmerican VehicleSignal Front.JPG|Front]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NorthAmerican VehicleSignal Back.JPG|Back]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NorthAmerican VehicleSignal Hinge.JPG|Hinge]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NorthAmerican VehicleSignal Side.JPG|Side]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NorthAmerican VehicleSignal Terminals.JPG|Terminal]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NorthAmerican VehicleSignal ThumbScrew.JPG|Thumb Screw]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NorthAmerican VehicleSignal Label.JPG|Label]]
|-
|Formerly Peek Traffic.
|[https://www.oriux.com/ Oriux]
|Yellow Body [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Peek VehicularSignalHead.pdf|PSS81S001FO for 1 Section PSS83S003FO for 3 Section PSS84S004FO for 4 Section]] Black Body [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Peek VehicularSignalHead.pdf|PSS81E001FO for 1 Section PSS83E003FO for 3 Section PSS84E004FO for 4 Section]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Peek VehicularSignalHead.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Yellow Polycarbonate Body (Standard) Black Polycarbonate Body (Special) Black Polycarbonate Doors and Visors Visors to be Tunnel Type LED retrofit 12” Sections}}

=== Countdown Pedestrian Signal Heads ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.mccain-inc.com/ McCain Traffic Supply]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT McCain PedestrianSignal.pdf|M31466 – Yellow housing M31655 – Black housing]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM McCain PedestrianSignal.pdf|12/30/04]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.northamericansignal.com/ North American Signal]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT NorthAmerican VehicleSignal.pdf|PPYBP0_B1-MAS - Yellow housing PPBBP0_B1-MAS - Black housing]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM NorthAmerican VehicleSignal.pdf|11/15/19]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NorthAmerican PedSignal Front.JPG|Front]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NorthAmerican PedSignal Bottom.JPG|Bottom]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NorthAmerican PedSignal Gasket.JPG|Gasket]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NorthAmerican PedSignal Hinge.JPG|Hinge]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NorthAmerican PedSignal Terminal.JPG|Terminal]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT NorthAmerican PedSignal Label.JPG|Label]]
|-
|
|[https://www.mobotrex.com/?utm_source=mobotrexmanufacturing Mobotrex / EagleSignal]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS DWG Mobotrex PedestrianHead.pdf|Drawing]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Mobotrex PedestrianHead.pdf|SG7-S-Z10C0YB010-00 – Yellow housing SG7-S-Z10C0BB010-00 – Black housing]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Mobotrex PedestrianHead.pdf|9/20/11]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Siemens PedestrianHead.pdf|Top View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Siemens PedestrianHead Inside.JPG|Inside View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT Siemens PedestrianHead Latch.JPG|Latch]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Yellow polycarbonate body (Standard) Black polycarbonate body (Special) Black Door / No Z-Crate Visor Port hole mount}}
{{PQLReturn}}

== Wire Connectors ==
=== Wire Connectors for Loop Lead-In ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.kinginnovation.com/index.php King Innovation/Dryconn]
|For 2 #14 AWG [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT KingInnovation LoopLeadConnector Aqua-Orange.pdf|Aqua/Orange Waterproof Connector 62110 - Card of 6 62125 - Bag of 25 62135 - Bag of 100 62150 - Bag of 500]] For 2, 3, 4 or 5 #14 AWG [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT KingInnovation LoopLeadConnector Aqua-Red.pdf|Auqua/Red Waterproof Connector 62210 - Card of 5 62225 - Bag of 20 62235 - Bag of 100 62250 - Box of 500]] For 4, 5 or 6 #14 AWG [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT KingInnovation LoopLeadConnector Aqua-Blue.pdf|Aqua/Blue Waterproof Connector 62310 – Card of 3 62325 – Bag of 15 62335 – Bag of 50 62340 – Bag of 250]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM KingInnovation LoopLeadConnector.pdf|10/14/03]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT KingInnovation LoopLeadConnector Aqua-Blue.jpg|Aqua/Blue]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Wire Range: Min. #14 AWG / Max. #6 AWG Copper Silicone Sealant Filled Watertight/raintight}}

=== Wire Connectors for Multi-Conductor Signal Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.kinginnovation.com/index.php King Innovation/Dryconn]
|For 2, 3, 4 or 5 #14 AWG [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT KingInnovation SignalCableConnector Yellow.pdf|King 4 Yellow: 10444 - Bag of 10]] For 2, 3, 4 or 5 #14 AWG [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT KingInnovation SignalCableConnector Red.pdf|King 5 Red: 10555 - Bag of 10]] For 2, 3, 4 or 5 #14 AWG [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT KingInnovation SignalCableConnector Blue.pdf|King 6 Blue: 10670 - Box of 100]] For 4, 5 or 6 #14 [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT KingInnovation SignalCableConnector DarkBlue.pdf|King 9 Dark Blue: 10975 - Box of 75]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM KingInnovation SignalCableConnector.pdf|10/14/03]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT KingInnovation SignalCableConnector Blue.jpg|King 6 Blue]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Wire Range: Min. #22 AWG / Max. #8 AWG Copper Silicone Sealant Filled Direct Burial}}

=== Wire Connectors for Radar Detector Cable ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://solutions.3m.com/wps/portal/3M/en_US/NA_Communication_Technologies/Home/Products/~?N=7569738&rt=r3&Nao=15 3M]
|Scotchlok Butt Connector: [[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT 3M RadarCableConnector.pdf|UAL(BX) 100/box, 10 boxes/case]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM 3M RadarCableConnector.pdf|6/14/17]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT 3M RadarCableConnector Top.JPG|Top View]] [[Media:TRF PQL TS PHOT 3M RadarCableConnector Side.JPG|Side View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Wire Range: Min. #24 AWG / #19 AWG Max. Copper}}

== Epoxy ==
=== Two-Part Epoxy for Concrete ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.hilti.com/ HILTI]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Hilti HIT-RE 500-V3.pdf|HIT-RE 500-V3]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Hilti HIT-RE 500-V3.pdf|12/4/2017]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.itwredhead.com/ ITW Commercial Construction]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Red Head A7.pdf|Red Head Concrete Anchoring Solutions - A7+]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Red Head A7+ PDF.pdf|12/4/2017]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.powers.com/index.php Powers]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Powers PE1000.pdf|PE1000+]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Powers PE1000+.pdf|12/4/2017]]
|
|-
|
|[http://www.strongtie.com/ Simpson Strong-Tie]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Simpson Strong-Tie Set-3G.pdf|SET-3G]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Simpson Strong-Tie Set-3G.pdf|12/4/2017]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shall be classified as a concrete anchor for use in cracked or uncracked concrete. Shall be dispensed with a dual-chamber cartridge with a static mixing nozzel which attaches to the cartridge.}}

== Rivet Nuts ==
=== Rivet Nuts and Installation Tools for Pushbutton Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|During pedestrian pushbutton pole ordering request appropriate number of rivet nuts and installation tool.
|[http://www.freymfgcorp.com Frey Manufacturing Corp.]
|Rivet Nut/Insert Nut: Part Number IN1/4 Installation Tool: Part Number WT1/4
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Frey RivetNutAndTool.pdf|12/4/2017]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT FreyMfg RevitNutAndTool.JPG|Revit Nut with Tool and Bolt]]
|-
|
|[https://www.fastenal.com/ Fastenal]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT Fastenal RivetNutsRibbedFlangeHead.pdf|Rivet Nut 1/4-20 .165-.260]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM Fastenal RivetNutsRibbedFlangeHead.pdf|12/4/2017]]
|
|-
|Expendable tool listed as well for installation.
|[http://avkfasteners.com/products.AR.php AVK Industrial Products]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AVK ARThreadedInsert.pdf|Threaded Insert ARS4T-420-500]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL TS CAT AVK AVKHandTool.pdf|Expendable Tool AAT916-420]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL TS MEM AVK ARThreadedInsert.pdf|12/4/2017]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Size 1/4-20 and Yellow Zinc Plated. Drill 25/64" holes. Other tools for rivet nut insertion available. 1/4"-20 x 1-1/2" phillips drive flat head stainless steel machine screw recommended for pushbutton attachment.
}}
{{PQLReturn}}

Approved Materials - Signing

2026-03-04T20:31:06Z

Brian Geiger: /* Digitally Printed Sign Systems */

File:TRF PQL SI CAT Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.pdf

2026-03-04T20:05:22Z

Brian Geiger: Brian Geiger uploaded a new version of File:TRF PQL SI CAT Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.pdf

File uploaded with MsUpload

Approved Materials - Specialty Items

2026-03-04T20:02:16Z

Brian Geiger: /* Standard Racks */ Added Stainless steel.

{{Return to AML}}

{{PQLDisclaimer}}

<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>
= Permanent Signing Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Street Lighting form.]]}}
== LED Sign Borders ==
=== 91st St and Glenwood ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://trafficalm.com/ TraffiCalm]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder.pdf|Controller & 30W Solar Panel M75-SA300-BSC3 36" Stop Sign Flasher Ring M75-R3636-WR01]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder.pdf|7/23/21]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder CableConnection.jpg|Cable Connection]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder LEDBorder.jpg|LED Border]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder LightEngine.jpg|Controller]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder SolarPanel.jpg|Solar Panel]]
|}

= Streetlighting Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Street Lighting form.]]}}
== Bollards ==
=== Downtown Streetscape ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.hubbell.com/kimlighting/en/ KIM Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL CAT KIM Bollard.pdf|VRB1-20L4KUV-BL]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL MEM KIM Bollard.pdf|4/9/20]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL PHOT KIM Bollard.JPG|Bollard]]
|}

== Bracket Arms ==
=== Residential Side Mount Streetlight Adapter Arm for Small Cell Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.sentrylighting.com/ Sentry]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Sentry SmallPoleArmAdapterArm.pdf|SAL-WSB-PB]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Sentry SmallPoleArmAdapterArm.pdf|3/26/19]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Used only on small cell poles in areas with residential post top luminaires - Black}}

=== Slip Fitter Arm at Indian Creek Recreation Center Parking Lot ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/brackets/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont SlipFitter.pdf|1HT90H24]]
|3/21/16
|
|}

== Decorative Light Bases ==
=== Indian Creek Park Recreation Center Parking Lot ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI Valmont DecorativeLightPoleBase CH22AC.pdf|CH22AC-DBL]]
|3/21/16
|
|}

== Light Fixtures ==
Specialty luminaires shall have stickers denoting pertinant information on the luminaire housing when feasible as described below.
Specialty luminaires shall have a specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read:

XTY

ZK

Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
Some possible examples of these combinations are shown below.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Luminaire Housing Sticker Designs.jpg|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Possible Specialty Luminaire Sticker Combinations
|}

=== Fire Station #41 ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Class E Type 2 4K Leotek LEDs were also used in the parking lot which are standard streetlight LEDs.
|[http://www.leotek.com/ Leotek]
|'''GreenCobra Midsize GCM1''' 
'''Class C Type 4:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCMClassCType4LLPC.pdf|GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-GY-125-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcm/IES File: GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-XX-125 S.ies]
|Approved as part of PB-1823.
|
|-

{{PQLNote|CCT = 4,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Needs a photocell on top as there is no cabinet controlling the lights with a photocell. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== Myron Scafe, Jack Sanders, and Westgate Parking Lots ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/ American Electric Lighting]
|'''Autobahn ATB2'''
'''Class A:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: None currently installed.
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB2&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB2_80B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Class B:'''
 Standard Gray Finish, Type 3 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_AmericanElectric_AutobahnATB2ClassBType3.pdf|ATB2-60BLEDE70-MVOLT-R3-IL-NL-P7-SH-RFD310023]] Installed at Sanders (MR-1883) and Scafe (MR-1882).
 Standard Gray Finish, Type 4 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_AmericanElectric_AutobahnATB2ClassBType4.pdf|ATB2-60BLEDE70-MVOLT-R4-IL-NL-P7-SH-RFD310024]] Installed at Sanders (MR-1883) and Scafe (MR-1882).
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB2&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB2_60B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Class C:'''
 Standard Gray Finish, Type 4 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_AmericanElectric_AutobahnATB2ClassCType4.pdf|ATB2-40BLEDE70-MVOLT-R4-IL-P7-SH-RFD328772]] Proposed at City parking lot east of Marty and north of 80th St (SL-2550).
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB2&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB2_40B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Autobahn ATB0''' 
'''Class D:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: None currently installed.
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB0&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB0_30B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Class E:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: None currently installed.
 Special Black Finish, Type 3 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF PQL SL CAT AmericanElectric AutobahnATB0ClassE.pdf|ATB0-20BLEDE70-MVOLT-R3-IL-P7-SH-RFD223679-RFWD6463]] Installed at Westgate (MR-1762).
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB0&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB0_20B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
|Approved as part of project MR-1882 and MR-1883 plans in 2020.
|[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn TopView.JPG|Top View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn BottomView.JPG|Bottom View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn SideView.JPG|Side View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn BackView.JPG|Back View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn BirdGuard.JPG|Bird Guard]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn DriverCompartment.JPG|Driver Compartment]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn WiringCompartment.JPG|Wiring Compartment]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn WireTerminal.JPG|Wiring Terminal]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn LevelBubble.JPG|Level Bubble]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn HousingLatch.JPG|Housing Latch]]
|-

{{PQLNote|10 Year Warranty. CCT = 4,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. 7 Pin twistlock photocell receptacle with shorting cap. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== City Hall, Deanna Rose Farmstead, Fire Training Center, Soccer Complex, Blue Valley Maintenance, St. Andrews, and Tomahawk Ridge Parking Lots ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Classes were approximated to typical streetlight LEDs based on lumen output.
|[https://nlslighting.com/ NLS Lighting]
|'''NV Series'''
'''Class C:'''
 Various Color Finishes, Type 4 Distribution, 5,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_NLS_NVClassCT45K.pdf|NV1-T4-32L-1-50k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T4-32L-1-50K.IES] 
'''Class D:'''
 Black Finish, Type 4 Distribution, 5,000 Kelvin: Soccer Complex Short Poles 
[[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_NLS_NVClassDT45K.pdf|NV1-T4-16L-1-50k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T4-16L-1-50K.IES]
|Approved as part of PB-2068 project in 2022.
|
|-

{{PQLNote|CCT = 5,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== Deanna Rose Farmstead East Lot, Jack Sanders, and St. Andrews Tennis Courts ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Classes were approximated to typical streetlight LEDs based on lumen output.
|[https://nlslighting.com/ NLS Lighting]
|'''NV Series'''
'''Class C:''' 
Various Color Finishes, Type 2 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: 
[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_NLS_NVClassCT24K.pdf|NV1-T2-32L-1-40k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T2-32L-1-40K.IES] 
Various Color Finishes, Type 5 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: 
[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_NLS_NVClassCT54K.pdf|NV1-T5-32L-1-40k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T5-32L-1-40K.IES] 
|Approved as part of PB-2068 project in 2022.
|
|-

{{PQLNote|CCT = 4,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== Dennis Garrett ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.leotek.com/ Leotek]
|'''GreenCobra GCL1'''
'''Class A:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCLClassAType5LLPC.pdf|GCL1-80J-MV-40K-5-GY-220-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcl/IES File: GCL1-80J-MV-40K-5-XX-220 S.ies]
'''Class B'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCLClassBType4LLPC.pdf|GCL1-80J-MV-40K-4-GY-190-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcl/IES File: GCL1-80J-MV-40K-4-XX-190 S.ies]
'''GreenCobra Midsize GCM1''' 
'''Class C Type 2:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCMClassCType2LLPC.pdf|GCM1-60J-MV-40K-2R-GY-125-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcm/IES File: GCM1-60J-MV-40K-2R-XX-125 S.ies]
'''Class C Type 4:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCMClassCType4LLPC.pdf|GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-GY-125-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcm/IES File: GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-XX-125 S.ies]
'''Class D:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCMClassDType4LLPC.pdf|GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-GY-105-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcm/IES File: GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-XX-105 S.ies]
|Approved as part of PB-2068 project in 2022.
|
|-

{{PQLNote|CCT = 4,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Needs a photocell on top as there is no cabinet controlling the lights with a photocell. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== Antioch & I-435 Bridge Decorative Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Bega
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Bega BridgeFixture.pdf|8189P-Blk-120 w/ GE 12870 Fluorescent lamp]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI Detail Bega BridgeFixture.pdf|Shop Drawing]]
|7/21/04
|
|}
{{PQLNote|120 Volt, Black, Fluorescent lamp}}

=== 110th Street & Lamar Roundabout Decorative Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Type III Distribution, LED, Black. 7 Pin twistlock photocell receptacle with shorting cap. Approximately Class B lumen output.
|[https://lithonia.acuitybrands.com/ Acuity Lithonia]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Acuity RSX1.pdf|RSX1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Acuity RSX1.pdf|3/21/2022]]
|
|-
|These are for replacement of existing heads only. This fixture is no longer approved. Type II Distribution, 400W MH, Black
|[https://www.signify.com/en-us/brands/gardco Gardco Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Gardco GullwingG18.pdf|Gullwing #G18-1-2XL-400-MH-240-BLP]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Gardco GullwingG18.pdf|4/26/02]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== 110th & Lamar Roundabout Landscape Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://hydrel.acuitybrands.com/ Hydrel]
|4710A-175M-120-SP-ISSDLA-BZ
|4/26/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|175W MH, Bronze}}

=== Wall Packs ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Installed at: Locations TBD along US-69 ETL Project
|[https://holophane.acuitybrands.com/ Holophane]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Holophane WallConnectLED.pdf|WCNG P4 40K U4W MVOLT ZT 20KV BZSDP LTCH PR7 DF AO SH]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Holophane WallConnectLED.pdf|11/15/2023]]
|
|-
|Installed at: Antioch & I-435 Bicycle Tunnel Indian Creek Bicycle Trail under I-435 These are for replacement of existing Liton heads only.
|[https://liton.com/ Liton]
|[[Media:TR PQL SI CAT Liton WLP32WallPack.pdf|WLP32-120W]]
|[[Media:TR PQL SI MEM Liton WLP32WallPack.pdf|6/27/2023]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Liton WLP32WallPackSide.JPG|Side]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Adjustable Output is approved. For use in tunnels and bridge underpasses. Trail lighting separate from an adjacent roadway will be designed with adjustable output codes to adjust the average maintained illuminance between 1.0 footcandle and 3.7 footcandle and a 3:1 average:minimum uniformity.}}

=== Soffit Lights ===
{| width="1000px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Installed at: Locations TBD along US-69 ETL Project
|[https://holophane.acuitybrands.com/ Holophane]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Holophane SoffitMountLED.pdf|PPSQL2-P20-40K-MVOLT-GL-T5R-SSM-AO PPSQL2-P80-40K-MVOLT-GL-T5R-SSM-AO]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Holophane SoffitMountLED.pdf|9/22/2023]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Adjustable Output is approved. For use in tunnels and bridge underpasses. Trail lighting separate from an adjacent roadway will be designed with adjustable output codes to adjust the average maintained illuminance between 1.0 footcandle and 3.7 footcandle and a 3:1 average:minimum uniformity. Order with Bird Shroud.}}

=== Wall-Mounted Type 2 Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Installed at: Locations TBD along US-69 ETL Project
|[https://www.hubbell.com/ Hubbell]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Hubbell Type2WallJB.pdf|RSC121808NKSS]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Hubbell Type2WallJB.pdf|12/13/2023]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|For use in tunnels and bridge underpasses as a wall mounted junction box.}}

=== 133rd & Lamar; 132nd Street & US-69 Overpass; Vineyards and Mills Farm Roundabouts ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|These are for replacement of existing heads only. This fixture is no longer approved.
|[https://www.currentlighting.com/aal Architectural Area Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_ArchitecturalAreaLighting_Promenade.pdf|PRMSH3150HPS-Mogul-240MT-BLK-06A-1814 Sleeve]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_ArchitecturalAreaLighting_Promenade.pdf|8/28/06]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Promenade – Black Mogul base lamp and reflector system Photometric curve PRM3-H2-150HPS.IES}}

=== Matt Ross Community Center Parking Lot Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Wide Lite/ Genlyte Company
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT WideLite OptraLuminaire.pdf|Optra Area Luminaire]] '''Symmetric Distribution:''' OPP-250-S-QV-SR-SA '''Asymmetric Distribution:''' OPP-250-A-QV-SR-SA
|3/16/06
|
|}
{{PQLNote|250W MH Segmented reflector with vertical lamp Multi-tap ballast Satin Aluminum finish Arm mount to round pole}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Downtown OP ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.sentrylighting.com/ Sentry]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Sentry DecorativeDowntownLuminaire.pdf|SGO-150HPS-240V-MT-III-BK (No Finial)]] 
:[http://www.sentrylighting.com/IESFilesList.aspx?pid=153IES File: SGO-150HPS-III]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Sentry DecorativeDowntownLuminaire.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[https://scgrp.com/ StressCrete]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_StressCrete_K109.pdf|K109R-P4AR-III-75(SSL)-120:277-K30-30K-3DT-BK, Drawing Number: OP-K109-1]] 
:[https://scgrp.com/ies-files-search/IES File: 0100np4ar3x07530xxe.ies]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_StressCrete_K109.pdf|4/16/2025]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_Profile.JPG|Profile]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_HouseSide.JPG|House side]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_TopDisconnect.JPG|Top Disconnect]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_BottomDisconnect.JPG|Bottom Disconnect]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_Driver.JPG|Driver]]
|}

=== 95th St & Nall Ave; 71st St & Metcalf Ave; 75th St & Metcalf Ave; 87th St & Metcalf Ave ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|KIM Lighting
|KIM Era Lantern 1A/LET26SCH3/400HPS240/** HA33L-TM1/HF2/HAF2 ''This has to be a tenon mount because of the fluted signal pole shaft''
|1/26/09
|
|Single Top Mounted, Single Curved Arm, 400W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution TM!= Tenon Mount Ribbon Arm HF2/ HAF2 = Two Finials ** = Custom Color RAL 6012 (Hunter Green) BL (Black FED-STD-595 #27038)
|}

=== 79th St & Metcalf Ave ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|KIM Lighting
|KIM Era Lantern 1A/LET26SCH3/250HPS240/**/BF HA33L/**/HAF2 ''This does not require a tenon because the pole is not fluted.''
|2/26/13
|
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|Single Top Mounted Single Curved Arm 250W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution HAF2 - Finial on the top arm stud ** - Custom Color RAL 8019 Dark Bronze}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== 159th Street Bridge Over US-69 Highway ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|KIM Lighting
|KIM Era Lantern FM/LEB26SCH3/400HPS240/**/TF Should accommodate 4.5” top pole O.D. w/ 0.188” wall
|12/13/10
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Post Top Flush Mounted Single Curved Arm Top Finial 400W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution ** BL (Black FED-STD-595 #27038)}}

=== 127th Street (Metcalf Ave to Nall Ave) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|[https://www.currentlighting.com/kimlighting Kim Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_Kim_Era.pdf|KIM Era Lantern 2B/LET26SCH3/250HPS240/**/BF Twin Bracket Arms @ 180 degrees 2B/HA33L/HAF2]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_Kim_Era.pdf|12/13/10]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Twin Top Mounted Single Curved Arm Bottom Finial 250W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution Ribbon Arm w/ top finial ** BL (Black FED-STD-595 #27038)}}

=== 95th St & Quivira, 95th St & Oak Park East, and 95th St & Nieman Rd Intersections on Joint Use Signal Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|

|KIM Lighting
|KIM Warp 9 HPS – Single w/2” slipfitter for Type A or B arm 1A/WP9LM3/400HPS240/CC/HSF/TB
|8/2/09
|
|}
{{PQLNote|400W HPS, 240V Type III Distribution CC - Custom Color (RAL 6012 Hunter Green)}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Quivira Road: 95th St. to 99th St. ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.currentlighting.com/kimlighting KIM Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_KimLighting_Warp9HPS.pdf|KIM Warp9 HPS – Twin Std Arms 2B/WP9LM3/400HPS240/CC/TB KIM Warp9 HPS – Single Std Arm 1A/WP9LM3/250HPS240/CC/TB]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_KimLighting_Warp9HPS.pdf|8/2/09]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|250W or 400W HPS, 240V Type III Distribution CC - Custom Color (RAL 6012 Hunter Green)}}

== Lamps ==
=== LED Lamps ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Maintenance Only Downtown Globes Only 
|[https://www.keystonetech.com// Keystone]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Keystone LEDLampInGlobe.pdf|KT-LED100PSHID-EX39-830-D-G4]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Keystone LEDLampInGlobe.pdf|5/22/2024]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Only for installation only in the downtown Sentry Globe (SGO-150HPS-240V-MT-III-BK (No Finial)) fixtures.}}

==Outdoor Electrical Connections==
=== Outdoor Receptacle Covers ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://global.abb/group/en ABB]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover.pdf|CKMUV]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover.pdf|11/1/2021]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover Front.JPG|Front]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover Side.JPG|Side]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover Open.JPG|Open]]
|}
{{PQLNote|NEMA 3R While-In-Use Metal Large enough to fit two electrical extension cords while the cover is fully closed}}

=== Outdoor Receptacles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.hubbell.com/ Hubbell]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Hubbell OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|GFTW20W]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Hubbell OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|11/1/2021]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.leviton.com/en Leviton]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Leviton OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|GFWT2]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Leviton OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|11/1/2021]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|GFCI Commercial grade Designed for wet and damp locations Tamper-Resistant LED status indicator}}

== Photocell ==
=== System Photocell Receptacle ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.acuitybrands.com/ Acuity]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Acuity Receptacle.pdf|DUR103]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Acuity Receptacle.pdf|11/9/2022]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Acuity Receptacle TopView.JPG|Top View]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Acuity Receptacle SideView.JPG|Side View]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Acuity Receptacle BottomView.JPG|Bottom View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Used on external disconnects for city buildings.}}

== Poles ==
=== Special Light Poles for City Parking Lots ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont A42365 Rev3.pdf|Dwg No. A42365 – Revision 3 - 05/31/23]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Valmont A42365 Rev3.pdf|7/27/2020]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Pole height is 31' Mount Pole ID Tag 2'5" up from base of pole to match typical 30' poles. Designed for mounting lots of IT equipment Field drilled 2" max dia holes shall be a minimum of 12" above and 90 degrees from the hand hole Nylon hand hole screws Poles installed at Sanders, Scafe, and Fire Station 41}}

=== Special Light Poles for City Parking Lots w/ 20' Height Restrictions===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_Valmont_A56721.pdf|Dwg No. A56721 - 5/30/2025]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_Valmont_A56721.pdf|7/1/2025]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Pole height is 18' Mount Pole ID Tag 2'5" up from base of pole to match typical poles. Designed for mounting lots of IT equipment Field drilled 2" max dia holes shall be a minimum of 12" above and 90 degrees from the hand hole Nylon hand hole screws Poles approved for Arboretum driveways.}}

=== Special Light Poles for Indian Creek Recreation Center Parking Lot ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/poles-and-posts Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI Valmont 30ftLightPole IndianCrkRecCenter.pdf|R-290845806T4-P9-DBL]]
|3/21/2016
|
|}

=== 110th Street & Roundabout Square Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Gardco Lighting
|#SSS 30-5-11-BLP
|4/26/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|5” square, straight, steel - Black}}

=== Matt Ross Community Center Parking Lot Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://submittal.info/LoginMenu.asp KW Industries]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT KWIndustries MattRossLightPoles.pdf|RSP18-4.0-11-NA-DM10-BC]]
|3/21/06
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Round Steel Satin Aluminum finish Arm mount option}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Decorative Poles for Downtown OP and 132nd Street Bridge over US-69 Highway ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.hapco.com/ Hapco]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole.pdf|Dwg No. C19043 – 8/3/10]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole.pdf|8/5/10]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole Base.jpg|Base]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole Handhole.jpg|Handhole]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole BoltCover.jpg|Bolt Cover]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Nylon hand hole screws}}

=== Special Pole for 159th Street Bridge over US-69 Highway ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|Dwg No. SKKP110211B -1 11/2/11
|11/11/11
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|Dwg No. LH30800 – 10/17/11
|11/1/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shaft Length is 29’-3” or 39’-3” as specified Color: Black FED-STD-595 #27038 or Hunter Green # RAL 6012}}

=== Special Pole for Era Lantern Bolt Pattern 127th St (Metcalf to Nall) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|OP301-LANTERN Dwg No. SKKP110211A-001 –Single Dwg No. SKKP110211A-002 – Twin OP401-LANTERN Dwg No. SKKP012011A-001 –Single Dwg No. SKKP012011A-002 – Twin Pole Cap & Finial – F0004
|11/11/11
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|OP301-LANTERN OP401-LANTERN
|11/2/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shaft Length is 29’-3” or 39’-3” as specified Pole Cap & Finial Color: Black FED-STD-595 #27038 or Hunter Green # RAL 6012}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Special Pole for Warp9 Bolt Pattern Quivira Rd (99th to 95th) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|OP301-WARP Dwg No. SKKP110211C-001 – Single Dwg No. SKKP110211C-002 – Twin OP401-WARP Dwg No SKKP013111A-001 – Single Dwg No SKKP013111A-002 – Twin
|11/11/11
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|OP301-WARP OP401-WARP
|11/2/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shaft Length is 29’-3” or 39’-3” as specified Color: Black FED-STD-595 #27038 or Hunter Green # RAL 6012}}

== Screw-In Foundations==
=== Screw-In Foundations for Downtown OP Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|AB Chance
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT ABChance DecorativeDowntownScrewInFoundation.pdf|T112-03631701 Dwg No. SA11203631701 Rev A]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM ABChance DecorativeDowntownScrewInFoundation.pdf|8/5/10]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Used with Hapco Decorative Pole}}

= Traffic Signal Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-TS-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Traffic Signals form.]]}}
== Decorative Signal Poles ==
=== Mast Arm Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|95th St & Nall Ave
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPole 95thandNall.pdf|Pole: Tapered, 16-Sharp Fluted w/ 2.875” OD x 4” L Tenon Mast Arm: Smooth Round Tapered Pole Cap: Standard]]
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306-GG
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPole VisionMetcalf.pdf|Pole: Tapered, 16-Sharp Fluted w/ 2.875” OD x 4” L Tenon Mast Arm: Smooth Round Tapered Pole Cap: Metro Series]]
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306-B
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|Valmont
|Pole: Tapered, 16-Sharp Fluted w/ 2.875” OD x 4” L Tenon Mast Arm: Smooth Round Tapered Pole Cap: Metro Series
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306 / RAL 8019 Medium Bronze
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPole OakParkMall.pdf|Standard pole and mast arm Pole Cap: Spear Series]]
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306-GG
|}
{{PQLNote|Color Codes: GG = RAL 6012 OP Green B = Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black}}

{{PQLReturn}}

=== Pedestal Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|83rd St & Metcalf Ave
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont PedestalPole 83rd&Metcalf.pdf|Pole: Straight, Round, Smooth Pole Cap: Metro Series]]
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black
|
|-
|95th St & Nall Ave
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont PedestalPole 95th&Nall.pdf|Pole: Straight, 16-Flat Fluted]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|Valmont
|Pole: Straight, 16-Flat Fluted Pole Cap: Metro Series
|
|
|Finish/Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|Valmont
|Pole: Straight, 16-Flat Fluted Pole Cap: Metro Series
|
|
|Color: RAL 8019 Medium Bronze Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|Valmont
|4 ½” dia straight pole Pole Cap: Spear Series
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|}
{{PQLNote|Color Codes: GG = RAL 6012 OP Green B = Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Round and Fluted Poles are Spun Aluminum}}

=== Decorative Bases for Mast Arm Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleContourBase.pdf|Contour Series CN20AC, CN27AC & CN34AC]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|95th St & Nall Ave
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleWashingtonBase.pdf|Washington Series WA25AB, WA30AB & WA36AB]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleSterlingBase.pdf|Sterling Series |ST24AB, ST25AB & ST31AB]]
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleSterlingBase.pdf|Sterling Series |ST24AB, ST25AB & ST31AB]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 8019 Medium Bronze Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive) 83rd St, 81st St HAWK/PHB
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleHuntingtonBase.pdf|Huntington Series]] 
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Decorative Bases for Pedestrian Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|Valmont
|Contour Series CN18AC
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|95th & Nall
|Valmont
|Washington Series WA18AB
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|Valmont
|Sterling Series ST18AB
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|Valmont
|Sterling Series ST18AB
|
|
|Color: RAL 8019 Medium Bronze Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive) 83rd St, 81st St HAWK/PHB
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/poles-and-posts Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont PedestalPoleHuntingtonBase.pdf|Huntington Series]] 
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat Round, Non-tapered There are non-public model numbers including increased pole wall thicknesses. Have manufacturer provide model number based on loading.
|}
{{PQLNote|Recommend using Valmont's integrated decorative base and pole rather than trying to add a decorative base over a standard pedestal pole. This improves ease of access to wires in base.}}

== Pedestrian Pushbutton Pole ==
=== Pedestrian Pushbutton Pole and Foundation ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Maintenance Only
|AB Chance
|Screw-in-Foundation: T1121363 / Dwg No. SA1121363 Ped Button Post: T1121364 / Dwg No. SA1121364
|10/21/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Hot dip galvanized finished smooth.}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Pole Base Cover ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Lithonia
|RSS FBC 3-5IN RND JMA 1751 DNA
|1/7/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|ABS Plastic. Square base with 3.5” diameter hole. Two-piece cover – natural aluminum}}
 

==Solar Traffic Signal Equipment==
=== Batteries ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.concordebattery.com/ Concorde Battery Corp] [https://www.sunxtender.com/ Sun Xtender]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Concorde Batteries.pdf| Sun Xtender Series]]
|3/25/22
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Size depends on the specific job requirements}}

=== Confimirmation Light ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://traffic.tomar.com/ Tomar Electronics]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Tomar ConfirmationLight.pdf|801 Mini I Strobe]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Control Unit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.solar-traffic-controls.com/ Solar Traffic Controls]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT SolarTrafficControl DigitalPowerController.pdf|DPC-2000]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== DC LED Kits ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.solar-traffic-controls.com/ Solar Traffic Controls]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT SolarTrafficControl DCLEDKit.pdf|12" Amber: 8412A2385]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Solar Cabinet Enclosure ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.solar-traffic-controls.com/ Solar Traffic Controls]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT SolarTrafficControls CabinetEnclsoure.pdf|2B Enclosure]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Solar Panel ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.amerescosolar.com/ Ameresco Solar]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Ameresco SolarPanel.pdf|60W Solar Panel: Model- 60J]]
|3/25/22
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Wattage and Size depends on the specific job requirements}}

=== Smart Relay ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://us.idec.com/ IDEC Corp]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT IDEC SmartRelay.pdf|xxxxx]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Strobeswitch ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://traffic.tomar.com/ Tomar Electronics]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Tomar StrobeswitchDetector.pdf|1790-1014]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

= Biking Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SGN-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Permanent Signing form.]]}}
== Bike Racks ==
=== Standard Racks ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.dero.com// Dero]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.pdf|Inverted-U Hoop Rack Heavy Duty]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.pdf|11/13/2024]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.JPG|Rack]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Galvanized or Stainless Steel only.}}

=== Downtown OP ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.landscapeforms.com/ LandscapeForms]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LandscapeForms_Loop.pdf|Loop Bike Rack]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_LandscapeForms_Loop.pdf|1/14/2026]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_LandscapeForms_Loop_Front.jpg|Front]] 
[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_LandscapeForms_Loop_SideView.jpg|Side]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Forest or Matte Black.}}

= EV Charging Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Streetlighting form.]]}}
== Electrical Meter Control Center ==
=== Electrical Meter Control Center ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Approved for use at: 
Scheels Soccer Complex 
Deanna Rose Children's Farmstead
|[http://www.milbankmfg.com/ Milbank]
|[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_Milbank_EV400AControlCenter.pdf|CP3B54C1ERAOSP1]]
|[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_Milbank_EV400AControlCenter.pdf|9/20/2022]]
|
|-
{{PQLNote|None.}}

File:TRF PQL SI MEM Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.pdf

2026-03-04T20:01:51Z

Brian Geiger: Brian Geiger uploaded a new version of File:TRF PQL SI MEM Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.pdf

File uploaded with MsUpload

File:TRF PQL SI CAT Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.pdf

2026-03-04T20:01:51Z

Brian Geiger: Brian Geiger uploaded a new version of File:TRF PQL SI CAT Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.pdf

File uploaded with MsUpload

Approved Materials - Specialty Items

2026-03-04T15:32:27Z

Brian Geiger: /* Light Fixtures */ Added First Station #41 parking lot LEDs

{{Return to AML}}

{{PQLDisclaimer}}

<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>
= Permanent Signing Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Street Lighting form.]]}}
== LED Sign Borders ==
=== 91st St and Glenwood ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://trafficalm.com/ TraffiCalm]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder.pdf|Controller & 30W Solar Panel M75-SA300-BSC3 36" Stop Sign Flasher Ring M75-R3636-WR01]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder.pdf|7/23/21]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder CableConnection.jpg|Cable Connection]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder LEDBorder.jpg|LED Border]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder LightEngine.jpg|Controller]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder SolarPanel.jpg|Solar Panel]]
|}

= Streetlighting Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Street Lighting form.]]}}
== Bollards ==
=== Downtown Streetscape ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.hubbell.com/kimlighting/en/ KIM Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL CAT KIM Bollard.pdf|VRB1-20L4KUV-BL]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL MEM KIM Bollard.pdf|4/9/20]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL PHOT KIM Bollard.JPG|Bollard]]
|}

== Bracket Arms ==
=== Residential Side Mount Streetlight Adapter Arm for Small Cell Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.sentrylighting.com/ Sentry]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Sentry SmallPoleArmAdapterArm.pdf|SAL-WSB-PB]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Sentry SmallPoleArmAdapterArm.pdf|3/26/19]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Used only on small cell poles in areas with residential post top luminaires - Black}}

=== Slip Fitter Arm at Indian Creek Recreation Center Parking Lot ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/brackets/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont SlipFitter.pdf|1HT90H24]]
|3/21/16
|
|}

== Decorative Light Bases ==
=== Indian Creek Park Recreation Center Parking Lot ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI Valmont DecorativeLightPoleBase CH22AC.pdf|CH22AC-DBL]]
|3/21/16
|
|}

== Light Fixtures ==
Specialty luminaires shall have stickers denoting pertinant information on the luminaire housing when feasible as described below.
Specialty luminaires shall have a specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read:

XTY

ZK

Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
Some possible examples of these combinations are shown below.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Luminaire Housing Sticker Designs.jpg|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Possible Specialty Luminaire Sticker Combinations
|}

=== Fire Station #41 ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Class E Type 2 4K Leotek LEDs were also used in the parking lot which are standard streetlight LEDs.
|[http://www.leotek.com/ Leotek]
|'''GreenCobra Midsize GCM1''' 
'''Class C Type 4:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCMClassCType4LLPC.pdf|GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-GY-125-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcm/IES File: GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-XX-125 S.ies]
|Approved as part of PB-1823.
|
|-

{{PQLNote|CCT = 4,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Needs a photocell on top as there is no cabinet controlling the lights with a photocell. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== Myron Scafe, Jack Sanders, and Westgate Parking Lots ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/ American Electric Lighting]
|'''Autobahn ATB2'''
'''Class A:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: None currently installed.
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB2&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB2_80B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Class B:'''
 Standard Gray Finish, Type 3 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_AmericanElectric_AutobahnATB2ClassBType3.pdf|ATB2-60BLEDE70-MVOLT-R3-IL-NL-P7-SH-RFD310023]] Installed at Sanders (MR-1883) and Scafe (MR-1882).
 Standard Gray Finish, Type 4 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_AmericanElectric_AutobahnATB2ClassBType4.pdf|ATB2-60BLEDE70-MVOLT-R4-IL-NL-P7-SH-RFD310024]] Installed at Sanders (MR-1883) and Scafe (MR-1882).
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB2&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB2_60B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Class C:'''
 Standard Gray Finish, Type 4 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_AmericanElectric_AutobahnATB2ClassCType4.pdf|ATB2-40BLEDE70-MVOLT-R4-IL-P7-SH-RFD328772]] Proposed at City parking lot east of Marty and north of 80th St (SL-2550).
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB2&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB2_40B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Autobahn ATB0''' 
'''Class D:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: None currently installed.
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB0&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB0_30B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Class E:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: None currently installed.
 Special Black Finish, Type 3 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF PQL SL CAT AmericanElectric AutobahnATB0ClassE.pdf|ATB0-20BLEDE70-MVOLT-R3-IL-P7-SH-RFD223679-RFWD6463]] Installed at Westgate (MR-1762).
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB0&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB0_20B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
|Approved as part of project MR-1882 and MR-1883 plans in 2020.
|[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn TopView.JPG|Top View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn BottomView.JPG|Bottom View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn SideView.JPG|Side View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn BackView.JPG|Back View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn BirdGuard.JPG|Bird Guard]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn DriverCompartment.JPG|Driver Compartment]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn WiringCompartment.JPG|Wiring Compartment]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn WireTerminal.JPG|Wiring Terminal]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn LevelBubble.JPG|Level Bubble]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn HousingLatch.JPG|Housing Latch]]
|-

{{PQLNote|10 Year Warranty. CCT = 4,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. 7 Pin twistlock photocell receptacle with shorting cap. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== City Hall, Deanna Rose Farmstead, Fire Training Center, Soccer Complex, Blue Valley Maintenance, St. Andrews, and Tomahawk Ridge Parking Lots ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Classes were approximated to typical streetlight LEDs based on lumen output.
|[https://nlslighting.com/ NLS Lighting]
|'''NV Series'''
'''Class C:'''
 Various Color Finishes, Type 4 Distribution, 5,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_NLS_NVClassCT45K.pdf|NV1-T4-32L-1-50k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T4-32L-1-50K.IES] 
'''Class D:'''
 Black Finish, Type 4 Distribution, 5,000 Kelvin: Soccer Complex Short Poles 
[[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_NLS_NVClassDT45K.pdf|NV1-T4-16L-1-50k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T4-16L-1-50K.IES]
|Approved as part of PB-2068 project in 2022.
|
|-

{{PQLNote|CCT = 5,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== Deanna Rose Farmstead East Lot, Jack Sanders, and St. Andrews Tennis Courts ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Classes were approximated to typical streetlight LEDs based on lumen output.
|[https://nlslighting.com/ NLS Lighting]
|'''NV Series'''
'''Class C:''' 
Various Color Finishes, Type 2 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: 
[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_NLS_NVClassCT24K.pdf|NV1-T2-32L-1-40k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T2-32L-1-40K.IES] 
Various Color Finishes, Type 5 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: 
[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_NLS_NVClassCT54K.pdf|NV1-T5-32L-1-40k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T5-32L-1-40K.IES] 
|Approved as part of PB-2068 project in 2022.
|
|-

{{PQLNote|CCT = 4,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== Dennis Garrett ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.leotek.com/ Leotek]
|'''GreenCobra GCL1'''
'''Class A:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCLClassAType5LLPC.pdf|GCL1-80J-MV-40K-5-GY-220-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcl/IES File: GCL1-80J-MV-40K-5-XX-220 S.ies]
'''Class B'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCLClassBType4LLPC.pdf|GCL1-80J-MV-40K-4-GY-190-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcl/IES File: GCL1-80J-MV-40K-4-XX-190 S.ies]
'''GreenCobra Midsize GCM1''' 
'''Class C Type 2:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCMClassCType2LLPC.pdf|GCM1-60J-MV-40K-2R-GY-125-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcm/IES File: GCM1-60J-MV-40K-2R-XX-125 S.ies]
'''Class C Type 4:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCMClassCType4LLPC.pdf|GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-GY-125-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcm/IES File: GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-XX-125 S.ies]
'''Class D:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCMClassDType4LLPC.pdf|GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-GY-105-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcm/IES File: GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-XX-105 S.ies]
|Approved as part of PB-2068 project in 2022.
|
|-

{{PQLNote|CCT = 4,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Needs a photocell on top as there is no cabinet controlling the lights with a photocell. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== Antioch & I-435 Bridge Decorative Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Bega
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Bega BridgeFixture.pdf|8189P-Blk-120 w/ GE 12870 Fluorescent lamp]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI Detail Bega BridgeFixture.pdf|Shop Drawing]]
|7/21/04
|
|}
{{PQLNote|120 Volt, Black, Fluorescent lamp}}

=== 110th Street & Lamar Roundabout Decorative Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Type III Distribution, LED, Black. 7 Pin twistlock photocell receptacle with shorting cap. Approximately Class B lumen output.
|[https://lithonia.acuitybrands.com/ Acuity Lithonia]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Acuity RSX1.pdf|RSX1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Acuity RSX1.pdf|3/21/2022]]
|
|-
|These are for replacement of existing heads only. This fixture is no longer approved. Type II Distribution, 400W MH, Black
|[https://www.signify.com/en-us/brands/gardco Gardco Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Gardco GullwingG18.pdf|Gullwing #G18-1-2XL-400-MH-240-BLP]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Gardco GullwingG18.pdf|4/26/02]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== 110th & Lamar Roundabout Landscape Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://hydrel.acuitybrands.com/ Hydrel]
|4710A-175M-120-SP-ISSDLA-BZ
|4/26/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|175W MH, Bronze}}

=== Wall Packs ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Installed at: Locations TBD along US-69 ETL Project
|[https://holophane.acuitybrands.com/ Holophane]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Holophane WallConnectLED.pdf|WCNG P4 40K U4W MVOLT ZT 20KV BZSDP LTCH PR7 DF AO SH]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Holophane WallConnectLED.pdf|11/15/2023]]
|
|-
|Installed at: Antioch & I-435 Bicycle Tunnel Indian Creek Bicycle Trail under I-435 These are for replacement of existing Liton heads only.
|[https://liton.com/ Liton]
|[[Media:TR PQL SI CAT Liton WLP32WallPack.pdf|WLP32-120W]]
|[[Media:TR PQL SI MEM Liton WLP32WallPack.pdf|6/27/2023]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Liton WLP32WallPackSide.JPG|Side]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Adjustable Output is approved. For use in tunnels and bridge underpasses. Trail lighting separate from an adjacent roadway will be designed with adjustable output codes to adjust the average maintained illuminance between 1.0 footcandle and 3.7 footcandle and a 3:1 average:minimum uniformity.}}

=== Soffit Lights ===
{| width="1000px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Installed at: Locations TBD along US-69 ETL Project
|[https://holophane.acuitybrands.com/ Holophane]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Holophane SoffitMountLED.pdf|PPSQL2-P20-40K-MVOLT-GL-T5R-SSM-AO PPSQL2-P80-40K-MVOLT-GL-T5R-SSM-AO]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Holophane SoffitMountLED.pdf|9/22/2023]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Adjustable Output is approved. For use in tunnels and bridge underpasses. Trail lighting separate from an adjacent roadway will be designed with adjustable output codes to adjust the average maintained illuminance between 1.0 footcandle and 3.7 footcandle and a 3:1 average:minimum uniformity. Order with Bird Shroud.}}

=== Wall-Mounted Type 2 Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Installed at: Locations TBD along US-69 ETL Project
|[https://www.hubbell.com/ Hubbell]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Hubbell Type2WallJB.pdf|RSC121808NKSS]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Hubbell Type2WallJB.pdf|12/13/2023]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|For use in tunnels and bridge underpasses as a wall mounted junction box.}}

=== 133rd & Lamar; 132nd Street & US-69 Overpass; Vineyards and Mills Farm Roundabouts ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|These are for replacement of existing heads only. This fixture is no longer approved.
|[https://www.currentlighting.com/aal Architectural Area Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_ArchitecturalAreaLighting_Promenade.pdf|PRMSH3150HPS-Mogul-240MT-BLK-06A-1814 Sleeve]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_ArchitecturalAreaLighting_Promenade.pdf|8/28/06]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Promenade – Black Mogul base lamp and reflector system Photometric curve PRM3-H2-150HPS.IES}}

=== Matt Ross Community Center Parking Lot Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Wide Lite/ Genlyte Company
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT WideLite OptraLuminaire.pdf|Optra Area Luminaire]] '''Symmetric Distribution:''' OPP-250-S-QV-SR-SA '''Asymmetric Distribution:''' OPP-250-A-QV-SR-SA
|3/16/06
|
|}
{{PQLNote|250W MH Segmented reflector with vertical lamp Multi-tap ballast Satin Aluminum finish Arm mount to round pole}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Downtown OP ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.sentrylighting.com/ Sentry]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Sentry DecorativeDowntownLuminaire.pdf|SGO-150HPS-240V-MT-III-BK (No Finial)]] 
:[http://www.sentrylighting.com/IESFilesList.aspx?pid=153IES File: SGO-150HPS-III]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Sentry DecorativeDowntownLuminaire.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[https://scgrp.com/ StressCrete]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_StressCrete_K109.pdf|K109R-P4AR-III-75(SSL)-120:277-K30-30K-3DT-BK, Drawing Number: OP-K109-1]] 
:[https://scgrp.com/ies-files-search/IES File: 0100np4ar3x07530xxe.ies]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_StressCrete_K109.pdf|4/16/2025]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_Profile.JPG|Profile]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_HouseSide.JPG|House side]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_TopDisconnect.JPG|Top Disconnect]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_BottomDisconnect.JPG|Bottom Disconnect]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_Driver.JPG|Driver]]
|}

=== 95th St & Nall Ave; 71st St & Metcalf Ave; 75th St & Metcalf Ave; 87th St & Metcalf Ave ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|KIM Lighting
|KIM Era Lantern 1A/LET26SCH3/400HPS240/** HA33L-TM1/HF2/HAF2 ''This has to be a tenon mount because of the fluted signal pole shaft''
|1/26/09
|
|Single Top Mounted, Single Curved Arm, 400W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution TM!= Tenon Mount Ribbon Arm HF2/ HAF2 = Two Finials ** = Custom Color RAL 6012 (Hunter Green) BL (Black FED-STD-595 #27038)
|}

=== 79th St & Metcalf Ave ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|KIM Lighting
|KIM Era Lantern 1A/LET26SCH3/250HPS240/**/BF HA33L/**/HAF2 ''This does not require a tenon because the pole is not fluted.''
|2/26/13
|
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|Single Top Mounted Single Curved Arm 250W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution HAF2 - Finial on the top arm stud ** - Custom Color RAL 8019 Dark Bronze}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== 159th Street Bridge Over US-69 Highway ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|KIM Lighting
|KIM Era Lantern FM/LEB26SCH3/400HPS240/**/TF Should accommodate 4.5” top pole O.D. w/ 0.188” wall
|12/13/10
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Post Top Flush Mounted Single Curved Arm Top Finial 400W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution ** BL (Black FED-STD-595 #27038)}}

=== 127th Street (Metcalf Ave to Nall Ave) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|[https://www.currentlighting.com/kimlighting Kim Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_Kim_Era.pdf|KIM Era Lantern 2B/LET26SCH3/250HPS240/**/BF Twin Bracket Arms @ 180 degrees 2B/HA33L/HAF2]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_Kim_Era.pdf|12/13/10]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Twin Top Mounted Single Curved Arm Bottom Finial 250W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution Ribbon Arm w/ top finial ** BL (Black FED-STD-595 #27038)}}

=== 95th St & Quivira, 95th St & Oak Park East, and 95th St & Nieman Rd Intersections on Joint Use Signal Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|

|KIM Lighting
|KIM Warp 9 HPS – Single w/2” slipfitter for Type A or B arm 1A/WP9LM3/400HPS240/CC/HSF/TB
|8/2/09
|
|}
{{PQLNote|400W HPS, 240V Type III Distribution CC - Custom Color (RAL 6012 Hunter Green)}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Quivira Road: 95th St. to 99th St. ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.currentlighting.com/kimlighting KIM Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_KimLighting_Warp9HPS.pdf|KIM Warp9 HPS – Twin Std Arms 2B/WP9LM3/400HPS240/CC/TB KIM Warp9 HPS – Single Std Arm 1A/WP9LM3/250HPS240/CC/TB]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_KimLighting_Warp9HPS.pdf|8/2/09]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|250W or 400W HPS, 240V Type III Distribution CC - Custom Color (RAL 6012 Hunter Green)}}

== Lamps ==
=== LED Lamps ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Maintenance Only Downtown Globes Only 
|[https://www.keystonetech.com// Keystone]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Keystone LEDLampInGlobe.pdf|KT-LED100PSHID-EX39-830-D-G4]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Keystone LEDLampInGlobe.pdf|5/22/2024]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Only for installation only in the downtown Sentry Globe (SGO-150HPS-240V-MT-III-BK (No Finial)) fixtures.}}

==Outdoor Electrical Connections==
=== Outdoor Receptacle Covers ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://global.abb/group/en ABB]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover.pdf|CKMUV]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover.pdf|11/1/2021]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover Front.JPG|Front]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover Side.JPG|Side]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover Open.JPG|Open]]
|}
{{PQLNote|NEMA 3R While-In-Use Metal Large enough to fit two electrical extension cords while the cover is fully closed}}

=== Outdoor Receptacles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.hubbell.com/ Hubbell]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Hubbell OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|GFTW20W]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Hubbell OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|11/1/2021]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.leviton.com/en Leviton]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Leviton OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|GFWT2]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Leviton OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|11/1/2021]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|GFCI Commercial grade Designed for wet and damp locations Tamper-Resistant LED status indicator}}

== Photocell ==
=== System Photocell Receptacle ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.acuitybrands.com/ Acuity]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Acuity Receptacle.pdf|DUR103]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Acuity Receptacle.pdf|11/9/2022]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Acuity Receptacle TopView.JPG|Top View]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Acuity Receptacle SideView.JPG|Side View]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Acuity Receptacle BottomView.JPG|Bottom View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Used on external disconnects for city buildings.}}

== Poles ==
=== Special Light Poles for City Parking Lots ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont A42365 Rev3.pdf|Dwg No. A42365 – Revision 3 - 05/31/23]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Valmont A42365 Rev3.pdf|7/27/2020]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Pole height is 31' Mount Pole ID Tag 2'5" up from base of pole to match typical 30' poles. Designed for mounting lots of IT equipment Field drilled 2" max dia holes shall be a minimum of 12" above and 90 degrees from the hand hole Nylon hand hole screws Poles installed at Sanders, Scafe, and Fire Station 41}}

=== Special Light Poles for City Parking Lots w/ 20' Height Restrictions===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_Valmont_A56721.pdf|Dwg No. A56721 - 5/30/2025]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_Valmont_A56721.pdf|7/1/2025]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Pole height is 18' Mount Pole ID Tag 2'5" up from base of pole to match typical poles. Designed for mounting lots of IT equipment Field drilled 2" max dia holes shall be a minimum of 12" above and 90 degrees from the hand hole Nylon hand hole screws Poles approved for Arboretum driveways.}}

=== Special Light Poles for Indian Creek Recreation Center Parking Lot ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/poles-and-posts Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI Valmont 30ftLightPole IndianCrkRecCenter.pdf|R-290845806T4-P9-DBL]]
|3/21/2016
|
|}

=== 110th Street & Roundabout Square Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Gardco Lighting
|#SSS 30-5-11-BLP
|4/26/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|5” square, straight, steel - Black}}

=== Matt Ross Community Center Parking Lot Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://submittal.info/LoginMenu.asp KW Industries]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT KWIndustries MattRossLightPoles.pdf|RSP18-4.0-11-NA-DM10-BC]]
|3/21/06
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Round Steel Satin Aluminum finish Arm mount option}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Decorative Poles for Downtown OP and 132nd Street Bridge over US-69 Highway ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.hapco.com/ Hapco]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole.pdf|Dwg No. C19043 – 8/3/10]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole.pdf|8/5/10]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole Base.jpg|Base]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole Handhole.jpg|Handhole]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole BoltCover.jpg|Bolt Cover]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Nylon hand hole screws}}

=== Special Pole for 159th Street Bridge over US-69 Highway ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|Dwg No. SKKP110211B -1 11/2/11
|11/11/11
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|Dwg No. LH30800 – 10/17/11
|11/1/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shaft Length is 29’-3” or 39’-3” as specified Color: Black FED-STD-595 #27038 or Hunter Green # RAL 6012}}

=== Special Pole for Era Lantern Bolt Pattern 127th St (Metcalf to Nall) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|OP301-LANTERN Dwg No. SKKP110211A-001 –Single Dwg No. SKKP110211A-002 – Twin OP401-LANTERN Dwg No. SKKP012011A-001 –Single Dwg No. SKKP012011A-002 – Twin Pole Cap & Finial – F0004
|11/11/11
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|OP301-LANTERN OP401-LANTERN
|11/2/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shaft Length is 29’-3” or 39’-3” as specified Pole Cap & Finial Color: Black FED-STD-595 #27038 or Hunter Green # RAL 6012}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Special Pole for Warp9 Bolt Pattern Quivira Rd (99th to 95th) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|OP301-WARP Dwg No. SKKP110211C-001 – Single Dwg No. SKKP110211C-002 – Twin OP401-WARP Dwg No SKKP013111A-001 – Single Dwg No SKKP013111A-002 – Twin
|11/11/11
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|OP301-WARP OP401-WARP
|11/2/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shaft Length is 29’-3” or 39’-3” as specified Color: Black FED-STD-595 #27038 or Hunter Green # RAL 6012}}

== Screw-In Foundations==
=== Screw-In Foundations for Downtown OP Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|AB Chance
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT ABChance DecorativeDowntownScrewInFoundation.pdf|T112-03631701 Dwg No. SA11203631701 Rev A]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM ABChance DecorativeDowntownScrewInFoundation.pdf|8/5/10]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Used with Hapco Decorative Pole}}

= Traffic Signal Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-TS-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Traffic Signals form.]]}}
== Decorative Signal Poles ==
=== Mast Arm Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|95th St & Nall Ave
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPole 95thandNall.pdf|Pole: Tapered, 16-Sharp Fluted w/ 2.875” OD x 4” L Tenon Mast Arm: Smooth Round Tapered Pole Cap: Standard]]
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306-GG
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPole VisionMetcalf.pdf|Pole: Tapered, 16-Sharp Fluted w/ 2.875” OD x 4” L Tenon Mast Arm: Smooth Round Tapered Pole Cap: Metro Series]]
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306-B
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|Valmont
|Pole: Tapered, 16-Sharp Fluted w/ 2.875” OD x 4” L Tenon Mast Arm: Smooth Round Tapered Pole Cap: Metro Series
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306 / RAL 8019 Medium Bronze
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPole OakParkMall.pdf|Standard pole and mast arm Pole Cap: Spear Series]]
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306-GG
|}
{{PQLNote|Color Codes: GG = RAL 6012 OP Green B = Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black}}

{{PQLReturn}}

=== Pedestal Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|83rd St & Metcalf Ave
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont PedestalPole 83rd&Metcalf.pdf|Pole: Straight, Round, Smooth Pole Cap: Metro Series]]
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black
|
|-
|95th St & Nall Ave
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont PedestalPole 95th&Nall.pdf|Pole: Straight, 16-Flat Fluted]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|Valmont
|Pole: Straight, 16-Flat Fluted Pole Cap: Metro Series
|
|
|Finish/Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|Valmont
|Pole: Straight, 16-Flat Fluted Pole Cap: Metro Series
|
|
|Color: RAL 8019 Medium Bronze Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|Valmont
|4 ½” dia straight pole Pole Cap: Spear Series
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|}
{{PQLNote|Color Codes: GG = RAL 6012 OP Green B = Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Round and Fluted Poles are Spun Aluminum}}

=== Decorative Bases for Mast Arm Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleContourBase.pdf|Contour Series CN20AC, CN27AC & CN34AC]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|95th St & Nall Ave
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleWashingtonBase.pdf|Washington Series WA25AB, WA30AB & WA36AB]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleSterlingBase.pdf|Sterling Series |ST24AB, ST25AB & ST31AB]]
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleSterlingBase.pdf|Sterling Series |ST24AB, ST25AB & ST31AB]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 8019 Medium Bronze Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive) 83rd St, 81st St HAWK/PHB
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleHuntingtonBase.pdf|Huntington Series]] 
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Decorative Bases for Pedestrian Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|Valmont
|Contour Series CN18AC
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|95th & Nall
|Valmont
|Washington Series WA18AB
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|Valmont
|Sterling Series ST18AB
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|Valmont
|Sterling Series ST18AB
|
|
|Color: RAL 8019 Medium Bronze Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive) 83rd St, 81st St HAWK/PHB
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/poles-and-posts Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont PedestalPoleHuntingtonBase.pdf|Huntington Series]] 
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat Round, Non-tapered There are non-public model numbers including increased pole wall thicknesses. Have manufacturer provide model number based on loading.
|}
{{PQLNote|Recommend using Valmont's integrated decorative base and pole rather than trying to add a decorative base over a standard pedestal pole. This improves ease of access to wires in base.}}

== Pedestrian Pushbutton Pole ==
=== Pedestrian Pushbutton Pole and Foundation ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Maintenance Only
|AB Chance
|Screw-in-Foundation: T1121363 / Dwg No. SA1121363 Ped Button Post: T1121364 / Dwg No. SA1121364
|10/21/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Hot dip galvanized finished smooth.}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Pole Base Cover ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Lithonia
|RSS FBC 3-5IN RND JMA 1751 DNA
|1/7/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|ABS Plastic. Square base with 3.5” diameter hole. Two-piece cover – natural aluminum}}
 

==Solar Traffic Signal Equipment==
=== Batteries ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.concordebattery.com/ Concorde Battery Corp] [https://www.sunxtender.com/ Sun Xtender]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Concorde Batteries.pdf| Sun Xtender Series]]
|3/25/22
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Size depends on the specific job requirements}}

=== Confimirmation Light ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://traffic.tomar.com/ Tomar Electronics]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Tomar ConfirmationLight.pdf|801 Mini I Strobe]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Control Unit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.solar-traffic-controls.com/ Solar Traffic Controls]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT SolarTrafficControl DigitalPowerController.pdf|DPC-2000]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== DC LED Kits ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.solar-traffic-controls.com/ Solar Traffic Controls]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT SolarTrafficControl DCLEDKit.pdf|12" Amber: 8412A2385]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Solar Cabinet Enclosure ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.solar-traffic-controls.com/ Solar Traffic Controls]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT SolarTrafficControls CabinetEnclsoure.pdf|2B Enclosure]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Solar Panel ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.amerescosolar.com/ Ameresco Solar]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Ameresco SolarPanel.pdf|60W Solar Panel: Model- 60J]]
|3/25/22
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Wattage and Size depends on the specific job requirements}}

=== Smart Relay ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://us.idec.com/ IDEC Corp]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT IDEC SmartRelay.pdf|xxxxx]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Strobeswitch ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://traffic.tomar.com/ Tomar Electronics]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Tomar StrobeswitchDetector.pdf|1790-1014]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

= Biking Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SGN-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Permanent Signing form.]]}}
== Bike Racks ==
=== Standard Racks ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.dero.com// Dero]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.pdf|Inverted-U Hoop Rack Heavy Duty]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.pdf|11/13/2024]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.JPG|Rack]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Galvanized only.}}
=== Downtown OP ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.landscapeforms.com/ LandscapeForms]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LandscapeForms_Loop.pdf|Loop Bike Rack]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_LandscapeForms_Loop.pdf|1/14/2026]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_LandscapeForms_Loop_Front.jpg|Front]] 
[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_LandscapeForms_Loop_SideView.jpg|Side]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Forest or Matte Black.}}

= EV Charging Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Streetlighting form.]]}}
== Electrical Meter Control Center ==
=== Electrical Meter Control Center ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Approved for use at: 
Scheels Soccer Complex 
Deanna Rose Children's Farmstead
|[http://www.milbankmfg.com/ Milbank]
|[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_Milbank_EV400AControlCenter.pdf|CP3B54C1ERAOSP1]]
|[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_Milbank_EV400AControlCenter.pdf|9/20/2022]]
|
|-
{{PQLNote|None.}}

No Outlet Sign Design Guidelines

2026-02-27T16:48:06Z

Brian Geiger: /* Signing Standards: */ Corrected back to 12" height from 9" for the plaque based on OPPW Maintenance's request.

'''City Guidelines Regarding the Installation of “No Outlet”
(W14-2 and W14-2a) Signs''' 
Traffic Services Division of the Department of Public Works

== Governing Document Reference: ==
[http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD)], 2023 or latest edition and the [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks/doc-viewer.aspx?secid=3158&keywords=12.04.085#secid-3155 Overland Park Municipal Code (OPMC), Title 12 – Traffic, Chapter 12.04.]

== MUTCD Requirements: ==
“No Outlet” (W14-2) signs may be used at the entrance to a road or road network from which there is no other exit.

The sign should be posted as near as practical to the entry point or at a sufficient advance distance to permit the road user to avoid the dead end or no outlet condition by turning at the nearest intersecting street. [[Image:W14-2 & W14-2a.png|right|250px]]

“No Outlet” (W14-2a) plaques may be used in combination with the Street Name signs at intersections to warn turning traffic that the cross street ends in the direction indicated by the arrow instead of or in addition to the W14-2 signs. The “No Outlet” (W14-2a) plaque shall not be used instead of the W14-2 sign where traffic can proceed straight through the intersection into the no outlet area.

== City of Overland Park Guidelines for Installation: ==
A field investigation is required to determine if a “No Outlet” sign or plaque is to be installed. The reviewer should stand at the intersection of the centerlines of both the dead end street and the through street. With a 3.5’ eye height, the reviewer should look down the dead end street to determine if the end of the cul-de-sac bulb can be clearly viewed.

If the end of the cul-de-sac bulb is visible from the 3.5’ eye height, the “No Outlet” sign or plaque should not be installed. If the end of the cul-de-sac bulb is not visible, the sign should be installed as near to the right hand corner as possible and clearly visible to approaching traffic.

In borderline cases, the location should be field checked at night to determine if the “No Outlet” sign is required. If it is difficult to see the end of the cul-de-sac bulb with the existing street lighting system in place, the sign should be installed.

The “No Outlet” plaque (W14-2a) shall be installed in conjunction with the Street Name sign whenever possible instead of the standard (W14-2) sign. However, the (W14-2) sign shall be installed in situations where traffic can proceed straight through the intersection to the dead end or no outlet street and where the (W14-2a) plaque in combination with the Street Name sign would have to be mounted parallel to the dead end or no outlet street and not be visible to the street user.

== Signing Standards: ==
The “No Outlet” (W14-2) sign or the “No Outlet” (W14-2a) plaque shall have a black legend and border, on a retro-reflectorized yellow background. The size of the “No Outlet” (W14-2) sign shall be a minimum of 30” x 30” for conventional roads with single lane approaches and 36" x 36" on multi-lane approaches. The size of the (W14-2a) plaque shall be 36” x 12” as that's a standard size blank that OP PW Maintenance stocks rather than 36" x 9".

Approved Materials - Specialty Items

2026-02-23T20:52:08Z

Brian Geiger: /* Bike Racks */ Added Galvanized Only

{{Return to AML}}

{{PQLDisclaimer}}

<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>
= Permanent Signing Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Street Lighting form.]]}}
== LED Sign Borders ==
=== 91st St and Glenwood ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://trafficalm.com/ TraffiCalm]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder.pdf|Controller & 30W Solar Panel M75-SA300-BSC3 36" Stop Sign Flasher Ring M75-R3636-WR01]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder.pdf|7/23/21]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder CableConnection.jpg|Cable Connection]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder LEDBorder.jpg|LED Border]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder LightEngine.jpg|Controller]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT TraffiCalm LEDSignBorder SolarPanel.jpg|Solar Panel]]
|}

= Streetlighting Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Street Lighting form.]]}}
== Bollards ==
=== Downtown Streetscape ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.hubbell.com/kimlighting/en/ KIM Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL CAT KIM Bollard.pdf|VRB1-20L4KUV-BL]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL MEM KIM Bollard.pdf|4/9/20]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SL PHOT KIM Bollard.JPG|Bollard]]
|}

== Bracket Arms ==
=== Residential Side Mount Streetlight Adapter Arm for Small Cell Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.sentrylighting.com/ Sentry]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Sentry SmallPoleArmAdapterArm.pdf|SAL-WSB-PB]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Sentry SmallPoleArmAdapterArm.pdf|3/26/19]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Used only on small cell poles in areas with residential post top luminaires - Black}}

=== Slip Fitter Arm at Indian Creek Recreation Center Parking Lot ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/brackets/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont SlipFitter.pdf|1HT90H24]]
|3/21/16
|
|}

== Decorative Light Bases ==
=== Indian Creek Park Recreation Center Parking Lot ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI Valmont DecorativeLightPoleBase CH22AC.pdf|CH22AC-DBL]]
|3/21/16
|
|}

== Light Fixtures ==
Specialty luminaires shall have stickers denoting pertinant information on the luminaire housing when feasible as described below.
Specialty luminaires shall have a specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read:

XTY

ZK

Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
Some possible examples of these combinations are shown below.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Luminaire Housing Sticker Designs.jpg|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Possible Specialty Luminaire Sticker Combinations
|}

=== Myron Scafe, Jack Sanders, and Westgate Parking Lots ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/ American Electric Lighting]
|'''Autobahn ATB2'''
'''Class A:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: None currently installed.
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB2&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB2_80B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Class B:'''
 Standard Gray Finish, Type 3 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_AmericanElectric_AutobahnATB2ClassBType3.pdf|ATB2-60BLEDE70-MVOLT-R3-IL-NL-P7-SH-RFD310023]] Installed at Sanders (MR-1883) and Scafe (MR-1882).
 Standard Gray Finish, Type 4 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_AmericanElectric_AutobahnATB2ClassBType4.pdf|ATB2-60BLEDE70-MVOLT-R4-IL-NL-P7-SH-RFD310024]] Installed at Sanders (MR-1883) and Scafe (MR-1882).
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB2&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB2_60B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Class C:'''
 Standard Gray Finish, Type 4 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_AmericanElectric_AutobahnATB2ClassCType4.pdf|ATB2-40BLEDE70-MVOLT-R4-IL-P7-SH-RFD328772]] Proposed at City parking lot east of Marty and north of 80th St (SL-2550).
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB2&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB2_40B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Autobahn ATB0''' 
'''Class D:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: None currently installed.
 Special Black Finish: None currently installed.
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB0&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB0_30B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
'''Class E:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: None currently installed.
 Special Black Finish, Type 3 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF PQL SL CAT AmericanElectric AutobahnATB0ClassE.pdf|ATB0-20BLEDE70-MVOLT-R3-IL-P7-SH-RFD223679-RFWD6463]] Installed at Westgate (MR-1762).
:[http://www.americanelectriclighting.com/Products/Family.asp?Brand=AEL&Family=Autobahn%20ATB0&View=IESFILESIES File: ATB0_20B_LED_E70_XXXXX_R#.ies]
|Approved as part of project MR-1882 and MR-1883 plans in 2020.
|[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn TopView.JPG|Top View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn BottomView.JPG|Bottom View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn SideView.JPG|Side View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn BackView.JPG|Back View]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn BirdGuard.JPG|Bird Guard]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn DriverCompartment.JPG|Driver Compartment]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn WiringCompartment.JPG|Wiring Compartment]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn WireTerminal.JPG|Wiring Terminal]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn LevelBubble.JPG|Level Bubble]] 
[[media:TRF PQL SL PHOT AmericanElectric Autobahn HousingLatch.JPG|Housing Latch]]
|-

{{PQLNote|10 Year Warranty. CCT = 4,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. 7 Pin twistlock photocell receptacle with shorting cap. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== City Hall, Deanna Rose Farmstead, Fire Training Center, Soccer Complex, Blue Valley Maintenance, St. Andrews, and Tomahawk Ridge Parking Lots ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Classes were approximated to typical streetlight LEDs based on lumen output.
|[https://nlslighting.com/ NLS Lighting]
|'''NV Series'''
'''Class C:'''
 Various Color Finishes, Type 4 Distribution, 5,000 Kelvin: [[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_NLS_NVClassCT45K.pdf|NV1-T4-32L-1-50k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T4-32L-1-50K.IES] 
'''Class D:'''
 Black Finish, Type 4 Distribution, 5,000 Kelvin: Soccer Complex Short Poles 
[[media:TRF_PQL_SL_CAT_NLS_NVClassDT45K.pdf|NV1-T4-16L-1-50k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T4-16L-1-50K.IES]
|Approved as part of PB-2068 project in 2022.
|
|-

{{PQLNote|CCT = 5,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== Deanna Rose Farmstead East Lot, Jack Sanders, and St. Andrews Tennis Courts ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Classes were approximated to typical streetlight LEDs based on lumen output.
|[https://nlslighting.com/ NLS Lighting]
|'''NV Series'''
'''Class C:''' 
Various Color Finishes, Type 2 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: 
[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_NLS_NVClassCT24K.pdf|NV1-T2-32L-1-40k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T2-32L-1-40K.IES] 
Various Color Finishes, Type 5 Distribution, 4,000 Kelvin: 
[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_NLS_NVClassCT54K.pdf|NV1-T5-32L-1-40k]] 
:[https://nlslighting.com/ies-site-area/IES File: NV-1-T5-32L-1-40K.IES] 
|Approved as part of PB-2068 project in 2022.
|
|-

{{PQLNote|CCT = 4,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== Dennis Garrett ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.leotek.com/ Leotek]
|'''GreenCobra GCL1'''
'''Class A:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCLClassAType5LLPC.pdf|GCL1-80J-MV-40K-5-GY-220-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcl/IES File: GCL1-80J-MV-40K-5-XX-220 S.ies]
'''Class B'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCLClassBType4LLPC.pdf|GCL1-80J-MV-40K-4-GY-190-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcl/IES File: GCL1-80J-MV-40K-4-XX-190 S.ies]
'''GreenCobra Midsize GCM1''' 
'''Class C Type 2:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCMClassCType2LLPC.pdf|GCM1-60J-MV-40K-2R-GY-125-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcm/IES File: GCM1-60J-MV-40K-2R-XX-125 S.ies]
'''Class C Type 4:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCMClassCType4LLPC.pdf|GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-GY-125-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcm/IES File: GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-XX-125 S.ies]
'''Class D:'''
 Standard Gray Finish: [[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LeoTek_GCMClassDType4LLPC.pdf|GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-GY-105-PCR7-CR-RWG-BBL-OPWL-LSSP2-LLPC]]
:[https://leotek.com/greencobra/gcm/IES File: GCM1-60J-MV-40K-4-XX-105 S.ies]
|Approved as part of PB-2068 project in 2022.
|
|-

{{PQLNote|CCT = 4,000K. Light distribution optic type = Varies. For design purposes, correct photometric file is listed for each fixture. Download the file from the manufacturer's web page. Needs a photocell on top as there is no cabinet controlling the lights with a photocell. Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== Antioch & I-435 Bridge Decorative Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Bega
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Bega BridgeFixture.pdf|8189P-Blk-120 w/ GE 12870 Fluorescent lamp]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI Detail Bega BridgeFixture.pdf|Shop Drawing]]
|7/21/04
|
|}
{{PQLNote|120 Volt, Black, Fluorescent lamp}}

=== 110th Street & Lamar Roundabout Decorative Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Type III Distribution, LED, Black. 7 Pin twistlock photocell receptacle with shorting cap. Approximately Class B lumen output.
|[https://lithonia.acuitybrands.com/ Acuity Lithonia]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Acuity RSX1.pdf|RSX1]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Acuity RSX1.pdf|3/21/2022]]
|
|-
|These are for replacement of existing heads only. This fixture is no longer approved. Type II Distribution, 400W MH, Black
|[https://www.signify.com/en-us/brands/gardco Gardco Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Gardco GullwingG18.pdf|Gullwing #G18-1-2XL-400-MH-240-BLP]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Gardco GullwingG18.pdf|4/26/02]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shall have specialty label based on LED class, light distribution type, and kelvin on fixture housing. Sticker label shall read: XTY ZK Where X = LED Class (A, B, C, D, E); Y = Light Distribution Type (2, 3, 4, 5); and Z = Kelvin, in thousands (3, 4, 5).
}}

=== 110th & Lamar Roundabout Landscape Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://hydrel.acuitybrands.com/ Hydrel]
|4710A-175M-120-SP-ISSDLA-BZ
|4/26/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|175W MH, Bronze}}

=== Wall Packs ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Installed at: Locations TBD along US-69 ETL Project
|[https://holophane.acuitybrands.com/ Holophane]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Holophane WallConnectLED.pdf|WCNG P4 40K U4W MVOLT ZT 20KV BZSDP LTCH PR7 DF AO SH]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Holophane WallConnectLED.pdf|11/15/2023]]
|
|-
|Installed at: Antioch & I-435 Bicycle Tunnel Indian Creek Bicycle Trail under I-435 These are for replacement of existing Liton heads only.
|[https://liton.com/ Liton]
|[[Media:TR PQL SI CAT Liton WLP32WallPack.pdf|WLP32-120W]]
|[[Media:TR PQL SI MEM Liton WLP32WallPack.pdf|6/27/2023]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Liton WLP32WallPackSide.JPG|Side]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Adjustable Output is approved. For use in tunnels and bridge underpasses. Trail lighting separate from an adjacent roadway will be designed with adjustable output codes to adjust the average maintained illuminance between 1.0 footcandle and 3.7 footcandle and a 3:1 average:minimum uniformity.}}

=== Soffit Lights ===
{| width="1000px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Installed at: Locations TBD along US-69 ETL Project
|[https://holophane.acuitybrands.com/ Holophane]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Holophane SoffitMountLED.pdf|PPSQL2-P20-40K-MVOLT-GL-T5R-SSM-AO PPSQL2-P80-40K-MVOLT-GL-T5R-SSM-AO]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Holophane SoffitMountLED.pdf|9/22/2023]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Adjustable Output is approved. For use in tunnels and bridge underpasses. Trail lighting separate from an adjacent roadway will be designed with adjustable output codes to adjust the average maintained illuminance between 1.0 footcandle and 3.7 footcandle and a 3:1 average:minimum uniformity. Order with Bird Shroud.}}

=== Wall-Mounted Type 2 Junction Box ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Installed at: Locations TBD along US-69 ETL Project
|[https://www.hubbell.com/ Hubbell]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Hubbell Type2WallJB.pdf|RSC121808NKSS]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Hubbell Type2WallJB.pdf|12/13/2023]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|For use in tunnels and bridge underpasses as a wall mounted junction box.}}

=== 133rd & Lamar; 132nd Street & US-69 Overpass; Vineyards and Mills Farm Roundabouts ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|These are for replacement of existing heads only. This fixture is no longer approved.
|[https://www.currentlighting.com/aal Architectural Area Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_ArchitecturalAreaLighting_Promenade.pdf|PRMSH3150HPS-Mogul-240MT-BLK-06A-1814 Sleeve]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_ArchitecturalAreaLighting_Promenade.pdf|8/28/06]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Promenade – Black Mogul base lamp and reflector system Photometric curve PRM3-H2-150HPS.IES}}

=== Matt Ross Community Center Parking Lot Fixture ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Wide Lite/ Genlyte Company
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT WideLite OptraLuminaire.pdf|Optra Area Luminaire]] '''Symmetric Distribution:''' OPP-250-S-QV-SR-SA '''Asymmetric Distribution:''' OPP-250-A-QV-SR-SA
|3/16/06
|
|}
{{PQLNote|250W MH Segmented reflector with vertical lamp Multi-tap ballast Satin Aluminum finish Arm mount to round pole}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Downtown OP ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.sentrylighting.com/ Sentry]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Sentry DecorativeDowntownLuminaire.pdf|SGO-150HPS-240V-MT-III-BK (No Finial)]] 
:[http://www.sentrylighting.com/IESFilesList.aspx?pid=153IES File: SGO-150HPS-III]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Sentry DecorativeDowntownLuminaire.pdf|5/5/03]]
|
|-
|
|[https://scgrp.com/ StressCrete]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_StressCrete_K109.pdf|K109R-P4AR-III-75(SSL)-120:277-K30-30K-3DT-BK, Drawing Number: OP-K109-1]] 
:[https://scgrp.com/ies-files-search/IES File: 0100np4ar3x07530xxe.ies]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_StressCrete_K109.pdf|4/16/2025]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_Profile.JPG|Profile]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_HouseSide.JPG|House side]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_TopDisconnect.JPG|Top Disconnect]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_BottomDisconnect.JPG|Bottom Disconnect]] [[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_StressCrete_K109_Driver.JPG|Driver]]
|}

=== 95th St & Nall Ave; 71st St & Metcalf Ave; 75th St & Metcalf Ave; 87th St & Metcalf Ave ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|KIM Lighting
|KIM Era Lantern 1A/LET26SCH3/400HPS240/** HA33L-TM1/HF2/HAF2 ''This has to be a tenon mount because of the fluted signal pole shaft''
|1/26/09
|
|Single Top Mounted, Single Curved Arm, 400W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution TM!= Tenon Mount Ribbon Arm HF2/ HAF2 = Two Finials ** = Custom Color RAL 6012 (Hunter Green) BL (Black FED-STD-595 #27038)
|}

=== 79th St & Metcalf Ave ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|KIM Lighting
|KIM Era Lantern 1A/LET26SCH3/250HPS240/**/BF HA33L/**/HAF2 ''This does not require a tenon because the pole is not fluted.''
|2/26/13
|
|-
|}
{{PQLNote|Single Top Mounted Single Curved Arm 250W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution HAF2 - Finial on the top arm stud ** - Custom Color RAL 8019 Dark Bronze}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== 159th Street Bridge Over US-69 Highway ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|KIM Lighting
|KIM Era Lantern FM/LEB26SCH3/400HPS240/**/TF Should accommodate 4.5” top pole O.D. w/ 0.188” wall
|12/13/10
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Post Top Flush Mounted Single Curved Arm Top Finial 400W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution ** BL (Black FED-STD-595 #27038)}}

=== 127th Street (Metcalf Ave to Nall Ave) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|This fixture is no longer being manufactured.
|[https://www.currentlighting.com/kimlighting Kim Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_Kim_Era.pdf|KIM Era Lantern 2B/LET26SCH3/250HPS240/**/BF Twin Bracket Arms @ 180 degrees 2B/HA33L/HAF2]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_Kim_Era.pdf|12/13/10]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Twin Top Mounted Single Curved Arm Bottom Finial 250W HPS, 240V, Type III Distribution Ribbon Arm w/ top finial ** BL (Black FED-STD-595 #27038)}}

=== 95th St & Quivira, 95th St & Oak Park East, and 95th St & Nieman Rd Intersections on Joint Use Signal Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|

|KIM Lighting
|KIM Warp 9 HPS – Single w/2” slipfitter for Type A or B arm 1A/WP9LM3/400HPS240/CC/HSF/TB
|8/2/09
|
|}
{{PQLNote|400W HPS, 240V Type III Distribution CC - Custom Color (RAL 6012 Hunter Green)}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Quivira Road: 95th St. to 99th St. ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.currentlighting.com/kimlighting KIM Lighting]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_KimLighting_Warp9HPS.pdf|KIM Warp9 HPS – Twin Std Arms 2B/WP9LM3/400HPS240/CC/TB KIM Warp9 HPS – Single Std Arm 1A/WP9LM3/250HPS240/CC/TB]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_KimLighting_Warp9HPS.pdf|8/2/09]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|250W or 400W HPS, 240V Type III Distribution CC - Custom Color (RAL 6012 Hunter Green)}}

== Lamps ==
=== LED Lamps ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Maintenance Only Downtown Globes Only 
|[https://www.keystonetech.com// Keystone]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Keystone LEDLampInGlobe.pdf|KT-LED100PSHID-EX39-830-D-G4]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Keystone LEDLampInGlobe.pdf|5/22/2024]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Only for installation only in the downtown Sentry Globe (SGO-150HPS-240V-MT-III-BK (No Finial)) fixtures.}}

==Outdoor Electrical Connections==
=== Outdoor Receptacle Covers ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://global.abb/group/en ABB]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover.pdf|CKMUV]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover.pdf|11/1/2021]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover Front.JPG|Front]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover Side.JPG|Side]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT ABB OutdoorReceptacleCover Open.JPG|Open]]
|}
{{PQLNote|NEMA 3R While-In-Use Metal Large enough to fit two electrical extension cords while the cover is fully closed}}

=== Outdoor Receptacles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.hubbell.com/ Hubbell]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Hubbell OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|GFTW20W]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Hubbell OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|11/1/2021]]
|
|-
|
|[https://www.leviton.com/en Leviton]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Leviton OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|GFWT2]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Leviton OutdoorReceptacle.pdf|11/1/2021]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|GFCI Commercial grade Designed for wet and damp locations Tamper-Resistant LED status indicator}}

== Photocell ==
=== System Photocell Receptacle ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.acuitybrands.com/ Acuity]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Acuity Receptacle.pdf|DUR103]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Acuity Receptacle.pdf|11/9/2022]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Acuity Receptacle TopView.JPG|Top View]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Acuity Receptacle SideView.JPG|Side View]] 
[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Acuity Receptacle BottomView.JPG|Bottom View]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Used on external disconnects for city buildings.}}

== Poles ==
=== Special Light Poles for City Parking Lots ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont A42365 Rev3.pdf|Dwg No. A42365 – Revision 3 - 05/31/23]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Valmont A42365 Rev3.pdf|7/27/2020]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Pole height is 31' Mount Pole ID Tag 2'5" up from base of pole to match typical 30' poles. Designed for mounting lots of IT equipment Field drilled 2" max dia holes shall be a minimum of 12" above and 90 degrees from the hand hole Nylon hand hole screws Poles installed at Sanders, Scafe, and Fire Station 41}}

=== Special Light Poles for City Parking Lots w/ 20' Height Restrictions===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_Valmont_A56721.pdf|Dwg No. A56721 - 5/30/2025]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_Valmont_A56721.pdf|7/1/2025]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Pole height is 18' Mount Pole ID Tag 2'5" up from base of pole to match typical poles. Designed for mounting lots of IT equipment Field drilled 2" max dia holes shall be a minimum of 12" above and 90 degrees from the hand hole Nylon hand hole screws Poles approved for Arboretum driveways.}}

=== Special Light Poles for Indian Creek Recreation Center Parking Lot ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/poles-and-posts Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI Valmont 30ftLightPole IndianCrkRecCenter.pdf|R-290845806T4-P9-DBL]]
|3/21/2016
|
|}

=== 110th Street & Roundabout Square Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Gardco Lighting
|#SSS 30-5-11-BLP
|4/26/02
|
|}
{{PQLNote|5” square, straight, steel - Black}}

=== Matt Ross Community Center Parking Lot Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://submittal.info/LoginMenu.asp KW Industries]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT KWIndustries MattRossLightPoles.pdf|RSP18-4.0-11-NA-DM10-BC]]
|3/21/06
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Round Steel Satin Aluminum finish Arm mount option}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Decorative Poles for Downtown OP and 132nd Street Bridge over US-69 Highway ===

{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.hapco.com/ Hapco]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole.pdf|Dwg No. C19043 – 8/3/10]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole.pdf|8/5/10]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole Base.jpg|Base]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole Handhole.jpg|Handhole]] [[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Hapco DecorativeDowntownPole BoltCover.jpg|Bolt Cover]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Nylon hand hole screws}}

=== Special Pole for 159th Street Bridge over US-69 Highway ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|Dwg No. SKKP110211B -1 11/2/11
|11/11/11
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|Dwg No. LH30800 – 10/17/11
|11/1/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shaft Length is 29’-3” or 39’-3” as specified Color: Black FED-STD-595 #27038 or Hunter Green # RAL 6012}}

=== Special Pole for Era Lantern Bolt Pattern 127th St (Metcalf to Nall) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|OP301-LANTERN Dwg No. SKKP110211A-001 –Single Dwg No. SKKP110211A-002 – Twin OP401-LANTERN Dwg No. SKKP012011A-001 –Single Dwg No. SKKP012011A-002 – Twin Pole Cap & Finial – F0004
|11/11/11
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|OP301-LANTERN OP401-LANTERN
|11/2/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shaft Length is 29’-3” or 39’-3” as specified Pole Cap & Finial Color: Black FED-STD-595 #27038 or Hunter Green # RAL 6012}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Special Pole for Warp9 Bolt Pattern Quivira Rd (99th to 95th) ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Hapco
|OP301-WARP Dwg No. SKKP110211C-001 – Single Dwg No. SKKP110211C-002 – Twin OP401-WARP Dwg No SKKP013111A-001 – Single Dwg No SKKP013111A-002 – Twin
|11/11/11
|
|-
|
|Valmont
|OP301-WARP OP401-WARP
|11/2/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Shaft Length is 29’-3” or 39’-3” as specified Color: Black FED-STD-595 #27038 or Hunter Green # RAL 6012}}

== Screw-In Foundations==
=== Screw-In Foundations for Downtown OP Pole ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|AB Chance
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT ABChance DecorativeDowntownScrewInFoundation.pdf|T112-03631701 Dwg No. SA11203631701 Rev A]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM ABChance DecorativeDowntownScrewInFoundation.pdf|8/5/10]]
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Used with Hapco Decorative Pole}}

= Traffic Signal Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-TS-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Traffic Signals form.]]}}
== Decorative Signal Poles ==
=== Mast Arm Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|95th St & Nall Ave
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPole 95thandNall.pdf|Pole: Tapered, 16-Sharp Fluted w/ 2.875” OD x 4” L Tenon Mast Arm: Smooth Round Tapered Pole Cap: Standard]]
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306-GG
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPole VisionMetcalf.pdf|Pole: Tapered, 16-Sharp Fluted w/ 2.875” OD x 4” L Tenon Mast Arm: Smooth Round Tapered Pole Cap: Metro Series]]
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306-B
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|Valmont
|Pole: Tapered, 16-Sharp Fluted w/ 2.875” OD x 4” L Tenon Mast Arm: Smooth Round Tapered Pole Cap: Metro Series
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306 / RAL 8019 Medium Bronze
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPole OakParkMall.pdf|Standard pole and mast arm Pole Cap: Spear Series]]
|
|
|Finish/Color: F-306-GG
|}
{{PQLNote|Color Codes: GG = RAL 6012 OP Green B = Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black}}

{{PQLReturn}}

=== Pedestal Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|83rd St & Metcalf Ave
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont PedestalPole 83rd&Metcalf.pdf|Pole: Straight, Round, Smooth Pole Cap: Metro Series]]
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black
|
|-
|95th St & Nall Ave
|[https://valmont.com/ Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont PedestalPole 95th&Nall.pdf|Pole: Straight, 16-Flat Fluted]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|Valmont
|Pole: Straight, 16-Flat Fluted Pole Cap: Metro Series
|
|
|Finish/Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|Valmont
|Pole: Straight, 16-Flat Fluted Pole Cap: Metro Series
|
|
|Color: RAL 8019 Medium Bronze Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|Valmont
|4 ½” dia straight pole Pole Cap: Spear Series
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|}
{{PQLNote|Color Codes: GG = RAL 6012 OP Green B = Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Round and Fluted Poles are Spun Aluminum}}

=== Decorative Bases for Mast Arm Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleContourBase.pdf|Contour Series CN20AC, CN27AC & CN34AC]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|95th St & Nall Ave
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleWashingtonBase.pdf|Washington Series WA25AB, WA30AB & WA36AB]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleSterlingBase.pdf|Sterling Series |ST24AB, ST25AB & ST31AB]]
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleSterlingBase.pdf|Sterling Series |ST24AB, ST25AB & ST31AB]]
|
|
|Color: RAL 8019 Medium Bronze Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive) 83rd St, 81st St HAWK/PHB
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/base-covers Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont MastArmPoleHuntingtonBase.pdf|Huntington Series]] 
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Decorative Bases for Pedestrian Poles ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Comments'''
|-
|Oak Park Mall Signals along 95th St and Quivira; 95th & Nieman
|Valmont
|Contour Series CN18AC
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|95th & Nall
|Valmont
|Washington Series WA18AB
|
|
|Color: RAL 6012 OP Green Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Excluding Downtown Form Based Code Extents
|Valmont
|Sterling Series ST18AB
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive)
|Valmont
|Sterling Series ST18AB
|
|
|Color: RAL 8019 Medium Bronze Finish: Powder Coat
|-
|Metcalf Corridor, Within Downtown Form Based Code Extents (Inclusive) 83rd St, 81st St HAWK/PHB
|[https://www.valmontstructures.com/products-solutions/product-catalog/us/poles-and-posts Valmont]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Valmont PedestalPoleHuntingtonBase.pdf|Huntington Series]] 
|
|
|Color: Fed-Std-595 #27038 Black Finish: Powder Coat Round, Non-tapered There are non-public model numbers including increased pole wall thicknesses. Have manufacturer provide model number based on loading.
|}
{{PQLNote|Recommend using Valmont's integrated decorative base and pole rather than trying to add a decorative base over a standard pedestal pole. This improves ease of access to wires in base.}}

== Pedestrian Pushbutton Pole ==
=== Pedestrian Pushbutton Pole and Foundation ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Maintenance Only
|AB Chance
|Screw-in-Foundation: T1121363 / Dwg No. SA1121363 Ped Button Post: T1121364 / Dwg No. SA1121364
|10/21/11
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Hot dip galvanized finished smooth.}}
{{PQLReturn}}

=== Pole Base Cover ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|Lithonia
|RSS FBC 3-5IN RND JMA 1751 DNA
|1/7/13
|
|}
{{PQLNote|ABS Plastic. Square base with 3.5” diameter hole. Two-piece cover – natural aluminum}}
 

==Solar Traffic Signal Equipment==
=== Batteries ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.concordebattery.com/ Concorde Battery Corp] [https://www.sunxtender.com/ Sun Xtender]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Concorde Batteries.pdf| Sun Xtender Series]]
|3/25/22
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Size depends on the specific job requirements}}

=== Confimirmation Light ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://traffic.tomar.com/ Tomar Electronics]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Tomar ConfirmationLight.pdf|801 Mini I Strobe]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Control Unit ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.solar-traffic-controls.com/ Solar Traffic Controls]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT SolarTrafficControl DigitalPowerController.pdf|DPC-2000]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== DC LED Kits ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.solar-traffic-controls.com/ Solar Traffic Controls]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT SolarTrafficControl DCLEDKit.pdf|12" Amber: 8412A2385]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Solar Cabinet Enclosure ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[http://www.solar-traffic-controls.com/ Solar Traffic Controls]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT SolarTrafficControls CabinetEnclsoure.pdf|2B Enclosure]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Solar Panel ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.amerescosolar.com/ Ameresco Solar]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Ameresco SolarPanel.pdf|60W Solar Panel: Model- 60J]]
|3/25/22
|
|}
{{PQLNote|Wattage and Size depends on the specific job requirements}}

=== Smart Relay ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://us.idec.com/ IDEC Corp]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT IDEC SmartRelay.pdf|xxxxx]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

=== Strobeswitch ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://traffic.tomar.com/ Tomar Electronics]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Tomar StrobeswitchDetector.pdf|1790-1014]]
|3/25/22
|
|}

= Biking Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SGN-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Permanent Signing form.]]}}
== Bike Racks ==
=== Standard Racks ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.dero.com// Dero]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI CAT Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.pdf|Inverted-U Hoop Rack Heavy Duty]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI MEM Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.pdf|11/13/2024]]
|[[Media:TRF PQL SI PHOT Dero InvertedUHeavyDuty.JPG|Rack]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Galvanized only.}}
=== Downtown OP ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|
|[https://www.landscapeforms.com/ LandscapeForms]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_LandscapeForms_Loop.pdf|Loop Bike Rack]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_LandscapeForms_Loop.pdf|1/14/2026]]
|[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_LandscapeForms_Loop_Front.jpg|Front]] 
[[Media:TRF_PQL_SI_PHOT_LandscapeForms_Loop_SideView.jpg|Side]]
|}
{{PQLNote|Forest or Matte Black.}}

= EV Charging Speciality Items =
{{Note|All materials listed on this Specialty Items page are not standard and shall require variance or special permission by the City to incorporate into projects. The following items should be listed on the [[Media:TRF-PQL-SL-CSF.docx|Contractor Submittal for Streetlighting form.]]}}
== Electrical Meter Control Center ==
=== Electrical Meter Control Center ===
{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Notes'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Manufacturer'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Catalog Number'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Approval Date'''
| align="center" style="background:#f0f0f0;"|'''Photos'''
|-
|Approved for use at: 
Scheels Soccer Complex 
Deanna Rose Children's Farmstead
|[http://www.milbankmfg.com/ Milbank]
|[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_CAT_Milbank_EV400AControlCenter.pdf|CP3B54C1ERAOSP1]]
|[[media:TRF_PQL_SI_MEM_Milbank_EV400AControlCenter.pdf|9/20/2022]]
|
|-
{{PQLNote|None.}}

Approved Materials - Streetlighting

2026-02-17T20:52:30Z

Brian Geiger: /* Splice Kits in Junction or Service Boxes */

Approved Materials - Streetlighting

2026-02-17T20:47:58Z

Brian Geiger: /* Splice Kits in Junction or Service Boxes */ Clarified which companies bought out which companies.

Pavement Marking Design Manual

2026-02-09T20:21:09Z

Brian Geiger: /* Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage */ Added reference to 2023 MUTCD Section 9E.13.05

== General Purpose of the Design Manual ==
'''Last Revised July 2024''' Pavement Marking Design Manual has been written to serve as a general guideline when designing pavement markings for the City of Overland Park, Kansas. Although there are specific design requirements, the guidelines contained herein should not be a substitute for proper engineering design and judgment based on specific situations. All pavement markings shall comply with the latest adopted edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). The purpose of this Pavement Marking Design Manual is to aid consultants as well as City of Overland Park staff to be consistent in the practice of designing pavement marking plans. It provides an overview of what tasks are expected to be included in the scope of the design; what information should be included on the plan sheets; what kind of backup design information is required; and what is expected for the final deliverable product. Any questions regarding this manual may be directed to Brian Geiger, Supervisory Traffic Engineer Engineer at the City of Overland Park, Kansas at (913) 895-6020 or by email at Brian.Geiger@opkansas.org.

=== Purpose of Pavement Marking: ===
Pavement marking provides guidance and information to the roadway user as well as supplement other traffic control devices such as signs, traffic signals and other markings. Pavement markings can convey regulations, guidance, or warnings.

Wherever applicable, this design manual should be used in conjunction with the latest adopted edition of the [https://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno_11th_Edition.htmManual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)] by the Federal Highway Administration. The current editions of the [https://www.opkansas.org/city-services/building-construction/civil-engineering/construction-standards/ Design and Construction Standards, Volume 2 Construction Specifications (latest edition)], the latest edition of the [https://drive.google.com/file/d/1bIGwfekpRZm8O7R4sHaKTiqxFKb9Wlev/view Pavement Marking Standard Details] and the [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Approved_Materials Approved Materials List], hereafter referred to as “City Standards” should be followed during the design of all pavement marking plans.

== Public or Private Ownership and Maintenance ==
Different policies apply to pavement marking based on the final ownership and maintenance. The two types of pavement markings are 1) those that are installed in the public right-of-way that will be owned and maintained by the City of Overland Park and 2) privately owned pavement markings that are installed on private property that will not be maintained by the City of Overland Park. Although each of the categories will be discussed, the design guidelines contained herein only apply to pavement markings that are within the public right-of-way or other City easements that are owned and maintained by the City of Overland Park.

=== City-Owned and Maintained Pavement Markings ===
All City-owned and maintained pavement markings shall be designed in accordance with the design criteria listed herein and use all pre-approved materials from the City’s [https://ppm.opkansas.org/wiki/index.php/Approved_Materials Approved Materials List], which is available at City Hall or from the City’s web page. All pavement markings that are being designed in conjunction with the development of any public street or any developments that require modification of any pavement marking within the public right-of-way or other City easements by private consultants working for a developer are required to meet City Standards.

=== Privately Owned and Maintained Pavement Markings ===
A private street as defined, in [http://online.encodeplus.com/regs/overlandpark-ks-gbp/doc-viewer.aspx#secid-199 City Resolution 4065], means a right-of-way which affords principal access to property abutting thereon, which right-of-way is owned, controlled and maintained by persons other than the public, which is named in accordance with the street name designated system on the City map and signed in accordance with Chapter 13.10 of the Overland Park Municipal Code. It is generally owned and maintained by a homes or business association or private citizens. The private streets are designated by a “Private Street” sign at the point of entry and typically have street name signs.

All pavement markings on private property are not required to be constructed using City approved materials. However, pavement markings on the approaches of a private street or drive that tie into City streets shall be designed to conform to these guidelines and the MUTCD. The City may make requests to the owners to maintain private pavement markings from time to time in order to improve visibility, reduce driver confusion, or to coordinate with lane use changes that would affect the traveling public in conjunction with the lane use on adjacent public roadways.

== Functional Roadway Classifications ==
The following pavement marking design criteria will be used for all thoroughfare roadways, super collector roadways, collector roadways and residential roadways as identified on the latest edition of the City of Overland Park [https://drive.google.com/file/d/1VcyyryorZldaO5RUxDfgfW1GhqFVs2Rg/view “Official Street Map”] available from the Planning and Development Services Department.

=== Thoroughfare Roadway ===
The thoroughfare roadway classification includes all thoroughfare roadways whether divided or undivided; whether improved or unimproved; and whether two-lane, four-lane or six-lane excluding auxiliary left and right turn lanes; regardless of the volume of traffic.

=== Collector Roadway ===
The collector roadway classification includes all super-collector and collector roadways regardless of the number of lanes; whether improved or unimproved; regardless of the volume of traffic.

=== Residential Roadway ===
The residential roadway classification includes all local residential and cul-de-sac roadways; whether improved or unimproved; regardless of the volume of traffic.

== Colors of Markings ==
Markings shall be either white or yellow and conform to the standard highway colors.

=== White Pavement Markings ===
White markings, when used for longitudinal lines shall delineate the separation of traffic flows in the same direction or the right-hand edge of the roadway. White markings shall also be used for crosswalk lines, stop lines and pavement marking symbols, with the exception of the symbol of accessibility and interstate route shields, etc.

=== Yellow Pavement Markings ===
Yellow markings, when used for longitudinal lines shall delineate the separation of traffic traveling in opposite directions; the left-hand edge of the roadway or divided street or one-way streets; and the separation of two-way left turn lanes.

== Function, Widths and Classifications of Pavement Markings ==
There are several different types of pavement markings applicable to specific situations. The City of Overland Park has specific design considerations that should be reviewed for each type of pavement marking.

=== Function ===
*A double line indicates maximum or special restrictions and does not allow any crossing of the line.
*A single solid line discourages crossing.
*A broken line indicates a permissive condition
*A dotted line provides guidance or warning of a downstream change in lane function.

=== Widths and Patterns ===
*A normal width line is 4”.
*A wide line is twice the width of a normal line, or 8”.
*A double line consists of two parallel lines separated by a 4” space (measured from edge of line to edge of line).
*A broken line consists of a normal line segment separated by gaps.
*A dotted line is a noticeably shorter line segment separated by shorter gaps than used for a broken line. The width of a dotted line extension shall be the same width of the line it extends.

=== Classification of Markings ===
Markings are either classified as longitudinal, transverse, or symbols.

==== Longitudinal Markings ====
These are lines that generally run parallel to the direction of traffic and include:
#Solid double centerlines
#Broken centerlines
#Solid and broken centerlines
#Broken lane lines
#Solid lane lines
#Broken lane extension lines
#Edge lines
#Solid lane lines
#Lane drop lines
#Bicycle lane lines, etc.

==== Transverse Markings ====
These are lines that generally run perpendicular to or at an angle to the direction of traffic and include:
#Diagonal crosshatch lines
#Chevrons
#Stop lines
#Crosswalk lines
#Roundabout extension edge lines
#Perpendicular or angled parking space lines, etc.

==== Symbol Markings ====
Symbol markings are all other markings that are not considered “lines” but consist of geometric shapes or words. They include:
#Yield lines
#Turn arrows, thru arrows, or combination arrows
#Merge arrows
#Railroad crossing markings
#ONLY markings
#Bicycle lane symbols
#Bicycle lane arrows
#Sharrow markings
#International symbol of accessibility, etc.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#General Purpose of the Design Manual|'''General Purpose''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=General Purpose of the Design Manual]]
|}
----

== Yellow Centerline Markings ==
Yellow centerline markings are used to delineate the separation of traffic lanes that have opposite directions of travel. They are used on thoroughfare roadways, collector roadways, and super collector roadways regardless of the posted speed. Centerline markings are not installed on residential roadways except in specific situations in advance of intersections as addressed below.

The yellow centerline markings, whether broken or solid double lines, should be continuous through residential drive entrances and alleys but should break at intersections with public streets and private streets as defined above. Breaks in the centerline should not be made at single family or multi-family drive entrances. They should also not be broken at intersections with commercial drive entrances unless the main roadway has left or right turn lanes accessing the site or the intersection with the commercial drive is controlled by a traffic signal. Where a horseshoe cds intersects and creates a T-intersection, break the yellow centerline markings at the tangent points and place a dash at the median. If the horseshoe cds is a 4-way intersection, break the yellow centerline markings at the tangent points and do not place a dash at the median.

At breaks in the centerline, the beginning and end of the centerline should be evaluated based on the left turn movement of the design vehicle from the side street. The beginning or end of the line should be at the point where the design vehicle does not drive over the line while making a left turn. This should be determined using turning movement templates for the specific design vehicle.

=== Centerlines on Residential Streets ===
Centerlines are not typically installed on residential streets. However, the following condition would warrant centerline markings near intersections with other streets:
# When a residential street has more than one approach lane to an intersection that is marked with solid white lane markings, a double yellow centerline should be installed in advance of the stop line for a minimum of 50’ or for the length of the solid white lane markings.

=== Centerlines on Collector Streets ===
All two-lane collector streets, regardless of width, shall be striped with a centerline consisting of a 4” wide broken yellow line with a 6’ stripe and an 18’ gap (3:1 ratio). Collector streets that consist of more than two lanes shall be striped with a 4" solid double yellow centerline.

See the section on [[#Transitions from Normal Centerlines|Transitions from Normal Centerlines]] below for treatment of centerlines at intersections.

=== Centerlines on Apartment Streets ===
Apartment streets that are 36’ wide (measured from back of curb to back of curb), that have a posted speed limit of 30 mph, shall have a marked centerline consisting of a 4” wide broken yellow line with a 6’ stripe and an 18’ gap (3:1 ratio).

See the section on [[#Transitions from Normal Centerlines|Transitions from Normal Centerlines]] below for treatment of centerlines at intersections.

=== Centerlines on Commercial and Industrial Streets ===
Commercial streets or industrial streets may range in width from 36’ to 52’ (measured from back of curb to back of curb) to accommodate left or right turn lanes or additional through lanes for added vehicle capacity. Centerlines should consist of 4” wide broken yellow lines with a 6’ stripe and an 18’ gap (3:1 ratio) or 4” solid double yellow lines depending on the number of lanes. Broken yellow centerlines would be used where there are no auxiliary lanes such as right or left turn lanes. Double yellow centerlines should be used at multi-lane cross-sections and may terminate at an intersection with a painted median. Depending on the number of access points, a two-way left turn lane may be provided as approved by the City Engineer. [[#Painted Medians|Painted medians]] and [[#Two-way Left Turn Lanes (TWLTL)|Two-way left turn lanes]] are discussed below.

See the section on [[#Transitions from Normal Centerlines|Transitions from Normal Centerlines]] below for treatment of centerlines at intersections.

=== Centerlines on Super-Collector Roadways ===
Super-collector roadways range from two undivided through lanes that are 36’ wide (back of curb to back of curb), to divided roadways with four through lanes. Centerline pavement markings should either be 4” wide broken yellow line with a 6’ stripe and an 18’ gap (3:1 ratio) or 4” solid double yellow lines depending on the number of lanes. Broken yellow centerlines would be used on two-lane super-collector streets where there are no auxiliary lanes such as right or left turn lanes, while double yellow centerlines should be used at multi-lane cross-sections. Proper transitions between broken centerlines and painted or raised medians should be provided as discussed in [[#Transitions from Normal Centerlines|Transitions from Normal Centerlines]] below. Depending on the number of access points, a two-way left turn lane may be provided as approved by the City Engineer. [[#Two-way Left Turn Lanes (TWLTL)|Two-way left turn lanes]] are discussed below.

=== Centerlines on Thoroughfare Roadways ===
The following guidelines are established for centerline pavement markings on thoroughfare roadways, consisting of divided or undivided roadways and improved or unimproved roadways.
Undivided thoroughfare roadways fall into two categories: 1) unimproved and 2) improved.

Unimproved thoroughfares have two through lanes of traffic that have not been widened. These primarily exist in the southern portions of the City that have been taken over from the County through annexation and where development has not fully occurred to require the roadway to be widened due to increased traffic volumes.

Improved thoroughfares have been widened to provide for at least two lanes of through traffic with shoulders or four to six lanes of through traffic with curb and gutter sections. The two-lane, four-lane or six-lane thoroughfares may be divided or undivided.

==== Centerlines on Divided Thoroughfare Roadways ====
Divided thoroughfare roadways that have a continuous median, except for breaks at approved intersections, do not require centerline pavement markings if the center median consists of raised curbs. When the center median is depressed, the centerline pavement marking should consist of a single 4” solid yellow edge line on each side of the depressed median. The yellow edge line should be installed 4” from the edge of the driving surface to the closest edge of the line.

Thoroughfares with intermittent raised medians shall have a 4” solid double yellow centerline in those sections that do not have a center median. Any time a raised median section is provided, centerline markings are not required. Proper transitions between broken centerlines and painted or raised medians should be provided as discussed in [[#Transitions from Normal Centerlines|Transitions from Normal Centerlines]] below.

==== Centerlines on Undivided, Improved Thoroughfare Roadways ====
Undivided, improved thoroughfare roadways should consist of 4” solid double yellow centerlines. Depending on the number of access points, a two-way left turn lane may be provided as approved by the City Engineer. [[#Two-way Left Turn Lanes (TWLTL)|Two-way left turn lanes]] are discussed below.

==== Centerlines on Undivided, Unimproved Thoroughfare Roadways ====
Undivided, unimproved thoroughfare roadways should always consist of 4” solid double yellow centerlines. Passing is prohibited on these types of roadways.

=== Transitions from Normal Centerlines ===
Transitions often occur from the normally used centerline approaching intersections or raised medians. This can occur with either broken yellow centerlines or double yellow centerlines. The following discussion provides guidance in the design in various applications.

==== Prior to Raised Medians ====
When transitioning from a broken yellow centerline to a raised median, the raised median should be preceded by a double yellow centerline a minimum of 100’ in length unless there is some engineering reason that limits it to less than 100’, e.g. another intersection. This length should be increased if it places the beginning of the double yellow centerline near the blind side of a crest vertical curve.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Centerline Transition at Raised Median.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Centerline Transition at Raised Median
|}

When transitioning from a double yellow centerline to a raised median, the double yellow line should end near the raised nose of the median in order to provide a smooth transition directing traffic away from the median. When the median width, at the widest part, is greater than 6' (measured from the back of curbs), the double yellow centerline should be marked for approaching as well as for departing vehicles.

When the median width, at the widest part, is less than 6' (measured from the back of curbs), the double yellow centerline should be marked for approaching traffic only.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Centerline Transition for Various Median Widths.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Centerline Transition at Raised Median Based on Width
|}

==== Prior to Painted Medians ====
When transitioning from a broken yellow centerline to a painted median, the painted median should be preceded by a double yellow centerline a minimum of 100’ in length unless there is some engineering reason that limits it to less than 100’, e.g. another intersection. This length should be increased if it places the beginning of the double yellow centerline near the blind side of a crest vertical curve.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Painted Medians with Centerline Transition.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Centerline Transition at Painted Median
|}

==== Prior to Stop Controlled Intersections ====
A broken yellow centerline should transition to a double yellow centerline a minimum of 100’ prior to the stop line (or designated stopping point in the absence of a stop line) at an intersection controlled by a stop sign.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Centerline Transition at Intersections.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken Centerline Transition at Stop Controlled Intersection
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Collector-Collector Intersection.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Four-Way Stop at Collector-Collector Intersection
|}

==== Special Situations at Intersections ====
Occasionally, a collector street will turn into a residential street at a two-way stop controlled intersection with another through street segment. The minor collector street leg, which is controlled by a stop sign, will be striped with a broken yellow centerline that transitions to a double yellow centerline 100’ in advance of the stop line. The residential street leg, which is controlled by a stop sign, will not require either a stop line or a centerline.
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Special Situations at Intersectioins.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Special Situations at Intersections
|}

==== Special Situations at Midblock Crosswalks ====
At midblock crosswalks, across roadways with a marked centerline, the broken yellow centerline should transition to a double yellow centerline in advance of the midblock crosswalk for a distance of approximately 50'. A 3' minimum gap should be provided between the double yellow centerline and the marked crosswalk.
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Centerline Transition at midblock crosswalk.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Special Situations at Midblock Crosswalks
|}

=== Painted Medians ===
Painted medians should be used on undivided roadways where it is desirable to provide left turn lanes or separate traffic traveling in opposite directions. For left turn lanes, it is preferable to provide a complete approach taper and a fully shadowed bay taper whenever possible and pavement width permits.

Painted medians also occur in advance of a raised median that has been installed for access control near an intersection approach or in advance of a splitter island of a roundabout.
Painted medians should consist of 4” solid double yellow lines with 12” yellow diagonal crosshatch lines. See [[#Yellow Diagonal Crosshatch Markings|Yellow Diagonal Crosshatch Lines]] for more information.

=== Yellow Solid and Broken Lane Lines ===
==== No-Passing Zone Lines ====
Yellow solid and broken lane lines can be used where crossing the center line markings for passing is permitted for the traffic traveling adjacent to the broken line, but is prohibited for traffic traveling adjacent to the solid line. This centerline marking is typically not used in the City of Overland Park. It requires a passing sight distance study in order to determine where passing is permitted.

==== Two-way Left Turn Lanes (TWLTL) ====
Two-way left turn lanes (TWLTL) should consist of 4” solid yellow lines on each side of the travel lane with six foot long 4” broken yellow lines inset inside of the solid yellow lines with 18’ long gaps. The beginning and end of the broken yellow lines should line up with any adjacent broken white lane lines.

The TWLTL should terminate into a left turn lane. The TWLTL lane markings should not extend to intersections. There should be a 42’ long gap between the end of the broken and solid yellow line and the beginning of the 4” solid white lane line for the left turn storage.
Two sets of white left turn arrows should be placed 25’ apart measured from the tails of both arrows. The spacing of the arrow sets is dependent on the overall length of the TWLTL. Generally, one set is installed 30’ from the beginning, one set 30’ from the end and one set at approximately the midpoint, but the distance between sets of arrows should not exceed 160’.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Two-way Left Turn Lanes.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Two-way Left Turn Lanes
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Yellow Centerline Markings|'''Yellow Centerline Markings''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Yellow Centerline Markings]]
|}
----

== Broken White Lane Lines ==
Broken white lane line markings should be used on all roadways with two or more adjacent traffic lanes that have the same direction of travel. They shall consist of a 4” wide broken white line with a 6’ stripe and an 18’ gap (3:1 ratio).

The beginning point of broken white lane lines between adjacent lanes of travel on a multi-lane street should line up with each other.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Line Up Adjacent Broken White Lane Lines.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Alignment of Adjacent Broken White Lane Lines
|}

Ideally, the beginning of a broken white lane line should also line up with the beginning of any adjacent solid white lane line delineating the storage length for a right or left turn lane. However, broken white lane lines should not extend past the stop line.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Line Up Broken White with Solid White.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Alignment of Broken White Lane Line with Solid White Turn Lane Line
|}

Broken white lane lines should break on each side of a four-legged intersection, comprised of public or private streets, allowing side street traffic to cross without running over the lines. Broken white lane lines should extend through intersections with private and commercial driveways. However, if the main street has a left turn lane into the commercial drive of the development, lane lines should not be marked through the intersection. It would be treated like a standard intersection with public streets.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Gaps in Broken Lane Lines at Intersections.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Gaps in Broken White Lane Lines at Intersections
|}

At tee intersections, the broken white lane lines will continue through the intersection at the top of the tee, but will not extend through the intersection with the lanes closest to the intersecting side street.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Broken White Lane Lines|'''Broken White Lane Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Broken White Lane Lines]]
|}
----

== Broken White Lane Extension Lines ==
Broken white lane extension lines are used for guiding the traveling public through more complex roadway lane configurations such as:
# Offset through lanes
# Skewed intersections
# Curved roadways
# Where multiple turn lanes are present
# At interchanges where there are extended left turn lanes on the thoroughfare street
# Roundabout circulating lanes
# Where accident history indicates a presence of sideswipe type crashes

The broken white extension line shall be 4” wide and 2’ long with a 4’ gap.

=== Offset Through Lanes ===
Depending on the roadway classification and the posted speed, offset through lanes can create situations where white lane extension lines would be beneficial to delineate the travel path of vehicles. Offsets through intersections on a thoroughfare are generally more of a concern than offset through lanes on a collector roadway or a local street. The following gives some guidance on when to install lane extension lines for offset through lanes, but the designer in conjunction with City staff, should use engineering judgment to make the final determination whether to use them or not. Having multiple lines crossing through an intersection can be just as confusing as not having any. Discretion should be used keeping in mind the long term aspects of maintenance, since pavement markings in an intersection are worn down frequently by traveling vehicles.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Lines at Intersections.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Lines at Intersections
|}

When the through traffic lanes on a thoroughfare across an intersection are offset at least one fourth of the width of the lane, white lane extension lines should be considered, especially if the presence of a crest vertical curve near the center of the intersection obstructs the view of the receiving lanes on the opposite side of the intersection. When the offset is one half or more of the width of the lane, the extension lines shall be installed.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Line through Intersections.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Lines Through Intersections
|}

=== Skewed Intersections ===
At skewed intersections, where there is a possibility for the opposing turning traffic to overlap paths, white lane extension lines should be considered to delineate the paths regardless of the number of turn lanes or the number of receiving through lanes.

=== Curved Roadways ===
Where a vehicle, following a curving curb line, could drift into a left turn or right turn lane, a white extension line should be considered to delineate the path of the vehicle.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Line on Curved Roadway.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Lines on Curved Roadway
|}

=== Multiple Left or Right Turn Lanes ===
Broken white lane extension lines are not typically used where the number of turn lanes on the side street is equivalent to the number of receiving through lanes on the major street. For example if two left turn lanes are turning into two through lanes.

They shall be used within an intersection where there are two left turn or two right turn lanes but three or more receiving through lanes. They shall also be used anywhere the number of left turning lanes or right turning lanes is greater than two, regardless of the number of through lanes available for receiving lanes. For example, if a side street has two exclusive left turn lanes and one shared through/left turn lane, the white extension lines shall be installed directing traffic into their respective lanes, even if there are only three through lanes on the main street.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Line at Multiple Turn Lanes.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Line at Multiple Turn Lanes
|}

=== At Interchanges with Extended Left Turn Lanes on the Thoroughfare ===
There are occasions, primarily at interchanges with thoroughfare streets, where there are only two through lanes but the left turn lanes extend upstream of the intersection to increase the storage length. Even though there are only single or dual left turn lanes coming off the ramp and only two receiving through lanes, the broken white lane extension lines should be installed for the ramp traffic so vehicles do not get trapped into the left turn lanes on the thoroughfare.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Line at Interchanges with Extended Left Turn Lanes.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Line at Interchanges with Extended Left Turn Lanes
|}

=== Roundabout Circulating Lanes ===
Lane extension lines should be installed in the circulating lanes at multi-lane roundabouts opposite the points where lanes from the intersecting roadways enter the roundabout. They should extend toward the exit lanes to direct circulating traffic that is exiting the roundabout to the correct receiving lanes.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Extension Line at Roundabouts.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Broken White Lane Extension Line at Roundabouts
|}

=== Where Accident Crash History Shows a Need ===
Lane extension lines should be installed where there is a history of side swipe crashes that could be alleviated by providing more guidance to the driver.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Broken White Lane Extension Lines|'''Broken White Lane Extension Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Broken White Lane Extension Lines]]
|}
----

== Wide Dotted Line ==
A wide dotted white line marking shall be used as the lane line to separate a through lane that continues beyond the intersection from an adjacent lane that becomes a mandatory turn lane or across the lane(s) entering a roundabout as follows:

=== Wide Dotted Lane Drop Line ===
Wide dotted lane drop lines are used for lane drops (trap lanes) where an otherwise through traffic lane turns into a mandatory left turn or right turn lane. Where used, the wide dotted lane drop line shall be 8” wide with a 3’ line segment and a 9’ gap. The wide dotted lane drop line will be accompanied by a 8” wide white solid lane line beginning at the downstream end of the white dotted lane drop line to the stop bar (See [[#White Solid Wide Lane Lines|White Solid Wide Lane Lines]]). The length of the dotted lane drop shall be as follows:
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Trap Lane Markings.JPG|1000px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Typical Wide Dotted Lane Drop Lines
|}

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Trap Lane Markings - No restrictions.JPG|1000px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|White Dotted Lane Drop Lines with No Restrictions
|}

==== Length Based on Posted Speed Limit ====
For posted speed limits > 45 mph, the length of the wide dotted lane line shall be based on the merge length equation: L = W x S, where W is the width of the lane and S is the posted speed limit, (mph). For posted speed limits < 45 mph, the length of the wide dotted lane line shall be based on the merge length equation L = (W x ''S''2)/60. Exceptions to this rule are as follows:

==== Spacing Considerations for Closely Spaced Intersections ====
If the calculated length of the wide dotted lane drop line would extend it into or through an upstream four-legged intersection (whether controlled or uncontrolled), it should begin immediately past the upstream intersection instead of using the full calculated length. The lane drop line should begin no closer to the intersection than the most upstream regulatory or warning sign associated with the lane drop. An R3-7 (R or L) sign should be installed approximately 30’ from the curb return at the intersection. An additional R3-7 (R or L) should be installed at the beginning of the 8" solid wide lane line.

The calculated length of the wide dotted lane drop line can extend through a three-legged T-intersection as long as the major street that has the trap lane is divided with a median. In that case, an R3-7R sign will be installed at the beginning of the wide dotted lane drop line with a street name sign plaque mounted underneath to designate where the lane drops.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Trap Lane thru Tee Intersection.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Wide Dotted Lane Drop Lines Thru T-Intersection
|}

In areas where there is not enough room to achieve the full length without extending through an intersection, a balance should be maintained between the lane drop line and the required storage bay length, based on the observed traffic volumes.

=== Wide Dotted Lines at Roundabouts ===
White wide dotted lines should be used across the lane(s) entering a roundabout to mark an extension of the circulatory roadway edge line. They should extend from the splitter island to the exit of the roundabout and be a three foot long, 12” wide line with a three foot gap.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Wide Dotted Roundabout Lines.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Wide Dotted Roundabout Line
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Wide Dotted Line|'''Wide Dotted Line''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Wide Dotted Line]]
|}
----

== Solid White Lane Lines ==
Solid white lane lines are used where drivers are discouraged from changing lanes. The lane line markings shall consist of a 4” wide solid white line. Solid white lane lines are typically used at intersections to separate a through lane from a mandatory left or right turn lane.
=== Single Left or Right Turn Lanes ===
The solid white lane line should extend from the stop line upstream to where the full width of the turn lane begins.
=== Dual Left or Right Turn Lanes ===
In the case of dual left or right turn lanes, the inside line should begin at the point of tangency with the median curb, where the full width of the inside lane is available. The outside line should be extended farther upstream to where the lane opening, measured perpendicular from the median curb to the start of the line is 18’, as shown below.
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Solid White Lane Lines.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Solid White Lane Lines for Dual Left Turn Lanes
|}

=== Continuous Right Turn Lane Exceptions ===
Where a right turn lane at an intersection would have one or more driveway entrances within the storage bay, the preferred approach is to break the solid white lane line for the driveway and treat them as separate turn lanes. An R3-7(R) sign should be installed at the driveway.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Solid Lane Line for Continuous Right Turn Lanes.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Solid White Lane Lines for Continuous Right Turn Lanes
|}

If a driveway is located near a signalized intersection such that the distance between the driveway and the intersection does not provide enough storage length, then the solid lane line should be continued through the driveway.

If a driveway occurs at a median break, the lane line should not be carried through the intersection. In the example below, the lane line was continued through the first driveway because the right turn lane was just beginning and not enough storage length was available for the driveway. The R3-7(R) sign was removed for the driveway.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Solid Lane Line Exception for Continuous Right Turn Lanes.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Solid White Lane Line Exception for Continuous Right Turn Lanes
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Solid White Lane Lines|'''Solid White Lane Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Solid White Lane Lines]]
|}
----

== Solid Double White Lane Lines ==
Solid double white lane lines are used to mark where crossing is prohibited or whenever two lanes of traffic, traveling in the same direction, are separated by a painted median. The most common instance of this occurs between a turn lane and a through lane which is separated by a painted island. This normally occurs when an intersection has offset left turn lanes that are separated from the through lanes to give drivers on opposing approaches a less obstructed view of opposing through traffic. They are also used when an intersection is designed for ultimate double left turn lanes, but one lane has been marked out until sometime in the future when it is required based on traffic volumes. The lane line markings shall consist of a 4” wide solid double white lines separated by a 4” space. White 12” chevron should be installed between the two sets of solid double white lane lines. (See [[#White Chevron Markings|White Chevron Markings]]) for more information in regard to spacing.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Double White Lane Lines.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Solid Double White Lane Lines
|}

== White Solid Wide Lane Lines ==
Solid wide channelization lines are used to form islands where traffic traveling in the same direction is permitted on both sides of the island. They should be 8” wide and used to outline around painted or raised medians as follows:

=== At Interchange Ramps ===
Channelizing lines at entrance ramps define the neutral area, directing exiting traffic at the proper angle for smooth divergence onto the ramp. They should be used to outline raised islands or used for painted islands that separate interstate ramp movements from through movements on thoroughfare streets.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Solid Wide Lane Lines Around Island at Ramps.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|White Solid Wide Lane Lines at Interstate Ramp Islands
|}

=== At Free Flow Right Turn Lanes ===
They should also be used to outline the raised medians for free flow right turn lanes on City streets.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Solid Wide Lane Lines Around Islands at Intersections.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|White Solid Wide Lane Lines Around Islands at Intersections
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White Solid Wide Lane Lines|'''White Solid Wide Lane Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White Solid Wide Lane Lines]]
|}
----

== White Edge Lines ==
Edge lines are 4” wide lines that are used to delineate the right or left edges of roadways that have paved or turf shoulders. If they are on the left hand side of the roadway, they shall be yellow. They shall be white if they are on the right hand side of the roadway. Edge lines shall not be continued through intersections or major driveways that consist of turn lanes entering from the major street. But they would extend through minor driveways. They should be placed on rural thoroughfares and collectors with a traveled way of 20’ or more and an average daily traffic (ADT) of 3,000 vehicles per day or greater. If a bicycle lanes is marked on the outside portion of the traveled way, the edge line that would mark the outside edge of the bicycle lane should be omitted.

In the case of turf shoulders, the edge line shall be inset to allow a minimum of 4” from the edge of the asphalt roadway to the edge of the line.

=== Edge Lines on Diverging Diamond Interchanges (DDI’s) ===
Edge lines on diverging diamond interchanges (DDI’s) require clarification. The two directions of travel are separated by either a raised median or bridge rails. This would normally require the edge line separating the two directions of travel to be yellow. However, this violates the rule that yellow lines shall always be on the left hand side of the driver. Therefore, the pavement for the two directions of travel are treated as separate, one-way roadways. Therefore, the edge lines will be yellow on the left side and white on the right side for drivers traveling in each direction.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Edge Lines for DDIs.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Edge Lines for Diverging Diamond Interchanges (DDI's)
|}

=== Edge Lines on Bridges ===
Edge lines should be installed across all bridges, regardless of whether the roadway approaches to the bridge consist of curb and gutter or shoulders. The edge line should be offset from the bridge rail to provide a horizontal buffer space for vehicles and to maintain a constant lane width across the bridge. The solid white edge line across a bridge should be eliminated if a bicycle lane exists. The solid white line on the left side of the bicycle lane will act as the vehicle edge line.

== White Stop Lines ==

Stop lines indicate the point behind which vehicles are required to stop in compliance with a STOP sign. Stop lines may be either 12” wide or 24” wide, and shall be based on the stop sign size as required by the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). If the STOP sign size should be 30”, the stop line should be 12” wide . If the STOP sign size should be 36” or larger, the stop line should be 24” wide. At all-way stop controlled intersections, the stop bars and stop signs shall be the same size on all approach legs and based on the largest sign size required at the intersection according to the MUTCD and Overland Park Stop Sign Guidelines [[Media:Stop sign size flow chart.pdf|flowchart]]. At signalized intersections, the stop line on all approaches should be 24” wide. The following are general guidelines for white stop lines. (Refer to [[#Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage|Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage]]) for specific guidance regarding when to install them.

=== Stop Lines in Conjunction with Crosswalks ===
In general, a stop line should always be installed in advance of a crosswalk on an approach that is controlled by stop sign.

=== Stop Lines for Standard Intersections Without Skew ===
In general, the stop lines should typically be perpendicular to the lane of travel and extend across all lanes as a continuous straight line. Stop lines shall be installed such that they are not located in the vehicle path of left turn movements from the side street approach. This is particularly critical where there is no median separating opposing through lanes. Where raised medians exist, the stop line for the left turn lane should generally be located at the median nose.

The minimum separation from the trailing edge of the stop line to the leading edge of the crosswalk line shall be 4’. If the distance from the crosswalk line or theoretical crosswalk line is greater than 15', consider staggering the stop lines for the through lanes closer to the intersection, to minimize this distance. This occurs when the median nose is pulled back to accommodate left turning vehicles from the side street. Do not stagger the stop line if the distance between the staggered stop line for the left turn lanes and the through lanes would be less than 5’, even if the distance exceeds 15'.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Stop Lines at Intersections without Skew.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Stop Lines at Intersections without Skew
|}

=== Stop Lines for Skewed Intersections ===
In the case of severely skewed intersections, several things should be taken into consideration. The stop line should generally be installed parallel to the crosswalk lines as long as the vehicle position for the farthest right hand lane is closer to the intersection than the left turn vehicle to avoid obscuring the intersection sight distance for right turn vehicles making right turns on red signal indications. Where raised medians exist, the stop line for the left turn lane should generally be located at the median nose. The minimum separation from the trailing edge of the stop line to the leading edge of the crosswalk line shall be 4’. If the distance from the crosswalk line or theoretical crosswalk line is greater than 15', consider staggering the stop lines for the through lanes closer to the intersection, to minimize this distance. This occurs when the median nose is pulled back to accommodate left turning vehicles from the side street. Do not stagger the stop line if the distance between the staggered stop line for the left turn lanes and the through lanes would be less than 5’, even if the distance exceeds 15'. On the other legs, install the stop lines perpendicular to the vehicle path. The distance from the stop line to the crosswalk line for the farthest right vehicle should be 4' minimum. The distance for the remaining lanes is not controlled by a maximum distance.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Stop lines at skewed intersections for sight distance.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Stop Lines at Intersections with Skew
|}

=== Stop Line Location Coordination with Signal Detection Systems ===
When placing stop lines at signalized intersections, care should be taken to determine what method of vehicle detection is being used. If induction loops are currently being used, the stop line should be located such that the first diamond in the loop extends at least half-way past the stop line into the intersection. If video detection or radar detection is currently being used, it is possible to change the detection zones. The engineer should be contacted to determine if a change in the detection zone is required or if a change in the stop line location can be accommodated.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White Stop Lines|'''White Stop Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White Stop Lines]]
|}
----

== White Crosswalk Lines ==
Crosswalk markings provide guidance for pedestrians who are crossing the roadway by defining and delineating paths on approaches to and within signalized intersections, and on approaches to other intersections where traffic stops or yields. Crosswalks help to alert road users of a designated pedestrian crossing point across roadways at locations that are not controlled by traffic control signals or stop or yield signs. At non-intersection locations, crosswalk markings legally establish the crosswalk.

Crosswalk markings are classified as either basic (transverse) or high-visibility. Basic crosswalk markings consist of two transverse lines. High visibility markings, sometimes called a longitudinal bar or a continental crosswalk, consist of longitudinal lines parallel to traffic flow with or without transverse lines. The following are general guidelines for white crosswalk lines. Refer to [[#Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage|Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage]] for specific guidance regarding when to install them.

=== Basic Crosswalk Markings ===
All crosswalk markings in the City of Overland Park will be considered basic crosswalk markings, unless the criteria listed in the table for [[#High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings|high-visibility crosswalk markings]] is met.

Basic crosswalk markings shall consist of two 6" wide white transverse lines extending from curb to curb across the full width of the roadway to be crossed. The gap between the lines should not be less than 6 feet, measured between the inside edges of each of the lines. When the crosswalk extends a 4’ sidewalk through the intersection, the width of the crosswalk should be 6’. When the crosswalk extends a 10’ bike path through the intersection, the width of the crosswalk should be 10’. Where an Overland Park-maintained shared-use path crossses a roadway, crosswalk markings shall be installed.

If crosswalk lines from adjacent legs of the intersection intersect prior to the curb line, a 45 degree angled crosswalk line should be used near the ramp location to maintain a 4’ minimum distance from the back of curb to the angled portion of the crosswalk.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Basic Crosswalk Lines Intersecting at Corner.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Intersection of Adjacent Basic Crosswalk Lines
|}

=== High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings ===
For added visibility at locations that have a significant amount of pedestrian activity, especially within the downtown district of Overland Park; at any midblock or uncontrolled through movement locations; including Pedestrian Hybrid Beacon (aka HAWK signal); at all roundabout crosswalks; or where crashes with pedestrians have occurred, high visibility crosswalk markings should be used instead of the standard crosswalk lines.

At intersections, if one approach warrants a high-visibility crosswalk, any other approach that warrants a crosswalk should also be a high-visibility crosswalk, even if it does not necessarily meet the criteria in the High-Visibility Crosswalk Criteria table shown below.

When the crosswalk extends a 10' shared-use path or trail through an intersection, the width of the crosswalk should be 10'.

When used, the lines should be 24 inches wide and separated by gaps not less than 3’ and not more than 5’ based on the lane width. The design of the lines and gaps should be spaced as evenly as possible across the lanes of vehicle travel and avoid the wheel paths as much as possible. On undivided roadways, the spacing for 12’ and 11’ lanes is shown below.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:High Visibility Crosswalk Detail.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|High-Visibility Crosswalk Detail
|}

On divided roadways, some variation in the gaps between markings is acceptable to accommodate for the width of the median. See the examples below.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:High Visibility Crosswalk on Divided Roadways.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|High Visibility Crosswalk on Divided Roadways
|}

The high-visibility crosswalk markings should generally be placed parallel to the direction of vehicle travel and perpendicular to the travel of the pedestrian. However, at skewed intersections or intersections with irregular entry streets, the configuration of the markings may have to be arranged more aesthetically up to 45 degrees.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:High Visibility Crosswalk At Irregular Intersections.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|High Visibility Crosswalk At Irregular Intersections
|}

The following criteria will be used for marking pedestrian, bicycle, trail, and golf cart crossings which have been approved:
:{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#222 1px solid black; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+'''High-Visibility Crosswalk Criteria'''
| colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;" valign="center"|'''Pedestrian Hybrid Traffic (HAWK) Signal'''
|-
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|Condition
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|Stop Line
|-
| align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|Any 
| align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#00FFFF;"|Yes
|-
| colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;" valign="center"|'''Traffic Signal, Stop or Yield Sign Adjacent to Elementary or Middle School'''
|-
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|Condition
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|Stop Line or Yield Line
|-
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|No Crossing Guard 
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|No1
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|See Specific Criteria
|-
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|Crossing Guard Assigned 
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#7FFFD4;"|See Specific Criteria
|-
| colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;" valign="center"|'''Downtown Overland Park'''
|-
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Condition
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Stop or Yield Line
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Any
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|See Specific Criteria
|-
| colspan="3" align="center" style="background:#90ee90;" valign="center"|'''Mid-Block Crossings or Uncontrolled Through Movements'''
|-
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Condition
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|High-Visibility Crosswalk Markings
! colspan="1" align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yield Line
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Pedestrian or School Crossings2 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|If Multi-Lane Approach
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Trail Crossings3 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|If Multi-Lane Approach
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Golf Cart Crossing 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Roundabouts 
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#90ee90;"|Yes
|}
1Unless an adjacent crosswalk at the same intersection warrants a high-visibility crosswalk. 
2If the posted speed limit is 40 mph or greater at a non-intersection locatoion, the minimum width of the crosswalk shall be 8 feet. 
3Applies to any street classification and does not need to meet volume criteria to be marked or signed. If the posted speed limit is 40 mph or greater at a non-intersection location, the minimum width of the crosswalk shall be 8 feet. 

=== Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage ===
The following table explains when stop lines and crosswalk lines should be installed at intersections. If a street has centerline markings, it should have a stop line.

:{| width="800px" border="1" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" style="border:\#c9c9c9 1px solid darkgray; margin: 1em 1em 1em 0; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+'''Crosswalk and Stop Line Usage Guide'''
! colspan="4" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Intersection Description
! colspan="4" align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|Installation Guidelines
|-
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Approach Street'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Cross Street'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Intersection Control5'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''No. of Lanes on Approach'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Stop Lines'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Crosswalks'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''White Lane Lines'''
! align="center" style="background:#dcdcdc;"|'''Turn Arrows'''
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|> 1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|AWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Any
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Maybe3
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Maybe3
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|> 1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Residential
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|> 1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|> 1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No
|-
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Collector4
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Thoroughfare
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|TWSC
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|> 1
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|No2
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
| align="center" style="background:#b0e0e6;"|Yes
|-
|}
1Do not install stop line unless there is a warranted and marked crosswalk. (See Note 2 below) 
2Do not install crosswalk pavement markings unless there is a warranted crossing determined by a pedestrian study or a shared-use path is present (2023 MUTCD Section 9E.13.05). 
3TWSC = Install lane lines and arrows when there is more than one approach lane 
4The "Collector" designation also includes commercial streets and apartments streets that are 36' wide (Bk-Bk) w/ speed limit 30 mph 
5TWSC = Two-Way Stop Control; AWSC = All-Way Stop Control

=== Signalized Intersections ===
White crosswalk lines are generally installed on every approach at a signalized intersection unless there are no sidewalks or curb ramps on the corners.

=== Roundabout Crosswalk Markings ===
On an approach to a circular intersection controlled by a Yield sign and at uncontrolled exits, crosswalks shall be a minimum of 20 feet from the edge of the circulatory roadway.

=== Mid-block Crosswalks ===
Do not install crosswalk lines unless there is a warranted crossing determined by a pedestrian count or engineering study. The engineering study should consider the number of lanes, the presence of a median, the distance from adjacent signalized intersections, the pedestrian volumes and delays, the average daily traffic (ADT), the posted or statutory speed limit or 85th-percentile speed, the available gaps, the geometry of the location, the possible consolidation of multiple crossing points, the availability of street lighting, and other appropriate factors. If there is a warranted mid-block crossing, install high-visibility crosswalks. If the mid-block crossing is a multi-lane approach, also install yield lines. At non-intersection crosswalks where the posted speed limit is 40 mph or greater, the minimum width of the crosswalk shall be 8'.

=== Crosswalks at City Limits ===
Where crosswalks on city limits are shared with adjacent cities, the city standard with the most visible crosswalks should apply.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White Crosswalk Lines|'''White Crosswalk Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White Crosswalk Lines]]
|}
----

== White Yield Lines ==
Yield lines are used to indicate the point behind which vehicles are required to yield in compliance with a Yield sign, Yield Here To Pedestrians sign or other appropriate sign. Yield lines consist of a row of solid white isosceles triangles pointing toward approaching vehicles extending across approach lanes to indicate the point at which the yield is intended or required to be made. They should be used in advance of mid-block crosswalks, in advance of a crosswalk on approaches controlled by a yield sign, and on approaches to a roundabout.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Yield Line Detail.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Yield Line Detail
|}
=== Yield Lines in Conjunction with Crosswalks ===
In general, a yield line should always be installed in advance of a crosswalk on an approach that is controlled by a yield sign.

=== At Mid-block Crosswalks ===
At a mid-block crosswalk, they should be placed between 20’ and 50’ in advance of the nearest crosswalk line and parking should be prohibited in the area between the yield line and the crosswalk line. The size of the yield line depends on the posted speed limit on the street. For speeds greater or equal to 30 mph, the size should be 24” x 36”. For speeds less than 30 mph, the size should be 12” x 18”. The yield lines should be spaced evenly across all lanes of pavement. Maintain a minimum distance of 12” between adjacent markings and 6” away from lane lines, centerlines and edge of pavement.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Yield Lines on Thoroughfares.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Mid-block Yield Lines on Divided Thoroughfare Streets
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Yield Lines on Collectors.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Mid-block Yield Lines on Collector Streets
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Yield Lines on Residentials.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Mid-block Yield Lines on Residential Streets
|}

=== At Approaches to Roundabouts or Mini Roundabouts ===
At approaches to a roundabout or mini roundabouts, the yield lines should be placed near the 12” wide x 3’ long white dotted extension line of the circulatory roadway edge. There should be a minimum of 20’ beyond the crosswalk line to allow a full vehicle storage length. The yield lines should be 24” x 36” separated by 12” at the base of the triangle.

=== At Approaches to Traffic Calming Circles ===
At approaches to neighborhood traffic circles designed to calm traffic, the yield lines should be placed near the 6” wide x 2’ long white dotted extension line of the circulatory roadway edge. The yield lines should be 12” x 18” separated by 12” at the base of the triangle.

=== In Conjunction with Bicycle Lanes ===
At mid-block crosswalks that pass through bicycle lanes, a yield line should be placed within the bicycle lane, since bicycles are required to obey the same rules of the road as vehicles. For streets with posted speed limits of 30 mph and greater, one yield line shall be placed in the center of the bicycle lane. For streets with posted speed limit less than 30 mph, two yield lines shall be placed in the bicycle lane.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White Yield Lines|'''White Yield Lines''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White Yield Lines]]
|}
----

== White Arrow Symbols ==
Turn arrow markings on the pavement are used for the purpose of guiding, warning, or regulating traffic. They consist of either lane-use assignment arrows, e.g. left turn, right turn, or combination thru/turn arrows, and merge arrows. Lane-use assignment arrows and merge arrows are sized and installed as shown on the standard details.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="left"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Turn Arrow Detail.JPG|250px|]]
|- style="text-align: left"
|Turn Arrow Detail
|}

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Merge Arrow Detail.JPG|250px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Merge Arrow Detail
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="left"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Combination Turn-Straight Arrow Detail.JPG|250px|]]
|- style="text-align: left"
|Combination Turn-Straight Arrow Detail
|}

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Straight Arrow Detail.JPG|250px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Straight Arrow Detail
|}

=== Turn Arrows for Lane Assignments ===
Lane-use assignment arrows should be used in lanes designated for the exclusive use of a turning movement and consist of right or left turn arrows, straight arrows, or combination straight/turn arrows. Turn arrows should be installed in all right or left turn lanes. The first arrow on the up-stream end of the turn bay should be installed such that the tail of the arrow is aligned with the beginning of the solid white lane line. If there are dual turn lanes , the arrows in each adjacent lane should be aligned. In this case, the turn arrows should be positioned based on the shortest turn lane and placed with the tail of the arrow at the beginning of the shortest solid white lane line. The spacing of the remaining arrows should be based on the overall length of the turn bay, according to the table in the standard details. In the case of multiple turn lanes, the spacing should be based on the shortest storage bay length.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Turn Arrow Positioning in Dual Turn Lanes.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Turn Arrow Positioning in Dual Turn Lanes
|}

Combination straight/turn arrows are used when it is allowable to either turn or travel straight through the intersection.

=== Straight Arrows for Lane Assignment ===
Straight arrows should be used in advance of an interchange where the left lane to enter onto the interstate ramp occurs in advance of the previous intersection in an attempt to maximize vehicle storage. The straight arrow is an indication that the lane extends past the previous intersection but will end up in a left turn lane at the interchange.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Straight Arrows for Extended Turn Lanes at Interchanges.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Straight Arrows for Extended Turn Lanes at Interchanges
|}

Straight arrows are also appropriate for through lanes at diverging diamond interchanges (DDI’s) to assist vehicles in negotiating the interchange. In this scenario, the through arrows are not necessarily located at the beginning of the solid white lane line. Instead, they are located near the stop lines and at locations to provide positive guidance to vehicles at the point of divergence from the usual lane positions.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Straight Arrows at DDI Interchanges.jpg|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Straight Arrows at DDI Interchanges
|}

Straight arrows on through approach lanes are typically not used at standard intersections unless it is apparent that driver confusion exists and the installation of a through arrow would help alleviate the problem. For example, if there is only one through lane on the approach but then widens out to include left turn lanes and right turn lanes. In this situation, all lanes have solid white lane lines on each side of them.

=== Lane-Reduction Transition Merge Arrows ===
Lane-reduction transition merge arrows are used where the number of through lanes is reduced because of narrowing of the roadway. This generally occurs where a four-lane divided thoroughfare transitions to a two-lane undivided roadway at the project construction limits. Lane-reduction transition markings are not used for lane drops.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Lane-Reduction Transition Merge Arrows.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Lane-Reduction Transition Merge Arrows
|}

Where the posted speed is 45 mph or greater, the transition length should be L = W x S. For posted speeds less than 45 mph, L = WS2/60. Where S = the posted speed in mph and W = the lane offset in feet. The broken white lane line markings should be discontinued ¼ the distance downstream of the Lane Reduction warning sign based on the requirements of the MUTCD. The first lane-reduction transition merge arrow should be placed at the same location. An additional arrow should be placed 6’ upstream of the beginning of the pavement width transition, measured from the tip of the arrow. Coordination should occur with the roadway engineers to insure the taper lengths are long enough to accommodate the required distances.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White Arrow Symbols|'''White Arrow Symbols''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White Arrow Symbols]]
|}
----

== White ONLY Markings ==
The “ONLY” pavement marking symbol should be used exclusively for trap lanes, where the lane was a through lane at the previous intersection and drivers must now turn left or right because the lane does not continue through. The “ONLY” markings will be spaced alternately with either right or left turn arrows at a distance based on the length of the solid white lane line. See the table in the standard details for arrow and “ONLY” symbol spacing.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:ONLY Marking Detail.JPG|250px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|ONLY Marking Detail
|}

== White Railroad Crossing Markings ==
Pavement markings in advance of a railroad grade crossing shall consist of an “X”, the letters “RR”, no-passing zone markings, transverse lines and dynamic envelope markings as outlined below and according to the standard details. Identical markings shall be placed in each approach lane to grade crossings.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Railroad Crossing Markings.JPG|1000px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Railroad Crossing Markings
|}

=== Railroad Crossing Symbol ===
The railroad crossing symbol shall consist of a white “X” with a white “R” on either side of it. The lines making up the “X” shall be 16” wide. The height of the “X” shall be 20’ tall and 8’ wide, which should encompass both “R” markings. The height of each “R” shall be 6’. The railroad crossing symbol shall be located between the transverse lines as described below.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:RR Xing Detail.JPG|200px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|RR Xing Symbol
|}

=== Railroad Stop Line ===
A 24” wide, white stop line shall be installed across the approach lanes to a railroad grade crossing to indicate the point behind which vehicles might be required to stop. It should be placed at a right angle to the traveled way and should be placed no closer than 15 feet in advance of the nearest rail. For skewed crossings, the nearest rail could be that which is closest to the opposing lane of traffic.

=== Railroad Transverse Lines ===
Two additional 24” wide, white transverse lines shall be placed across each lane on the approach of a railroad grade crossing at both the upstream and downstream side of the railroad crossing symbol. They shall be located 15’ from the leading edge of the transverse line to the bottom of the X, and from the top of the X to the far edge of the transverse line, respectively. The distance from the far edge of one transvers line to the far edge of the other should be 50’.

=== Dynamic Envelope Markings ===
Dynamic envelope markings are 4” white lines placed across all lanes of traffic and parallel to the railroad tracks to define the clearance required for the train and its cargo overhang due to any combination of loading, lateral motion, or suspension failure. They should be placed 6’ from the nearest rail.

== White Chevron Markings ==
White chevron markings are used between two lanes of traffic traveling in the same direction to discourage travel in certain paved areas such as flush medians between double solid white lane lines. The chevrons should be installed with the point of each facing toward approaching traffic and slanting to the left and right away from of approaching vehicles. They should be spaced equal to the posted speed limit, in feet, e.g. 35’ for 35 mph. This spacing should be modified as necessary to have at least two chevrons. If the overall width between the painted lines is less than 6’ or the overall length is less than 20’, the diagonal crosshatch lines should be omitted. (See [[#Solid Double White Lane Lines|Solid Double White Lane Lines]]).

== Diagonal Crosshatch Markings ==
Diagonal crosshatch markings are used to discourage travel on certain paved areas such as flush medians, shoulders, gore areas, between solid double yellow centerline markings or between white channelizing lines. They should be 12” wide and spaced equal to the posted speed limit, in feet, e.g. 35’ for 35 mph. If the overall width of the painted median or hatched out area is less than 4’ or the overall length is less than 20’, the diagonal crosshatch lines should be omitted.

=== Yellow Diagonal Crosshatch Markings ===
Diagonal crosshatch markings shall be yellow when used on the left-hand side of divided roadways and on the left-hand shoulders of one-way streets or ramps. They shall be installed between double solid yellow lines separating traffic traveling in opposing directions or along the center median that separates traffic traveling in opposing direction. The yellow diagonal crosshatch lines should be slanted away from traffic in the adjacent travel lanes from the bottom left to the top right to approaching vehicles.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Yellow Crosshatch Lines.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Yellow Diagonal Crosshatch Lines
|}
 
{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:White Crosshatch Line.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Yellow and White Diagonal Crosshatch Lines
|}

=== White Diagonal Crosshatch Markings ===
White diagonal crosshatch markings shall be installed when traffic lanes are striped out on the right hand side of the roadway. They shall be slanted away from traffic in the adjacent travel lane from the bottom right to the top left to approaching vehicles.

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#White ONLY Markings|'''White ONLY Markings''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=White ONLY Markings]]
|}
----

== Bicycle Markings ==
Bicycle markings indicate the separation of the lanes for road users, assist the bicyclist by indicating assigned travel paths, indicate correct lateral positioning in a shared lane and provide advance information for turning and crossing maneuvers. The various markings for bicycle lanes or shared lanes will consist of bicycle lane symbols and bicycle lane arrows or sharrow markings, respectively.

=== Bicycle Lane Lines ===
Bicycle lanes shall be installed where a separate portion of the roadway is designated for preferential use by bicycles. Bicycle lanes shall be defined with a 4” longitudinal solid white line desirably placed 5’ (4’ minimum) from the edge of the pavement exclusive of a curb and gutter. At intersections, the bicycle lane should always be located between the through lane and right turn lanes or the through lane and left turn lanes. Broken white extension lines shall be used on both sides of the bicycle lane through the transition area of a right turn lane. Once the full width of the right turn lane is developed, there shall be a 4” solid white lane line on each side of the bicycle lane that extends to the stop line.

If a bicycle lane extends across a bridge, omit the standard white edge line which would end up on the right side of the bicycle lane.

Bicycle lanes that are installed in conjunction with trap turn lanes require special treatment combined with the proper lane drop lines. The bicycle lane markings should stop 150’ before the beginning of the trap lane. Through bicycle lane markings should resume to the left of the right turn only lane or to the right of a left turn only lane. See the standard details for more information.

The length of the right or left trap lane storage on one side of the bicycle lane, identified by the 8” solid white lane line, shall extend back from the stop bar exactly 100'. One cycle of “Arrow - ONLY – Arrow” pavement markings shall be placed in the trap turn lane based on the spacing requirements listed in the standard details for a 100' storage length. The 8” solid white lane line will be extended upstream with 48’ of 4” broken white lane extension line; followed by a 54’ area that is unstriped; followed by another 48’ of 4” broken white lane extension line, as indicated in the standard details. The other side of the bicycle lane shall be a solid 4” white lane line extending 250’ upstream from the stop bar. This line will be extended farther upstream by a 3'x9' broken white trap lane line marking. (See [[#Wide Dotted Lane Drop Line|Wide Dotted Lane Drop Line]]) for more information regarding the length of the trap lane line markings.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[file:Bicycle Lane and Trap Lane Markings.jpg|1000px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Bicycle Lane and Trap Lane Markings
|}

Bike lane lines remain solid at commercial driveways and school driveways. Bike lane line shall be cut at public and private streets.

=== Bicycle Lane Symbols ===
A bicycle lane symbol depicts a side view of a bicycle. The symbol adopted by the City of Overland Park is just the symbol of the bicycle and not the bicycle/rider combination and shall be the standard bicycle for both the sharrow and the bicycle lane markings. Do not install bicycle lane markings (bicycle symbol or arrow) if there is an adjacent bike path next to the roadway. Only install the solid 4” white line.
The bicycle symbol will be placed:
* At the beginning of a bicycle lane and at periodic intervals along the bicycle lane based on engineering judgement.
* They are not required after every intersection, but should be placed after each intersection with a thoroughfare or collector roadway.
* They will also be placed on the approach prior to stop controlled or signal controlled intersections.

Where right turn lanes exist, the bicycle lane symbol will be placed across from any turn arrows spaced according to the table in the standard details. If there are no turn lanes, the bottom of the bicycle symbol shall be placed 30’ in advance of the leading edge of the stop line. When it is placed after an intersection, it should be located such that the distance from the beginning of the solid bicycle lane line to the bottom of the symbol is 25’. The bicycle lane symbol shall be 6’ tall and 3’-4” wide.

=== Bicycle Lane Arrows ===
Bicycle lane arrows shall accompany the bicycle lane symbol when it is located in a designated bicycle lane. The straight arrow shall be 2’ wide and 6’ long and placed 6’ after the bicycle lane symbol. Turn arrows shall be 3’-6” wide and 4’-7” long.

=== Bicycle Sharrows ===
Shared lane markings (Sharrows) may be used to assist bicyclists with lateral positioning in a shared lane with on-street parking in order to reduce the chance of a bicyclist’s impacting the open door of a parked vehicle or when lanes are too narrow for side by side travel by a vehicle and bicycle in the same traffic lane. They consist of the bicycle symbol and two white chevron markings placed above. The chevrons should begin 2” below the top of the handle bars and be 3’-6” high, based on the standard details. They should not be placed on roadways that have a posted speed limit above 35 mph.

If used in a shared lane with on-street parallel parking, sharrows should be placed so that the centers of the marking are centered in the driving lane. When parking does not regularly occur, the sharrow marking should be placed such that the centers of the marking are 2’-6” from the gutter lip. If the driving lane is less than 14' wide on a street without parallel parking, the sharrow marking should be at least 2'-6" from the gutter lip or 4' from the edge of pavement where there is no curb. See the [[Media:Sharrow Placement on Collector Streets.pdf|Flowchart for Placing Sharrow Markings on Collector Streets]] for more guidance on where to place sharrow markings. They should be placed after an intersection, 25’ beyond the radius point on the curb return and thereafter between 250’ and 500’ based on engineering judgement.

If the collector street transitions to one through lane in each direction and one left turn lane, use sharrow markings in the three lane section, even if the rest of the street meets the criteria for bicycle lanes.

== Parking Space Markings ==
Parking space markings are used to encourage more orderly and efficient use of parking spaces and identify locations where parking is permitted as well as where parking is prohibited. All parking space lines shall be 4” solid white lines.

=== Perpendicular Parking Space Markings ===
Perpendicular parking space markings shall be oriented 90 degrees to the driving aisle or the curb. Standard parking space lines shall be placed such that the center to center distance is 9’ wide. Any usable gutter area can count toward the width requirements. The depth of the parking space varies.
Accessible perpendicular parking spaces for vehicles shall be 8’ wide with a 5’ access aisle consisting of a 4” wide, white outline with 4” wide, white diagonal crosshatch lines oriented at 30 degrees counter-clockwise to the curb. Van accessible spaces shall be 8’ wide with an 8’ access aisle .

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Perpendicular Parking Space.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Perpendicular Parking Space Markings
|}

=== Angled Parking Space Markings ===
Standard angled parking space markings either make an angle with the curb of 45 or 60 degrees. The perpendicular distance between standard parking space lines shall be 9’, measured from the center of the lines. Any usable gutter area can count toward the width requirements. The depth of the parking space varies.
Accessible angled parking spaces for vehicles shall be 8’ wide with a 5’ access aisle consisting of a 4” wide, white outline with 4” wide, white diagonal crosshatch lines oriented at 60 degrees counter-clockwise to the curb. Van accessible spaces shall be 8’ wide with an 8’ access aisle.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Angled Parking Space Markings.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Angled Parking Space Markings
|}

=== Parallel Parking Space Markings ===
Parallel parking spaces shall be designated with tic marks when parallel parking spaces are provided along a street. They shall be a white “plus” (+) symbol with 4” wide strokes. Each spoke shall be 12”, making the total width and height equal to 28”. At the first designated parking space, the tic mark should only be an inverted “tee” (T) indicating that there is no parking prior to the marking. The last designated parking space should include a “tee” (T) indicating that there is no parking after the marking. The center to center spacing of the parallel parking space tics should desirably be 23’ (21’ minimum). The width of the parallel parking space varies and is dependent on the available street width and the type of curb and gutter that is used.

Accessible parallel parking spaces shall have a 5’ side access aisle extending in toward the sidewalk. The access aisle shall have a 4” wide edge extending along the edge of the access aisle and 4” wide diagonal crosshatch markings at 45 degrees to the curb, placed 3’ apart from center of line to center of line.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Parallel Parking Space Markings.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Parallel Parking Space Markings
|}

=== International Symbol of Accessibility ===
The international symbol of accessibility shall be used in parking spaces that are for accessible parking spaces. It shall be 4’ square with a blue background and a white symbol. In perpendicular or angled parking spaces, the symbol shall be centered and located at the very beginning of of perpendicular or angle parking spaces as indicated in the standard details. In parallel parking spaces, the symbol shall be placed in the center (longitudinally and laterally) of a designated parallel parking space.

=== Electric Vehicle Pump Plug ===
The Electric Vehicle Pump Plug symbol for stalls associated with Electric Vehicle Charging Stations shall be used in parking spaces that are for EVs only. It shall be 4’ square with a black background and a white symbol. In perpendicular or angled parking spaces, the symbol shall be centered and located at the very beginning of of perpendicular or angle parking spaces as indicated in the standard details. In parallel parking spaces, the symbol shall be placed in the center (longitudinally and laterally) of a designated parallel parking space.

== Speed Hump Markings ==
Speed hump markings are a series of white markings placed on a speed hump to identify its location. They will be “V” shaped markings inside a second “V” shape. They shall be 12” in width separated by 12” space. The “V” shaped markings are shown centered in each travel lane on the approach side of the speed hump with the “V” pointing in the direction of traffic flow in the lane. They tip of the largest “V” will be placed at the center of the speed hump. The width of the speed hump markings are 6’ as measured at the base of the triangle.

Advance speed hump markings should be used in advance of speed humps to identify vertical roadway deflections where the deflection is not expected. They shall be a series of eight 12” transverse lines that become longer and are spaced closer together as the vehicle approaches the speed hump. They shall begin 100’ in advance of the leading edge of the speed hump and arranged as indicated in the standard details.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Speed Hump Markings.JPG|600px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Speed Hump Markings
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Bicycle Markings|'''Bicycle Markings''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Bicycle Markings]]
|}
----

== Design Considerations ==
Before initiating the design of a pavement marking plan, the designer should contact the City staff to discuss the specific design criteria for the project and determine the scope. Decisions should be made in regard to the type of pavement and pavement markings that will be used in the design. The following is a brief summary of general design considerations.

=== Coordination with Pavement Joints ===
Offset lane lines a minimum of 6” from asphalt joints when possible. Maintain a minimum of 4” offset from all concrete pavement joints. This should be anticipated at the very beginning when determining the typical sections. Pavement marking lines should be shown and dimensioned on the typical sections.

== Pavement Types and Approved Marking Materials ==

=== Pavement Marking Material and Surface Type Compatibility ===
The type of pavement surface will dictate the type of pavement marking material that should be specified. See the Pavement Marking Material Matrix below and the current standard details.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:Pavement Marking Material Matrix.JPG|800px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|Pavement Marking Material Matrix
|}

== Preparation of Plans ==
The Plans shall be prepared in accordance with the following guidelines unless otherwise pre-approved by the Engineer

=== Scale ===
The preferred plan scale for pavement marking plans is 1” = 40’. Two lines of pavement marking plans may be on the same sheet above and below each other. A scale and north arrow shall be indicated on each sheet.

=== Topography ===
The only topography required for pavement marking plans are finished curb lines, including storm sewer inlets, median curb lines, drive entrances, sidewalks, bike trails, pavement limits and bridge limits. Also, include existing roadway limits at each end where the proposed pavement will tie in. If the mill and overlay of existing pavements is included, the existing curb and median lines should also be shown in those areas beyond the widening. If existing markings are being tied into at a match line, they should be surveyed and shown on the plans.
If streetlighting is provided with the project, it is beneficial to show the symbol of the pole location so traffic control signs can be shown to be mounted on them, if applicable.
A centerline shall be shown with stationing for the main roadway as well as the side streets to be able to positively locate the beginning and end of pavement marking lines. Street names shall be shown for major and minor streets.

New construction items should be subdued so the proposed pavement markings, lane width callouts, signing station and offsets, etc. stand out.

=== Plan Submittals ===
There should be a minimum of three plan submittals for every pavement marking project. Plans should be submitted at the Preliminary, Field Check and Final plan stage. An additional plan submittal may be required after the first final plan stage depending on how accurate the first submittal is.

==== Preliminary Plans ====
Enough work on the pavement marking plans should be completed such that the general lane layout is evident. The lines can be continuous instead of the final format just to help identify any glaring geometric issues that could be evident early on in the project design. Typical lane widths should be shown when it differs from the typical sections or at transition points.

==== Field Check Plans ====
Field check plans should show the location of all pavement markings, as they will be installed. The plans shall show callouts for the various types of lines and lane widths, etc. It is not required to show stationing for the beginning and end of pavement marking lines at this plan stage, nor is it required to have quantities calculated. However, standard details shall be included.
Signing plans should also be incorporated into the pavement marking plans at this stage of design. All sign faces shall be shown with the MUTCD callout and size shall be shown oriented in the direction of travel.

==== Final Plans ====
All final pavement markings with stationing for the beginning and end of lines shall be included in the final plans, along with final signing plans with station and offsets for all sign locations. All sign faces shall be shown with the MUTCD callout and size shall be shown oriented in the direction of travel.
All construction notes to clarify any construction details shall be shown. All Standard Details, including the completed Bill of Materials and the Pavement Marking Bid Item table shall be included at this stage.
Depending on the number of comments made on the first submittal of final plans, a second set of final plans may be requested to verify that all comments have been addressed. The project manager will make that determination and convey his decision to the appropriate design staff.

== Computation of Quantities ==
The computation of quantities is critical to providing accurate information to the contractors bidding the project. Errors in the computation of quantities results in project cost change orders and delays in the project. Care should be taken to check quantities against the plan sheet design to verify that all items are included and accurate. What follows are some general guidelines that should be used such that the computation of quantities is consistent for all designs.

=== Longitudinal and transverse lines ===
All longitudinal and transvers lines will be measured by the linear foot for the various materials used. The lines will be measured continuous from the beginning station to the end station. The pavement marking bill of materials includes multipliers for various line types that will be applied from the “start” to “end” length.

=== Symbols ===
All symbols, including turn arrows, thru arrows, “ONLY” markings, yield lines, merge arrows, bike lane symbol, sharrows, RR crossing symbols, etc. shall be measured per each, for the various materials used.

== Temporary Raised Pavement Markers ==
Temporary Raised Pavement Markers (TRPMs) are used during chip seal pavement restoration operations. The existing thermoplastic, pre-formed thermoplastic, and patterned cold plastic pavement markings are ground off the roadway so the emulsion and layer of chips will bond to the roadway. TRPMs will be installed that meet the full requirements for substitution of the markings according to the MUTCD.
The color of the TRPMs shall be the same color of the markings for which they substitute. The number and spacing of TRPMs is different for various line types. The discussion below discusses the value of N, which is equivalent to the length of one line segment plus one gap. Overland Park uses a 6’ line segment with an 18’ gap. Therefore, N = 6 + 18 = 24.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:TRPM Value of N.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|TRPM Value of N
|}

=== Substitute for Broken Lane Lines ===
A group of at least three TRPMs shall be equally spaced at no greater than N/8 = (24/8) or 3’ spacing. Therefore, TRPMs will be located at each end of the broken lane line segment and one in the middle.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:TRPM Spacing Broken Line.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|TRPM Spacing for Broken Line
|}

=== Substitute for Solid Lane Lines ===
In the case of solid lines, the TRPMs shall be equally spaced at no greater than N/4 (24/4) or 6’ spacing. The value of N is the same as that referenced for the broken lines that might be adjacent to or might extend the solid lines.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:TRPM Spacing Solid Line.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|TRPM Spacing for Solid Line
|}

=== Substitute for other Broken Lines ===
TRPMs may be used to substitute for other broken line segments that are shorter than 6’ by using at least one placed at the center of line segments of 2 to 3 feet in length.

=== Substitute for Double Solid Lane Lines ===
For solid double lines, TRPMs can be used as a substitute as long as two markers are placed side by side, with a horizontal separation that is equivalent to the spacing between the double lines. This would be equivalent to a 4” separation in Overland Park. The TRPMs shall be equally spaced at no greater than N/4 (24/4) or 6’ spacing.

{| style="border-spacing: 2px; border: 1px solid black;" align="center"
|- border="0"
| [[File:TRPM Spacing Wide Line.JPG|400px|]]
|- style="text-align: center"
|TRPM Spacing for Wide or Double Line
|}

----
{| width="800px" border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0"; border-collapse: collapse;"
|+
|align="left" width="30px"|[[File:Up arrow 66x80.png|50px|link=#top]]
| align="left"|[[#top|'''Top''']]
| align="right"|[[#Design Considerations|'''Design Considerations''']]
| align="right" width="30px"|[[File:Side arrow 80x66.png|50px|right|link=Design Considerations]]
|}
----

Approved Materials - Streetlighting

2026-02-02T18:40:51Z

Brian Geiger: /* LED Lamps */ Removed the Philips LED Lamp due to water infiltration at the lumen selector switch located on the top of the corncob which shorted the internals.

Approved Materials - Pavement Marking

2026-02-02T18:03:03Z

Brian Geiger: /* Waterborne Paint */ Ozark was Purchased by Ingevity in Oct 2022.

Approved Materials - Pavement Marking

2026-02-02T18:02:45Z

Brian Geiger: /* Thermoplastic */ Ozark was Purchased by Ingevity in Oct 2022.